以下、本発明の実施形態について、添付図面を参照して説明する。まず、図１から図８８を参照し、第１実施形態として、本発明をパチンコ遊技機（以下、単に「パチンコ機」という）１０に適用した場合の一実施形態について説明する。図１は、第１実施形態におけるパチンコ機１０の正面図であり、図２はパチンコ機１０の遊技盤１３の正面図であり、図３はパチンコ機１０の背面図である。
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 88, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.
図１に示すように、パチンコ機１０は、略矩形状に組み合わせた木枠により外殻が形成される外枠１１と、その外枠１１と略同一の外形形状に形成され外枠１１に対して開閉可能に支持された内枠１２とを備えている。外枠１１には、内枠１２を支持するために正面視（図１参照）左側の上下２カ所に金属製のヒンジ１８が取り付けられ、そのヒンジ１８が設けられた側を開閉の軸として内枠１２が正面手前側へ開閉可能に支持されている。
As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.
内枠１２には、多数の釘や入賞口６３，６４等を有する遊技盤１３（図２参照）が裏面側から着脱可能に装着される。この遊技盤１３の前面を球（遊技球）が流下することにより弾球遊技が行われる。なお、内枠１２には、球を遊技盤１３の前面領域に発射する球発射ユニット１１２ａ（図４参照）やその球発射ユニット１１２ａから発射された球を遊技盤１３の前面領域まで誘導する発射レール（図示せず）等が取り付けられている。
A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.
内枠１２の前面側には、その前面上側を覆う前面枠１４と、その下側を覆う下皿ユニット１５とが設けられている。前面枠１４及び下皿ユニット１５を支持するために正面視（図１参照）左側の上下２カ所に金属製のヒンジ１９が取り付けられ、そのヒンジ１９が設けられた側を開閉の軸として前面枠１４及び下皿ユニット１５が正面手前側へ開閉可能に支持されている。なお、内枠１２の施錠と前面枠１４の施錠とは、シリンダ錠２０の鍵穴２１に専用の鍵を差し込んで所定の操作を行うことでそれぞれ解除される。
On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.
前面枠１４は、装飾用の樹脂部品や電気部品等を組み付けたものであり、その略中央部には略楕円形状に開口形成された窓部１４ｃが設けられている。前面枠１４の裏面側には２枚の板ガラスを有するガラスユニット１６が配設され、そのガラスユニット１６を介して遊技盤１３の前面がパチンコ機１０の正面側に視認可能となっている。
The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.
前面枠１４には、球を貯留する上皿１７が前方へ張り出して上面を開放した略箱状に形成されており、この上皿１７に賞球や貸出球などが排出される。上皿１７の底面は正面視（図１参照）右側に下降傾斜して形成され、その傾斜により上皿１７に投入された球が球発射ユニット１１２ａ（図４参照）へと案内される。また、上皿１７の上面には、枠ボタン２２が設けられている。この枠ボタン２２は、例えば、第３図柄表示装置８１（図２参照）で表示される演出のステージを変更したり、スーパーリーチの演出内容を変更したりする場合などに、遊技者により操作される。
On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The
前面枠１４には、その周囲（例えばコーナー部分）に各種ランプ等の発光手段が設けられている。これら発光手段は、大当たり時や所定のリーチ時等における遊技状態の変化に応じて、点灯又は点滅することにより発光態様が変更制御され、遊技中の演出効果を高める役割を果たす。窓部１４ｃの周縁には、ＬＥＤ等の発光手段を内蔵した電飾部２９〜３３が設けられている。パチンコ機１０においては、これら電飾部２９〜３３が大当たりランプ等の演出ランプとして機能し、大当たり時やリーチ演出時等には内蔵するＬＥＤの点灯や点滅によって各電飾部２９〜３３が点灯または点滅して、大当たり中である旨、或いは大当たり一歩手前のリーチ中である旨が報知される。また、前面枠１４の正面視（図１参照）左上部には、ＬＥＤ等の発光手段が内蔵され賞球の払い出し中とエラー発生時とを表示可能な表示ランプ３４が設けられている。
The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.
また、右側の電飾部３２下側には、前面枠１４の裏面側を視認できるように裏面側より透明樹脂を取り付けて小窓３５が形成され、遊技盤１３前面の貼着スペースＫ１（図２参照）に貼付される証紙等がパチンコ機１０の前面から視認可能とされている。また、パチンコ機１０においては、より煌びやかさを醸し出すために、電飾部２９〜３３の周りの領域にクロムメッキを施したＡＢＳ樹脂製のメッキ部材３６が取り付けられている。
In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.
窓部１４ｃの下方には、貸球操作部４０が配設されている。貸球操作部４０には、度数表示部４１と、球貸しボタン４２と、返却ボタン４３とが設けられている。パチンコ機１０の側方に配置されるカードユニット（球貸しユニット）（図示せず）に紙幣やカード等を投入した状態で貸球操作部４０が操作されると、その操作に応じて球の貸出が行われる。具体的には、度数表示部４１はカード等の残額情報が表示される領域であり、内蔵されたＬＥＤが点灯して残額情報として残額が数字で表示される。球貸しボタン４２は、カード等（記録媒体）に記録された情報に基づいて貸出球を得るために操作されるものであり、カード等に残額が存在する限りにおいて貸出球が上皿１７に供給される。返却ボタン４３は、カードユニットに挿入されたカード等の返却を求める際に操作される。なお、カードユニットを介さずに球貸し装置等から上皿１７に球が直接貸し出されるパチンコ機、いわゆる現金機では貸球操作部４０が不要となるが、この場合には、貸球操作部４０の設置部分に飾りシール等を付加して部品構成は共通のものとしても良い。カードユニットを用いたパチンコ機と現金機との共通化を図ることができる。
A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.
上皿１７の下側に位置する下皿ユニット１５には、その左側に上皿１７に貯留しきれなかった球を貯留するための下皿５０が上面を開放した略箱状に形成されている。下皿５０の右側には、球を遊技盤１３の前面へ打ち込むために遊技者によって操作される操作ハンドル５１が配設される。
In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with the upper surface opened. . On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.
操作ハンドル５１の内部には、球発射ユニット１１２ａの駆動を許可するためのタッチセンサ５１ａと、押下操作している期間中には球の発射を停止する発射停止スイッチ５１ｂと、操作ハンドル５１の回動操作量（回動位置）を電気抵抗の変化により検出する可変抵抗器（図示せず）などが内蔵されている。操作ハンドル５１が遊技者によって右回りに回動操作されると、タッチセンサ５１ａがオンされると共に可変抵抗器の抵抗値が回動操作量に対応して変化し、その可変抵抗器の抵抗値に対応した強さ（発射強度）で球が発射され、これにより遊技者の操作に対応した飛び量で遊技盤１３の前面へ球が打ち込まれる。また、操作ハンドル５１が遊技者により操作されていない状態においては、タッチセンサ５１ａおよび発射停止スイッチ５１ｂがオフとなっている。
Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.
下皿５０の正面下方部には、下皿５０に貯留された球を下方へ排出する際に操作するための球抜きレバー５２が設けられている。この球抜きレバー５２は、常時、正面方向に付勢されており、その付勢に抗して背面方向へスライドさせることにより、下皿５０の底面に形成された底面口が開口して、その底面口から球が自然落下して排出される。この球抜きレバー５４ｂの操作は、通常、下皿５０の下方に下皿５０から排出された球を受け取る箱（一般に「千両箱」と称される）を置いた状態で行われる。
In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the front direction, and by sliding it in the back direction against the urging, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball pulling lever 54b is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.
図２に示すように、遊技盤１３は、正面視略正方形状に切削加工したベース板６０に、球案内用の多数の釘（図示せず）や風車の他、レール６１，６２、一般入賞口６３、第１入賞口６４、第２入賞口６４０、可変入賞装置６５、スルーゲート６７、可変表示装置ユニット８０等を組み付けて構成され、その周縁部が内枠１２（図１参照）の裏面側に取り付けられる。ベース板６０は光透過性の樹脂材料からなり、その正面側からベース板６０の背面側に配設された各種構造体を遊技者に視認させることが可能に形成される。一般入賞口６３、第１入賞口６４、第２入賞口６４０、可変入賞装置６５、可変表示装置ユニット８０は、ルータ加工によってベース板６０に形成された貫通穴に配設され、遊技盤１３の前面側からタッピングネジ等により固定されている。
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and general prizes. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side with a tapping screw or the like.
遊技盤１３の前面中央部分は、前面枠１４の窓部１４ｃ（図１参照）を通じて内枠１２の前面側から視認することができる。以下に、主に図２を参照して、遊技盤１３の構成について説明する。
The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.
遊技盤１３の前面には、帯状の金属板を略円弧状に屈曲加工して形成した外レール６２が植立され、その外レール６２の内側位置には外レール６２と同様に帯状の金属板で形成した円弧状の内レール６１が植立される。この内レール６１と外レール６２とにより遊技盤１３の前面外周が囲まれ、遊技盤１３とガラスユニット１６（図１参照）とにより前後が囲まれることにより、遊技盤１３の前面には、球の挙動により遊技が行われる遊技領域が形成される。遊技領域は、遊技盤１３の前面であって２本のレール６１，６２とレール間を繋ぐ樹脂製の外縁部材７３とにより区画して形成される領域（入賞口等が配設され、発射された球が流下する領域）である。
An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).
２本のレール６１，６２は、球発射ユニット１１２ａ（図４参照）から発射された球を遊技盤１３上部へ案内するために設けられたものである。内レール６１の先端部分（図２の左上部）には戻り球防止部材６８が取り付けられ、一旦、遊技盤１３の上部へ案内された球が再度球案内通路内に戻ってしまうといった事態が防止される。外レール６２の先端部（図２の右上部）には、球の最大飛翔部分に対応する位置に返しゴム６９が取り付けられ、所定以上の勢いで発射された球は、返しゴム６９に当たって、勢いが減衰されつつ中央部側へ跳ね返される。
The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.
遊技領域の正面視左側下部（図２の左側下部）には、発光手段である複数のＬＥＤ及び７セグメント表示器を備える第１図柄表示装置３７Ａ，３７Ｂが配設されている。第１図柄表示装置３７Ａ，３７Ｂは、主制御装置１１０（図４参照）で行われる各制御に応じた表示がなされるものであり、主にパチンコ機１０の遊技状態の表示が行われる。本実施形態では、第１図柄表示装置３７Ａ，３７Ｂは、球が、第１入賞口６４へ入賞したか、第２入賞口６４０へ入賞したかに応じて使い分けられるように構成されている。具体的には、球が、第１入賞口６４へ入賞した場合には、第１図柄表示装置３７Ａが作動し、一方で、球が、第２入賞口６４０へ入賞した場合には、第１図柄表示装置３７Ｂが作動するように構成されている。
First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.
また、第１図柄表示装置３７Ａ，３７Ｂは、ＬＥＤにより、パチンコ機１０が確変中か時短中か通常中であるかを点灯状態により示したり、変動中であるか否かを点灯状態により示したり、停止図柄が確変大当たりに対応した図柄か普通大当たりに対応した図柄か外れ図柄であるかを点灯状態により示したり、保留球数を点灯状態により示すと共に、７セグメント表示装置により、大当たり中のラウンド数やエラー表示を行う。なお、複数のＬＥＤは、それぞれのＬＥＤの発光色（例えば、赤、緑、青）が異なるよう構成され、その発光色の組み合わせにより、少ないＬＥＤでパチンコ機１０の各種遊技状態を示唆することができる。
In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.
尚、本パチンコ機１０では、第１入賞口６４及び第２入賞口６４０へ入賞があったことを契機として抽選が行われる。パチンコ機１０は、その抽選において、大当たりか否かの当否判定（大当たり抽選）を行うと共に、大当たりと判定した場合はその大当たり種別の判定も行う。ここで判定される大当たり種別としては、１５Ｒ確変大当たり、４Ｒ確変大当たり、１５Ｒ通常大当たりが用意されている。第１図柄表示装置３７Ａ，３７Ｂには、変動終了後の停止図柄として抽選の結果が大当たりであるか否かが示されるだけでなく、大当たりである場合はその大当たり種別に応じた図柄が示される。
In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .
ここで、「１５Ｒ確変大当たり」とは、最大ラウンド数が１５ラウンドの大当たりの後に高確率状態へ移行する確変大当たりのことであり、「４Ｒ確変大当たり」とは、最大ラウンド数が４ラウンドの大当たりの後に高確率状態へ移行する確変大当たりのことである。また、「１５Ｒ通常大当たり」は、最大ラウンド数が１５ラウンドの大当たりの後に、低確率状態へ移行すると共に、所定の変動回数の間（例えば、１００変動回数）は時短状態となる大当たりのことである。
Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.
また、「高確率状態」とは、大当たり終了後に付加価値としてその後の大当たり確率がアップした状態、いわゆる確率変動中（確変中）の時をいい、換言すれば、特別遊技状態へ移行し易い遊技の状態のことである。本実施形態における高確率状態（確変中）は、後述する第２図柄の当たり確率がアップして第２入賞口６４０へ球が入賞し易い遊技の状態を含む。「低確率状態」とは、確変中でない時をいい、大当たり確率が通常の状態、即ち、確変の時より大当たり確率が低い状態をいう。また、「低確率状態」のうちの時短状態（時短中）とは、大当たり確率が通常の状態であると共に、大当たり確率がそのままで第２図柄の当たり確率のみがアップして第２入賞口６４０へ球が入賞し易い遊技の状態のことをいう。一方、パチンコ機１０が通常中とは、確変中でも時短中でもない遊技の状態（大当たり確率も第２図柄の当たり確率もアップしていない状態）である。
In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.
確変中や時短中は、第２図柄の当たり確率がアップするだけではなく、第２入賞口６４０に付随する電動役物６４０ａが開放される時間も変更され、通常中と比して長い時間が設定される。電動役物６４０ａが開放された状態（開放状態）にある場合は、その電動役物６４０ａが閉鎖された状態（閉鎖状態）にある場合と比して、第２入賞口６４０へ球が入賞しやすい状態となる。よって、確変中や時短中は、第２入賞口６４０へ球が入賞し易い状態となり、大当たり抽選が行われる回数を増やすことができる。
During probability change and time reduction, not only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, but also the time that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 is opened is changed, which is longer time than normal Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.
なお、確変中や時短中において、第２入賞口６４０に付随する電動役物６４０ａの開放時間を変更するのではなく、または、その開放時間を変更することに加えて、１回の当たりで電動役物６４０ａが開放する回数を通常中よりも増やす変更を行うものとしてもよい。また、確変中や時短中において、第２図柄の当たり確率は変更せず、第２入賞口６４０に付随する電動役物６４０ａが開放される時間および１回の当たりで電動役物６４０ａが開放する回数の少なくとも一方を変更するものとしてもよい。また、確変中や時短中において、第２入賞口６４０に付随する電動役物６４０ａが開放される時間や、１回の当たりで電動役物６４０ａを開放する回数はせず、第２図柄の当たり確率だけを、通常中と比してアップするよう変更するものであってもよい。
In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.
遊技領域には、球が入賞することにより５個から１５個の球が賞球として払い出される複数の一般入賞口６３が配設されている。また、遊技領域の中央部分には、可変表示装置ユニット８０が配設されている。可変表示装置ユニット８０には、第１入賞口６４及び第２入賞口６４０への入賞（始動入賞）をトリガとして、第１図柄表示装置３７Ａ，３７Ｂにおける変動表示と同期させながら、第３図柄の変動表示を行う液晶ディスプレイ（以下単に「表示装置」と略す）で構成された第３図柄表示装置８１と、スルーゲート６７の球の通過をトリガとして第２図柄を変動表示するＬＥＤで構成される第２図柄表示装置（図示せず）とが設けられている。
The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.
また、可変表示装置ユニット８０には、第３図柄表示装置８１の外周を囲むようにして、センターフレーム８６が配設されている。このセンターフレーム８６の中央に開口される開口部から第３図柄表示装置８１が視認可能とされる。
The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.
第３図柄表示装置８１は９インチサイズの大型の液晶ディスプレイで構成されるものであり、表示制御装置１１４（図４参照）によって表示内容が制御されることにより、例えば上、中及び下の３つの図柄列が表示される。各図柄列は複数の図柄（第３図柄）によって構成され、これらの第３図柄が図柄列毎に横スクロールして第３図柄表示装置８１の表示画面上にて第３図柄が可変表示されるようになっている。本実施形態の第３図柄表示装置８１は、主制御装置１１０（図４参照）の制御に伴った遊技状態の表示が第１図柄表示装置３７Ａ，３７Ｂで行われるのに対して、その第１図柄表示装置３７Ａ，３７Ｂの表示に応じた装飾的な表示を行うものである。なお、表示装置に代えて、例えばリール等を用いて第３図柄表示装置８１を構成するようにしても良い。
The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.
第２図柄表示装置は、球がスルーゲート６７を通過する毎に表示図柄（第２図柄（図示せず））としての「○」の図柄と「×」の図柄とを所定時間交互に点灯させる変動表示を行うものである。パチンコ機１０では、球がスルーゲート６７を通過したことが検出されると、当たり抽選が行われる。その当たり抽選の結果、当たりであれば、第２図柄表示装置において、第２図柄の変動表示後に「○」の図柄が停止表示される。また、当たり抽選の結果、外れであれば、第２図柄表示装置において、第３図柄の変動表示後に「×」の図柄が停止表示される。
Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.
パチンコ機１０は、第２図柄表示装置における変動表示が所定図柄（本実施形態においては「○」の図柄）で停止した場合に、第２入賞口６４０に付随された電動役物６４０ａが所定時間だけ作動状態となる（開放される）よう構成されている。
In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.
第２図柄の変動表示にかかる時間は、遊技状態が通常中の場合よりも、確変中または時短中の方が短くなるように設定される。これにより、確変中および時短中は、第２図柄の変動表示が短い時間で行われるので、当たり抽選を通常中よりも多く行うことができる。よって、当たり抽選において当たりとなる機会が増えるので、第２入賞口６４０の電動役物６４０ａが開放状態となる機会を遊技者に多く与えることができる。よって、確変中および時短中は、第２入賞口６４０へ球が入賞しやすい状態とすることができる。
The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.
なお、確変中または時短中において、当たり確率を高める、１回に当たりに対する電動役物６４０ａの開放時間や開放回数を増やすなど、その他の方法によっても、確変中または時短中に第２入賞口６４０へ球が入賞しやすい状態としている場合は、第２図柄の変動表示にかかる時間を遊技状態にかかわらず一定としてもよい。一方、第２図柄の変動表示にかかる時間を、確変中または時短中において通常中よりも短く設定する場合は、当たり確率を遊技状態にかかわらず一定にしてもよいし、また、１回の当たりに対する電動役物６４０ａの開放時間や開放回数を遊技状態にかかわらず一定にしてもよい。
It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.
スルーゲート６７は、可変表示装置ユニット８０の下側の領域における右方において遊技盤に組み付けられ、遊技盤に発射された球のうち、遊技盤の右方を流下する球の一部が通過可能に構成されている。スルーゲート６７を球が通過すると、第２図柄の当たり抽選が行われる。当たり抽選の後、第２図柄表示装置にて変動表示を行い、当たり抽選の結果が当たりであれば、変動表示の停止図柄として「○」の図柄を表示し、当たり抽選の結果が外れであれば、変動表示の停止図柄として「×」の図柄を表示する。
The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the ball flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. It is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.
球のスルーゲート６７の通過回数は、合計で最大４回まで保留され、その保留球数が上述した第１図柄表示装置３７Ａ，３７Ｂにより表示されると共に第２図柄保留ランプ（図示せず）においても点灯表示される。第２図柄保留ランプは、最大保留数分の４つ設けられ、第３図柄表示装置８１の下方に左右対称に配設されている。
The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.
なお、第２図柄の変動表示は、本実施形態のように、第２図柄表示装置において複数のランプの点灯と非点灯を切り換えることにより行うものの他、第１図柄表示装置３７Ａ，３７Ｂ及び第３図柄表示装置８１の一部を使用して行うようにしても良い。同様に、第２図柄保留ランプの点灯を第３図柄表示装置８１の一部で行うようにしても良い。また、スルーゲート６７の球の通過に対する最大保留球数は４回に限定されるものでなく、３回以下、又は、５回以上の回数（例えば、８回）に設定しても良い。また、スルーゲート６７の組み付け数は１つに限定されるものではなく、複数（例えば、２つ）であっても良い。また、スルーゲート６７の組み付け位置は可変表示装置ユニット８０の右方に限定されるものではなく、例えば、可変表示装置ユニット８０の左方でも良い。また、第１図柄表示装置３７Ａ，３７Ｂにより保留球数が示されるので、第２図柄保留ランプにより点灯表示を行わないものとしてもよい。
Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.
可変表示装置ユニット８０の下方には、球が入賞し得る第１入賞口６４が配設されている。この第１入賞口６４へ球が入賞すると遊技盤１３の裏面側に設けられる第１入賞口スイッチ（図示せず）がオンとなり、その第１入賞口スイッチのオンに起因して主制御装置１１０（図４参照）で大当たりの抽選がなされ、その抽選結果に応じた表示が第１図柄表示装置３７Ａで示される。
Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.
一方、第１入賞口６４の正面視右方には、球が入賞し得る第２入賞口６４０が配設されている。この第２入賞口６４０へ球が入賞すると遊技盤１３の裏面側に設けられる第２入賞口スイッチ（図示せず）がオンとなり、その第２入賞口スイッチのオンに起因して主制御装置１１０（図４参照）で大当たりの抽選がなされ、その抽選結果に応じた表示が第１図柄表示装置３７Ｂで示される。
On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.
また、第１入賞口６４および第２入賞口６４０は、それぞれ、球が入賞すると５個の球が賞球として払い出される入賞口の１つにもなっている。なお、本実施形態においては、第１入賞口６４へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数と第２入賞口６４０へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数とを同じに構成したが、第１入賞口６４へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数と第２入賞口６４０へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数とを異なる数、例えば、第１入賞口６４へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数を３個とし、第２入賞口６４０へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数を５個として構成してもよい。
Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.
第２入賞口６４０には電動役物６４０ａが付随されている。この電動役物６４０ａは開閉可能に構成されており、通常は電動役物６４０ａが閉鎖状態（張出し状態）となって、球が第２入賞口６４０へ入賞しにくい状態となっている。一方、スルーゲート６７への球の通過を契機として行われる第２図柄の変動表示の結果、「○」の図柄が第２図柄表示装置に表示された場合、電動役物６４０ａが開放状態（引込み状態）となり、球が第２入賞口６４０へ入賞しやすい状態となる。
The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric combination 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric combination 640a is in a closed state (an overhanging state), and the ball is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “○” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (retracted). State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.
上述した通り、確変中および時短中は、通常中と比して第２図柄の当たり確率が高く、また、第２図柄の変動表示にかかる時間も短いので、第２図柄の変動表示において「○」の図柄が表示され易くなって、電動役物６４０ａが開放状態（引込み状態）となる回数が増える。更に、確変中および時短中は、電動役物６４０ａが開放される時間も、通常中より長くなる。よって、確変中および時短中は、通常時と比して、第２入賞口６４０へ球が入賞しやすい状態を作ることができる。
As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (retracted) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.
ここで、第１入賞口６４に球が入賞した場合と第２入賞口６４０へ球が入賞した場合とで、大当たりとなる確率は、低確率状態であっても高確率状態でも同一である。しかしながら、大当たりとなった場合に選定される大当たりの種別として１５Ｒ確変大当たりとなる確率は、第２入賞口６４０へ球が入賞した場合のほうが第１入賞口６４へ球が入賞した場合よりも高く設定されている。一方、第１入賞口６４は、第２入賞口６４０にあるような電動役物は有しておらず、球が常時入賞可能な状態となっている。
Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win.
よって、通常中においては、第２入賞口６４０に付随する電動役物が閉鎖状態にある場合が多く、第２入賞口６４０に入賞しづらいので、電動役物のない第１入賞口６４へ向けて、可変表示装置ユニット８０の左方を球が通過するように球を発射し（所謂「左打ち」）、第１入賞口６４への入賞によって大当たり抽選の機会を多く得て、大当たりとなることを狙った方が、遊技者にとって有利となる。
Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, resulting in a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.
一方、確変中や時短中は、スルーゲート６７に球を通過させることで、第２入賞口６４０に付随する電動役物６４０ａが開放状態となりやすく、第２入賞口６４０に入賞しやすい状態であるので、第２入賞口６４０へ向けて、可変表示装置ユニット８０の右方を球が通過するように球を発射し（所謂「右打ち」）、スルーゲート６７を通過させて電動役物を開放状態にすると共に、第２入賞口６４０への入賞によって１５Ｒ確変大当たりとなることを狙った方が、遊技者にとって有利となる。
On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state and to easily win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the through gate 67 to release the electric accessory. It is advantageous for the player to set the state and aim to win the 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.
このように、本実施形態のパチンコ機１０は、パチンコ機１０の遊技状態（確変中であるか、時短中であるか、通常中であるか）に応じて、遊技者に対し、球の発射の仕方を「左打ち」と「右打ち」とに変えさせることができる。よって、遊技者に対して、球の打ち方に変化をもたらすことができるので、遊技を楽しませることができる。
As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.
第１入賞口６４の右側には可変入賞装置６５が配設されており、その略中央部分に横長矩形状の特定入賞口（大開放口）６５ａが設けられている。パチンコ機１０においては、第１入賞口６４又は第２入賞口６４０への入賞に起因して行われた大当たり抽選が大当たりとなると、所定時間（変動時間）が経過した後に、大当たりの停止図柄となるよう第１図柄表示装置３７Ａ又は第１図柄表示装置３７Ｂを点灯させると共に、その大当たりに対応した停止図柄を第３図柄表示装置８１に表示させて、大当たりの発生が示される。その後、球が入賞し易い特別遊技状態（大当たり）に遊技状態が遷移する。この特別遊技状態として、通常時には閉鎖されている特定入賞口６５ａが、所定時間（例えば、３０秒経過するまで、或いは、球が１０個入賞するまで）開放される。
A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).
この特定入賞口６５ａは、所定時間が経過すると閉鎖され、その閉鎖後、再度、その特定入賞口６５ａが所定時間開放される。この特定入賞口６５ａの開閉動作は、最高で例えば１５回（１５ラウンド）繰り返し可能にされている。この開閉動作が行われている状態が、遊技者にとって有利な特別遊技状態の一形態であり、遊技者には、遊技上の価値（遊技価値）の付与として通常時より多量の賞球の払い出しが行われる。
The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.
可変入賞装置６５は、具体的には、特定入賞口６５ａを覆う横長矩形状の開閉板と、その開閉板の下辺を軸として前方側に開閉駆動するための大開放口ソレノイド（図示せず）とを備えている。特定入賞口６５ａは、通常時は、球が入賞できないか又は入賞し難い閉状態になっている。大当たりの際には大開放口ソレノイドを駆動して開閉板を前面下側に傾倒し、球が特定入賞口６５ａに入賞しやすい開状態を一時的に形成し、その開状態と通常時の閉状態との状態を交互に繰り返すように作動する。
Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.
第１入賞口６４の左上には第２可変入賞装置８２ａが配設され、その近傍に第２特定入賞口８２が設けられている。通常は第２可変入賞装置８２ａが閉鎖状態（縮小状態）となって、球が第２特定入賞口８２へと入賞できないようになっている。一方、特定の大当たり（例えば、１５Ｒ確変大当たり）の際に第２可変入賞装置が開放する（拡大状態となる）ことで、球が第２特定入賞口８２に入賞しやすい特別遊技状態とすることができる。
A second variable winning device 82a is disposed at the upper left of the first winning port 64, and a second specific winning port 82 is provided in the vicinity thereof. Normally, the second variable winning device 82a is in a closed state (reduced state) so that the ball cannot enter the second specific winning port 82. On the other hand, when the second variable winning device is opened (in an expanded state) at the time of a specific jackpot (for example, 15R probability variable jackpot), the special gaming state where the ball is likely to win the second specific winning slot 82 is made. Can do.
なお、上記した形態に特別遊技状態は限定されるものではない。特定入賞口６５ａとは別に開閉される大開放口を遊技領域に設け、第１図柄表示装置３７Ａ，３７Ｂにおいて大当たりに対応したＬＥＤが点灯した場合に、特定入賞口６５ａが所定時間開放され、その特定入賞口６５ａの開放中に、球が特定入賞口６５ａ内へ入賞することを契機として特定入賞口６５ａとは別に設けられた大開放口が所定時間、所定回数開放される遊技状態を特別遊技状態として形成するようにしても良い。また、特定入賞口６５ａは１つに限るものではなく、１つ若しくは２以上の複数（例えば３つ）配置しても良く、また配置位置も第１入賞口６４の上方右側に限らず、例えば、可変表示装置ユニット８０の左方でも良い。
Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64. The variable display device unit 80 may be on the left side.
遊技盤１３の下側における右隅部には、証紙や識別ラベル等を貼着するための貼着スペースＫ１が設けられ、貼着スペースＫ１に貼られた証紙等は、前面枠１４の小窓３５（図１参照）を通じて視認することができる。
A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).
遊技盤１３には、第１アウト口７１が設けられている。遊技領域を流下する球であって、いずれの入賞口６３，６４，６５ａ，６４０，にも入賞しなかった球は、第１アウト口７１を通って図示しない球排出路へと案内される。第１アウト口７１は、第１入賞口６４の下方に配設される。
The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.
遊技盤１３には、球の落下方向を適宜分散、調整等するために多数の釘が植設されているとともに、風車等の各種部材（役物）とが配設されている。
A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.
図３に示すように、パチンコ機１０の背面側には、制御基板ユニット９０，９１と、裏パックユニット９４とが主に備えられている。制御基板ユニット９０は、主基板（主制御装置１１０）と音声ランプ制御基板（音声ランプ制御装置１１３）と表示制御基板（表示制御装置１１４）とが搭載されてユニット化されている。制御基板ユニット９１は、払出制御基板（払出制御装置１１１）と発射制御基板（発射制御装置１１２）と電源基板（電源装置１１５）とカードユニット接続基板１１６とが搭載されてユニット化されている。
As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.
裏パックユニット９４は、保護カバー部を形成する裏パック９２と払出ユニット９３とがユニット化されている。また、各制御基板には、各制御を司る１チップマイコンとしてのＭＰＵ、各種機器との連絡をとるポート、各種抽選の際に用いられる乱数発生器、時間計数や同期を図る場合などに使用されるクロックパルス発生回路等が、必要に応じて搭載されている。
The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.
なお、主制御装置１１０、音声ランプ制御装置１１３及び表示制御装置１１４、払出制御装置１１１及び発射制御装置１１２、電源装置１１５、カードユニット接続基板１１６は、それぞれ基板ボックス１００〜１０４に収納されている。基板ボックス１００〜１０４は、ボックスベースと該ボックスベースの開口部を覆うボックスカバーとを備えており、そのボックスベースとボックスカバーとが互いに連結されて、各制御装置や各基板が収納される。
The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.
また、基板ボックス１００（主制御装置１１０）及び基板ボックス１０２（払出制御装置１１１及び発射制御装置１１２）は、ボックスベースとボックスカバーとを封印ユニット（図示せず）によって開封不能に連結（かしめ構造による連結）している。また、ボックスベースとボックスカバーとの連結部には、ボックスベースとボックスカバーとに亘って封印シール（図示せず）が貼着されている。この封印シールは、脆性な素材で構成されており、基板ボックス１００，１０２を開封するために封印シールを剥がそうとしたり、基板ボックス１００，１０２を無理に開封しようとすると、ボックスベース側とボックスカバー側とに切断される。よって、封印ユニット又は封印シールを確認することで、基板ボックス１００，１０２が開封されたかどうかを知ることができる。
Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.
払出ユニット９３は、裏パックユニット９４の最上部に位置して上方に開口したタンク１３０と、タンク１３０の下方に連結され下流側に向けて緩やかに傾斜するタンクレール１３１と、タンクレール１３１の下流側に縦向きに連結されるケースレール１３２と、ケースレール１３２の最下流部に設けられ、払出モータ２１６（図４参照）の所定の電気的構成により球の払出を行う払出装置１３３とを備えている。タンク１３０には、遊技ホールの島設備から供給される球が逐次補給され、払出装置１３３により必要個数の球の払い出しが適宜行われる。タンクレール１３１には、当該タンクレール１３１に振動を付加するためのバイブレータ１３４が取り付けられている。
The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.
また、払出制御装置１１１には状態復帰スイッチ１２０が設けられ、発射制御装置１１２には可変抵抗器の操作つまみ１２１が設けられ、電源装置１１５にはＲＡＭ消去スイッチ１２２が設けられている。状態復帰スイッチ１２０は、例えば、払出モータ２１６（図４参照）部の球詰まり等、払出エラーの発生時に球詰まりを解消（正常状態への復帰）するために操作される。操作つまみ１２１は、発射ソレノイドの発射力を調整するために操作される。ＲＡＭ消去スイッチ１２２は、パチンコ機１０を初期状態に戻したい場合に電源投入時に操作される。
The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.
次に、図４を参照して、本パチンコ機１０の電気的構成について説明する。図４は、パチンコ機１０の電気的構成を示すブロック図である。
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.
主制御装置１１０には、演算装置である１チップマイコンとしてのＭＰＵ２０１が搭載されている。ＭＰＵ２０１には、該ＭＰＵ２０１により実行される各種の制御プログラムや固定値データを記憶したＲＯＭ２０２と、そのＲＯＭ２０２内に記憶される制御プログラムの実行に際して各種のデータ等を一時的に記憶するためのメモリであるＲＡＭ２０３と、そのほか、割込回路やタイマ回路、データ送受信回路などの各種回路が内蔵されている。主制御装置１１０では、ＭＰＵ２０１によって、大当たり抽選や第１図柄表示装置３７Ａ，３７Ｂ及び第３図柄表示装置８１における表示の設定、第２図柄表示装置における表示結果の抽選といったパチンコ機１０の主要な処理を実行する。
The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.
なお、払出制御装置１１１や音声ランプ制御装置１１３などのサブ制御装置に対して動作を指示するために、主制御装置１１０から該サブ制御装置へ各種のコマンドがデータ送受信回路によって送信されるが、かかるコマンドは、主制御装置１１０からサブ制御装置へ一方向にのみ送信される。
Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.
ＲＡＭ２０３は、各種エリア、カウンタ、フラグのほか、ＭＰＵ２０１の内部レジスタの内容やＭＰＵ２０１により実行される制御プログラムの戻り先番地などが記憶されるスタックエリアと、各種のフラグおよびカウンタ、Ｉ／Ｏ等の値が記憶される作業エリア（作業領域）とを有している。なお、ＲＡＭ２０３は、パチンコ機１０の電源の遮断後においても電源装置１１５からバックアップ電圧が供給されてデータを保持（バックアップ）できる構成となっており、ＲＡＭ２０３に記憶されるデータは、すべてバックアップされる。
The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .
停電などの発生により電源が遮断されると、その電源遮断時（停電発生時を含む。以下同様）のスタックポインタや、各レジスタの値がＲＡＭ２０３に記憶される。一方、電源投入時（停電解消による電源投入を含む。以下同様）には、ＲＡＭ２０３に記憶される情報に基づいて、パチンコ機１０の状態が電源遮断前の状態に復帰される。ＲＡＭ２０３への書き込みはメイン処理（図示せず）によって電源遮断時に実行され、ＲＡＭ２０３に書き込まれた各値の復帰は電源投入時の立ち上げ処理（図示せず）において実行される。なお、ＭＰＵ２０１のＮＭＩ端子（ノンマスカブル割込端子）には、停電等の発生による電源遮断時に、停電監視回路２５２からの停電信号ＳＧ１が入力されるように構成されており、その停電信号ＳＧ１がＭＰＵ２０１へ入力されると、停電時処理としてのＮＭＩ割込処理（図示せず）が即座に実行される。
When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.
主制御装置１１０のＭＰＵ２０１には、アドレスバス及びデータバスで構成されるバスライン２０４を介して入出力ポート２０５が接続されている。入出力ポート２０５には、払出制御装置１１１、音声ランプ制御装置１１３、第１図柄表示装置３７Ａ，３７Ｂ、第２図柄表示装置、第２図柄保留ランプ、特定入賞口６５ａの開閉板の下辺を軸として前方側に開閉駆動するための大開放口ソレノイドや電動役物を駆動するためのソレノイドなどからなるソレノイド２０９が接続され、ＭＰＵ２０１は、入出力ポート２０５を介してこれらに対し各種コマンドや制御信号を送信する。
An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.
また、入出力ポート２０５には、図示しないスイッチ群およびスライド位置検出センサＳや回転位置検出センサＲを含むセンサ群などからなる各種スイッチ２０８、電源装置１１５に設けられた後述のＲＡＭ消去スイッチ回路２５３が接続され、ＭＰＵ２０１は各種スイッチ２０８から出力される信号や、ＲＡＭ消去スイッチ回路２５３より出力されるＲＡＭ消去信号ＳＧ２に基づいて各種処理を実行する。
The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.
払出制御装置１１１は、払出モータ２１６を駆動させて賞球や貸出球の払出制御を行うものである。演算装置であるＭＰＵ２１１は、そのＭＰＵ２１１により実行される制御プログラムや固定値データ等を記憶したＲＯＭ２１２と、ワークメモリ等として使用されるＲＡＭ２１３とを有している。
The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.
払出制御装置１１１のＲＡＭ２１３は、主制御装置１１０のＲＡＭ２０３と同様に、ＭＰＵ２１１の内部レジスタの内容やＭＰＵ２１１により実行される制御プログラムの戻り先番地などが記憶されるスタックエリアと、各種のフラグおよびカウンタ、Ｉ／Ｏ等の値が記憶される作業エリア（作業領域）とを有している。ＲＡＭ２１３は、パチンコ機１０の電源の遮断後においても電源装置１１５からバックアップ電圧が供給されてデータを保持（バックアップ）できる構成となっており、ＲＡＭ２１３に記憶されるデータは、すべてバックアップされる。なお、主制御装置１１０のＭＰＵ２０１と同様、ＭＰＵ２１１のＮＭＩ端子にも、停電等の発生による電源遮断時に停電監視回路２５２から停電信号ＳＧ１が入力されるように構成されており、その停電信号ＳＧ１がＭＰＵ２１１へ入力されると、停電時処理としてのＮＭＩ割込処理（図示せず）が即座に実行される。
The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.
払出制御装置１１１のＭＰＵ２１１には、アドレスバス及びデータバスで構成されるバスライン２１４を介して入出力ポート２１５が接続されている。入出力ポート２１５には、主制御装置１１０や払出モータ２１６、発射制御装置１１２などがそれぞれ接続されている。また、図示はしないが、払出制御装置１１１には、払い出された賞球を検出するための賞球検出スイッチが接続されている。なお、該賞球検出スイッチは、払出制御装置１１１に接続されるが、主制御装置１１０には接続されていない。
An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.
発射制御装置１１２は、主制御装置１１０により球の発射の指示がなされた場合に、操作ハンドル５１の回動操作量に応じた球の打ち出し強さとなるよう球発射ユニット１１２ａを制御するものである。球発射ユニット１１２ａは、図示しない発射ソレノイドおよび電磁石を備えており、その発射ソレノイドおよび電磁石は、所定条件が整っている場合に駆動が許可される。具体的には、遊技者が操作ハンドル５１に触れていることをタッチセンサ５１ａにより検出し、球の発射を停止させるための発射停止スイッチ５１ｂがオフ（操作されていないこと）を条件に、操作ハンドル５１の回動操作量（回動位置）に対応して発射ソレノイドが励磁され、操作ハンドル５１の操作量に応じた強さで球が発射される。
The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.
音声ランプ制御装置１１３は、音声出力装置（図示しないスピーカなど）２２６における音声の出力、ランプ表示装置（電飾部２９〜３３、表示ランプ３４など）２２７における点灯および消灯の出力、変動演出（変動表示）や予告演出といった表示制御装置１１４で行われる第３図柄表示装置８１の表示態様の設定などを制御するものである。演算装置であるＭＰＵ２２１は、そのＭＰＵ２２１により実行される制御プログラムや固定値データ等を記憶したＲＯＭ２２２と、ワークメモリ等として使用されるＲＡＭ２２３とを有している。
The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.
音声ランプ制御装置１１３のＭＰＵ２２１には、アドレスバス及びデータバスで構成されるバスライン２２４を介して入出力ポート２２５が接続されている。入出力ポート２２５には、主制御装置１１０、表示制御装置１１４、音声出力装置２２６、ランプ表示装置２２７、その他装置２２８、枠ボタン２２などがそれぞれ接続されている。
An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.
音声ランプ制御装置１１３は、主制御装置１１０から受信した各種のコマンド（変動パターンコマンド、停止種別コマンド等）に基づいて、第３図柄表示装置８１の表示態様を決定し、決定した表示態様をコマンド（表示用変動パターンコマンド、表示用停止種別コマンド等）によって表示制御装置１１４へ通知する。また、音声ランプ制御装置１１３は、枠ボタン２２からの入力を監視し、遊技者によって枠ボタン２２が操作された場合は、第３図柄表示装置８１で表示されるステージを変更したり、スーパーリーチ時の演出内容を変更したりするように、表示制御装置１１４へ指示する。ステージが変更される場合は、変更後のステージに応じた背面画像を第３図柄表示装置８１に表示させるべく、変更後のステージに関する情報を含めた背面画像変更コマンドを表示制御装置１１４へ送信する。ここで、背面画像とは、第３図柄表示装置８１に表示させる主要な画像である第３図柄の背面側に表示される画像のことである。表示制御装置１１４は、この音声ランプ制御装置１１３から送信されるコマンドに従って、第３図柄表示装置８１に各種の画像を表示する。
The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.
また、音声ランプ制御装置１１３は、表示制御装置１１４から第３図柄表示装置８１の表示内容を表すコマンド（表示コマンド）を受信する。音声ランプ制御装置１１３では、表示制御装置１１４から受信した表示コマンドに基づき、第３図柄表示装置８１の表示内容に合わせて、その表示内容に対応する音声を音声出力装置２２６から出力し、また、その表示内容に対応させてランプ表示装置２２７の点灯および消灯を制御する。
Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.
表示制御装置１１４は、音声ランプ制御装置１１３及び第３図柄表示装置８１が接続され、音声ランプ制御装置１１３より受信したコマンドに基づいて、第３図柄表示装置８１における第３図柄の変動演出などの表示を制御するものである。また、表示制御装置１１４は、第３図柄表示装置８１の表示内容を通知する表示コマンドを適宜音声ランプ制御装置１１３へ送信する。音声ランプ制御装置１１３は、この表示コマンドによって示される表示内容にあわせて音声出力装置２２６から音声を出力することで、第３図柄表示装置８１の表示と音声出力装置２２６からの音声出力とをあわせることができる。
The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.
電源装置１１５は、パチンコ機１０の各部に電源を供給するための電源部２５１と、停電等による電源遮断を監視する停電監視回路２５２と、ＲＡＭ消去スイッチ１２２（図３参照）が設けられたＲＡＭ消去スイッチ回路２５３とを有している。電源部２５１は、図示しない電源経路を通じて、各制御装置１１０〜１１４等に対して各々に必要な動作電圧を供給する装置である。その概要としては、電源部２５１は、外部より供給される交流２４ボルトの電圧を取り込み、各種スイッチ２０８などの各種スイッチや、ソレノイド２０９などのソレノイド、モータ等を駆動するための１２ボルトの電圧、ロジック用の５ボルトの電圧、ＲＡＭバックアップ用のバックアップ電圧などを生成し、これら１２ボルトの電圧、５ボルトの電圧及びバックアップ電圧を各制御装置１１０〜１１４等に対して必要な電圧を供給する。
The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.
停電監視回路２５２は、停電等の発生による電源遮断時に、主制御装置１１０のＭＰＵ２０１及び払出制御装置１１１のＭＰＵ２１１の各ＮＭＩ端子へ停電信号ＳＧ１を出力するための回路である。停電監視回路２５２は、電源部２５１から出力される最大電圧である直流安定２４ボルトの電圧を監視し、この電圧が２２ボルト未満になった場合に停電（電源断、電源遮断）の発生と判断して、停電信号ＳＧ１を主制御装置１１０及び払出制御装置１１１へ出力する。停電信号ＳＧ１の出力によって、主制御装置１１０及び払出制御装置１１１は、停電の発生を認識し、ＮＭＩ割込処理を実行する。なお、電源部２５１は、直流安定２４ボルトの電圧が２２ボルト未満になった後においても、ＮＭＩ割込処理の実行に充分な時間の間、制御系の駆動電圧である５ボルトの電圧の出力を正常値に維持するように構成されている。よって、主制御装置１１０及び払出制御装置１１１は、ＮＭＩ割込処理（図示せず）を正常に実行し完了することができる。
The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).
ＲＡＭ消去スイッチ回路２５３は、ＲＡＭ消去スイッチ１２２（図３参照）が押下された場合に、主制御装置１１０へ、バックアップデータをクリアさせるためのＲＡＭ消去信号ＳＧ２を出力するための回路である。主制御装置１１０は、パチンコ機１０の電源投入時に、ＲＡＭ消去信号ＳＧ２を入力した場合に、バックアップデータをクリアすると共に、払出制御装置１１１においてバックアップデータをクリアさせるための払出初期化コマンドを払出制御装置１１１に対して送信する。
The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.
次いで、図５から図１０を参照して、動作ユニット２００の概略構成について説明する。図５は、動作ユニット２００の分解正面斜視図であり、図６は、遊技盤１３及び動作ユニット２００の正面斜視図である。また、図７は、動作ユニット２００の正面斜視図であり、図８から図１０は、動作ユニット２００の正面図である。
Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 8 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200.
なお、図６及び図７では、液晶昇降ユニット４００が下降位置に配置された状態が、図９では、液晶昇降ユニット４００の第２通路形成部材４２２と左揺動ユニット５００の第１通路形成部材５２０とが連結された状態が、図１０では、液晶昇降ユニット６００が上昇位置に配置された状態が、それぞれ図示される。また、図６から図１０では、上部昇降ユニット３００が上昇位置に配置された状態が図示される。
6 and 7, the state where the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position is shown in FIG. 9. In FIG. 9, the second path forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 and the first path forming member of the left swinging unit 500. FIG. 10 illustrates a state in which the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 600 is disposed at the raised position. 6 to 10 show a state in which the upper elevating unit 300 is disposed at the raised position.
図５から図１０に示すように、動作ユニット２００は、箱状に形成される背面ケース２１０を備え、その背面ケース２１０の内部空間に、上部昇降ユニット３００、液晶昇降ユニット４００、左揺動ユニット５００、回転ユニット６００及び発光装飾部材７００がそれぞれ収容される。
As shown in FIGS. 5 to 10, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 210 formed in a box shape, and an upper elevating unit 300, a liquid crystal elevating unit 400, and a left swing unit are provided in the inner space of the rear case 210. 500, the rotation unit 600, and the light emitting decorative member 700 are accommodated.
背面ケース２１０は、正面視略矩形の底壁部２１１と、その底壁部２１１の４辺の外縁から正面へ向けて立設される外壁部２１２とを備え、これら各壁部２１１，２１２により一面側が開放された箱状に形成される。背面ケース２１０の底壁部２１１には、その中央に正面性略円形の凹部が凹設され、その凹部に回転ユニット６００が収納される。液晶昇降ユニット４００は、回転ユニット６００の正面側に配設され、上部昇降ユニット３００、左揺動ユニット５００及び装飾発光部材７００は、液晶昇降ユニット４００の上側縁部、左側縁部および下側縁部にそれぞれ配設される。
The back case 210 includes a bottom wall portion 211 having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 211 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side open. The bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210 is provided with a concave portion having a frontal substantially circular shape at the center thereof, and the rotating unit 600 is accommodated in the concave portion. The liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is disposed on the front side of the rotating unit 600, and the upper lifting / lowering unit 300, the left swing unit 500 and the decorative light emitting member 700 are the upper edge, left side edge and lower side edge of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400. It is arranged in each part.
上部昇降ユニット３００は、複数（本実施形態では４個）が幅方向（図８左右方向）に並設される昇降体３３０を備え、それら昇降体３３０がそれぞれ独立して高さ方向（図８上下方向）に昇降可能に形成される（図１２及び図１３参照）。液晶昇降ユニット４００が下降位置に配置された状態では、昇降体３３０が上昇位置に配置されると、第３図柄表示装置８１のほぼ全面が視認可能とされる一方（図８参照）、昇降体３３０が下降位置に配置されると（図１２参照）、かかる昇降体３３０により第３図柄表示装置８１の一部が視認不能とされる。
The upper lifting unit 300 includes a lifting body 330 in which a plurality (four in this embodiment) are juxtaposed in the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 8), and these lifting bodies 330 are independently in the height direction (FIG. 8). It is formed to be movable up and down (refer to FIGS. 12 and 13). In the state where the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position, when the lifting / lowering body 330 is disposed at the raised position, almost the entire surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized (see FIG. 8). When 330 is placed in the lowered position (see FIG. 12), a part of the third symbol display device 81 is made invisible by the elevating body 330.
液晶昇降ユニット４００は、軸を上下方向に沿わせた縦姿勢で配設されると共に幅方向に所定間隔を隔てて配設される一対の案内棒４５１と、その案内棒４５１に幅方向両端がスライド変位可能に支持される駆動側スライド部材４２０及び従動側スライド部材４３０と、駆動側スライド部材４２０を昇降駆動する駆動モータ４４１とを備え、その駆動モータ４４１により駆動側スライド部材４２０が昇降駆動されることで、従動側スライド部材４３０が従動して昇降される。
The liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is arranged in a vertical posture with its axis along the vertical direction and a pair of guide rods 451 arranged at a predetermined interval in the width direction, and both ends in the width direction of the guide rod 451 are arranged. A drive side slide member 420 and a driven side slide member 430 supported so as to be slidable are provided, and a drive motor 441 that drives the drive side slide member 420 to move up and down. The drive motor 441 drives the drive side slide member 420 up and down. As a result, the driven-side slide member 430 is moved up and down.
即ち、駆動側スライド部材４２０が上昇される際には、かかる駆動側スライド部材４２０が従動側スライド部材４３０を重力の作用に抗しつつ上方へ押し上げる一方、駆動側スライド部材４２０が下降される際には、その駆動側スライド部材４２０の下降に伴い、従動側スライド部材４３０が自重により下降される。
That is, when the drive side slide member 420 is raised, the drive side slide member 420 pushes the driven side slide member 430 upward against the action of gravity, while the drive side slide member 420 is lowered. As the drive side slide member 420 is lowered, the driven side slide member 430 is lowered by its own weight.
なお、駆動側スライド部材４２０には、第２通路形成部材４２２が配設され、従動側スライド部材４３０には、第３図柄表示装置８１が配設される。駆動側スライド部材４２０が、上昇位置および下降位置の間の連結位置に配置されると、第２通路形成部材４２２が左揺動ユニット５００の第１通路形成部材５２０と連結可能とされる（図９参照）。また、駆動側スライド部材４２０が、上昇位置に配置されると、第３図柄表示装置８１の上方領域が上部昇降ユニット３００の背面側に配置される（図１０参照）。
The driving side slide member 420 is provided with a second passage forming member 422, and the driven side slide member 430 is provided with a third symbol display device 81. When the drive-side slide member 420 is disposed at the connecting position between the raised position and the lowered position, the second passage forming member 422 can be connected to the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 (see FIG. 9). Further, when the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the raised position, the upper region of the third symbol display device 81 is disposed on the back side of the upper lift unit 300 (see FIG. 10).
左揺動ユニット５００は、基端側を中心として先端側を上下させる方向へ揺動される第１通路形成部材５２０を備える。第１通路形成部材５２０は、先端側を持ち上げる方向へ揺動されると、連結位置に配置され（図９参照）、先端側が液晶昇降ユニット４００の第２通路形成部材４２２に連結される一方、先端側を振り下げる方向へ揺動されると、解除位置に配置され（図１０参照）、液晶昇降ユニット４００の第２通路形成部材４２２との連結が解除される。
The left swing unit 500 includes a first passage forming member 520 that is swung in a direction in which the distal end side is moved up and down around the base end side. When the first passage forming member 520 is swung in the direction of lifting the tip end side, the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the connecting position (see FIG. 9), and the tip end side is connected to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400, When it is swung in the direction in which the tip side is swung down, it is disposed at the release position (see FIG. 10), and the connection with the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is released.
遊技領域を流下する球は、左揺動ユニット５００内へ流入可能とされ、左揺動ユニット５００は、第１通路形成部材５２０が連結位置に配置された状態では（図９参照）、流入された球を、第１通路形成部材５２０を介して、液晶昇降ユニット４００の第２通路形成部材４２２へ送球する一方、第１通路形成部材５２０が解除位置に配置された状態では（図１０参照）、流入された球を、第１通路形成部材５２０とは別に設けられた後述する通路を介して、遊技領域へ送球する。
The sphere flowing down the game area can flow into the left swing unit 500, and the left swing unit 500 flows in when the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 9). The ball is sent to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 via the first passage forming member 520, while the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position (see FIG. 10). Then, the ball that has flowed in is sent to the game area through a passage, which will be described later, provided separately from the first passage formation member 520.
回転ユニット６００は、ルーレットを模して構成される演出装置である。即ち、回転可能に形成されるホイール（回転盤）に相当する部材（回転部材６４０）と、そのホイールを周方向に区画して形成され赤または黒の色が付されると共にそれぞれ異なる数字が表示されるポケットに相当する部分（表示板６４６及び区画板６４７）とを備え、ホイールの内周側の装置（投球装置６５０）から投球された球Ｂが、複数のポケットに相当する部分のうちのいずれかに落下するように形成される。
The rotation unit 600 is an effect device configured to simulate a roulette. In other words, a member (rotating member 640) corresponding to a wheel (rotary disk) formed to be rotatable, and the wheel is formed by dividing the wheel in the circumferential direction, and a red or black color is given and a different number is displayed. A portion corresponding to the pocket (display plate 646 and partition plate 647), and the ball B thrown from the device (throwing device 650) on the inner peripheral side of the wheel is a portion of the portion corresponding to the plurality of pockets It is formed to fall on either.
液晶昇降ユニット４００が下降位置に配置された状態では（図８参照）、回転ユニット６００のほぼ全体が液晶昇降ユニット４００によって遊技者から視認不能に遮蔽される一方、液晶昇降ユニット４００が連結位置に配置された状態では（図９参照）、ホイールに相当する部材の一部（下方部分）が露出されると共に、液晶昇降ユニット４００が上昇位置に配置された状態では（図１０参照）、ホイールに相当する部材の一部（下方部分）に加え、ホイールに相当する部材の内周側に保持されている球Ｂ及びその球Ｂが投球されてからポケットに相当する部分に落下するまでの経路が露出され、これらが遊技者から視認可能とされる。
In a state where the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position (see FIG. 8), almost the entire rotating unit 600 is shielded from being visible to the player by the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400, while the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is at the connected position. In the disposed state (see FIG. 9), a part of the member corresponding to the wheel (lower part) is exposed, and in the state in which the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is disposed in the raised position (see FIG. 10), In addition to a part (lower part) of the corresponding member, there is a path from the ball B held on the inner peripheral side of the member corresponding to the wheel to the part corresponding to the pocket after the ball B is thrown. These are exposed and are visible to the player.
発光装飾部材７００は、光透過性の材料から形成されるケース体と、そのケース体の内部に配設される複数のＬＥＤとを備え、ＬＥＤから発光する光の態様（例えば、発光するＬＥＤの数や発光時間）を変更することで、発光による演出を行う。
The light emitting decoration member 700 includes a case body formed of a light-transmitting material and a plurality of LEDs disposed in the case body, and a mode of light emitted from the LEDs (for example, an LED of a light emitting LED). By changing the number and the light emission time, an effect by light emission is performed.
また、遊技盤１３のセンターフレーム８６には、中央に開口される開口部の右側内縁に、光を照射する基板部材とその基板部材８５０から照射される光を内部に入射して発光する導光部材８１０，８２０とを備えた発光ユニット８００が配設される。
Further, the center frame 86 of the game board 13 has a light guide that emits light by being incident on the board member that emits light and light emitted from the board member 850 on the right inner edge of the opening that opens in the center. A light emitting unit 800 including members 810 and 820 is disposed.
図１１は、上部昇降ユニット３００の正面斜視図であり、図１２及び図１３は、上部昇降ユニット３００の正面図である。なお、図１１及び図１２では、幅方向（図１２左右方向）に並設される全ての昇降体３３０が上昇位置に配置された状態が図示され、図１３では、全ての昇降体３３０が下降位置に配置された状態が図示される。
FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the upper lifting unit 300, and FIGS. 12 and 13 are front views of the upper lifting unit 300. 11 and 12 show a state in which all the lifting bodies 330 arranged in parallel in the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 12) are arranged at the raised position, and in FIG. 13, all the lifting bodies 330 are lowered. The state of being placed in position is shown.
図１１から図１３に示すように、上部昇降ユニット３００は、横長矩形板形状のベース部材３１０の幅方向に昇降体３３０が複数（本実施形態では４個）配設され、各昇降体３３０が上昇位置（図１２参照）と下降位置（図１３参照）との間を昇降移動可能に構成される。次いで、図１４及び図１５を参照して、各昇降体３３０の駆動機構の構成について説明する。
As shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, the upper elevating unit 300 includes a plurality of elevating bodies 330 (four in the present embodiment) arranged in the width direction of the horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped base member 310, and each elevating body 330 is configured as follows. It is configured to be movable up and down between an ascending position (see FIG. 12) and a descending position (see FIG. 13). Next, with reference to FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, the configuration of the drive mechanism of each lifting body 330 will be described.
図１４は、上部昇降ユニット３００の正面分解斜視図であり、図１５は、上部昇降ユニット３００の背面分解斜視図である。
FIG. 14 is a front exploded perspective view of the upper lift unit 300, and FIG. 15 is a rear exploded perspective view of the upper lift unit 300.
図１４及び図１５に図示されるように、上部昇降ユニット３００は、横長矩形板形状のベース部材３１０と、そのベース部材３１０との間に伝達装置３５０を収容する空間を設けながらベース部材３１０の背面側に締結固定される背面カバー３２０と、ベース部材３１０及び背面カバー３２０の間にラック３３２が収容されると共に円形の演出部３３１がベース部材３１０の正面側に配置される昇降体３３０と、背面カバー３２０に締結固定され昇降体の昇降動作に必要な駆動力を発生させる駆動装置３４０と、その駆動装置３４０が発生する駆動力を昇降体３３０に伝達させる伝達装置３５０と、を主に備える。
As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the upper elevating unit 300 includes a base member 310 having a horizontally long rectangular plate shape and a space for housing the transmission device 350 between the base member 310 and the base member 310. A back cover 320 fastened and fixed to the back side, a lifting body 330 in which a rack 332 is accommodated between the base member 310 and the back cover 320 and a circular effect portion 331 is disposed on the front side of the base member 310; A driving device 340 that is fastened and fixed to the back cover 320 and generates a driving force necessary for the lifting operation of the lifting body, and a transmission device 350 that transmits the driving force generated by the driving device 340 to the lifting body 330 are mainly provided. .
ベース部材３１０は、下端に円の中心が配置される半円形状で正面側側面から背面側へ向けて凹設される半円凹設部３１１と、背面側側面から昇降体３３０のラック３３２の左右方向に若干隙間を空けた位置へ向かってリブ状に凸設される案内リブ部３１２と、を備える。
The base member 310 has a semicircular shape in which the center of a circle is disposed at the lower end and is recessed from the front side surface toward the back side, and the rack 332 of the lifting body 330 from the back side surface. And a guide rib portion 312 protruding in a rib shape toward a position with a slight gap in the left-right direction.
半円凹設部３１１は、昇降体３３０の演出部３３１の外径よりも若干大きな半径で構成され、その半円凹設部３１１の円の中心と、演出部３３１の中心とが鉛直線状で一致する位置に配置される。これにより、演出部３３１が上昇移動する際に、ベース部材３１０の正面側において半円凹設部３１１と干渉する位置の手前まで移動することが可能となり、ベース部材３１０の上下幅は確保しつつ、演出部３３１の上昇移動幅も大きく確保することができる。
The semicircular recessed portion 311 is configured with a radius slightly larger than the outer diameter of the effect portion 331 of the elevating body 330, and the center of the circle of the semicircular recessed portion 311 and the center of the effect portion 331 are vertically linear. Are placed at the matching positions. Thereby, when the effect part 331 moves upward, it can be moved to a position just before the position where it interferes with the semicircular recessed part 311 on the front side of the base member 310, and the vertical width of the base member 310 is secured. In addition, the ascending movement width of the effect section 331 can be ensured to be large.
案内リブ部３１２は、鉛直方向に延びるリブ状の部分であって、組立状態（図１１参照）において、昇降体３３０のラック３３２の左右側面と当接可能な位置まで凸設される。これにより、昇降体３３０が昇降移動中に左右方向に移動する（並行移動や傾斜動作する）ことを抑制することができる。
The guide rib portion 312 is a rib-like portion extending in the vertical direction, and protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the left and right side surfaces of the rack 332 of the elevating body 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11). Thereby, it can suppress that the raising / lowering body 330 moves to the left-right direction during a raising / lowering movement (a parallel movement or inclination operation | movement).
また、半円凹設部３１１を正面側から背面側へ凹設される凹部として構成することで、前後方向に貫通する空間とする場合に比較して、背面側を視認不能とできる面積を広げることができる。従って、機構部分（ギアやモータ等の、遊技者に視認させることを目的としない部分）を配設する面積を大きく確保できる。
In addition, by configuring the semicircular recessed portion 311 as a recessed portion that is recessed from the front side to the back side, the area where the back side can be made invisible is widened as compared to a case where the space penetrates in the front-rear direction. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to secure a large area for disposing a mechanism portion (a portion such as a gear or a motor that is not intended to be visually recognized by the player).
背面カバー３２０は、正面側および下方が開放されたケース状に構成される本体部３２１と、その本体部３２１から正面側に凸設される円柱形状の軸支部３２２と、その軸支部３２２から正面視左右方向に位置ずれした位置において延設方向を鉛直方向と一致させた状態で穿設される長孔である案内孔３２３と、上側の軸支部３２２が凸設される周囲の底部から軸支部３２２の径方向に沿設されるリブ状に形成される係止部３２４と、を備える。
The back cover 320 includes a main body portion 321 configured in a case shape having an open front side and a lower side, a cylindrical shaft support portion 322 protruding from the main body portion 321 to the front side, and a front surface from the shaft support portion 322. A guide hole 323, which is a long hole drilled in a state in which the extending direction coincides with the vertical direction at a position displaced in the left-right direction, and a shaft support portion from the surrounding bottom portion where the upper shaft support portion 322 is projected. And a locking portion 324 formed in a rib shape along the radial direction of 322.
軸支部３２２は、伝達装置３５０の一対のギア部材３５１，３５２をそれぞれ軸支する部分であり、案内孔３２３は、昇降体３３０の昇降動作を案内する孔である。
The shaft support portion 322 is a portion that supports the pair of gear members 351 and 352 of the transmission device 350, and the guide hole 323 is a hole that guides the lifting operation of the lifting body 330.
係止部３２４は、上側の軸支部３２２の軸に対して、鉛直方向上側と鉛直方向下側とに配設され、それぞれ昇降体３３０が上昇位置または下降位置に配置された状態において、第１ギア３５１の係止円弧部３５１ｃの端部が回転方向で当接可能とされる部分である。
The locking portion 324 is disposed on the upper side in the vertical direction and the lower side in the vertical direction with respect to the axis of the upper shaft support portion 322, and in the state where the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position or the lowered position, respectively. The end of the locking arc portion 351c of the gear 351 is a portion that can be contacted in the rotation direction.
昇降体３３０は、円形板形状に構成される演出部３３１と、その演出部３３１の背面に固定され演出部３３１の背面側側面から隙間を空けた位置において鉛直方向に延設されるラック３３２と、を備える。
The elevating body 330 includes an effect portion 331 configured in a circular plate shape, and a rack 332 that is fixed to the back surface of the effect portion 331 and extends in the vertical direction at a position spaced from the rear side surface of the effect portion 331. .
演出部３３１は、円形の外枠の内側に円形の液晶パネルが配設され、液晶パネルに模様や図形を表示することにより演出を行う部分である。
The rendering unit 331 is a portion where a circular liquid crystal panel is disposed inside a circular outer frame, and a rendering is performed by displaying patterns and figures on the liquid crystal panel.
ラック３３２は、背面側に凸設されると共に背面カバー３２０の案内孔３２３に挿通される位置まで凸設されるスライド軸３３２ａを備える。
The rack 332 includes a slide shaft 332 a that protrudes to the back side and protrudes to a position where the rack 332 is inserted into the guide hole 323 of the back cover 320.
スライド軸３３２ａは、複数が凸設される態様ではなく、一つが凸設される態様とされる。そのため、案内孔３２３の配設個数を１つにでき（低減でき）るので、鉛直方向における案内孔３２３の配設スペースを抑制しながら、ラック３３２の移動距離を大きく確保することができる。一方で、本実施形態では、ラック３３２が左右方向で案内リブ部３１２と当接可能とされるので、ラック３３２の案内孔３２３との連結位置が一箇所であっても、ラック３３２が左右方向に傾くことを防止することができる。これにより、昇降体３３０が上下移動する際に演出部３３１が左右方向に振れることを防止できると共に、第２ギア３５２とラック３３２との間隔が変動して歯合関係が悪化することを防止することができる。
A plurality of slide shafts 332a are not provided in a projecting manner, but one is provided in a projecting manner. Therefore, since the number of guide holes 323 can be reduced to one (can be reduced), a large moving distance of the rack 332 can be secured while suppressing the space for arranging the guide holes 323 in the vertical direction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rack 332 can be brought into contact with the guide rib portion 312 in the left-right direction, the rack 332 can be moved in the left-right direction even if the rack 332 is connected to the guide hole 323 at one position. Can be prevented. Thereby, when the elevating body 330 moves up and down, the effect part 331 can be prevented from swinging in the left-right direction, and the gap between the second gear 352 and the rack 332 can be prevented from fluctuating and the meshing relationship can be prevented from deteriorating. be able to.
駆動装置３４０は、背面カバー３２０に締結固定される駆動源である駆動モータ３４１と、その駆動モータ３４１の駆動軸の回転により回転され伝達装置３５０に駆動力を伝達する駆動ギア３４２と、を備える。
The drive device 340 includes a drive motor 341 that is a drive source fastened and fixed to the back cover 320, and a drive gear 342 that is rotated by rotation of the drive shaft of the drive motor 341 and transmits a drive force to the transmission device 350. .
伝達装置３５０は、軸支部３２２に軸支されると共に駆動ギア３４２に歯合される第１ギア３５１と、その第１ギア３５１及びラック３３２に歯合されると共に軸支部３２２に軸支される第２ギア３５２と、を備える。
The transmission device 350 is supported by the shaft support 322 and meshed with the drive gear 342, and is meshed with the first gear 351 and the rack 332 and supported by the shaft support 322. A second gear 352.
このように、複数（本実施形態では４個）の昇降体３３０は、それぞれ独立の駆動モータ３４１を備えるので、全ての昇降体３３０が連動して昇降動作する動作に加え、各昇降体３３０を個別に昇降動作させることができる。なお、各昇降体３３０の技術的思想は共通するので、以下では、図１１の左端に配設される昇降体３３０について説明し、その他の昇降体３３０についての説明を省略する。
As described above, the plurality (four in the present embodiment) of the lifting bodies 330 include the independent drive motors 341. Therefore, in addition to the operation in which all the lifting bodies 330 move up and down in conjunction, It can be moved up and down individually. In addition, since the technical idea of each raising / lowering body 330 is common, below, the raising / lowering body 330 arrange | positioned at the left end of FIG. 11 is demonstrated, and description about the other raising / lowering body 330 is abbreviate | omitted.
次いで、図１６を参照して、第１ギア３５１及び第２ギア３５２について説明する。図１６（ａ）は、第１ギア３５１の正面図であり、図１６（ｂ）は、第１ギア３５１の背面図であり、図１６（ｃ）は、第２ギア３５２の正面図であり、図１６（ｄ）は、第２ギア３５２の背面図である。
Next, the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (a) is a front view of the first gear 351, FIG. 16 (b) is a rear view of the first gear 351, and FIG. 16 (c) is a front view of the second gear 352. FIG. 16D is a rear view of the second gear 352.
図１６（ａ）及び図１６（ｂ）に示すように、第１ギア３５１は、軸支部３２２（図１４参照）が挿通される貫通孔を備え外周面にギア歯が形成される本体部３５１ａと、その本体部３５１ａの外周面においてギア歯の形成が省略される部分にギア歯の歯丈の約半分の張出長さ（歯合する歯同士の接点を連結したピッチ円Ｃ１まで張り出す張出長さ）で径方向に張出形成される当接部３５１ｂと、本体部３５１ａの背面側側面から軸と平行な方向に沿って軸を中心とした円弧形状で凸設される係止円弧部３５１ｃと、を備える。
As shown in FIGS. 16 (a) and 16 (b), the first gear 351 has a through hole through which the shaft support portion 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted, and a main body portion 351a in which gear teeth are formed on the outer peripheral surface. And an extension length of about half of the tooth height of the gear teeth on the outer peripheral surface of the main body 351a (the pitch circle C1 connecting the contact points of the teeth to be engaged) Abutment portion 351b that is formed to project radially in the overhang length), and a latch that protrudes in an arc shape centering on the axis along the direction parallel to the axis from the back side surface of main body portion 351a Arc portion 351c.
当接部３５１ｂは、径方向の先端面が本体部３５１ａの中心軸を中心として半径ｒの円弧形状とされ、およそ本体部３５１ａに形成されるギア歯の２から３つ分の歯厚（円弧の中心の成す角度がおよそ４５度から６０度の範囲の歯厚）で構成される。即ち、ギア歯一つ分の歯厚よりも本体部３５１ａ周方向の形成長さが長くされるので、本体部３５１ａのギア歯に比較して、周方向の強度を確保することができる。
The abutting portion 351b has an arc shape with a radius r centered on the central axis of the main body portion 351a, and a tooth thickness (arc) of about two to three gear teeth formed on the main body portion 351a. (The tooth thickness in the range of approximately 45 to 60 degrees). That is, since the formation length in the circumferential direction of the main body portion 351a is made longer than the tooth thickness of one gear tooth, the strength in the circumferential direction can be ensured as compared with the gear teeth of the main body portion 351a.
係止円弧部３５１ｃは、周方向の先端が背面カバー３２０の係止部３２４（図１４参照）と周方向で当接可能とされる部分であって、第１ギア３５１の回転角度を規制する役割がある。
The locking arc portion 351c is a portion whose circumferential tip can be brought into contact with the locking portion 324 (see FIG. 14) of the back cover 320 in the circumferential direction, and regulates the rotation angle of the first gear 351. There is a role.
図１６（ｃ）及び図１６（ｄ）に示すように、第２ギア３５２は、正面側と背面側とで歯形の異なる２層のギアから構成され、ドーナツ板形状に構成される中間板３５３と、その中間板３５３の正面側に形成され歯形が一部異形とされる異形ギア部３５４と、中間板３５３の背面側に平歯車形状に形成されラック３３２（図１５参照）と歯合される伝達ギア部３５５と、を備える。
As shown in FIG. 16C and FIG. 16D, the second gear 352 is composed of two layers of gears having different tooth shapes on the front side and the back side, and an intermediate plate 353 configured in a donut plate shape. And a deformed gear portion 354 formed on the front side of the intermediate plate 353 and having a partially deformed tooth shape, and a spur gear shape formed on the back side of the intermediate plate 353 and meshed with a rack 332 (see FIG. 15). Transmission gear portion 355.
中間板３５３は、異形ギア部３５４及び伝達ギア部３５５のギア歯の先端よりも径方向外側まで張り出して形成される。そのため、歯合される相手部材（第１ギア３５１又はラック３３２（図１５参照））と歯面と平行な方向で重なることで当接可能とされ（図１７参照）、その相手部材が昇降体３３０の昇降動作時に歯面と平行な方向へ移動することを抑制することができる。
The intermediate plate 353 is formed to protrude outward in the radial direction from the tips of the gear teeth of the deformed gear portion 354 and the transmission gear portion 355. Therefore, the mating member (the first gear 351 or the rack 332 (see FIG. 15)) can be brought into contact with each other by overlapping in the direction parallel to the tooth surface (see FIG. 17). It is possible to suppress movement in the direction parallel to the tooth surface during the elevating operation of 330.
異形ギア部３５４は、組立状態（図１１参照）において第１ギア３５１と歯合される部分であって、軸支部３２２（図１４参照）が挿通される貫通孔を備え外周面にギア歯が形成される本体部３５４ａと、その本体部３５４ａの外周面においてギア歯の形成が省略される部分に張出形成される受け部３５４ｂと、その受け部３５４ｂの一端（図１６（ｃ）右側の端部）に隣設される隣設ギア歯３５４ｃと、を備える。
The deformed gear portion 354 is a portion engaged with the first gear 351 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11), has a through hole through which the shaft support portion 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted, and has gear teeth on the outer peripheral surface. A main body portion 354a to be formed, a receiving portion 354b that is formed to protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 354a where gear teeth are not formed, and one end of the receiving portion 354b (on the right side of FIG. 16C) And adjacent gear teeth 354c provided adjacent to the end portion).
受け部３５４ｂは、本体部３５４ａの外周面に沿って隣設ギア歯３５４ｃから正面視反時計回り側（昇降体３３０を上昇移動させる際に第１ギア３５１が隣設ギア歯３５４ｃに噛み込む側）にギア歯２個分ほどの配設角度（約３０度から５０度）で形成される部分であって、伝達装置３５０が軸支部３２２に軸支された状態において当接部３５１ｂの先端面が形成する半径ｒの円弧形状に沿って湾曲形成される湾曲壁部３５４ｂ１と、その湾曲壁部３５４ｂ１と隣設ギア歯３５４ｃの周方向の歯面との間に隣設ギア歯３５４ｃの歯丈の約半分の歯丈（歯合する歯同士の接点を連結したピッチ円Ｃ２まで張り出される歯丈）で形成される連結壁部３５４ｂ２と、を備える。従って、隣設ギア歯３５４ｃの連結壁部３５４ｂ２側の側面は、隣設ギア歯３５４ｃの連結壁部３５４ｂ２の反対側の側面の径方向の張出長さの約半分の張出長さで、連結壁部３５４ｂ２と一体形成される状態で連結壁部３５４ｂ２から径方向に張り出して構成される。
The receiving portion 354b is a counterclockwise front view from the adjacent gear tooth 354c along the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 354a (the side on which the first gear 351 is engaged with the adjacent gear tooth 354c when the elevating body 330 is moved upward. ) At a disposition angle of about two gear teeth (about 30 to 50 degrees), and the tip surface of the contact portion 351b in a state where the transmission device 350 is supported by the shaft support portion 322. Of the adjacent gear teeth 354c between the curved wall portion 354b1 and the circumferential tooth surface of the adjacent gear teeth 354c. , And a connecting wall portion 354b2 formed at a pitch circle extending to a pitch circle C2 in which the contacts of the teeth to be engaged are connected. Therefore, the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c on the side of the connecting wall portion 354b2 is an overhang length that is about half the radial length of the side surface on the opposite side of the connecting wall portion 354b2 of the adjacent gear tooth 354c. In a state of being integrally formed with the connecting wall part 354b2, the connecting wall part 354b2 projects in the radial direction.
図１６（ｃ）に示すように、伝達装置３５０が軸支部３２２に軸支された状態において、第２ギア３５２が当接部３５１ｂの先端面が形成する半径ｒの円弧形状に沿って湾曲壁部３５４ｂ１が配置される姿勢とされる場合に、隣設ギア歯３５４ｃは半径ｒの円弧の外側（第２ギア３５２側）に配置される態様とされる（隣設ギア歯３５４ｃが半径ｒの円と干渉しない位置での形成に留められる）。
As shown in FIG. 16C, in the state where the transmission device 350 is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 322, the second gear 352 is curved along the arc shape with the radius r formed by the tip surface of the contact portion 351b. When the portion 354b1 is disposed, the adjacent gear tooth 354c is disposed outside the arc having the radius r (on the second gear 352 side) (the adjacent gear tooth 354c has the radius r). The formation is made at a position that does not interfere with the circle).
次いで、図１７から図２０を参照して、昇降体３３０の昇降動作について説明する。なお、上昇動作と下降動作との動作経路は共通であるので、ここでは上昇動作について説明し、下降動作の説明を省略する。
Next, the ascending / descending operation of the elevating body 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20. Since the ascending operation and the descending operation have the same operation path, the ascending operation will be described here, and the description of the descending operation will be omitted.
図１７から図２０は、昇降体３３０の上昇動作が時系列で図示される昇降体３３０及び伝達装置３５０の正面図である。なお、図１７では、昇降体３３０が下降位置に配置された状態が図示され、図１８では、図１７に図示される状態から第２ギア３５２が正面視時計回りに回転され昇降体３３０が所定距離上昇動作し第１ギア３５１の当接部３５１ｂの周方向の端部が第２ギア３５２の隣設ギア歯３５４ｃに噛み合い始めた状態が図示され、図１９では、図１８に図示される状態から第１ギア３５１が正面視反時計回り及び第２ギア３５２が正面視時計回りに回転され当接部３５１ｂの周方向の端面と隣設ギア歯３５４ｃとの当接が外れた直後の状態が図示され、図２０では、図１９に図示される状態から第１ギア３５１のみが正面視時計回りに所定量回転された状態が図示される。
17 to 20 are front views of the lifting body 330 and the transmission device 350 in which the lifting operation of the lifting body 330 is illustrated in time series. 17 illustrates a state in which the lifting body 330 is disposed at the lowered position. In FIG. 18, the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise from the state illustrated in FIG. The state where the distance rising operation is started and the end portion in the circumferential direction of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 begins to engage with the adjacent gear teeth 354c of the second gear 352 is illustrated, and in FIG. 19, the state illustrated in FIG. The state immediately after the first gear 351 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view and the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise in the front view and the contact between the circumferential end surface of the contact portion 351b and the adjacent gear teeth 354c is released. FIG. 20 shows a state in which only the first gear 351 is rotated by a predetermined amount clockwise from the state shown in FIG.
図１７から図２０に図示されるように、昇降体３３０は、ラック３３２に駆動モータ３４１（図１４参照）の駆動力が駆動ギア３４２及び伝達装置３５０を介して伝達されることにより昇降動作される。詳述すると、駆動ギア３４２の駆動力は、その駆動ギア３４２と歯合される第１ギア３５１から、その第１ギア３５１に歯合される第２ギア３５２の異形ギア部３５４に伝達され、第２ギア３５２の回転が、その第２ギア３５２の伝達ギア部３５５（図１６（ｄ）参照）と歯合されるラックに伝達されることにより、昇降体３３０が昇降動作する。
As shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, the elevating body 330 is moved up and down when the driving force of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) is transmitted to the rack 332 via the drive gear 342 and the transmission device 350. The More specifically, the driving force of the drive gear 342 is transmitted from the first gear 351 meshed with the drive gear 342 to the deformed gear portion 354 of the second gear 352 meshed with the first gear 351, The rotation of the second gear 352 is transmitted to the rack meshed with the transmission gear portion 355 (see FIG. 16D) of the second gear 352, so that the lifting body 330 moves up and down.
図１７に図示される下降位置では、ラック３３２のスライド軸３３２ａ（図１５参照）が背面カバー３２０の案内孔３２３（図１５参照）の下端に配置される。そのため、ラック３３２がそれ以上下方に移動することを機械的に防止できる。
In the lowered position illustrated in FIG. 17, the slide shaft 332 a (see FIG. 15) of the rack 332 is disposed at the lower end of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15) of the back cover 320. Therefore, it is possible to mechanically prevent the rack 332 from moving further downward.
また、図１７に図示される状態において、第１ギア３５１の係止円弧部３５１ｃの周方向の端部と背面カバー３２０の下側の係止部３２４とが当接することで、第１ギア３５１の正面視時計回り方向（ラック３３２を下降動作させる方向）への回転が機械的に防止される。
In the state illustrated in FIG. 17, the first gear 351 is brought into contact with the circumferential end of the locking arc portion 351 c of the first gear 351 and the lower locking portion 324 of the back cover 320. Is rotated mechanically in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front (the direction in which the rack 332 is lowered).
これにより、駆動モータ３４１の制御不良などにより駆動ギア３４２が過回転して第１ギア３５１を図１７に図示される状態から更に正面視時計間回りに回転させようとする負荷が生じたとしても、第１ギア３５１の回転が機械的に防止されることにより、その負荷が第２ギア３５２に伝達されることを防止でき、ラック３３２が下降動作する事態を回避できるので、スライド軸３３２ａ（図１５参照）が案内孔３２３（図１５参照）の下側面に押し当てられスライド軸３３２ａ又は案内孔３２３が破損することを防止することができる。
As a result, even if there is a load that causes the drive gear 342 to over-rotate due to poor control of the drive motor 341 and to rotate the first gear 351 further clockwise from the state shown in FIG. Since the rotation of the first gear 351 is mechanically prevented, the load can be prevented from being transmitted to the second gear 352, and the situation where the rack 332 is lowered can be avoided, so that the slide shaft 332a (see FIG. 15) is pressed against the lower surface of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15), and the slide shaft 332a or the guide hole 323 can be prevented from being damaged.
図１８に図示されるように、昇降体３３０が上昇動作する過程において、周方向の歯厚が他のギア歯よりも大きくされる当接部３５１ｂの周方向端面が隣設ギア歯３５４ｃと噛み合うので、第２ギア３５２から第１ギア３５１へ逆方向に伝達される負荷（昇降体３３０の重さによる負荷）を他のギア歯に比較して強度の大きい当接部３５１ｂで受けることができ、第１ギア３５１の耐久性を向上させることができる。
As shown in FIG. 18, in the process in which the elevating body 330 moves upward, the circumferential end surface of the contact portion 351 b whose circumferential tooth thickness is larger than that of the other gear teeth meshes with the adjacent gear teeth 354 c. Therefore, a load transmitted in the reverse direction from the second gear 352 to the first gear 351 (a load due to the weight of the elevating body 330) can be received by the contact portion 351b having a higher strength than other gear teeth. The durability of the first gear 351 can be improved.
第１ギア３５１の当接部３５１ｂがピッチ円Ｃ１まで張り出されると共に、第２ギア３５２の連結壁部３５４ｂ２がピッチ円Ｃ２まで張り出されるので、図１８の状態において、当接部３５１ｂが連結壁部３５４ｂ２と擦れる位置まで近接される。そのため、隣設ギア歯３５４ｃの歯元に近い部分で当接部３５１ｂと隣設ギア歯３５４ｃとを当接させることができ、隣設ギア歯３５４ｃの耐久性を向上させることができる。
Since the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 extends to the pitch circle C1 and the connecting wall portion 354b2 of the second gear 352 extends to the pitch circle C2, the contact portion 351b is connected in the state of FIG. It approaches to the position which rubs with wall part 354b2. Therefore, the contact portion 351b and the adjacent gear tooth 354c can be brought into contact with each other at a portion close to the base of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, and the durability of the adjacent gear tooth 354c can be improved.
また、隣設ギア歯３５４ｃは、連結壁部３５４ｂ２に周方向の一方の側面を連結されるので、他のギア歯に比較して、周方向から受ける負荷に対する強度が向上される。換言すれば、連結壁部３５４ｂ２側の側面の径方向の張出長さが短くされるため、隣設ギア歯３５４ｃの歯丈方向と垂直な方向への変形に対する抵抗が増加すると共に、連結壁部３５４ｂ２が隣設ギア歯３５４ｃと一体で形成されることで隣設ギア歯３５４ｃに負荷される力を受ける部分としての隣設ギア歯３５４ｃ及び連結壁部３５４ｂ２の合計の歯厚が大きくされるため、隣設ギア歯３５４ｃの周方向への変形に対する抵抗が増加する。これにより、隣設ギア歯３５４ｃが第１ギア３５１の当接部３５１ｂを受け止める際に破損することを抑制することができる。
Further, since the adjacent gear tooth 354c is connected to the connecting wall portion 354b2 on one side surface in the circumferential direction, the strength against the load received from the circumferential direction is improved as compared with the other gear teeth. In other words, since the overhang length in the radial direction of the side surface on the side of the connecting wall portion 354b2 is shortened, resistance to deformation of the adjacent gear teeth 354c in the direction perpendicular to the tooth height direction increases, and the connecting wall portion Since the 354b2 is formed integrally with the adjacent gear teeth 354c, the total tooth thickness of the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the connecting wall portion 354b2 as a portion receiving the force applied to the adjacent gear teeth 354c is increased. The resistance against the circumferential deformation of the adjacent gear teeth 354c increases. Thereby, it can suppress that the adjacent gear tooth 354c breaks when receiving the contact part 351b of the 1st gear 351.
図１９に示すように、昇降体３３０が上昇位置に配置された直後の状態において、当接部３５１ｂの円弧状の先端部と隣設ギア歯３５４ｃとが当接する。この状態において、第１ギア３５１の周方向で第１ギア３５１と第２ギア３５２とが当接していないので、第１ギア３５１の回転方向の駆動力の第２ギア３５２への伝達が解除される。
As shown in FIG. 19, the arcuate tip of the abutting portion 351b and the adjacent gear teeth 354c abut in a state immediately after the elevating body 330 is disposed at the ascending position. In this state, since the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 are not in contact with each other in the circumferential direction of the first gear 351, transmission of the driving force in the rotational direction of the first gear 351 to the second gear 352 is released. The
そのため、第２ギア３５２に歯合される昇降体３３０の重さを支える力が第１ギア３５１から伝達されなくなり、昇降体３３０が落下する方向に移動しかけるので、第２ギア３５２がラック３３２を下降動作させる方向（図１９反時計回り）に回転しかける。
Therefore, the force that supports the weight of the lifting body 330 meshed with the second gear 352 is not transmitted from the first gear 351, and the lifting body 330 starts to move in the falling direction, so that the second gear 352 moves the rack 332 down. Rotate in the direction to move downward (counterclockwise in FIG. 19).
一方で、図１９に示すように、隣設ギア歯３５４ｃが回転する方向の範囲（隣設ギア歯３５４ｃの先端が形成する円の内側）に当接部３５１ｂが配置されるので、第２ギア３５２を回転させる際には、隣設ギア歯３５４ｃにより当接部３５１ｂを隣設ギア歯３５４ｃの移動軌跡の外側に押しやる必要がある。
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, since the contact portion 351b is disposed in the range in the direction in which the adjacent gear teeth 354c rotate (inside the circle formed by the tip of the adjacent gear teeth 354c), the second gear When rotating 352, it is necessary to push the contact portion 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear teeth 354c by the adjacent gear teeth 354c.
当接部３５１ｂの外周形状が本体部３５１ａの中心軸を中心とした円弧形状とされるので、当接部３５１ｂの外周面に与えられる荷重は、第１ギア３５１の軸側へ向かう軸方向成分Ｆａと、第１ギア３５１の当接部３５１ｂの接線方向に沿う周方向成分Ｆｂとに分解される。
Since the outer peripheral shape of the contact portion 351b is an arc shape centered on the central axis of the main body portion 351a, the load applied to the outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 351b is an axial component toward the axial side of the first gear 351. It is decomposed into Fa and a circumferential component Fb along the tangential direction of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351.
軸方向成分Ｆａは、第１ギア３５１を回転可能な方向では無く、また、第１ギア３５１の剛性が確保される状態では（径方向に伸縮しない構造では）、軸方向成分Ｆａにより当接部３５１ｂを隣設ギア歯３５４ｃの移動軌跡の外側に押しやることは困難である。
The axial component Fa is not in a direction in which the first gear 351 can be rotated, and in a state where the rigidity of the first gear 351 is ensured (in a structure that does not expand and contract in the radial direction), the contact portion is caused by the axial component Fa. It is difficult to push 351b outside the movement locus of the adjacent gear teeth 354c.
周方向成分Ｆｂは、第１ギア３５１の回転方向を向くが、隣設ギア歯３５４ｃと当接部３５１ｂとが点で接触するため、隣設ギア歯３５４ｃと当接部３５１ｂとの間で滑りが生じ、第１ギア３５１が回転されにくいため、周方向成分Ｆｂにより当接部３５１ｂを隣設ギア歯３５４ｃの移動軌跡の外側に押しやることは困難である。
The circumferential component Fb is directed in the rotational direction of the first gear 351, but the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b are in contact with each other at a point, and therefore slip between the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b. Since the first gear 351 is difficult to rotate, it is difficult to push the contact portion 351b outside the movement locus of the adjacent gear teeth 354c by the circumferential component Fb.
従って、隣設ギア歯３５４ｃにより当接部３５１ｂを隣設ギア歯３５４ｃの移動軌跡の外側に押しやることが防止されることから、第２ギア３５２が回転することが防止され、第２ギア３５２及び昇降体３３０の状態が保持される。
Accordingly, the adjacent gear tooth 354c prevents the contact portion 351b from being pushed outside the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, so that the second gear 352 is prevented from rotating, and the second gear 352 and The state of the elevating body 330 is maintained.
当接部３５１ｂと受け部３５４ｂの湾曲壁部３５４ｂ１とが、共に第１ギア３５１を中心とした半径ｒの円弧形状から形成され、図１９に図示されるように、第１ギア３５１の周方向に沿って面当たりで当接されるので、第１ギア３５１の回転を湾曲壁部３５４ｂ１全体の面積を利用して強固に受け止めることができる。これにより、昇降体３３０が上昇位置に到達した後に駆動モータ３４１（図１４参照）の停止が遅れたとしても、第１ギア３５１が過回転することを防止することができ、駆動モータ３４１の停止の遅れが昇降体３３０の動作態様に影響することを防止することができる。
Both the abutting portion 351b and the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b are formed in an arc shape with a radius r centering on the first gear 351, and as shown in FIG. 19, the circumferential direction of the first gear 351 Therefore, the rotation of the first gear 351 can be firmly received using the entire area of the curved wall portion 354b1. Thereby, even if the stop of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) is delayed after the elevating body 330 reaches the raised position, the first gear 351 can be prevented from over-rotating, and the drive motor 341 is stopped. Can be prevented from affecting the operation mode of the elevating body 330.
図２０に示すように、第１ギア３５１は、係止円弧部３５１ｃが上側の係止部３２４に当接する状態まで回転し、停止する。図１８から図２０までの間、第１ギア３５１の当接部３５１ｂの周方向端面が隣設ギア歯３５４ｃの側面を押進することにより第２ギア３５２が回転されるので、隣設ギア歯３５４ｃが第２ギア３５２に対して位置合わせされ、図２０に図示される状態において隣設ギア歯３５４ｃが当接部３５１ｂの歯先面に当接する状態を確実に形成することができる。
As shown in FIG. 20, the first gear 351 rotates and stops until the locking arc portion 351c comes into contact with the upper locking portion 324. 18 to 20, the circumferential end surface of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 pushes the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, so that the second gear 352 is rotated. 354c is aligned with the second gear 352, and in the state shown in FIG. 20, a state in which the adjacent gear tooth 354c abuts against the tooth tip surface of the abutting portion 351b can be reliably formed.
図１９に示す状態から図２０に示す状態までにおいて、昇降体３３０は上昇位置に配置されるので、第２ギア３５２がラック３３２を上昇移動させる方向（図２０時計回り）に回転することが規制される。そのため、第１ギア３５１が第２ギア３５２に対して図１９反時計回りに回転しても、第２ギア３５２が連れ回りすることが無い。従って、当接部３５１ｂの歯先面が隣設ギア歯３５４ｃに対面する状態を確実に形成することができる。
From the state shown in FIG. 19 to the state shown in FIG. 20, the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position, and therefore the second gear 352 is restricted from rotating in the direction in which the rack 332 is moved upward (clockwise in FIG. 20). Is done. Therefore, even if the first gear 351 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 19 with respect to the second gear 352, the second gear 352 does not rotate. Therefore, it is possible to reliably form a state in which the tooth tip surface of the contact portion 351b faces the adjacent gear tooth 354c.
図２０に図示されるように、昇降体３３０が上昇位置に配置された状態において、第２ギア３５２が当接部３５１ｂの先端面が形成する半径ｒの円弧形状に沿って湾曲壁部３５４ｂ１が配置される姿勢とされ隣設ギア歯３５４ｃが半径ｒの円弧の外側（第２ギア３５２側）に配置されるので、図１９に図示される状態から、第１ギア３５１のみを同一回転方向（図１９反時計回り方向）に回転させることができる。
As shown in FIG. 20, the curved wall portion 354 b 1 has a curved wall portion 354 b 1 along the arc shape of the radius r formed by the tip surface of the contact portion 351 b in the state where the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position. Since the adjacent gear teeth 354c are arranged outside the circular arc having the radius r (on the second gear 352 side), only the first gear 351 is rotated in the same rotational direction (from the state shown in FIG. 19). It can be rotated in the counterclockwise direction of FIG.
このとき、当接部３５１ｂの歯厚が他のギア歯に比較して厚く（およそギア歯２個分から３個分の厚さ）されるので、第１ギア３５１の停止位置の精度を緩やかにすることができる。即ち、例えば、図１９に示す状態から図２０に示す状態の中間の位相に第１ギア３５１が停止したとしても、隣設ギア歯３５４ｃと当接部３５１ｂとの当接位置での関係は同様に確保され、第２ギア３５２の回転を規制することができる。
At this time, since the tooth thickness of the contact portion 351b is thicker than other gear teeth (approximately two to three gear teeth), the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 is moderately increased. can do. That is, for example, even if the first gear 351 stops at an intermediate phase from the state shown in FIG. 19 to the state shown in FIG. 20, the relationship between the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b is the same. The rotation of the second gear 352 can be restricted.
また、第１ギア３５１の停止位置の精度を緩やかにしたまま、第２ギア３５２の両方向への回転を規制することができる。即ち、第２ギア３５２が図２０時計回りに回転しかけたとしても、受け部３５４ｂの湾曲壁部３５４ｂ１が当接部３５１ｂの歯先面と当接することで、荷重の方向を詳細に上述した隣設ギア歯３５４ｃと当接部３５１ｂとの当接時と同様に第２ギア３５２の回転が規制される。従って、昇降体３３０が上昇位置に配置された状態においてラック３３２が上下両方向に移動する事が規制されるので、昇降体３３０にがたつきが発生することを抑制することができる。上下両方向の規制（特に、上昇方向の規制）は、従来のクランク機構で行うことは困難であり、本実施形態のように第１ギア３５１と第２ギア３５２のギア形状により、初めて達成されるものである。
Further, the rotation of the second gear 352 in both directions can be restricted while the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 is moderated. That is, even if the second gear 352 rotates clockwise in FIG. 20, the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b abuts against the tooth tip surface of the abutting portion 351b, so that the direction of the load is described in detail above. The rotation of the second gear 352 is restricted in the same manner as when the provided gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b are in contact. Therefore, since the rack 332 is restricted from moving in both the up and down directions in a state in which the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling in the elevating body 330. The restriction in both the upper and lower directions (particularly, the restriction in the upward direction) is difficult to be performed by the conventional crank mechanism, and is achieved for the first time by the gear shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 as in this embodiment. Is.
このように、第１ギア３５１及び第２ギア３５２の形状の関係により、昇降体３３０が上昇位置に配置された状態において第２ギア３５２が回転することを防止することができるので、昇降体３３０を上昇位置に維持するために駆動モータ３４１（図１４参照）の駆動力を自重以上の大きさで付与し続けることを不要とでき、消費エネルギーを抑制することができる。
As described above, the shape of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 can prevent the second gear 352 from rotating in a state in which the lifting body 330 is disposed at the raised position. Therefore, it is unnecessary to continuously apply the driving force of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) with a magnitude greater than its own weight in order to maintain the lifted position in the raised position, and energy consumption can be suppressed.
また、クランク機構の死点を利用して昇降体３３０を上昇位置に維持することも可能ではあるが、その場合、昇降体３３０の移動距離に対応してクランク機構が大型化するという問題点があった。本実施形態では、クランク機構を不要とし、第１ギア３５１及び第２ギア３５２の形状の関係により第２ギア３５２の回転を規制できるので、伝達部分の小型化を図ることができる。
In addition, although it is possible to maintain the lifting body 330 at the raised position using the dead center of the crank mechanism, there is a problem that the crank mechanism increases in size in accordance with the moving distance of the lifting body 330. there were. In the present embodiment, a crank mechanism is not required, and the rotation of the second gear 352 can be restricted by the relationship between the shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352, so the transmission portion can be reduced in size.
第２ギア３５２の回転の規制を解除する方法について説明する。図１９及び図２０に示す状態において、第１ギア３５１の当接部３５１ｂを逆方向へ回転させる場合の回転方向（図２０時計回り方向）に当接部３５１ｂと干渉する別部材が配設されないので、第１ギア３５１の昇降体３３０を下降動作させる方向（図２０時計回り方向）への回転動作が許容される。
A method for canceling the restriction on the rotation of the second gear 352 will be described. In the state shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, another member that interferes with the contact portion 351b is not provided in the rotation direction (the clockwise direction in FIG. 20) when the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 is rotated in the reverse direction. Therefore, the first gear 351 is allowed to rotate in the direction in which the elevating body 330 is lowered (the clockwise direction in FIG. 20).
第１ギア３５１を図２０に図示される状態から図１９に図示される状態まで回転させ、更に同一方向に回転させると第２ギア３５２の回転方向への規制が解除され（当接部３５１ｂの先端面が隣設ギア歯３５４ｃから離間して）、昇降体３３０が下降動作可能となる。即ち、第１ギア３５１の回転動作により、第２ギア３５２の回転規制の解除を行うことができ、第２ギア３５２の回転規制の解除のために第１ギア３５１に別動作を行わせることが不要であるので、第１ギア３５１の構造を簡素化することができる。
When the first gear 351 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 20 to the state shown in FIG. 19 and further rotated in the same direction, the restriction in the rotational direction of the second gear 352 is released (the contact portion 351b When the distal end surface is separated from the adjacent gear teeth 354 c), the elevating body 330 can be lowered. That is, the rotation restriction of the second gear 352 can be released by the rotation operation of the first gear 351, and the first gear 351 can perform another operation to release the rotation restriction of the second gear 352. Since it is unnecessary, the structure of the first gear 351 can be simplified.
次いで、図２１から図３３を参照して、液晶昇降ユニット４００について説明する。図２１は、液晶昇降ユニット４００の正面斜視図である。図２１に示すように、液晶昇降ユニット４００は、円形の液晶部分を有する演出部４２２ａを有し昇降動作する駆動側スライド部材４２０と、その駆動側スライド部材４２０に従動して上昇動作する部材であって第３図柄表示装置８１を備える従動側スライド部材４３０と、を備え、それら駆動側スライド部材４２０及び従動側スライド部材４３０が共通の案内棒４５１に連通され、同一方向に動作する態様で構成される。
Next, the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 21 is a front perspective view of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. As shown in FIG. 21, the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 includes a drive side slide member 420 that has a rendering portion 422 a having a circular liquid crystal portion and moves up and down, and a member that moves up and down following the drive side slide member 420. A driven-side slide member 430 having a third symbol display device 81, and the drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430 are connected to a common guide bar 451 and configured to operate in the same direction. Is done.
図２２は、液晶昇降ユニット４００の正面分解斜視図である。図２２に図示されるように、液晶昇降ユニット４００は、一対の長尺板状部材から構成されるベース部材４１０と、上下方向に昇降動作可能に構成される駆動側スライド部材４２０と、その駆動側スライド部材４２０の上方に配置され上下方向に動作可能に構成される従動側スライド部材４３０と、駆動側スライド部材４２０が昇降動作する駆動力を発生させる駆動装置４４０と、その駆動装置４４０から発生した駆動力を駆動側スライド部材４２０に伝達すると共に駆動側スライド部材４２０及び従動側スライド部材４３０の動作を案内する一対の案内棒４５１を有する伝達装置４５０と、一対のベース部材４１０の下端部同士を連結すると共に駆動側スライド部材４２０と連結される下側前板部材４６０と、液晶昇降ユニット４００の左右および上部の正面側に配設されるカバー部材４７０と、を主に備えて構成される。
FIG. 22 is a front exploded perspective view of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. As shown in FIG. 22, the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 includes a base member 410 composed of a pair of long plate-shaped members, a drive-side slide member 420 configured to be movable up and down in the vertical direction, and driving thereof. A driven slide member 430 that is arranged above the side slide member 420 and configured to be movable in the vertical direction, a drive device 440 that generates a drive force for the drive side slide member 420 to move up and down, and generated from the drive device 440 The transmission device 450 having a pair of guide rods 451 for transmitting the drive force to the drive side slide member 420 and guiding the operations of the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430, and the lower ends of the pair of base members 410 And the lower front plate member 460 connected to the drive side slide member 420 and the left side of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 And a cover member 470 which is disposed on the front side of the upper, and mainly includes a.
ベース部材４１０は、縦長の長尺板状部材として構成される本体部材４１１と、その本体部材４１１の上下両端部に互いに鉛直方向で一致する位置に配置され正面に開放するコ字形状の凹部として構成される案内棒支持部４１２と、その案内棒支持部４１２から引かれる鉛直線よりも内側（他方のベース部材４１０に近接する側）に配置され本体部材４１１の正面側に延設される係止部４１３と、案内棒支持部４１２から引かれる鉛直線を挟んで係止部４１３の反対側において本体部材４１１の正面側に円柱形状に凸設される第１軸支部４１４と、その第１軸支部４１４に軸支されると共に駆動側スライド部材４２０の下降動作を規制する下降規制部材４１５と、第１軸支部４１４の下方に配置され本体部材４１１の正面側に円柱形状に凸設される第２軸支部４１６と、その第２軸支部４１６に軸支されると共に従動側スライド部材４３０の上昇動作を規制する上昇規制部材４１７と、を主に備える。
The base member 410 is a main body member 411 configured as a vertically long plate-like member, and a U-shaped concave portion that is disposed at a position that coincides with the upper and lower ends of the main body member 411 in the vertical direction and opens to the front. A guide rod support portion 412 that is configured, and a member that is arranged on the inner side (side closer to the other base member 410) than the vertical line drawn from the guide rod support portion 412 and extends to the front side of the main body member 411. A first shaft support portion 414 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape on the front side of the main body member 411 on the opposite side of the locking portion 413 across the vertical line drawn from the stop portion 413, the guide rod support portion 412, and the first A downward regulating member 415 that is pivotally supported by the pivotal support portion 414 and restricts the downward movement of the drive side slide member 420, and is arranged below the first pivotal support portion 414 and protrudes in a cylindrical shape on the front side of the main body member 411. A second shaft support 416, the elevation regulating member 417 for regulating the upward movement of the driven sliding member 430 while being axially supported on the second shaft support portion 416 mainly comprises a.
案内棒支持部４１２は、伝達装置４５０の案内棒４５１の両端を支持する部分であって、案内棒４５１を収容可能な開口幅で形成される。本実施形態では、カバー部材４７０がベース部材４１０に締結固定されることにより、案内棒支持部４１２の正面側の開口が塞がれ、案内棒４５１が案内棒支持部４１２に固定される。
The guide rod support portion 412 is a portion that supports both ends of the guide rod 451 of the transmission device 450 and is formed with an opening width that can accommodate the guide rod 451. In this embodiment, when the cover member 470 is fastened and fixed to the base member 410, the opening on the front side of the guide rod support portion 412 is closed, and the guide rod 451 is fixed to the guide rod support portion 412.
係止部４１３は、従動側スライド部材４３０の落下防止部４３５の下側側面に上下方向で当接する部分であって、その当接状態から、それ以上、従動側スライド部材４３０が下降動作することを規制する。
The locking portion 413 is a portion that vertically contacts the lower side surface of the fall preventing portion 435 of the driven side slide member 430, and the driven side slide member 430 is further lowered from the contact state. To regulate.
下降規制部材４１５及び上昇規制部材４１７は、駆動側スライド部材４２０の昇降動作に伴って回転動作し、従動側スライド部材４３０の移動を規制する役割をもつ部材であるが、詳細は後述する。
The descending restricting member 415 and the ascending restricting member 417 are members that rotate as the drive-side slide member 420 moves up and down and have a role of restricting the movement of the driven-side slide member 430, and will be described in detail later.
駆動側スライド部材４２０は、左右両端部を伝達装置４５０のラック４５２に締結固定され、ラック４５２のスライド動作により昇降動作される部材である。
The drive-side slide member 420 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 at both left and right ends, and is moved up and down by a slide operation of the rack 452.
従動側スライド部材４３０は、独立の駆動装置を持たず、左右両端を案内棒４５１にスライド動作可能に支持されると共に、駆動側スライド部材４２０の昇降動作に従動して昇降動作する。従動側スライド部材４３０は、第３図柄表示装置８１を有し左右方向に長尺に構成される本体部材４３１と、その本体部材４３１の左右方向両端に配置される機能部４３２と、その機能部４３２に鉛直方向に穿設される孔であって案内棒４５１が挿通される案内孔４３３と、機能部４３２の下端部において左右外側方向に上昇傾斜して延設される鉤状部４３４と、機能部４３２の上端部の案内孔４３３の内側（他方の案内孔４３３に近接する側）において背面側に延設される落下防止部４３５と、を主に備える。
The driven-side slide member 430 does not have an independent driving device, and is supported by the guide rods 451 so that the left and right ends can slide. In addition, the driven-side slide member 430 moves up and down following the up-and-down operation of the drive-side slide member 420. The driven-side slide member 430 includes a main body member 431 that has the third symbol display device 81 and is elongated in the left-right direction, a function unit 432 that is disposed at both ends of the main body member 431 in the left-right direction, and a function unit thereof A guide hole 433 which is a hole drilled in the vertical direction in 432 and through which the guide rod 451 is inserted, and a hook-like part 434 which is extended and inclined in the laterally outward direction at the lower end of the functional part 432, The fall prevention part 435 extended mainly in the back side inside the guide hole 433 of the upper end part of the function part 432 (side adjacent to the other guide hole 433) is mainly provided.
鉤状部４３４は、上昇規制部材４１７に引っ掛けられる部分である。従動側スライド部材４３０が下降位置に配置される状態において、上昇規制部材４１７が鉤状部４３４の上側面である係合面４３４ａに回り込んで引っ掛けられることで（図２９参照）、従動側スライド部材４３０が上昇方向に動作することを防止することができる（例えば、落下の反動で跳ねることを防止することができる）。また、鉤状部４３４が上昇傾斜し、その傾斜と平行に上昇規制部材４１７の係合爪部４１７ｅが構成されるので、鉤状部４３４と上昇規制部材４１７との係合により、左右方向のぐらつきも抑制することができる。
The hook-shaped portion 434 is a portion that is hooked by the rise restricting member 417. In the state where the driven side slide member 430 is disposed at the lowered position, the rise restricting member 417 wraps around and is hooked on the engagement surface 434a which is the upper side surface of the hook-shaped portion 434 (see FIG. 29), and the driven side slide. It is possible to prevent the member 430 from moving in the upward direction (for example, it is possible to prevent the member 430 from bouncing due to a drop reaction). Further, the hook-shaped portion 434 is inclined upward, and the engaging claw portion 417e of the upward restriction member 417 is formed in parallel with the inclination. Therefore, the engagement between the hook-shaped portion 434 and the upward restriction member 417 causes the left-right direction. Wobble can also be suppressed.
なお、鉤状部４３４の先端部（図２９に図示される状態において係合爪部４１７ｅの先端部よりも外側（図２９右側の部分））の形状は、係合爪部４１７ｅの移動軌跡よりも下方に収まる形状とされる。そのため、係合爪部４１７ｅと鉤状部４３４とが係合し、互いに負荷を掛け合う状態においても、上昇規制部材４１７の回転動作を行うことができる。
Note that the shape of the distal end portion of the hook-shaped portion 434 (the outer side of the distal end portion of the engaging claw portion 417e in the state shown in FIG. 29 (the portion on the right side in FIG. 29)) is based on the movement locus of the engaging claw portion 417e. Is also shaped to fit below. Therefore, even when the engaging claw portion 417e and the hook-like portion 434 are engaged and a load is applied to each other, the lifting restricting member 417 can be rotated.
駆動装置４４０は、ベース部材４１０の本体部材４１１に締結固定される駆動モータ４４１と、その駆動モータの駆動力で回転される駆動ギア４４２と、を備える。
The drive device 440 includes a drive motor 441 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 of the base member 410, and a drive gear 442 that is rotated by the drive force of the drive motor.
伝達装置４５０は、ベース部材４１０の案内棒支持部４１２に固定される一対の案内棒４５１と、その案内棒４５１にスライド動作可能に支持され駆動側スライド部材４２０が締結固定されると共に駆動ギア４４２に内側（一対の駆動ギア４４２の内側）から歯合されるラック４５２とそのラック４５２の歯元付近から正面側に延設される縦長板状の当接壁４５３と、を主に備える。
The transmission device 450 includes a pair of guide rods 451 fixed to the guide rod support portion 412 of the base member 410, and is supported by the guide rods 451 so as to be slidable, and the drive side slide member 420 is fastened and fixed, and the drive gear 442. A rack 452 meshed from the inside (inside the pair of drive gears 442) and a vertically long plate-like contact wall 453 extending from the vicinity of the tooth base of the rack 452 to the front side are mainly provided.
当接壁４５３は、上昇規制部材４１７を解除側に回転させる役割と、上昇規制部材４１７の付勢力を受けてラック４５２を駆動ギア４４２から離反する方向に寄せる役割とを備えるが、詳細は後述する。
The abutting wall 453 has a role of rotating the ascending restriction member 417 to the release side and a role of moving the rack 452 away from the drive gear 442 by receiving the urging force of the ascending restriction member 417. The details will be described later. To do.
下側前板部材４６０は、左右端部はベース部材４１０の本体部材４１１の正面側に締結固定され中央部は左右端部に比較して背面側に所定量オフセットされる態様で折曲される形状の本体部材４６１と、その本体部材４６１の左半部において左右方向に沿って（外側に近接するほど上昇傾斜する態様で）穿設される案内孔４６２と、本体部材４６１の上方に延設される筒状部材であって上端部が正面側に開口される筒状通路部４６３と、を主に備える。
The lower front plate member 460 is bent in such a manner that the left and right end portions are fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body member 411 of the base member 410 and the center portion is offset by a predetermined amount on the back side compared to the left and right end portions. A main body member 461 having a shape, a guide hole 462 drilled along the left-right direction in the left half of the main body member 461 (in a manner of rising and tilting toward the outside), and extending above the main body member 461 And a cylindrical passage portion 463 whose upper end is opened to the front side.
案内孔４６２は、配線収納部材４２３のスライド軸４２３ｂがスライド可能に案内される長孔である。
The guide hole 462 is a long hole through which the slide shaft 423b of the wiring storage member 423 is slidably guided.
筒状通路部４６３は、球が通過可能な筒状の部材であって、駆動側スライド部材４２０が連結位置に配置される状態（図３１参照）において、駆動側スライド部材４２０の第２通路形成部材４２２を通過して流下する球が通過する部材である。
The cylindrical passage portion 463 is a cylindrical member through which a sphere can pass, and the second passage formation of the drive side slide member 420 is performed in a state where the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the coupling position (see FIG. 31). A sphere that passes through the member 422 and flows down passes therethrough.
図２３から図２５を参照して、駆動側スライド部材４２０の詳細構成について説明する。図２３は、駆動側スライド部材４２０の分解正面斜視図であり、図２４は、駆動側スライド部材４２０の分解背面斜視図であり、図２５は、駆動側スライド部材４２０の背面図である。
With reference to FIGS. 23 to 25, a detailed configuration of the drive side slide member 420 will be described. 23 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side slide member 420, FIG. 24 is an exploded rear perspective view of the drive side slide member 420, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the drive side slide member 420.
図２３から図２５に図示されるように、駆動側スライド部材４２０は、左右方向に長尺な板状部材として構成される本体部材４２１と、円形の液晶から構成される演出部４２２ａを有する円盤部分が本体部材４２１の中心部に正面側から締結固定されると共にその円盤部分から正面視左方に球が通過可能な溝が延設される第２通路形成部材４２２と、その第２流路形成部材４２２の正面視左下端部に一方の端部が軸支され他方の端部が下側前板部材４６０の案内孔４６２に支持される配線収納部材４２３と、第２流路形成部材４２２に軸支されると共に軸の周方向に沿って貫通する通路部を有し第２流路形成部材４２２の溝部４２２ｂへ球を導入する部分としてはたらく接続部材４２４と、を主に備える。
As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the drive-side slide member 420 is a disk having a main body member 421 configured as a plate-like member elongated in the left-right direction and an effect portion 422 a configured from a circular liquid crystal. A second passage forming member 422 whose portion is fastened and fixed to the central portion of the main body member 421 from the front side, and a groove through which a sphere can pass to the left in front view from the disk portion; A wiring housing member 423 whose one end is pivotally supported at the lower left end of the forming member 422 when viewed from the front and whose other end is supported by the guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460, and a second flow path forming member 422. And a connection member 424 that has a passage portion that is pivotally supported along the circumferential direction of the shaft and serves as a portion for introducing a sphere into the groove portion 422b of the second flow path forming member 422.
本体部材４２１は、案内棒４５１（図２２参照）が挿通される筒状部の一部を構成する案内部４２１ａと、中央部から正面視左方に延設される部分に正面側に開放する態様で左方に下降傾斜して配設される溝部４２１ｂと、その溝部４２１ｂの左下端部において球の直径以上の大きさで前後方向に貫通形成される排出開口部４２１ｃと、を主に備える。
The main body member 421 opens to the front side in a guide portion 421a that constitutes a part of a cylindrical portion through which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted and a portion that extends from the center portion to the left in front view. And a discharge opening 421c formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction with a size equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere at the lower left end of the groove 421b. .
案内部４２１ａは、背面側に開放され鉛直方向に延設される断面円弧形状の溝部分であって、その開放部分を伝達装置４５０のラック４５２（図２２参照）で閉鎖することにより、案内棒４５１（図２２参照）が挿通される筒状部が構成される。
The guide portion 421a is a groove portion having an arc-shaped cross section that is open to the back side and extends in the vertical direction. The open portion is closed by a rack 452 (see FIG. 22) of the transmission device 450, thereby guiding the guide rod. A cylindrical portion into which 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted is configured.
溝部４２１ｂは、第２通路形成部材４２２と共同で球の通路を形成する部材であって、溝部４２１ｂに沿って流下した球は、排出開口部４２１ｃを通って本体部材４２１の背面側へ排出される。
The groove portion 421b is a member that forms a spherical passage in cooperation with the second passage forming member 422, and the sphere flowing down along the groove portion 421b is discharged to the back side of the main body member 421 through the discharge opening 421c. The
第２通路形成部材４２２は、円形の液晶から構成される演出部４２２ａと、その円形の液晶の背面側に配設される円盤部分から背面側へ円柱形状で凸設される軸支部４２２ｂと、その軸支部４２２ｂの下方に配設され球の通過を検出するセンサ部材４２２ｃと、そのセンサ部材４２２ｃを通過した球が流下可能な幅で背面側へ開放される溝であり溝部４２１ｂと前後方向で形状が一致する溝部４２２ｄと、案内棒４５１（図２２参照）が挿通される筒状部を構成する案内部４２２ｅと、軸支部４２２ｂとセンサ部材４２２ｃとの間で接続部材４２４を収容可能な形状で凹設される収容凹部４２２ｆと、を主に備える。
The second passage forming member 422 includes an effect portion 422a composed of a circular liquid crystal, and a shaft support portion 422b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from a disk portion disposed on the back side of the circular liquid crystal to the back side, A sensor member 422c that is disposed below the shaft support portion 422b and detects the passage of the sphere, and a groove that opens to the back side with a width that allows the sphere that has passed the sensor member 422c to flow down. A shape that can accommodate the connecting member 424 between the groove portion 422d having the same shape, the guide portion 422e constituting the cylindrical portion through which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted, and the shaft support portion 422b and the sensor member 422c. And an accommodation recess 422f that is recessed.
軸支部４２２ｂは、接続部材４２４が軸支される部分である。連結位置に液晶昇降ユニット４００が配置される状態において、左揺動ユニット５００を流下した球が接続部材４２４を介してセンサ部材４２２ｃを通過したあと、溝部４２２ｄ，４２１ｂの形成する通路を球が通過する。
The shaft support portion 422b is a portion on which the connection member 424 is supported. In a state where the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is disposed at the coupling position, the sphere that has flowed down the left swing unit 500 passes through the sensor member 422c through the connection member 424, and then passes through the passage formed by the groove portions 422d and 421b. To do.
配線収納部材４２３は、下側前側部材４６０等から延長され演出部４２２ａ等に接続される配線を収容する部材であって、第２通路形成部材４２２の正面視左下端部に軸支される長尺断面コ字状の棒状部分である本体部４２３ａと、その本体部４２３ａの下端部から背面側に凸設される円柱形状のスライド軸４２３ｂと、を主に備える。
The wiring housing member 423 is a member that houses the wiring that is extended from the lower front member 460 and the like and connected to the effect portion 422a and the like, and is a length that is pivotally supported by the left lower end portion of the second passage forming member 422 when viewed from the front. A main body 423a that is a bar-shaped portion having a U-shaped cross section and a columnar slide shaft 423b that protrudes from the lower end of the main body 423a to the back side are mainly provided.
本体部４２３ａは、断面コ字状に形成される内側部分に配線を収納する部材であって、長手方向に第２通路形成部材４２２から離反する方向に凸となる態様で湾曲した形状で構成される。これにより、第２通路形成部材４２２との軸支位置付近において、湾曲形状に沿って配線を弛ませることができ、配線が折れ曲げられて断線することを抑制することができる。
The main body portion 423a is a member that stores wiring in an inner portion formed in a U-shaped cross section, and is configured in a curved shape that is convex in a direction away from the second passage forming member 422 in the longitudinal direction. The Accordingly, the wiring can be loosened along the curved shape in the vicinity of the pivot support position with the second passage forming member 422, and the wiring can be prevented from being bent and disconnected.
スライド軸４２３ｂは、下側前板部材４６０の案内孔４６２に挿通される棒状部分である。
The slide shaft 423b is a bar-like portion that is inserted into the guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460.
次いで、図２６を参照して、接続部材４２４の構成について説明する。図２６（ａ）は、接続部材４２４の正面斜視図であり、図２６（ｂ）は、図２６（ａ）の矢印ＸＸＶＩｂ方向視における接続部材４２４の正面図であり、図２６（ｃ）は、図２６（ａ）の矢印ＸＸＶＩｃ方向視における接続部材４２４の背面図である。
Next, the configuration of the connection member 424 will be described with reference to FIG. 26A is a front perspective view of the connection member 424, FIG. 26B is a front view of the connection member 424 in the direction of arrow XXVIb in FIG. 26A, and FIG. FIG. 27 is a rear view of the connection member 424 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVIc in FIG.
図２６（ａ）から図２６（ｃ）に示すように、接続部材４２４は、筒状に形成され軸支部４２２ｂに軸支される筒状部４２４ａと、その筒状部４２４ａの径方向に延設される板状の上側壁部４２４ｂと、その上側壁部４２４ｂの正面視下方に球の直径以上の長さを空けて上側壁部４２４ｂと対向配置される湾曲した板状の下側壁部４２４ｃと、それら上側壁部４２４ｂ及び下側壁部４２４ｃの背面側端部を連結すると共に上側壁部４２４ｂ及び下側壁部４２４ｃの間に覆設される連結カバー４２４ｄと、筒状部４２４ａに巻き付けられ接続部材４２４に下向き（図２５（ｂ）反時計回り）の付勢力を与えるねじりバネ４２４ｅと、を主に備える。
As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c), the connecting member 424 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is supported in the radial direction of the cylindrical portion 424a. A plate-like upper side wall 424b provided, and a curved plate-like lower side wall 424c disposed opposite to the upper side wall 424b with a length equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere below the upper side wall 424b when viewed from the front. Connecting the upper side wall 424b and the lower side wall 424c to the back side and connecting cover 424d, which is covered between the upper side wall 424b and the lower side wall 424c, and is wound around and connected to the cylindrical part 424a. And a torsion spring 424e that mainly applies a downward biasing force (counterclockwise in FIG. 25B) to the member 424.
上側壁部４２４ｂは、筒状部４２４ａの径方向の端部から筒状部４２４ａの軸へ近接する程幅が大きくなる態様で形成され側面が図２５（ｂ）において直線に沿って形成される板状部である。
The upper side wall portion 424b is formed in such a manner that the width increases as it approaches the axis of the tubular portion 424a from the radial end portion of the tubular portion 424a, and the side surface is formed along a straight line in FIG. It is a plate-like part.
下側壁部４２４ｃは、筒状部４２４ａの軸を中心とした円弧に沿って湾曲形成される板状部であり、上側壁部４２４ｂとの間に球が通過可能な長さの空間を空けて配設される。
The lower wall portion 424c is a plate-like portion that is curved along an arc centering on the axis of the cylindrical portion 424a, and a space that allows a sphere to pass therethrough is provided between the lower wall portion 424c and the upper wall portion 424b. Arranged.
連結カバー４２４ｄは、接続部材４２４を通過する球が背面側にこぼれることを抑制する板部材である。なお、連結カバー４２４ｄの反対側（正面側）に構成される接続部材４２４の開放部は、第２通路形成部材４２２の収容凹部４２２ｆの底部が正面側から当接されることで塞がれる。これにより、球が接続部材４２４の開放部からこぼれることを抑制することができる。
The connection cover 424d is a plate member that suppresses spilling of a sphere passing through the connection member 424 to the back side. In addition, the open part of the connection member 424 configured on the opposite side (front side) of the connection cover 424d is closed by the bottom part of the housing recess 422f of the second passage forming member 422 coming into contact with the front side. Thereby, it can suppress that a ball | bowl spills from the open part of the connection member 424. FIG.
図２７及び図２８を参照して、第２通路形成部材４２２に対する接続部材４２４の動作について説明する。図２７及び図２８は、第２通路形成部材４２２及び接続部材４２４の背面図である。なお、図２７では、接続部材４２４の上側壁部４２４ｂ及び下側壁部４２４ｃにより構成される開放部が左右方向を向く下傾斜状態が図示され、図２８では、図２７の状態に比較して接続部材４２４の上側壁部４２４ｂ及び下側壁部４２４ｃにより構成される開放部が斜め上方向を向く上傾斜状態が図示され、図２７が後述する離間状態（図４１参照）に対応し、図２８が後述する連通状態（図４２参照）に対応する。
With reference to FIGS. 27 and 28, the operation of the connecting member 424 with respect to the second passage forming member 422 will be described. 27 and 28 are rear views of the second passage forming member 422 and the connecting member 424. FIG. 27 shows a downwardly inclined state in which the open portion constituted by the upper wall portion 424b and the lower wall portion 424c of the connection member 424 faces the left-right direction, and in FIG. 28, the connection is made in comparison with the state of FIG. FIG. 27 corresponds to a separated state (see FIG. 41), which will be described later, and FIG. 28 corresponds to a separated state (see FIG. 41), in which an open portion constituted by the upper wall portion 424b and the lower wall portion 424c of the member 424 faces obliquely upward. This corresponds to a communication state (see FIG. 42) described later.
図２７及び図２８に示すように、接続部材４２４は、第２通路形成部材４２２の収容凹部４２２ｆに収容された状態で軸支部４２２ｂを中心に回転動作可能とされ、第２通路形成部材４２２の収容凹部４２２ｆの底部に上側壁部４２４ｂ及び下側壁部４２４ｃの正面側端面が当接される。
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the connection member 424 can rotate around the shaft support portion 422b while being accommodated in the accommodation recess 422f of the second passage formation member 422. The front side end surfaces of the upper side wall part 424b and the lower side wall part 424c are brought into contact with the bottom part of the housing recess 422f.
収容凹部４２２ｆは、図２７に図示される状態で接続部材４２４の下側壁部４２４ｃと対向配置される部分に、下側壁部４２４ｃの外径に沿って軸支部４２２ｂを中心とした円弧形状に形成される湾曲壁部４２２ｆ１と、その湾曲壁部４２２ｆ１と対向配置される面が湾曲壁部４２２ｆ１から遠ざかる方向に凹み上傾斜状態（図４２参照）において接続部材４２４の上側壁部４２４ｂと滑らかに連結される湾曲面を有する対向壁部４２２ｆ２と、を備える。
In the state shown in FIG. 27, the housing recess 422f is formed in an arc shape centered on the shaft support portion 422b along the outer diameter of the lower wall portion 424c in a portion opposed to the lower wall portion 424c of the connection member 424. The curved wall portion 422f1 and the surface opposed to the curved wall portion 422f1 are recessed in a direction away from the curved wall portion 422f1, and smoothly connected to the upper wall portion 424b of the connection member 424 in the inclined state (see FIG. 42). An opposing wall portion 422f2 having a curved surface.
湾曲壁部４２２ｆ１は、接続部材４２４の下傾斜状態において下側壁部４２４ｃと径方向で面当たりされるので、接続部材４２４の軸径方向の位置ずれを抑制することができる。
Since the curved wall portion 422f1 is brought into contact with the lower wall portion 424c in the radial direction in the downwardly inclined state of the connecting member 424, the displacement of the connecting member 424 in the axial radial direction can be suppressed.
従って、軸支部４２２ｂと接続部材４２４の筒状部４２４ａとの嵌合を緩め（隙間の大きい状態、例えば、寸法が０．５ｍｍから１ｍｍの間の隙間を有する状態）としたとしても、接続部材４２４が下傾斜状態とされる場合には下側壁部４２４ｃと湾曲壁部４２２ｆ１との当接により、接続部材４２４の姿勢を高精度に維持することができる。
Therefore, even if the fitting between the shaft support portion 422b and the tubular portion 424a of the connection member 424 is loosened (a state where the gap is large, for example, a state where the dimension is between 0.5 mm and 1 mm), the connection member When 424 is in the downward inclined state, the posture of the connecting member 424 can be maintained with high accuracy by the contact between the lower wall portion 424c and the curved wall portion 422f1.
一方で、軸支部４２２ｂと接続部材４２４の筒状部４２４ａとの嵌合を緩めとする場合、軸支部分に生じる動作抵抗が低減されるので、他の部材からの負荷が生じない限り、接続部材４２４を重力の作用およびねじりバネ４２４ｅの付勢力で確実に下傾斜状態に維持することができる。従って、他の部材からの負荷が生じていないのに、接続部材４２４が上傾斜状態に維持される事態を抑制する事ができる。
On the other hand, when loosening the fitting between the shaft support portion 422b and the cylindrical portion 424a of the connection member 424, since the operation resistance generated in the shaft support portion is reduced, the connection is made unless a load from other members occurs. The member 424 can be reliably maintained in the downward inclined state by the action of gravity and the biasing force of the torsion spring 424e. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the connection member 424 is maintained in the upwardly inclined state even when no load is generated from other members.
対向壁部４２２ｆ２は、接続部材４２４からセンサ部材４２２ｃへ球を案内する部分である。本実施形態では、湾曲壁部４２２ｆ１と対向配置する面が湾曲することにより、球を滑らかにセンサ部材４２２ｃへ案内することができる。
The opposing wall portion 422f2 is a portion that guides the sphere from the connection member 424 to the sensor member 422c. In the present embodiment, the surface facing the curved wall portion 422f1 is curved, so that the sphere can be smoothly guided to the sensor member 422c.
上傾斜状態は、左揺動ユニット５００の第１通路形成部材５２０と接続部材４２４とが連通される連通状態において形成される。この状態では、下側壁部４２４ｃがセンサ部材４２２ｃの開口から離間されるので、接続部材４２４の下側壁部４２４ｃを転動して通過した球は湾曲壁部４２２ｆ１を転動し、センサ部材４２２ｃの開口を通過して溝部４２２ｄを流下する。
The upward inclined state is formed in a communication state in which the first passage forming member 520 and the connection member 424 of the left swing unit 500 are communicated. In this state, since the lower wall portion 424c is separated from the opening of the sensor member 422c, the ball that rolls and passes through the lower wall portion 424c of the connection member 424 rolls on the curved wall portion 422f1, and the sensor member 422c Passing through the opening, it flows down the groove 422d.
一方、下傾斜状態は、左揺動ユニット５００の第１通路形成部材５２０と接続部材４２４とが離間される離間状態において形成される。この状態では、下側壁部４２４ｃが、センサ部材４２２ｃの開口の内側まで張り出し、下側壁部４２２ｃの下側端部と、その下側端部と対向配置される収容凹部４２２ｆの壁面（センサ部材４２２ｃから鉛直上方に延びる壁面）との間の寸法が球の直径以下とされることで、球が接続部材４２４を通過する（球が下端部から排出される）ことが防止される。
On the other hand, the downward inclined state is formed in a separated state in which the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 of the left swing unit 500 are separated. In this state, the lower wall portion 424c extends to the inside of the opening of the sensor member 422c, and the lower end portion of the lower wall portion 422c and the wall surface (the sensor member 422c) of the housing recess 422f disposed to face the lower end portion. The dimension between the first wall and the wall surface extending vertically upward is equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere, so that the sphere is prevented from passing through the connecting member 424 (the sphere is discharged from the lower end).
そのため、後述するように、離間状態において球が接続部材４２４に到達したとしても、その球の流れを接続部材４２４で停滞させることができる。
Therefore, as described later, even when the sphere reaches the connection member 424 in the separated state, the flow of the sphere can be stopped by the connection member 424.
次いで、図２９から図３３を参照して、駆動側スライド部材４２０及び従動側スライド部材４３０の昇降動作について説明する。まず、図２９及び図３０を参照して駆動側スライド部材４２０、従動側スライド部材４３０及びベース部材４１０の位置関係を説明する。
Next, with reference to FIGS. 29 to 33, the raising and lowering operations of the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 will be described. First, the positional relationship among the drive side slide member 420, the driven side slide member 430, and the base member 410 will be described with reference to FIGS.
図２９は、液晶昇降ユニット４００の正面図であり、図３０は、図２９の矢印ＸＸＸ方向視における液晶昇降ユニット４００の側面図である。なお、図２９及び図３０では、駆動側スライド部材４２０及び従動側スライド部材４３０が下降位置に配置された状態が図示されると共に、カバー部材４７０の内で左右一対のカバー部材の図示が省略され伝達部材４５０が視認可能とされる。また、図２９では、正面視右側の下降規制部材４１５及び上昇規制部材４１７が部分的に拡大視されると共に、当接壁４５３と上昇規制部材４１７の解除凸部４１７ｃとが当接する直前のラック４５２の外形が想像線で図示される。
FIG. 29 is a front view of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400, and FIG. 30 is a side view of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXX in FIG. 29 and 30 show a state in which the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are disposed at the lowered position, and the pair of left and right cover members in the cover member 470 are not shown. The transmission member 450 is visible. In FIG. 29, the lowering restricting member 415 and the raising restricting member 417 on the right side when viewed from the front are partially enlarged, and the rack immediately before the contact wall 453 and the release convex portion 417c of the raising restricting member 417 come into contact with each other. The outline of 452 is illustrated with imaginary lines.
図２９及び図３０に示すように、従動側スライド部材４３０は、下降位置において、落下防止部４３５がベース部材４１０の係止部４１３に下側から当接されると共に、鉤状部４３４が上昇規制部材４１７に上側から当接される。このように、従動側スライド部材４３０は上下両方向から移動を規制される態様とされるので、下降位置において従動側スライド部材４３０が上下方向にがたつくことを抑制することができる。
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, in the driven side slide member 430, in the lowered position, the fall prevention portion 435 is brought into contact with the locking portion 413 of the base member 410 from the lower side, and the hook-like portion 434 is raised. It abuts on the regulating member 417 from above. As described above, the driven-side slide member 430 is configured to be restricted from moving in both the upper and lower directions, so that the driven-side slide member 430 can be prevented from rattling in the vertical direction at the lowered position.
また、案内孔４３３に挿通される案内棒４５１を挟んで上昇規制部材４１７及び係止部４１３が配設され、それらが従動側スライド部材４３０の機能部４３２と当接可能とされるので、機能部４３２が案内棒４５１の軸直角方向（図２９左右方向）にがたつくことを抑制できる。従って、下降位置に配置された瞬間や、パチンコ機１０（図１参照）が遊技者から叩かれた場合等、従動側スライド部材４３０に外乱が生じたとしても、従動側スライド部材４３０ががたつくことを抑制でき、第３図柄表示装置８１の演出効果を向上させることができる。
In addition, the rising restricting member 417 and the locking portion 413 are disposed across the guide rod 451 inserted through the guide hole 433, and these can be brought into contact with the functional portion 432 of the driven side slide member 430. It is possible to suppress the portion 432 from rattling in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the guide rod 451 (the left-right direction in FIG. 29). Therefore, even if a disturbance occurs in the driven slide member 430 at the moment when it is placed at the lowered position or when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is struck by a player, the driven slide member 430 will rattle. And the effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.
更に、上昇規制部材４１７と、係止部４１３の上下方向の位置がずれて配設されるので、機能部４３２が斜め方向（例えば係止部４１３と上昇規制部材４１７とを結ぶ方向）にがたつくことを抑制することができる。そのため、下降位置に配置された瞬間や、パチンコ機１０（図１参照）が遊技者から叩かれた場合等、従動側スライド部材４３０に外乱が生じたとしても、従動側スライド部材４３０ががたつくことを抑制でき、第３図柄表示装置８１の演出効果を向上させることができる。
Further, since the vertical position of the ascending restriction member 417 and the locking portion 413 are shifted, the functional portion 432 is rattled in an oblique direction (for example, the direction connecting the locking portion 413 and the rising restriction member 417). This can be suppressed. Therefore, even if a disturbance occurs in the driven slide member 430, such as when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is struck by the player at the moment when it is placed at the lowered position, the driven slide member 430 may rattle. And the effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.
なお、上昇規制部材４１７と比較して、係止部４１３が上方に位置ずれしているので、係止部４１３が駆動側スライド部材４２０から遠い位置に配置され、係止部４１３が駆動側スライド部材４２０の昇降動作を阻害しにくくできる。従って、駆動側スライド部材４２０の設計自由度を向上させることができる。
In addition, since the locking portion 413 is displaced upward as compared with the ascending restriction member 417, the locking portion 413 is disposed at a position far from the drive side slide member 420, and the lock portion 413 is driven side slide. It is possible to make it difficult to prevent the member 420 from moving up and down. Therefore, the design freedom of the drive side slide member 420 can be improved.
図３０に示すように、下降規制部材４１５の方が上昇規制部材４１７の前方に配置され、伝達装置４５０の当接壁４５３の形成高さ（ラック４５２の歯元付近からの張出長さ）が下降規制部材４１５に到達する手前までの高さとされるので、下降規制部材４１５の回転方向において下降規制部材４１５と当接壁４５３とは当接しない。また、鉤状部４３４が上昇規制部材４１７と前後方向で同等の位置に配置されることから、鉤状部４３４と下降規制部材４１５とは上下方向で当接しない。
As shown in FIG. 30, the lowering restricting member 415 is disposed in front of the raising restricting member 417, and the height of formation of the contact wall 453 of the transmission device 450 (the protruding length from the vicinity of the tooth base of the rack 452). Therefore, the lowering restriction member 415 and the abutting wall 453 are not in contact with each other in the rotational direction of the lowering restriction member 415. Further, since the hook-shaped portion 434 is disposed at the same position in the front-rear direction as the ascent restriction member 417, the hook-like portion 434 and the lowering restriction member 415 do not contact in the up-down direction.
一方、ラック４５２は、当接壁４５３の上端部から正面側へ凸設される凸設板４５３ａを備え、その凸設板４５３ａが下降規制部材４１５と回転方向で当接可能とされる。
On the other hand, the rack 452 includes a protruding plate 453a that protrudes from the upper end portion of the abutting wall 453 to the front side, and the protruding plate 453a can be brought into contact with the lowering restriction member 415 in the rotation direction.
図３１は、液晶昇降ユニット４００の正面図である。なお、図３１では、駆動側スライド部材４２０が下降位置から上昇移動され、連結位置に配置された状態が図示されると共に、カバー部材４７０の内で左右一対のカバー部材の図示が省略される。また、図３１では、正面視右側の下降規制部材４１５及び上昇規制部材４１７が部分的に拡大視される。
FIG. 31 is a front view of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400. In FIG. 31, the drive-side slide member 420 is lifted from the lowered position and disposed at the connection position, and the pair of left and right cover members in the cover member 470 is omitted. In FIG. 31, the lowering restricting member 415 and the raising restricting member 417 on the right side when viewed from the front are partially enlarged.
駆動側スライド部材４２０が連結位置に配置される状態において、左揺動ユニット５００（図４２参照）を介して接続部材４２４に球を導入可能とされる。
In a state where the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the coupling position, a sphere can be introduced into the connection member 424 via the left swing unit 500 (see FIG. 42).
図２９及び図３１に示すように、上昇規制部材４１７は、当接壁４５３の上端部が上昇規制部材４１７に当接される前の状態において鉤状部４３４に上側から被さる部材であって、図２９に示す係合状態と、図３１に示す解除状態との間を回転動作可能とされる。なお、解除状態とは、図３１の状態に限定されず、鉤状部４３４の鉛直上方から上昇規制部材４１７が退避される姿勢まで上昇規制部材４１７が回転された状態を意味する。
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 31, the rise restricting member 417 is a member that covers the flange-like portion 434 from the upper side before the upper end portion of the abutting wall 453 is brought into contact with the rise restricting member 417. It is possible to rotate between the engaged state shown in FIG. 29 and the released state shown in FIG. The release state is not limited to the state of FIG. 31, and means a state in which the rise restricting member 417 is rotated from the vertically upper side of the bowl-shaped portion 434 to the posture in which the rise restricting member 417 is retracted.
上昇規制部材４１７は、第２軸支部４１６に軸支される円筒部４１７ａと、その円筒部４１７ａの接線方向に直線上に延設される延設板４１７ｂと、その延設板４１７ｂの一方の端部（下側の端部）から垂直に凸設される解除凸部４１７ｃと、延設板４１７ｂの他方の端部から垂直に凸設される係合凸部４１７ｄと、その係合凸部４１７ｄの凸設端部において係合状態で鉤状部４３４の延設方向と平行に延びると共に鉤状部４３４の先端部よりも上内方（図２９拡大図左上方）に配設される係合爪部４１７ｅと、係合凸部４１７ｄの凸設端部の上側側面において下降傾斜される離間傾斜部４１７ｆと、円筒部４１７ａに巻き付け形成され一方の端部がベース部材４１０の本体部材４１１に係止されることにより上昇規制部材４１７を内巻き方向（図２９拡大図反時計回り方向）に付勢するねじりバネ４１７ｇと、を主に備える。
The rise restricting member 417 includes a cylindrical portion 417a that is pivotally supported by the second pivotal support portion 416, an extension plate 417b that extends linearly in the tangential direction of the cylindrical portion 417a, and one of the extension plates 417b. A release protrusion 417c that protrudes vertically from the end (lower end), an engagement protrusion 417d that protrudes vertically from the other end of the extension plate 417b, and the engagement protrusion In the engaged end portion of 417d, the engagement portion extends in parallel with the extending direction of the hook-like portion 434 and is disposed above and inward of the tip end portion of the hook-like portion 434 (upper left of the enlarged view of FIG. 29). A claw portion 417e, a separation inclined portion 417f that is inclined downward on the upper side surface of the protruding end portion of the engaging convex portion 417d, and one end portion of the cylindrical member 417a are wound around the main body member 411 of the base member 410. The rise restricting member 417 is wound inward by being locked. Mainly it includes a spring 417g torsion biasing (Figure 29 enlarged view counterclockwise direction), the.
延設板４１７ｂは、円筒部４１７ａの軸よりも上方に延設される。これにより、解除凸部４１７ｃが押し上げられた際に、延設板４１７ｂの他方の端部を従動側スライド部材４３０から離反する方向に移動させることができ、解除動作を行うことができる。
The extending plate 417b extends upward from the axis of the cylindrical portion 417a. As a result, when the release convex portion 417c is pushed up, the other end of the extension plate 417b can be moved away from the driven slide member 430, and the release operation can be performed.
係合爪部４１７ｅは、係合状態において、従動側スライド部材４３０が上方に移動しかけても、鉤状部４３４と噛み合うことにより（鉤状部４３４と機能部４３２との間に係合爪部４１７ｅが入り込むことにより）、従動側スライド部材４３０の移動を強固に抑制する。
In the engaged state, the engaging claw portion 417e engages with the hook-shaped portion 434 even when the driven-side slide member 430 moves upward (the engaging claw portion between the hook-shaped portion 434 and the functional portion 432). 417e), the movement of the driven slide member 430 is strongly suppressed.
上昇規制部材４１７の解除動作について説明する。まず、図２９に示す状態では、当接壁４５３の上端が解除凸部４１７ｃに当接される一方、上昇規制部材４１７は係合状態に維持される。この状態から、ラック４５２が図３１の状態まで上昇動作されると、当接壁４５３の端部が解除凸部４１３ｃを押し上げることにより上昇規制部材４１７が外巻き方向（図３１拡大図時計回り方向）に回転され、係合凸部４１７ｄが鉤状部４３４の上方から退避される（解除状態）。
The releasing operation of the rise restricting member 417 will be described. First, in the state shown in FIG. 29, the upper end of the abutting wall 453 is brought into contact with the release convex portion 417c, while the ascending restriction member 417 is maintained in the engaged state. From this state, when the rack 452 is moved up to the state shown in FIG. 31, the end of the abutting wall 453 pushes up the release convex portion 413c, so that the rising restricting member 417 is rotated outward (clockwise in FIG. 31). ), And the engaging convex portion 417d is retracted from above the hook-shaped portion 434 (released state).
即ち、上昇規制部材４１７の解除動作を、ラック４５２の上昇動作のみにより行うことができる。そのため、例えば、上昇規制部材４１７の解除動作を行うソレノイド部材を別で配設する場合に比較して、上昇規制部材４１７の解除動作を行う駆動装置を駆動モータ４４１（図２２参照）で兼用することができ、駆動装置の配設個数を低減する事ができる（製品コストを低減することができる）。また、不用意に上昇規制部材４１７が動作されることを抑制することができる。
In other words, the release operation of the ascending restriction member 417 can be performed only by the ascending operation of the rack 452. Therefore, for example, as compared with the case where a separate solenoid member that performs the release operation of the rise restricting member 417 is provided separately, the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 22) also serves as the drive device that performs the release operation of the rise restricting member 417. And the number of drive devices can be reduced (product cost can be reduced). Moreover, it can suppress that the raise control member 417 is operated carelessly.
換言すれば、本実施形態によれば、ラック４５２の配置に応じて上昇規制部材４１７が動作されるので、上昇規制部材４１７を別の駆動源（ソレノイド等）で動作させる場合に比較して、ラック４５２と上昇規制部材４１７との動作タイミングが合わずに動作不良を起こすことを抑制することができ、従動側スライド部材４３０が上昇動作する場合には上昇規制部材４１７を確実に解除状態へ移行させることができる。例えば、上昇規制部材４１７が係合状態のままラック４５２が上昇動作され、鉤状部４３４及び上昇規制部材４１７の係合凸部４１７ｄに過度な負荷がかけられることを抑制することができる。
In other words, according to the present embodiment, since the rise restricting member 417 is operated according to the arrangement of the rack 452, compared to the case where the rise restricting member 417 is operated by another drive source (solenoid or the like), It is possible to prevent malfunction due to the timing of the operation of the rack 452 and the rise restricting member 417 not matching each other, and when the driven side slide member 430 moves upward, the rise restricting member 417 is surely shifted to the release state. Can be made. For example, it is possible to prevent the rack 452 from being lifted while the rise restricting member 417 is engaged, and an excessive load being applied to the hook-like portion 434 and the engagement convex portion 417d of the rise restricting member 417.
更に、ラック４５２が上昇動作され、ラック４５２の上端と従動側スライド部材４３０の下端とが当接される直前に上昇規制部材４１７が解除状態に移行されるので、ラック４５２が上昇動作を継続するだけで、従動側スライド部材４３０及び駆動側スライド部材４２０が離間している状態では係合状態（図２９参照）を構成し従動側スライド部材４３０のがたつきを防止する一方で、従動側スライド部材４３０及び駆動側スライド部材４２０が当接している状態では解除状態（図３１参照）を構成し従動側スライド部材４３０を上昇動作させる際に必要な駆動力を抑制することができる。
Further, since the rack 452 is moved upward and the lift restricting member 417 is shifted to the released state immediately before the upper end of the rack 452 and the lower end of the driven slide member 430 are brought into contact with each other, the rack 452 continues to move upward. Only when the driven-side slide member 430 and the drive-side slide member 420 are separated from each other, an engaged state (see FIG. 29) is configured to prevent rattling of the driven-side slide member 430, while the driven-side slide In a state where the member 430 and the driving side slide member 420 are in contact with each other, a release state (see FIG. 31) is formed, and a driving force necessary for raising the driven side sliding member 430 can be suppressed.
ここで、本実施形態のように、駆動側スライド部材４２０の上昇動作の途中で駆動側スライド部材４２０が従動側スライド部材４３０を押し上げる構成の場合、従動側スライド部材４３０と係合部との解除は、従動側スライド部材４３０を押し上げる動作により行うことも可能であるが、この場合、従動側スライド部材４３０の押し上げ力により解除できる程度の係合状態とする必要があり、強固な係合が困難となる。また、この場合、従動側スライド部材４３０と係合部との解除時に生じる反動により従動側スライド部材４３０が振動して姿勢が不安定となるという問題があった。
Here, as in the present embodiment, when the drive-side slide member 420 pushes up the driven-side slide member 430 during the ascending operation of the drive-side slide member 420, the driven-side slide member 430 and the engagement portion are released. Can be performed by pushing up the driven slide member 430, but in this case, it is necessary to establish an engagement state that can be released by the pushing force of the driven slide member 430, and it is difficult to perform strong engagement. It becomes. Also, in this case, there is a problem that the driven slide member 430 vibrates due to the reaction that occurs when the driven slide member 430 and the engaging portion are released, and the posture becomes unstable.
一方、本実施形態では、上昇規制部材４１７を回転動作させ、従動側スライド部材４３０の鉤状部４３４の上方から上昇規制部材４１７を退避させることにより係合の解除を行うので、係合状態において従動側スライド部材４３０に負荷可能な力と上昇規制部材４１７を回転動作させる力とを異ならせることができる。従って、解除に必要な力は抑制しながら、係合状態において従動側スライド部材４３０の上昇動作を抑制する力を増加させることができる。
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the engagement is released by rotating the ascent restricting member 417 and retracting the ascent restricting member 417 from above the hook-like portion 434 of the driven slide member 430. The force that can be applied to the driven side slide member 430 and the force that rotates the ascending restriction member 417 can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to increase the force that suppresses the upward movement of the driven-side slide member 430 in the engaged state while suppressing the force necessary for release.
また、上昇規制部材４１７の解除動作を行う際に駆動側スライド部材４２０及び従動側スライド部材４３０が当接しないので、従動側スライド部材４３０に反動が生じにくくなり、解除時の従動側スライド部材４３０の姿勢を安定させることができる。
In addition, since the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 do not come into contact with each other when the lifting restricting member 417 is released, the driven side slide member 430 is less likely to react, and the driven side slide member 430 is released. Can stabilize the posture.
なお、図３１に示す連結状態において、駆動側スライド部材４２０の排出開口部４２１ｃと、下側前板部材４６０の筒状通路部４６３とが連通される。これにより、第２通路形成部材４２２を流下した球を筒状通路部４６３に排出することが可能となる。
In the connected state shown in FIG. 31, the discharge opening 421c of the drive side slide member 420 and the cylindrical passage portion 463 of the lower front plate member 460 are communicated with each other. As a result, the sphere that has flowed down the second passage forming member 422 can be discharged to the cylindrical passage portion 463.
図３２及び図３３は、液晶昇降ユニット４００の正面図である。なお、図３２では、図３１に図示される状態から駆動側スライド部材４２０が上昇動作し、伝達装置４５０の凸設板４５３ａが下降規制部材４１５に当接しかけた状態が図示され、図３３では、図３２に図示される状態から駆動側スライド部材４２０が上昇動作し、凸設板４５３ａが下降規制部材４１５の上側に乗り上げた上昇位置に配置された状態が図示される。また、図３３では、下降規制部材４１５付近が部分的に拡大視される。
32 and 33 are front views of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400. FIG. 32 illustrates a state in which the drive-side slide member 420 is lifted from the state illustrated in FIG. 31 and the projecting plate 453a of the transmission device 450 is coming into contact with the descending restriction member 415. In FIG. 32, the drive side slide member 420 is lifted from the state shown in FIG. 32, and the state where the convex plate 453a is disposed at the lifted position on the upper side of the drop restricting member 415 is illustrated. In FIG. 33, the vicinity of the lowering restriction member 415 is partially enlarged.
図３２に図示される状態において、上昇規制部材４１７の解除凸部４１７ｃが伝達装置４５０の当接壁４５３に当接される。本実施形態では、一対の伝達装置４５０が左右対称に配設され、解除凸部４１７ｃが当接壁４５３に当接する向きも左右対称とされる。そのため、解除凸部４１７ｃが駆動側スライド部材４２０を案内するガイドとして働き、駆動側スライド部材４２０が昇降動作中に左右方向にがたつくことを抑制することができる。
In the state illustrated in FIG. 32, the release convex portion 417 c of the rise restricting member 417 is brought into contact with the contact wall 453 of the transmission device 450. In the present embodiment, the pair of transmission devices 450 are arranged symmetrically in the left-right direction, and the direction in which the release convex portion 417c contacts the contact wall 453 is also left-right symmetrical. Therefore, the release convex portion 417c functions as a guide for guiding the drive side slide member 420, and it is possible to suppress the drive side slide member 420 from rattling in the left-right direction during the raising / lowering operation.
上昇規制部材４１７は、ねじりバネ４１７ｇにより液晶昇降ユニット４００の左右内向き方向に付勢されるので、解除凸部４１７ｃから当接壁４５３に対して液晶昇降ユニット４００の左右内向き方向の負荷がかけられる。これにより、駆動側スライド部材４２０が左右方向に沿って一定の方向に付勢されるので、駆動側スライド部材４２０の昇降動作中の姿勢を安定させることができる。
Since the rise restricting member 417 is urged in the left-right inward direction of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 by the torsion spring 417g, a load in the left / right inward direction of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is applied to the contact wall 453 from the release convex portion 417c. It can be applied. As a result, the drive side slide member 420 is urged in a certain direction along the left-right direction, so that the posture of the drive side slide member 420 during the raising / lowering operation can be stabilized.
更に、左右方向に駆動側スライド部材４２０が位置ずれした場合に解除凸部４１７ｃから当接壁４５３にかけられる弾性的な力は、駆動側スライド部材４２０を中心位置に復帰させる態様で、左右一対の上昇規制部材４１７において左右非対称となる。
Further, when the driving-side slide member 420 is displaced in the left-right direction, the elastic force applied to the contact wall 453 from the release convex portion 417c is a mode in which the driving-side slide member 420 is returned to the center position, The rise restricting member 417 is asymmetric in the left-right direction.
即ち、当接壁４５３が解除凸部４１７ｃに近接する方向に移動する側では上昇規制部材４１７が解除側に更に回転されることにより、ねじりバネ４１７ｇの変形量が増加し付勢力が増大され当接壁４５３を押し戻す力が増大する一方、当接壁４５３が解除凸部４１７ｃから離反する方向に移動する側では上昇規制部材４１７が解除側とは逆方向に回転されることにより、ねじりバネ４１７ｇの変形量が減少し付勢力が低減され当接壁４５３を押しやる力が低減される。これにより、駆動側スライド部材４２０が昇降動作される際に左右方向にがたつくことを抑制することができる。
That is, on the side where the abutment wall 453 moves in the direction approaching the release convex portion 417c, the rise restricting member 417 is further rotated to the release side, whereby the deformation amount of the torsion spring 417g is increased and the biasing force is increased. While the force to push back the contact wall 453 increases, the rise restricting member 417 is rotated in the direction opposite to the release side on the side where the contact wall 453 moves away from the release convex portion 417c, whereby the torsion spring 417g. The amount of deformation is reduced, the urging force is reduced, and the force pushing the contact wall 453 is reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress rattling in the left-right direction when the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down.
ラック４５２に対して駆動ギア４４２及び上昇規制部材４１７が同じ側に配設されるので、ねじりバネ４１７ｇの付勢力がラック４５２を駆動ギア４４２から離反させる方向に働くので、駆動側スライド部材４２０が左右方向にがたついてラック４５２と駆動ギア４４２とが近接し、駆動抵抗が上昇することを抑制することができる（ラック４５２及び駆動ギア４４２の歯面の間隔を安定化することができる）。
Since the drive gear 442 and the rise restricting member 417 are disposed on the same side with respect to the rack 452, the urging force of the torsion spring 417g acts in a direction to separate the rack 452 from the drive gear 442, so that the drive side slide member 420 is It is possible to prevent the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 from approaching each other in the left-right direction and increase the drive resistance (the interval between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 can be stabilized).
即ち、駆動側スライド部材４２０が左右方向にがたついてラック４５２が駆動ギア４４２に近接する向きに移動する場合、上昇規制部材４１７が外巻き（係合凸部４１７ｄが液晶昇降ユニット４００の左右外側方向に移動する回転方向）に回転されることで、ねじりバネ４１７ｇの変形量が増大し、付勢力が増大することで駆動側スライド部材４２０を押し戻す付勢力が増大される一方、ラック４５２が駆動ギア４４２から離反する向きに移動する場合、案内棒４５１がラック４５２を支持する事により、案内棒４５１とラック４５２との間の支持構造に設けられる隙間以上にラック４５２が駆動ギア４４２から離反することが規制される。これにより、ラック４５２及び駆動ギア４２２の歯面の間隔が狭くなり、歯合抵抗が過大となることを抑制できると共に、ラック４５２及び駆動ギア４２２の歯面の間隔が広くなり、歯ずれが生じることを抑制することができる。
That is, when the drive-side slide member 420 rattles in the left-right direction and the rack 452 moves in the direction approaching the drive gear 442, the ascending restriction member 417 is wound outward (the engagement convex portion 417d is the left-right outer side of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400). , The amount of deformation of the torsion spring 417g is increased, and the biasing force is increased to increase the biasing force to push back the drive side slide member 420, while the rack 452 is driven. When moving in a direction away from the gear 442, the guide bar 451 supports the rack 452, so that the rack 452 is separated from the drive gear 442 more than the gap provided in the support structure between the guide bar 451 and the rack 452. Is regulated. As a result, the gap between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 422 is narrowed, and it is possible to prevent the meshing resistance from becoming excessive, and the gap between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 422 is widened, resulting in tooth misalignment. This can be suppressed.
図３３に示すように、駆動側スライド部材４２０及び従動側スライド部材４３０が上昇位置に配置された状態において、伝達装置４５０の凸設板４５３ａの下側面が下降規制部材４１５の解除凸部４１５ｃの上側面と当接する（係止状態）。
As shown in FIG. 33, in the state where the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are arranged at the raised position, the lower side surface of the projection plate 453a of the transmission device 450 is the release projection 415c of the lowering restriction member 415. Abuts the upper side (locked state).
凸設板４５３ａは、下側面に左右外側へ向かうほど上昇傾斜する態様の傾斜側面４５３ａ１を備える。
The projecting plate 453a includes an inclined side surface 453a1 that is inclined upward toward the left and right outer sides on the lower side surface.
下降傾斜部材４１５は、第１軸支部４１４に軸支される円筒部４１５ａと、その円筒部４１５ａの接線方向に直線上に延設される延設板４１５ｂと、その延設板４１５ｂの一方の端部（上側の端部）から垂直に凸設され先端が半円状に形成される解除凸部４１５ｃと、円筒部４１５ａに巻き付け形成され一方の端部がベース部材４１０の本体部材４１１に係止されることにより下降規制部材４１５を内巻き方向（図３３の拡大視において反時計回り方向）に付勢するねじりバネ４１５ｄと、を主に備える。
The descending inclined member 415 includes a cylindrical portion 415a that is pivotally supported by the first pivotal support portion 414, an extension plate 415b that extends linearly in the tangential direction of the cylindrical portion 415a, and one of the extension plates 415b. A release convex portion 415c that is vertically projected from the end portion (upper end portion) and has a tip formed in a semicircular shape, and one end portion is engaged with the main body member 411 of the base member 410 while being wound around the cylindrical portion 415a. A torsion spring 415d that mainly biases the lowering restricting member 415 in the inner winding direction (counterclockwise direction in the enlarged view of FIG. 33) when stopped.
図３３に図示されるように、伝達装置４５０のラック４５２が下降規制部材４１５により係止される。そのため、ラック４５２を上昇位置に保持したまま、駆動モータ４４１（図２２参照）の駆動力の供給を停止することができ、駆動モータ４４１の消費電力を低減することができる。
As illustrated in FIG. 33, the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 is locked by the lowering restriction member 415. Therefore, the supply of the driving force of the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 22) can be stopped while the rack 452 is held in the raised position, and the power consumption of the drive motor 441 can be reduced.
また、図３３に図示される係止状態への下降規制部材４１５の回転動作は、ラック４５２が上昇動作され凸設板４５３ａが下降規制部材４１５の解除凸部４１５ｃを乗り越えることにより行われる。そのため、ラック４５２を上昇動作させるための駆動力および下降規制部材４１５の係止状態を形成するための駆動力を共に駆動モータ４４１（図２参照）により発生させることができる。即ち、駆動モータ４４１を兼用することができ、その分だけ製品コストを低減することができる。
Also, the rotation operation of the lowering restricting member 415 to the locked state shown in FIG. 33 is performed when the rack 452 is raised and the protruding plate 453a gets over the release protruding portion 415c of the lowering restricting member 415. Therefore, both the driving force for raising the rack 452 and the driving force for forming the locked state of the lowering restricting member 415 can be generated by the driving motor 441 (see FIG. 2). That is, the drive motor 441 can also be used, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.
図３０に戻って下降規制部材４１５、上昇規制部材４１７及び当接壁４５３の前後方向に位置関係について説明する。図３０に示すように、下降規制部材４１５は上昇規制部材４１７に比較して正面側（図３０左側）に配置され、当接壁４５３が上昇規制部材４１７に図３０紙面垂直方向で当接可能な位置に配置されると共に、下降規制部材４１５の背面側側面が当接壁４５３の正面側側面と面当たり可能な態様とされる。
Returning to FIG. 30, the positional relationship in the front-rear direction of the lowering restricting member 415, the raising restricting member 417, and the contact wall 453 will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, the lowering restricting member 415 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 30) compared to the raising restricting member 417, and the abutting wall 453 can abut on the ascending restricting member 417 in the direction perpendicular to FIG. The lower side surface of the lowering restricting member 415 can come into contact with the front side surface of the contact wall 453.
図３３に戻って説明する。下降規制部材４１５と当接壁４５３とが、前後方向で当接される。即ち、図３３に示す状態において、当接壁４５３と上昇規制部材４１７とが左右方向（図３３左右方向）で当接され、当接壁４５３と下降規制部材４１５とが前後方向（図３３紙面垂直方向）で当接される。これにより、上昇規制部材４１７によって駆動側スライド部材４２０の左右方向のがたつきを抑制できると共に、下降規制部材４１５によって、前後方向（ラック４５２及び駆動ギア４４２の歯面に平行な方向）のがたつきを抑制することができる。
Returning to FIG. The lowering restriction member 415 and the contact wall 453 are contacted in the front-rear direction. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 33, the abutting wall 453 and the rise restricting member 417 are abutted in the left-right direction (left and right direction in FIG. 33), and the abutting wall 453 and the descending restricting member 415 are in the front-rear direction (FIG. 33 paper surface). In the vertical direction). As a result, rattling of the drive-side slide member 420 in the left-right direction can be suppressed by the rise restricting member 417, and the front-rear direction (direction parallel to the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442) can be prevented by the drop restricting member 415. Shaking can be suppressed.
従って、ラック４５２及び駆動ギア４４２が歯面と平行な方向に相対移動することにより歯合面の面積が低下することを抑制できると共に、ラック４５２が上昇位置に配置された状態において前倒れすることを防止することができる。
Therefore, the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 can be prevented from relatively reducing the area of the meshing surface due to the relative movement in the direction parallel to the tooth surface, and the rack 452 can be tilted forward in a state where the rack 452 is disposed at the raised position. Can be prevented.
図３３に示す状態から、ラック４５２を下降させる方向に駆動ギア４４２を回転させることにより、ラック４５２が下降しかけると、凸設板４５３ａが解除凸部４１５ｃに対し負荷を与えることで、下降規制部材４１５が外側（図３３拡大視において時計回り方向）へ回転される。これにより、下降規制部材４１５による係止が解除され、駆動側スライド部材４２０を下降動作できるようになる。即ち、下降規制部材４１５による係止の解除を駆動モータ４４１の駆動力により行うことができる（駆動源を兼用できる）ので、製品コストを削減することができる。
When the rack 452 is lowered by rotating the drive gear 442 in the direction in which the rack 452 is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 33, the convex plate 453a applies a load to the release convex portion 415c, whereby the lowering restriction member 415 is rotated outward (clockwise in the enlarged view of FIG. 33). As a result, the locking by the lowering restriction member 415 is released, and the driving side slide member 420 can be lowered. That is, the release by the lowering restricting member 415 can be released by the driving force of the driving motor 441 (can also be used as a driving source), so that the product cost can be reduced.
また、駆動側スライド部材４２０の下降動作により下降規制部材４１５の係止の解除を行うので、別の駆動源により下降規制部材４１５の回転動作をさせるときのように、動作タイミングがずれて下降規制部材４１５の規制が解除される前に駆動側スライド部材４２０を下降させてしまい、駆動源や下降規制部材４１５に過負荷が生じることを防止することができる。
Further, since the lowering restricting member 415 is unlocked by the lowering operation of the driving side slide member 420, the operation timing is shifted and the lowering restriction is controlled as when the lowering restricting member 415 is rotated by another drive source. It is possible to prevent the drive-side slide member 420 from being lowered before the restriction of the member 415 is released, so that an overload is generated in the drive source and the lowering restriction member 415.
なお、本実施形態のように、上昇位置では駆動側スライド部材４２０及び従動側スライド部材４３０の両方が上昇位置に維持される構造では、各部材の上昇位置での係止を従動側スライド部材４３０の係止により行うことも可能であるが、その場合、従動側スライド部材４３０と駆動側スライド部材４２０との連結および分離を行う構造が複雑化し、コストが嵩む。
In the structure in which both the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are maintained at the raised position in the raised position as in this embodiment, the driven side slide member 430 is locked at the raised position of each member. However, in this case, the structure for connecting and separating the driven-side slide member 430 and the drive-side slide member 420 becomes complicated and the cost increases.
一方、本実施形態では、駆動側スライド部材４２０を係止することで従動側スライド部材４３０の上昇位置での維持を行うので、従動側スライド部材４３０及び駆動側スライド部材４２０を上昇位置で維持するために必要な構成を減らすことができる（駆動装置４５０と駆動側スライド部材４２０だけにすることができる）。また、従動側スライド部材４３０の駆動側スライド部材４２０との連動は専ら重力の作用によるものとすることで、従動側スライド部材４３０と駆動側スライド部材４２０との間の構造を簡素化することができる。
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the driven side slide member 430 is held in the raised position by locking the driven side slide member 420, and therefore the driven side slide member 430 and the driven side slide member 420 are maintained in the raised position. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the configuration required for this purpose (only the driving device 450 and the driving side slide member 420 can be provided). Further, the interlocking of the driven side slide member 430 with the drive side slide member 420 is based on the action of gravity, thereby simplifying the structure between the driven side slide member 430 and the drive side slide member 420. it can.
ラック４５２を図３３に示す状態から下降させると、従動側スライド部材４３０はラック４５２に乗って下降するが、例えば、案内棒４５１が汚れる等して、案内棒４５１と案内孔４３３（図２２参照）との間の抵抗が大きい場合、従動側スライド部材４３０の下降速度がラック４５２の下降速度に比較して小さくなる恐れがある。この場合でも、従動側スライド部材４３０が上昇規制部材４１７と当接する際に、鉤状部４３４が上昇規制部材４１７の離間傾斜部４１７ｆに作用して、上昇規制部材４１７を回転させる事ができるので、従動側スライド部材４３０の自重により、上昇規制部材４１７と鉤状部４３４とを係合させることができる。
When the rack 452 is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 33, the driven-side slide member 430 descends on the rack 452, but the guide rod 451 and the guide hole 433 (see FIG. 22) become dirty, for example, because the guide rod 451 becomes dirty. ) Is large, the descending speed of the driven slide member 430 may be smaller than the descending speed of the rack 452. Even in this case, when the driven-side slide member 430 comes into contact with the rise restricting member 417, the hook-like portion 434 acts on the separation inclined portion 417f of the rise restricting member 417, so that the rise restricting member 417 can be rotated. The rising restriction member 417 and the hook-shaped portion 434 can be engaged by the own weight of the driven side slide member 430.
次いで、図３４から図４２を参照して、左揺動ユニット５００について説明する。図３４は、遊技盤１３及び左揺動ユニット５００の正面斜視図である。図３４に示すように、左揺動ユニット５００は、遊技盤１３の第２可変入賞装置８２ａ及び第２特定入賞口８２の背面側に配設され、第２特定入賞口８２に入賞した球を通過させる流路を内側に備える。本実施形態では、第２可変入賞装置８２ａと第２特定入賞口８２との間に球が通過したことを検出するセンサ部材８２ｂが配設される。なお、センサ部材８２ｂは、各種スイッチ２０８（図４参照）の一部である。
Next, the left swing unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42. FIG. 34 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIG. 34, the left swing unit 500 is disposed on the back side of the second variable winning device 82a and the second specific winning port 82 of the game board 13, and the ball that won the second specific winning port 82 is displayed. A flow path is provided on the inside. In the present embodiment, a sensor member 82b that detects that a ball has passed is disposed between the second variable winning device 82a and the second specific winning port 82. The sensor member 82b is a part of various switches 208 (see FIG. 4).
図３５は、左揺動ユニット５００の正面斜視図である。図３５に示すように、左揺動ユニット５００は、第１通路形成部材５２０を正面視右下方に垂らす態様で構成され、この第１通路形成部材５２０を揺動させることにより演出を行うユニットである。
FIG. 35 is a front perspective view of the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIG. 35, the left swing unit 500 is configured in such a manner that the first passage forming member 520 is hung downward and to the right when viewed from the front, and is a unit that produces effects by swinging the first passage forming member 520. is there.
図３６は、左揺動ユニット５００の分解正面斜視図であり、図３７は、左揺動ユニット５００の分解背面斜視図である。図３６及び図３７に図示されるように、左揺動ユニット５００は、骨格を形成するベース部材５１０と、そのベース部材５１０に軸支され揺動動作される第１通路形成部材５２０と、ベース部材５１０に締結固定され第１通路形成部材５２０の駆動力を発生させる駆動装置５３０と、その駆動装置５３０の駆動力を第１通路形成部材５２０に伝達する伝達装置５４０と、正面側に覆設されベース部材５１０に締結固定されると共に遊技盤１３の第２特定入賞口８２に連結される導入円筒部５５２を有するカバー部材５５０と、を主に備える。
FIG. 36 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit 500, and FIG. 37 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left swing unit 500. 36 and 37, the left swing unit 500 includes a base member 510 that forms a skeleton, a first passage forming member 520 that is pivotally supported by the base member 510, and a base. A driving device 530 that is fastened and fixed to the member 510 and generates a driving force of the first passage forming member 520; a transmission device 540 that transmits the driving force of the driving device 530 to the first passage forming member 520; And a cover member 550 having an introduction cylindrical portion 552 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and connected to the second specific winning port 82 of the game board 13.
ベース部材５１０は、正面視Ｌ字の板状体から構成される本体部材５１１と、その本体部材の正面視右端部に前後方向に円形状で穿設される軸支孔５１２と、その軸支孔５１２の鉛直上方に配設され面を前後方向へ向ける平面板状に構成される第１壁部５１３と、その第１壁部５１３の左下端部から正面視左方に球一つ分以上の間隔を空けて配設され面を左右方向に向ける湾曲板状に構成される第２壁部５１４と、第２壁部５１４の背面側に配設され第２壁部５１４に到達した球が流下される流下通路５１５と、軸支孔５１２の正面視左下方に配設され正面側に円柱状に凸設される軸支部５１６と、その軸支部５１６の軸周りに配設される係止壁部５１７と、軸支部５１６の上方に配置され伝達装置の位相を検出する検出センサ５１８と、を主に備える。
The base member 510 includes a main body member 511 formed of a L-shaped plate body in front view, a shaft support hole 512 formed in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at the right end portion in front view of the main body member, and the shaft support. A first wall portion 513 that is disposed vertically above the hole 512 and has a planar plate shape with its surface facing in the front-rear direction, and one or more spheres leftward from the lower left end of the first wall portion 513 in front view. A second wall portion 514 configured in a curved plate shape that is disposed with a space therebetween and directs the surface in the left-right direction, and a sphere that is disposed on the back side of the second wall portion 514 and reaches the second wall portion 514 A downflow passage 515 that flows down, a shaft support portion 516 that is disposed in the lower left side of the shaft support hole 512 in front view and protrudes in a columnar shape on the front side, and a latch that is disposed around the shaft of the shaft support portion 516. A wall 517 and a detection sensor 518 disposed above the shaft support 516 to detect the phase of the transmission device; To prepare for.
軸支孔５１２は、第１通路形成部材５２０の軸支部５２１ｃが挿通される孔であり、第１通路形成部材５２０は軸支孔５１２を中心に揺動動作される。
The shaft support hole 512 is a hole through which the shaft support portion 521c of the first passage forming member 520 is inserted, and the first passage forming member 520 is swung around the shaft support hole 512.
第１壁部５１３は、左右方向両端部から正面側へ延設される一対の案内壁部５１３ａを備える。
The 1st wall part 513 is provided with a pair of guide wall part 513a extended from the left-right direction both ends to the front side.
係止壁部５１７は、軸支部５１６の上方においてその軸支部５１６を中心とした円弧形状で構成される円弧壁部５１７ａと、正面視右下方へ延設される傾斜壁部５１７ｂと、を備える。
The locking wall portion 517 includes an arc wall portion 517a having an arc shape centered on the shaft support portion 516 above the shaft support portion 516, and an inclined wall portion 517b extending to the lower right in front view. .
円弧壁部５１７ａは、検出センサ５１８の端面であり軸支部５１６の周方向端面まで延設される。
The arc wall portion 517 a is an end surface of the detection sensor 518 and extends to a circumferential end surface of the shaft support portion 516.
第１通路形成部材５２０は、軸支孔５１２に軸支される部材である長尺棒状の振分ベース部材５２１と、その振分ベース部材５２１の正面側に配設され振分ベース部材５２１に締結固定されると共に振分ベース部材５２１との間に球が流下可能な通路を形成する通路カバー部材５２２と、を主に備える。
The first passage forming member 520 is a long rod-shaped distribution base member 521 that is a member supported by the shaft support hole 512, and is disposed on the front side of the distribution base member 521. And a passage cover member 522 that is fastened and fixed and forms a passage through which a sphere can flow down between the base member 521 and the sorting base member 521.
振分ベース部材５２１は、球の流下通路の一辺を構成する長尺板形状の垂下板部５２１ａと、その垂下板部５２１ａの上端部から垂下板部５２１ａの延設方向に沿って球一つ分の隙間Ｖ１だけ離間した位置に配設される中間板部５２１ｂと、垂下板部５２１ａの上端部付近において背面側に円柱状に凸設されると共に軸支孔５１２に挿通される軸支部５２１ｃと、その軸支部５２１ｃの径方向に延設される板状部にその延設方向に沿って穿設される長孔５２１ｄと、中間板部５２１ｂの垂下板部５２１ａ側の端部から背面側に凸設されると共に軸支部５２１ｃの径方向外側に向かうほど幅が短縮される態様で構成される振分凸部５２１ｅと、その振分凸部５２１ｅの背面視左側面に沿って隙間Ｖ１の正面側に延設され垂下板部５２１ａの上端部に中心を有する円弧形状に沿って湾曲する湾曲壁部５２１ｆと、を主に備える。
The distribution base member 521 has a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 521a that constitutes one side of the flow path of the sphere, and one sphere along the extending direction of the hanging plate portion 521a from the upper end portion of the hanging plate portion 521a. An intermediate plate portion 521b disposed at a position separated by a gap V1 and a shaft support portion 521c that protrudes in a columnar shape on the back side in the vicinity of the upper end portion of the hanging plate portion 521a and is inserted through the shaft support hole 512. A long hole 521d formed in a plate-like portion extending in the radial direction of the shaft support portion 521c along the extending direction, and a rear side from an end portion on the hanging plate portion 521a side of the intermediate plate portion 521b. And the gap V1 along the left side surface of the distribution convex portion 521e as viewed from the rear side, and a distribution convex portion 521e configured such that the width decreases toward the radially outer side of the shaft support portion 521c. The upper end of the hanging plate portion 521a that extends to the front side Mainly and a curved wall portion 521f which is curved along the arc shape having a center.
垂下板部５２１ａは、中間部から下側が中間部から上側に比較して下方へ折れ曲げられる形状から構成され、その下端部に正面側の板厚部分が削られて薄板化される球送り部５２１ａ１を備える。
The drooping plate portion 521a has a shape in which the lower side from the middle portion is bent downward as compared with the upper side from the middle portion, and the front plate thickness portion is scraped and thinned at the lower end portion of the ball feeding portion. 521a1 is provided.
隙間Ｖ１は、振分凸部５２１ｅの正面視右側に到達した球を正面方向に通過させる空間である。
The gap V1 is a space through which a sphere that has reached the right side of the front surface of the distribution convex portion 521e passes in the front direction.
通路カバー部材５２２は、振分ベース部材５２１の正面側に覆設される板状の板状部５２２ａと、その板状部５２２ａの短手方向両端部から背面側に向けて板状に延設される上下壁部５２２ｂと、を主に備える。
The passage cover member 522 extends in the form of a plate from the plate-like plate-like portion 522a that covers the front side of the sorting base member 521, and from both ends in the short-side direction of the plate-like portion 522a toward the back side. The upper and lower wall portions 522b are mainly provided.
板状部５２２ａは、光透過生の樹脂材料から形成され、その下端部の振分ベース部材５２１の球送り部５２１ａ１の正面側に配置される部分において背面側に屈曲される球受け部５２２ａ１を備える。
The plate-like portion 522a is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and a ball receiving portion 522a1 bent at the back side in a portion disposed on the front side of the ball feeding portion 521a1 of the sorting base member 521 at the lower end thereof. Prepare.
上下壁部５２２ｂは、隙間Ｖ１を通過した球を転動させる部分であり、垂下板部５２１ａ同様に中間部を境に傾斜角度が変化するので、球の流下速度を中間部で変化させることができる。
The upper and lower wall portions 522b are portions for rolling the sphere that has passed through the gap V1, and the inclination angle changes at the intermediate portion as in the case of the hanging plate portion 521a. Therefore, the flow velocity of the sphere can be changed at the intermediate portion. it can.
上下壁部５２２ｂの内、下側の壁部には、先端部分の内側に段差が設けられる。その段差は、転動する球を上下壁部５２２ｂの対向方向（一方の壁部から他方の壁部へ向かう方向）に変位させ、球を減速させる役割を備える。
A step is provided on the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 522b inside the tip portion. The step has a role of decelerating the sphere by displacing the rolling sphere in a direction facing the upper and lower wall portions 522b (a direction from one wall portion to the other wall portion).
また、第１通路形成部材５２０の下端部まで到達した球は、球送り部５２１ａ１及び球受け部５２２ａ１により背面側に速度を向けられる。これにより、排出前の球の速度を減速させることができ、球の排出を安定させることができる。
Further, the sphere that has reached the lower end of the first passage forming member 520 is directed toward the back side by the ball feeding portion 521a1 and the ball receiving portion 522a1. Thereby, the speed of the sphere before discharge can be reduced, and the discharge of the sphere can be stabilized.
駆動装置５３０は、駆動モータ５３１と、その駆動モータ５３１の回転軸に軸支回転される駆動ギア５３２と、を備え、駆動ギア５３２が伝達装置５４０の本体ギア部５４１に歯合される。
The drive device 530 includes a drive motor 531 and a drive gear 532 that is pivotally supported on the rotation shaft of the drive motor 531, and the drive gear 532 is engaged with the main body gear portion 541 of the transmission device 540.
伝達装置５４０は、軸支部５１６に軸支され駆動ギア５３２に歯合される本体ギア部５４１と、その本体ギア部５４１の偏心した位置から正面側に円柱状に凸設され第１通路形成部材５２０の長孔５２１ｄに挿通される偏心凸部５４２と、本体ギア部５４１から径方向に延設され係止壁部５１７と当接可能に構成されると共に検出センサ５１８の隙間を通過可能とされる延設部５４３と、を主に備える。
The transmission device 540 includes a main body gear portion 541 that is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 516 and meshed with the drive gear 532, and a first passage forming member that protrudes in a columnar shape from the eccentric position of the main body gear portion 541 to the front side. An eccentric convex portion 542 inserted into the long hole 521d of 520, a radial extension extending from the main body gear portion 541, and a contact with the locking wall portion 517 are possible, and the gap between the detection sensors 518 can be passed. Extending portion 543 mainly.
カバー部材５５０は、ベース部材５１０に覆設される板状の本体部材５５１と、その本体部材５５１の正面視右側端部において第２特定入賞口８２に連結されると共に背面側端部が第１壁部５１３に当接される円筒形状の導入円筒部５５２と、本体部材５５１の背面側側面において導入円筒部５５２の左右方向端部から下方へ延設される一対の案内壁部５５３と、を主に備える。
The cover member 550 is connected to the plate-shaped main body member 551 that covers the base member 510, and the second specific prize opening 82 at the right end of the main body member 551 when viewed from the front, and the rear end is the first. A cylindrical introduction cylindrical portion 552 that comes into contact with the wall portion 513, and a pair of guide wall portions 553 that extend downward from the left and right end portions of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 on the back side surface of the main body member 551. Prepare mainly.
案内壁部５５３は、ベース部材５１０の案内壁部５１３ａと前後方向で重なる部分である。導入円筒部５５２を通過した球は、案内壁部５１３ａ，５５３の間を通って下方へ流下される。
The guide wall portion 553 is a portion that overlaps with the guide wall portion 513a of the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The sphere that has passed through the introduction cylindrical portion 552 flows down between the guide wall portions 513a and 553.
図３８から図４０を参照して、第１通路形成部材５２０の揺動動作について説明する。図３８から図４０は、揺動動作ユニット５００の正面図である。なお、図３８から図４０では、カバー部材５５０の図示が省略されると共に第１通路形成部材５２０が垂下板部５２１ａの前後方向中間位置で断面視された外形が図示されると共に通路カバー部材の外形形状が想像線で図示される。
With reference to FIGS. 38 to 40, the swinging operation of the first passage forming member 520 will be described. 38 to 40 are front views of the swing operation unit 500. FIG. 38 to 40, the illustration of the cover member 550 is omitted, the outer shape of the first passage forming member 520 viewed in cross-section at the middle position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 521a is shown, and the passage cover member The outer shape is illustrated with imaginary lines.
また、図３８では、第１通路形成部材５２０が解除位置に配置された状態が、図３９（ａ）では、第１通路形成部材５２０が図３８に図示される状態から所定量揺動され振分凸部５２１ｅが一対の案内壁部５１３ａの中間位置に配置された状態が、図３９（ｂ）では、第１通路形成部材５２０が図３９（ａ）に図示される状態から所定量揺動され接続部材４２４に当接する直前の状態が、図４０では、第１通路形成部材５２０が図３９（ｂ）に図示される状態から所定量揺動され連結位置に配置された状態がそれぞれ図示される。
38, the state where the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position is shown in FIG. 39A. In FIG. 39A, the first passage forming member 520 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. In the state where the minute convex portion 521e is disposed at the intermediate position between the pair of guide wall portions 513a, in FIG. 39 (b), the first passage forming member 520 swings a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 39 (a). FIG. 40 shows a state immediately before contacting the connecting member 424, and FIG. 40 shows a state in which the first passage forming member 520 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. The
図３８から図４０に示すように、第１通路形成部材５２０の揺動動作は、伝達装置５４０が回転され、偏心凸部５４２の移動に伴い長孔５２１ｄの位置が移動されることで生じる。
As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the swinging motion of the first passage forming member 520 occurs when the transmission device 540 is rotated and the position of the long hole 521d is moved along with the movement of the eccentric convex portion 542.
図３８に示すように、解除位置では、軸支部５１６及び偏心凸部５４２を結ぶ方向Ｘ１と、長孔５２１ｄの延設方向（軸支部５２１ｃの径方向）と一致する方向Ｘ２とが垂直に交差する。そのため、第１通路形成部材５２０が回転動作しかけることにより偏心凸部５４２に与えられる負荷は軸支部５１６へ向けられるので、伝達装置５４０を回転させる負荷が生じることを抑制することができる。これにより、駆動ギア５３２に駆動力をかけ続けなくとも、伝達装置５４０の姿勢を維持する事ができ、駆動モータ５３１（図３６参照）の消費電力を低減することができる。
As shown in FIG. 38, at the release position, the direction X1 connecting the shaft support portion 516 and the eccentric convex portion 542 and the direction X2 coinciding with the extending direction of the long hole 521d (the radial direction of the shaft support portion 521c) intersect perpendicularly. To do. Therefore, since the load given to the eccentric convex part 542 is directed to the shaft support part 516 when the first passage forming member 520 starts to rotate, it is possible to suppress the generation of a load that rotates the transmission device 540. Accordingly, the attitude of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuously applying a driving force to the drive gear 532, and the power consumption of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.
また、解除位置において、伝達装置５４０の延設部５４３が、検出センサ５１８の隙間に配置されると共に円弧壁部５１７ａの端部に当接される。即ち、延設部５４３は、伝達装置５４０の位相の検出に利用される部分としての役割と、回り止め部材としての役割とを共に有する。
Further, at the release position, the extending portion 543 of the transmission device 540 is disposed in the gap of the detection sensor 518 and is in contact with the end portion of the arc wall portion 517a. That is, the extending portion 543 has both a role as a portion used for detecting the phase of the transmission device 540 and a role as a rotation preventing member.
図３８に示すように、解除位置において、振分凸部５２１ｅがベース部材５１０の正面視右側の案内壁部５１３ａと対向配置される。そのため、第１壁部５１３に到達し案内壁部５１３ａ，５５３の間を通過した球は、振分凸部５２１ｅにより正面視左側の経路に振り分けられ、流下通路５１５を通って遊技領域外に排出される。
As shown in FIG. 38, at the release position, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed to face the guide wall portion 513a on the right side of the base member 510 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is distributed to the path on the left side of the front view by the distribution convex portion 521e, and is discharged out of the game area through the flow-down passage 515. Is done.
図３９（ａ）に示すように、解除位置と連結位置との間の中間位置において、振分凸部５２１ｅがベース部材５１０の一対の案内壁部５１３ａの中間位置に配置される。そのため、第１壁部５１３に到達し案内壁部５１３ａ，５５３の間を通過した球は、振分凸部５２１ｅにより流下を停止される（振分凸部５２１ｅの先端部に乗ったまま、留まる）。
As shown in FIG. 39A, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed at an intermediate position between the pair of guide wall portions 513a of the base member 510 at an intermediate position between the release position and the connection position. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is stopped by the distribution convex portion 521e (it remains on the tip of the distribution convex portion 521e). ).
図３９（ｂ）に示すように、第１通路形成部材５２０が接続部材４２４に当接する直前の状態において、振分凸部５２１ｅがベース部材５１０の一対の案内壁部５１３ａの間に配置される、そのため、第１壁部５１３に到達し案内壁部５１３ａ，５５３の間を通過した球は、振分凸部５２１ｅにより流下を停止される（振分凸部５２１ｅの先端部に乗ったまま、留まる）。これにより、図３９（ｂ）の状態において球が第１通路形成部材５２０を通過し、接続部材４２４に送球され、対向壁部４２２ｆ２に球が到達することが防止される。
As shown in FIG. 39B, the distribution convex portion 521 e is disposed between the pair of guide wall portions 513 a of the base member 510 in a state immediately before the first passage forming member 520 contacts the connection member 424. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and has passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is stopped by the distribution convex portion 521e (while remaining on the tip of the distribution convex portion 521e, stay). Thereby, in the state of FIG. 39B, the sphere passes through the first passage forming member 520, is sent to the connecting member 424, and the sphere is prevented from reaching the opposing wall portion 422f2.
ここで、対向壁部４２２ｆ２は、上傾斜状態（図４２参照）において接続部材４２４の上側壁部４２４ｂと滑らかに連結されるので、下傾斜状態（図４１参照）では、上端部が接続部材４２４の上側壁部４２４ｂの下端部から正面視左方に張り出す態様とされる。そのため、下傾斜状態で接続部材４２４に球が送球され、対向壁部４２２ｆ２の上端部に球が衝突すると、対向壁部４２２ｆ２が破損する恐れがある。
Here, since the opposing wall portion 422f2 is smoothly connected to the upper wall portion 424b of the connection member 424 in the upward inclined state (see FIG. 42), the upper end portion is connected to the connecting member 424 in the downward inclined state (see FIG. 41). It is set as the aspect which protrudes from the lower end part of the upper side wall part 424b to front view left side. Therefore, when the sphere is sent to the connection member 424 in the downward inclined state and the sphere collides with the upper end portion of the opposing wall portion 422f2, the opposing wall portion 422f2 may be damaged.
これに対し、本実施形態では、図３９（ｂ）に示す状態において、第１通路形成部材５２０への球の導入が防止されるので、対向壁部４２２ｆ２に球が衝突することを防止でき、対向壁部４２２ｆ２が破損することを防止することができる。
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 39 (b), since the introduction of the sphere into the first passage forming member 520 is prevented, it is possible to prevent the sphere from colliding with the opposing wall portion 422f2. It is possible to prevent the opposing wall portion 422f2 from being damaged.
図４０に示すように、連結位置では、軸支部５１６及び偏心凸部５４２を結ぶ方向Ｘ１と、長孔５２１ｄの延設方向（軸支部５２１ｃの径方向）と一致する方向Ｘ２とが垂直に交差する。そのため、第１通路形成部材５２０が回転動作しかけることにより偏心凸部５４２に与えられる負荷は軸支部５１６へ向けられるので、伝達装置５４０を回転させる負荷が生じることを抑制することができる。これにより、駆動ギア５３２に駆動力をかけ続けなくとも、伝達装置５４０の姿勢を維持する事ができ、駆動モータ５３１（図３６参照）の消費電力を低減することができる。
As shown in FIG. 40, at the connecting position, the direction X1 connecting the shaft support portion 516 and the eccentric convex portion 542 and the direction X2 coinciding with the extending direction of the long hole 521d (the radial direction of the shaft support portion 521c) intersect perpendicularly. To do. Therefore, since the load given to the eccentric convex part 542 is directed to the shaft support part 516 when the first passage forming member 520 starts to rotate, it is possible to suppress the generation of a load that rotates the transmission device 540. Accordingly, the attitude of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuously applying a driving force to the drive gear 532, and the power consumption of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.
また、連結位置において、伝達装置５４０の延設部５４３が、傾斜壁部５１７ｂに面当たりされる。これにより、延設部５４３を傾斜壁部５１７ｂに突き当てることで伝達装置５４０を停止させる位相を安定させながら、延設部５４３に局部的に荷重が負荷される場合に比較して延設部５４３の耐久性を向上させることができる。
In addition, the extended portion 543 of the transmission device 540 comes into contact with the inclined wall portion 517b at the coupling position. Thus, the extension portion 543 is compared with a case where a load is locally applied to the extension portion 543 while stabilizing the phase of stopping the transmission device 540 by abutting the extension portion 543 against the inclined wall portion 517b. The durability of 543 can be improved.
図４０に示すように、連結状態において、振分凸部５２１ｅがベース部材５１０の正面視左側の案内壁部５１３ａと対向配置される。そのため、第１壁部５１３に到達し案内壁部５１３ａ，５５３の間を通過した球は、振分凸部５２１ｅにより正面視右側の経路に振り分けられ、隙間Ｖ１を通って正面側に移動してから通路カバー部材５２２の上下壁部５２２ｂ（図３７参照）の下側の壁部に沿って転動する。
As shown in FIG. 40, in the connected state, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed to face the guide wall portion 513a on the left side of the base member 510 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the sphere that reaches the first wall portion 513 and passes between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is distributed to the path on the right side of the front view by the distribution convex portion 521e, and moves to the front side through the gap V1. Rolling along the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 522b (see FIG. 37) of the passage cover member 522.
連結状態での球の流れについて説明する。まず、遊技領域から第２可変入賞装置８２ａを通って第２特定入賞口８２に入賞した球は導入円筒部５５２（図３６参照）を通って背面側へ向けて前後移動し、第１壁部５１３に当接されると案内壁部５１３ａ，５５３の形成する通路を流下し、第１通路形成部材５２０の隙間Ｖ１を通って正面側へ向けて前後移動し、通路カバー部材５２２の上下壁部５２２ｂの下側の壁部の上を転動する。
The flow of the sphere in the connected state will be described. First, the ball that has won the second specific prize opening 82 from the game area through the second variable prize-winning device 82a moves back and forth through the introduction cylindrical part 552 (see FIG. 36) toward the back side, and the first wall part When contacted with 513, it flows down the passage formed by the guide wall portions 513a and 553, moves back and forth toward the front side through the gap V1 of the first passage forming member 520, and the upper and lower wall portions of the passage cover member 522 Roll over the lower wall of 522b.
即ち、球が第１通路形成部材５２０の内部を流下する前に、球が前後方向に送られる。そのため、第２特定入賞口８２に球が数珠つなぎで供給されても、球の跳ね等を抑制して、第１通路形成部材５２０にスムーズに球を流入させることができる。また、前後方向に送られた球を湾曲壁部５２１ｆ（図３７参照）に沿って流下させることにより、球の速度の向きを変えることができ、第１通路形成部材５２０に球をスムーズに流入させることができる。
That is, before the sphere flows down inside the first passage forming member 520, the sphere is sent in the front-rear direction. Therefore, even if the balls are supplied to the second specific winning opening 82 by connecting them in a rosary manner, the balls can be smoothly flowed into the first passage forming member 520 by preventing the balls from jumping. Further, the direction of the speed of the sphere can be changed by flowing down the sphere sent in the front-rear direction along the curved wall portion 521f (see FIG. 37), and the sphere smoothly flows into the first passage forming member 520. Can be made.
第１通路形成部材５２０は、振分ベース部材５２１及び通路カバー部材５２２が、中間部を境に延設方向が変化する。即ち、振分ベース部材５２１及び通路カバー部材５２２が、中間部から基端側（軸支部５２１ｃ側）までは直線Ｙ１に沿って延設され、中間部から先端側（基端側の逆側）までは直線Ｙ１よりも下方へ傾斜される直線Ｙ２に沿って延設される。
As for the 1st channel | path formation member 520, the extending direction changes the boundary base member 521 and the channel | path cover member 522 on the boundary of an intermediate part. That is, the distribution base member 521 and the passage cover member 522 extend along the straight line Y1 from the intermediate portion to the proximal end side (the shaft support portion 521c side), and from the intermediate portion to the distal end side (the opposite side of the proximal end side). Is extended along a straight line Y2 inclined downward from the straight line Y1.
そのため、第１通路形成部材５２０の内部を転動する球の速度が、基端側から中間部へ到達するまでの間の方が、中間部から先端部へ向かうまでの間に比較して遅くなる。そのため、第１通路形成部材５２０へ球が導入した直後に遊技者に球を視認させやすくすることができる。
Therefore, the speed of the sphere rolling inside the first passage forming member 520 is slower when it reaches the intermediate portion from the base end side than when it moves from the intermediate portion toward the distal end portion. Become. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the ball immediately after the ball is introduced into the first passage forming member 520.
また、直線Ｙ１に沿った真っ直ぐな形状で第１通路形成部材５２０が構成される場合に比較して、連結位置（図４２参照）において、第１通路形成部材５２０から球が送球される方向と、センサ部材４２２ｃに球が導入される方向（鉛直方向）との角度を小さくすることができる。これにより、第１通路形成部材５２０から第２通路形成部材４２２への球の送球を安定させることができる。
Further, as compared with the case where the first passage forming member 520 is configured in a straight shape along the straight line Y1, the direction in which the ball is sent from the first passage forming member 520 at the connection position (see FIG. 42) The angle with the direction (vertical direction) in which the sphere is introduced into the sensor member 422c can be reduced. Thereby, ball feeding from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422 can be stabilized.
図３８から図４０に図示されるように、伝達装置５４０の回転により第１通路形成部材５２０が揺動され、振分凸部５２１ｅの配置によって球が流下される経路が切り替えられる。
As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the first passage forming member 520 is swung by the rotation of the transmission device 540, and the path through which the sphere flows down is switched by the arrangement of the distribution convex portions 521e.
ここで、振分凸部５２１ｅの回転方向において振分凸部５２１ｅと対向配置される壁部材が配置される場合に、その壁部材に対して振分凸部５２１ｅが球の直径以下にまで近づける構成を採用すると、球が振分凸部５２１ｅの回転方向に滞留した場合に振分凸部５２１ｅと壁部材との間に球が噛み込まれ、動作不良を起こす恐れがある。
Here, when a wall member disposed opposite to the distribution convex portion 521e in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed, the distribution convex portion 521e approaches the wall member to be equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere. When the configuration is adopted, when the sphere stays in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e, the sphere is caught between the distribution convex portion 521e and the wall member, which may cause malfunction.
これに対し、本実施形態では、図４０に図示される連結位置において、振分凸部５２１ｅと第２壁部５１４との間には、球の直径以上の間隔が空けられ、振分凸部５２１ｅを挟んで第２壁部５１４の反対側には壁部材は配置されず開放される。従って、振分凸部５２１ｅの回転方向で球を噛み込むという事態を生じることが無く、動作不良を防止することができる。
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at the connection position illustrated in FIG. 40, an interval equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere is provided between the distribution convex portion 521e and the second wall portion 514, and the distribution convex portion. A wall member is not disposed on the opposite side of the second wall portion 514 across the 521e and is opened. Therefore, a situation in which the ball is bitten in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e does not occur, and malfunction can be prevented.
図４１及び図４２を参照して、液晶昇降ユニット４００と左揺動ユニット５００との流路の接続について説明する。図４１及び図４２は、液晶昇降ユニット４００及び左揺動ユニット５００の部分正面図である。なお、図４１及び図４２では、第２通路形成部材４２２が断面視され接続部材４２４が視認可能とされると共に、第１通路形成部材５２０が垂下板部５２１ａの前後方向中間位置における外形形状で図示され振分凸部５２１ｅが視認可能とされる。
With reference to FIG.41 and FIG.42, the connection of the flow path of the liquid crystal raising / lowering unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 is demonstrated. 41 and 42 are partial front views of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the left swing unit 500. FIG. 41 and 42, the second passage forming member 422 is viewed in cross section so that the connection member 424 is visible, and the first passage forming member 520 has an outer shape at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 521a. The distribution convex part 521e shown in figure is visible.
また、図４１及び図４２では、液晶昇降ユニット４００が連結位置（図３１参照）に配置された状態が図示され、図４１では、左揺動ユニット５００が解除位置（図３８参照）に配置された状態が図示され、図４２では、左揺動ユニット５００が連結位置（図４０参照）に配置された状態が図示される。
41 and 42 show a state in which the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 31), and in FIG. 41, the left swing unit 500 is disposed at the release position (see FIG. 38). FIG. 42 shows a state in which the left swing unit 500 is disposed at the coupling position (see FIG. 40).
図４１に示す状態から図４２に示す状態に第１通路形成部材５２０が揺動動作されると、その先端部が接続部材４２４の上側壁部４２４ｂの下側側面に当接し、接続部材４２４を揺動させる。即ち、接続部材４２４が第１通路形成部材５２０の移動方向に連れ立って移動されるので、例えば、駆動側スライド部材４２０の停止位置が理想的な位置から若干ずれた場合であっても、第１通路形成部材５２０の先端と接続部材４２４との間に隙間が生じることを抑制することができる。これにより、球が第１通路形成部材５２０の先端と接続部材４２４との間に落下することを抑制し、第１通路形成部材５２０から第２通路形成部材４２２への球の送球を安定させることができる。
When the first passage forming member 520 is swung from the state shown in FIG. 41 to the state shown in FIG. 42, the distal end of the first passage forming member 520 comes into contact with the lower side surface of the upper wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424, Rock. That is, since the connecting member 424 is moved along with the moving direction of the first passage forming member 520, for example, even if the stop position of the driving side slide member 420 is slightly deviated from the ideal position, It is possible to suppress the generation of a gap between the tip of the passage forming member 520 and the connection member 424. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the sphere from falling between the tip of the first passage forming member 520 and the connection member 424, and to stabilize the ball feeding from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422. Can do.
接続部材４２４が揺動されることにより、第１通路形成部材５２０から流下された球が転動する下側壁部４２４ｃが第１通路形成部材５２０の先端へ近接する方向へ移動されるので、第１通路形成部材５２０と接続部材４２４との転動面間の隙間を狭めることができ、球が第１通路形成部材５２０と接続部材４２４との転動面間の隙間から落下することを抑制することができるので、球の送球を安定させることができる。
As the connecting member 424 is swung, the lower wall portion 424c on which the sphere flowing down from the first passage forming member 520 rolls is moved in a direction approaching the tip of the first passage forming member 520. The gap between the rolling surfaces of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 can be narrowed, and the sphere is prevented from falling from the gap between the rolling surfaces of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424. This makes it possible to stabilize ball feeding.
また、図４２に示す状態において、下側壁部４２４ｃが溝部４２２ｄ（図２７参照）に連通されるセンサ部材４２２ｃへ向けて下降傾斜される。これにより、球をその下降傾斜に沿って転動させることができ、第２通路形成部材４２２への球の送球を安定させることができる。
Further, in the state shown in FIG. 42, the lower side wall 424c is inclined downward toward the sensor member 422c communicated with the groove 422d (see FIG. 27). Thereby, the sphere can be rolled along its descending slope, and the sphere can be sent to the second passage forming member 422 in a stable manner.
なお、第１通路形成部材５２０の揺動動作は、センサ部材８２ｂ（図３４参照）やセンサ部材４２２ｃの球の通過を検出して、行われる。例えば、図４２に示す連結位置に第１通路形成部材５２０が配置された状態において、センサ部材８２ｂとセンサ部材４２２ｃとの球の検出個数が合致する（第１通路形成部材５２０に球が残留していない）タイミングで第１通路形成部材５２０を解除位置（図４１参照）へ向けて揺動開始させることで、第１通路形成部材５２０の先端から遊技領域外に球が排出されることを防止することができる。
The swinging motion of the first passage forming member 520 is performed by detecting the passage of the sphere of the sensor member 82b (see FIG. 34) or the sensor member 422c. For example, in the state where the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the coupling position shown in FIG. 42, the number of detected balls of the sensor member 82b and the sensor member 422c matches (the sphere remains on the first passage forming member 520). The first passage forming member 520 starts swinging toward the release position (see FIG. 41) at the timing, thereby preventing the ball from being discharged out of the game area from the tip of the first passage forming member 520. can do.
図４１及び図４２に図示されるように、振分凸部５２１ｅの移動による球の振り分けと、第１通路形成部材５２０を揺動させることにより第１通路形成部材５２０と接続部材４２４とを当接させて球の流下経路を形成する動作とに必要な駆動力が兼用される（第１通路形成部材５２０を動作させる駆動モータ５３１（図３６参照）の駆動力でまかなわれる）また、両者の状態が同期されるので、例えば、第１通路形成部材５２０が解除位置に配置される状態において球が第１通路形成部材５２０に導入される事態を回避することができる。その結果、第１通路形成部材５２０の先端から球が遊技領域外に排出されることを確実に防止することができる。
As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, balls are distributed by the movement of the distribution convex portion 521e, and the first passage forming member 520 is swung so that the first passage forming member 520 and the connection member 424 are brought into contact with each other. The driving force necessary for the contact and the operation of forming the flow path of the sphere is also used (covered by the driving force of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) that operates the first passage forming member 520). Since the states are synchronized, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation where a sphere is introduced into the first passage forming member 520 in a state where the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from being discharged out of the game area from the tip of the first passage forming member 520.
また、振分凸部５２１ｅは振分ベース部材５２１の上端部に配設され、垂下板部５２１ａ（図３６参照）の正面側を流下する球の通路を区画する（上端を形成する）壁部を兼ねる。これにより、他の部品で振分を行う場合に比較して部品コストの削減を図ることができると共に、第１通路形成部材５２０側に振り分けられた球を確実に垂下板部５２１ａと通路カバー部材５２２との間の通路に導入させることができる。
The distribution convex portion 521e is disposed on the upper end portion of the distribution base member 521, and defines a wall path of a sphere that flows down the front side of the hanging plate portion 521a (see FIG. 36) (forms an upper end). Doubles as As a result, it is possible to reduce the cost of parts compared to the case where the other parts are distributed, and to ensure that the balls distributed to the first passage forming member 520 side are suspended from the hanging plate portion 521a and the passage cover member. 522 can be introduced into the passage between the two.
次いで、図４３から図７７を参照して、回転ユニット６００について説明する。図４３は、回転ユニット６００の正面図であり、図４４は、回転ユニット６００の正面斜視図である。図４５は、ガイド部材６８０が取り外された状態における回転ユニット６００の正面図であり、図４６は、ガイド部材６８０が取り外された状態における回転ユニット６００の正面斜視図である。また、図４７は、回転ユニット６００の分解正面斜視図であり、図４８は、回転ユニット６００の分解背面斜視図である。
Next, the rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 77. 43 is a front view of the rotation unit 600, and FIG. 44 is a front perspective view of the rotation unit 600. 45 is a front view of the rotating unit 600 with the guide member 680 removed, and FIG. 46 is a front perspective view of the rotating unit 600 with the guide member 680 removed. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating unit 600, and FIG. 48 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating unit 600.
図４３から図４８に示すように、回転ユニット６００は、一面側が開放された容器状に形成されるケース部材６１０と、そのケース部材６１０の一面側に覆設される案内部材６２０と、それらケース部材６１０及び案内部材６２０の対向間に配設される駆動機構６３０と、その駆動機構６３０の駆動力により回転駆動される回転部材６４０と、その回転部材６４０の内周側に配設される投球装置６５０と、回転部材６４０の外周側に配設されるガイド部材６８０と、を主に備える。
As shown in FIGS. 43 to 48, the rotation unit 600 includes a case member 610 formed in a container shape with one side opened, a guide member 620 covered on one side of the case member 610, and the cases. A driving mechanism 630 disposed between the member 610 and the guide member 620 facing each other, a rotating member 640 rotated by the driving force of the driving mechanism 630, and a pitching disposed on the inner peripheral side of the rotating member 640 The apparatus 650 mainly includes a guide member 680 disposed on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640.
ケース部材６１０は、正面視略円形の底壁部６１１と、その底壁部６１１から正面へ向けて立設される略円筒状の外壁部６１２とを備え、これら各壁部６１１，６１２により一面側が開放された容器状に形成される。案内部材６２０は、正面視円環の円板状に形成され、ケース部材６１０の外壁部６１２の立設先端に配設（固着）される。これにより、ケース部材６１０の底壁部６１１と案内部材６２０との間に内部空間が形成され、その内部空間に駆動機構６３０が配設される。
The case member 610 includes a bottom wall portion 611 having a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front, and a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 612 erected from the bottom wall portion 611 toward the front surface. It is formed in a container shape whose side is open. The guide member 620 is formed in a disc shape with an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed (adhered) to the standing tip of the outer wall portion 612 of the case member 610. Thus, an internal space is formed between the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610 and the guide member 620, and the drive mechanism 630 is disposed in the internal space.
案内部材６２０は、回転部材６４０を変位可能に保持するための部材であり、その正面に連結リンク作用溝６２１及び起伏リンク作用溝６２２が凹設される。これら連結リンク作用溝６２１及び起伏リンク作用溝６２２は、案内部材６２０の周方向に沿って延設される断面コ字状の凹溝であり、回転部材６４０の後述する連結リンク部材６４４及び起伏リンク部材６４８の挿通部６４４ａ，６４８ａがそれぞれ挿通される。
The guide member 620 is a member for holding the rotating member 640 so as to be displaceable, and a connection link action groove 621 and an undulating link action groove 622 are recessed in the front surface thereof. The connection link action groove 621 and the undulation link action groove 622 are concave grooves having a U-shaped cross section extending along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the connection link member 644 and the undulation link, which will be described later, of the rotation member 640. The insertion portions 644a and 648a of the member 648 are respectively inserted.
なお、連結リンク作用溝６２１及び起伏リンク作用溝６２２の溝幅は、連結リンク部材６４４及び起伏リンク部材６４８の挿通部６４４ａ，６４８ａの直径と同等または若干大きな寸法に設定される。よって、連結リンク部材６４４及び起伏リンク部材６４８の挿通部６４４ａ，６４８ａは、連結リンク作用溝６２１及び起伏リンク作用溝６２２の延設方向に沿って摺動（案内）可能とされる。
In addition, the groove widths of the connection link action groove 621 and the undulation link action groove 622 are set to dimensions that are equal to or slightly larger than the diameters of the insertion portions 644 a and 648 a of the connection link member 644 and the undulation link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portions 644a and 648a of the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the connecting link operating groove 621 and the undulating link operating groove 622.
回転部材６４０が回転駆動される際に、連結リンク作用溝６２１は、連結リンク部材６４４に作用して、分割部材ＤＶどうしの間隔を増減させる一方（図７３参照）、起伏リンク作用溝６２２は、起伏リンク部材６４８に作用して、表示板６４６及び区画板６４７を起伏させる（図５９及び図６０参照）。ここで、図４９及び図５０を参照して、案内部材６２０の連結リンク作用溝６２１及び起伏リンク作用溝６２２について説明する。
When the rotation member 640 is driven to rotate, the connection link operation groove 621 acts on the connection link member 644 to increase or decrease the interval between the divided members DV (see FIG. 73), while the undulation link operation groove 622 It acts on the undulating link member 648 to undulate the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 (see FIGS. 59 and 60). Here, with reference to FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, the connecting link working groove 621 and the undulating link working groove 622 of the guide member 620 will be described.
図４９は、回転部材６４０、投球装置６５０の一部およびガイド部材６８０が取り外された状態における回転ユニット６００の正面図であり、図５０は、案内部材６２０の正面模式図である。なお、図５０では、連結リンク作用溝６２１及び起伏リンク作用溝６２２の形状が二点鎖線を用いて模式的に図示される。かかる二点鎖線は、各作用溝６２１，６２２の溝幅の中央を通る線として図示される。
49 is a front view of the rotation unit 600 in a state where the rotation member 640, a part of the pitching device 650, and the guide member 680 are removed, and FIG. 50 is a schematic front view of the guide member 620. In FIG. 50, the shapes of the connecting link working groove 621 and the undulating link working groove 622 are schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line. Such a two-dot chain line is illustrated as a line passing through the center of the groove width of each working groove 621, 622.
図４９及び図５０に示すように、連結リンク作用溝６２１は、軸心Ｏを中心として半径Ｒ１で円弧状に湾曲する大径部６２１ａと、軸心Ｏを中心として半径Ｒ２で円弧状に湾曲する小径部６２１ｂと、それら大径部６２１ａ及び小径部６２１ｂの間を接続する一対の接続部６２１ｃとからなる。なお、大径部６２１ａの半径Ｒ１は、小径部６２１ｂの半径Ｒ２よりも大きな寸法に設定される（Ｒ２＜Ｒ１）。
As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the connecting link working groove 621 has a large-diameter portion 621a that curves in an arc shape with a radius R1 around the axis O, and an arc shape with a radius R2 around the axis O. And a pair of connecting portions 621c that connect the large diameter portion 621a and the small diameter portion 621b. The radius R1 of the large diameter portion 621a is set to be larger than the radius R2 of the small diameter portion 621b (R2 <R1).
起伏リンク作用溝６２２は、軸心Ｏを中心として半径Ｒ３で円弧状に湾曲する大径部６２２ａと、軸心Ｏを中心として半径Ｒ４で円弧状に湾曲する小径部６２２ｂと、それら大径部６２２ａ及び小径部６２２ｂの間を接続する一対の接続部６２２ｃとからなる。なお、大径部６２２ａの半径Ｒ３は、小径部６２２ｂの半径Ｒ４よりも大きな寸法に設定される（Ｒ４＜Ｒ３）。
The undulating link working groove 622 includes a large-diameter portion 622a that is curved in an arc shape with a radius R3 around the axis O, a small-diameter portion 622b that is curved in an arc shape with a radius R4 around the axis O, and these large-diameter portions. It consists of a pair of connection part 622c which connects between 622a and the small diameter part 622b. The radius R3 of the large diameter portion 622a is set to be larger than the radius R4 of the small diameter portion 622b (R4 <R3).
本実施形態では、連結リンク作用溝６２１の大径部６２１ａ及び小径部６２１ｂと、起伏リンク作用溝６２２の大径部６２２ａ及び小径部６２２ｂとが、軸心Ｏを中心として同心に配置される。この場合、軸心Ｏは、回転部材６４０が回転される際の回転中心に一致される。よって、回転部材６４０が回転される際に、連結リンク作用溝６２１及び起伏リンク作用溝６２２の大径部６２１ａ，６２２ａ及び小径部６２２ａ，６２２ｂから連結リンク部材６４４及び起伏リンク部材６４８へそれぞれ作用する力を抑制して、駆動機構６３０の駆動モータ６３１に必要とされる出力を小さくできる。
In the present embodiment, the large-diameter portion 621a and the small-diameter portion 621b of the connecting link working groove 621 and the large-diameter portion 622a and the small-diameter portion 622b of the undulating link working groove 622 are arranged concentrically about the axis O. In this case, the axis O coincides with the rotation center when the rotating member 640 is rotated. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is rotated, the large diameter portions 621a and 622a and the small diameter portions 622a and 622b of the connecting link working groove 621 and the undulating link working groove 622 act on the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648, respectively. By suppressing the force, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.
また、連結リンク作用溝６２１の一対の接続部６２１ｃは、１８０度位相を異ならせた位置に配置される。同様に、起伏リンク作用溝６２２の一対の接続部６２２ｃは、１８０度位相を異ならせた位置に配置される。よって、回転部材６４０が回転駆動される際に、連結リンク作用溝６２１の一方の接続部６２１ｃから連結リンク部材６４４へ作用される力と他方の接続部６２１ｃから連結リンク部材６４４へ作用される力とを相殺させることができる。同様に、起伏リンク作用溝６２２の一方の接続部６２２ｃから起伏リンク部材６４８へ作用される力と他方の接続部６２２ｃから起伏リンク部材６４８へ作用される力とを相殺させることができる。これにより、回転部材６４０に作用される力を全体として均一化できるので、その回転部材６４０の回転を安定化させることができると共に、駆動機構６３０の駆動モータ６３１に必要とされる出力を小さくできる。
Further, the pair of connection portions 621c of the connection link action groove 621 are arranged at positions that are different in phase by 180 degrees. Similarly, the pair of connecting portions 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 are arranged at positions that are different in phase by 180 degrees. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is rotationally driven, a force that is applied to the connecting link member 644 from one connecting portion 621c of the connecting link operating groove 621 and a force that is applied to the connecting link member 644 from the other connecting portion 621c. Can be offset. Similarly, the force applied to the undulation link member 648 from one connection portion 622c of the undulation link operation groove 622 can be canceled out from the force applied to the undulation link member 648 from the other connection portion 622c. Thereby, since the force applied to the rotating member 640 can be made uniform as a whole, the rotation of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced. .
なお、本実施形態では、連結リンク作用溝６２１の接続部６２１ｃと起伏リンク作用溝６２２の接続部６２２ｃとが異なる位相となるように形成される。即ち、連結リンク作用溝６２１の接続部６２１ｃに連結リンク部材６４４の挿通部６４４ａが挿通されている状態では、起伏リンク部材６４８の挿通部６４８ａは、起伏リンク作用溝６２２の大径部６２２ａ又は小径部６２２ｂのいずれか一方に挿通されると共に、起伏リンク作用溝６２２の接続部６２２ｃに起伏リンク部材６４８の挿通部６４８ａが挿通されている状態では、連結リンク部材６４４の挿通部６４４ａは、連結リンク作用溝６２１の大径部６２１ａ又は小径部６２１ｂのいずれか一方に挿通される。
In this embodiment, the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link working groove 621 and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link working groove 622 are formed to have different phases. That is, in a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621, the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link member 648 is the large diameter portion 622a or the small diameter portion of the undulation link operation groove 622. When the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link member 648 is inserted into the connection portion 622c of the undulation link action groove 622, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into one of the portions 622b. The working groove 621 is inserted into either the large diameter part 621a or the small diameter part 621b.
接続部６２１ｃ，６２２ｃは分割部材ＤＶの間隔を変更する又は表示板６４６及び区画板６４７を変位させるための部位であるため、かかる接続部６２１ｃ，６２２ｃから比較的大きな反力を受けるところ、挿通部６４４ａ，６４８ａが接続部６２１ｃ，６２２ｃに同時に挿通されないようにすることで、必要な駆動力を分散させることができる。その結果、駆動機構６３０の駆動モータ６３１に必要とされる出力を小さくできる。
Since the connection portions 621c and 622c are portions for changing the interval of the divided member DV or displacing the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647, the insertion portion receives a relatively large reaction force from the connection portions 621c and 622c. By preventing the 644a and 648a from being inserted through the connecting portions 621c and 622c at the same time, the necessary driving force can be dispersed. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.
図４３から図４８に戻って、駆動機構６３０について説明する。駆動機構６３０は、回転部材６４０を回転駆動するための機構であり、駆動モータ６３１と、その駆動モータ６３１の駆動軸に固着されるピニオンギヤ６３２と、そのピニオンギヤ６３２に先頭のギヤ（第１伝達ギヤ６３３ａ）が歯合される伝達ギヤ列と、その伝達ギヤ列の末尾のギヤ（第２伝達ギヤ６３３ｂ）に歯合されるギヤ６３４ａを有する中央伝達体６３４と、その中央伝達部材６３４のギヤ６３４ａに先頭のギヤ（第１分配ギヤ６３５ａ，６３６ａ）が歯合される一側分配ギヤ列および他側分配ギヤ列と、それら一側分配ギヤ列および他側ギヤ列の末尾のギヤ（第３分配ギヤ６３５ｃ，６３６ｃ）に歯合されるギヤ６３７ａ，６３８ａを有する一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転駆動部材６３８と、を主に備える。なお、第１分配ギヤ６３５ａ，６３６ａと第３分配ギヤ６３５ｃ，６３６ｃの間には第２分配ギヤ６３５ｂ，６３６ｂがそれぞれ介在される。
Returning from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the drive mechanism 630 will be described. The drive mechanism 630 is a mechanism for rotationally driving the rotation member 640, and includes a drive motor 631, a pinion gear 632 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 631, and a leading gear (first transmission gear) to the pinion gear 632. 633a), a central transmission body 634 having a gear 634a meshed with the last gear (second transmission gear 633b) of the transmission gear train, and a gear 634a of the central transmission member 634 One side distribution gear train and the other side distribution gear train meshed with the leading gear (first distribution gears 635a, 636a) and the last gear (third distribution gear train) of the one side distribution gear train and the other side gear train 1 side rotation drive member 637 and other side rotation drive member 638 which have gears 637a and 638a meshed with gears 635c and 636c) are mainly provided. Note that second distribution gears 635b and 636b are interposed between the first distribution gears 635a and 636a and the third distribution gears 635c and 636c, respectively.
一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転駆動部材６３８は、駆動モータ６３１から発生された回転駆動力を伝達する伝達経路の末尾（駆動機構６３０における出力端）となる部材であり、駆動モータ６３１の回転駆動力により自身が回転されると共に、その回転により回転部材６４０を回転させる。ここで、一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転駆動部材６３８について、図５１を参照して説明する。
The one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 are members that become the end of the transmission path (the output end in the drive mechanism 630) that transmits the rotation drive force generated from the drive motor 631. While rotating itself by the rotational driving force, the rotating member 640 is rotated by the rotation. Here, the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638 will be described with reference to FIG.
図５１（ａ）は、一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転部材６３８の正面図であり、図５１（ｂ）は、図５１（ａ）のＬＩｂ−ＬＩｂ線における一側回転部材６３７及び他側回転部材６３８の断面図である。
FIG. 51A is a front view of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation member 638, and FIG. 51B is a one-side rotation member 637 and the others on the LIb-LIb line in FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of a side rotation member 638. FIG.
なお、一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転駆動部材６３８は、互いに同一の形状に形成される部材であるので、一側回転駆動部材６３７のみについて説明し、他側回転駆動部材６３８については、図５１の図中に符号のみを付し、その説明を省略する。
Since the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638 are members formed in the same shape, only the one side rotation driving member 637 will be described, and the other side rotation driving member 638 will be described. Only the code | symbol is attached | subjected in the figure of FIG. 51, The description is abbreviate | omitted.
図４７に示すように、一側回転駆動部材６３７は、円板状に形成され、その外縁部の周方向等間隔となる複数箇所（本実施形態では３カ所）に係合部６３７ｂが凹欠形成される。
As shown in FIG. 47, the one-side rotation drive member 637 is formed in a disc shape, and engagement portions 637b are recessed in a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. It is formed.
係合部６３７ｂは、回転部材６４０の分割部材ＤＶにおける被係合部６４１（図５６参照）と係合する部位であり、その開放側から凹欠奥側へ向かうに従って幅（対向面どうしの間隔）が狭くされる正面視（軸方向視）略Ｖ字状に形成される。後述するように、一側回転駆動部材６３７を回転させることで、その回転を、係合部６３７ｂ及び被係合部６４１の係合を介して、回転部材６４０へ伝達して、回転部材６４０を回転させることができる。
The engaging portion 637b is a portion that engages with the engaged portion 641 (see FIG. 56) in the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, and has a width (interval between opposing surfaces) from the open side toward the recessed back side. ) Is narrowed in a front view (a view in the axial direction). As will be described later, by rotating the one-side rotation drive member 637, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation member 640 via the engagement of the engagement portion 637b and the engaged portion 641, and the rotation member 640 is transmitted. Can be rotated.
一側回転駆動部材６３７には、係合部６３７ｂの対向する内面どうしを部分的に連結する連結壁６３７ｃが形成される。連結壁６３７ｃは、一側回転駆動部材６３７の軸心を中心として正面視（軸方向視）円弧状に湾曲する形状に形成されると共に、係合部６３７ｂの開放側（一側回転駆動部材６３７の外縁側）の内面どうしのみを連結し、係合部６３７ｂの凹欠奥側の内面どうしは非連結とする。
The one-side rotation drive member 637 is formed with a connecting wall 637c that partially connects the opposing inner surfaces of the engaging portion 637b. The connecting wall 637c is formed in a shape that curves in an arc shape when viewed from the front (axial view) around the axis of the one-side rotation drive member 637, and at the open side (one-side rotation drive member 637) of the engaging portion 637b. Only the inner surfaces on the outer edge side) are connected to each other, and the inner surfaces on the back side of the recessed portion of the engaging portion 637b are not connected.
ここで、一側回転駆動部材６３７による回転部材６４０の駆動時には、係合部６３７ｂと被係合部６４１との係合と解除とが断続的に繰り返される（図７４参照）。そのため、係合部６３７ｂに被係合部６４１が係合し始める際に、衝撃荷重が入力され、一側回転駆動部材６３７が破損する恐れがある。一方で、一側回転駆動部材６３７の重量が嵩むと、駆動機構６３０の駆動モータ６３１に大きな出力が必要とされる。
Here, when the rotation member 640 is driven by the one-side rotation drive member 637, engagement and release of the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 are intermittently repeated (see FIG. 74). Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 starts to engage with the engaging portion 637b, an impact load is input, and the one-side rotation driving member 637 may be damaged. On the other hand, when the weight of the one side rotation drive member 637 increases, a large output is required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630.
この場合、本実施形態によれば、連結壁６３７ｃが係合部６３７ｂの開放側のみに形成されるので、係合部６３７ｂと被係合部６４１とが係合し始める際の衝撃荷重に対する補強と軽量化とを効果的に両立させることができる。その結果、一側駆動部材６３７の耐久性の向上を図りつつ、駆動機構６３０の駆動モータ６３１に必要とされる出力を小さくできる。
In this case, according to the present embodiment, since the connecting wall 637c is formed only on the open side of the engaging portion 637b, the reinforcement against the impact load when the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 start to be engaged. And weight reduction can be achieved effectively. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced while improving the durability of the one-side drive member 637.
図４３から図４８に戻って説明する。駆動機構６３０の各構成部品は、中央伝達部材６３４を除き、ケース部材６１０に配設される（図５３参照）。一方、中央伝達部材６３４は、案内部材６２０の背面側に回転可能に保持される。ここで、案内部材６２０への中央伝達部材６３４の保持構造について、図５２を参照して説明する。
Returning to FIG. 43 from FIG. Each component of the drive mechanism 630 is disposed on the case member 610 except for the central transmission member 634 (see FIG. 53). On the other hand, the center transmission member 634 is rotatably held on the back side of the guide member 620. Here, a structure for holding the central transmission member 634 to the guide member 620 will be described with reference to FIG.
図５２は、中央伝達部材６３４の回転軸を含む平面で切断した回転ユニット６００の断面図である。図５２に示すように、中央伝達体６３４は、正面視円形であって中央部分が窪んだハット状に形成され、中央の窪んだ部分の外周面にギヤ６３４ａが刻設されると共に、最外縁部から張出部６３４ｂが径方向外方へ向けてフランジ状に張り出して形成される。
FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 600 cut along a plane including the rotation axis of the central transmission member 634. As shown in FIG. 52, the center transmission body 634 is formed in a hat shape having a circular shape when viewed from the front and having a recessed central portion, and a gear 634a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the recessed portion at the center. A protruding portion 634b is formed to protrude in a flange shape outward in the radial direction from the portion.
案内部材６２０の背面側には、周方向等間隔となる３カ所（即ち、１２０度間隔となる位置）に一対の保持カラー６２３，６２４（図４７及び図４８参照）が重ね合わされた状態でそれぞれ配設され、かかる一対の保持カラー６２３，６２４の対向間に中央伝達部材６３４の張出部６３４ｂが摺動可能に挿通される。これにより、一対の保持カラー６２３，６２４を介して、中央伝達部材６３４を案内部材６２０に回転可能に保持できる。
On the back side of the guide member 620, a pair of holding collars 623 and 624 (see FIG. 47 and FIG. 48) are overlapped at three positions that are equally spaced in the circumferential direction (that is, at positions that are 120 degrees apart). The protruding portion 634b of the central transmission member 634 is slidably inserted between the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 facing each other. Thereby, the center transmission member 634 can be rotatably held by the guide member 620 via the pair of holding collars 623 and 624.
即ち、案内部材６２０に対する中央伝達部材６３４の径方向（図５２上下方向）への変位は、中央伝達部材６３４の外周面に一対の保持カラー６２３，６２４の外周面を当接させることで規制でき、案内部材６２０に対する中央伝達部材６３４の軸方向（図５２左右方向）への変位は、一対の保持カラー６２３，６２４の対向面に中央伝達部材６３４の張出部６３４ｂを当接させることで規制できる。
That is, the displacement of the central transmission member 634 in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 52) relative to the guide member 620 can be restricted by bringing the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the central transmission member 634. The displacement of the central transmission member 634 in the axial direction (left-right direction in FIG. 52) relative to the guide member 620 is restricted by bringing the protruding portion 634b of the central transmission member 634 into contact with the opposing surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624. it can.
この場合、一対の保持カラー６２３，６２４は、正面視（中央伝達部材６３４の回転軸方向視）形状が円形に形成される。よって、一対の保持カラー６２３，６２４の外周面と中央伝達部材６３４の外周面とを互いの円弧形状が外接する（即ち、点接触する）関係とすることができるので、それらの接触面積を小さくして、中央伝達部材６３４が回転する際の摩擦抵抗を低減できる。その結果、駆動機構６３０の駆動モータ６３１に必要とされる出力を小さくできる。
In this case, the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 are formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of the rotation axis of the central transmission member 634). Therefore, the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 and the outer peripheral surface of the central transmission member 634 can be in a circumscribed relationship (that is, in point contact) with each other. Thus, the frictional resistance when the central transmission member 634 rotates can be reduced. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.
更に、このように、中央伝達部材６３４の外縁側（張出部６３４ｂ）を保持する構造とすることで、かかる中央伝達部材６３４の中央の窪んだ部分をケース部材６１０の底壁部６１１に軸支させる必要がなく、その軸支のための部品を配設するスペースが不要となるので、その分、後述する投球装置６５０の配設スペースを確保できる。
Further, the structure in which the outer edge side (the overhanging portion 634b) of the central transmission member 634 is held in this manner allows the recessed portion at the center of the central transmission member 634 to be pivoted to the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610. There is no need to support the space, and a space for disposing the components for the shaft support becomes unnecessary. Therefore, a space for disposing the pitching device 650 to be described later can be secured.
次いで、駆動機構６３０の動作について、図５３を参照して、説明する。図５３は、ケース部材６１０及び駆動機構６３０の正面図であり、中央伝達部材６３４が断面視された状態が図示される。
Next, the operation of the drive mechanism 630 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a front view of the case member 610 and the drive mechanism 630, and shows a state in which the central transmission member 634 is viewed in cross section.
図５３に示すように、駆動機構６３０は、回転部材６４０の回転中心である軸心Ｏと同心となる位置に中央伝達部材６３４が配設され、その中央伝達部材６３４のギヤ６３４ａに第２伝達ギヤ６３３ｂと第３分配ギヤ６３５ｃ，６３６ｃとが歯合された状態で配設される。なお、第３分配ギヤ６３５ｃ，６３６ｃは、１８０度位相を異ならせた位置（即ち、軸心Ｏを挟んで対向する位置）に配設される。
As shown in FIG. 53, in the drive mechanism 630, a central transmission member 634 is disposed at a position concentric with the axis O, which is the rotation center of the rotation member 640, and the second transmission is transmitted to the gear 634a of the central transmission member 634. The gear 633b and the third distribution gears 635c and 636c are arranged in a meshed state. The third distribution gears 635c and 636c are disposed at positions where the phases are different by 180 degrees (that is, positions facing each other with the axis O interposed therebetween).
よって、駆動モータ６３１が回転駆動されると、その回転が、ピニオンギヤ６３２及び第１伝達ギヤ６３３ａを介して、第２伝達ギヤ６３３ｂに伝達され、その第２伝達ギヤ６３３ｂの回転に伴って、中央伝達部材６３４が回転される。
Therefore, when the drive motor 631 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to the second transmission gear 633b via the pinion gear 632 and the first transmission gear 633a, and the center is accompanied by the rotation of the second transmission gear 633b. The transmission member 634 is rotated.
中央伝達部材６３４が回転されると、その中央伝達部材６３４の回転に伴って、一対の第１分配ギヤ６３５ａ，６３６ａがそれぞれ回転され、その回転が、第２分配ギヤ６３５ｂ，６３６ｂ及び第３分配ギヤ６３５ｃ，６３６ｃを介して、一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転駆動部材６３８のギヤ６３７ａ，６３８ａ（図４８参照）に伝達され、一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転駆動部材６３８が回転される。
When the central transmission member 634 is rotated, the pair of first distribution gears 635a and 636a are rotated in accordance with the rotation of the central transmission member 634, and the rotation is caused by the second distribution gears 635b and 636b and the third distribution gear. The gears 635c and 636c are transmitted to the gears 637a and 638a (see FIG. 48) of the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638, and the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638 rotate. Is done.
このように、第１分配ギヤ６３５ａ及び第２分配ギヤ６３６ａに中央伝達ギヤ６３４が歯合されるので、駆動モータ６３１の回転駆動力で中央伝達ギヤ６３４を回転させることで、一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転駆動部材６３８を同期された状態で回転させることができる。その結果、回転部材６４０の駆動を安定化させることができる。
Thus, since the central transmission gear 634 is engaged with the first distribution gear 635a and the second distribution gear 636a, the central transmission gear 634 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 631, so that the one-side rotational drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 can be rotated in a synchronized state. As a result, the driving of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.
この場合、中央伝達ギヤ６３４は、回転部材６４０の軸心Ｏと同心に配設されるので、かかる中央伝達ギヤ６３４と一側及び他側回転駆動部材６３７，６３８とを、軸心Ｏ方向視において、回転部材６４０の外縁部よりも内方（軸心Ｏ方向側）に配設できる。即ち、中央伝達ギヤ６３４と一側及び他側回転駆動部材６３７，６３８が回転部材６４０の外形よりも外方に突出されないため、その分、小型化を図ることができる。
In this case, since the central transmission gear 634 is disposed concentrically with the axis O of the rotation member 640, the central transmission gear 634 and the one side and other side rotation drive members 637, 638 are viewed in the direction of the axis O. 2, the rotating member 640 can be disposed on the inner side (axial center O direction side) than the outer edge portion. That is, the central transmission gear 634 and the one-side and other-side rotation drive members 637 and 638 are not protruded outward from the outer shape of the rotation member 640, so that the size can be reduced accordingly.
なお、ケース部材６１０に案内部材６２０が配設された状態では、その案内部材６２０の外縁部分よりも径方向外方に一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転駆動部材６３８の係合部６３７ｂ，６３８ｂが露出され（図４９参照）、かかる係合部６３７ｂ，６３８ｂに回転部材６４０の分割部材ＤＶにおける被係合部６４１が係合可能とされる。よって、一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転駆動部材６３８を回転させることで、その回転を、係合部６３７ｂ，６３８ｂ及び被係合部６４１の係合を介して、回転部材６４０に伝達して、回転部材６４０を回転させることができる。
In the state where the guide member 620 is disposed on the case member 610, the engagement portions 637b of the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 are arranged radially outward from the outer edge portion of the guide member 620. 638b is exposed (see FIG. 49), and the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV of the rotating member 640 can be engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b. Therefore, by rotating the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation member 640 via the engagement of the engaging portions 637b and 638b and the engaged portion 641. Thus, the rotating member 640 can be rotated.
この場合、一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転駆動部材６３８は、１８０度位相を異ならせた位置（即ち、軸心Ｏを挟んで対向する位置）に配設される。よって、後述するように、回転部材６４０へ駆動力を付与する位置（係合する位置）を最大限に離間させて、その回転部材６４０の回転を安定化できる。
In this case, the one side rotational drive member 637 and the other side rotational drive member 638 are disposed at positions that are different in phase by 180 degrees (that is, positions that face each other with the axis O interposed therebetween). Therefore, as will be described later, the position where the driving force is applied to the rotating member 640 (the engaging position) can be separated as much as possible, and the rotation of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.
また、一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転駆動部材６３８は、それらの係合部６３７ｂ及び係合部６３８ｂの位相が互いに異なる姿勢（回転位置）で配設される。即ち、係合部６３７ｂ又は係合部６３８ｂの一方が被係合部６４１と非係合とされている状態では、係合部６３７ｂ又は係合部６３８ｂの他方が被係合部６４１と係合される（一方と他方とが同時に非係合とされることが回避される）ように配設される。よって、後述するように、一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転駆動部材６３８から回転部材６４０への駆動力の伝達が断続的となることを抑制でき、回転部材６４０の回転を安定化できる。
Further, the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638 are arranged in postures (rotational positions) in which phases of the engaging portion 637b and the engaging portion 638b are different from each other. That is, when one of the engaging portion 637b or the engaging portion 638b is not engaged with the engaged portion 641, the other of the engaging portion 637b or the engaging portion 638b is engaged with the engaged portion 641. (One and the other are prevented from being disengaged at the same time). Therefore, as will be described later, the transmission of the driving force from the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638 to the rotation member 640 can be suppressed, and the rotation of the rotation member 640 can be stabilized.
図４３から図４８に戻って説明する。回転部材６４０は、上述したように、回転機構６３０の駆動力を受けて回転される正面視円環形状の部材であり、中央伝達部材６３４及び案内部材６２０と同心となる姿勢で、案内部材６２０の正面側に配設される。なお、本実施形態では、回転部材６４０は、正面視反時計回り（左回り）に回転される。ここで、回転部材６４０について、図５４から図６０を参照して説明する。
Returning to FIG. 43 from FIG. As described above, the rotating member 640 is an annular member that is rotated by receiving the driving force of the rotating mechanism 630, and has a posture concentric with the central transmission member 634 and the guiding member 620. It is arrange | positioned at the front side. In the present embodiment, the rotating member 640 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front. Here, the rotating member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 60.
図５４（ａ）は、回転部材６４０の正面図であり、図５４（ｂ）は、図５４（ａ）の矢印ＬＩＶｂ方向視における回転部材６４０の側面図である。また、図５５は、図５４（ｂ）の矢印ＬＶ方向視における回転部材６４０の背面図である。
54 (a) is a front view of the rotating member 640, and FIG. 54 (b) is a side view of the rotating member 640 as seen in the direction of the arrow LIVb in FIG. 54 (a). FIG. 55 is a rear view of the rotating member 640 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LV in FIG.
図５４及び図５５に示すように、回転部材６４０は、複数（本実施形態では３０個）の分割部材ＤＶを備えると共に、それら複数の分割部材ＤＶが周方向に沿って互いに無端状に連結されることで、正面視円環状に形成される。
As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the rotating member 640 includes a plurality (30 in this embodiment) of divided members DV, and the plurality of divided members DV are connected endlessly along the circumferential direction. By this, it is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front.
この場合、複数の分割部材ＤＶは、隣接する分割部材ＤＶとの間の間隔を変更可能に形成される。即ち、回転部材６４０には、分割部材ＤＶどうしが第１の間隔で周方向に連結される第１区間Ｓ１と、分割部材ＤＶどうしが第１の間隔よりも狭い間隔とされる第２の間隔で周方向に連結される第２区間Ｓ２とが形成される。なお、第１区間Ｓ１及び第２区間Ｓ２の間には、それら第１区間Ｓ１における第１の間隔から第２区間Ｓ２における第２の間隔（又はその逆）へ分割部材ＤＶどうしの間隔が遷移する区間が形成される。
In this case, the plurality of divided members DV are formed such that the distance between the adjacent divided members DV can be changed. That is, the rotating member 640 includes a first section S1 in which the divided members DV are connected in the circumferential direction at a first interval, and a second interval in which the divided members DV are narrower than the first interval. The second section S2 connected in the circumferential direction is formed. In addition, between the 1st area S1 and 2nd area S2, the space | interval of the division members DV changes from the 1st space | interval in these 1st areas S1 to the 2nd space | interval (or the reverse) in 2nd area S2. A section to be formed is formed.
図５６（ａ）は、分割部材ＤＶの正面斜視図であり、図５６（ｂ）は、分割部材ＤＶの背面斜視図である。また、図５７は、分割部材ＤＶの分解正面斜視図であり、図５８は、分割部材ＤＶの分解背面斜視図である。なお、図５６から図５８では、分割部材ＤＶどうしの連結構造の理解のために、隣接する分割部材ＤＶの連結リンク部材６４４が二点鎖線を用いて模式的に図示される。
FIG. 56 (a) is a front perspective view of the divided member DV, and FIG. 56 (b) is a rear perspective view of the divided member DV. FIG. 57 is an exploded front perspective view of the divided member DV, and FIG. 58 is an exploded rear perspective view of the divided member DV. 56 to 58, the connecting link member 644 of the adjacent divided member DV is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line in order to understand the connecting structure of the divided members DV.
ここで、本実施形態では、複数の分割部材ＤＶのうちの一部（本実施形態では１５個）の分割部材ＤＶには、被検出部６４１ｃが形成される一方、残りの分割部材ＤＶでは、被検出部６４１ｃの形成が省略される。これら被検出部６４１ｃが形成される分割部材ＤＶと、被検出部６４１ｃの形成が省略される分割部材ＤＶとは、被検出部６４１ｃの有無を除き、他の構成は同一である。よって、以下においては、被検出部６４１ｃが形成される分割部材ＤＶについて説明し、被検出部６４１ｃの形成が省略される分割部材ＤＶについての説明は省略する。
Here, in this embodiment, a part to be detected 641c is formed on a part (15 in this embodiment) of the plurality of divided members DV, while the remaining divided members DV The formation of the detected part 641c is omitted. The other parts of the divided member DV in which the detected part 641c is formed and the divided member DV in which the formation of the detected part 641c is omitted are the same except for the presence or absence of the detected part 641c. Therefore, in the following, the divided member DV where the detected portion 641c is formed will be described, and the description of the divided member DV where the formation of the detected portion 641c will be omitted.
図５６から図５８に示すように、分割部材ＤＶは、被係合部６４１と、その被係合部６４１が背面側に配設される背面側本体６４２と、その背面側本体６４２の正面側に配設される正面側本体６４３と、それら背面側本体６４２及び正面側本体６４３の間に基端側が回転可能に軸支される連結リンク部材６４４と、正面側本体６４３の正面側に配設される板保持部材６４５と、その板保持部材６４５に変位可能に保持される表示板６４６及び区画板６４７と、正面側本体６４３及び板保持部材６４５との間にスライド変位可能に配設される起伏リンク部材６４８と、を主に備えて構成される。
As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the divided member DV includes an engaged portion 641, a back side main body 642 in which the engaged portion 641 is disposed on the back side, and a front side of the back side main body 642. A front side main body 643 disposed on the front side, a connecting link member 644 whose base end is rotatably supported between the rear side main body 642 and the front side main body 643, and a front side of the front side main body 643. The plate holding member 645, the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 that are displaceably held by the plate holding member 645, and the front side main body 643 and the plate holding member 645 are slidably disposed. An undulating link member 648 is mainly provided.
被係合部６４１は、上述したように、駆動機構６３０の各回転駆動部材６３７，６３８の係合部６３７ｂ，６３８ｂに係合される部位であり、正面視略二等辺三角形状に形成され、背面側本体６４２の長手方向一側（図５６（ｂ）下側）の背面から突設される姿勢で配設される。
As described above, the engaged portion 641 is a portion that is engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the rotary drive members 637 and 638 of the drive mechanism 630, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle shape in front view. The rear side main body 642 is disposed in a posture protruding from the rear side on one side in the longitudinal direction (the lower side in FIG. 56B).
被係合部６４１の背面側本体６４２への取り付け面側には、背面側本体６４２の背面との間に所定間隔を隔てて対向する対向部６４１ａが形成され、その対向部６４１ａと背面側本体６４２との対向面間に、案内部材６２０の外縁部が摺動可能に挟み込まれる。これにより、案内部材６２０の正面からの分割部材ＤＶ（背面側本体６４２の長手方向一側）の浮き上がりを抑制できる。
On the attachment surface side of the engaged portion 641 to the back side main body 642, a facing portion 641a facing the back surface of the back side main body 642 with a predetermined interval is formed. The facing portion 641a and the back side body The outer edge portion of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the surfaces facing the 642. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the floating of the divided member DV (one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642) from the front of the guide member 620.
また、被係合部６４１の背面側本体６４２への取り付け面側には、円柱状に形成される一対の摺動ローラ６４１ｂが回転可能に軸支される。摺動ローラ６４１ｂは、その回転軸を背面側本体６４２の背面（即ち、分割部材ＤＶの移動平面）に対して直交させると共にその外周面を案内部材６２０の外縁部の外周面に当接可能な姿勢で配設される。これにより、案内部材６２０の周方向に沿って分割部材ＤＶが変位される際の摺動抵抗を低減できる。
In addition, a pair of sliding rollers 641b formed in a columnar shape are rotatably supported on the attachment surface side of the engaged portion 641 to the back side main body 642. The sliding roller 641b has its rotational axis orthogonal to the back surface of the back side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the divided member DV) and its outer peripheral surface can contact the outer peripheral surface of the outer edge portion of the guide member 620. Arranged in posture. Thereby, the sliding resistance when the division member DV is displaced along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620 can be reduced.
一方、被係合部６４１の背面側本体６４２への取り付け面と反対側には、板状の被検出部６４１ｃが張り出し形成される。被検出部６４１ｃは、ガイド部材６８０に配設された検出センサ６８４により検出される板状の部位であり、背面側本体６４２の背面（即ち、分割部材ＤＶの移動平面）に水平な姿勢とされる。
On the other hand, a plate-like detected portion 641c is formed on the opposite side of the surface of the engaged portion 641 that is attached to the back side main body 642. The detected portion 641c is a plate-like portion detected by the detection sensor 684 disposed on the guide member 680, and has a horizontal posture on the back surface of the back-side body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the divided member DV). The
背面側本体６４２は、その背面が案内部材６２０の正面に載置され、回転部材６４０の回転時に案内部材６２０の正面を摺動する部位であり、正面視長方形の板状に形成される。案内部材６２０に回転部材６４０が配設された状態では、背面側本体６４２は、その長手方向を案内部材６２０の径方向に沿わせた姿勢で配設される。即ち、各背面側本体部６４２が軸心Ｏを中心とする放射直線状に配設される（図５４参照）。
The back side main body 642 is a part that is placed on the front surface of the guide member 620 and slides on the front surface of the guide member 620 when the rotating member 640 rotates, and is formed in a rectangular plate shape in front view. In a state where the rotation member 640 is disposed on the guide member 620, the back side main body 642 is disposed in a posture in which the longitudinal direction thereof is along the radial direction of the guide member 620. That is, each back side main body 642 is arranged in a radial straight line centered on the axis O (see FIG. 54).
背面側本体６４２は、長手方向に沿って直線状に延設される溝状の開口である連結リンク用開口６４２ａ及び起伏リンク用開口６４２ｂと、長手方向一側（図５７下側）の正面に形成され正面側本体６４３（軸支部６４３ｂ）との間で連結リンク部材６４４の基端側を軸支する軸支部６４２ｃと、長手方向他側（図５８上側）の背面から突設される屈曲部６４２ｄと、を備える。
The back-side main body 642 has a connecting link opening 642a and a undulating link opening 642b, which are groove-like openings extending linearly along the longitudinal direction, on the front side on one side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 57). A shaft support portion 642c that is formed and supports the base end side of the connecting link member 644 between the front side main body 643 (shaft support portion 643b) and a bent portion that protrudes from the back surface on the other side in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 58). 642d.
連結リンク用開口６４２ａは、隣接する分割部材ＤＶの連結リンク部材６４４における挿通部６４４ａが摺動可能に挿通される開口であり、この連結リンク用開口６４２ａへの挿通部６４４ａの挿通により、分割部材ＤＶを、連結リンク部材６４４を介して、隣接する分割部材ＤＶと連結させることができる。また、連結リンク部材６４４は、連結リンク用開口６４２ａに挿通された挿通部６４４ａの先端を案内部材６２０の連結リンク作用溝６２１に挿通させる。
The connection link opening 642a is an opening through which the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 of the adjacent division member DV is slidably inserted. By the insertion of the insertion portion 644a into the connection link opening 642a, the division member The DV can be connected to the adjacent divided member DV via the connecting link member 644. Further, the connecting link member 644 causes the tip of the insertion portion 644 a inserted through the connecting link opening 642 a to be inserted into the connecting link operation groove 621 of the guide member 620.
なお、連結リンク用開口６４２ａの開口幅は、連結リンク部材６４４の挿通部６４４ａの直径と同等または若干大きな寸法に設定される。よって、連結リンク６４４の挿通部６４４ａは、連結リンク用開口６４２ａの延設方向に沿って摺動（案内）可能とされる。
The opening width of the connecting link opening 642a is set to a size that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644. Therefore, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link 644 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the connection link opening 642a.
分割部材ＤＶが案内部材６２０の周方向へ変位される際に、連結リンク部材６４４の挿通部６４４ａが案内部材６２０の連結リンク作用溝６２１から作用を受けると、挿通部６４４ａが連結リンク用開口６４２ａに沿って摺動することで、連結リンク作用溝６２１からの作用に伴って連結リンク部材６４４の姿勢が変化することを許容することができる。その結果、背面側本体６４２に対する連結リンク部材６４４の姿勢を生じさせ、分割部材ＤＶどうしの間隔を増減させることができる。
When the dividing member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, when the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 receives an action from the connection link operation groove 621 of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 644a is connected to the connection link opening 642a. , The posture of the connecting link member 644 can be allowed to change with the action from the connecting link action groove 621. As a result, the posture of the connecting link member 644 with respect to the back side main body 642 can be generated, and the interval between the divided members DV can be increased or decreased.
起伏リンク用開口６４２ｂは、起伏リンク部材６４８の挿通部６４８ａが摺動可能に挿通される開口であり、起伏リンク部材６４８は、起伏リンク用開口６４２ｂに挿通された挿通部６４８ａの先端を案内部材６２０の起伏リンク作用溝６２２に挿通させる。
The undulation link opening 642b is an opening through which the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link member 648 is slidably inserted. The undulation link member 648 guides the distal end of the insertion portion 648a inserted into the undulation link opening 642b as a guide member. The undulation link action groove 622 of 620 is inserted.
なお、起伏リンク用開口６４２ｂの開口幅は、起伏リンク部材６４８の挿通部６４８ａの直径と同等または若干大きな寸法に設定される。よって、起伏リンク６４８の挿通部６４８ａは、起伏リンク用開口６４２ｂの延設方向に沿って摺動（案内）可能とされる。
The opening width of the undulating link opening 642b is set to a size that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link 648 can be slid (guided) along the extending direction of the undulation link opening 642b.
分割部材ＤＶが案内部材６２０の周方向へ変位される際に、起伏リンク部材６４８の挿通部６４８ａが案内部材６２０の起伏リンク作用溝６２２から作用を受けると、挿通部６４８ａが起伏リンク用開口６４２ｂに沿って摺動されることで、表示板６４６及び区画板６４７を起伏させることができる。
When the dividing member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, when the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link member 648 is acted on by the undulation link action groove 622 of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 648a is moved to the undulation link opening 642b. The display board 646 and the partition board 647 can be undulated by being slid along.
軸支部６４２ｃは、上述したように、背面側本体６４２の長手方向一側（図５７下側）に形成されるので、連結リンク部材６４４の基端側を、被係合部６４１と正面視において重なる位置で軸支することができる。よって、被係合部６４１が各回転駆動部材６３７，６３８の係合部６３７ｂ，６３８ｂによって駆動され、分割部材ＤＶが案内部材６２０の周方向に沿って変位される際には、その変位を隣接する分割部材ＤＶへ連結リンク部材６４４を介して伝達しやすくできる。
As described above, the shaft support portion 642c is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 (the lower side in FIG. 57), so that the base end side of the connecting link member 644 is viewed from the front side with the engaged portion 641. It can be pivotally supported at the overlapping position. Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 is driven by the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the rotation driving members 637 and 638, and the divided member DV is displaced along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the displacement is adjacent. It can be easily transmitted to the divided member DV to be transmitted through the connecting link member 644.
屈曲部６４２ｄは、背面側本体６４２の長手方向他側（図５８上側）の背面から突設されると共にその突設先端が背面側本体６４２の背面との間に所定間隔を隔てて対向されるように屈曲される部位であり、その突設先端の屈曲される部分と背面側本体６４２との対向面間に、案内部材６２０の内縁部が摺動可能に挟み込まれる。これにより、案内部材６２０の正面からの分割部材ＤＶ（背面側本体６４２の長手方向他側）の浮き上がりを抑制できる。
The bent portion 642d protrudes from the back surface on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 (upper side in FIG. 58), and the protruding tip is opposed to the back surface of the back side main body 642 with a predetermined interval. The inner edge portion of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the facing surface of the rear-side main body 642 and the bent portion of the projecting tip. Thereby, the floating of the division member DV (the other side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642) from the front of the guide member 620 can be suppressed.
また、屈曲部６４２ｄは、その基部を案内部材６２０の内縁部の内周面に当接可能な姿勢で配設され、かかる屈曲部６４２ｄの基部と上述した摺動ローラ６４１ｂとの対向間隔が、案内部材６２０の径方向の幅と同等または若干大きな寸法に設定される。これにより、案内部材６２０の径方向への分割部材ＤＶの変位を規制できるので、かかる本体部材ＤＶ（背面側本体６４２）を、その長手方向を案内部材６２０の径方向に沿わせた姿勢のままで、案内部材６２０の周方向へ変位させることができる。
Further, the bent portion 642d is disposed in such a posture that the base portion thereof can be brought into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the inner edge portion of the guide member 620, and the facing interval between the base portion of the bent portion 642d and the above-described sliding roller 641b is as follows. The guide member 620 is set to a size that is equal to or slightly larger than the radial width. Thereby, since the displacement of the dividing member DV in the radial direction of the guide member 620 can be regulated, the main body member DV (back side main body 642) is kept in a posture in which the longitudinal direction thereof is along the radial direction of the guide member 620. Thus, the guide member 620 can be displaced in the circumferential direction.
正面側本体６４３は、背面側本体６４２と略同一の大きさの正面視長方形の板状に形成される部材であり、長手方向に沿って直線状に延設される溝状の開口である起伏リンクスライド溝６４３ａと、長手方向一側（図５８下側）の背面に形成され背面側本体６４２（軸支部６４２ｃ）との間で連結リンク部材６４４の基端側を軸支する軸支部６４３ｂと、正面から突設され区画板６４７を回転可能に支持する支持板６４３ｃと、を備える。
The front-side main body 643 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape having a substantially the same size as the back-side main body 642, and is a undulation that is a groove-like opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction. A link slide groove 643a, and a shaft support portion 643b that is formed on the back surface on one side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 58) and supports the base end side of the connecting link member 644 between the back side main body 642 (the shaft support portion 642c). And a support plate 643c that protrudes from the front and supports the partition plate 647 in a rotatable manner.
起伏リンクスライド溝６４３ａは、起伏リンク部材６４８がスライド可能に配設される直線上の溝であり、起伏リンク用開口６４２ｂと平行に延設される。即ち、起伏リンク部材６４８は、起伏リンクスライド溝６４３ａに沿ってスライドされることで、その挿通部６４８ａを起伏リンク用開口６４２ｂに沿って摺動させる。
The undulating link slide groove 643a is a linear groove in which the undulating link member 648 is slidably disposed, and extends in parallel with the undulating link opening 642b. That is, the undulating link member 648 is slid along the undulating link slide groove 643a, thereby sliding the insertion portion 648a along the undulating link opening 642b.
背面側本体６４２及び正面側本体６４３は、正面視において、長手方向他側の幅寸法が長手方向一側の幅寸法がよりも小さくされる。即ち、回転部材６４０の外周側に位置する部分の幅寸法よりも内周側に位置する部分の幅寸法の方が小さい正面視楔状に形成される。よって、第２区間Ｓ２における第２の間隔をより小さくして、分割部材ＤＶどうしを近接させることができ、回転部材６４０の配設に要するスペースを抑制できる。なお、本実施形態では、第２区間Ｓ２において、背面側本体６４２及び正面側本体６４３が隣接する背面側本体６４２及び正面側本体６４３と周方向に当接される（図５４及び図７３参照）。
The back-side main body 642 and the front-side main body 643 have a width dimension on the other side in the longitudinal direction smaller than a width dimension on the one side in the longitudinal direction in a front view. In other words, the rotary member 640 is formed in a wedge shape in a front view in which the width dimension of the portion located on the inner circumference side is smaller than the width dimension of the portion located on the outer circumference side. Therefore, the 2nd space | interval in 2nd area S2 can be made smaller, the division member DV can be adjoined, and the space required for arrangement | positioning of the rotation member 640 can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, in the second section S2, the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 are in contact with the adjacent back side main body 642 and front side main body 643 in the circumferential direction (see FIGS. 54 and 73). .
連結リンク部材６４４は、長尺状の部材であり、基端側が背面側本体６４２及び正面側本体６４３の軸支部６４２ｃ，６４３ｂによって回転可能に軸支されると共に、先端側に円柱状の挿通部６４４ａが形成される。挿通部６４４ａは、連結リンク部材６４４の回転軸と平行な姿勢で突出され、上述したように、隣接する分割部材ＤＶにおける背面側本体６４２の連結リンク用開口６４２ａを介して案内部材６２０の連結リンク用作用溝６２１に挿通される。
The connecting link member 644 is a long member, and the base end side thereof is rotatably supported by the shaft support portions 642c and 643b of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643, and a columnar insertion portion at the tip end side. 644a is formed. The insertion portion 644a protrudes in a posture parallel to the rotation axis of the connection link member 644, and, as described above, the connection link of the guide member 620 through the connection link opening 642a of the back side main body 642 in the adjacent divided member DV. The working groove 621 is inserted.
挿通部６４４ａは、その直径が、連結リンク用開口６４２ａ及び連結リンク用作用溝６２１の溝幅と略同一または若干小さい寸法に設定される。よって、回転部材６４０の回転中において、連結リンク６４４の挿通部６４４ａに対する分割部材ＤＶの位置ずれを最小限に抑制でき、分割部材ＤＶどうしの間隔を一定に維持しやすくできる。これにより、被検出部６４１ｃの位置ばらつきを抑制することができるので、検出センサ６８４（図７１参照）による検出精度の向上を図ることができる。
The diameter of the insertion portion 644a is set to be approximately the same as or slightly smaller than the groove width of the connection link opening 642a and the connection link working groove 621. Therefore, during the rotation of the rotating member 640, the positional deviation of the divided member DV with respect to the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link 644 can be suppressed to the minimum, and the interval between the divided members DV can be easily maintained constant. Thereby, since the positional variation of the to-be-detected part 641c can be suppressed, the detection accuracy by the detection sensor 684 (see FIG. 71) can be improved.
なお、連結リンク部材６４４の背面側本体６４２及び正面側本体６４３に回転可能に軸支される基端側（即ち、各本体６４２，６４３の軸支部６４２ｃ，６４３ｂ）は、連結リンク用開口６４２ａよりも被係合部６４１に近接する位置に配設される。本実施形態では、連結リンク部材６４４の基端側は、正面視（回転部材６４０の軸心Ｏ方向視）において、被係合部６４１に重なる位置に配設される。
The base end side (that is, the shaft support portions 642c and 643b of the main bodies 642 and 643) that is rotatably supported by the rear side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 of the connection link member 644 is from the connection link opening 642a. Is also disposed at a position close to the engaged portion 641. In the present embodiment, the proximal end side of the connecting link member 644 is disposed at a position overlapping the engaged portion 641 in a front view (viewed in the direction of the axis O of the rotating member 640).
これにより、分割部材ＤＶの被係合部６４１に一側および他側回転駆動部材６３７，６３８の係合部６３７ｂ，６３８ｂが係合され、一側および他側回転駆動部材６３７，６３８の回転によって、分割部材ＤＶが案内部材６２０の周方向に沿って移動される際に、その分割部材ＤＶの変位を連結リンク部材６４４を介して隣接する分割部材ＤＶへ伝達しやすくできる。その結果、回転部材６４０の変位（回転）の安定化を図ることができる。
As a result, the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the one-side and other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 are engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV, and the one-side and other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 are rotated. When the divided member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the displacement of the divided member DV can be easily transmitted to the adjacent divided member DV via the connecting link member 644. As a result, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.
起伏リンク部材６４８は、正面側本体６４３の起伏リンクスライド溝６４３ａにスライド変位可能に保持される部材であり、背面側に円柱状の挿通部６４８ａが形成されると共に、正面側に作用溝６４８ｂが形成される。挿通部６４８ａは、連結リンク部材６４４の挿通部６４４ａと平行な姿勢で突出され、上述したように、背面側本体６４２の起伏リンク用開口６４２ｂを介して案内部材６２０の起伏リンク用作用溝６２２に挿通される。
The undulating link member 648 is a member that is slidably held in the undulating link slide groove 643a of the front side main body 643. A cylindrical insertion portion 648a is formed on the back side, and an action groove 648b is formed on the front side. It is formed. The insertion portion 648a protrudes in a posture parallel to the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644, and as described above, the insertion portion 648a is formed in the undulation link working groove 622 of the guide member 620 through the undulation link opening 642b of the back side body 642. It is inserted.
作用溝６４８ｂは、起伏リンク部材６４８がスライド変位されることで表示板６４６の被作用部６４６ｄに作用して、表示板６４６及び区画板６４７を起伏させるための部位であり、起伏リンク部材６４８のスライド方向に沿って直線状に延設される溝状に形成されると共に、その溝状部分の対向面間に表示板６４６の被作用部６４６ｄが摺動可能に挿通される。
The action groove 648 b is a portion for acting on the actuated portion 646 d of the display plate 646 by sliding the undulating link member 648, and causing the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 to undulate. It is formed in a groove shape extending linearly along the sliding direction, and an actuated portion 646d of the display plate 646 is slidably inserted between the opposing surfaces of the groove portion.
表示板６４６は、正面視矩形の板状に形成される板部６４６ａと、その板部６４６ａの一辺側に形成される軸部６４６ｂ及び連結軸６４６ｃと、起伏リンク部材６４８の作用溝６４８ｂの対向面間に挿通される板状の被作用部６４６ｄとを備える。被作用部６４６ｄは、正面視略Ｓ字状に屈曲して形成されるため、起伏リンク部材６４８がスライド変位されると、そのスライド変位の方向と直交する方向に被作用部６４６ｄを変位させ、軸部６４６ｂを回転中心として表示板６４６を回転させることができる。
The display plate 646 includes a plate portion 646a formed in a rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, a shaft portion 646b and a connecting shaft 646c formed on one side of the plate portion 646a, and an opposition groove 648b of the undulating link member 648. And a plate-like part 646d inserted between the surfaces. Since the actuated portion 646d is formed by bending in a substantially S shape when viewed from the front, when the undulating link member 648 is slid, the actuated portion 646d is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement, The display plate 646 can be rotated with the shaft portion 646b as a rotation center.
区画板６４７は、正面視台形状に形成される板状の板部６４７ａと、その板部６４７ａの一辺側に形成される一対の軸部６４７ｂと、それら一対の軸部６４７ｂと同じ一辺側に形成されると共に表示板６４６の連結軸６４６ｃを回転可能に軸支する軸支部６４７ｃとを備える。
The partition plate 647 includes a plate-shaped plate portion 647a formed in a trapezoidal shape in front view, a pair of shaft portions 647b formed on one side of the plate portion 647a, and the same side as the pair of shaft portions 647b. And a shaft support portion 647c that is formed and rotatably supports the connecting shaft 646c of the display plate 646.
ここで、上述したように、回転ユニット６００は、複数のポケットが周方向に連設されたホイールを回転させると共に投球した球をいずれかのポケットに落下させるルーレットを模して構成される演出装置であり、１の分割部材ＤＶの表示板６４６及び区画板６４７と隣接する分割部材ＤＶの区画板６４７とで囲まれる空間がポケットとされると共に、表示板６４６（板部６４６ａ）には、赤または黒の色が付されると共にそれぞれに異なる数字（１〜２９）が表示される。
Here, as described above, the rotation unit 600 is configured to simulate a roulette that rotates a wheel in which a plurality of pockets are continuously arranged in the circumferential direction and drops a pitched ball into one of the pockets. A space surrounded by the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 of the one divided member DV and the partition plate 647 of the adjacent divided member DV is defined as a pocket, and the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) has red Alternatively, a black color is added and different numbers (1 to 29) are displayed.
なお、本実施形態では、１の表示板６４６には、緑の色が付されると共に、所定のマーク（星形状）が表示される。また、回転部材６４０は、第１区間Ｓ１に位置する表示板６４６のみが遊技者から視認される。即ち、第２区間Ｓ２に位置する表示板６４６は、その正面側に配設された他の部材により遮蔽され、遊技者から視認不能とされる。
In this embodiment, one display board 646 is given a green color and a predetermined mark (star shape) is displayed. Moreover, only the display board 646 located in 1st area S1 is visually recognized by the rotation member 640 from a player. That is, the display board 646 positioned in the second section S2 is shielded by other members disposed on the front side thereof, and cannot be viewed by the player.
板保持部材６４５は、表示板６４６の軸部６４６ｂを回転可能に軸支する軸支部６４５ａと、区画板６４７の軸部６４７ｂを回転可能に軸支する軸支部６４５ｂとを備え、これら各軸支部６４５ａ，６４５ｂによる軸支により、正面側本体６４３の上面側（正面側）において、表示板６４６及び区画板６４７をそれぞれ回転可能に支持する。
The plate holding member 645 includes a shaft support portion 645a that rotatably supports the shaft portion 646b of the display plate 646, and a shaft support portion 645b that rotatably supports the shaft portion 647b of the partition plate 647. The display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are rotatably supported on the upper surface side (front side) of the front side main body 643 by the shaft support by 645a and 645b.
この場合、表示板６４６と区画板６４７とは、連結軸６４６ｃ及び軸支部６４７ｃにより連結されるため、起伏リンク部材６４８のスライド変位に伴って表示板６４６が軸部６４６ｂを回転中心として回転されると、その回転が連結軸６４６ｃ及び軸支部６４７ｃを介して、区画板６４７へ伝達され、かかる区画板６４７が軸部６４７ｂを回転中心として回転される。この表示板６４６及び区画板６４７の回転について、図５９及び図６０を参照して説明する。
In this case, since the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are connected by the connection shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, the display plate 646 is rotated about the shaft portion 646b as the center of rotation as the undulating link member 648 slides. Then, the rotation is transmitted to the partition plate 647 via the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, and the partition plate 647 is rotated about the shaft portion 647b as a rotation center. The rotation of the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 will be described with reference to FIGS.
図５９（ａ）及び図５９（ｂ）は、第１区間Ｓ１に配置された状態における分割部材ＤＶの上面斜視図および下面斜視図であり、図６０（ａ）及び図６０（ｂ）は、第２区間Ｓ２に配置された状態における分割部材ＤＶの上面斜視図および下面斜視図である。なお、図５９及び図６０は、理解を容易とするために、一部の構成を透視した状態が図示されると共に、連結リンク部材６４４や被検出部６４１ｃ、屈曲部６４２ｄの図示が省略される。
FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b) are a top perspective view and a bottom perspective view of the divided member DV in a state arranged in the first section S1, and FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b) It is the upper surface perspective view and lower surface perspective view of the division member DV in the state arrange | positioned in 2nd area S2. 59 and 60 show a state in which a part of the structure is seen through for easy understanding, and illustration of the connecting link member 644, the detected portion 641c, and the bent portion 642d is omitted. .
図５９に示すように、分割部材ＤＶが第１区間Ｓ１に配置された状態では、起伏リンク部材６４８の挿通部６４８ａが案内部材６２０の起伏リンク作用溝６２２における小径部６２２ｂ（図５０参照）に挿通される。そのため、起伏リンク部材６４８が背面側本体６４２及び正面側本体６４３の長手方向他側（即ち、案内部材６２０及び回転部材６４０の内周側、軸心Ｏ側）にスライド変位された状態とされ、これにより、表示板６４６の板部６４６ａが水平姿勢に配置とされる一方、区画板６４７の板部６４７ａが起立姿勢に配置される。
As shown in FIG. 59, in a state where the divided member DV is disposed in the first section S1, the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link member 648 is formed in the small diameter portion 622b (see FIG. 50) in the undulation link action groove 622 of the guide member 620. It is inserted. Therefore, the undulating link member 648 is slid and displaced to the other side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the inner peripheral side of the guide member 620 and the rotation member 640, the axis O side), Accordingly, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is arranged in a horizontal posture, while the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is arranged in an upright posture.
なお、水平姿勢とは、表示板６４６の板部６４６ａが、背面側本体６４２の背面（即ち、分割部材ＤＶの移動平面）に平行となる姿勢であり、起立姿勢とは、区画板６４７の板部６４７ａが、背面側本体６４２の背面（即ち、分割部材ＤＶの移動平面）に直交平行となる姿勢である。
The horizontal posture is a posture in which the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is parallel to the back surface of the back-side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the divided member DV), and the standing posture is the plate of the partition plate 647. The portion 647a is in a posture to be orthogonally parallel to the back surface of the back side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the divided member DV).
図６０に示すように、分割部材ＤＶが第２区間Ｓ２に配置された状態では、起伏リンク部材６４８の挿通部６４８ａが案内部材６２０の起伏リンク作用溝６２２における大径部６２２ａ（図５０参照）に挿通される。そのため、起伏リンク部材６４８が背面側本体６４２及び正面側本体６４３の長手方向一側（即ち、案内部材６２０及び回転部材６４０の外周側、軸心Ｏと反対側）にスライド変位された状態とされ、これにより、表示板６４６の板部６４６ａが、水平姿勢から区画板６４７の板部６４７ａ側へ持ち上げられて、傾斜姿勢に配置とされると共に、区画板６４７の板部６４７ａが、起立姿勢から表示板６４６の板部６４６ａ側へ傾倒されて、傾斜姿勢に配置される。
As shown in FIG. 60, in a state where the divided member DV is disposed in the second section S2, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is a large diameter portion 622a in the undulating link working groove 622 of the guide member 620 (see FIG. 50). Is inserted. Therefore, the undulating link member 648 is slid and displaced to one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the outer peripheral side of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640, opposite to the axis O). Thus, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted from the horizontal posture toward the plate portion 647a side of the partition plate 647 and placed in an inclined posture, and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is moved from the standing posture. The display plate 646 is tilted toward the plate portion 646a and is disposed in an inclined posture.
このように、本実施形態では、表示板６４６と区画板６４７とを、連結軸６４６ｃ及び軸支部６４７ｃにより連結するので、起伏リンク部材６４８のスライド変位に伴い、表示板６４６を回転させることで、連結軸６４６ｃ及び軸支部６４７ｃを介して、区画板６４７も回転させることができる。
Thus, in this embodiment, since the display board 646 and the partition board 647 are connected by the connection shaft 646c and the shaft support part 647c, the display board 646 is rotated by the slide displacement of the undulating link member 648. The partition plate 647 can also be rotated through the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support 647c.
これにより、表示板６４６を回転させるための機構と、区画板６４７を回転させるための機構とのそれぞれに対して、起伏リンク作用溝および起伏リンク部材を別々に設ける必要がなく、両機構において起伏リンク作用溝および起伏リンク部材を共通化することができる。その結果、部品点数を削減できると共に、構造を簡素化でき、製品コストの削減を図ることができる。
Accordingly, it is not necessary to separately provide the undulation link action groove and the undulation link member for each of the mechanism for rotating the display plate 646 and the mechanism for rotating the partition plate 647. The link action groove and the undulating link member can be shared. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced, the structure can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced.
ここで、本実施形態では、表示板６４６の板部６４６ａは、区画板６４７の板部６４７ａよりも重量が重くされる。そのため、図６０に示す状態（即ち、表示板６４６の板部６４６ａが上方へ持ち上げられると共に、区画板６４７の板部６４７ａが下方へ傾倒された状態）から、図５９に示す状態（即ち、表示板６４６の板部６４６ａが水平姿勢とされると共に、区画板６４７の板部６４７ａが起立姿勢とされた状態）とする場合には、表示板６４６（板部６４６ａ）の自重による回転作用を利用して、図５９に示す状態を確実かつ速やかに形成することができる。
Here, in this embodiment, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is heavier than the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647. Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 60 (that is, the state where the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted upward and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is tilted downward), the state shown in FIG. When the plate portion 646a of the plate 646 is set in a horizontal posture and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is set in a standing posture), the rotation action due to the weight of the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) is used. Thus, the state shown in FIG. 59 can be formed reliably and promptly.
即ち、表示板６４６の板部６４６ａは、上方へ持ち上げられているので、下方へ傾倒される方向へ自重で回転されることで、水平姿勢を形成できると共に、その表示板６４６の回転（自重）が連結軸６４６ｃ及び軸支部６４７ｃを介して区画板６４７へ伝達されることで、区画板６４７を持ち上げて起立姿勢を形成できる。よって、汚れや埃などの付着により回転が阻害されている場合であっても、図５９に示す状態を確実かつ速やかに形成することができる。
That is, since the plate portion 646a of the display board 646 is lifted upward, it can be rotated by its own weight in a direction tilted downward, thereby forming a horizontal posture and rotating the display board 646 (self-weight). Is transmitted to the partition plate 647 via the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, whereby the partition plate 647 can be lifted to form a standing posture. Therefore, even when rotation is hindered by adhesion of dirt or dust, the state shown in FIG. 59 can be formed reliably and promptly.
特に、本実施形態では、表示板６４６は、板部６４６ａの軸部６４６ｂからの張り出し長さが、区画板６４７における板部６４７ａの軸部６４７ｂからの張り出し長さよりも大きな寸法に設定される。そのため、表示板６４６の板部６４６ａにおける重心を軸部６４６ｂから離間させると共に、区画板６４７の板部６４７ａにおける重心を軸部６４７ｂに近接させることができ、その結果、図５９に示す状態の形成を、表示板６４６の自重を利用して、より確実かつ速やかに行うことができる。
In particular, in this embodiment, the display plate 646 is set such that the protruding length of the plate portion 646a from the shaft portion 646b is larger than the protruding length of the partition plate 647 from the shaft portion 647b of the plate portion 647a. Therefore, the center of gravity of the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 can be separated from the shaft portion 646b, and the center of gravity of the partition plate 647 can be brought close to the shaft portion 647b. As a result, the state shown in FIG. 59 is formed. Can be performed more reliably and promptly by utilizing the weight of the display board 646.
図４３から図４８に戻って説明する。投球装置６５０は、球Ｂを回転部材６４０へ投球するための装置であり、駆動機構６３０の中央伝達部材６３４における中央の窪みに収納され、回転部材６４０の内周側に配設される。ここで、投球装置６５０について、図６１から図６９を参照して説明する。
Returning to FIG. 43 from FIG. The pitching device 650 is a device for pitching the ball B onto the rotating member 640, and is housed in a central recess in the central transmission member 634 of the drive mechanism 630 and disposed on the inner peripheral side of the rotating member 640. Here, the pitching device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 69.
図６１及び図６２は、投球装置６５０の分解正面斜視図である。なお、図６２では、保持片出没機構６７０がケース体６５１に取り付けられた状態が図示されると共に、通路部材６５５の図示が省略される。
61 and 62 are exploded front perspective views of the pitching device 650. FIG. In FIG. 62, a state in which the holding piece protruding / retracting mechanism 670 is attached to the case body 651 is illustrated, and the passage member 655 is not illustrated.
図６１及び図６２に示すように、投球装置６５０は、正面側が開放された容器状に形成されるケース体６５１と、そのケース体６５１の内部に配設されるアーム回転機構６６０及び保持片出没機構６７０と、ケース体６５１の正面側に配設される通路部材６５５と、透光性材料から球形に形成される球Ｂと、を主に備える。
As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the pitching device 650 includes a case body 651 formed in a container shape with the front side open, an arm rotation mechanism 660 and a holding piece protruding and retracting disposed inside the case body 651. It mainly includes a mechanism 670, a passage member 655 disposed on the front side of the case body 651, and a sphere B formed in a spherical shape from a translucent material.
ケース体６５１は、正面視略円形の底壁部６５１ａと、その底壁部６５１ａから正面へ向けて立設される略円筒状の外壁部６５１ｂと、その外壁部６５１ｂの外周面から径方向外方へフランジ状に張り出して形成される張出壁部６５１ｃとを備え、張出壁部６５１ｃが案内部材６２０の背面側に締結固定されることで、外壁部６５１ｂの立設先端（開口部分）を回転部材６４０（表示板６４６の板部６４６ａ）の正面に略一致させた位置に配設される。
The case body 651 includes a bottom wall portion 651a that is substantially circular in front view, a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 651b that is erected from the bottom wall portion 651a toward the front, and a radially outer side from the outer peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b. A projecting wall portion 651c that projects in the form of a flange toward the end, and the projecting wall portion 651c is fastened and fixed to the back side of the guide member 620, whereby the standing end (opening portion) of the outer wall portion 651b. Is disposed at a position substantially matching the front surface of the rotating member 640 (the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646).
底壁部６５１ａの正面には、球保持部６５２が配設される。球保持部６５２には、球Ｂの外径に対応した大きさの球面状の窪みが正面に形成され、その窪みが球Ｂの保持位置（初期位置）とされる。即ち、球保持部６５２に球Ｂが配置されると、その球Ｂは、外壁部６５１ｂの内周面とアーム回転機構６６０のアーム部材６６４との間に保持される（図４４参照）。
A sphere holding portion 652 is disposed in front of the bottom wall portion 651a. In the sphere holding portion 652, a spherical recess having a size corresponding to the outer diameter of the sphere B is formed on the front surface, and the recess serves as a holding position (initial position) of the sphere B. That is, when the sphere B is disposed on the sphere holding portion 652, the sphere B is held between the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b and the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 (see FIG. 44).
この場合、投球装置６５０は、保持片出没機構６７０の保持片６７７が最下方に位置する姿勢で配設されており、アーム回転機構６６０のアーム部材６６４が回転されると、球Ｂが外壁部６５１ｂの内周面（内周通路６５１ｃ１）を転動して、保持片出没機構６７０の突出位置にある保持片６７７上に保持される（図６８参照）。ここで、アーム回転機構６６０について、図６３から図６５を参照して説明する。
In this case, the pitching device 650 is arranged in a posture in which the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is positioned at the lowermost position, and when the arm member 664 of the arm rotating mechanism 660 is rotated, the ball B becomes the outer wall portion. The inner peripheral surface (inner peripheral passage 651c1) of 651b rolls and is held on the holding piece 677 at the protruding position of the holding piece protruding and retracting mechanism 670 (see FIG. 68). Here, the arm rotation mechanism 660 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65.
図６３は、アーム回転機構６６０の分解正面斜視図である。また、図６４は、アーム回転機構６６０のアーム部材６６４が保持位置に配置された状態における投球装置６６０の正面図であり、図６５は、アーム回転機構６６０のアーム部材６６４が離間位置に配置された状態における投球装置６６０の正面図である。なお、図６４及び図６５では、理解を容易とするために、アーム回転機構６６０の正面ケース６６２が取り外された状態が図示される。
FIG. 63 is an exploded front perspective view of the arm rotation mechanism 660. FIG. 64 is a front view of the pitching device 660 in a state where the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is disposed at the holding position, and FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 disposed at the separation position. It is a front view of the pitching device 660 in the state. 64 and 65 show a state where the front case 662 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is removed for easy understanding.
図６３から図６５に示すように、アーム回転機構６６０は、ケース体６５１の底壁部６５１ａに配設される背面ケース６６１と、その背面ケース６６１の正面に配設される正面ケース６６２と、それら背面ケース６６１及び正面ケース６６２の対向面間に回転可能に保持されるクランク部材６６３及びアーム部材６６４と、それらクランク部材６６３及びアーム部材６６４を駆動するための駆動モータ６６５及びピニオンギヤ６６６とを備える。
As shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, the arm rotation mechanism 660 includes a rear case 661 disposed on the bottom wall portion 651a of the case body 651, a front case 662 disposed on the front surface of the rear case 661, A crank member 663 and an arm member 664 that are rotatably held between opposing surfaces of the rear case 661 and the front case 662, and a drive motor 665 and a pinion gear 666 for driving the crank member 663 and the arm member 664 are provided. .
背面ケース６６１には、軸６６１ａ，６６１ｂが突設され、軸６６１ａにクランク部材６６３が、軸６６１ｂにアーム部材６６４が、それぞれ回転可能に軸支される。クランク部材６６３には、ピニオンギヤ６７６が歯合されるギヤ６６３ａが外周面に刻設されると共に、回転中心（軸６６１ａ）から偏心した位置にピン部６６３ｂが突設される。また、アーム部材６６４には、クランク部材６６３のピン部６６３ｂが摺動可能に挿通される摺動溝６６４ａが直線状に延設されると共に、その摺動溝６６４ａに対して回転中心（軸６６１ｂ）を挟んで反対側となる位置には、円環形状を半分に分割した正面視形状の湾曲部６６４ｂが形成される。
The rear case 661 is provided with shafts 661a and 661b projecting thereon, and a crank member 663 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661a and an arm member 664 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661b. A gear 663a with which the pinion gear 676 is engaged is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the crank member 663, and a pin portion 663b is provided at a position eccentric from the center of rotation (the shaft 661a). The arm member 664 is linearly provided with a slide groove 664a through which the pin portion 663b of the crank member 663 is slidably inserted, and has a rotational center (shaft 661b) with respect to the slide groove 664a. ), A curved portion 664b having a shape in front view obtained by dividing the annular shape in half is formed.
よって、駆動モータ６６５を正方向または逆方向に回転駆動し、その駆動モータ６５５の駆動軸に固着されたピニオンギヤ６６６の回転を介してクランク部材６６３を回転させ、そのクランク部材６６３のピン部６６３ｂをアーム部材６６４の摺動溝６６４ａへ作用させることで、アーム部材６６４を軸６６１ｂを回転中心として一方向または他方向へ回転させることができる。
Therefore, the drive motor 665 is rotationally driven in the forward direction or the reverse direction, the crank member 663 is rotated through the rotation of the pinion gear 666 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 655, and the pin portion 663b of the crank member 663 is moved. By acting on the sliding groove 664a of the arm member 664, the arm member 664 can be rotated in one direction or the other direction around the shaft 661b.
即ち、アーム部材６６４は、湾曲部６６４ｂの湾曲形状を球保持部６５２の外周部分に沿わせて球Ｂを球保持部６５２に保持する保持位置（図６４参照）と、湾曲部６６４ｂを球保持部６５２から離間させて球Ｂを球保持部６５２から内周通路６５１ｃ１へ落下させる離間位置（図６５参照）との間で回転（揺動）可能とされる。
That is, the arm member 664 has the holding position (see FIG. 64) for holding the sphere B on the sphere holding portion 652 with the bending shape of the bending portion 664b being aligned with the outer peripheral portion of the sphere holding portion 652, and holds the bending portion 664b on the sphere. It is possible to rotate (swing) between the separation position (see FIG. 65) where the sphere B is separated from the portion 652 and dropped from the sphere holding portion 652 to the inner peripheral passage 651c1.
本実施形態では、湾曲部６６４ｂの内周面の一部（軸６６１ｂから離間される側（下方側）の中心角略９０度の範囲）が片持ち板６６４ｃにより形成される。片持ち板６６４ｃは、湾曲部６６４ｂの内周面に沿って湾曲する板状体であり、その基端側に設けられた軸６６４ｃ１が湾曲部６６４ｂに回転可能に軸支されると共に、先端側の背面側（外周面側）に配設されたリミットスイッチ６６７の板ばね６６７ａの弾性力により上方（径方向内方側）へ持ち上げられた姿勢に維持される。
In the present embodiment, a part of the inner peripheral surface of the curved portion 664b (a range of a central angle of about 90 degrees on the side (downward side) separated from the shaft 661b) is formed by the cantilever plate 664c. The cantilever plate 664c is a plate-like body that is curved along the inner peripheral surface of the bending portion 664b. A shaft 664c1 provided on the base end side of the cantilever plate 664c is rotatably supported by the bending portion 664b, and the distal end side. Is maintained in a posture lifted upward (inward in the radial direction) by the elastic force of the leaf spring 667a of the limit switch 667 disposed on the back side (outer peripheral surface side).
よって、アーム部材６６４が保持位置に配置された状態において、球保持部６５２に球Ｂが保持される場合には、その球Ｂの重量により片持ち板６６４ｃが軸６６４ｃ１を回転中心として押し下げられ、リミットスイッチ６６７をオンさせる一方、球保持部６５２に球Ｂが保持されていない場合には、片持ち板６６４ｃが上述したように持ち上げられた姿勢とされ、リミットスイッチ６６７をオフさせる。その結果、球保持部６５２における球Ｂの有無を検出できる。
Therefore, in the state where the arm member 664 is disposed at the holding position, when the sphere B is held by the sphere holding portion 652, the cantilever plate 664c is pushed down around the shaft 664c1 by the weight of the sphere B, While the limit switch 667 is turned on, when the sphere B is not held by the sphere holding portion 652, the cantilever plate 664c is brought up as described above, and the limit switch 667 is turned off. As a result, the presence or absence of the sphere B in the sphere holder 652 can be detected.
この場合、アーム部材６６４の湾曲部６６４ｂおよび球保持部６５２の窪みは、アーム部材６６４が保持位置に配置された状態において、球Ｂが変位可能な大きさに形成される。即ち、湾曲部６６４ｂの内径および球保持部６５２の窪みの内径が、球の直径よりも大きくされる。よって、パチンコ機１０が遊技者により叩かれたり揺らされたりして外力（振動）が入力された場合には、その振動の入力に伴って、球Ｂを変位させることができる。即ち、球Ｂが変位（振動）されることで、その振動に伴って、片持ち板６６４ｃを変位させることができ、リミットスイッチ６６７をオン・オフさせることができる。その結果、リミットスイッチ６６７の状態を監視することで、アーム回転機構６６０を利用して、パチンコ機１０への外力の入力を検出することができる。
In this case, the curved portion 664b of the arm member 664 and the depression of the ball holding portion 652 are formed to have a size that allows the ball B to be displaced in a state where the arm member 664 is disposed at the holding position. That is, the inner diameter of the curved portion 664b and the inner diameter of the recess of the sphere holding portion 652 are made larger than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, when an external force (vibration) is input as the pachinko machine 10 is hit or shaken by the player, the ball B can be displaced in accordance with the input of the vibration. That is, when the ball B is displaced (vibrated), the cantilever plate 664c can be displaced along with the vibration, and the limit switch 667 can be turned on / off. As a result, by monitoring the state of the limit switch 667, the input of the external force to the pachinko machine 10 can be detected using the arm rotation mechanism 660.
図６１及び図６２へ戻って説明する。上述したように、アーム回転機構６６０のアーム部材６６４が離間位置へ回転されると、球Ｂは、外壁部６５１ｂの内周面（内周通路６５１ｃ１）を転動され、保持片出没機構６７０の突出位置にある保持片６７７上に保持される（図６８参照）。保持片出没機構６７０は、保持片６７７が突出位置と没入位置との間で出没可能に形成されており、かかる保持片６７７が没入位置に没入されることで、球Ｂが回転部材６４０の複数の分割部材ＤＶのうちのいずれかの分割部材ＤＶ（表示板６４６）上に投球される。ここで、保持片出没機構６７０について、図６６から図６９を参照して説明する。
Returning to FIG. 61 and FIG. As described above, when the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is rotated to the separation position, the ball B is rolled on the inner peripheral surface (inner peripheral passage 651c1) of the outer wall portion 651b, and the holding piece protruding and retracting mechanism 670 is moved. It hold | maintains on the holding piece 677 in a protrusion position (refer FIG. 68). The holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is formed such that the holding piece 677 can be retracted between the protruding position and the retracted position. The retaining piece 677 is retracted into the retracted position, so that the ball B has a plurality of rotation members 640. Are thrown onto any one of the divided members DV (display plate 646). Here, the holding piece protruding and retracting mechanism 670 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 69.
図６６は、保持片６７７が突出位置に配置された状態における保持片出没機構６７０の分解正面斜視図であり、図６７は、保持片６７７が没入位置に配置された状態における保持片出没機構６７０の分解正面斜視図である。
66 is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the protruding position, and FIG. 67 is a holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the retracted position. FIG.
図６８（ａ）は、保持片６７７が突出位置に配置された状態における保持片出没機構６７０の正面斜視図であり、図６８（ｂ）は、図６８（ａ）のＬＸＶＩＩＩｂ−ＬＸＶＩＩＩｂ線における保持片出没機構６７０の部分拡大断面図である。また、図６９（ａ）は、保持片６７７が没入位置に配置された状態における保持片出没機構６７０の正面斜視図であり、図６９（ｂ）は、図６９（ａ）のＬＸＩＸｂ−ＬＸＩＸｂ線における保持片出没機構６７０の部分拡大断面図である。
FIG. 68A is a front perspective view of the holding piece protruding and retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the protruding position, and FIG. 68B is a view taken along the line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. FIG. 69 (a) is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 69 (b) is an LXIXb-LXIXb line in FIG. 69 (a). It is a partial expanded sectional view of the holding | maintenance piece protrusion / extraction mechanism in 670.
図６６から図６９に示すように、保持片出没機構６７０は、ケース体６５１の外壁部６５１ｂの内周面に沿う円弧状に湾曲して形成されケース体６５１の底壁部６５１ａに配設される背面ケース６７１と、その背面ケース６７１の正面に配設される正面ケース６７２と、それら背面ケース６７１及び正面ケース６７２の対向面間にスライド変位可能に保持されるスライド部材６７３と、そのスライド部材６７３を駆動するための駆動モータ６７５及びピニオンギヤ６７６と、スライド部材６７３のスライド変位に伴って出没される保持片６７７と、を備える。
As shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, the holding piece protruding / retracting mechanism 670 is formed to be curved in an arc shape along the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b of the case body 651, and is disposed on the bottom wall portion 651a of the case body 651. A rear case 671, a front case 672 disposed in front of the rear case 671, a slide member 673 slidably held between opposing surfaces of the rear case 671 and the front case 672, and the slide member A driving motor 675 and a pinion gear 676 for driving 673, and a holding piece 677 which is projected and retracted with the sliding displacement of the sliding member 673.
背面ケース６７１は、所定間隔を隔てて対向配置一対一組のローラ部材６７４を二組備え、それら各組のローラ部材６７４の対向間にスライド部材６７３をスライド変位可能に保持する。また、背面ケース６７１は、その周方向一端側（下方部分）から正面側へ向けて張り出し形成される上面視矩形板状の摺動ベース６７１ａを備え、その摺動ベース６７１ａの上面と正面ベース６７２の下面（外周面）との間で保持片６７７のスライド変位（正面側への突出および背面側への没入）を案内する。
The back case 671 includes two sets of one pair of roller members 674 opposed to each other at a predetermined interval, and holds the slide member 673 so as to be slidable between the sets of roller members 674 facing each other. Further, the rear case 671 includes a sliding base 671a having a rectangular plate shape as viewed from above and extending from one end side (lower part) in the circumferential direction to the front side. The upper surface of the sliding base 671a and the front base 672 are provided. The slide displacement (protrusion to the front side and immersion to the back side) of the holding piece 677 is guided to the lower surface (outer peripheral surface) of the head.
スライド部材６７３には、その周方向一端側（下方部分）からピン部６７３ａが突出されると共に、周方向他端側（情報部分）には、ピニオンギヤ６７６が歯合されるラックギヤ６７３ｂが内周面に沿って刻設される。また、保持片６７７には、スライド部材６７３のピン部６７３ａが摺動可能に挿通される摺動溝６７７ａが略Ｚ字状に屈曲して延設される。即ち、摺動溝６７７ａは、その一端側（図６６右側）が他端側（図６６左側）よりも正面側にオフセットされる。
A pin portion 673a protrudes from one end side (lower portion) in the circumferential direction of the slide member 673, and a rack gear 673b meshed with the pinion gear 676 is formed on the inner peripheral surface at the other end side in the circumferential direction (information portion). Engraved along. In addition, a sliding groove 677a into which the pin portion 673a of the slide member 673 is slidably inserted is bent and extended in a substantially Z shape. That is, one end side (the right side in FIG. 66) of the sliding groove 677a is offset to the front side from the other end side (the left side in FIG. 66).
よって、駆動モータ６７５を正方向または逆方向に回転駆動し、その駆動モータ６７５の駆動軸に固着されたピニオンギヤ６７６を回転させることで、ラックギヤ６７３ｂを介してスライド部材６７３をスライド変位させ、そのスライド部材６７３のピン部６７３ａを保持片６７７の摺動溝６７７ａへ作用させることで、保持片６７７を正面側へ突出または背面側へ没入させることができる。即ち、保持片６７７は、正面側へ突出される突出位置（図６８参照）と、背面側へ没入される没入位置（図６９参照）との間でスライド変位可能とされる。
Therefore, the drive motor 675 is rotationally driven in the forward direction or the reverse direction, and the pinion gear 676 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 675 is rotated, whereby the slide member 673 is slid and displaced through the rack gear 673b. By causing the pin portion 673a of the member 673 to act on the sliding groove 677a of the holding piece 677, the holding piece 677 can be protruded toward the front side or can be immersed into the back side. That is, the holding piece 677 is slidably displaceable between a protruding position where the holding piece 677 protrudes to the front side (see FIG. 68) and an immersion position where the holding piece 677 is immersed to the back side (see FIG. 69).
ここで、保持片６７７の上面には、背面側（図６８（ｂ）及び図６９（ｂ）右側）に位置すると共にケース体６５１の外壁部６５１ｂの内周面（即ち、内周通路６５１ｃ１）と同心状に湾曲し内周通路６５１ｃ１と周方向に滑らかに連なる湾曲面６７７ｂと、その湾曲面６７７ｂの縁部に連なると共に正面側（図６８（ｂ）及び図６９（ｂ）左側）へ向かうに従って上昇傾斜される上昇傾斜面６７７ｃと、その上昇傾斜面６７７ｃの縁部に連なると共に正面側へ向かうに従って下降傾斜される下降傾斜面６７７ｄとが形成される。
Here, the upper surface of the holding piece 677 is located on the back side (the right side in FIGS. 68 (b) and 69 (b)) and the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b of the case body 651 (that is, the inner peripheral passage 651c1). A curved surface 677b that is concentrically curved and continuously communicates with the inner circumferential passage 651c1 in the circumferential direction, and is continuous with the edge of the curved surface 677b and toward the front side (left side in FIGS. 68 (b) and 69 (b)). Ascending inclined surface 677c which is inclined upward in accordance with this, and a descending inclined surface 677d which is continuous with the edge of the ascending inclined surface 677c and is inclined downward toward the front side are formed.
よって、保持片６７７が突出位置に配置された状態では（図６８（ａ）及び図６８（ｂ）参照）、球保持部６５２から落下され内周通路６５１ｃ１を転動して保持片６７７の湾曲面６７７ｂ上に達した球Ｂが正面側（図６８（ｂ）左側）へ転動することを上昇傾斜面６７７ｃの上昇傾斜によって規制して、保持片６７７（湾曲面６７７ｂ）上に保持することができる。
Therefore, in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the protruding position (see FIGS. 68A and 68B), the holding piece 677 is dropped from the ball holding portion 652 and rolls on the inner peripheral passage 651c1 to bend the holding piece 677. The ball B reaching the surface 677b is restricted from rolling to the front side (left side in FIG. 68 (b)) by the rising inclination of the rising inclined surface 677c and held on the holding piece 677 (curved surface 677b). Can do.
一方、この突出位置から保持片６７７が背面側へ没入され没入位置に配置されると（図６９（ａ）及び図６９（ｂ）参照）、正面ケース６７２の正面によって背面側（図６９（ｂ）右側）への移動が規制されている球Ｂが、保持片６７７の没入方向（背面側）への変位に伴って、上昇傾斜面６７７ｃを乗り越えて、下降傾斜面６７７ｄ上に位置される。これにより、かかる下降傾斜面６７７ｄの下降傾斜に沿って球Ｂを転動させ、かかる球Ｂを正面側（回転部材６４０の分割部材ＤＶ）へ投球することができる。
On the other hand, when the holding piece 677 is immersed from the protruding position to the back side and disposed at the immersed position (see FIGS. 69A and 69B), the front side of the front case 672 causes the back side (FIG. 69B). ) The ball B whose movement to the right side is regulated is moved over the rising inclined surface 677c and positioned on the falling inclined surface 677d as the holding piece 677 is displaced in the immersion direction (back side). Thereby, the sphere B can roll along the descending slope of the descending slope 677d, and the sphere B can be thrown onto the front side (the divided member DV of the rotating member 640).
なお、湾曲面６７７ｂは、その周方向両側が内周通路６５１ｃ１に滑らかに連なるので、球保持部６５２から落下され、一方の内周通路６５１ｃ１を転動してきた球Ｂを、保持片６７７の湾曲面６７７ｂ上を通過させて、他方の内周通路６５１ｃ１まで転動させることができる。即ち、湾曲面６７７ｂを介して、球Ｂを周方向一方側の内周通路６５１ｃ１及び周方向他方側の内周通路６５１ｃ１の間で往復させることができる。また、保持片６７７の湾曲面６７７ｂは、内周通路６５１ｃ１よりも下方に位置するので、球Ｂの勢いが無くなりその転動が収束された際には、その球Ｂを湾曲面６７７ｂ上に位置させることができる。
The curved surface 677b is smoothly connected to the inner peripheral passage 651c1 on both sides in the circumferential direction, so that the sphere B that has fallen from the ball holding portion 652 and rolled on the one inner peripheral passage 651c1 is bent by the holding piece 677. It can pass over the surface 677b and roll to the other inner peripheral passage 651c1. That is, the sphere B can be reciprocated between the inner circumferential passage 651c1 on the one circumferential side and the inner circumferential passage 651c1 on the other circumferential side via the curved surface 677b. Further, since the curved surface 677b of the holding piece 677 is located below the inner peripheral passage 651c1, when the ball B loses momentum and its rolling is converged, the ball B is positioned on the curved surface 677b. Can be made.
図６１へ戻って説明する。上述したように、ケース体６５１の正面側には、通路部材６５５が配設される。通路部材６５５は、保持片出没機構６７０の保持片６７７の正面側に位置しその保持片６７７の没入動作（没入位置への没入）により投球された球Ｂを回転部材６４０の分割部材ＤＶ（表示板６４６）上へ送球する際の通路となる送球通路６５５ａと、回転部材６４０の分割部材ＤＶから送球された球Ｂを球保持部６５２へ返送する際の通路となる返送通路６５５ｂとを備える。
Returning to FIG. As described above, the passage member 655 is disposed on the front side of the case body 651. The passage member 655 is located on the front side of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670, and the ball B thrown by the immersing operation (immersion to the immersing position) of the holding piece 677 is divided member DV (display) of the rotating member 640 And a return passage 655b serving as a passage for returning the ball B sent from the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 to the ball holding portion 652.
送球通路６５５ａは、保持片出没機構６７０の保持片６７７における下降傾斜面６７７ｄと略同一の幅寸法を有し正面側へ延設される断面略コ字状の溝部６５５ａ１と、その溝部６５５ａ１から正面側縁部に連なると共に回転部材６４０の分割部材ＤＶにおける表示板６４６と略面一に連なる正面部６５５ａ２と、その正面部６５５ａ２の幅方向両側から立設されると共に回転部材６４０の分割部材ＤＶにおける区画板６４７の対向間隔と略同一の間隔で対向する一対の対向部６５５ａ３とを備える。
The ball feeding passage 655a has a groove portion 655a1 having substantially the same width as the descending inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 and extending to the front side, and a front surface from the groove portion 655a1. The front portion 655a2 that is continuous with the side edge portion and that is substantially flush with the display plate 646 of the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, and the front portion 655a2 are erected from both sides in the width direction and the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 A pair of facing portions 655a3 facing each other at substantially the same spacing as the spacing between the partition plates 647 is provided.
よって、保持片出没機構６７０の保持片６７７が没入位置へ没入されると、その保持片６７７の下降傾斜面６７７ｄを転動される球Ｂを、溝部６５５ａ１で受け取り、その溝部６５５ａ１の延設方向に沿って転動させることで、がたつきを抑制しつつ球Ｂを投球することができる。
Therefore, when the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is inserted into the immersion position, the ball B rolled on the descending inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 is received by the groove portion 655a1 and the extending direction of the groove portion 655a1 is received. , The ball B can be thrown while suppressing rattling.
また、正面部６５５ａ２が分割部材ＤＶの表示板６４６と面一に連なると共に、一対の対向部６５５ａ３の対向間隔が分割部材ＤＶの区画板６４７の対向間隔と略同一の間隔とされるので、投球された球Ｂを分割部材ＤＶの表示板６４６上にスムーズに配置できる。なお、回転部材６４０は、球Ｂの投球時には、後述する検出センサ６８４による検出結果に基づいて、分割部材ＤＶの区画板６４７が対向部６５５ａ３と一致する位相（回転位置）で停止される。
Further, the front portion 655a2 is flush with the display plate 646 of the dividing member DV, and the opposing interval of the pair of opposing portions 655a3 is substantially the same as the opposing interval of the partition plate 647 of the dividing member DV. The formed sphere B can be smoothly arranged on the display plate 646 of the divided member DV. When the ball B is thrown, the rotation member 640 is stopped at a phase (rotation position) where the partition plate 647 of the divided member DV coincides with the facing portion 655a3 based on a detection result by a detection sensor 684 described later.
返送通路６５５ｂは、回転部材６４０の分割部材ＤＶから送球された球Ｂを上流側で受け止めると下流側へ転動させる転動面としての転動部６５５ｂ１と、その転動部６５５ｂ１の下流側に立設されると共に球Ｂの転動方向を背面側へ向かせるために湾曲して形成される立設部６５５ｂ２とを備える。
The return passage 655b is provided on the downstream side of the rolling portion 655b1 as a rolling surface that rolls to the downstream side when the ball B sent from the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 is received on the upstream side, and on the downstream side of the rolling portion 655b1. And a standing portion 655b2 that is curved and formed so that the rolling direction of the sphere B is directed to the back side.
転動部６５５ｂ１は、投球装置６５０の正面視において、上流側が回転部材６４０の内周側縁部に配置されると共に、下流側が球保持部６５２ｂの正面側に配置される。また、転動部６５５１ｂ１は、上流側から下流側へ向けて下降傾斜されると共に、下流側が球保持部６５２へ向けて下降傾斜して形成される。
In the front view of the pitching device 650, the rolling portion 655b1 is arranged on the inner peripheral side edge of the rotating member 640, and on the downstream side is arranged on the front side of the ball holding portion 652b. Further, the rolling portion 6551b1 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the upstream side toward the downstream side, and the downstream side is inclined downward toward the ball holding portion 652.
回転部材６４０の分割部材ＤＶ上に載置され回転部材６４０の回転に伴って周方向に搬送された球Ｂが、区画板６４７と後述するガイド部材６８０の返送ガイド６８１ｂとの作用により径方向内方へ押し出され、返送通路６５５ｂの上流側へ送球されると、その球Ｂは、転動部６５５ｂ１を下流側へ転動され、立設部６５５ｂ２に案内されつつ、球保持部６５２へ落下される。
A ball B placed on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 and conveyed in the circumferential direction along with the rotation of the rotating member 640 is radially inward by the action of the partition plate 647 and a return guide 681b of a guide member 680 described later. When the ball B is pushed out toward the upstream side of the return passage 655b, the ball B rolls down the rolling part 655b1 and is dropped to the ball holding part 652 while being guided by the standing part 655b2. The
図４３から図４８に戻って説明する。上述したように、回転部材６４０の外周側にはガイド部材６８０が配設される。ガイド部材６８０は、回転部材６４０の下方部分に沿って配設される部材であり、回転部材６４０の分割部材ＤＶ上の球Ｂを、その回転部材６４０の回転に伴う搬送時にガイドする（即ち、球Ｂを下方から支持する）と共に、回転部材６４０の位相（回転位置）を検出するための検出センサ６８４を保持する。ここで、ガイド部材６８０について、図７０及び図７１を参照して説明する。
Returning to FIG. 43 from FIG. As described above, the guide member 680 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640. The guide member 680 is a member disposed along the lower portion of the rotating member 640, and guides the sphere B on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 at the time of conveyance accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 640 (that is, And a detection sensor 684 for detecting the phase (rotation position) of the rotation member 640. Here, the guide member 680 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71.
図７０は、ガイド部材６８０の正面斜視図であり、図７１は、ガイド部材６８０の背面斜視図である。図７０に示すように、ガイド部材６８０は、ケース部材６１０に配設される基部６８１と、その基部６８１の正面側に配設される板状の透過板６８２と、その透過板６８２の背面側に配設される片持ち板６８３と、基部６８１に配設される複数（本実施形態では６個）の検出センサ６８４とを主に備える。
70 is a front perspective view of the guide member 680, and FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the guide member 680. As shown in FIG. 70, the guide member 680 includes a base portion 681 disposed on the case member 610, a plate-shaped transmission plate 682 disposed on the front side of the base portion 681, and a rear side of the transmission plate 682. Are mainly provided with a cantilever plate 683 and a plurality (six in this embodiment) of detection sensors 684 disposed on the base portion 681.
基部６８１は、円環形状を中心角略１２０度で分断した形状（即ち、正面視円弧状に湾曲する形状）に形成される部材であり、その内周面側にガイド面６８１ａが形成される。ガイド面６８１ａは、回転部材６４０の外周面側に配置され、分割部材ＤＶ上（即ち、表示板６４６及び区画板６４７で囲まれる空間）に配置された球Ｂに対面される。即ち、回転部材６４０の分割部材ＤＶ上に配置され、回転部材６４０の回転に伴って搬送される球Ｂを下方から支持する。
The base portion 681 is a member formed in a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape at a central angle of about 120 degrees (that is, a shape that curves in an arc shape when viewed from the front), and a guide surface 681a is formed on the inner peripheral surface side thereof. . The guide surface 681a is disposed on the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member 640 and faces the sphere B disposed on the divided member DV (that is, a space surrounded by the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647). That is, the ball B that is disposed on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 and is conveyed along with the rotation of the rotating member 640 is supported from below.
また、基部６８１の内周面側には、ガイド面６８１ａの下流側（図７０右側）に連なる返送ガイド６８１ｂが形成される。返送ガイド６８１ｂは、回転部材６４０の回転に伴い搬送される球Ｂを通路部材６５５の返送通路６５５ｂへ送球させるための部位であり、ガイド面６８１ａよりも幅寸法が小さく形成されると共に、径方向内方へ向けて突出された形状に形成されることで、回転部材６４０の分割部材ＤＶ（表示板６４６）に対面して配設される（図４３及び図４４参照）。
Further, on the inner peripheral surface side of the base portion 681, a return guide 681b connected to the downstream side (right side in FIG. 70) of the guide surface 681a is formed. The return guide 681b is a portion for sending the ball B conveyed along with the rotation of the rotation member 640 to the return passage 655b of the passage member 655, and is formed with a width dimension smaller than that of the guide surface 681a and in the radial direction. By being formed in a shape protruding inward, it is arranged to face the divided member DV (display plate 646) of the rotating member 640 (see FIGS. 43 and 44).
よって、回転部材６４０の分割部材ＤＶ上に載置され球Ｂが、回転部材６４０の回転に伴って周方向に搬送されると、その分割部材ＤＶの区画板６４７（板部６４７ａ）によって返送ガイド６８１ｂの内周面に球Ｂが押し付けられる。よって、回転部材６４０が更に回転されると、球Ｂが、区画板６４７と返送ガイド６８１ｂとの作用により径方向内方へ押し出され、返送通路６５５ｂの上流側へ搬送される。
Therefore, when the ball B placed on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 is conveyed in the circumferential direction along with the rotation of the rotating member 640, the return guide is provided by the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647a) of the divided member DV. The ball B is pressed against the inner peripheral surface of 681b. Accordingly, when the rotating member 640 is further rotated, the ball B is pushed inward in the radial direction by the action of the partition plate 647 and the return guide 681b, and is conveyed to the upstream side of the return passage 655b.
ここで、返送ガイド６８１ｂの形成を省略した場合であっても、返送通路６５５ｂへ向けて区画板６４７（板部６４７ａ）が下降傾斜される位置まで回転部材６４０が回転されれば、その区画板６４７の下降傾斜に沿って球Ｂを返送通路６５５ｂへ落下させることができる。しかしながら、この場合には、球Ｂが自重で転動を開始するまでにその球Ｂが上方へ搬送されてしまうため、球Ｂが落下される際の落下位置が高くなると共に、区画板６４７の下降傾斜に沿って球Ｂが転動された後に落下されるため、球Ｂの落下の際の勢いが大きい。そのため、返送通路６５５ｂの破損を招く恐れがある。
Here, even if the return guide 681b is omitted, if the rotating member 640 is rotated to the position where the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647a) is inclined downward toward the return passage 655b, the partition plate The sphere B can be dropped along the descending slope of 647 to the return passage 655b. However, in this case, since the sphere B is transported upward by the time the sphere B starts rolling by its own weight, the drop position when the sphere B is dropped becomes high, and the partition plate 647 Since the ball B is dropped after being rolled along the descending inclination, the momentum when the ball B is dropped is large. Therefore, there is a possibility that the return passage 655b is damaged.
これに対し、本実施形態では、上述の通り、返送ガイド６８１ｂが設けられることで、球Ｂが返送通路６５５ｂへ落下される際の落下位置を低くできると共に、球Ｂが返送ガイド６８１ｂで摺動されつつ返送通路６５５ｂへ送球されるので、その送球速度を弱めることができる。その結果、返送通路６５５ｂの破損を抑制できる。
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the return guide 681b is provided, so that the drop position when the ball B is dropped into the return passage 655b can be lowered, and the ball B slides on the return guide 681b. Since the ball is sent to the return passage 655b, the pitching speed can be reduced. As a result, damage to the return passage 655b can be suppressed.
透過板６８２は、回転部材６４０の分割部材ＤＶ（表示板６４６）に所定間隔（球Ｂを保持可能な間隔）を隔てて対面される部位であり、幅方向中央の上縁側部分の一部が通路部材６５５の送球通路６５５ａ（正面部６５５ａ２）に対面する位置まで上方へ延設される。これにより、投球装置６５０からの回転部材６４０の分割部材ＤＶへ投球された球Ｂが外部へ飛び出すことを抑制できる。
The transmission plate 682 is a part facing the divided member DV (display plate 646) of the rotating member 640 with a predetermined interval (interval capable of holding the sphere B), and a part of the upper edge side portion in the center in the width direction is a part. The passage member 655 extends upward to a position facing the ball-sending passage 655a (front portion 655a2). Thereby, it can suppress that the ball | bowl B pitched to the division member DV of the rotation member 640 from the pitching apparatus 650 jumps out outside.
また、透過板６８２は、球Ｂが投球される分割部材ＤＶ（即ち、送球通路６５５ａの正面部６５５ａ２と同位相となる分割部材ＤＶ）だけでなく、その分割部材ＤＶの下流側（球Ｂの搬送方向下流側）に隣接される分割部材ＤＶにも部分的に対面可能な大きさ（幅寸法）で形成されるので、送球通路６５５ａから投球された球Ｂの暴れを、透過板６８２との間で収束させやすくでき、かかる球Ｂを返送ガイド６８１ｂまで安定して搬送させることができる。
Further, the transmission plate 682 is not only the divided member DV on which the ball B is thrown (that is, the divided member DV having the same phase as the front surface portion 655a2 of the ball feeding passage 655a), but also the downstream side of the divided member DV (of the ball B). Since the split member DV adjacent to the downstream side in the transport direction is also formed with a size (width dimension) that can partially face each other, the violence of the ball B thrown from the pitching passage 655 a The sphere B can be easily transported to the return guide 681b.
一方、透過板６８２は、球Ｂが投球される分割部材ＤＶおよびその分割部材ＤＶの下流側に隣接する分割部材ＤＶに対面可能な大きさ（幅寸法）とされ、それら投球される分割部材ＤＶ及び隣接する分割部材ＤＶよりも下流側に位置する分割部材ＤＶに対しては対面されない。即ち、透過板６８２における球Ｂの搬送方向下流側（図７０右側）の縁部と返送ガイド６８１ｂとの間では、球Ｂを露出させることができ、かかる球Ｂの搬送を遊技者に視認させやすくできる。
On the other hand, the transmission plate 682 has a size (width dimension) that allows the divided member DV to which the ball B is thrown and the divided member DV adjacent to the downstream side of the divided member DV to face each other, and the divided member DV to be thrown. And it does not face with respect to the division member DV located in the downstream rather than the adjacent division member DV. That is, the ball B can be exposed between the edge of the transmission plate 682 on the downstream side in the conveyance direction of the ball B (right side in FIG. 70) and the return guide 681b, and the player can visually recognize the conveyance of the ball B. Easy to do.
なお、透過板６８２は、全体が光透過性材料から形成されるので、その背面側に位置する部材や球Ｂを遊技者に透視させることができる。よって、投球された球Ｂが、送球通路６５５ａを通過して、分割部材ＤＶの表示板６４７及び透過板６８２の対向間に落下されると共に、ガイド面６８１ａに支持されつつ回転部材６４０の回転により搬送される一連の態様を、遊技者に視認させることができる。
Since the entire transmission plate 682 is made of a light-transmitting material, the player can see through the member and the ball B located on the back side. Therefore, the pitched ball B passes through the pitching passage 655a and falls between the display plate 647 and the transmission plate 682 of the divided member DV, and is supported by the guide surface 681a by the rotation of the rotating member 640. The player can visually recognize a series of modes to be conveyed.
片持ち板６８３は、ガイド面６８１ａと共に基部６８１の内周面を形成する部材であり、ガイド面６８１ａ（即ち、基部６８１の内周面）に沿って湾曲する板状体として形成される。片持ち板６８３は、その周方向一端側が軸６８５により基部６８１に回転可能に軸支されると共に、基部６８１に配設された図示しないリミットスイッチの板ばねの弾性力により周方向他端側を上方（径方向内方側）へ持ち上げた姿勢に維持される。
The cantilever plate 683 is a member that forms the inner peripheral surface of the base portion 681 together with the guide surface 681a, and is formed as a plate-like body that curves along the guide surface 681a (that is, the inner peripheral surface of the base portion 681). The cantilever plate 683 has one end in the circumferential direction pivotally supported on the base 681 by a shaft 685, and the other end in the circumferential direction is supported by the elastic force of a leaf spring of a limit switch (not shown) disposed on the base 681. The posture is lifted upward (inward in the radial direction).
片持ち板６８３の周方向他端側が上方へ持ち上げられた姿勢では、リミットスイッチはオフされており、投球装置６５０から回転部材６４０の分割部材ＤＶへ球Ｂが投球されると、その球Ｂの重量により片持ち板６８３が軸６８５を回転中心として押し下げられ、リミットスイッチをオンさせる。これにより、投球装置６５０から投球された球Ｂが適正な位置（回転部材６４０の分割部材ＤＶ）に配置されたことを検出できる。
In a posture in which the other circumferential end of the cantilever plate 683 is lifted upward, the limit switch is turned off. When the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 to the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, the ball B The cantilever plate 683 is pushed down with the shaft 685 as the center of rotation due to the weight, and the limit switch is turned on. Thereby, it can be detected that the ball B thrown from the pitching device 650 is arranged at an appropriate position (the divided member DV of the rotating member 640).
一方、回転部材６４０の回転に伴って球Ｂが搬送され、片持ち板６８３に作用する球Ｂの重量が所定の値以下とされると、片持ち板６８３が上述したように持ち上げられた姿勢に復帰され、リミットスイッチをオフさせる。
On the other hand, when the sphere B is conveyed with the rotation of the rotating member 640 and the weight of the sphere B acting on the cantilever plate 683 is less than or equal to a predetermined value, the cantilever plate 683 is lifted as described above. Return to, and turn off the limit switch.
検出センサ６８４は、回転部材６４０の位相（回転位置）を検出するためのセンサ装置であり、発光部および受光部が対向配置された非接触式センサとして形成され、その検出領域（発光部および受光部の対向空間）を、第１区間Ｓ１（図５４参照）における分割部材ＤＶの被検出部６４１ｃの移動軌跡上に位置させつつ、周方向等間隔に配設される。なお、検出センサ６８４どうしの間隔は、第１区間Ｓ１における分割部材ＤＶ（被検出部６４１ｃ）どうしの間隔（第１の間隔）と同一に設定される。
The detection sensor 684 is a sensor device for detecting the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640, and is formed as a non-contact sensor in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are arranged to face each other, and its detection region (light emitting unit and light receiving unit). Are disposed on the movement locus of the detected portion 641c of the divided member DV in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54), and are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. Note that the interval between the detection sensors 684 is set to be the same as the interval (first interval) between the divided members DV (detected portions 641c) in the first section S1.
よって、周方向に隣接する複数（本実施形態では６個）の分割部材ＤＶをそれぞれ検出センサ６８４に対応する位置に配置できると共に、回転部材６４０を所定量（即ち、第１の間隔に対応する回転量）だけ回転させるごとに、各検出センサ６８４に検出される分割部材ＤＶを周方向にずらしていくことができる。
Therefore, a plurality (six in this embodiment) of divided members DV adjacent in the circumferential direction can be arranged at positions corresponding to the detection sensors 684, respectively, and the rotating member 640 corresponds to a predetermined amount (that is, corresponding to the first interval). The divided member DV detected by each detection sensor 684 can be shifted in the circumferential direction each time it is rotated by the amount of rotation).
この場合、上述したように、複数の分割部材ＤＶのうちの一部（本実施形態では１５個）の分割部材ＤＶには、被検出部６４１ｃが形成される一方、残りの分割部材ＤＶでは、被検出部６４１ｃの形成が省略される。よって、被検出部６４１ｃが形成される分割部材ＤＶが配置された検出センサ６８４は、発光部から照射された光の受光部による受光が被検出部６４１ｃに遮られ、検出信号がオフされる一方、被検出部６４１ｃが形成されていない分割部材ＤＶが配置された検出センサ６８４は、発光部から照射された光の受光部による受光が可能となり、検出信号がオンされる（図７６参照）。その結果、後述するように、各検出センサ６８４の検出結果の組み合わせに基づいて、回転部材６４０の位相（回転位置）を検出することができる。
In this case, as described above, the part to be detected 641c is formed on a part (15 in this embodiment) of the plurality of divided members DV, while the remaining divided members DV The formation of the detected part 641c is omitted. Therefore, in the detection sensor 684 in which the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed is disposed, the light received by the light receiving portion of the light emitted from the light emitting portion is blocked by the detected portion 641c, and the detection signal is turned off. The detection sensor 684 in which the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is not formed can receive light emitted from the light emitting portion by the light receiving portion, and the detection signal is turned on (see FIG. 76). As a result, as will be described later, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be detected based on the combination of detection results of the detection sensors 684.
なお、本実施形態では、分割部材ＤＶの被検出部６４１ｃの有無に基づく２通り（オン・オフ）の検出結果が６個の検出センサ６８４でそれぞれ行われるので、６４（＝２の６乗）通りの組み合わせを形成することができる。この場合、分割部材ＤＶの配設数は３０個であるので、後述するように、これら複数の分割部材ＤＶのうちのいずれの分割部材ＤＶが基準位置に位置するかを、検出センサ６８４の検出結果に基づいて常に判別することができる。
In the present embodiment, two detection results (on / off) based on the presence / absence of the detected portion 641c of the divided member DV are respectively performed by the six detection sensors 684, so 64 (= 2 to the sixth power). Street combinations can be formed. In this case, since the number of divided members DV is 30, the detection sensor 684 detects which divided member DV of the plurality of divided members DV is located at the reference position, as will be described later. It can always be determined based on the result.
次いで、図７２から図７７を参照して、回転ユニット６００の動作について説明する。まず、回転部材６４０が回転される際の分割部材ＤＶどうしの間隔が変更される動作について、図７２及び図７３を参照して説明する。
Next, the operation of the rotating unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 77. First, an operation of changing the interval between the divided members DV when the rotating member 640 is rotated will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73.
図７２は、案内部材６２０及び回転部材６４０の正面図である。また、図７３（ａ）は、第１区間Ｓ１における案内部材６２０及び回転部材６４０の部分拡大正面図であり、図７３（ｂ）は、第２区間Ｓ２における案内部材６２０及び回転部材６４０の部分拡大正面図である。
FIG. 72 is a front view of the guide member 620 and the rotation member 640. 73A is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member 620 and the rotation member 640 in the first section S1, and FIG. 73B is a portion of the guide member 620 and the rotation member 640 in the second section S2. It is an enlarged front view.
なお、図面を簡素化して、理解を容易とするために、図７２及び図７３では、分割部材ＤＶの構成要素のうちの背面側本体６４２、連結リンク部材６４４及び起伏リンク部材６４８のみが図示されると共に、図７３では、連結リンク作用溝６２１及び起伏リンク作用溝６２２にハッチングが付された状態が図示される。
In order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, FIGS. 72 and 73 show only the back-side main body 642, the connecting link member 644, and the undulating link member 648 among the components of the divided member DV. In addition, FIG. 73 illustrates a state where the connecting link working groove 621 and the undulating link working groove 622 are hatched.
図２５及び図２６に示すように、回転部材６４０は、軸心Ｏを回転中心として（即ち、案内部材６２０の周方向に沿って）回転可能に形成される部材であり、複数の分割部材ＤＶを周方向に連結した無端状に形成される。即ち、各分割部材ＤＶは、連結リンク部材６４４の基端側が背面側本体６４２に回転可能に軸支される一方、連結リンク部材６４４の先端側の挿通部６４４ａが隣接する分割部材ＤＶの背面側本体６４２における連結リンク用開口６４２ａを介して連結リンク作用溝６２１に挿通される。
As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the rotation member 640 is a member formed to be rotatable about the axis O (that is, along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620), and includes a plurality of divided members DV. Are endlessly connected in the circumferential direction. That is, each divided member DV is rotatably supported at the base end side of the connecting link member 644 by the rear side main body 642, while the insertion portion 644a on the distal end side of the connecting link member 644 is adjacent to the rear side of the divided member DV. The connection link action groove 621 is inserted through the connection link opening 642 a in the main body 642.
上述したように、分割部材ＤＶの背面側本体６４２は、長手方向一側の摺動ローラ６４１ｂ及び長手方向他側の屈曲部６４２が案内部材６２０の外周面および内周面に当接されるため、案内部材６２０の周方向に移動される際には、案内部材６２０に対する姿勢が、背面側本体６４２の長手方向の延長線上に軸心Ｏが位置する姿勢（即ち、軸心Ｏを中心として放射直線状となる姿勢）に維持される。即ち、その姿勢を維持した状態での移動のみが許容される。
As described above, the back side main body 642 of the divided member DV has the sliding roller 641b on one side in the longitudinal direction and the bent portion 642 on the other side in the longitudinal direction abutting on the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the guide member 620. When the guide member 620 is moved in the circumferential direction, the attitude with respect to the guide member 620 is such that the axis O is positioned on the longitudinal extension of the back side main body 642 (that is, the axis O is radiated around the axis O). Maintained in a straight posture). That is, only movement while maintaining the posture is allowed.
この場合、連結リンク作用溝６２１の大径部６２１ａは、小径部６２１ｂよりも連結リンク部材６４４の基端側（回転可能に軸支される側）に近い位置に形成されるため、かかる連結リンク作用溝６２１の大径部６２１ａに連結リンク部材６４４の挿通部６４４ａが挿通された状態では（図７３（ａ）参照）、連結リンク部材６４４を背面側本体６４２の長手方向に対して傾倒した姿勢として、背面側本体６４２どうしを離間させることができる。即ち、第１区間Ｓ１における分割部材ＤＶ（背面側本体６４２）どうしの間隔を大きな間隔（第１の間隔）とできる。
In this case, since the large-diameter portion 621a of the connection link action groove 621 is formed at a position closer to the base end side (side rotatably supported) of the connection link member 644 than the small-diameter portion 621b, such a connection link. In a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the large diameter portion 621a of the action groove 621 (see FIG. 73A), the connection link member 644 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642. As a result, the back side main bodies 642 can be separated from each other. That is, the interval between the divided members DV (rear body 642) in the first section S1 can be a large interval (first interval).
一方、連結リンク作用溝６２１の小径部６２１ｂは、大径部６２１ａよりも連結リンク部材６４４の基端側（回転可能に軸支される側）から遠い位置に形成されるため、かかる連結リンク作用溝６２１の小径部６２１ｂに連結リンク部材６４４の挿通部６４４ａが挿通された状態では（図７３（ｂ）参照）、連結リンク部材６４４を背面側本体６４２の長手方向に沿わせた姿勢として、背面側本体６４２どうしを近接させることができる。即ち、第２区間Ｓ２における分割部材ＤＶ（背面側本体６４２）どうしの間隔を小さな間隔（第２の間隔）とできる。
On the other hand, the small-diameter portion 621b of the connection link operation groove 621 is formed at a position farther from the base end side (side rotatably supported) of the connection link member 644 than the large-diameter portion 621a. In a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the small diameter portion 621b of the groove 621 (see FIG. 73 (b)), the rear surface of the connection link member 644 is oriented along the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642. The side main bodies 642 can be brought close to each other. That is, the interval between the divided members DV (rear body 642) in the second section S2 can be set to a small interval (second interval).
ここで、回転部材６４０、上述したように、ルーレットを模して形成される演出装置であり、表示板６４６（板部６４６ａ）に数字やマークなどの識別情報が表示される。即ち、表示板６４６に表示させる識別情報を遊技者に視認させることで、演出が行われる。よって、遊技者の視認性を考慮すると、表示板６４６（識別情報の表示）は大型であることが好ましく、また、演出効果のバリエーションを確保するためには、表示板６４６の枚数（識別情報の種類）は多いことが好ましい。
Here, as described above, the rotation member 640 is an effect device that is formed to simulate a roulette, and identification information such as numbers and marks is displayed on the display board 646 (plate part 646a). That is, the presentation is performed by making the player visually recognize the identification information displayed on the display board 646. Therefore, in consideration of the player's visibility, the display board 646 (display of identification information) is preferably large, and in order to secure variations in the effect, the number of display boards 646 (of the identification information) It is preferable that there are many types).
この場合、遊技者の視認性を考慮すると、識別情報の表示（即ち、表示板６４６の板部６４６ａ）は一定以上の大きさが確保されていることが必要となるところ、その大きさを維持しつつ、識別情報の表示数（表示板６４６の枚数）を多くすると、回転部材６４０が大径化して、所定の配設スペースに収まらなくなる一方、所定のスペースに収まるように、回転部材６４０を小径化すると、識別情報の表示数（表示板６４６の枚数）が減少して、演出効果のバリエーションを確保できなくなる。
In this case, in consideration of the player's visibility, the display of the identification information (that is, the plate portion 646a of the display board 646) needs to have a certain size or more, and the size is maintained. However, when the number of identification information displayed (the number of display plates 646) is increased, the diameter of the rotating member 640 increases, so that the rotating member 640 does not fit in a predetermined arrangement space, while the rotating member 640 is adjusted to fit in the predetermined space. When the diameter is reduced, the number of identification information displayed (the number of display plates 646) decreases, and it becomes impossible to ensure variations in effect.
これに対し、本実施形態によれば、分割部材ＤＶが第１の間隔で周方向に連結される第１区間Ｓ１と、その第１区間Ｓ１における第１の間隔よりも狭い間隔とされる第２の間隔で分割部材ＤＶが周方向に連結される第２区間Ｓ２とを回転部材６４０に形成可能としつつ、上述したように、第１区間Ｓ１に位置する表示板６４６（板部６４６ａ）を遊技者に視認させる（第２区間Ｓ２に位置する表示板６４６は他の部材により遮蔽する）。
On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first section S1 in which the dividing member DV is connected in the circumferential direction at the first interval, and the first interval S1 that is narrower than the first interval in the first interval S1. As described above, the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) positioned in the first section S1 can be formed in the rotating member 640 while being able to form the second section S2 in which the divided members DV are connected in the circumferential direction at intervals of 2. The player visually recognizes the display board 646 located in the second section S2 by other members.
よって、複数の分割部材ＤＶを全て第１の間隔で連結させる場合と比較して、回転部材６４０の周方向の長さを短くでき、その回転部材６４０の配設に必要なスペースを抑制することができると共に、識別情報の表示（即ち、表示板６４６）は一定以上の大きさを確保しつつ、その識別情報の表示数（表示板６４６の枚数）を多くすることができる。その結果、遊技者の視認性と演出効果のバリエーションとを確保できなくなる。
Therefore, compared with the case where the plurality of divided members DV are all connected at the first interval, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be shortened, and the space necessary for disposing the rotating member 640 can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to increase the number of identification information displayed (the number of display plates 646) while ensuring a certain size or more of display of identification information (that is, display plate 646). As a result, it becomes impossible to ensure the player's visibility and variation of the effect.
ここで、分割部材ＤＶは、第１区間Ｓ１では、上述したように、表示板６４６の板部６４６ａが水平姿勢（分割部材ＤＶの移動平面に平行な姿勢）に配置されるので、かかる表示板６４６に表示される識別情報を遊技者から視認しやすくすることができる。
Here, as described above, in the first section S1, the divided member DV is arranged in a horizontal posture (a posture parallel to the moving plane of the divided member DV) in the display plate 646. The identification information displayed on 646 can be easily seen by the player.
一方、分割部材ＤＶは、第２区間Ｓ２では、上述したように、表示板６４６の板部６４６ａが第１区間Ｓ１における水平姿勢よりも先端側を持ち上げた姿勢とされるので、隣接する分割部材ＤＶとの干渉を抑制でき、その分、分割部材ＤＶどうしを近づけることができる。即ち、第２区間Ｓ２における分割部材ＤＶどうしの間隔（第２の間隔）を狭くすることができる。その結果、回転部材６４０の周方向の長さを短くして、その配設に必要なスペースを抑制できる。
On the other hand, as described above, in the second section S2, the divided member DV is in a posture in which the plate portion 646a of the display board 646 is lifted up from the horizontal posture in the first section S1. Interference with DV can be suppressed, and the divided members DV can be brought closer to each other accordingly. That is, the interval (second interval) between the divided members DV in the second section S2 can be reduced. As a result, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be shortened, and the space required for the arrangement can be suppressed.
特に、本実施形態によれば、表示板６４６は、正面側本体６４３の上面に変位（回転）可能に配設され、第２区間Ｓ２では、板部６４６ａを、隣接する分割部材ＤＶ（板保持部材６４５）の上面よりも上方（即ち、干渉しない位置）へ持ち上げることができる（図５４参照）。よって、分割部材ＤＶを互いに背面側本体６４２及び正面側本体６４３どうしが当接する位置まで近づけることができる。即ち、第２区間Ｓ２における第２の間隔をより狭くすることができる。その結果、回転部材６４０の周方向の長さを短くして、回転部材の配設に必要なスペースを抑制できる。
In particular, according to the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is disposed on the upper surface of the front-side main body 643 so as to be able to be displaced (rotated), and in the second section S2, the plate portion 646a is disposed adjacent to the divided member DV (plate holding). The upper surface of the member 645) can be lifted upward (that is, a position where it does not interfere) (see FIG. 54). Therefore, the divided member DV can be brought close to a position where the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 are in contact with each other. That is, the 2nd space | interval in 2nd area S2 can be made narrower. As a result, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be shortened, and the space necessary for arranging the rotating member can be suppressed.
次いで、駆動機構６３０による回転部材６４０の駆動動作について、図７４及び図７５を参照して説明する。図７４（ａ）から図７４（ｄ）は、一側回転駆動部材６３７が３０度回転される毎の状態遷移図であり、正面視した一側回転駆動部材６３７が図示される。
Next, the driving operation of the rotating member 640 by the driving mechanism 630 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d) are state transition diagrams each time the one-side rotation driving member 637 is rotated by 30 degrees, and the one-side rotation driving member 637 viewed from the front is illustrated.
なお、図７４（ｂ）、図７４（ｃ）及び図７４（ｄ）は、それぞれ図７４（ａ）から３０度、６０度および９０度回転された状態に対応する。また、図７４（ａ）から図７４（ｄ）では、分割部材ＤＶの被係合部６４１が断面視された状態で図示されると共に、その被係合部６４１の移動軌跡が二点鎖線を用いて図示される。
74 (b), 74 (c), and 74 (d) correspond to the states rotated 30 degrees, 60 degrees, and 90 degrees from FIG. 74 (a), respectively. 74 (a) to 74 (d), the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV is illustrated in a cross-sectional view, and the movement locus of the engaged portion 641 indicates a two-dot chain line. Used to illustrate.
ここで、一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転駆動部材６３８は、上述したように、互いに同一の形状に形成される。これらによる回転部材６４０の駆動動作において、同一の駆動動作は、一側回転駆動部材６３７による駆動動作のみを説明し、他側回転駆動部材６３８による駆動動作の説明は省略する。
Here, as described above, the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638 are formed in the same shape. In the driving operation of the rotating member 640 by these, the same driving operation will be described only for the driving operation by the one side rotating driving member 637, and the description of the driving operation by the other side rotating driving member 638 will be omitted.
図７４（ａ）から図７４（ｄ）に示すように、一側回転駆動部材６３７は、その係合部６３７ｂの移動軌跡が、分割部材ＤＶの被係合部６４１の移動軌跡と部分的に重なる位置に配設され、その重なる部分において、係合部６３７ｂを被係合部６４１に係合させた状態で、回転可能とされる。なお、係合部６３７ｂの移動軌跡の円形は、被係合部６４１の移動軌跡の円形よりも小径の内接円となる。
As shown in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d), the one-side rotational drive member 637 has a movement locus of the engaging portion 637b partially in relation to a movement locus of the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. It arrange | positions in the position which overlaps and it can be rotated in the state which made the engaging part 637b engage with the to-be-engaged part 641 in the overlapping part. Note that the circular movement locus of the engaging portion 637b is an inscribed circle having a smaller diameter than the circular movement locus of the engaged portion 641.
駆動モータ６３１（図５３参照）の駆動力により一側回転駆動部材６３７が回転されると、その回転が、係合部６３７ｂ及び被係合部６４１の係合を介して、分割部材ＤＶへ伝達され、かかる分割部材ＤＶが案内部材６２０の周方向に沿って移動され、その移動が、各連結リンク部材６４４を介して隣接する分割部材ＤＶにそれぞれ伝達されていくことで、回転部材６４０が周方向に回転される。
When the one-side rotation driving member 637 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 53), the rotation is transmitted to the divided member DV through the engagement of the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641. Then, the divided member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the movement is transmitted to the adjacent divided member DV via each connecting link member 644, whereby the rotating member 640 is rotated. Rotated in the direction.
この場合、上述したように、分割部材ＤＶの被係合部６４１は、背面側本体６４２の長手方向一側に形成される（図５７及び図５８参照）。即ち、円環状に形成される回転部材６４０の外周側に被係合部６４１が配設される。よって、一側回転駆動部材６３７の単位回転量に対する回転部材６４０の回転量を小さくできる（回転部材６４０を単位回転量だけ回転させるのに必要となる一側回転駆動部材６３７の回転量を大きくできる）。従って、その分、見かけの減速比を小さくできる。言い換えると、回転部材６４０の軸心Ｏから遠い位置に駆動力を付与するので、その回転部材６４０に作用される回転トルクを大きくできる。その結果、回転部材６４０の回転駆動（特に、停止状態からの回転駆動）を安定化できると共に、駆動機構６３０の駆動モータ６３１に必要とされる出力を小さくできる。
In this case, as described above, the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 (see FIGS. 57 and 58). That is, the engaged portion 641 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640 formed in an annular shape. Therefore, the rotation amount of the rotation member 640 relative to the unit rotation amount of the one side rotation drive member 637 can be reduced (the rotation amount of the one side rotation drive member 637 required to rotate the rotation member 640 by the unit rotation amount can be increased). ). Accordingly, the apparent reduction ratio can be reduced accordingly. In other words, since the driving force is applied to a position far from the axis O of the rotating member 640, the rotational torque applied to the rotating member 640 can be increased. As a result, the rotational driving of the rotating member 640 (especially rotational driving from the stopped state) can be stabilized, and the output required for the driving motor 631 of the driving mechanism 630 can be reduced.
ここで、駆動機構６３０は、一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転駆動部材６３８を備え、それらが回転部材６４０の周方向に沿って異なる位置に配設されるので（図５３参照）、駆動機構６３０から回転部材６４０へ付与される駆動力をその回転部材６４０の周方向の異なる位置に分散させることができ、複数の分割部材ＤＶの一部に駆動力の付与が偏ることを抑制できる。即ち、回転部材６４０が、上述したように、複数の分割部材ＤＶを周方向に無端状に連結して形成される場合であっても、かかる回転部材６４０の変位（回転）を安定化できる。
Here, the drive mechanism 630 includes a one-side rotation drive member 637 and another-side rotation drive member 638, which are disposed at different positions along the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 53). The driving force applied from the mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 can be dispersed at different positions in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640, and application of the driving force to a part of the plurality of divided members DV can be suppressed. That is, even when the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting a plurality of divided members DV endlessly in the circumferential direction as described above, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.
特に、本実施形態によれば、一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転駆動部材６３８が回転部材６４０の周方向において位相を１８０度異ならせた位置に配設されるので（図５３参照）、回転部材６４０（複数の分割部材ＤＶ）のうちの最も離間された２カ所へ各回転駆動部材６３７，６３８からの駆動力を付与することができ、その結果、回転部材６４０の変位（回転）を安定化できる。
In particular, according to the present embodiment, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are disposed at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase in the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 53). The driving force from each of the rotation driving members 637 and 638 can be applied to the two most spaced apart members of the rotating member 640 (the plurality of divided members DV), and as a result, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 is changed. Can be stabilized.
この場合、分割部材ＤＶの状態には、その分割部材ＤＶに軸支される連結リンク部材６４４の挿通部６４４ａが、案内部材６２０の連結リンク作用溝６２１における大径部６２１ａに挿通された第１の状態、小径部６２１ｂに挿通された第２の状態、及び、接続部６２１ｃに挿通された第３の状態の３種類が存在するところ、本実施形態では、一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転駆動部材６３８が、第３の状態にある分割部材ＤＶに駆動力を付与可能（即ち、第３の状態にある分割部材ＤＶの被係合部６４１に係合部６３７ｂ，６３８ｂを係合可能）な位置に配設される。
In this case, in the state of the divided member DV, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 that is pivotally supported by the divided member DV is first inserted through the large diameter portion 621a in the connecting link working groove 621 of the guide member 620. , A second state inserted through the small-diameter portion 621b, and a third state inserted through the connection portion 621c, in the present embodiment, the one-side rotational drive member 637 and the other side The rotational driving member 638 can apply a driving force to the divided member DV in the third state (that is, the engaging portions 637b and 638b can be engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV in the third state). ).
これにより、隣接する分割部材ＤＶとの間隔を第１の間隔から第２の間隔（又はその逆）へ遷移させる状態にある分割部材ＤＶに駆動力を付与できる。かかる分割部材ＤＶは、接続部６２１ｃから比較的大きな反力を受けるため、複数の分割部材ＤＶが無端状に連結された回転部材６４０全体の回転（各分割部材ＤＶの周方向への移動）を阻害する部分となりやすいところ、接続部６２１ｃから比較的大きな反力を受ける分割部材ＤＶを一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転駆動部材６３８により直接駆動することで、複数の分割部材ＤＶが無端状に連結された回転部材６４０全体を安定して変位（回転）させることができる。
Accordingly, it is possible to apply a driving force to the divided member DV that is in a state in which the interval between the adjacent divided members DV is changed from the first interval to the second interval (or vice versa). Since the divided member DV receives a relatively large reaction force from the connection portion 621c, the rotation of the entire rotating member 640 in which the plurality of divided members DV are connected endlessly (movement of each divided member DV in the circumferential direction) is performed. The divided member DV that receives a relatively large reaction force from the connection portion 621c is directly driven by the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638, so that the plurality of divided members DV are endless. It is possible to stably displace (rotate) the entire rotating member 640 connected to the.
なお、一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転駆動部材６３８から分割部材ＤＶへ駆動力が伝達される期間は、かかる分割部材ＤＶが上述した第３の状態にある期間と完全に一致している必要はなく、前者の駆動力が伝達される期間と後者の第３の状態にある期間とが少なくとも一部で重複されていれば足りる。
Note that the period during which the driving force is transmitted from the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638 to the divided member DV completely coincides with the period in which the divided member DV is in the above-described third state. It is not necessary, and it is sufficient if the period during which the former driving force is transmitted and the period in the latter third state overlap at least partially.
本実施形態では、上述したように、連結リンク作用溝６２１の接続部６２１ｃと起伏リンク作用溝６２２の接続部６２２ｃとが異なる位相となる位置に形成される。即ち、分割部材ＤＶが上述した第３の状態にある場合、その分割部材ＤＶに配設される起伏リンク部材６４８の挿通部６４８ａは、起伏リンク作用溝６２２の大径部６２２ａ又は小径部６２２ｂに挿通される。
In the present embodiment, as described above, the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link working groove 621 and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link working groove 622 are formed at different phases. That is, when the divided member DV is in the third state described above, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 disposed in the divided member DV is formed in the large diameter portion 622a or the small diameter portion 622b of the undulating link working groove 622. It is inserted.
よって、分割部材ＤＶが案内部材６２０の周方向へ移動される際には、その分割部材ＤＶに軸支される連結リンク部材６４４の挿通部６４４ａが連結リンク作用溝６２１の接続部６２１ｃを通過した後、起伏リンク部材６４８の挿通部６４８ａが起伏リンク作用溝６２２の接続部６２２ｃを通過する（又は、その逆となる）。
Therefore, when the dividing member DV is moved in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 supported by the dividing member DV passes through the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link working groove 621. Thereafter, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 passes through the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link working groove 622 (or vice versa).
これにより、連結リンク作用溝６２１の接続部６２１ｃと起伏リンク作用溝６２２の接続部６２２ｃとの両者から同時期に反力を受けることがなく、その反力を受ける時期を異ならせることができる。その結果、必要な駆動力を分散させることができ、その分、駆動機構６３０の駆動モータ６３１に必要とされる出力を小さくできる。
Accordingly, the reaction force is not received from both the connection portion 621c of the connection link action groove 621 and the connection portion 622c of the undulation link action groove 622 at the same time, and the timing of receiving the reaction force can be varied. As a result, the required driving force can be dispersed, and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced accordingly.
ここで、一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転駆動部材６３８は、その位相（係合部６３７ｂ，６３８ｂの回転位置）を互いに異ならせて配設されるので、回転部材６４０の変位（回転）を安定化できる。ここで、かかる一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転駆動部材６３８の位相関係について、図７５を参照して説明する。
Here, since the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 are arranged with their phases (rotation positions of the engaging portions 637b and 638b) different from each other, the displacement (rotation) of the rotation member 640 is performed. Can be stabilized. Here, the phase relationship between the one side rotational drive member 637 and the other side rotational drive member 638 will be described with reference to FIG.
図７５は、分割部材ＤＶに対する一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転駆動部材６３８の係合または解除の状態と位相との関係を示す状態関係図である。なお、図７５では、上段の状態関係図が一側回転駆動部材６３７に、下段の状態関係図が他側回転駆動部材６３８に、それぞれ対応する。また、図７５において、横軸が位相を、縦軸が係合または解除の状態を、それぞれ示す。
FIG. 75 is a state relationship diagram showing the relationship between the phase of engagement or release of the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 with respect to the divided member DV. In FIG. 75, the upper state diagram corresponds to the one side rotation drive member 637, and the lower state diagram corresponds to the other side rotation drive member 638. In FIG. 75, the horizontal axis indicates the phase, and the vertical axis indicates the engaged or released state.
図７５の上段に示すように、一側回転駆動部材６３７の３カ所に形成される係合部６３７ｂのうちの第１の係合部６３７ｂが分割部材ＤＶの被係合部６４１との係合を開始した時点の位相を０°（基準位置）と規定すると、一側回転駆動部材６３７は、その位相が略１００°に達するまで（即ち、基準位置から１００°回転するまで）の間、第１の係合部６３７ｂが分割部材ＤＶの被係合部６４１に係合され、分割部材ＤＶへ駆動力が伝達される一方、位相が略１００°から１２０°までの間は、係合が解除された状態とされ、分割部材ＤＶへの駆動力の伝達が解除される。
As shown in the upper part of FIG. 75, the first engaging portion 637b among the engaging portions 637b formed at the three positions of the one-side rotation driving member 637 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. If the phase at the time of starting the rotation is defined as 0 ° (reference position), the one-side rotary drive member 637 is in the first position until the phase reaches approximately 100 ° (that is, until it rotates 100 ° from the reference position). One engaging portion 637b is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV, and the driving force is transmitted to the divided member DV. On the other hand, when the phase is approximately 100 ° to 120 °, the engagement is released. Thus, the transmission of the driving force to the split member DV is released.
その後は、一側回転駆動部材６３７の３カ所に形成される係合部６３７ｂのうちの第２の係合部６３７ｂ及び第３の係合部６３７ｂが、第１の係合部６３７ｂの場合と同一の係合および解除の状態（即ち、回転角度略１００°の間の係合および回転角度略２０°の間の解除）をそれぞれ繰り返す。
Thereafter, the second engaging portion 637b and the third engaging portion 637b among the engaging portions 637b formed at three positions of the one-side rotation driving member 637 are the first engaging portion 637b. The same engagement and disengagement state (that is, engagement at a rotation angle of approximately 100 ° and release at a rotation angle of approximately 20 °) is repeated.
図７５の下段に示すように、他側回転駆動部材６３８についても、その３カ所に形成される係合部６３８ｂのそれぞれが、上述した一側回転駆動部材６３７の場合と同一の係合および解除の状態（即ち、回転角度略１００°の間の係合および回転角度略２０°の間の解除）を繰り返す。
As shown in the lower part of FIG. 75, with respect to the other-side rotation drive member 638, the engagement portions 638b formed at the three locations are respectively engaged and released in the same manner as in the case of the one-side rotation drive member 637 described above. (That is, the engagement between the rotation angles of about 100 ° and the release between the rotation angles of about 20 °) are repeated.
この場合、本実施形態では、上述したように、一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転駆動部材６３８が互いの位相（互いの係合部６３７ｂ，６３８ｂの回転位置）を異ならせて配設される。即ち、他側回転駆動部材６３８は、その３カ所に形成される係合部６３８ｂのうちの第１の係合部６３８ｂが分割部材ＤＶの被係合部６４１と係合を開始する位相が、一側回転駆動部材６３７の第１の係合部６３７ｂが係合を開始する位相（基準位置）から略４０°遅れた位相に設定される。
In this case, in the present embodiment, as described above, the one side rotational drive member 637 and the other side rotational drive member 638 are arranged with different phases (the rotational positions of the engaging portions 637b and 638b). The In other words, the other side rotational drive member 638 has a phase in which the first engagement portion 638b of the engagement portions 638b formed at the three positions starts to engage with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. The phase is set approximately 40 ° behind the phase (reference position) at which the first engagement portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 starts engagement.
これにより、一側回転駆動部材６３７又は他側回転駆動部材６３８の一方において、分割部材ＤＶとの係合が解除されている（即ち、駆動力の伝達が解除されている）間は、一側回転駆動部材６３７又は他側回転駆動部材６３８の他方が、分割部材ＤＶと係合するように、互いの係合部６３７ｂ，６３８ｂの位相（回転位置）が設定される。これにより、一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転駆動部材６３８の両者において、同時に、分割部材ＤＶとの係合が解除された状態が形成されることを回避できる。その結果、駆動機構６３０から回転部材６４０への駆動力の伝達が断続的となることを抑制して、回転部材６４０の変位を安定化できる。
As a result, one side of the one side rotation drive member 637 or the other side rotation drive member 638 is on the one side while the engagement with the divided member DV is released (that is, transmission of the driving force is released). The phases (rotational positions) of the engaging portions 637b and 638b are set such that the other of the rotation driving member 637 or the other side rotation driving member 638 is engaged with the divided member DV. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid the state in which the engagement with the divided member DV is released at the same time in both the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638. As a result, the transmission of the driving force from the driving mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 is suppressed from being intermittent, and the displacement of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.
即ち、上述したように、複数の分割部材ＤＶが無端状に連結されることで回転部材６４０が形成される構成では、駆動機構６３０から回転部材６４０への駆動力の伝達が断続的となると、その駆動力の伝達および解除に起因して、分割部材ＤＶどうしの間隔が増減されやすくなる。そのため、回転部材６４０全体としての姿勢が不安定となり、その変位（回転）が不安定となる。
That is, as described above, in the configuration in which the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members DV endlessly, when transmission of the driving force from the driving mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 becomes intermittent, Due to the transmission and release of the driving force, the interval between the divided members DV is easily increased or decreased. Therefore, the posture of the rotating member 640 as a whole becomes unstable, and its displacement (rotation) becomes unstable.
これに対し、本実施形態によれば、一側回転駆動部材６３７又は他側回転駆動部材６３８のいずれか一方が解除状態にあっても他方が係合した状態とされ、回転部材６４０へ駆動力が常に伝達されている状態を形成できるので、分割部材ＤＶどうしの間隔を一定に保ちやすくできる。その結果、複数の分割部材ＤＶが無端状に連結されて形成される回転部材６４０に対し、その姿勢を安定化でき、その変位（回転）を安定化できる。
On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, even if one of the one side rotation driving member 637 or the other side rotation driving member 638 is in the released state, the other is engaged, and the driving force is applied to the rotation member 640. Can be formed, so that the interval between the divided members DV can be easily maintained. As a result, the posture of the rotating member 640 formed by connecting the plurality of divided members DV endlessly can be stabilized, and the displacement (rotation) can be stabilized.
次いで、回転部材６４０の回転位置の検出動作について、図７６及び図７７を参照して説明する。図７６は、回転部材６４０の単位回転量毎の状態遷移図であり、検出センサ６８４及び分割部材ＤＶの配置が一直線上に展開された状態が図示される。
Next, the operation for detecting the rotational position of the rotating member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 76 is a state transition diagram for each rotation amount of the rotating member 640, and shows a state in which the arrangement of the detection sensor 684 and the divided member DV is developed on a straight line.
なお、図７６では、説明の便宜上、検出センサ６８４には「Ａ〜Ｆ」の符号が、分割部材ＤＶには「１〜１０、３０」の符号が、それぞれ図示されると共に、検出センサ６８４の検出状態が「オン、オフ」の符号により図示される。また、図７６では、理解の容易のために、被検出部６４１ｃにハッチングが付される。
In FIG. 76, for convenience of explanation, reference numerals “A to F” are shown for the detection sensor 684, and reference numerals “1 to 10, 30” are shown for the divided member DV. The detection state is illustrated by the sign “ON, OFF”. In FIG. 76, the detected portion 641c is hatched for easy understanding.
ここで、図７６の説明においては、図中に付された符号「Ａ〜Ｆ」「１〜１０、３０」を用いて、各検出センサ６８４を、検出センサＡ、検出センサＢ、・・・、検出センサＦと称すると共に、各分割部材ＤＶを、第１の分割部材ＤＶ、第２の分割部材ＤＶ、・・・、第３０の分割部材ＤＶと称し、それぞれを区別する。
Here, in the description of FIG. 76, each of the detection sensors 684 is replaced with a detection sensor A, a detection sensor B,... Using the reference numerals “A to F” “1 to 10, 30” attached in the drawing. The divided members DV are referred to as a first divided member DV, a second divided member DV,..., A 30th divided member DV, and are distinguished from each other.
図７６（ａ）に示すように、回転部材６４０が回転され、第１の分割部材ＤＶが検出センサＡによって検出可能な位相（回転位置）に達すると、第２の分割部材ＤＶから第６の分割部材ＤＶが検出センサＢ〜Ｆによりそれぞれ検出可能な位相に配置される。
As shown in FIG. 76 (a), when the rotating member 640 is rotated and the first divided member DV reaches a phase (rotational position) that can be detected by the detection sensor A, the second divided member DV starts to the sixth divided member DV. The divided members DV are arranged in phases that can be detected by the detection sensors B to F, respectively.
よって、検出センサＡ，Ｃ〜Ｆでは、発光部から照射された光の受光部による受光が、第１の分割部材ＤＶ及び第３〜第６の分割部材ＤＶの被検出部６４１ｃにより遮られることで、検出状態がオフとされる一方、検出センサＢでは、発光部から照射された光の受光部による受光が可能となり、検出状態がオンとされる。
Therefore, in the detection sensors A and C to F, the light received by the light receiving part of the light emitted from the light emitting part is blocked by the detected parts 641c of the first divided member DV and the third to sixth divided members DV. Thus, while the detection state is turned off, in the detection sensor B, the light received from the light emitting unit can be received by the light receiving unit, and the detection state is turned on.
図７６（ｂ）に示すように、図７６（ａ）に示す状態から回転部材６４０が単位回転量だけ回転されると、分割部材ＤＶが周方向（図７６（ａ）及び図７６（ｂ）の左方向）へ移動されることで、各検出センサＡ〜Ｆの検出対象となる分割部材ＤＶが変更される（１個ずれる）。よって、検出センサＢ〜Ｅでは、第３〜第７の分割部材ＤＶ（被検出部６４１ｃ）の遮光により、検出状態がオフとされる一方、検出センサＡ，Ｆでは、検出状態がオンとされる。
As shown in FIG. 76 (b), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by the unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76 (a), the divided member DV is moved in the circumferential direction (FIG. 76 (a) and FIG. 76 (b)). The divided member DV that is the detection target of each of the detection sensors A to F is changed (shifted by one). Therefore, in the detection sensors B to E, the detection state is turned off by the light shielding of the third to seventh divided members DV (detected portion 641c), while in the detection sensors A and F, the detection state is turned on. The
図７６（ｃ）に示すように、図７６（ｂ）に示す状態から回転部材６４０が単位回転量だけ回転されると、各検出センサＡ〜Ｆの検出対象となる分割部材ＤＶが変更され（１個ずれる）、検出センサＡ〜Ｄ，Ｆでは、第３〜第６の分割部材ＤＶ及び第８の分割部材ＤＶ（被検出部６４１ｃ）の遮光により、検出状態がオフとされる一方、検出センサＥでは、検出状態がオンとされる。
As shown in FIG. 76 (c), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by the unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76 (b), the divided members DV to be detected by the detection sensors A to F are changed ( In the detection sensors A to D and F, the detection state is turned off by the light shielding of the third to sixth divided members DV and the eighth divided member DV (detected portion 641c). In the sensor E, the detection state is turned on.
その後も、回転部材６４０が単位回転量だけ回転される毎に、各検出センサＡ〜Ｆの検出対象となる分割部材ＤＶが変更され（１個ずれる）、これを分割部材ＤＶの数（本実施形態では３０個）だけ繰り返す（即ち、回転部材６４０が１回転される）と、図７６（ａ）に示す状態へ復帰される。
Thereafter, each time the rotating member 640 is rotated by the unit rotation amount, the divided member DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F is changed (shifted by one), and this is changed to the number of divided members DV (this embodiment). If the number of repetitions is 30 (that is, 30 in the embodiment) (that is, the rotating member 640 is rotated once), the state shown in FIG.
この場合、回転部材６４０には、上述したように、被検出部６４１ｃが形成されるものと被検出部６４１ｃの形成が省略されるものとの２種類が存在する。これら２種類の分割部材ＤＶが周方向に連結されることで、被検出部６４１ｃが周方向に不等間隔となる所定の配列される。所定の配列とは、周方向に連結された３０個の分割部材ＤＶのうちからいずれの隣接する６個の分割部材ＤＶを取り出しても、被検出部６４１ｃの有無の組み合わせ（即ち、検出センサＡ〜Ｆの検出状態）がいずれも異なる組み合わせとなる配列を意味する。
In this case, as described above, there are two types of rotating member 640, one in which the detected portion 641c is formed and one in which the formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. By connecting these two types of divided members DV in the circumferential direction, the detected portions 641c are arranged in a predetermined manner at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The predetermined arrangement means a combination of presence / absence of the detected portion 641c (that is, the detection sensor A) even if any six adjacent divided members DV are extracted from the 30 divided members DV connected in the circumferential direction. The detection state of -F) means the arrangement | sequence from which all differ.
よって、かかる組み合わせのテーブル（検出センサＡ〜Ｆの検出状態とその検出時の検出対象となる分割部材ＤＶとを対応付けた表）を予め作成し、ＲＯＭに記憶させておくことで、検出センサＡ〜Ｆが検出を行う度に、テーブルを参照することで、回転部材６４０の位相（回転位置）を把握することができる。即ち、複数（本実施形態では３０個）の分割部材ＤＶのうちのいずれの分割部材ＤＶが基準位置に位置するかを判別することができる。
Therefore, a table of such a combination (a table in which the detection states of the detection sensors A to F are associated with the divided member DV to be detected at the time of detection) is created in advance and stored in the ROM, thereby detecting the sensor. The phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be grasped by referring to the table every time A to F performs detection. That is, it is possible to determine which divided member DV of the plurality (30 in this embodiment) of divided members DV is located at the reference position.
ここで、回転部材６４０に周方向に連続するスリットを設けると共に、そのスリットを検出センサ６８４で検出し、パルス状の信号のパルス数を累積加算することで、その累積加算したパルス数に基づいて、基準位置からの回転部材６４０の回転量（位相）を検出することもできる。しかしながら、この場合には、検出センサ６８４の受光部の受光不良などによる検出不良が発生すると、回転部材６４０の回転量とパルス数の累積加算数とにずれが生じ、回転部材６４０の位相を正確に検出することができなくなる。即ち、一度でも検出不良が発生すると、その後の検出結果に影響を与えると共に、検出不良が発生する度に、検出結果への影響が累積される。
Here, the rotation member 640 is provided with a slit continuous in the circumferential direction, and the slit is detected by the detection sensor 684, and the number of pulses of the pulse-like signal is cumulatively added. The rotation amount (phase) of the rotating member 640 from the reference position can also be detected. However, in this case, if a detection failure such as a light reception failure of the light receiving unit of the detection sensor 684 occurs, a deviation occurs between the amount of rotation of the rotating member 640 and the cumulative number of pulses, and the phase of the rotating member 640 is accurately determined. Can no longer be detected. That is, when a detection failure occurs even once, it affects the subsequent detection results, and every time a detection failure occurs, the influence on the detection results is accumulated.
これに対し、本実施形態によれば、回転部材６４０の周方向に沿って不等間隔（所定の配列）で配設される複数の被検出部６４１ｃと、それら複数の被検出部６４１ｃの移動軌跡上に配設される複数の検出センサ６８４（検出センサＡ〜Ｆ）とを備えるので、検出センサＡ〜Ｆの検出結果の組み合わせに基づいて、回転部材６４０の位相（回転位置）を検出することができる。即ち、検出センサＡ〜Ｆが検出している現在の検出結果のみに基づいて、回転部材６４０の位相を検出することができ、かかる回転部材６４０の位相の検出に、検出センサＡ〜Ｆの過去の検出結果を必要としないので、過去に検出不良が発生したとしても、その検出不良の影響を受けることがなく、よって、回転部材６４０の位相を正確に検出することができる。
On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the plurality of detected portions 641c arranged at unequal intervals (predetermined arrangement) along the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640 and the movement of the plurality of detected portions 641c. Since the plurality of detection sensors 684 (detection sensors A to F) arranged on the locus are provided, the phase (rotation position) of the rotation member 640 is detected based on the combination of detection results of the detection sensors A to F. be able to. That is, the phase of the rotating member 640 can be detected based only on the current detection result detected by the detection sensors A to F, and the past of the detection sensors A to F can be used to detect the phase of the rotating member 640. Therefore, even if a detection failure has occurred in the past, it is not affected by the detection failure, and the phase of the rotating member 640 can be detected accurately.
検出センサＡ〜Ｆの間隔は、上述したように、第１区間Ｓ１（図５４参照）における分割部材ＤＶ（被検出部６４１ｃ）どうしの間隔（第１の間隔）と同一に設定される。
As described above, the interval between the detection sensors A to F is set to be the same as the interval (first interval) between the divided members DV (detected portions 641c) in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54).
よって、分割部材ＤＶどうしの間隔に相当する回転角度だけ回転部材６４０が回転される毎に、検出センサＡ〜Ｆの検出結果の組み合わせを異ならせることができる。即ち、第１区間Ｓ１における分割部材ＤＶどうしの間隔に相当する回転角度を最少単位として、回転部材６４０の位相（回転位置）を検出することができる。その結果、周方向に連結される複数の分割部材ＤＶのうちのいずれの分割部材ＤＶ（即ち、ルーレットを模した回転部材６４０のいずれのポケット）に対しても球Ｂを投球装置６５０から投球することができる。
Therefore, each time the rotation member 640 is rotated by a rotation angle corresponding to the interval between the divided members DV, the combinations of detection results of the detection sensors A to F can be made different. That is, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be detected with the rotation angle corresponding to the interval between the divided members DV in the first section S1 as the minimum unit. As a result, the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 to any divided member DV (that is, any pocket of the rotating member 640 simulating roulette) among the plurality of divided members DV coupled in the circumferential direction. be able to.
また、このように、検出センサＡ〜Ｆの配設間隔が、第１区間Ｓ１における分割部材ＤＶの間隔を基準として設定される（即ち、検出センサＡ〜Ｆが第１区間Ｓ１における分割部材ＤＶの被検出部６４１ｃを検出可能な位置に配置される）ことで、第２区間Ｓ２における分割部材ＤＶの間隔を基準とする場合と比較して、検出センサＡ〜Ｆの配設に必要なスペースを確保しやすくでき、設計の自由度を高めることができる。
Further, in this way, the arrangement interval of the detection sensors A to F is set with reference to the interval of the divided members DV in the first section S1 (that is, the detection sensors A to F are divided members DV in the first section S1). The space required for the arrangement of the detection sensors A to F is compared with the case where the interval of the divided members DV in the second section S2 is used as a reference. Can be easily secured, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.
言い換えると、第２区間Ｓ２における分割部材ＤＶの被検出部６４１ｃを検出可能な位置に検出センサＡ〜Ｆを配設する場合には、これら検出センサＡ〜Ｆを配設するためのスペースを確保する必要があることから、分割部材ＤＶどうしの間隔（第２の間隔）を狭くすることに制限が発生する。これに対し、検出センサＡ〜Ｆが第１区間Ｓ１側に配設されることで、第２区間Ｓ２における分割部材ＤＶの間隔（第２の間隔）の設定に制限が発生せず、かかる第２の間隔をより狭い間隔とすることができる。その結果、回転部材６４０の配設に必要なスペースを抑制できる。
In other words, when the detection sensors A to F are arranged at positions where the detected part 641c of the divided member DV can be detected in the second section S2, a space for arranging these detection sensors A to F is secured. Therefore, there is a limit to narrowing the interval (second interval) between the divided members DV. On the other hand, since the detection sensors A to F are arranged on the first section S1 side, the setting of the interval (second interval) between the divided members DV in the second section S2 is not limited, and the first The interval of 2 can be made a narrower interval. As a result, the space required for the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be suppressed.
なお、上述したように、本実施形態では、分割部材ＤＶの被検出部６４１ｃの有無に基づく２通り（オン・オフ）の検出結果が６個の検出センサ６８４でそれぞれ行われるので、６４（＝２の６乗）通りの組み合わせを形成することができる。
As described above, in the present embodiment, two detection results (on / off) based on the presence / absence of the detected portion 641c of the divided member DV are respectively performed by the six detection sensors 684, so that 64 (= 2 6) combinations can be formed.
この場合、分割部材ＤＶの配設数は３０個であるので、５個の検出センサ６８４があれば足りる（即ち、３２（＝２の５乗）の組み合わせが形成できる）。しかしながら、この場合には、５個の検出センサ６８４の全ての検出結果がオフとなる（被検出部６４１ｃにより遮光されない）状態が発生するため、その状態に対応する所定の位相（回転位置）において、検出センサ６８４の検出結果を取得するタイミングが得られない。
In this case, since the number of the divided members DV is 30, the number of the five detection sensors 684 is sufficient (that is, 32 (= 2 to the 5th power) combinations can be formed). However, in this case, a state occurs in which all the detection results of the five detection sensors 684 are turned off (not shielded by the detected portion 641c), and therefore in a predetermined phase (rotational position) corresponding to the state. The timing for acquiring the detection result of the detection sensor 684 cannot be obtained.
これに対し、本実施形態のように６個の検出センサ６８４を用いることで、６個の検出センサ６８４の全て検出センサ６８４においてその検出結果がオフ（被検出部６４１ｃによる遮光がなされていない状態）となることを回避できる。即ち、６個の検出センサ６８４のうちの少なくとも１個の検出センサ６８４においては、その検出結果をオンとなる（被検出部６４１による遮光がなされている）状態とできるので、全ての位相（回転位置）において、検出センサ６８４の検出結果を取得するタイミングを得ることができる。
On the other hand, by using six detection sensors 684 as in the present embodiment, the detection results of all the six detection sensors 684 are off (the state in which the detection part 641c is not shielded from light). ) Can be avoided. That is, in at least one detection sensor 684 out of the six detection sensors 684, the detection result can be turned on (shielded by the detected portion 641), so that all phases (rotations) Position), the timing for obtaining the detection result of the detection sensor 684 can be obtained.
図７７は、回転部材６４０の第１区間Ｓ１における部分を拡大した部分拡大側面図である。図７７に示すように、第１区間Ｓ１では、分割部材ＤＶの表示板６４６は、その板部６４６ａが水平姿勢に配置とされると共に、その板部６４６ａの軸部６４６ｂ（図５７及び図５８参照）と反対側の側面（図７７左側）が、隣接する分割部材ＤＶの板保持部材６４５の側面に対面される。
FIG. 77 is a partially enlarged side view in which a portion in the first section S1 of the rotating member 640 is enlarged. As shown in FIG. 77, in the first section S1, the display plate 646 of the divided member DV has the plate portion 646a arranged in a horizontal posture and the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a (FIGS. 57 and 58). The side surface (the left side in FIG. 77) opposite to the reference) faces the side surface of the plate holding member 645 of the adjacent divided member DV.
なお、本実施形態では、表示板６４６は、その板部６４６ａの軸部６４６ｂと反対側の側面が円弧状に湾曲して形成される（図７７中の拡大部分を参照）。よって、表示板６４６は、その板部６４６ａが軸部６４６ｂを中心として回転され水平姿勢に配置される際に、板部６４６ａの軸部６４６ｂと反対側が、隣接する分割部材ＤＶの板保持部材６４５の側面に干渉することを抑制でき、その結果、板部６４６ａの軸部６４６ｂと反対側（円弧状の側面）と板保持部材６４５の側面との間隔をより狭くすることができる。
In the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is formed such that the side surface of the plate portion 646a opposite to the shaft portion 646b is curved in an arc shape (see an enlarged portion in FIG. 77). Therefore, when the plate portion 646a is rotated about the shaft portion 646b and arranged in a horizontal posture, the display plate 646 has a plate holding member 645 of the adjacent divided member DV on the side opposite to the shaft portion 646b. Can be suppressed, and as a result, the distance between the opposite side (arc-shaped side surface) of the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a and the side surface of the plate holding member 645 can be narrowed.
これにより、第１区間Ｓ１では、分割部材ＤＶと隣接する分割部材ＤＶとがそれらの間の間隔（第１の間隔）を狭くする方向へ相対変位しようとすると、表示板６４６の板部６４６ａの側面が板保持部材６４５の側面に当接されることで、かかる相対変位を規制することができる。よって、これら分割部材ＤＶの被検出部６４１ｃがそれらの間隔を狭くする方向へ位置ずれすることを抑制でき、その結果、検出センサ６８４による検出精度の向上を図ることができる。
As a result, in the first section S1, when the divided member DV and the adjacent divided member DV try to be relatively displaced in the direction of narrowing the interval (first interval) between them, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 Such a relative displacement can be regulated by the side surface being in contact with the side surface of the plate holding member 645. Therefore, it can suppress that the to-be-detected part 641c of these division member DV shifts in the direction which narrows those intervals, As a result, the improvement of the detection accuracy by the detection sensor 684 can be aimed at.
一方、第１区間Ｓ１では、連結リンク部材６４４の挿通部６４４ａが、隣接する分割部材ＤＶの背面側本体６４２における連結リンク用開口６４２ａの終端（延設方向一側の端部、図７３（ａ）下側）に位置されているので（図７３（ａ）参照）、分割部材ＤＶと隣接する分割部材ＤＶとがそれらの間隔（第１の間隔）を広くする方向へ相対変位しようとすると、連結リンク部材６４４の挿通部６４４ａが連結リンク用開口６４２ａの終端に当接されることで、かかる相変位を規制することができる。よって、これら分割部材ＤＶの被検出部６４１ｃがそれらの間隔を広くする方向へ位置ずれすることを抑制でき、その結果、検出センサ６８４による検出精度の向上を図ることができる。
On the other hand, in the first section S1, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is connected to the end of the connecting link opening 642a in the rear side main body 642 of the adjacent divided member DV (the end on one side in the extending direction, FIG. ) (Below) (see FIG. 73 (a)), when the divided member DV and the adjacent divided member DV try to be relatively displaced in the direction of widening their interval (first interval), The phase displacement can be regulated by the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 being in contact with the terminal end of the connection link opening 642a. Therefore, it can suppress that the to-be-detected part 641c of these division member DV shifts in the direction which widens those intervals, As a result, the improvement of the detection accuracy by the detection sensor 684 can be aimed at.
次いで、図７８から図８３を参照して、第２実施形態について説明する。上述した各実施形態では、第１通路形成部材５２０の先端が常時開放される場合を説明したが、第２実施形態における左揺動ユニット２５００は、第１通路形成部材２５２０の先端に配設され、通路を開閉する先端壁部材２５６０を備える。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 83. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the tip of the first passage forming member 520 is always opened has been described. However, the left swing unit 2500 in the second embodiment is disposed at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. The tip wall member 2560 for opening and closing the passage is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
図７８は、第２実施形態における左揺動ユニット２５００の分解正面斜視図である。なお、図７８では、第１通路形成部材２５２０が解除位置に配置された状態が図示される。
FIG. 78 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit 2500 in the second embodiment. 78 shows a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position.
図７８に図示されるように、左揺動ユニット２５００は、第１壁部５１３の正面視右側後方へ球を排出するベース部材２５１０と、振分ベース部材２５２１の延設方向と長孔２５２１ｄの延設方向とが略一直線に構成される第１通路形成部材２５２０と、第１通路形成部材２５２０の先端を開閉する先端壁部材２５６０と、を主に備えて構成される。
As shown in FIG. 78, the left swinging unit 2500 includes a base member 2510 that discharges the sphere to the right rear side of the first wall 513, the extending direction of the sorting base member 2521, and the long holes 2521d. A first passage forming member 2520 whose extending direction is substantially straight and a tip wall member 2560 for opening and closing the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 are mainly provided.
ベース部材２５１０は、案内壁部５１３ａの右側方から後方へ延びる側方流下通路２５１５を備える。なお、導入円筒部５５２の外形が第１実施形態における導入円筒部５５２の外形と異なるが、その技術的思想は同一なので、本実施形態では説明を省略する。
The base member 2510 includes a side flow down passage 2515 that extends rearward from the right side of the guide wall portion 513a. In addition, although the external shape of the introduction cylinder part 552 differs from the external shape of the introduction cylinder part 552 in 1st Embodiment, since the technical idea is the same, description is abbreviate | omitted in this embodiment.
側方流下通路２５１５は、第１通路形成部材２５２０が解除位置に配置される状態において、第１壁部５１３に到達した球を排出する通路である。
The side flow down passage 2515 is a passage that discharges the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position.
第１通路形成部材２５２０は、振分ベース部材２５２１と通路カバー部材２５２２とを備える。振分ベース部材２５２１は、球の流下通路の一辺を構成する長尺板形状の垂下板部２５２１ａと、その垂下板部２５２１ａの延設方向に沿って延設される長孔２５２１ｄと、隙間Ｖ１の正面視右方において振分凸部５２１ｅと対向配置される第２振分凸部２５２１ｇと、その第２振分凸部２５２１ｇの正面視右方において垂下板部の正面側へ向けて背面側側面から凹設される排出凹部２５２１ｈと、を備える。
The first passage forming member 2520 includes a sorting base member 2521 and a passage cover member 2522. The sorting base member 2521 has a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 2521a that constitutes one side of the sphere flow-down passage, a long hole 2521d that extends along the extending direction of the hanging plate portion 2521a, and a gap V1. The second distribution convex portion 2521g disposed opposite to the distribution convex portion 521e on the right side of the front view of FIG. 5 and the rear side toward the front side of the hanging plate portion on the right side of the second distribution convex portion 2521g in the front view And a discharge recess 2521h that is recessed from the side surface.
垂下板部２５２１ａは、その下端部において、下側壁面の通路カバー部材２５２２と面する側（図７８左側）の部分が削られ凹設される凹設部２５２１ａ２と、下端部において、通路カバー部材２５２２とは反対側に通路カバー部材と対向する方向に円形に穿設される軸支孔２５２１ａ３と、を備える。
The hanging plate portion 2521a has a recessed portion 2521a2 in which a portion of the lower wall surface facing the passage cover member 2522 (left side in FIG. 78) is cut and recessed at the lower end portion, and a passage cover member at the lower end portion. A shaft support hole 2521a3 that is formed in a circular shape in a direction opposite to the passage cover member is provided on the opposite side to 2522.
凹設部２５２１ａ２は、通路カバー部材２５２２の凹設部２５２２ｂ１と共同で第１通路形成部材２５２０の下側面に開口部を構成する凹設部である。凹設部２５２１ａにより構成される開口部を先端壁部材２５６０が回転動作により通過する。
The recessed portion 2521a2 is a recessed portion that forms an opening on the lower surface of the first passage forming member 2520 in cooperation with the recessed portion 2522b1 of the passage cover member 2522. The distal end wall member 2560 passes through the opening formed by the recessed portion 2521a by a rotating operation.
軸支孔２５２１ａ３は、先端壁部材２５６０の本体部２５６１ａが棒上のピン部材で軸支される孔であり、通路カバー部材２５２２の軸支孔２５２２ａ２と対応する位置（同軸の位置）に配置される。
The shaft support hole 2521a3 is a hole in which the main body portion 2561a of the tip wall member 2560 is supported by a pin member on a rod, and is disposed at a position (coaxial position) corresponding to the shaft support hole 2522a2 of the passage cover member 2522. The
第２振分凸部２５２１ｇは、振分凸部５２１ｅと略同形状で構成される部分であって、第１壁部５１３へ到達した球を左右に振り分ける部分である。排出凹部２５２１ｈが、第１壁部５１３との間に球の直径以上の空間を設けで配設されており、第１壁部５１３へ到達して第２振分凸部２５２１ｇの正面視右側へ振り分けられた球は排出凹部２５２１ｈから側方流下通路２５１５へ導入後、遊技領域外に排出される。
The 2nd distribution convex part 2521g is a part comprised by the substantially same shape as the distribution convex part 521e, Comprising: The part which distribute | arranged the ball | bowl which reached | attained the 1st wall part 513 to right and left. The discharge concave portion 2521h is disposed with a space larger than the diameter of the sphere between the first wall portion 513 and reaches the first wall portion 513 to the right side of the second distribution convex portion 2521g in front view. The distributed balls are introduced from the discharge recess 2521h into the side flow down passage 2515 and then discharged out of the game area.
通路カバー部材２５２２は、振分ベース部材２５２１の正面側に覆設される板状の板状部２５２２ａと、その板状部２５２２ａの短手方向両端部から背面側に向けて板状に延設される上下壁部２５２２ｂと、を主に備える。
The passage cover member 2522 has a plate-like plate-like portion 2522a that covers the front side of the distribution base member 2521, and extends in a plate-like shape from both ends in the short-side direction of the plate-like portion 2522a toward the back side. The upper and lower wall portions 2522b are mainly provided.
板状部２５２２ａは、第１実施形態で上記した球受け部５２２ａ１と、下側先端部に振分ベース部材２５２１の軸支孔２５２１ａ３と同軸で円形に穿設される軸支孔２５２２ａ２と、を備える。軸支孔２５２１ａ３，２５２２ａ２は、先端壁部材２５６０を回転可能に軸支する孔である。
The plate-like portion 2522a includes the ball receiving portion 522a1 described above in the first embodiment, and a shaft support hole 2522a2 that is formed in a circular shape coaxially with the shaft support hole 2521a3 of the sorting base member 2521 at the lower end portion. Prepare. The shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 are holes that rotatably support the tip wall member 2560.
上下壁部２５２２ｂは、凹設部２５２１ａ２と対向する位置において凹設され、凹設部２５２１ａ２と共同で球が通過可能な開口を構成する凹設部２５２２ｂ１を備える。
The upper and lower wall portions 2522b are provided with a recessed portion 2522b1 which is recessed at a position facing the recessed portion 2521a2 and forms an opening through which a sphere can pass in cooperation with the recessed portion 2521a2.
先端壁部材２５６０は、第１通路形成部材２５２０の先端部において、振分ベース部材２５２１及び通路カバー部材２５２２の間に配設されると共に軸支孔２５２１ａ３，２５２２ａ２と同軸で棒状のピン部材に回転可能に軸支される正面視略Ｚ字形状の本体部材２５６１と、その本体部材２５６１を正面視時計回りに付勢するねじりバネ２５６２と、を主に備える。
The distal end wall member 2560 is disposed between the sorting base member 2521 and the passage cover member 2522 at the distal end portion of the first passage forming member 2520 and rotates into a rod-like pin member coaxially with the shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2. A main body member 2561 having a substantially Z-shape in front view that is pivotally supported and a torsion spring 2562 that urges the main body member 2561 clockwise in front view is mainly provided.
ねじりバネ２５６２は、一方の腕が通路カバー部材２５２２の先端に固着され、他方の腕が、先端壁部材２５６０から背面側に凸設される係止ピン２５６１ｅに当接する態様で構成される。
The torsion spring 2562 is configured in such a manner that one arm is fixed to the distal end of the passage cover member 2522 and the other arm abuts on a locking pin 2561e protruding from the distal end wall member 2560 on the back side.
図７９を参照して、先端壁部材２５６０の本体部材２５６１について説明する。図７９（ａ）及び図７９（ｄ）は、先端壁部材２５６０の本体部材２５６１の正面図であり、図７９（ｂ）は、先端壁部材２５６０の本体部材２５６１の上面図であり、図７９（ｃ）は、図７９（ｂ）のＬＸＸＩＸｃ−ＬＸＸＩＸｃ線における先端壁部材２５６０の本体部材２５６１の断面図である。なお、図７９（ａ）及び図７９（ｄ）では、第１通路形成部材２５２０の先端部分の形状が想像線で図示され、図７９（ａ）では、第１通路形成部材２５２０が解除位置（図８０参照）に配置された状態が図示され、図７９（ｄ）では、第１通路形成部材２５２０が連結位置（図８１参照）に配置された状態が図示される。
With reference to FIG. 79, the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560 will be described. 79 (a) and 79 (d) are front views of the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560, and FIG. 79 (b) is a top view of the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560. FIG. 79C is a cross-sectional view of the main body member 2561 of the distal end wall member 2560 taken along the line LXXIXc-LXXIXc of FIG. 79 (a) and 79 (d), the shape of the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 79 (a), the first passage forming member 2520 is in the release position ( A state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the coupling position (see FIG. 81) is illustrated in FIG. 79 (d).
図７９に示すように、先端壁部材２５６０の本体部材２５６１は、軸支孔２５２１ａ３，２５２２ａ２（図７８参照）と同軸で軸支される筒状の本体部２５６１ａと、その本体部２５６１ａから径方向に直線状に形成される板状の板部２５６１ｂと、その板部２５６１ｂの厚み方向に球の直径以上の径で穿設される流下孔２５６１ｃと、板部２５６１ｂの本体部２５６１ａとは反対側の端部から本体部２５６１ａを中心とした円弧に沿って延設される湾曲壁部２５６１ｄと、その湾曲壁部２５６１ｄの先端部において本体部２５６１ａの軸方向と平行に凸設される係止ピン２５６１ｅと、本体部２５６１ａを境に湾曲壁部２５６１ｄの反対側に配設される部分であって第１通路形成部材２５２０の先端部の開口よりも小さな形状で構成される押し込み部２５６１ｆと、を主に備える。
As shown in FIG. 79, the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560 includes a cylindrical main body 2561a that is coaxially supported by the shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 (see FIG. 78), and a radial direction from the main body 2561a. A plate-like plate portion 2561b formed in a straight line, a flow-down hole 2561c formed in the thickness direction of the plate portion 2561b with a diameter equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the body portion 2561a of the plate portion 2561b on the opposite side A curved wall portion 2561d extending along an arc centered on the main body portion 2561a from the end of the main body portion, and a locking pin protruding in parallel with the axial direction of the main body portion 2561a at the distal end portion of the curved wall portion 2561d 2561e and a portion disposed on the opposite side of the curved wall portion 2561d with the main body portion 2561a as a boundary, and configured to have a shape smaller than the opening of the distal end portion of the first passage forming member 2520. Mainly comprises a by-inclusive section 2561f, a.
板部２５６１ｂは、本体部２５６１ａの径方向の長さ（延設方向の長さ）が第１通路形成部材２５２０の先端の開口の短手方向（図８０縦方向）の寸法よりも長く形成される。これにより、ねじりバネ２５６２（図７８参照）の付勢方向の先端壁部材２５６０の回転停止位置を、板部２５６１ｂと上下壁部２５２２ｂの上側壁部とが当接する位置とすることができる（図７９（ｄ）参照）。
The plate portion 2561b is formed such that the length in the radial direction of the main body portion 2561a (length in the extending direction) is longer than the dimension in the short direction (vertical direction in FIG. 80) of the opening at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. The Thereby, the rotation stop position of the tip wall member 2560 in the urging direction of the torsion spring 2562 (see FIG. 78) can be set to a position where the plate portion 2561b and the upper wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b abut (FIG. 79 (d)).
湾曲壁部２５６１ｄは、解除状態（図７９（ｄ）参照）では、第１通路形成部材２５２０を流下してきた球と対向配置される当接壁２５６１ｄ１に球を衝突させることで、その流下を停止させる一方、連結状態では、第１通路形成部材２５２０の下方に移動することで球の通過を許容すると共に、流下孔２５６１ｃを通過した球を当接壁２５６１ｄ１の裏側に配設される転動壁２５６１ｄ２の上に転動させることで、その後の流下をスムーズにさせるという役割を備える。
In the released state (see FIG. 79D), the curved wall portion 2561d stops its flow by colliding with the abutting wall 2561d1 disposed opposite to the ball that has flowed down the first passage forming member 2520. On the other hand, in the connected state, the ball is allowed to pass by moving below the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball that has passed through the flow-down hole 2561c is disposed on the back side of the abutting wall 2561d1. By rolling on 2561d2, it has the role of smoothing the subsequent flow down.
次いで、図８０から図８２を参照して、左揺動ユニット２５００の動作について説明する。図８０から図８２は、左揺動ユニット２５００の正面図である。なお、図８０から図８２では、カバー部材５５０の図示が省略されると共に、図８０では、第１通路形成部材２５２０が解除位置に配置された状態が図示され、図８１では、図８０から第１通路形成部材２５２０が正面視時計回りに所定量回転された状態が図示され、図８２では、第１通路形成部材２５２０が連結位置に配置された状態が図示される。また、図８０から図８２では、第１通路形成部材２５２０が、垂下板部２５２１ａの前後方向中間位置における外形線で図示されると共に、第２振分凸部２５２１ｇが図示される。
Next, the operation of the left swing unit 2500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82 are front views of the left swing unit 2500. 80 to 82, the cover member 550 is not shown, and in FIG. 80, the state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position is shown. In FIG. A state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated by a predetermined amount clockwise as viewed from the front is illustrated, and in FIG. 82, a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the coupling position is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 80 to 82, the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated by the outline at the intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 2521a, and the second distribution convex portion 2521g is illustrated.
図８０に示すように、第１通路形成部材２５２０が解除位置とされる場合、遊技領域から流下され、第１壁部５１３に到達した球は、第２振分凸部２５２１ｇの正面視右方に振り分けられ、排出凹部２５２１ｈと第１壁部５１３との間に滞留し、第１通路形成部材２５２０が正面視時計回りに回転され排出凹部２５２１ｈが側方流下通路２５１５の正面側に配置されることにより、球が側方流下通路２５１５を流下可能となり、球が遊技領域外に排出される。これにより、第１通路形成部材２５２０が解除位置に配置された状態において、球が通路カバー部材２５２２の上下壁部２５２２ｂ（図７８参照）の間に供給されることを防止することができる。
As shown in FIG. 80, when the first passage forming member 2520 is in the release position, the sphere that has flowed down from the game area and has reached the first wall portion 513 is the right side of the second distribution convex portion 2521g in front view. And is retained between the discharge recess 2521h and the first wall 513, the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, and the discharge recess 2521h is disposed on the front side of the side flow down passage 2515. Thus, the ball can flow down the side flow down passage 2515, and the ball is discharged out of the game area. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the balls from being supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position.
また、図８０に示す状態において、排出凹部２５２１ｈに導入された球は、第１通路形成部材２５２０が回転するまでは排出凹部２５２１ｈに滞留するので、次に来る球が排出凹部２５２１ｈに入ることを防止でき、次に来る球を第２振分凸部２５２１ｇの先端の回転軌跡の外側（図８０上側）に留めることができる。
Further, in the state shown in FIG. 80, the sphere introduced into the discharge recess 2521h stays in the discharge recess 2521h until the first passage forming member 2520 rotates, so that the next sphere enters the discharge recess 2521h. Thus, the next sphere can be kept outside (upper side in FIG. 80) of the rotation trajectory at the tip of the second distribution convex portion 2521g.
第２振分凸部２５２１ｇの先端の回転軌跡の外側（図８０上側）に留められた球は、第１通路形成部材２５２０が正面視時計回りに回転し、第２振分凸部２５２１ｇが案内壁部５１３ａの右側の壁部に沿う位置に配置されることにより、第２振分凸部２５２１ｇの左側に導入され、通路カバー部材２５２２の上下壁部２５２２ｂ（図７８参照）の間に供給される。これにより、図８０に示す状態において第１壁部５１３に複数の球が到達しても、排出凹部２５２１ｈに導入される球を一つに留めることができる。
In the sphere held on the outside (upper side in FIG. 80) of the rotation locus at the tip of the second distribution convex portion 2521g, the first passage forming member 2520 rotates clockwise as viewed from the front, and the second distribution convex portion 2521g guides. By being arranged at a position along the right wall portion of the wall portion 513a, it is introduced to the left side of the second distribution convex portion 2521g and supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. The Thereby, even if a plurality of spheres reach the first wall portion 513 in the state shown in FIG. 80, it is possible to keep only one sphere introduced into the discharge recess 2521h.
図８０に示すように、第１通路形成部材２５２０が解除位置に配置される状態では、基端部（図８０左側端部）から先端部（図８０右側端部）に向かうにつれて第１通路形成部材２５２０が上昇傾斜する態様で構成される。そのため、通路カバー部材２５２２の上下壁部２５２２ｂ（図７８参照）の間に供給された球が残留した状態で第１通路形成部材２５２０が回転され、図８０に示す状態に至ったとしても、球は重力の作用で基端部へ向けて流れるので、球が先端部から落下することを防止することができる。
As shown in FIG. 80, in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position, the first passage is formed from the base end portion (left end portion in FIG. 80) toward the distal end portion (right end portion in FIG. 80). The member 2520 is configured so as to be inclined upward. Therefore, even if the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated with the sphere supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 remaining, Flows toward the base end by the action of gravity, so that the sphere can be prevented from falling from the front end.
図８１に示すように、第１通路形成部材２５２０が解除位置および連結位置の間の状態とされる場合、遊技領域から流下され、第１壁部５１３に到達した球は、第２振分凸部２５２１ｇの先端に乗り、流下を停止される。これにより、第１通路形成部材２５２０が解除位置および連結位置の間の状態に配置された場合において、球が通路カバー部材２５２２の上下壁部２５２２ｂ（図７８参照）の間に供給されることを防止することができる。
As shown in FIG. 81, when the first passage forming member 2520 is in the state between the release position and the connection position, the sphere that has flowed down from the game area and has reached the first wall portion 513 is It rides on the tip of the part 2521g and stops flowing down. Accordingly, when the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed between the release position and the coupling position, the balls are supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. Can be prevented.
また、図８１に示す状態では、第１通路形成部材２５２０の先端部へ向かうにつれて下降傾斜される。そのため、先端部の開口が常時開放されていると、球が通路カバー部材２５２２の上下壁部２５２２ｂ（図７８参照）の間に残留した状態で図８１に図示される状態にされると、球が第１通路形成部材２５２０の先端部から落下する恐れが有り、その球が他のユニット（回転ユニット６００等（図５参照））に噛み込まれ、動作不良を起こす恐れがある。
Also, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the first passage forming member 2520 is inclined downward toward the tip. Therefore, if the opening at the tip is always open, the ball remains between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 and the state shown in FIG. May fall from the tip end portion of the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball may be caught in another unit (the rotating unit 600 or the like (see FIG. 5)), causing a malfunction.
これに対し、本実施形態では、図８１に示す状態において、第１通路形成部材２５２０の先端部の開口に先端壁部材２５６０が配置され、湾曲壁部２５６１ｄが開口の蓋として機能するので、球が第１通路形成部材２５２０の先端から落下することを確実に防止することができる。
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the distal end wall member 2560 is disposed at the opening of the distal end portion of the first passage forming member 2520, and the curved wall portion 2561d functions as an opening lid. Can be reliably prevented from dropping from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.
図８２に示すように、第１通路形成部材２５２０が連結位置に配置される場合、遊技領域から流下され、第１壁部５１３に到達した球は、第２振分凸部２５２１ｇの正面視左方に振り分けられ、隙間Ｖ１（図７８参照）を通り正面側へ移動され、通路カバー部材２５２２の上下壁部２５２２ｂ（図７８参照）の間に供給され、第１通路形成部材２５２０の延設方向に沿って流下する。
As shown in FIG. 82, when the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the connection position, the sphere that has flowed down from the game area and has reached the first wall portion 513 is left in front view of the second distribution convex portion 2521g. And is moved to the front side through the gap V1 (see FIG. 78), supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522, and the extending direction of the first passage forming member 2520 It flows down along.
連結位置では、先端壁部材２５６０の押し込み部２５６１ｆと駆動側スライド部材４２０の収容凹部４２２ｆの壁面とが当接し（押し込み部２５６１ｆの変位軌跡上に収容凹部４２２ｆの壁面が配設される）、先端壁部材２５６０の湾曲壁部２５６１ｄが第１通路形成部材２５２０の外側に張り出される方向（図８２反時計回り）に回転される。即ち、先端壁部材２５６０の回転は、第１通路形成部材２５２０の位置の変化により生じるので、先端壁部材２５６０の駆動力を第１通路形成部材２５２０の駆動力と兼用できる。これにより、製品コストの削減を図ることができる。
At the coupling position, the pushing portion 2561f of the tip wall member 2560 and the wall surface of the housing recess 422f of the driving side slide member 420 abut (the wall surface of the housing recess 422f is disposed on the displacement locus of the pushing portion 2561f). The curved wall portion 2561d of the wall member 2560 is rotated in the direction projecting outward from the first passage forming member 2520 (counterclockwise in FIG. 82). That is, the rotation of the tip wall member 2560 is caused by a change in the position of the first passage forming member 2520, so that the driving force of the tip wall member 2560 can also be used as the driving force of the first passage forming member 2520. Thereby, reduction of product cost can be aimed at.
このとき、連結位置において、板部２５６１ｂが上下壁部２５２２ｂに対して面位置となる姿勢まで先端壁部材２５６０が回転されることにより、第１通路形成部材２５２０の先端部まで到達した球をスムーズに（上下壁部２５２２ｂと板部２５６１ｂとの間に段差が生じる場合のように跳ねること無く）流下孔２５６１ｃに送球することができる。
At this time, the tip wall member 2560 is rotated to a position where the plate portion 2561b is in a surface position with respect to the upper and lower wall portions 2522b at the connection position, thereby smoothly smoothing the sphere that has reached the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520. (Without jumping as in the case where a step is generated between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b and 2561b), the ball can be sent to the flow-down hole 2561c.
流下孔２５６１ｃを通過した球は湾曲壁部２５６１ｄの転動壁２５６１ｄ２を転動することにより、駆動側スライド部材４２０のセンサ部材４２２ｃへ案内される。即ち、湾曲壁部２５６１ｄは、第１通路形成部材２５２０の先端部まで到達した球を停止させる役割と、流下孔２５６１ｃを通過して第１通路形成部材２５２０から送球された球を案内する役割と、に兼用される。
The sphere that has passed through the flow-down hole 2561c rolls on the rolling wall 2561d2 of the curved wall portion 2561d, thereby being guided to the sensor member 422c of the driving side slide member 420. That is, the curved wall portion 2561d plays a role of stopping the sphere that has reached the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and a role of guiding the sphere sent from the first passage forming member 2520 through the flow down hole 2561c. It is used for both.
なお、連結位置（図８２参照）において、板部２５６１ｂが通路カバー部材２５２２の上下壁部２５２２ｂ（図７８参照）の下側の壁部と面位置とされるので、連結位置に到達する手前では、板部２５６１ｂが上下壁部２５２２ｂの下側の壁部よりも内側（図８２上側）に入り込んだ状態とされる。即ち、連結位置に到達して初めて球が流下孔２５６１ｃを通過可能となる（連結位置に到達するまでは球が湾曲壁部２５６１ｄに停止される状態が確保される）。
In addition, in the connection position (refer FIG. 82), since the board part 2561b is made into a surface position with the lower wall part 2522b (refer FIG. 78) of the channel | path cover member 2522, before reaching a connection position, it is. The plate portion 2561b enters the inner side (upper side in FIG. 82) than the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. That is, the sphere can only pass through the flow-down hole 2561c after reaching the connection position (a state where the sphere is stopped by the curved wall portion 2561d is ensured until the connection position is reached).
これにより、球が第１通路形成部材２５２０の内側に残留した状態において、第１通路形成部材２５２０が連結位置から解除位置へ向けて回転動作しかけても、球が第１通路形成部材２５２０の先端から落下することを確実に防止することができる。これは、球が複数個連なって送球される場合にも維持される。
Thereby, even when the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated from the coupling position toward the release position in a state where the sphere remains inside the first passage forming member 2520, the sphere is at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. Can be reliably prevented from falling off. This is maintained even when a plurality of balls are sent in succession.
図８３を参照して、第１通路形成部材２５２０に球が複数個連なって送球された場合について説明する。図８３（ａ）から図８３（ｃ）は、左揺動ユニット２５００及び液晶昇降ユニット４００の部分正面図である。なお、図８３（ａ）から図８３（ｃ）では、第１通路形成部材２５２０及び第２通路形成部材４２２の球の通路が部分的に断面視され、図８３（ａ）では、第１通路形成部材２５２０が連結位置に配置された状態が図示され、図８３（ｂ）では、図８３（ａ）に示す状態から第１通路形成部材２５２０が図８３（ｂ）反時計回りに所定量回転された状態が図示され、図８３（ｃ）では、図８３（ｂ）に示す状態から第１通路形成部材２５２０が図８３（ｂ）反時計回りに所定量回転され先端壁部材２５６０が回転仕切った状態が図示される。
Referring to FIG. 83, a description will be given of a case where a plurality of balls are continuously sent to first passage forming member 2520. 83 (a) to 83 (c) are partial front views of the left swing unit 2500 and the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400. FIG. 83 (a) to 83 (c), the spherical passages of the first passage forming member 2520 and the second passage forming member 422 are partially viewed in cross section, and in FIG. 83 (a), the first passage A state in which the forming member 2520 is disposed at the coupling position is illustrated. In FIG. 83B, the first passage forming member 2520 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 83A. 83 (c), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated by a predetermined amount counterclockwise in FIG. 83 (b) from the state shown in FIG. 83 (b), and the tip wall member 2560 is rotated. The state is shown.
また、図８３（ａ）から図８３（ｃ）では、第１通路形成部材２５２０の先端に連なって流下する球が例示として図示される。
Further, in FIGS. 83A to 83C, a sphere that flows down continuously from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated as an example.
図８３（ａ）に示すように、押し込み部２５６１ｆは、連結状態において収容凹部４２２ｆと当接され、その当接される位置を起点として図８３（ａ）下側に凹設部２５６１ｆ１を備える。その凹設部２５６１ｆ１は、軸支部５１６（図３７参照）を中心とする円弧Ｃ２１よりも軸支部５１６側に凹設される。そのため、図８３（ａ）から第１通路形成部材２５２０が回転することに伴い先端壁部材２５６０がねじりバネ２５６２の付勢力により回転し始める。図８３（ａ）において、湾曲壁部２５６１ｄを挟んで右側に配置される球を送り球Ｐ２１とし、左側に配置される球を残留球Ｐ２２とする。
As shown in FIG. 83A, the push-in portion 2561f is in contact with the housing recess 422f in the connected state, and includes a recessed portion 2561f1 on the lower side of FIG. 83A starting from the contacted position. The recessed portion 2561f1 is recessed closer to the shaft support portion 516 than the arc C21 centering on the shaft support portion 516 (see FIG. 37). Therefore, the tip wall member 2560 starts to rotate due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 2562 as the first passage forming member 2520 rotates from FIG. In FIG. 83 (a), a sphere arranged on the right side across the curved wall portion 2561d is referred to as a feed sphere P21, and a sphere arranged on the left side is referred to as a residual sphere P22.
図８３（ｂ）に示すように、第１通路形成部材２５２０が回転しかけると、先端壁部材２５６０が回転することにより、湾曲壁部２５６１ｄが上下壁部２５２２ｂの内側に入り込む。これにより残留球Ｐ２２は当接壁２５６１ｄ１に当接され、残留球Ｐ２２の流下が停止する。
As shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the first passage forming member 2520 starts to rotate, the tip wall member 2560 rotates, so that the curved wall portion 2561d enters inside the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. As a result, the residual sphere P22 comes into contact with the contact wall 2561d1, and the flow of the residual sphere P22 stops.
一方で、送り球Ｐ２１は、湾曲壁部２５６１ｄの右側に配置されるので、当接壁２５６１ｄ１により流下を停止されることはなく、流下孔２５６１ｃを通過して第１通路形成部材２５２０の外側へ送球可能とされる。
On the other hand, since the feed ball P21 is arranged on the right side of the curved wall portion 2561d, the flow-down is not stopped by the abutting wall 2561d1 and passes through the flow-down hole 2561c to the outside of the first passage forming member 2520. The ball can be sent.
この場合に、湾曲壁部２５６１ｄの上端部に送り球Ｐ２１が持ち上げられる場合があるが（図８３（ｂ）参照）湾曲壁部２５６１ｄの移動方向に上下壁部２５２２ｂの上側の壁部が対向配置されるので、送り球Ｐ２１がその壁部で押し込まれることで、送り球Ｐ２１が流下孔２５６１ｃを通過することを確実にすることができる。これにより、流下孔２５６１ｃの開口の直径を球の直径と同等程度に抑制することができ、流下孔２５６１ｃを流下する球の流下経路を安定させることができる。
In this case, the feeding ball P21 may be lifted to the upper end portion of the curved wall portion 2561d (see FIG. 83 (b)), and the upper wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b is opposed to the moving direction of the curved wall portion 2561d. Therefore, when the feed ball P21 is pushed by the wall portion, it can be ensured that the feed ball P21 passes through the flow-down hole 2561c. Thereby, the diameter of the opening of the flow down hole 2561c can be suppressed to the same extent as the diameter of the sphere, and the flow down path of the sphere flowing down the flow down hole 2561c can be stabilized.
図８３（ｃ）に示すように、図８３（ｂ）に示す状態から、第１通路形成部材２５２０が図８３（ｃ）反時計回りに回転され、湾曲壁部２５６１ｄが駆動側スライド部材４２０の湾曲壁部４２２ｆ１の上方に移動された場合に送り球Ｐ２１が湾曲壁部２５６１ｄ側に残留していたとしても、転動壁２５６１ｄ２が送り球Ｐ２１の転動させる部分として機能し、その転動壁２５６１ｄ２の下側端部と湾曲壁部４２２ｆ１の上側端部との間の距離が球の直径以下である内に送り球Ｐ２１を流下させる（送り球Ｐ２１が流下仕切るまでの期間、第１通路形成部材２５２０を図８３（ｃ）の位置で停止させる又は図８３（ｃ）付近で速度を緩める）ことで、球が第１通路形成部材２５２０から第２通路形成部材４２２に流下することを確実とすることができる。
As shown in FIG. 83 (c), from the state shown in FIG. 83 (b), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 83 (c), and the curved wall portion 2561d is connected to the drive side slide member 420. Even if the feed ball P21 remains on the curved wall portion 2561d side when moved above the curved wall portion 422f1, the rolling wall 2561d2 functions as a portion for rolling the feed ball P21, and the rolling wall thereof. The feed ball P21 is caused to flow down while the distance between the lower end portion of 2561d2 and the upper end portion of the curved wall portion 422f1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere (the first passage is formed until the feed ball P21 divides and flows down). By stopping the member 2520 at the position shown in FIG. 83 (c) or slowing down the velocity near the position shown in FIG. 83 (c), it is ensured that the ball flows down from the first passage forming member 2520 to the second passage forming member 422. To do It can be.
次いで、図８４から図８８を参照して、第３実施形態について説明する。上述した各実施形態では、従動側スライド部材４３０の左右方向中心位置に第３図柄表示装置８１が配設される場合を説明したが、第３実施形態における液晶昇降ユニット３４００は、第３図柄表示装置８１が従動側スライド部材３４３０の左右方向左寄りに配設される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 88. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the third symbol display device 81 is disposed at the center position in the left-right direction of the driven-side slide member 430 has been described. The device 81 is disposed on the left side of the driven slide member 3430 in the left-right direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
図８４から図８８は、駆動側スライド部材４２０及び従動側スライド部材３４３０の昇降動作を時系列に沿って図示する第３実施形態における液晶昇降ユニット３４００の正面図である。なお、図８４から図８８では、カバー部材４７０の部材の内で左右の部材の図示が省略されると共に、下降規制部材４１５及び上昇規制部材４１７の付近が部分的に拡大視される。
84 to 88 are front views of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 3400 in the third embodiment illustrating the lifting / lowering operations of the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 3430 in time series. 84 to 88, the left and right members of the cover member 470 are not shown, and the vicinity of the lowering restricting member 415 and the rising restricting member 417 is partially enlarged.
また、図８４では、伝達装置４５０のラック４５２が従動側スライド部材３４３０に当接した直後が図示され、図８５では、図８４に図示される状態からラック４５２が上昇動作され駆動側スライド部材４２０及び従動側スライド部材３４３０が上昇位置に配置された状態が図示され、図８６では、図８５の状態から駆動側スライド部材４２０のみが下降動作され下降位置に配置された状態が図示され、図８７では、図８６に示す状態から従動側スライド部材３４３０が落下され鉤状部４３４の下側側面である離間作用面４３４ｂと上昇規制部材４１７の離間傾斜部４１７ｆとが当接されると共に上昇規制部材４１７が所定量回転された状態が図示され、図８８では、図８７に図示される状態から従動側スライド部材３４３０が更に落下され従動側スライド部材３４３０が下降位置に配置された状態が図示される。
84 shows the state immediately after the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 contacts the driven slide member 3430. In FIG. 85, the rack 452 is moved up from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 86 illustrates a state where the driven-side slide member 3430 is disposed at the raised position, and FIG. 86 illustrates a state where only the drive-side slide member 420 is lowered from the state illustrated in FIG. 85 and disposed at the lowered position. 86, the driven slide member 3430 is dropped from the state shown in FIG. 86, and the separation action surface 434b which is the lower side surface of the bowl-shaped portion 434 is brought into contact with the separation inclined portion 417f of the rise restriction member 417 and the rise restriction member. FIG. 88 shows a state where 417 is rotated by a predetermined amount. In FIG. 88, the driven side slide member 3430 is further dropped from the state shown in FIG. State dynamic side slide member 3430 is disposed at the lowered position is illustrated.
図８４から図８８に図示されるように、液晶昇降ユニット３４００は、ベース部材４１０と、駆動側スライド部材４２０と、従動側スライド部材３４３０と、駆動装置４４０と、伝達装置４５０と、下側前板部剤４６０と、カバー部材４７０と、そのカバー部材４７０の正面側に配設され、従動側スライド部材３４３０の落下を防止する態様で動作するソレノイド３４８０と、を主に備える。
84 to 88, the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 3400 includes a base member 410, a drive side slide member 420, a driven side slide member 3430, a drive device 440, a transmission device 450, and a lower front. It mainly includes a plate member 460, a cover member 470, and a solenoid 3480 that is disposed on the front side of the cover member 470 and operates in a manner that prevents the driven-side slide member 3430 from dropping.
ベース部材４１０は、下降規制部材４１５及び上昇規制部材４１７が、正面視左側の部分にのみ配設され、正面視右側の部分の配設は省略される。
In the base member 410, the lowering restricting member 415 and the raising restricting member 417 are disposed only in the left part of the front view, and the right part of the front member is omitted.
従動側スライド部材３４３０は、第３図柄表示装置８１を左右中心位置から正面視左方に偏心した位置に有し左右方向に長尺に構成される本体部材３４３１と、その本体部材３４３１の左右方向両端に配置される機能部４３２と、その機能部４３２に鉛直方向に穿設される孔であって案内棒４５１が挿通される案内孔４３３と、機能部４３２の下端部において左右外側方向に上昇傾斜して延設される鉤状部４３４と、機能部４３２の上端部の案内孔４３３の内側（他方の案内孔４３３に近接する側）において背面側に延設される落下防止部４３５と、を主に備える。
The driven-side slide member 3430 has a main body member 3431 configured to be elongated in the left-right direction with the third symbol display device 81 decentered from the left-right center position to the left in front view, and the left-right direction of the main body member 3431 A function part 432 arranged at both ends, a guide hole 433 which is a hole formed in the function part 432 in the vertical direction and through which the guide rod 451 is inserted, and the lower end part of the function part 432 rises leftward and rightward. A hook-shaped portion 434 extending in an inclined manner, a fall prevention portion 435 extending on the back side inside the guide hole 433 at the upper end portion of the functional portion 432 (the side close to the other guide hole 433), Is mainly provided.
本体部材３４３１は、その上端部において正面視左方に凸設される係止凸部３４３１ａを備える。係止凸部３４３１ａは、カバー部材４７０の正面側に配設されるソレノイド３４８０に係止され落下を防止される部分である。係止凸部３４３１ａは、その上面が凸設方向先端へ向かうにつれて下降傾斜される。
The main body member 3431 includes a locking protrusion 3431a that protrudes leftward in a front view at the upper end thereof. The locking projection 3431a is a portion that is locked by a solenoid 3480 disposed on the front side of the cover member 470 and is prevented from dropping. The locking projection 3431a is inclined downward as its upper surface goes toward the tip in the protruding direction.
ソレノイド３４８０は、正面視右方に出没可能な棒部材３４８１を備え、その棒部材３４８１の下面が、張り出し方向先端へ向かうにつれて上昇傾斜される。なお、ソレノイド３４８０は、通電時に没入状態とされ、非通電時に張出状態とされ、その張出状態において、棒部材３４８１の先端が係止凸部３４３１ａの先端よりも左右中央側へ張り出す態様で構成される。
The solenoid 3480 includes a bar member 3481 that can protrude and retract to the right in front view, and the lower surface of the bar member 3481 is inclined upward as it goes toward the tip in the overhang direction. The solenoid 3480 is in an immersive state when energized, and is in an overhanging state when not energized. In this overhanging state, the tip of the bar member 3481 protrudes to the left and right center sides from the tip of the locking projection 3431a. Consists of.
図８４に示すように、第３図柄表示装置８１が正面視左側に寄って配置される。これにより、第３図柄表示装置８１の大きさは確保しながら、第３図柄表示装置８１の左右に分かれていた領域を一箇所（図８４において第３図柄表示装置８１の右方）に集め、大きな領域として構成することで、その空いた領域に配設可能な可動部材の大きさの自由度を向上させることができる。
As shown in FIG. 84, the third symbol display device 81 is arranged close to the left side of the front view. As a result, while securing the size of the third symbol display device 81, the left and right regions of the third symbol display device 81 are collected in one place (on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 in FIG. 84), By configuring as a large region, the degree of freedom of the size of the movable member that can be disposed in the vacant region can be improved.
第３図柄表示装置８１が正面視左側に寄って配置されるので、従動側スライド部材４２０からラック４５２に与えられる負荷が左右非対称となる（左側の方が大きくなる）。左右のラック４５２は駆動側スライド部材４２０により連結されているので、ラック４５２への負荷の非対称さが、駆動側スライド部材４２０及びラック４５２の姿勢を正面視反時計回りに傾斜させようとする。
Since the third symbol display device 81 is arranged close to the left side when viewed from the front, the load applied from the driven side slide member 420 to the rack 452 becomes asymmetrical (the left side becomes larger). Since the left and right racks 452 are connected by the drive side slide member 420, the asymmetry of the load on the rack 452 tends to tilt the postures of the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 counterclockwise when viewed from the front.
また、図８４に示すように、第２通路形成部材４２２の正面視左側下端部に配線収納部材４２３が配設される。このとき、配線収納部材４２３の重心位置Ｇ３１が、駆動側スライド部材４２０の中心位置から左寄りに配置されるので、配線収納部材４２３及びその配線収納部材４２３に収容される配線の重みにより、駆動側スライド部材４２０が負荷を受け、正面視反時計回りに傾斜する恐れがある。
Also, as shown in FIG. 84, the wiring housing member 423 is disposed at the lower left end of the second passage forming member 422 when viewed from the front. At this time, the center of gravity position G31 of the wiring storage member 423 is arranged on the left side from the center position of the driving side slide member 420, so that the driving side is driven by the wiring storage member 423 and the weight of the wiring stored in the wiring storage member 423. There is a possibility that the slide member 420 receives a load and tilts counterclockwise when viewed from the front.
このように、駆動側スライド部材４２０及びラック４５２が正面視反時計回りに傾斜し易くされるので、駆動側スライド部材４２０及びラック４５２の昇降動作中のがたつきを、駆動側スライド部材４２０及びラック４５２が水平姿勢（図８７参照）を保つ状態と、駆動側スライド部材４２０及びラック４５２が正面視反時計回りに傾斜した状態との間でのがたつきに限定することができる（駆動側スライド部材４２０及びラック４５２が水平姿勢から正面視時計回りに傾斜することを抑制することができる。
As described above, since the driving side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are easily inclined counterclockwise when viewed from the front, rattling during the raising / lowering operation of the driving side slide member 420 and the rack 452 is prevented. It can be limited to the backlash between the state where 452 keeps the horizontal posture (see FIG. 87) and the state where the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are inclined counterclockwise when viewed from the front (drive side slide). It is possible to suppress the member 420 and the rack 452 from tilting clockwise from the horizontal posture.
よって、正面視左側に配設された下降規制部材４１５及び上昇規制部材４１７が駆動側スライド部材４２０及びラック４５２の傾斜を有効に抑制しながら、駆動側スライド部材４２０及びラック４５２の昇降動作を案内する。一方で、正面視右側に駆動側スライド部材４２０及びラック４５２が傾斜されないことから、正面視右側の機能部４３２の外側に下降規制部材４１５及び上昇規制部材４１７の配設することが不要となり、製品コスト（材料費用や組立工数）を削減することができる。
Therefore, the lowering restricting member 415 and the raising restricting member 417 arranged on the left side of the front view guide the raising / lowering operations of the driving side slide member 420 and the rack 452 while effectively suppressing the inclination of the driving side slide member 420 and the rack 452. To do. On the other hand, since the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are not inclined on the right side when viewed from the front, it is not necessary to dispose the lowering restricting member 415 and the rising restricting member 417 outside the functional unit 432 on the right side when viewed from the front. Costs (material costs and assembly man-hours) can be reduced.
図８５に示すように、駆動側スライド部材４２０が上昇位置に配置されると、図８４に示す状態に比較して配線収納部材４２３が立ち上がり、その重心位置Ｇ３１が図８４に示す状態に比較して正面視左方に移動される。
As shown in FIG. 85, when the drive-side slide member 420 is placed in the raised position, the wiring housing member 423 rises compared to the state shown in FIG. 84, and the center of gravity position G31 is compared with the state shown in FIG. Moved to the left in front view.
そのため、駆動側スライド部材４２０及びラック４５２を正面視反時計回りに傾斜させる方向の負荷が大きくなり、ラック４５２及び駆動ギア４４２の間の歯合関係が悪化する恐れがある。
Therefore, the load in the direction in which the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are inclined counterclockwise when viewed from the front increases, and the meshing relationship between the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 may be deteriorated.
これに対し、駆動側スライド部材４２０が上昇位置に配置された状態において、凸設板４５３ａが下降規制部材４１５に当接され支えられる。これにより、駆動側スライド部材４２０及びラック４５２の姿勢が正面視反時計回りに傾斜することを抑制することができる。
On the other hand, in the state where the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the raised position, the protruding plate 453a is brought into contact with and supported by the lowering restriction member 415. Thereby, it can suppress that the attitude | position of the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 inclines counterclockwise in front view.
図８５に示すように、従動側スライド部材３４３０が上昇位置に配置されると、係止凸部３４３１がソレノイド３４８０の棒部材３４８１を乗り越え、係止凸部３４３１が棒部材３４８１に載置される。
As shown in FIG. 85, when the driven-side slide member 3430 is arranged at the raised position, the locking projection 3431 gets over the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the locking projection 3431 is placed on the rod member 3481. .
このとき、係止凸部３４３１の上面の傾斜に沿って棒部材３４８１が左右方向に押されることで、係止凸部３４３１が棒部材３４８１を乗り越えられる。これにより、ソレノイド３４８０に電気を通さないままで、係止凸部３４３１をソレノイド３４８０の棒部材３４８１に載置することができる。
At this time, when the bar member 3481 is pushed in the left-right direction along the inclination of the upper surface of the locking projection 3431, the locking projection 3431 can get over the bar member 3481. As a result, the locking projection 3431 can be placed on the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480 without conducting electricity to the solenoid 3480.
図８６に示すように、従動側スライド部材３４３０が上昇位置に配置された状態で駆動側スライド部材４２０が下降しても、ソレノイド３４８０の棒部材３４８１が従動側スライド部材３４３０の係止凸部３４３１ａを支えることにより、従動側スライド部材３４３０が駆動側スライド部材４２０に連動して下降動作することが防止され、従動側スライド部材３４３０が上昇位置に維持される。
As shown in FIG. 86, even if the drive-side slide member 420 is lowered while the driven-side slide member 3430 is disposed at the raised position, the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480 is engaged with the locking projection 3431a of the driven-side slide member 3430. , The driven slide member 3430 is prevented from moving downward in conjunction with the drive slide member 420, and the driven slide member 3430 is maintained in the raised position.
このとき、従動側スライド部材３４３０は、第３図柄表示装置８１が中心位置から正面視左側に寄った位置に配置され、重心位置が左側に寄っているので、ソレノイド３４８０が左側にしか無い状態においても、従動側スライド部材３４３０が落下することを抑制することができる。
At this time, the driven-side slide member 3430 is disposed at a position where the third symbol display device 81 is shifted from the center position to the left side of the front view, and the center of gravity position is shifted to the left side, so that the solenoid 3480 is only on the left side. Moreover, it can suppress that the driven side slide member 3430 falls.
即ち、従動側スライド部材３４３０の重心位置が左右方向中央にある場合、振動等により、従動側スライド部材３４３０は正面視時計回りにも反時計回りにもぐらつく恐れがある。ソレノイド３４８０が左側にしか無い状態において、従動側スライド部材３４３０が正面視時計回りに傾斜すると、係止凸部３４３１ａが棒部材３４８１からずれ落ちる恐れがある。
That is, when the center of gravity position of the driven side slide member 3430 is at the center in the left-right direction, the driven side slide member 3430 may wobble clockwise or counterclockwise due to vibration or the like. If the driven-side slide member 3430 is tilted clockwise when viewed from the front in a state where the solenoid 3480 is only on the left side, the locking convex portion 3431a may be displaced from the bar member 3481.
これに対し、本実施形態では、従動側スライド部材３４３０の重心位置が正面視左側に寄っているため、振動等により従動側スライド部材３４３０が水平姿勢（図８７参照）から正面視時計回りに傾斜することが抑制される。
On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the gravity center position of the driven side slide member 3430 is shifted to the left side of the front view, the driven side slide member 3430 is inclined clockwise from the horizontal posture (see FIG. 87) due to vibration or the like. Is suppressed.
よって、係止凸部３４３１ａがソレノイド３４８０の棒部材３４８１に近接する方向に傾斜し易く、係止凸部３４３１ａ及び棒部材３４８１の当接が維持されるので、係止凸部３４３１ａが棒部材３４８１からずれ落ちることが抑制される。
Therefore, the latching convex portion 3431a easily tilts in the direction of approaching the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the abutment of the latching convex portion 3431a and the rod member 3481 is maintained, so that the latching convex portion 3431a becomes the rod member 3481. It is suppressed that it slips off.
従って、従動側スライド部材３４３０の左右方向両側にソレノイド３４８０を配設すること無く、従動側スライド部材３４３０を上昇位置に安定して維持することができるので、ソレノイド３４８０の配設個数を低減しながら、従動側スライド部材３４３０の動作を良好とすることができる。
Accordingly, the driven-side slide member 3430 can be stably maintained at the raised position without disposing the solenoid 3480 on both sides of the driven-side slide member 3430 in the left-right direction, so that the number of disposed solenoids 3480 can be reduced. The operation of the driven side slide member 3430 can be made favorable.
図８７に示すように、ソレノイド３４８０が通電され、棒部材３４８１が没入状態とされると、従動側スライド部材３４３０が落下する。従動側スライド部材３４３０が落下する過程において、鉤状部４３４と下降規制部材４１５との位置が前後方向でずれていることから、鉤状部４３４が下降規制部材４１５に引っ掛かり動作不良を起こすことを抑制することができる。
As shown in FIG. 87, when the solenoid 3480 is energized and the bar member 3481 is in an immersive state, the driven side slide member 3430 falls. In the process in which the driven-side slide member 3430 falls, the positions of the hook-shaped portion 434 and the lowering restriction member 415 are displaced in the front-rear direction, so that the hook-like portion 434 is caught by the lowering restriction member 415 and causes a malfunction. Can be suppressed.
図８７に示すように、鉤状部４３４が上昇規制部材４１７の離間傾斜部４１７ｆと当接した状態で落下することにより、上昇規制部材４１７を外巻き（図８７反時計回り）に回転させる（解除状態）。
As shown in FIG. 87, when the hook-shaped portion 434 falls in a state of being in contact with the separation inclined portion 417f of the rise restricting member 417, the rise restricting member 417 is rotated outwardly (counterclockwise in FIG. 87) ( Released state).
図８８に示すように、従動側スライド部材３４３０が下降位置に配置されると、上昇規制部材４１７が内巻き（図８８時計回り）に回転され、上昇規制部材４１７の係合爪部４１７ｅと、鉤状部４３４とが上下方向で対向配置される（係合状態）。
As shown in FIG. 88, when the driven slide member 3430 is disposed at the lowered position, the rise restricting member 417 is rotated inward (clockwise in FIG. 88), and the engaging claw portion 417e of the rise restricting member 417 is The hook-shaped portion 434 is disposed so as to face the vertical direction (engaged state).
図８７及び図８８に示すように、上昇規制部材４１７が従動側スライド部材３４３０の鉤状部４３４に対して回転されることで解除状態から係合状態へ状態が変化するので、姿勢の変化無しで係合させる場合（部材の弾性で解除状態と係合状態とを変化させる場合等）に比較して、解除状態と係合状態とを変化させるために必要な荷重や姿勢変化量を大きくすることができる。これにより、従動側スライド部材３４３０の鉤状部４３４と上昇規制部材４１７とが係合する係合状態を維持し易くすることができる。
As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the state is changed from the released state to the engaged state when the ascent restricting member 417 is rotated with respect to the bowl-shaped portion 434 of the driven side slide member 3430, so that there is no change in posture. Increase the load and posture change required to change the release state and engagement state compared to the case where the release state and engagement state are changed by the elasticity of the member be able to. Thereby, it is possible to easily maintain the engaged state in which the hook-shaped portion 434 of the driven-side slide member 3430 and the ascending restriction member 417 are engaged.
また、図８７及び図８８に示すように、従動側スライド部材３４３０の落下により上昇規制部材４１７が回転動作される。即ち、上昇規制部材４１７の係合状態を形成するために駆動装置を別途設ける必要が無い。よって、部品点数を削減して、製品コストを低減することができる。
Also, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the rise restricting member 417 is rotated by the fall of the driven side slide member 3430. That is, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive device in order to form the engagement state of the ascending restriction member 417. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced.
次いで、図８９を参照して、第４実施形態について説明する。上述した各実施形態では、下傾斜位置において接続部材４２４の上側壁部４２４ｂの下端部から対向壁部４２２ｆ２が張り出される場合を説明したが、第４実施形態における駆動側スライド部材４４２０は、湾曲壁部４２２ｆ１に対向配置される対向壁部４４２２ｆ２が、上下方向に延設される平面上の壁部として構成される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which the opposing wall portion 422f2 projects from the lower end portion of the upper wall portion 424b of the connection member 424 in the downward inclined position. An opposing wall portion 4422f2 disposed to face the wall portion 422f1 is configured as a planar wall portion extending in the vertical direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
図８９（ａ）は、第４実施形態における駆動側スライド部材４４２０の部分正面図であり、図８９（ｂ）は、図８９（ａ）の矢印ＬＸＸＸＩＸｂ方向視における駆動側スライド部材４４２０の側面図であり、図８９（ｃ）は、駆動側スライド部材４４２０の部分正面図である。なお、図８９（ａ）及び図８９（ｃ）では、接続部材４４２４の前後方向（図８９（ａ）紙面垂直方向）中心位置において、駆動側スライド部材４４２０が断面視される。また、図８９（ａ）及び図８９（ｂ）では、接続部材４４２４の下傾斜状態が図示され、図８９（ｃ）では、接続部材４４２４の上傾斜状態が図示される。
FIG. 89 (a) is a partial front view of the drive side slide member 4420 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 89 (b) is a side view of the drive side slide member 4420 as seen in the direction of arrow LXXXIXb in FIG. 89 (a). FIG. 89 (c) is a partial front view of the drive side slide member 4420. 89 (a) and 89 (c), the drive-side slide member 4420 is viewed in cross-section at the center position of the connecting member 4424 in the front-rear direction (FIG. 89 (a) perpendicular to the paper surface). 89 (a) and 89 (b) illustrate the downwardly inclined state of the connecting member 4424, and FIG. 89 (c) illustrates the upwardly inclined state of the connecting member 4424.
接続部材４４２４は、上側壁部４２４ｂの下端部から正面視右方へ延設される延設爪部４４２４ｆを備える。
The connection member 4424 includes an extended claw portion 4424f that extends rightward from the lower end portion of the upper side wall portion 424b.
延設爪部４４２４ｆは、上傾斜状態において湾曲壁部４２２ｆ１と対向配置され、湾曲壁部４２２ｆ１から遠ざかる方向へ凹んで湾曲されると共に、図８９（ｂ）に示すように、前後方向（図８９（ｂ）左右方向）中間部分に一対の凹設部を備える。
The extended claw portion 4424f is disposed to face the curved wall portion 422f1 in the upwardly inclined state, is concavely curved in a direction away from the curved wall portion 422f1, and as shown in FIG. (B) Left and right direction) A pair of recessed portions are provided in the intermediate portion.
第２通路形成部材４４２２は、湾曲壁部４２２ｆ１に対向配置される対向壁部４４２２ｆ２を備える。対向壁部４４２２ｆ２は、センサ部材４２２ｃの開口に沿って鉛直方向に延設される板部分であり、延設爪部４４２４ｆと干渉しない態様で凹設部が配置されると共に図８９（ａ）の状態において延設爪部４４２４ｆと重なる位置まで延設される。
The 2nd channel | path formation member 4422 is provided with the opposing wall part 4422f2 arrange | positioned facing the curved wall part 422f1. The opposing wall portion 4422f2 is a plate portion extending in the vertical direction along the opening of the sensor member 422c, and the recessed portion is disposed in a manner that does not interfere with the extending claw portion 4424f and is shown in FIG. 89 (a). In the state, it extends to a position overlapping with the extended claw portion 4424f.
本実施形態によれば、図８９（ａ）に示す下傾斜状態において、球の経路に球が衝突することで破損する部分（突起部分等）が配設されていないので、第１通路形成部材５２０から接続部材４４２４に球が送球された場合に球と衝突することにより部材が破損することを抑制することができる。
According to the present embodiment, in the downwardly inclined state shown in FIG. 89 (a), there are no portions (projections or the like) that are damaged when the sphere collides with the path of the sphere. When a ball is sent from 520 to the connecting member 4424, the member can be prevented from being damaged by colliding with the ball.
図８９（ｂ）に示す上傾斜状態において、延設爪部４４２４ｆと対向壁部４４２２ｆ２とが球を案内するので、球がセンサ部材４２２ｃ付近で詰まることを抑制することができる。
In the upward inclined state shown in FIG. 89 (b), the extended claw portion 4424f and the opposing wall portion 4422f2 guide the sphere, so that the sphere can be prevented from being clogged in the vicinity of the sensor member 422c.
次いで、図９０から図９６を参照して、第５実施形態について説明する。上述した第１実施形態では、遊技盤１３に配設される発光ユニット８００の詳しい説明についてその説明を省略したが、第５実施形態では、発光ユニット８００についての詳細な説明をする。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 96. In the first embodiment described above, the detailed description of the light emitting unit 800 disposed on the game board 13 is omitted, but in the fifth embodiment, the light emitting unit 800 is described in detail. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
発光ユニット８００は、上述したように、センターフレーム８６の中央に開口される開口部の内縁部の正面視右側に配設されており、ガラスユニット１６を介して遊技者に視認可能とされる（図２参照）。
As described above, the light emitting unit 800 is disposed on the right side in front view of the inner edge of the opening that is opened at the center of the center frame 86, and is visible to the player through the glass unit 16 ( (See FIG. 2).
初めに、図９０から図９２を参照して、発光ユニット８００の構成について説明する。図９０（ａ）は、第５実施形態における発光ユニット８００の正面図であり、図９０（ｂ）は、発光ユニット８００の背面図である。図９１は、発光ユニット８００の分解斜視正面図であり、図９２は、発光ユニット８００の分解斜視背面図である。
First, the configuration of the light emitting unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. 90 (a) is a front view of the light emitting unit 800 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 90 (b) is a rear view of the light emitting unit 800. FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective front view of the light emitting unit 800, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective rear view of the light emitting unit 800.
図９０から図９２に示すように、発光ユニット８００は、区画部材８４０と、その区画部材８４０に配設される第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０と、第２導光部材８２０の背面側に覆設される覆設部材８３０と、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の反対側の区画部材８４０に配設されると共に、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０側に光を照射するＬＥＤ８５２を備える基板部材８５０と、区画部材８４０の下部に配設され区画部材８４０との対向間に基板部材８５０を挟持する装飾部材８６０とを主に備えて形成される。
90 to 92, the light emitting unit 800 includes a partition member 840, a first light guide member 810 and a second light guide member 820 disposed in the partition member 840, and a second light guide member 820. Of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 830 and the second light guide member 820 and the partition member 840 opposite to the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820. A board member 850 that includes an LED 852 that irradiates light to the light guide member 820 side, and a decoration member 860 that is disposed below the partition member 840 and sandwiches the substrate member 850 between the partition member 840 and the light guide member 820 are mainly provided. It is formed.
区画部材８４０は、光を透過しにくい配色（本実施形態では黒色の）の可撓性材料から形成されており、上面視横長矩形状に形成されると共に、下面側（図９０（ａ）下側）の一面が開放する箱状体に形成される。区画部材８４０は、上面側の一面を形成するベース部材８４７に、その板厚方向（図９０（ａ）上下方向）に貫通して形成される第１開口８４１及び第２開口８４２と、その第１開口８４１及び第２開口８４２に沿って下面側（箱状に形成された内側の底面）に凹設される複数の凹部８４３と、第１開口８４１及び第２開口８４３に沿って立設される複数の立設部８４４とを備える。なお、区画部材８４０の詳細な説明は後述する。
The partition member 840 is made of a flexible color material (black in this embodiment) that hardly transmits light, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from above, and the bottom surface (lower side in FIG. 90A). It is formed into a box-like body that is open on one side. The partition member 840 has a first opening 841 and a second opening 842 formed through the base member 847 forming one surface on the upper surface side in the plate thickness direction (vertical direction in FIG. 90 (a)), and the first opening 841. A plurality of recesses 843 recessed along the first opening 841 and the second opening 842 on the lower surface side (inner bottom surface formed in a box shape), and standing along the first opening 841 and the second opening 843. A plurality of standing portions 844. A detailed description of the partition member 840 will be described later.
第１導光部材８１０は、光を透過可能な透明の可撓性材料から形成されており、正面視扇状の板状体に形成される。第１導光部材８１０は、区画部材８４０側（図９０（ａ）下側）の端部にベース部分８４７の上面と平行に形成される端面８１１と、背面側（第２導光部材８２０側（図９０（ａ）紙面奥側））に凹凸を連ねて形成される乱反射部８１３と、端面８１１側の背面に突出する突出部８１４とを主に備えて形成される。
The first light guide member 810 is formed of a transparent flexible material that can transmit light, and is formed in a fan-like plate-like body in front view. The first light guide member 810 includes an end surface 811 formed in parallel with the upper surface of the base portion 847 at the end on the partition member 840 side (the lower side in FIG. 90A), and the back side (the second light guide member 820 side). (FIG. 90 (a) on the back side of the paper surface)) is mainly provided with an irregular reflection portion 813 formed by connecting the projections and depressions and a protrusion 814 protruding on the back surface on the end surface 811 side.
端面８１１は、区画部材８４０（ベース部材８４７）の下面に配設される基板部材８５０のＬＥＤ８５２から照射される光を第１導光部材８１０の内部に入射させる端面であり、ＬＥＤ８５２の照射方向と直交する。
The end surface 811 is an end surface for allowing light emitted from the LED 852 of the substrate member 850 disposed on the lower surface of the partition member 840 (base member 847) to enter the inside of the first light guide member 810, and the irradiation direction of the LED 852 Orthogonal.
また、端面８１１には、光の入射方向に略円弧状の入射面８１２が凹設される。入射面８１２の湾曲形状により、端面８１１から入射される光の進行方向を端面８１１の延設方向（図９０（ａ）左右方向）に拡散しやすくできる。なお、入射面８１２の詳しい説明は後述する。
In addition, a substantially arc-shaped incident surface 812 is recessed in the end surface 811 in the light incident direction. Due to the curved shape of the incident surface 812, the traveling direction of light incident from the end surface 811 can be easily diffused in the extending direction of the end surface 811 (the left-right direction in FIG. 90 (a)). A detailed description of the incident surface 812 will be described later.
乱反射部８１３は、背面の一部に凹凸を連ねて形成される。これにより、端面８１１から入射されたＬＥＤ８５２の光を乱反射部８１３により乱反射させることができる。従って、乱反射部８１３により反射された光を、遊技者側に照射することができる。
The irregular reflection portion 813 is formed by connecting unevenness to a part of the back surface. Thereby, the light of the LED 852 incident from the end surface 811 can be diffusely reflected by the irregular reflection portion 813. Therefore, it is possible to irradiate the player side with the light reflected by the irregular reflection portion 813.
なお、本実施形態における乱反射部８１３は、数字の「７」を模した形状に形成されており、その数字「７」を左右方向に一部が重なる様態で３つ並設する形状に形成される。よって、第１導光部材８１０にＬＥＤ８５２の光を入射させることで、第１導光部材８１０に「７７７」の発光をさせることができる。
Note that the irregular reflection portion 813 in the present embodiment is formed in a shape simulating the number “7”, and is formed in a shape in which three of the number “7” are arranged side by side in a manner in which they partially overlap in the left-right direction. The Therefore, by allowing the light of the LED 852 to enter the first light guide member 810, the first light guide member 810 can emit “777”.
突出部８１４は、第１導光部材８１０の端面８１１側（図９０（ａ）下側）に、端面８１１と所定の距離を隔てた位置に形成される。突出部８１４は、第１導光部材８１０と区画部材８４０とを締結固定するための締結板であり、突出部８１４の下面と区画部材８４０の上面とを当接させた状態で、突出部８１４に上下方向に貫通して形成される貫通孔８１４ａを介してネジを区画部材８４０に円形状に凹設形成される締結孔８４５に締結することで、第１導光部材８１０と区画部材８４０とを締結固定できる。
The protruding portion 814 is formed on the end surface 811 side (the lower side in FIG. 90A) of the first light guide member 810 at a position separated from the end surface 811 by a predetermined distance. The protrusion 814 is a fastening plate for fastening and fixing the first light guide member 810 and the partition member 840, and the protrusion 814 is in contact with the lower surface of the protrusion 814 and the upper surface of the partition member 840. The first light guide member 810 and the partition member 840 are fastened to a fastening hole 845 formed in a circular recess in the partition member 840 through a through-hole 814a formed through the top and bottom of the first light guide member 810 and the partition member 840. Can be fastened.
第２導光部材８２０は、光を透過可能な透明の可撓性材料から形成されており、第１導光部材８１０の背面側（図９０（ａ）紙面奥側）に配設される。即ち、第２導光部材８２０は、第１導光部材８１０と板厚方向に重なる状態で配設され、第１導光部材８１０を介して第２導光部材８２０を遊技者に視認させることができる。
The second light guide member 820 is formed of a transparent flexible material that can transmit light, and is disposed on the back side of the first light guide member 810 (FIG. 90A, the back side of the paper surface). That is, the second light guide member 820 is disposed so as to overlap the first light guide member 810 in the thickness direction, and allows the player to visually recognize the second light guide member 820 via the first light guide member 810. Can do.
第２導光部材８２０は、区画部材８４０側（図９０（ａ）下側）の端部にベース部分８４７の上面）の端部にベース部分８４７の上面と平行な直線に形成される端面８２１と、背面（図９０（ａ）紙面奥側）に凹凸を連ねて形成される乱反射部８２３と、端面８２１側の背面から背面に突出する突出部８２４とを主に備えて形成される。
The second light guide member 820 has an end surface 821 formed in a straight line parallel to the upper surface of the base portion 847 at the end of the partition member 840 side (the lower surface in FIG. 90A) and the upper surface of the base portion 847. And an irregular reflection portion 823 formed by connecting irregularities on the back surface (FIG. 90 (a), the back side in FIG. 90), and a protrusion 824 that protrudes from the back surface on the end surface 821 side to the back surface.
端面８２１は、区画部材８４０（ベース部材８４７）の下面に配設される基板部材８５０のＬＥＤ８５２から照射される光を第２導光部材８２０の内部に入射させる面であり、ＬＥＤ８５２の照射方向と直交する。
The end surface 821 is a surface on which light irradiated from the LED 852 of the substrate member 850 disposed on the lower surface of the partition member 840 (base member 847) is incident on the inside of the second light guide member 820, and the irradiation direction of the LED 852 Orthogonal.
また、端面８２１には、第１導光部材８１０と同様に、光の入射方向に略円弧状に凹設される入射面８２３が形成される。入射面８２３の湾曲形状により、端面８２１から入射される光の進行方向を端面８２１の延設方向（図９０（ａ）左右方向）に拡散しやすくできる。なお、入射面８２３の詳しい説明は後述する。
Similarly to the first light guide member 810, an incident surface 823 that is recessed in a substantially arc shape in the light incident direction is formed on the end surface 821. Due to the curved shape of the incident surface 823, the traveling direction of the light incident from the end surface 821 can be easily diffused in the extending direction of the end surface 821 (the left-right direction in FIG. 90A). A detailed description of the incident surface 823 will be described later.
なお、第２導光部材８２０は、その外形が第１導光部材８１０の外形よりもやや大きく形成されると共に、第１導光部材８１０の端面８１１と第２導光部材８２０の端面８２１とが同一の高さ位置（図９０（ａ）の上下方向位置）に設定される。これにより、第２導光部材８２０の延設方向の両端面および上面を第１導光部材８１０を介さずに遊技者に視認させることができる（図２参照）。
The outer shape of the second light guide member 820 is slightly larger than the outer shape of the first light guide member 810, and the end surface 811 of the first light guide member 810 and the end surface 821 of the second light guide member 820 are formed. Are set at the same height position (vertical direction position in FIG. 90A). Thereby, the player can visually recognize both end surfaces and the upper surface in the extending direction of the second light guide member 820 without passing through the first light guide member 810 (see FIG. 2).
乱反射部８２３は、背面の一部に凹凸を連ねて形成される。これにより、端面８２１から入射されたＬＥＤ８５２の光を乱反射部８２２により乱反射させることができる。従って、乱反射部８２２により反射された光を、遊技者側に照射することができる。
The irregular reflection part 823 is formed by concaving and convexing part of the back surface. Thereby, the light of the LED 852 incident from the end face 821 can be diffusely reflected by the irregular reflection portion 822. Therefore, it is possible to irradiate the player side with the light reflected by the irregular reflection unit 822.
なお、本実施形態における乱反射部８２２は、第１実施形態と同様に数字の「７」を模した形状に形成されており、その数字「７」を左右方向に３つ並設する形状に形成される。よって、遊技者に、第１導光部材８１０の数字「７７７」と第２導光部材８２０の数字「７７７」とを前後に重ねた状態に視認させることができる。
In addition, the irregular reflection part 822 in this embodiment is formed in a shape imitating the number “7” as in the first embodiment, and is formed in a shape in which three “7” are juxtaposed in the left-right direction. Is done. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the number “777” of the first light guide member 810 and the number “777” of the second light guide member 820 in a state where they are overlapped.
突出部８２４は、第２導光部材８２０の端面８２１側に、端面８２１と所定の距離を隔てた位置に形成される。突出部８２４は、第２導光部材８２０と区画部材８４０とを締結固定するための締結板であり、突出部８２４に上下方向に貫通して形成される貫通孔８２４ａを介してネジを区画部材８４０に円形状に貫通形成される締結孔８４６に締結することで、第２導光部材８２０と区画部材８４０とを締結固定できる。
The protruding portion 824 is formed on the end surface 821 side of the second light guide member 820 at a position separated from the end surface 821 by a predetermined distance. The projecting portion 824 is a fastening plate for fastening and fixing the second light guide member 820 and the partition member 840, and screws are partitioned through the through-hole 824 a formed through the projecting portion 824 in the vertical direction. The second light guide member 820 and the partition member 840 can be fastened and fixed by fastening to a fastening hole 846 that is formed in a circular shape through the 840.
覆設部材８３０は、光を透過可能な可撓性材料から形成されると共に、正面視において第２導光部材８２０よりも所定量大きい外形形状に形成される。また、覆設部材８３０は、第２導光部材８２０よりも光の透過率が小さい黒色の透明材料から形成される。
The covering member 830 is formed of a flexible material that can transmit light, and has an outer shape that is larger by a predetermined amount than the second light guide member 820 in a front view. The covering member 830 is formed of a black transparent material having a light transmittance smaller than that of the second light guide member 820.
覆設部材８３０は、正面視における外縁部に正面側に立設される壁部８３１と、背面の下端から背面側に突出する突出部８３２とを主に備えて形成される。
The covering member 830 is mainly provided with a wall portion 831 erected on the front side at an outer edge portion in front view, and a protruding portion 832 that protrudes from the lower end of the back surface to the back surface side.
壁部８３１は、その内側面が第２導光部材８２０の正面視における外形形状と略同一に形成されると共に、その立設寸法が第２導光部材８２０の板厚寸法と略同一に設定される。これにより、覆設部材８３０が第２導光部材８２０の背面に当接した状態にされると壁部８３１の内側に第２導光部材８２０が配設される。
The wall 831 has an inner surface formed substantially the same as the outer shape of the second light guide member 820 when viewed from the front, and its standing dimension is set substantially the same as the plate thickness of the second light guide member 820. Is done. Accordingly, when the covering member 830 is brought into contact with the back surface of the second light guide member 820, the second light guide member 820 is disposed inside the wall portion 831.
ここで、上述したように第２導光部材８２０は、第１導光部材８１０よりもその外形が大きく形成される。そのため、第１導光部材８１０と第２導光部材８２０とを後述するＬＥＤ８５２により、同等の光量で発光させるためには、第２導光部材８２０に第１導光部材８１０よりも多くの光を入射させる必要があった。
Here, as described above, the outer shape of the second light guide member 820 is larger than that of the first light guide member 810. Therefore, in order to cause the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 to emit light with the same amount of light by the LED 852 described later, the second light guide member 820 has more light than the first light guide member 810. Needed to be incident.
これに対し、本実施形態では、第２導光部材８２０の背面側に覆設部材８３０が配設されるので、第２導光部材８２０に入射した光を覆設部材８３０側に抜け出にくくできる。よって、第２導光部材８２０に入射した光を遊技者側に出射させやすくできる。
On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the covering member 830 is disposed on the back side of the second light guide member 820, it is difficult for light incident on the second light guide member 820 to escape to the covering member 830 side. . Therefore, the light incident on the second light guide member 820 can be easily emitted to the player side.
従って、後述するＬＥＤ８５２の光を同等の光量で第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０に入射させた際に、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０から遊技者側に発光される光量を同等にできる。その結果、大きさの異なる第１導光部材８１０と第２導光部材８２０とのＬＥＤ８５２の光量を同一にすると共に、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０から遊技者側（正面側（図９０（ａ）手前方向））への発光を少なくできる。
Therefore, when the light of the LED 852 described later is incident on the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 with the same amount of light, the player guides the light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 to the player side. The amount of light emitted can be made equal. As a result, the light amounts of the LEDs 852 of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 having different sizes are made the same, and the player side (front view) from the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820. Light emission to the side (FIG. 90 (a) front side) can be reduced.
突出部８３２は、覆設部材８３０の背面の下縁部から突出して形成される。突出部８３２は、覆設部材８３０を区画部材８４０と締結するための締結板であり、第２導光部材８２０が覆設部材８３０の正面と当接する状態で、突出部８３２の下面が、第２導光部材８２０の突出部８２４の上面と当接する。
The protruding portion 832 is formed to protrude from the lower edge portion of the back surface of the covering member 830. The protruding portion 832 is a fastening plate for fastening the covering member 830 to the partition member 840, and the lower surface of the protruding portion 832 is the first light guide member 820 in contact with the front surface of the covering member 830. 2 Abuts with the upper surface of the protrusion 824 of the light guide member 820.
また、突出部８３２には、上下方向に貫通する貫通孔８３２ａが形成される。これにより、第２導光部材８２０を区画部材８４０に締結する際に、ネジを貫通孔８３２ａを介して締結することで、覆設部材８３０と第２導光部材８２０とを同時に区画部材８４０に締結固定できる。
Further, the protruding portion 832 is formed with a through hole 832a penetrating in the vertical direction. Accordingly, when the second light guide member 820 is fastened to the partition member 840, the covering member 830 and the second light guide member 820 are simultaneously turned into the partition member 840 by fastening the screw through the through hole 832a. Can be fastened.
即ち、覆設部材８３０の貫通孔８３２ａと、第２導光部材８２０の貫通孔８２４ａと、区画部材８４０の締結孔８４６とは、軸が同一直線上に形成されており、ネジを貫通孔８３２ａ及び貫通孔８２４ａを挿通して締結孔８４６に螺合することで、覆設部材８３０及び第２導光部材８２０を区画部材８４０に締結固定することができる。
That is, the through-hole 832a of the covering member 830, the through-hole 824a of the second light guide member 820, and the fastening hole 846 of the partition member 840 are formed on the same straight line, and the screw is inserted in the through-hole 832a. Further, the covering member 830 and the second light guide member 820 can be fastened and fixed to the partition member 840 by being inserted into the through hole 824a and screwed into the fastening hole 846.
基板部材８５０は、上面視横長矩形の板状体から形成され、光を照射できるＬＥＤ８５２を複数個区画部材８４０（ベース部材８４７）側（図９０（ａ）上側）に備えて形成される。また、基板部材８５０は、上面視における外形が区画部材８４０の下側の開口部分の内形形状よりも小さく形成されており、区画部材８４０の内側（ベース部材８４７の下側）部分に配設される。
The substrate member 850 is formed from a plate-like body that is horizontally long when viewed from above, and includes a plurality of LEDs 852 that can irradiate light on the partition member 840 (base member 847) side (upper side in FIG. 90A). Further, the substrate member 850 is formed so that the outer shape in a top view is smaller than the inner shape of the lower opening portion of the partition member 840, and is disposed inside the partition member 840 (below the base member 847). Is done.
ＬＥＤ８５２は、第１開口部８４２及び第２開口部８４３と対向する位置に配置されており、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射した光を第１開口部８４２及び第２開口部８４３を介して第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０に照射することができる。なお、ＬＥＤ８５２の配置位置についての詳しい説明は後述する。
The LED 852 is disposed at a position facing the first opening 842 and the second opening 843, and the first light guide member 810 is irradiated with light emitted from the LED 852 via the first opening 842 and the second opening 843. In addition, the second light guide member 820 can be irradiated. A detailed description of the arrangement position of the LED 852 will be described later.
装飾部材８６０は、正面側に立設する装飾板８６１を備える側面視略Ｌ字に形成され、区画部材８４０の下面に連結される。装飾板８６１は、区画部材８４０の前方に位置する大きさに設定される。これにより、区画部材８４０及び装飾部材８６０の対向間に基板部材８５０を配設できると共に、装飾板８６１により区画部材８４０を遊技者側から視認しにくくできる。
The decorative member 860 is formed in a substantially L shape in a side view including a decorative plate 861 erected on the front side, and is connected to the lower surface of the partition member 840. The decorative plate 861 is set to a size located in front of the partition member 840. Thereby, the board member 850 can be disposed between the partition member 840 and the decoration member 860 facing each other, and the partition member 840 can be hardly seen from the player side by the decoration plate 861.
次いで、図９３を参照して、区画部材８４０について詳細な説明をする。図９３（ａ）は、区画部材８４０の正面図であり、図９３（ｂ）は、図９３（ａ）の矢印ＸＣＩＩＩｂ方向視における区画部材８４０の上面図であり、図９３（ｃ）は、図９３（ａ）の矢印ＸＣＩＩＩｃ方向視における区画部材８４０の下面図である。
Next, the partition member 840 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 93 (a) is a front view of the partition member 840, FIG. 93 (b) is a top view of the partition member 840 in the direction of the arrow XCIIIb in FIG. 93 (a), and FIG. It is a bottom view of the division member 840 in the arrow XCIIIc direction view of Fig.93 (a).
図９３に示すように、区画部材８４０は、その上面視略矩形に形成されており、その短手方向一側（図９３（ｂ）下側）の端面と短手方向他側（図９３（ｂ）上側）の端面とが、パチンコ機１０の正面に対して平行に形成される。
As shown in FIG. 93, the partition member 840 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above, and has an end surface on one side in the short direction (lower side in FIG. 93 (b)) and the other side in the short direction (FIG. 93 ( b) The upper end surface is formed in parallel to the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.
上述したように、ベース部材８４７は、区画部材８４０の上面側（図９３（ａ）上面側）の一面を形成する。よって、ベース部材８４７は、上面視矩形状に形成される。なお、ベース部材８４７には、第１開口８４１，第２開口８４２，凹部８４３，立設部８４４及び締結孔８４５，８４６が形成される。
As described above, the base member 847 forms one surface of the upper surface side (the upper surface side in FIG. 93A) of the partition member 840. Therefore, the base member 847 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from above. The base member 847 is formed with a first opening 841, a second opening 842, a recess 843, a standing part 844 and fastening holes 845, 846.
また、区画部材８４０は、上述した第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の端面８１１，８２１までの空間をベース部材８４７と区画する凹部８４７を下面側（図９３（ｃ）紙面手前側）に備える。
Further, the partition member 840 has a concave portion 847 that partitions the space from the end surfaces 811 and 821 of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 to the base member 847 on the lower surface side (FIG. To the side).
第１開口８４１は、区画部材８４０（ベース部材８４７）に区画部材８４０の長手方向（図９３（ｂ）左右方向）に延設して貫通形成されると共に、長手方向一端側（図９３（ｂ）左側）から長手方向他端側（図９３（ｂ）右側）に向かって短手方向一側（図９３（ｂ）下側）に傾斜して形成される。
The first opening 841 extends through the partition member 840 (base member 847) in the longitudinal direction of the partition member 840 (left and right direction in FIG. 93 (b)) and is formed at one end in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 93 (b)). ) From the left side to the other end side in the longitudinal direction (right side in FIG. 93 (b)), and is inclined to one side in the lateral direction (lower side in FIG. 93 (b)).
第１開口８４１は、開口内側の短手方向の対向間寸法Ｌ１（図９３（ｂ）参照）が、第１導光部材８１０の板厚寸法よりも大きく設定される。また、第２開口８４２は、開口内側の短手方向の対向間寸法Ｌ２（図９３（ｂ）参照）が、第２導光部材８２０の板厚寸法よりも大きく設定される。
The first opening 841 is set such that the facing dimension L1 (see FIG. 93B) in the short direction inside the opening is larger than the plate thickness dimension of the first light guide member 810. Further, the second opening 842 is set such that the facing distance L2 (see FIG. 93 (b)) in the short direction inside the opening is larger than the plate thickness dimension of the second light guide member 820.
立設部８４４は、第１開口８４１の短手方向（対向間寸法Ｌ１の方向）の両端の縁部および第２開口８４２の短手方向の両端（対向間寸法Ｌ２の方向）の両端の縁部に沿って重力方向上方（図９３（ａ）上方）に区画部材８４０（ベース部材８４７）から立設される。立設部８４４は、第１開口８４１を介した対向間と第２開口８４２を介した対向間との間に第１導光部材８１０及び８２０を挟持する壁部である。
The standing portion 844 has edges at both ends in the short direction of the first opening 841 (direction L1 in the facing direction) and edges at both ends in the short direction of the second opening 842 (direction L2 in the facing direction). It is erected from the partition member 840 (base member 847) above the portion in the direction of gravity (upward in FIG. 93 (a)). The standing portion 844 is a wall portion that sandwiches the first light guide members 810 and 820 between the facing portion via the first opening 841 and the facing portion via the second opening 842.
上述したように、対向間寸法Ｌ１と対向間寸法Ｌ２とのそれぞれは、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０のそれぞれの板厚寸法よりも大きく設定されるので、第１開口８４１には、第１導光部材８１０の端面８１１が、第２開口８４２には、第２導光部材８２０の端面８２１が、挿入して配設される。
As described above, each of the facing dimension L1 and the facing dimension L2 is set larger than the plate thickness dimension of each of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and thus the first opening 841. The end surface 811 of the first light guide member 810 is inserted into the second opening 842, and the end surface 821 of the second light guide member 820 is inserted into the second opening 842.
凹部８４３は、底面視略矩形状に凹設されると共に、その一部が第１開口８４１又は第２開口８４２と重なる位置に形成される。凹部８４３は、第１開口８４１又は第２開口８４２の短手方向の中間位置（対向間寸法Ｌ１，Ｌ２の中間位置）における直線上に、凹部８４３の短手方向（図９３（ｃ）左右方向）中間位置および長手方向（図９３（ｃ）上下方向）中間位置が設定される。これにより、凹部８４３は、第１開口８４１又は第２開口８４２の長手方向（図９３（ｃ）上下方向）両側で同一の形状に分割して配置される。
The recess 843 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the bottom, and a part of the recess 843 is formed at a position overlapping the first opening 841 or the second opening 842. The concave portion 843 is formed on the straight line at the intermediate position in the short direction of the first opening 841 or the second opening 842 (intermediate position between the opposing dimensions L1 and L2), and in the short direction of the concave portion 843 (FIG. ) An intermediate position and a longitudinal direction (FIG. 93 (c) vertical direction) intermediate position are set. Thereby, the recessed part 843 is divided | segmented and arrange | positioned in the same shape on both sides of the longitudinal direction (FIG. 93 (c) up-down direction) of the 1st opening 841 or the 2nd opening 842. FIG.
また、凹部８４３は、第１開口８４１又は第２開口８４２に一端が連結される短手方向（図９３（ｃ）左右方向）に一対形成される第２側壁８４３ｂと、その一対の第２側壁８４３ｂの他端同士が連結される第１側壁８４３ａとを備える。
The recess 843 includes a pair of second side walls 843b formed in the short side direction (FIG. 93 (c) left and right direction) whose one end is connected to the first opening 841 or the second opening 842, and the pair of second side walls. 843b is provided with a first side wall 843a to which the other ends of 843b are connected.
第１側壁８４３ａは、区画部材８４０の長手方向（図９３（ｃ）左右方向）とその延設方向が平行に形成される。第２側壁８４３ｂは、区画部材８４０の短手方向（図９３（ｃ）上下方向）とその延設方向が平行に形成される。
The first side wall 843a is formed so that the longitudinal direction of the partition member 840 (the left-right direction in FIG. 93 (c)) and the extending direction thereof are parallel to each other. The second side wall 843b is formed so that the transverse direction of the partition member 840 (the vertical direction in FIG. 93 (c)) and the extending direction thereof are parallel to each other.
上述したように、第１開口８４１及び第２開口８４２は、区画部材８４０の短手方向（図９３（ｃ）上下方向）の端面に対して傾斜して形成されるので、凹部８４３の第１側壁８４３ａは、第１開口８４１及び第２開口８４２の延設方向に対して傾斜して形成される。これにより、上述した基板部材８５０のＬＥＤ８５２から照射された光を第１開口８４１及び第２開口８４２の延設方向に拡散しやすくできる。なお、光の進む態様についての詳しい説明は後述する。
As described above, the first opening 841 and the second opening 842 are formed to be inclined with respect to the end surface in the short direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 93 (c)) of the partition member 840. The side wall 843 a is formed to be inclined with respect to the extending direction of the first opening 841 and the second opening 842. Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 852 of the substrate member 850 described above can be easily diffused in the extending direction of the first opening 841 and the second opening 842. A detailed description of how light travels will be given later.
次いで、図９４を参照して、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０と第１開口８４１及び第２開口８４２との関係について説明する。図９４（ａ）は、発光ユニット８００の下面図であり、図９４（ｂ）は、図９４（ａ）の範囲ＸＣＩＶｂの部分拡大図である。
Next, the relationship between the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 and the first opening 841 and the second opening 842 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 (a) is a bottom view of the light emitting unit 800, and FIG. 94 (b) is a partially enlarged view of a range XCIVb in FIG. 94 (a).
なお、図９４（ａ）及び図９４（ｂ）では、装飾部材８６０及び基板部材８５０が取り外された状態が図示されると共に、ＬＥＤ８５２が破線で図示される。また、図９４（ｂ）では、第１開口８４１及び第２開口８４２の延設方向に仮想線ＫＳ１の符号を、区画部材８４０の短手方向（図９４（ｂ）上下方向）に仮想線ＫＳ２の符号を、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の板厚方向に仮想線ＫＳ３の符号を、区画部材８４０の長手方向（図９４（ｂ）左右方向）に仮想線ＫＳ４の符号を、それぞれ付して図示する。
In FIGS. 94A and 94B, a state where the decorative member 860 and the board member 850 are removed is illustrated, and the LED 852 is illustrated by a broken line. In FIG. 94B, the imaginary line KS1 is indicated in the extending direction of the first opening 841 and the second opening 842, and the imaginary line KS2 is indicated in the short direction of the partition member 840 (the vertical direction in FIG. 94B). Of the imaginary line KS3 in the plate thickness direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and the imaginary line KS4 in the longitudinal direction of the partition member 840 (FIG. 94 (b) left and right direction). Are attached and illustrated.
図９４に示すように、第１開口８４１の内縁には、第１導光部材８１０の端面８１１が配置され、第２開口８４２の内縁には、第２導光部材８２０の端面８２１が配置される。また、ＬＥＤ８５２は、端面８１１の入射面８１２及び端面８２１の入射面８２２と対向する位置に配置される。ＬＥＤ８５２の光源の中心は、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の板厚方向（仮想線ＫＳ３方向）中間位置と対向する位置に設定されると共に、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の凹部８１２，８２２の仮想線ＫＳ１方向の中間位置と対向する位置に設定される。
As shown in FIG. 94, the end surface 811 of the first light guide member 810 is disposed at the inner edge of the first opening 841, and the end surface 821 of the second light guide member 820 is disposed at the inner edge of the second opening 842. The The LED 852 is disposed at a position facing the incident surface 812 of the end surface 811 and the incident surface 822 of the end surface 821. The center of the light source of the LED 852 is set at a position opposite to the intermediate position of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 in the plate thickness direction (virtual line KS3 direction). 2 It is set at a position facing the intermediate position of the concave portions 812 and 822 of the light guide member 820 in the virtual line KS1 direction.
入射面８１２，８２２は、端面８１１，８２１との連結（境界）部分が、仮想線ＫＳ２（区画部材８４０の短手方向）と平行に設定される。また、その左右方向両端の境界は、左右方向（仮想線ＫＳ４方向）に対向する２つの第２側壁８４３ｂの内側に設定されると共に、ＬＥＤ８５２の光軸方向の対向間の左右方向外側に設定される。
The incident surfaces 812 and 822 are set so that the connection (boundary) portions with the end surfaces 811 and 821 are parallel to the virtual line KS2 (short direction of the partition member 840). Further, the boundary between both ends in the left-right direction is set inside the two second side walls 843b facing in the left-right direction (the imaginary line KS4 direction), and is set outside in the left-right direction between the oppositions of the LEDs 852 in the optical axis direction. The
凹部８４３は、第１側壁８４３ａ及び第２側壁８４３ｂの延設方向が、仮想線ＫＳ４及び仮想線ＫＳ２と平行に形成される。即ち、各導光部材８１０，８２０の正面（図９４（ａ）上側の面）に対して非平行且つ非直交とされる。
The recess 843 is formed such that the extending direction of the first side wall 843a and the second side wall 843b is parallel to the virtual line KS4 and the virtual line KS2. In other words, the light guide members 810 and 820 are not parallel and non-orthogonal to the front surface (the upper surface in FIG. 94A).
ここで、光透過性材料から板状に形成される光透過部材（第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０）と、その光透過部材の側端面へ光を照射する光照射手段とを備えた遊技機が知られている。光透過部材には、複数のドット（乱反射部８１３，８２３）が凹設されており、側端面（端面８１１，８２１）から入射された光をドットで反射させることで、正面から出射させることができる。
Here, a light transmissive member (first light guide member 810 and second light guide member 820) formed in a plate shape from a light transmissive material, and light irradiating means for irradiating light to a side end surface of the light transmissive member; A gaming machine equipped with is known. A plurality of dots (irregular reflection portions 813 and 823) are recessed in the light transmitting member, and light incident from the side end surfaces (end surfaces 811 and 821) is reflected by the dots so that it can be emitted from the front. it can.
しかしながら、上述した従来の遊技機では、光透過部材へ入射される光が光照射手段（ＬＥＤ８５２）の光軸に沿う領域に偏りやすいという問題点があり、光透過部材の照度を均一とすることが困難であった。即ち、光照射手段から光透過部材の側端面に入射される光が光照射手段の光軸に沿う方向に集中するため、光透過部材の正面に沿って広がる方向（光透過部材の板厚方向と光照射手段の光軸方向との両者にそれぞれ直交する方向（仮想線ＫＳ１の方向））へ光が進行し難くかった。
However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem that light incident on the light transmitting member is easily biased to a region along the optical axis of the light irradiating means (LED 852), and the illuminance of the light transmitting member is made uniform. It was difficult. That is, since the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmissive member from the light irradiating means is concentrated in the direction along the optical axis of the light irradiating means, the direction spreading along the front surface of the light transmissive member (the thickness direction of the light transmissive member) It was difficult for light to travel in the direction (the direction of the imaginary line KS1) perpendicular to both the optical axis direction and the optical axis direction of the light irradiation means.
これに対し、本実施形態によれば、ＬＥＤ８５２から第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の端面８１１，８２１までの空間を区画する区画部材８４０を備え、区画部材８４０は、空間を区画する内壁（凹部８４３の第１側壁８４３ａ、第２側壁８４３ｂ）が、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の正面に対して非平行かつ非直交とされるので、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射され区画部材８４０の内壁（凹部８４３の第１側壁８４３ａ、第２側壁８４３ｂ）で反射した光を、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の正面に沿って広がる方向（第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の板厚方向とＬＥＤ８５２の光軸方向との両者にそれぞれ直交する方向（仮想線ＫＳ１方向））へ進行させやすくできる。
On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the partition member 840 that partitions the space from the LED 852 to the end surfaces 811 and 821 of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 is provided. Since the partitioning inner walls (the first side wall 843a and the second side wall 843b of the recess 843) are non-parallel and non-orthogonal with respect to the front surfaces of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, irradiation from the LED 852 is performed. The light reflected by the inner walls of the partition member 840 (the first side wall 843a and the second side wall 843b of the recess 843) spreads along the front of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (first guide). It is possible to easily advance the light member 810 and the second light guide member 820 in the plate thickness direction and the optical axis direction of the LED 852 (directions imaginary line KS1).
よって、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０へ入射される光がＬＥＤ８５２の光軸に沿う領域に偏ることを抑制できる。その結果、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の照度を均一にしやすくできる。
Therefore, it can suppress that the light which injects into the 1st light guide member 810 and the 2nd light guide member 820 is biased to the area | region which follows the optical axis of LED852. As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform.
即ち、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０を、第１側壁８４３ａ及び第２側壁８４３ｂと傾斜する方向（仮想線ＫＳ１方向）に配置することで、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０に入射する光を第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の延設方向（仮想線ＫＳ１方向）に拡散しやすくできる。
That is, the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 are disposed in a direction (the imaginary line KS1 direction) inclined with respect to the first side wall 843a and the second side wall 843b. The light incident on the second light guide member 820 can be easily diffused in the extending direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (the direction of the imaginary line KS1).
詳しく説明すると、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射される光のうち第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の入射面８１２，８２２に直接照射される光は、後述するように入射面８１２の湾曲形状により入射時に仮想線ＫＳ３方向に拡散される。また、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射された光のうち第１側壁８４３ａに出射される光は、第１側壁８４３ａに反射されて入射面８１２，８２２側に照射される（進行する）。よって、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の延設方向（仮想線ＫＳ１方向）には拡散し難い。
More specifically, the light directly irradiated on the incident surfaces 812 and 822 of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 among the light irradiated from the LED 852 is due to the curved shape of the incident surface 812 as described later. It is diffused in the direction of the virtual line KS3 at the time of incidence. Of the light emitted from the LED 852, the light emitted to the first side wall 843a is reflected by the first side wall 843a and irradiated (progresses) toward the incident surfaces 812 and 822. Therefore, it is difficult to diffuse in the extending direction (the imaginary line KS1 direction) of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820.
ＬＥＤ８５２から照射された光のうち第２側壁８４３ｂに出射される光は、図９４（ｂ）の矢印Ｈ１に示すように第２側壁８４３ｂにより反射されて第１側壁８４３ａ側に照射される（進行する）。第２側壁８４３ｂから第１側壁８４３ａに照射された光は、第１側壁８４３ａにより反射されることで、第１導光部材８１０又は第２導光部材８２０側に反射される。
Of the light emitted from the LED 852, the light emitted to the second side wall 843b is reflected by the second side wall 843b and irradiated to the first side wall 843a side as shown by the arrow H1 in FIG. To do). The light emitted from the second side wall 843b to the first side wall 843a is reflected by the first side wall 843a and is reflected to the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820 side.
ここで、従来の第２側壁８４３ｂは、第１導光部材８１０（第２導光部材８２０）の前面の延設方向（仮想線ＫＳ１方向）が、区画部材８４０の長手方向（仮想線ＫＳ２方向）と平行である。そのため、第２側壁８４３ｂ及び第１側壁８４３ａを反射した光は、第１導光部材８１０（第２導光部材８２０）の入射面８１２の仮想線ＫＳ１方向に対しての入射角度を小さくすることができなかった。従って、第１導光部材８１０（第２導光部材８２０）の延設方向（仮想線ＫＳ１方向）に光を拡散し難かった。
Here, in the conventional second side wall 843b, the extending direction of the front surface of the first light guide member 810 (second light guide member 820) (the imaginary line KS1 direction) is the longitudinal direction of the partition member 840 (the imaginary line KS2 direction). ) And parallel. Therefore, the light reflected by the second side wall 843b and the first side wall 843a reduces the incident angle of the incident surface 812 of the first light guide member 810 (second light guide member 820) with respect to the imaginary line KS1 direction. I could not. Therefore, it is difficult to diffuse light in the extending direction (the imaginary line KS1 direction) of the first light guide member 810 (second light guide member 820).
これに対し、本実施形態では、第２側壁８４３ｂ及び第１側壁８４３ａを反射した光は、第１導光部材８１０（第２導光部材８２０）の正面（図９４（ｂ）上面）の延設方向（仮想線ＫＳ１方向）が区画部材８４０に対して傾斜されることで、端面８１１，８２１への光の入射時の矢印Ｈ１の進行方向と仮想線ＫＳ１との交差角度が小さくされる。
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the light reflected by the second side wall 843b and the first side wall 843a is the extension of the front surface (upper surface in FIG. 94 (b)) of the first light guide member 810 (second light guide member 820). Since the installation direction (the direction of the imaginary line KS1) is inclined with respect to the partition member 840, the crossing angle between the traveling direction of the arrow H1 and the imaginary line KS1 when light enters the end faces 811 and 821 is reduced.
よって、端面８１１，８２１へ入射される光をより第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の前面の延設方向（仮想線ＫＳ１方向）に、拡散しやすくできる。その結果、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の照度を均一にしやすくできる。
Therefore, the light incident on the end faces 811 and 821 can be more easily diffused in the extending direction of the front surfaces of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (in the direction of the imaginary line KS1). As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform.
区画部材８４０は、ベース部材８４７の凹部８４３の内壁（第１側壁８４３ａ、第２側壁８４３ｂ）がＬＥＤ８５２から第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の端面８１１，８２１までの空間を区画するので、区画部材８４０（凹部８４３の内壁）で光を反射させて、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の板厚方向とＬＥＤ８５２の光軸とに直交する方向へ光を進行させることで、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０へ入射される光の偏りを抑制する構造を簡素化できる。よって、製品コストを削減できる。
In the partition member 840, the inner walls (first side wall 843 a and second side wall 843 b) of the recess 843 of the base member 847 partition the space from the LED 852 to the end surfaces 811 and 821 of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820. Therefore, the light is reflected by the partition member 840 (the inner wall of the recess 843), and the light travels in a direction orthogonal to the plate thickness direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 and the optical axis of the LED 852. By doing, the structure which suppresses the bias | inclination of the light which injects into the 1st light guide member 810 and the 2nd light guide member 820 can be simplified. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced.
即ち、区画部材８４０のベース部材８４７に凹部８４３を凹設するのみで第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０へ入射される光の偏りを抑制する構造を形成することができるので、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０へ入射される光の偏りを抑制する部品（例えば鏡等）を他に配設する必要がないので、その部品の分、製品コストを削減できる。
That is, a structure that suppresses the bias of light incident on the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be formed only by forming the recess 843 in the base member 847 of the partition member 840. Since there is no need to arrange other components (such as a mirror) that suppress the deviation of the light incident on the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, the product cost can be reduced by the amount of the components. .
また、上述したように、発光ユニット８００の底面視（ＬＥＤ８５２の光軸方向視）において、ベース部材８４７及び凹部８４３がそれぞれ底面視矩形に形成されると共に凹部８４３が各辺（第１側壁８４３ａ、第２側壁８４３ｂ）をベース部材８４７の各辺に対し平行とする姿勢で形成され、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０が凹部８４３に対して傾斜する姿勢で配設されるので、凹部８４３の内壁を第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の正面に対して非平行かつ非直交とすることを可能としつつ、区画部材８４０（ベース部材８４７）の成形性を確保することができる。
In addition, as described above, in the bottom view of the light emitting unit 800 (viewed in the optical axis direction of the LED 852), the base member 847 and the recess 843 are each formed in a rectangular shape in the bottom view, and the recess 843 has each side (the first side wall 843a, Since the second side wall 843b) is formed in a posture parallel to each side of the base member 847, the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 are disposed in a posture inclined with respect to the recess 843. In addition, it is possible to make the inner wall of the recess 843 non-parallel and non-orthogonal to the front surfaces of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, while ensuring the moldability of the partition member 840 (base member 847). can do.
即ち、ベース部材８４７を樹脂材料から成形する場合には、凹部８４３が各辺をベース部材８４７の各辺に対し平行とする姿勢で配設されることで、ベース部材８４７の肉厚を均等として、その分、ヒケや反り、充填不良などを抑制できる。その結果、成形性を確保できる。
That is, when the base member 847 is molded from a resin material, the concave portions 843 are arranged in a posture in which each side is parallel to each side of the base member 847, thereby making the thickness of the base member 847 uniform. Therefore, sink marks, warpage, and filling failure can be suppressed. As a result, moldability can be secured.
さらに、入射面８１２，８２２と端面８１１，８２１との連結（境界）部分は、仮想線ＫＳ２（区画部材８４０の短手方向）と平行に設定される。また、入射面８１２，８２２と端面８１１，８２１との連結（境界）部分は、左右方向（仮想線ＫＳ４方向）に対向する２つの第２側壁８４３ｂの内側に設定されると共に、ＬＥＤ８５２の光軸方向の対向間の外側に位置される。
Furthermore, the connection (boundary) portion between the incident surfaces 812 and 822 and the end surfaces 811 and 821 is set in parallel to the virtual line KS2 (short direction of the partition member 840). In addition, the connection (boundary) portion between the incident surfaces 812 and 822 and the end surfaces 811 and 821 is set inside the two second side walls 843b facing in the left-right direction (the imaginary line KS4 direction), and the optical axis of the LED 852 Located on the outside between opposite directions.
よって、凹部８４３の内側を反射した光を入射面８１２，８２２に均一に入射させることができる。即ち、入射面８１２，８２２と端面８１１，８２１との連結（境界）部分が、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の板厚方向（仮想線ＫＳ３方向）に延設される場合、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の板厚方向の一方（又は他方）の領域における入射面８１２，８２２が、仮想線ＫＳ１方向の両端のうちの一方で、凹部８４３に対しての入射領域が小さくされる。そのため、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の照度を均一にすることができない。
Therefore, the light reflected from the inside of the recess 843 can be uniformly incident on the incident surfaces 812 and 822. That is, the connection (boundary) portion between the incident surfaces 812 and 822 and the end surfaces 811 and 821 extends in the plate thickness direction (the imaginary line KS3 direction) of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820. The incident surfaces 812 and 822 in one (or the other) region of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 in the plate thickness direction are on one side of the virtual line KS1 direction with respect to the concave portion 843. All incident areas are reduced. Therefore, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 cannot be made uniform.
これに対し、本実施形態では、入射面８１２，８２２と端面８１１，８２１との連結（境界）部分は、仮想線ＫＳ２（発光ユニット８００の前後方向）と平行に設定されるので、入射面８１２，８２２の凹部に対しての入射領域を均一にすることができる。その結果、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の照度を均一にすることができる。
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the connection (boundary) portion between the incident surfaces 812 and 822 and the end surfaces 811 and 821 is set parallel to the virtual line KS2 (the front-rear direction of the light emitting unit 800). , 822 with respect to the concave portion can be made uniform. As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be made uniform.
次いで、図９５を参照して、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０と第１開口８４１及び第２開口８４２との関係について説明する。図９５（ａ）は、図９４（ａ）のＸＣＶａ−ＸＣＶａにおける発光ユニット８００の断面図であり、図９５（ｂ）は、図９５（ａ）の範囲ＸＣＶｂにおける発光ユニット８００の部分拡大図である。
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the relationship between the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 and the first opening 841 and the second opening 842 will be described. 95A is a cross-sectional view of the light emitting unit 800 in XCVa-XCVa of FIG. 94A, and FIG. 95B is a partially enlarged view of the light emitting unit 800 in the range XCVb of FIG. 95A. is there.
なお、図９５（ａ）及び図９５（ｂ）では、装飾部材８６０及び基板部材８５０が取り外された状態が図示されると共に、ＬＥＤ８５２が破線で図示される。
95 (a) and 95 (b), the state where the decorative member 860 and the board member 850 are removed is shown, and the LED 852 is shown by a broken line.
図９５に示すように、凹部８４３の第１開口８４１又は第２開口８４２を間に挟んで一対形成される。第１側壁８４３ａは、下方（図９５（ｂ）下方）から上方（図９５（ｂ）上方）に向かって区画部材８４０の短手方向（図９５（ａ）左右方向）における対向間が小さく形成される。言い変えると、第１側壁８４３ａは、上方に向かって第１導光部材８１０又は第２導光部材８２０の板厚方向（図９５（ｂ）左右方向）に傾斜して形成される。また、第１側壁８４３ａの下方（図９５（ｂ）下方）の対向間には、ＬＥＤ８５２が配設される。
As shown in FIG. 95, a pair is formed with the first opening 841 or the second opening 842 of the recess 843 interposed therebetween. The first side wall 843a is formed such that the distance between the facing portions of the partition member 840 in the short direction (FIG. 95 (a) left-right direction) is reduced from the lower side (lower side in FIG. 95 (b)) to the upper side (upper side in FIG. 95 (b)). Is done. In other words, the first side wall 843a is formed to be inclined upward in the plate thickness direction of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820 (FIG. 95 (b) left-right direction). In addition, an LED 852 is disposed between the opposing portions below the first side wall 843a (downward in FIG. 95B).
これにより、ＬＥＤ８５２が配設される側の対向間における距離を確保することができるので、ＬＥＤ８５２の光の照射による熱により、第１側壁８４３ａが蓄熱することを抑制できる。その結果、第１側壁８４３ａが蓄熱して基板部材８５０が破損することを抑制できる。
Thereby, since the distance between the facings on the side where the LEDs 852 are disposed can be secured, it is possible to suppress the first side wall 843a from accumulating heat due to the heat generated by the light irradiation of the LEDs 852. As a result, it is possible to suppress the first side wall 843a from storing heat and damaging the substrate member 850.
また、第１側壁８４３ａは傾斜して形成されるので、図９５（ｂ）の矢印Ｈ２に示すように、ＬＥＤ８５２から第１側壁８４３ａ側に照射された光を、第１側壁８４３ａに反射させた場合に、第１導光部材８１０の端面８１１側に反射させやすくすることができる。
Further, since the first side wall 843a is formed to be inclined, the light irradiated from the LED 852 to the first side wall 843a side is reflected by the first side wall 843a as shown by an arrow H2 in FIG. In this case, the light can be easily reflected toward the end surface 811 side of the first light guide member 810.
これにより、ＬＥＤ８５２の外形に対して、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の板厚寸法が小さくされる場合であっても、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の端面８１１，８２１に光を集めることができる。
Thereby, even if the plate | board thickness dimension of the 1st light guide member 810 and the 2nd light guide member 820 is made small with respect to the external shape of LED852, the 1st light guide member 810 and the 2nd light guide member 820. The light can be collected on the end faces 811 and 821 of the slab.
即ち、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の板厚寸法が小さくされる際に、ＬＥＤ８５２の外形を小さくする必要がない。従って、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の板厚寸法が小さくされる際に、光の入射量を確保できる。
That is, when the plate thickness dimensions of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 are reduced, it is not necessary to reduce the outer shape of the LED 852. Therefore, when the plate thickness dimensions of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 are reduced, the amount of incident light can be ensured.
次いで、図９６を参照して、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０と第１開口８４１及び第２開口８４２との関係について説明する。図９６（ａ）は、図９４（ａ）のＸＣＶＩａ−ＸＣＶＩａ線における発光ユニット８００の断面図であり、図９６（ｂ）は、図９６（ａ）の範囲ＸＣＶＩｂにおける発光ユニット８００の断面図である。
Next, the relationship between the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 and the first opening 841 and the second opening 842 will be described with reference to FIG. 96A is a cross-sectional view of the light emitting unit 800 taken along the line XCVIa-XCVIa in FIG. 94A, and FIG. 96B is a cross-sectional view of the light emitting unit 800 in the range XCVIb of FIG. 96A. is there.
なお、図９６（ａ）及び図９６（ｂ）では、装飾部材８６０及び基板部材８５０が取り外された状態が図示されると共に、ＬＥＤ８５２が破線で図示される。
In FIGS. 96A and 96B, the state where the decorative member 860 and the board member 850 are removed is illustrated, and the LED 852 is illustrated by a broken line.
図９６に示すように、凹部８４３の第２側壁８４３ｂは、下方（図９６（ｂ）下方）から上方（図９６（ａ）上方）に向かって区画部材８４０の長手方向（図９６（ｂ）左右方向）の対向間が小さく形成される。また、第２側壁８４３ｂの下方（図９６（ｂ）下方）の対向間には、ＬＥＤ８５２が配設される。
As shown in FIG. 96, the second side wall 843b of the recess 843 is formed in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 96 (b)) of the partition member 840 from the lower side (lower side of FIG. 96 (b)) to the upper side (FIG. 96 (a) upper side). The distance between the left and right sides is small. In addition, an LED 852 is disposed between the opposing portions below the second side wall 843b (downward in FIG. 96 (b)).
これにより、ＬＥＤ８５２が配設される側の対向間における距離を確保することができるので、ＬＥＤ８５２の光の照射による熱により第２側壁８４３ｂが蓄熱することを抑制できる。その結果、第２側壁８４３ｂが蓄熱して基板部材８５０が破損することを抑制できる。
Thereby, since the distance between the facings on the side where the LED 852 is disposed can be secured, it is possible to suppress the second side wall 843b from accumulating heat due to the heat generated by the light irradiation of the LED 852. As a result, it is possible to suppress the second side wall 843b from storing heat and damaging the substrate member 850.
また、第２側壁８４４ａは、傾斜して形成されるので、ＬＥＤ８５２から第２側壁８４３ｂ側に照射された光を、第２側壁８４４ｂに反射させた際に、第１導光部材８１０の入射面８１２側に反射させやすくできる。
In addition, since the second side wall 844a is formed to be inclined, when the light irradiated from the LED 852 to the second side wall 843b is reflected to the second side wall 844b, the incident surface of the first light guide member 810 is reflected. It can be easily reflected to the 812 side.
上述したように、ＬＥＤ８５２は、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の入射面８１２，８２２と対向する位置に配置される。これにより、図９６（ｂ）の矢印Ｈ３及び矢印Ｈ４に示すように、ＬＥＤ８５２から入射面８１２，８２２に入射される光を屈折させることで、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の延設方向（図９６（ｂ）左右方向）に光を拡散させることができる。
As described above, the LED 852 is disposed at a position facing the incident surfaces 812 and 822 of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820. Thereby, as shown by the arrow H3 and the arrow H4 in FIG. 96B, the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 are refracted by the light incident on the incident surfaces 812 and 822 from the LED 852. Can be diffused in the extending direction (FIG. 96 (b) left-right direction).
また、入射面８１２は、半円状に湾曲して形成されるので、左右方向中央部から外側に向かって、入射面８１２への光の入射角が大きくされる。これにより、ＬＥＤ８５２から入射面８１２へ直接入射される光のうち、入射面８１２の第１導光部材８１０の延設方向（図９６（ａ）左右方向）両端部分に入射される光を第１導光部材８１０の延設方向に向かう方向に拡散しやすくできる。
In addition, since the incident surface 812 is formed to be curved in a semicircular shape, the incident angle of light to the incident surface 812 is increased from the central portion in the left-right direction toward the outside. As a result, of the light that is directly incident on the incident surface 812 from the LED 852, the light that is incident on both ends of the incident surface 812 in the extending direction of the first light guide member 810 (the left-right direction in FIG. 96 (a)) is first. It can be easily diffused in a direction toward the extending direction of the light guide member 810.
よって、端面８１１，８２１へ入射される光をより第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の前面の延設方向（仮想線ＫＳ１方向）に、拡散しやすくできる。その結果、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の照度を均一にしやすくできる。
Therefore, the light incident on the end faces 811 and 821 can be more easily diffused in the extending direction of the front surfaces of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (in the direction of the imaginary line KS1). As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform.
次いで、図９７（ａ）を参照して、第６実施形態における発光ユニット８００について説明する。上記第５実施形態では、第１側壁８４３ａが仮想線ＫＳ４と平行な直線状に形成される場合を説明したが、第６実施形態では、第１側壁６８４３ａが湾曲して形成される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。
Next, a light emitting unit 800 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the first side wall 843a is formed in a straight line parallel to the virtual line KS4 has been described. However, in the sixth embodiment, the first side wall 6843a is formed to be curved. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
図９７（ａ）は、第６実施形態における発光ユニット８００の底面図である。なお、図９７（ａ）では、装飾部材８６０及び基板部材８５０が取り外された状態が図示されると共に、ＬＥＤ８５２が破線で図示される。また、図９７（ａ）では、第１開口８４１及び第２開口８４２の延設方向に仮想線ＫＳ１の符号を、区画部材８４０の短手方向（図９７（ａ）上下方向）に仮想線ＫＳ２の符号を、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の板厚方向に仮想線ＫＳ３の符号を、区画部材８４０の長手方向（図９７（ａ）左右方向）に仮想線ＫＳ４の符号を、それぞれ付して図示する。
FIG. 97A is a bottom view of the light emitting unit 800 in the sixth embodiment. 97A shows a state in which the decorative member 860 and the board member 850 are removed, and the LED 852 is shown by a broken line. In FIG. 97A, the imaginary line KS1 is denoted in the extending direction of the first opening 841 and the second opening 842, and the imaginary line KS2 is defined in the short direction of the partition member 840 (the vertical direction in FIG. 97A). Of the imaginary line KS3 in the plate thickness direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and the imaginary line KS4 in the longitudinal direction of the partition member 840 (FIG. 97 (a) left and right direction). Are attached and illustrated.
図９７（ａ）に示すように、第６実施形態における区画部材８４０の凹部６８４３は、第２側壁６８４３ｂが、仮想線ＫＳ２と平行に形成されると共に、第１側壁６８４３ａが、第１導光部材８１０又は第２導光部材８２０から離間する方向に凸となる湾曲状に形成される。
As shown in FIG. 97 (a), in the recess 6843 of the partition member 840 in the sixth embodiment, the second side wall 6843b is formed in parallel with the virtual line KS2, and the first side wall 6843a is the first light guide. It is formed in a curved shape that is convex in a direction away from the member 810 or the second light guide member 820.
第１側壁６８４３ａは、第２側壁６８４３ｂと連結される両端部分を連結する仮想線ＫＳ５が仮想線ＫＳ４と交差する角度が、仮想線ＫＳ１が仮想線ＫＳ４と交差する角度θ１（第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０が遊技盤１３（区画部材８４０）に対して前後方向に傾斜する角度）よりも大きく設定される。
The first side wall 6843a has an angle θ1 (first light guide member) at which the imaginary line KS5 that connects both ends connected to the second side wall 6843b intersects the imaginary line KS4, and the imaginary line KS1 intersects the imaginary line KS4. The angle 810 and the second light guide member 820 are set larger than the angle with respect to the game board 13 (the partition member 840) in the front-rear direction.
言い変えると、第２側壁６８４３ｂは、左右の両側で前後方向（仮想線ＫＳ２の延設方向）の長さが異なって形成されており、第１開口８４１及び第２開口８４２の前方側（図９７（ａ）上側）は前方側に位置する端部側が、第１開口８４１及び第２開口８４２の後方側（図９７（ａ）下側）は後方側に位置する端部側が、対向する第２側壁６８４３ｂよりも長く形成される。
In other words, the second side wall 6843b is formed with different lengths in the front-rear direction (the extending direction of the virtual line KS2) on both the left and right sides, and the front side of the first opening 841 and the second opening 842 (see FIG. 97 (a) upper side) is located at the front side, and the rear side of the first opening 841 and the second opening 842 (lower side in FIG. 97 (a)) is opposite to the end side located at the rear side. It is formed longer than the two side walls 6843b.
また、第１側壁６８４３ａは、同一の半径からなる湾曲状に形成される。これにより、第１側壁６８４３ａの軸を凹部６８４３の第２側壁６８４３ｂの対向間を２等分した中央位置と異なる位置に配置することができる。即ち、第１側壁６８４３ａの軸を第１導光部材８１０の延設方向（仮想線ＫＳ１の方向）に異なる位置にすることができる。
The first side wall 6843a is formed in a curved shape having the same radius. As a result, the axis of the first side wall 6843a can be arranged at a position different from the central position obtained by dividing the distance between the facing of the second side wall 6843b of the recess 6843 into two equal parts. That is, the axis of the first side wall 6843a can be set at a different position in the extending direction of the first light guide member 810 (the direction of the virtual line KS1).
これにより、区画部材８４０の短手方向（仮想線ＫＳ２方向）の一側（図９７（ａ）上側）に形成される第１側壁６８４３ａに照射される光を、その第１側壁６８４３ａの軸側（図９６（ａ）右側）に反射させることができる。一方、区画部材８４０の短手方向（仮想線ＫＳ２方向）の他側に形成される第２側壁６８４３に照射される光が、その第１側壁６８４３の軸方向（図９６（ｂ）左側）に反射させることができる。
Thereby, the light irradiated to the first side wall 6843a formed on one side (upper side in FIG. 97 (a)) of the partition member 840 in the short direction (the imaginary line KS2 direction) is converted to the axial side of the first side wall 6843a. It can be reflected (right side of FIG. 96 (a)). On the other hand, the light irradiated to the second side wall 6843 formed on the other side of the partition member 840 in the short direction (the imaginary line KS2 direction) is in the axial direction of the first side wall 6843 (left side in FIG. 96 (b)). Can be reflected.
よって、第６実施形態では、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射された光のうち第１側壁６８４３ａに照射される光を、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の延設方向（仮想線ＫＳ１方向）両外側に集めることができる。これにより、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射され、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０に入射される光を仮想線ＫＳ１方向に拡散しやすくできる。その結果、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の照度を均一にしやすくできる。
Therefore, in 6th Embodiment, the light irradiated to the 1st side wall 6843a among the lights irradiated from LED852 is the extending direction (virtual line KS1 direction) of the 1st light guide member 810 and the 2nd light guide member 820. Can be collected on both sides. Thereby, the light irradiated from the LED 852 and incident on the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily diffused in the direction of the virtual line KS1. As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform.
また、第６実施形態では、図９７（ａ）に示すように、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の入射面８１２，８２２は、端面８１１，８２１との連結（境界）部分が、仮想線ＫＳ２（発光ユニット８００の前後方向）と平行に設定される。更に、その連結（境界）部分は、左右方向（仮想線ＫＳ４方向）に対向する２つの第２側壁８４３ｂの内側に設定されると共に、ＬＥＤ８５２の光軸方向の対向間の左右方向外側に位置される。これにより、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射されて凹部８４３の内側を反射した光を第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の内部に入射させると共に、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の延設方向（仮想線ＫＳ１方向）に拡散しやすくできる。
Moreover, in 6th Embodiment, as shown to Fig.97 (a), the entrance surfaces 812 and 822 of the 1st light guide member 810 and the 2nd light guide member 820 are a connection (boundary) part with the end surfaces 811 and 821. Is set in parallel with the virtual line KS2 (the front-rear direction of the light emitting unit 800). Further, the connection (boundary) portion is set inside the two second side walls 843b facing in the left-right direction (the imaginary line KS4 direction), and is positioned outside in the left-right direction between the oppositions of the LEDs 852 in the optical axis direction. The Accordingly, the light irradiated from the LED 852 and reflected from the inside of the concave portion 843 is incident on the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 are incident. Can be easily diffused in the extending direction (the imaginary line KS1 direction).
詳しく説明すると、上述したように、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射された光のうち第１側壁６８４３ａに照射される光は、図９７（ａ）の矢印Ｈ５に示すように、第１側壁６８４３ａにより反射されて第１開口８４１又は第２開口８４２側に反射される。
More specifically, as described above, the light irradiated from the LED 852 to the first side wall 6843a is reflected by the first side wall 6843a as shown by an arrow H5 in FIG. Reflected toward the first opening 841 or the second opening 842 side.
この場合、反射された光を、第１側壁６８４３ａの湾曲形状により集光させつつ第２側壁６８４３ｂ側に進ませることができる（図９７（ａ）の矢印Ｈ４参照）ので、反射された光を入射面８１２，８２２に入射させやすくできる。
In this case, the reflected light can be advanced to the second side wall 6843b side while being condensed by the curved shape of the first side wall 6843a (see the arrow H4 in FIG. 97 (a)). It is easy to make the light incident on the incident surfaces 812 and 822.
上述したように、入射面８１２，８２２は、湾曲の凹設面に形成され（図９６（ｂ）参照）、入射面８１２，８２２に入射した光を拡散することができるので、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射される光を第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の内部に入射させると共に、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の延設方向（仮想線ＫＳ１方向）に拡散しやすくできる。
As described above, the incident surfaces 812 and 822 are formed as curved concave surfaces (see FIG. 96B), and can diffuse the light incident on the incident surfaces 812 and 822. Light enters the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 and easily diffuses in the extending direction (the imaginary line KS1 direction) of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820. it can.
第６実施形態では、ベース部材８４７（区画部材８４０）は、ＬＥＤ８５２の光軸方向視において、凹部８４３の内壁（第１側壁６８４３ａ）が凹の湾曲面として形成されるので、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射された光を凹の湾曲面で反射させることで、一方向へ集光させることができる。
In the sixth embodiment, the base member 847 (partition member 840) is irradiated from the LED 852 because the inner wall (first side wall 6843a) of the recess 843 is formed as a concave curved surface when the LED 852 is viewed in the optical axis direction. The light can be condensed in one direction by reflecting the light with the concave curved surface.
即ち、集光の方向を、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の正面に沿って広がる方向（第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の板厚方向（仮想線ＫＳ３方向）とＬＥＤ８５２の光軸方向との両者にそれぞれ直交する方向（仮想線ＫＳ１方向））に偏倚させることで、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０へ入射される光がＬＥＤ８５２の光軸に沿う領域に偏ることを抑制できる。その結果、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の照度を均一にしやすくできる。
That is, the direction of light collection is a direction that extends along the front of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (the plate thickness direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (virtual line KS3 Direction) and the direction perpendicular to both the optical axis direction of the LED 852 (the direction of the imaginary line KS1)), so that light incident on the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 is incident on the LED 852. It is possible to suppress the bias to a region along the optical axis. As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform.
次いで、図９７（ｂ）を参照して、第７実施形態における発光ユニット８００について説明する。上記第５実施形態では、第２側壁８４３ｂが仮想線ＫＳ２と平行な直線状に形成される場合を説明したが、第７実施形態では、第２側壁７８４３ｂが仮想線ＫＳ２に対して傾斜して形成される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。
Next, with reference to FIG. 97 (b), a light emitting unit 800 in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the second side wall 843b is formed in a straight line parallel to the virtual line KS2 has been described. However, in the seventh embodiment, the second side wall 7843b is inclined with respect to the virtual line KS2. It is formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
図９７（ｂ）は、第７実施形態における発光ユニット８００の下面図である。なお、図９７（ｂ）では、装飾部材８６０及び基板部材８５０が取り外された状態が図示されると共に、ＬＥＤ８５２が鎖線で図示される。また、図９７（ｂ）では、第１開口８４１及び第２開口８４２の延設方向に仮想線ＫＳ１の符号を、区画部材８４０の短手方向（図９７（ｂ）上下方向）に仮想線ＫＳ２の符号を、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の板厚方向に仮想線ＫＳ３の符号を、区画部材８４０の長手方向（図９７（ｂ）左右方向）に仮想線ＫＳ４の符号を、それぞれ付して図示する。
FIG. 97B is a bottom view of the light emitting unit 800 in the seventh embodiment. In FIG. 97B, a state in which the decorative member 860 and the board member 850 are removed is illustrated, and the LED 852 is illustrated by a chain line. In FIG. 97B, the imaginary line KS1 is denoted in the extending direction of the first opening 841 and the second opening 842, and the imaginary line KS2 is defined in the short direction of the partition member 840 (the vertical direction in FIG. 97B). Of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 in the plate thickness direction, and the virtual line KS3 in the longitudinal direction of the partition member 840 (the left-right direction in FIG. 97B). Are attached and illustrated.
図９７（ｂ）に示すように、第７実施形態における区画部材８４０の凹部７８４３は、第２側壁７８４３ｂが、仮想線ＫＳ３と平行に形成される。また、第２側壁７８４３ｂは、ＬＥＤ８５２の発光中心から延設される仮想線ＫＳ２と交差する位置に形成される。
As shown in FIG. 97 (b), in the recess 7843 of the partition member 840 in the seventh embodiment, the second side wall 7843b is formed in parallel to the virtual line KS3. The second side wall 7843b is formed at a position that intersects the virtual line KS2 extending from the light emission center of the LED 852.
即ち、第７実施形態における凹部７８４３の第１側壁８４３ａは、ＬＥＤ８５２の発光中心の区画部材８４０の長手方向（仮想線ＫＳ４方向）のどちらか一方に形成される（ＬＥＤ８５２の発光中心から延設される仮想線ＫＳ２により区画される領域のどちらか一方に形成される）。
That is, the first side wall 843a of the recess 7843 in the seventh embodiment is formed in either one of the longitudinal directions (in the imaginary line KS4 direction) of the partition member 840 at the light emission center of the LED 852 (extending from the light emission center of the LED 852). Formed in one of the areas partitioned by the virtual line KS2).
これにより、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射される光のうち凹部７８４３の内部に照射される光を、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の内部に入射させると共に、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の延設方向（仮想線ＫＳ１方向）に拡散しやすくできる。
Accordingly, the light irradiated from the LED 852 to the inside of the recess 7843 is made incident on the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and the first light guide member 810 and the first light guide member 810. 2 The light guide member 820 can be easily diffused in the extending direction (the imaginary line KS1 direction).
詳しく説明すると、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射された光のうち第２側壁７８４３ｂに照射される光は、図９７（ｂ）の矢印Ｈ６に示すように、第１側壁８４３ａ及び第２側壁７８４３ｂにより反射され、第１開口８４１又は、第２開口８４２側に進む態様にされると共に、一対の入射面８１２，８２２と端面８１１，８２１との連結（境界）部分の一方に偏った状態とさせることができる。
More specifically, light emitted from the LED 852 to the second side wall 7843b is reflected by the first side wall 843a and the second side wall 7843b as shown by an arrow H6 in FIG. The first opening 841 or the second opening 842 can be advanced, and can be biased to one of the connection (boundary) portions between the pair of incident surfaces 812 and 822 and the end surfaces 811 and 821.
その結果、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射される光を第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の内部に入射させると共に、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の延設方向（仮想線ＫＳ１方向）に拡散しやすくできる。
As a result, the light emitted from the LED 852 enters the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and the extending direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (virtual line) KS1 direction) can be easily diffused.
また、第７実施形態では、凹部７８４３の第１側壁８４３ａは、ＬＥＤ８５２の発光中心の区画部材８４０の長手方向（仮想線ＫＳ４方向）のどちらか一方に形成されることで、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射される光のうち凹部７８４３に照射される光を、第２側壁８４３ａに照射しやすくできる。
In the seventh embodiment, the first side wall 843a of the recess 7843 is formed in either one of the longitudinal directions (in the direction of the imaginary line KS4) of the partition member 840 at the light emission center of the LED 852, so that the LED 852 emits light. Of the light, it is possible to easily irradiate the second side wall 843a with light irradiated to the concave portion 7843.
従って、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射される光を第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の内部に入射させると共に、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の延設方向（仮想線ＫＳ１方向）に拡散しやすくできる。よって、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０へ入射される光がＬＥＤ８５２の光軸に沿う領域に偏ることを抑制できる。その結果、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の照度を均一にしやすくできる。
Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 852 enters the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and the extending direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (virtual line KS1). Direction). Therefore, it can suppress that the light which injects into the 1st light guide member 810 and the 2nd light guide member 820 is biased to the area | region which follows the optical axis of LED852. As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform.
次いで、図９８（ａ）を参照して、第８実施形態における発光ユニット８００について説明する。上記第５実施形態では、第１側壁８４３ａが仮想線ＫＳ４と平行に形成される場合を説明したが、第８実施形態では、第１側壁８８４３ａが仮想線ＫＳ１に対して傾斜して形成される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。
Next, with reference to FIG. 98A, a light emitting unit 800 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the first side wall 843a is formed in parallel with the virtual line KS4 has been described. However, in the eighth embodiment, the first side wall 8843a is formed to be inclined with respect to the virtual line KS1. . In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
図９８（ａ）は、第８実施形態における発光ユニット８００の下面図である。なお、図９８（ａ）では、装飾部材８６０及び基板部材８５０が取り外された状態が図示されると共に、ＬＥＤ８５２が破線で図示される。また、図９８（ａ）では、第１開口８４１及び第２開口８４２の延設方向に仮想線ＫＳ１の符号を、区画部材８４０の短手方向（図９４（ｂ）上下方向）に仮想線ＫＳ２の符号を、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の板厚方向に仮想線ＫＳ３の符号を、区画部材８４０の長手方向（図９８（ｂ）左右方向）に仮想線ＫＳ４の符号を、それぞれ付して図示する。
FIG. 98A is a bottom view of the light emitting unit 800 in the eighth embodiment. In FIG. 98A, the decoration member 860 and the board member 850 are removed, and the LED 852 is indicated by a broken line. In FIG. 98A, the imaginary line KS1 is denoted in the extending direction of the first opening 841 and the second opening 842, and the imaginary line KS2 is defined in the short direction of the partition member 840 (the vertical direction in FIG. 94B). Of the imaginary line KS3 in the plate thickness direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and the imaginary line KS4 in the longitudinal direction of the partition member 840 (FIG. 98 (b) left and right direction). Are attached and illustrated.
図９８（ａ）に示すように、第８実施形態における区画部材８４０の凹部８８４３は、第１側壁８８４３ａが、仮想線ＫＳ１と平行に形成される。即ち、第２側壁８４３ｂの対向する面がそれぞれ、前後方向（仮想線ＫＳ２方向）に同一の長さで形成される。
As shown in FIG. 98 (a), in the recess 8843 of the partition member 840 in the eighth embodiment, the first side wall 8843a is formed in parallel to the virtual line KS1. That is, the opposing surfaces of the second side wall 843b are formed with the same length in the front-rear direction (the imaginary line KS2 direction).
また、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０は、入射面８１２，８２２及び端面８１１，８２１の連結（境界）部分が、仮想線ＫＳ３と平行に形成される。その連結部分の一端が、第２側壁８４３ｂの凹設先端位置と略同一の位置に設定される。
Further, in the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, the connection (boundary) portions of the incident surfaces 812 and 822 and the end surfaces 811 and 821 are formed in parallel with the virtual line KS3. One end of the connecting portion is set at a position substantially the same as the recessed tip position of the second side wall 843b.
これにより、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射される光のうち凹部８８４３の内部に照射される光を、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の内部に入射させると共に、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の延設方向（仮想線ＫＳ１方向）に拡散しやすくできる。
Accordingly, the light irradiated from the LED 852 to the inside of the recess 8843 is made incident on the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and the first light guide member 810 and the first light guide member 810 are used. 2 The light guide member 820 can be easily diffused in the extending direction (the imaginary line KS1 direction).
詳しく説明すると、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射された光のうち第２側壁８４３ｂに照射される光は、図９８（ａ）の矢印Ｈ７に示すように、第２側壁８４３ｂに反射されて第１側壁８８４３ａ側に照射される（進行する）。
More specifically, light emitted from the LED 852 to the second side wall 843b is reflected by the second side wall 843b and directed toward the first side wall 8843a as indicated by an arrow H7 in FIG. Irradiated (progressed).
第１側壁８８４３ａは、上述したように、仮想線ＫＳ１と平行に形成されるので、一方（図９８（ａ）右上）の第２側壁８４３ｂから反射されて第１側壁８８４３ａに照射される光は、第１側壁８８４３ａに対して入射角が（第５実施形態よりも）大きくされる。これにより、一方の第２側壁８４３ｂから反射される光は、第１側壁８８４３ａに反射されて、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の凹部の一端（図９８（ａ）左側端部）側に照射される。
As described above, since the first side wall 8843a is formed in parallel with the virtual line KS1, the light reflected from the second side wall 843b on one side (FIG. 98 (a) upper right) and applied to the first side wall 8843a is The incident angle with respect to the first side wall 8843a is made larger (than in the fifth embodiment). Thereby, the light reflected from one of the second side walls 843b is reflected by the first side wall 8843a, and ends of the concave portions of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (the left end in FIG. 98 (a)). Part) side.
また、他方（図９８（ａ）左上）の第２側壁８４３ｂから反射されて第１側壁８８４３ａに照射される光は、第１側壁８８４３ａに対して（第５実施形態よりも）入射角が小さくされる。これにより、他方の第２側壁８４３ｂから反射される光は、第１側壁８８４３ａに反射されると、一方の第２側壁８４３ｂ側に照射される。
In addition, the light reflected from the second side wall 843b on the other side (upper left of FIG. 98 (a)) and applied to the first side wall 8843a has a smaller incident angle with respect to the first side wall 8843a (than the fifth embodiment). Is done. Thereby, when the light reflected from the other second side wall 843b is reflected by the first side wall 8843a, it is irradiated to the one second side wall 843b side.
他方の第２側壁８４３ｂ及び第１側壁８８４３ａに反射されて一方の第２側壁８４３ｂ側に照射される光は、一方の第２側壁８４３ｂに反射されて、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の凹部の一端（図９８（ａ）左側端部）側に照射される。
The light that is reflected by the other second side wall 843b and the first side wall 8843a and irradiated to the one second side wall 843b is reflected by the one second side wall 843b, and the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide. The light member 820 is irradiated to one end (left end portion in FIG. 98 (a)) of the concave portion.
従って、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射される光のうち、第２側壁８４３ｂに照射される光を第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の内部に入射させると共に、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の延設方向（仮想線ＫＳ１方向）に拡散しやすくできる。よって、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０へ入射される光がＬＥＤ８５２の光軸に沿う領域に偏ることを抑制できる。その結果、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の照度を均一にしやすくできる。
Accordingly, the light emitted from the LED 852 is incident on the second light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 and the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 810 are incident on the second side wall 843b. The light guide member 820 can be easily diffused in the extending direction (the imaginary line KS1 direction). Therefore, it can suppress that the light which injects into the 1st light guide member 810 and the 2nd light guide member 820 is biased to the area | region which follows the optical axis of LED852. As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform.
また、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の入射面８１２，８２２を、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の板厚方向（仮想線ＫＳ３方向）に延設することができるので、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０を型成形した際に、型の引き抜きを簡易にできる。
Further, the incident surfaces 812 and 822 of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 extend in the plate thickness direction (the imaginary line KS3 direction) of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820. Therefore, when the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 are molded, the mold can be easily pulled out.
次いで、図９８（ｂ）を参照して、第９実施形態における発光ユニット８００について説明する。上記第５実施形態では、第２側壁８４３ｂが、直線状に形成される場合を説明したが、第９実施形態では第２側壁９８４３ｂが湾曲して形成される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。
Next, with reference to FIG. 98B, a light emitting unit 800 in the ninth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the second side wall 843b is formed in a straight line has been described. However, in the ninth embodiment, the second side wall 9843b is formed in a curved shape. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
図９８（ｂ）は、第９実施形態における発光ユニット８００の下面図である。なお、図９８（ｂ）では、装飾部材８６０及び基板部材８５０が取り外された状態が図示されると共に、ＬＥＤ８５２が破線で図示される。また、図９８（ｂ）では、第１開口８４１及び第２開口８４２の延設方向に仮想線ＫＳ１の符号を、区画部材８４０の短手方向（図９４（ｂ）上下方向）に仮想線ＫＳ２の符号を、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の板厚方向に仮想線ＫＳ３の符号を、区画部材８４０の長手方向（図９８（ｂ）左右方向）に仮想線ＫＳ４の符号を、それぞれ付して図示する。
FIG. 98B is a bottom view of the light emitting unit 800 in the ninth embodiment. In FIG. 98B, a state in which the decorative member 860 and the board member 850 are removed is illustrated, and the LED 852 is illustrated by a broken line. In FIG. 98 (b), the imaginary line KS1 is indicated in the extending direction of the first opening 841 and the second opening 842, and the imaginary line KS2 is indicated in the short direction (FIG. 94 (b) vertical direction) of the partition member 840. Of the imaginary line KS3 in the plate thickness direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and the imaginary line KS4 in the longitudinal direction of the partition member 840 (FIG. 98 (b) left and right direction). Are attached and illustrated.
図９８（ｂ）に示すように、第９実施形態における区画部材８４０の凹部９８４３は、第２側壁９８４３ｂが、凹部９８４３の内側に向かって凸となる湾曲状に形成される。
As shown in FIG. 98 (b), the concave portion 9843 of the partition member 840 in the ninth embodiment is formed in a curved shape in which the second side wall 9843 b is convex toward the inside of the concave portion 9843.
また、第２側壁９８４３ｂは、第１開口８４１及び第２開口８４２との連結側から第１側壁８４３ａと連結側に向かって凹部９８４３の左右方向（仮想線ＫＳ４方向）中央側に位置する態様に形成される。即ち、第２側壁９８４３ｂの湾曲軸は、第１側壁８４３ａよりも前後方向（仮想線ＫＳ２方向）に第１開口８４１及び第２開口８４２から離間する位置に設定される。
In addition, the second side wall 9843b is located on the center side in the left-right direction (the imaginary line KS4 direction) of the recess 9843 from the connection side to the first opening 841 and the second opening 842 toward the first side wall 843a and the connection side. It is formed. That is, the bending axis of the second side wall 9843b is set at a position that is farther from the first opening 841 and the second opening 842 in the front-rear direction (the imaginary line KS2 direction) than the first side wall 843a.
これにより、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射される光のうち凹部９８４３の内部に照射される光を、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の内部に入射させると共に、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の延設方向（仮想線ＫＳ２方向）に拡散しやすくできる。
As a result, the light irradiated from the LED 852 to the inside of the recess 9843 is incident on the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and the first light guide member 810 and the first light guide member 810 2 The light guide member 820 can be easily diffused in the extending direction (the imaginary line KS2 direction).
詳しく説明すると、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射された光のうち第２側壁９８４３ｂに照射される光は、図９８（ｂ）の矢印Ｈ８に示すように、第２側壁９８４３ｂに反射されると、その湾曲形状により、第１開口８４１及び第２開口８４２側に反射されると共に、左右方向（仮想線ＫＳ１方向）へ進む成分が大きくされる。
More specifically, the light emitted from the LED 852 to the second side wall 9843b is reflected by the second side wall 9843b as shown by the arrow H8 in FIG. The component that is reflected toward the first opening 841 and the second opening 842 and that travels in the left-right direction (the imaginary line KS1 direction) is increased.
従って、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射された光のうち第２側壁９８４３ｂに照射される光を仮想線ＫＳ４方向に拡散しやすくできる。その結果、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射される光のうち、第２側壁８４３ｂに照射される光を第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の内部に入射させると共に、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の延設方向（仮想線ＫＳ１方向）に拡散しやすくできる。よって、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０へ入射される光がＬＥＤ８５２の光軸に沿う領域に偏ることを抑制できる。その結果、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の照度を均一にしやすくできる。
Accordingly, it is possible to easily diffuse the light emitted from the LED 852 to the second side wall 9843b in the direction of the virtual line KS4. As a result, of the light irradiated from the LED 852, the light irradiated to the second side wall 843b enters the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and the first light guide member 810 and the first light guide member 810 2 The light guide member 820 can be easily diffused in the extending direction (the imaginary line KS1 direction). Therefore, it can suppress that the light which injects into the 1st light guide member 810 and the 2nd light guide member 820 is biased to the area | region which follows the optical axis of LED852. As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform.
よって、第９実施形態では、ベース部材８４７（区画部材８４０）は、ＬＥＤ８５２の光軸方向視において、凹部８４３の内壁（第２側壁８８４３ｂ）が凸の湾曲面として形成されるので、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射された光を凸の湾曲面で反射させることで、第１導光部材８１０の延設両方向（仮想線ＫＳ１方向）へ集光させることができる。
Therefore, in the ninth embodiment, the base member 847 (partition member 840) is irradiated from the LED 852 because the inner wall (second side wall 8843b) of the recess 843 is formed as a convex curved surface in the optical axis direction view of the LED 852. The reflected light is reflected by the convex curved surface, so that it can be condensed in both extending directions of the first light guide member 810 (in the direction of the imaginary line KS1).
即ち、集光の方向を、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の正面に沿って広がる方向（第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の板厚方向（仮想線ＫＳ３方向）とＬＥＤ８５２の光軸方向との両者にそれぞれ直交する方向（仮想線ＫＳ１方向））に偏倚させることで、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０へ入射される光がＬＥＤ８５２の光軸に沿う領域に偏ることを抑制できる。その結果、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の照度を均一にしやすくできる。
That is, the direction of light collection is a direction that extends along the front of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (the plate thickness direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (virtual line KS3 Direction) and the direction perpendicular to both the optical axis direction of the LED 852 (the direction of the imaginary line KS1)), so that light incident on the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 is incident on the LED 852. It is possible to suppress the bias to a region along the optical axis. As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform.
次いで、図９９を参照して、第１０実施形態における発光ユニット８００について説明する。上記第５実施形態では、同一形状の凹部８４３が複数個形成される場合を説明したが、第１０実施形態では、凹部８４３及びその凹部８４３と形状の異なる第２凹部１０８４３が形成される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。
Next, a light emitting unit 800 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifth embodiment, the case where a plurality of concave portions 843 having the same shape is formed has been described. However, in the tenth embodiment, the concave portion 843 and the second concave portion 10843 having a shape different from that of the concave portion 843 are formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
図９９（ａ）は、第１０実施形態における発光ユニット８００の断面図であり、図９９（ｂ）は、発光ユニット８００の下面図である。なお、図９９（ａ）及び図１０（ｂ）では、装飾部材８６０及び基板部材８５０が取り外された状態が図示されると共に、ＬＥＤ８５２が破線で図示される。
FIG. 99A is a cross-sectional view of the light emitting unit 800 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 99B is a bottom view of the light emitting unit 800. 99A and 10B, the state where the decorative member 860 and the board member 850 are removed is illustrated, and the LED 852 is illustrated by a broken line.
また、図９９（ｂ）では、第１開口８４１及び第２開口８４２の延設方向に仮想線ＫＳ１の符号を、区画部材８４０の短手方向（図９９（ｂ）上下方向）に仮想線ＫＳ２の符号を、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の板厚方向に仮想線ＫＳ３の符号を、区画部材８４０の長手方向（図９９（ｂ）左右方向）に仮想線ＫＳ４の符号を、それぞれ付して図示する。
In FIG. 99 (b), the imaginary line KS1 is indicated in the extending direction of the first opening 841 and the second opening 842, and the imaginary line KS2 is indicated in the short direction (FIG. 99 (b) vertical direction) of the partition member 840. Of the imaginary line KS3 in the plate thickness direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and the imaginary line KS4 in the longitudinal direction of the partition member 840 (FIG. 99 (b) left and right direction). Are attached and illustrated.
さらに、図９９（ａ）では、各ＬＥＤ８５２の出射方向に沿う仮想線が図示されており、各仮想線に区画されたそれぞれの領域に左右方向左側（図９８（ａ）左側）から第１領域ＳＲ１から第５領域ＳＲ５の符号を付して図示される。
Further, in FIG. 99 (a), imaginary lines along the emission direction of the respective LEDs 852 are shown, and the first region from the left-right direction left side (left side in FIG. 98 (a)) to each region partitioned by each imaginary line. SR1 to fifth region SR5 are denoted by reference numerals.
図９９に示すように、第１０実施形態における発光ユニット８００は、区画部材８４０の左右方向（図９９（ｂ）左右方向）中央側に凹部８４３が形成され、区画部材８４０の左右方向（図９９（ｂ）左右方向）両端に第２凹部１０８４３がそれぞれ形成される。
As shown in FIG. 99, in the light emitting unit 800 according to the tenth embodiment, a concave portion 843 is formed in the central side of the partition member 840 in the left-right direction (FIG. 99 (b) left-right direction). (B) Left and right direction) Second recesses 10843 are formed at both ends.
第２凹部１０８４３は、第１側壁１０８４３ａが第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の板厚方向（仮想線ＫＳ３方向）に凸となる湾曲状に形成される。一対形成される第２側壁８４３ｂは、区画部材８４０に対してその長手方向（図９９（ｂ）左右方向）の外側部分が内側部分よりも区画部材８４０の短手方向（図９９（ｂ）上下方向）に長く形成される。
The second recess 10843 is formed in a curved shape in which the first side wall 10843a is convex in the plate thickness direction (the imaginary line KS3 direction) of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820. The pair of second side walls 843b formed with respect to the partition member 840 has an outer portion in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 99 (b) left-right direction) shorter than the inner portion in the shorter direction (FIG. 99 (b) upper and lower). Direction).
よって、上記第６実施形態において説明したように、第１側壁１０８４３ａを湾曲状に形成することで、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射された光を第１導光部材８１０又は第２導光部材８２０の延設方向（仮想線ＫＳ１方向）の一方側に集光させることができる。ここで、第１０実施形態では、第１側壁１０８４３ａが、その第２凹部１０８４３と対向して配設されるＬＥＤ８５２の照射中心を通過する仮想線ＫＳ４方向の線を対称に、区画部材８４０の短手方向に一対形成される。これにより、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射された光を左右方向の一方側のみに集光させることができる。
Therefore, as described in the sixth embodiment, the first side wall 10843a is formed in a curved shape, whereby the light emitted from the LED 852 is extended in the extending direction of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820. The light can be condensed on one side (in the direction of the virtual line KS1). Here, in the tenth embodiment, the first side wall 10843a is short of the partition member 840 with the line in the imaginary line KS4 direction passing through the irradiation center of the LED 852 arranged facing the second recess 10843 symmetrically. A pair is formed in the hand direction. Thereby, the light irradiated from LED852 can be condensed only to the one side of the left-right direction.
なお、第１０実施形態では、区画部材８４０の長手方向一側（図９９（ｂ）左側）に形成される第２凹部１０８４３は、ＬＥＤ８５２の光を第１領域ＳＲ１側に集光する。一方、区画部材８４０の長手方向他側（図９９（ｂ）右側）に形成される第１凹部１０８４３は、ＬＥＳＤ８５２の光を第５領域ＳＲ５側に集光する。
In the tenth embodiment, the second recess 10843 formed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the partition member 840 (left side in FIG. 99B) collects the light from the LED 852 toward the first region SR1. On the other hand, the first recess 10843 formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the partition member 840 (the right side in FIG. 99B) collects the light of the LESD 852 on the fifth region SR5 side.
ここで、上述したように、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０は、正面視扇状に形成され、端面８１１，８２１に対して、遊技者側に光を発光する照射面が大きくされる。そのため、端面８１１，８２１の延設方向に沿ってＬＥＤ８５２を等間隔で配設すると、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の左右方向（図９９（ａ）左右方向）端部と中央部とで、光に明暗ができる恐れがあった。
Here, as described above, the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 are formed in a fan shape when viewed from the front, and the irradiation surface for emitting light to the player side is larger than the end surfaces 811 and 821. Is done. Therefore, when the LEDs 852 are arranged at equal intervals along the extending direction of the end surfaces 811 and 821, the ends of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 in the left-right direction (FIG. 99 (a) left-right direction) There was a risk that the light could be bright and dark at the center.
即ち、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の左右方向において、左端の第１領域ＳＲ１及び右端の第５領域ＳＲ５の照射領域が、第２領域ＳＲ２から第４領域ＳＲ４よりも大きくされる。従って、第１領域ＳＲ１及び第５領域ＳＲ５の発光が、第２領域ＳＲ２から第４領域ＳＲ４よりも弱くされる。そのため、照度の確保が困難なる。
That is, in the left-right direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, the irradiation region of the first region SR1 on the left end and the fifth region SR5 on the right end is larger than the second region SR2 to the fourth region SR4. Is done. Therefore, the light emission in the first region SR1 and the fifth region SR5 is made weaker than those in the second region SR2 to the fourth region SR4. Therefore, it becomes difficult to ensure illuminance.
また、第１領域ＳＲ１及び第５領域ＳＲ５では、左右の両端部に配設されるＬＥＤ８５２から照射される光のみが入射されるのに対して、第２領域ＳＲ２から第４領域ＳＲ４では、左右方向に隣合う２つのＬＥＤ８５２から照射される２つＬＥＤ８５２の光が入射される。
Further, in the first region SR1 and the fifth region SR5, only the light emitted from the LEDs 852 arranged at the left and right ends is incident, whereas in the second region SR2 to the fourth region SR4, the left and right Light from two LEDs 852 irradiated from two LEDs 852 adjacent in the direction is incident.
即ち、凹部８４３どうしの間の領域では、それら隣接する凹部８４３のそれぞれから光が進行される（即ち、２のＬＥＤ８５２からの光が到達される）ため、光が重なり、照度が確保されやすい。一方、列設方向一側または他側の端部に位置する第２凹部１０８４３よりも外の領域では、その第２凹部１０８４３からの光のみが進行される（即ち、１のＬＥＤ８５２からの光のみが到達される）ため、照度の確保が困難となる。
That is, in the region between the recesses 843, light travels from each of the adjacent recesses 843 (that is, the light from the two LEDs 852 reaches), so that the light overlaps and the illuminance is easily secured. On the other hand, in a region outside the second recess 10843 located at one end or the other side in the row direction, only light from the second recess 10843 travels (that is, only light from one LED 852). Therefore, it is difficult to secure illuminance.
これに対し、第１０実施形態では、列設方向一側の端部に位置する第２凹部１０８４３と列設方向他側の端部に位置する第２凹部１０８４３とが、互いの第１側面１０８４３ａの湾曲面を区画部材８４０の長手方向（図９９（ｂ）左右方向）外側に向けた姿勢で配設されるので、集光させた光を、各凹部８４３よりも外の領域へ向けて進行させることができ、照度を確保できる。その結果、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の照度を全体に均一にしやすくできる。
On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, the second concave portion 10843 located at the end portion on the one side in the row direction and the second concave portion 10843 located at the end portion on the other side in the row direction are the first side surfaces 10843a of each other. Are arranged in a posture in which the curved surface faces outward in the longitudinal direction of the partition member 840 (FIG. 99 (b) left and right direction), and thus the collected light travels toward a region outside each recess 843. It is possible to secure illuminance. As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform throughout.
言い変えると、第１０実施形態では、区画部材８４０の長手方向（図９９（ｂ）左右方向）外側端部に第２凹部１０８４３が形成されることで、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射される光を第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の延設方向（仮想線ＫＳ１方向）外側に集光させることができる。従って、第１領域ＳＲ１及び第５領域ＳＲ５の端部を発光させやすくすることができる。よって、第１領域ＳＲ１から第５領域ＳＲ５（第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０）の発光を均一にしやすくできる。その結果、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の照度を全体に均一にしやすくできる。
In other words, in the tenth embodiment, the second recessed portion 10843 is formed at the outer end of the partition member 840 in the longitudinal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 99 (b)), so that the light emitted from the LED 852 is the first guide. The light member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be condensed outside the extending direction (the imaginary line KS1 direction). Therefore, the end portions of the first region SR1 and the fifth region SR5 can be easily made to emit light. Therefore, the light emission from the first region SR1 to the fifth region SR5 (the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820) can be easily made uniform. As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform throughout.
次いで、図１００から図１０６を参照して、第１１実施形態について説明する。上記第１実施形態では、昇降体３３０についての詳しい説明を省略したが、第１１実施形態では、昇降体３３０について詳しい説明をする。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。
Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 106. In the first embodiment, detailed description of the lifting body 330 is omitted, but in the eleventh embodiment, the lifting body 330 is described in detail. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
初めに、図１００から図１０２を参照して、昇降体３３０の全体構成について説明する。図１００（ａ）は、第１１実施形態における昇降体３３０の正面図であり、図１００（ｂ）は、昇降体３３０の背面図である。図１０１は、昇降体３３０の分解斜視正面図であり、図１０２は、昇降体３３０の分解斜視背面図である。
First, the overall configuration of the elevating body 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 102. FIG. 100A is a front view of the lifting body 330 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 100B is a rear view of the lifting body 330. 101 is an exploded perspective front view of the elevating body 330, and FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective rear view of the elevating body 330.
なお、第１１実施形態では、ベース部材３１０の長手方向（図１２左右方向）に４つ並設されるうちの一側（図１２左側）から２つ目の昇降体３３０を参照して説明する。
In the eleventh embodiment, a description will be given with reference to a second lifting body 330 from one side (left side in FIG. 12) of four base members 310 arranged in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 12). .
図１００から図１０２に示すように、昇降体３３０は円盤板形状に構成される演出部３３１と、その演出部３３１の背面に固定され演出部３３１の背面から隙間を空けた位置に鉛直方向に延設されるラック３３２とを備える。
As shown in FIGS. 100 to 102, the elevating body 330 is fixed to the rear surface of the effect unit 331 configured in a disk shape and vertically spaced at a position spaced from the rear surface of the effect unit 331. And an extended rack 332.
演出部３３１は、リング状に形成される外枠３６０と、その外枠３６０の内側に配設されるレンズ部３７０と、そのレンズ部３７０の背面側に配設され、複数の第１ＬＥＤ３９１を配設された基板部材３９０と、その基板部材３９０とレンズ部３７０との間に介設され、複数の第１ＬＥＤ３９１の光を区画する区画部材３８０とを主に備えて形成される。なお、以下の説明では、レンズ部３７０、区画部材３８０及び基板部材３９０の３つを合わせて介設部材３３５と称して説明する。
The rendering unit 331 is disposed on the outer frame 360 formed in a ring shape, the lens unit 370 disposed on the inner side of the outer frame 360, and the back side of the lens unit 370, and includes a plurality of first LEDs 391. The substrate member 390 is provided, and a partition member 380 that is interposed between the substrate member 390 and the lens portion 370 and partitions the light of the plurality of first LEDs 391 is mainly formed. In the following description, the lens portion 370, the partition member 380, and the substrate member 390 are collectively referred to as an interposed member 335.
外枠３６０は、正面視円環状に形成され、その外縁部から背面側（介設部材３３５側）に立設される外縁部３６１と、内縁部分から所定の距離を径方向に隔てた位置に背面側に膨出する膨出部３６２と、その膨出部３６２の内縁側に突出する突起３６３とを備える。
The outer frame 360 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has an outer edge portion 361 erected from the outer edge portion on the back side (the interposition member 335 side), and a position that is separated from the inner edge portion by a predetermined distance in the radial direction. A bulging portion 362 that bulges to the back surface side and a protrusion 363 that projects to the inner edge side of the bulging portion 362 are provided.
また、外枠３６０は、透明な光透過性材料から樹脂成形されると共に、正面側の一部に部分的に塗装が施される。これにより、背面側に配設される第２ＬＥＤ３９２の光を非塗装部分から遊技者側に出射させることができる。
Further, the outer frame 360 is resin-molded from a transparent light-transmitting material, and a part of the front side is painted. Thereby, the light of 2nd LED392 arrange | positioned by the back side can be radiate | emitted from the non-coating part to the player side.
外枠３６０は、内縁部の内径が後述するレンズ部３７０の外径よりも小さく設定されると共に、外縁部の外径が後述するレンズ部３７０及び区画部材３８０の外径よりも大きく設定される。
The outer frame 360 is set such that the inner diameter of the inner edge portion is smaller than the outer diameter of the lens portion 370 described later, and the outer diameter of the outer edge portion is set larger than the outer diameters of the lens portion 370 and the partition member 380 described later. .
外縁部３６１は、正面側（図１００（ａ）紙面手前側）から背面側（図１００（ｂ）紙面奥側）への立設寸法が、後述するレンズ部３７０と区画部材３８０とを組み合わせた状態の前後方向の板厚寸法と略同一に設定される（図１０３参照）。また、外縁部３６１の下方側には、部分的に突出する保持部３６１ａが形成される。保持部３６１ａは、後述するベース部分３３４と対向する位置に突出形成される。
The outer edge 361 has a combination of a lens part 370 and a partition member 380, which will be described later, in the standing dimension from the front side (FIG. 100 (a) front side of the paper surface) to the back side (FIG. 100 (b) back side of the paper surface). It is set to be substantially the same as the thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the state (see FIG. 103). In addition, a holding portion 361 a that partially protrudes is formed on the lower side of the outer edge portion 361. The holding portion 361a is formed to project at a position facing a base portion 334 described later.
レンズ部３７０は、円盤形状に形成され、組み立て状態では、外枠３６０と同軸となる位置に配置される。レンズ部３７０は、その外縁に背面側に立設する立設部３７１と、外縁から突出する係合部３７２と、下面から突出する締結部３７３とを備える。また、レンズ部３７０は、半透明の透過性材料から樹脂成形される。
The lens portion 370 is formed in a disk shape and is disposed at a position that is coaxial with the outer frame 360 in the assembled state. The lens portion 370 includes a standing portion 371 that stands on the outer edge of the lens portion 370, an engaging portion 372 that protrudes from the outer edge, and a fastening portion 373 that protrudes from the lower surface. The lens portion 370 is resin-molded from a translucent transparent material.
立設部３７１は、レンズ部３７０の外縁部分から背面側（図１００（ａ）紙面奥側）所定の厚みを備えて立設される。立設部３７１の内縁部の内径は、後述する区画部材３８０の外形と略同一に設定される。これにより、組み立て状態では、区画部材３８０を立設部３７１の内側に挿入した状態で配置される（図１０３参照）。
The standing portion 371 is erected with a predetermined thickness from the outer edge portion of the lens portion 370 to the back side (FIG. 100 (a) the back side of the paper surface). The inner diameter of the inner edge portion of the standing portion 371 is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the partition member 380 described later. Thereby, in the assembled state, the partition member 380 is disposed in a state of being inserted inside the standing portion 371 (see FIG. 103).
レンズ部３７０は、その外径が外枠３６０の膨出部３６１の内径と略同一に形成される。これにより、レンズ部３７０を膨出部３６１の内側（内縁側）に配設できると共に、外枠３６０の内縁部分（膨出部３６１よりも内側部分）によりレンズ部３７０が外枠３６０よりも前方に位置することを規制できる。また、レンズ部３７０は、膨出部３６１の内側に配置されることで、外枠３６０に対して上下左右方向に位置ずれすることが抑制される。
The lens portion 370 has an outer diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the bulging portion 361 of the outer frame 360. Accordingly, the lens portion 370 can be disposed on the inner side (inner edge side) of the bulging portion 361, and the lens portion 370 is further forward than the outer frame 360 by the inner edge portion of the outer frame 360 (the inner portion of the bulging portion 361). It can be regulated to be located at. In addition, the lens unit 370 is disposed inside the bulging unit 361 so that the lens unit 370 is prevented from being displaced in the vertical and horizontal directions with respect to the outer frame 360.
係合部３７２は、レンズ部３７０の外縁から突出する一対の突起３７２ａである。一対の突起３７２ａは、外枠３６０の突起３６３の外形よりも大きい隙間を隔てて形成される。また、係合部３７２は、外枠３６０の突起３６３と対向する位置に形成される。これにより、組み立て状態では、係合部３７２の一対の突起３７２ａの対向間に外枠３６０の突起３６３が挿入されて係合した状態で配設される。
The engaging portion 372 is a pair of protrusions 372 a that protrude from the outer edge of the lens portion 370. The pair of protrusions 372 a are formed with a gap larger than the outer shape of the protrusion 363 of the outer frame 360. Further, the engaging portion 372 is formed at a position facing the protrusion 363 of the outer frame 360. Thereby, in the assembled state, the protrusions 363 of the outer frame 360 are inserted and engaged between the pair of protrusions 372a of the engaging portion 372.
これにより、外枠３６０の膨出部３６２の内側にレンズ部３７０を配設した組立状態において、外枠３６０の突起３６３を一対の突起３７２ａの内側に配置することができる。従って、レンズ部３７０が、外枠３６０に対して周方向に回転することを抑制できる。なお、係合部３７２と、突起３６３のとの係合について詳しい説明は後述する。
Thereby, in the assembled state in which the lens portion 370 is disposed inside the bulging portion 362 of the outer frame 360, the protrusion 363 of the outer frame 360 can be disposed inside the pair of protrusions 372a. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lens unit 370 from rotating in the circumferential direction with respect to the outer frame 360. A detailed description of the engagement between the engaging portion 372 and the protrusion 363 will be given later.
締結部３７３は、そのレンズ部３７０の下端から突出して形成されており、レンズ部３７０の軸からの突出寸法が、外枠３６０の外縁部３６１の内径よりも小さく設定される。これにより、組み立て状態では、締結部３７３をその外枠３６０の外縁部３６１の内側に配置した状態とされる。
The fastening portion 373 is formed so as to protrude from the lower end of the lens portion 370, and the projecting dimension from the shaft of the lens portion 370 is set smaller than the inner diameter of the outer edge portion 361 of the outer frame 360. Thus, in the assembled state, the fastening portion 373 is placed inside the outer edge portion 361 of the outer frame 360.
区画部材３８０は、レンズ部３７０と同軸の円盤状に形成されると共に、背面側の外縁部分から径方向に突出する規制板３８１と、その規制板３８１の外縁から鉤状に突出する鉤状部３８２と、前後方向に貫通した複数の開口３８３と、背面側に突出する円柱状の突出部３８４とを備えて形成される。
The partition member 380 is formed in a disk shape that is coaxial with the lens portion 370, and includes a restriction plate 381 that protrudes in the radial direction from the outer edge portion on the back side, and a hook-like portion that protrudes in a bowl shape from the outer edge of the restriction plate 381 382, a plurality of openings 383 penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a columnar protruding portion 384 protruding to the back side.
区画部材３８０は、その外径がレンズ部３７０の立設部３７１の内径と略同一に設定される。これにより、区画部材３８０を立設部３７１の内側に挿入して配設できる。従って、区画部材３８０が、レンズ部材３７０に対して上下左右方向に位置ずれすることを抑制できる。
The partition member 380 is set to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the standing portion 371 of the lens portion 370. Thereby, the partition member 380 can be inserted and disposed inside the standing portion 371. Accordingly, the partition member 380 can be prevented from being displaced in the vertical and horizontal directions with respect to the lens member 370.
規制板３８１は、区画部材３８０の前面と所定の隙間を隔てて形成されており、その隙間が、レンズ部材３７０の立設部３７１の立設寸法よりも小さく形成される。これにより、区画部材３８０をレンズ部材３７０の立設部３７１の内側に配設した際に、規制板３８１の前面をレンズ部材３７０の立設部３７１の端面に当接させることができる（図１０３参照）。
The restriction plate 381 is formed with a predetermined gap from the front surface of the partition member 380, and the gap is formed to be smaller than the standing dimension of the standing portion 371 of the lens member 370. Thus, when the partition member 380 is disposed inside the standing portion 371 of the lens member 370, the front surface of the regulating plate 381 can be brought into contact with the end surface of the standing portion 371 of the lens member 370 (FIG. 103). reference).
従って、レンズ部材３７０の背面と区画部材３８０の正面とが当接することを抑制できる。その結果、レンズ部材３７０が、区画部材３８０の前面と当接して押し出されることにより、変形することを抑制できる。
Therefore, it can suppress that the back surface of the lens member 370 and the front surface of the division member 380 contact | abut. As a result, the lens member 370 can be prevented from being deformed by being pushed out in contact with the front surface of the partition member 380.
鉤状部３８２は、規制板３８１の外縁部にＬ字状に突出して形成され、Ｌ字の屈曲側が正面側に突出される。また、鉤状部３８２は、外枠３６０にレンズ部３７０及び区画部材３８０が配置された状態において、外枠３６０の突起３６３と対向する位置に形成される。
The hook-shaped portion 382 is formed to protrude in an L shape at the outer edge portion of the regulating plate 381, and the bent side of the L shape protrudes to the front side. Further, the hook-shaped portion 382 is formed at a position facing the protrusion 363 of the outer frame 360 in a state where the lens portion 370 and the partition member 380 are disposed on the outer frame 360.
これにより、区画部材３８０をレンズ部材３７０の立設部３７１の内側に配設した状態では、鉤状部３８２の先端をレンズ部３７０の係合部３７２の一対の突起３７２ａの対向間に挿入できる。従って、区画部材３８０が、外枠３６０（レンズ部３７０）に対して周方向に回転することを抑制できる。
Thus, in a state where the partition member 380 is disposed inside the standing portion 371 of the lens member 370, the tip of the hook-shaped portion 382 can be inserted between the pair of protrusions 372a of the engaging portion 372 of the lens portion 370. . Therefore, the partition member 380 can be prevented from rotating in the circumferential direction with respect to the outer frame 360 (lens portion 370).
突出部３８４は、区画部材３８０の背面側に２つ突出して形成される。また、突出部３８４は、区画部材３８０の外縁および鉤状部３８２の径方向内側に位置される。
Two protruding portions 384 are formed to protrude on the back side of the partition member 380. Further, the protruding portion 384 is located on the outer edge of the partition member 380 and the radially inner side of the flange-shaped portion 382.
基板部材３９０は、外枠３６０と同軸上の円盤形状に形成されると共に、正面側に複数個並設される第１ＬＥＤ３９１と、基板部材３９０の外縁部分に沿って複数個配設される第２ＬＥＤ３９２と、前後方向に貫通形成される貫通孔３９３と、第１ＬＥＤ３９１及び第２ＬＥＤ３９２に電力を供給するための配線が連結されるソケット３９４とを主に備えて形成される。
The board member 390 is formed in a disk shape coaxial with the outer frame 360, and a plurality of first LEDs 391 arranged in parallel on the front side, and a plurality of second LEDs 392 arranged along the outer edge portion of the board member 390. And a through hole 393 penetratingly formed in the front-rear direction, and a socket 394 to which a wiring for supplying power to the first LED 391 and the second LED 392 is connected.
基板部材３９０は、その外径が区画部材３８０の規制板３８１の外径よりも大きく形成されると共に、外枠３６０の外縁部分の外形よりも小さく形成される。また、基板部材３９０は、正面側が、区画部材３８０の背面側に当接して配設される（図１０３参照）。
The substrate member 390 is formed to have an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the regulating plate 381 of the partition member 380 and smaller than the outer shape of the outer edge portion of the outer frame 360. Further, the front side of the substrate member 390 is disposed in contact with the back side of the partition member 380 (see FIG. 103).
第１ＬＥＤ３９１は、正面側に光を照射可能に配設され、基板部材３９０の正面視において上下左右方向に複数個並設される。また、区画部材３８０には、第１ＬＥＤ３９１と対向する位置に開口３８３が形成される。これにより、基板部材３９０が、区画部材３８０の背面側に配設された状態では、各第１ＬＥＤ３９１の正面側の端部を開口３８３の内側に挿入することができる。その結果、第１ＬＥＤ３９１の発光をそれぞれ区画することができる。
The first LEDs 391 are arranged on the front side so as to be able to irradiate light, and a plurality of the first LEDs 391 are arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions in the front view of the substrate member 390. Further, an opening 383 is formed in the partition member 380 at a position facing the first LED 391. Thereby, in the state where the substrate member 390 is disposed on the back side of the partition member 380, the front side end of each first LED 391 can be inserted inside the opening 383. As a result, the light emission of the first LED 391 can be partitioned.
よって、第１ＬＥＤ３９１から光を照射すると、その光を開口３８２を通過させてレンズ部３７０に光を照射することができる。この場合、上述したように区画部材３８０により光を区画することができるので、第１ＬＥＤ３９１の照射を制御してレンズ部３７０の照射態様を変更する演出ができる。
Therefore, when light is emitted from the first LED 391, the light can pass through the opening 382 to irradiate the lens unit 370 with light. In this case, since the light can be partitioned by the partition member 380 as described above, an effect of changing the irradiation mode of the lens unit 370 by controlling the irradiation of the first LED 391 can be achieved.
第２ＬＥＤ３９２は、基板部材３９０の外縁部分に沿って配設されると共に、正面視においてレンズ部３７０及び区画部材３８０の外径よりも外側に配置される。これにより、第２ＬＥＤ３９２を発光させて、外枠３６０に光を入射させることができる。外枠３６０に光が入射されると、上述したように非塗装部分から遊技者側に光を出射することができる。
The second LED 392 is disposed along the outer edge portion of the substrate member 390 and is disposed outside the outer diameters of the lens portion 370 and the partition member 380 in a front view. Thereby, the second LED 392 can emit light and light can enter the outer frame 360. When light enters the outer frame 360, light can be emitted from the non-painted portion to the player side as described above.
貫通孔３９３は、基板部材３９０の正面側に配設される区画部材３８０の突出部３８４と対向する位置に形成されると共に、突出部３８４の外径よりも大きい開口に形成される。
The through-hole 393 is formed at a position facing the protruding portion 384 of the partition member 380 disposed on the front side of the substrate member 390, and is formed in an opening larger than the outer diameter of the protruding portion 384.
ソケット３９４は、基板部材３９０の下端（昇降体３３０のスライド方向下側（図１００（ｂ）下側））部分に形成される。ソケット３９４は、配線を連結するための連結部分であり、上述したベース部材３１０と背面カバー３２０との間を介して挿通される配線が連結される。即ち、ソケット３９４は、配線が上方（昇降体３３０のスライド方向上側（図１００（ｂ）上側）から連結された状態とされる。
The socket 394 is formed at the lower end of the board member 390 (the lower side in the sliding direction of the elevating body 330 (the lower side in FIG. 100B)). The socket 394 is a connecting portion for connecting the wiring, and the wiring inserted through the base member 310 and the back cover 320 is connected. That is, the socket 394 is in a state in which the wiring is connected from above (from the upper side in the sliding direction of the elevating body 330 (upper side in FIG. 100B)).
また、後述するベース部分３３４には、ソケット３９４と対向する位置に前後方向に貫通形成される開口３３４ｆが形成されており、ソケット３９４に連結される配線をベース部分３３４の背面側から連結可能にされる。
In addition, the base portion 334, which will be described later, is formed with an opening 334f that is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at a position facing the socket 394 so that the wiring connected to the socket 394 can be connected from the back side of the base portion 334. Is done.
ラック３３２は、上下方向（昇降体３３０のスライド方向（図１００（ｂ）上下方向））に延設されるラック部分３３３と、そのラック部分３３３の下側（昇降体３３０のスライド方向下側（図１００（ｂ）下側）に連結した半円状のベース部分３３４とを主に備えて形成される。
The rack 332 includes a rack portion 333 extending in the vertical direction (the sliding direction of the lifting body 330 (the vertical direction in FIG. 100B)) and the lower side of the rack portion 333 (the lower side of the lifting body 330 in the sliding direction ( It is mainly formed with a semicircular base portion 334 connected to the lower side of FIG.
ラック部分３３３は、上述したように、昇降体を上下に駆動させる伝達装置３５０（図１４参照）が連結（歯合）される部分であり、その詳しい説明は省略する。
As described above, the rack portion 333 is a portion to which the transmission device 350 (see FIG. 14) that drives the lifting body up and down is connected (engaged), and detailed description thereof is omitted.
ベース部分３３４は、半円の円形状に形成され、組み立て状態では、外枠と同軸となる位置に配置される。また、ベース部分３３４は、外枠３６０の外径と略同一の直径に設定される。ベース部分３３４は、上端側（昇降体３３０のスライド方向上側（図１００（ｂ）上端側））が切り欠き形成されており、その切り欠き量が上端部分から半径よりも大きい寸法分下方に切り欠き形成される。即ち、ベース部分３３４は、半円よりも小さい形状に形成される。ベース部分３３４は、保持部３６１と締結される。
The base portion 334 is formed in a semicircular circular shape, and is arranged at a position that is coaxial with the outer frame in the assembled state. Further, the base portion 334 is set to have a diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the outer frame 360. The base portion 334 has a notch formed on the upper end side (the upper side in the sliding direction of the elevating body 330 (the upper end side in FIG. 100B)), and the notch amount is cut downward from the upper end portion by a dimension larger than the radius. Not formed. That is, the base portion 334 is formed in a shape smaller than a semicircle. The base portion 334 is fastened with the holding portion 361.
ベース部分３３４は、前後方向に貫通形成される貫通孔３３４ｃと、前方側に突出形成される突起３３４ａと、下端部分に円柱状に形成される締結部３３４ｂとを主に備えて形成される。
The base portion 334 is mainly provided with a through-hole 334c that is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction, a protrusion 334a that is formed to project forward, and a fastening portion 334b that is formed in a columnar shape at the lower end portion.
貫通孔３３４ｃは、ベース部分３３４の外縁部の周方向端部および周方向中間位置の３箇所に形成される。貫通孔３３４ｃは、ベース部分３３４と外枠３６０とを締結するためのネジを挿通する孔であり、貫通孔３３４と対向する位置の保持部３６１ａに凹設される孔に貫通孔３３４ｃを挿通したネジが螺合される。
The through-holes 334c are formed at three locations, the circumferential end of the outer edge of the base portion 334 and the circumferential intermediate position. The through hole 334c is a hole through which a screw for fastening the base portion 334 and the outer frame 360 is inserted, and the through hole 334c is inserted into a hole recessed in the holding portion 361a at a position facing the through hole 334. Screws are screwed together.
突起３３４ａは、ベース部分３３４に対して貫通孔３３４ｃの径方向内側に突出形成される。突起３３４ａの正面側（基板部材３９０側）への突出長さは、基板部材３９０の背面とベース部分３３４の正面との対向間の距離寸法に設定される。これにより、外枠３６０にベース部分３３４が締結されると突起３３４ａの先端が基板部材３９０の背面に当接した状態とされる。
The protrusion 334 a is formed so as to protrude inward in the radial direction of the through hole 334 c with respect to the base portion 334. The protrusion length of the protrusion 334a to the front side (substrate member 390 side) is set to a distance dimension between the back surface of the substrate member 390 and the front surface of the base portion 334. Thus, when the base portion 334 is fastened to the outer frame 360, the tip of the protrusion 334a is brought into contact with the back surface of the substrate member 390.
締結部３３４ｂは、ベース部分３３４の下端側（図１００（ａ）下側）から正面側（図１００（ａ）紙面手前側）に円柱状に突出して形成されると共に、その内側部分にベース部分３３４の板厚方向（正面側から背面側）に貫通する挿通孔３３４ｂ１を備える。また、締結部３３４ｂは、上述したレンズ部３７０の締結部３７３と対向する位置に形成される。これにより、レンズ部３７０の下端部分とベース部分３３４の下端部分とを締結できる。なお、レンズ部３７０とベース部分３３４との締結についての詳しい説明は後述する。
The fastening portion 334b protrudes in a columnar shape from the lower end side (the lower side in FIG. 100 (a)) of the base portion 334 to the front side (the front side in FIG. 100 (a)). An insertion hole 334b1 penetrating in the plate thickness direction 334 (from the front side to the back side) is provided. In addition, the fastening portion 334b is formed at a position facing the fastening portion 373 of the lens portion 370 described above. Thereby, the lower end part of the lens part 370 and the lower end part of the base part 334 can be fastened. A detailed description of the fastening between the lens portion 370 and the base portion 334 will be described later.
次いで、図１０３及び図１０４を参照して、昇降体３３０とベース部材３１０との位置関係について説明する。図１０３は、図１００（ａ）のＣＩＩＩ−ＣＩＩＩ線における昇降体３３０の断面図である。図１０４（ａ）は、図１２のＣＩＶａ−ＣＩＶａ線における上部昇降ユニット３００の断面図であり、図１０４（ｂ）は、図１３のＣＩＶｂ−ＣＩＶｂ線における上部昇降ユニット３００の断面図である。
Next, the positional relationship between the elevating body 330 and the base member 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. 103 is a cross-sectional view of the elevating body 330 taken along line CIII-CIII in FIG. 104 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the upper lift unit 300 taken along the line CIVa-CIVa in FIG. 12, and FIG. 104 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the upper lift unit 300 taken along the line CIVb-CIVb in FIG.
なお、図１０４（ａ）では、昇降体３３０が上昇位置に配置された状態が図示され、図１０４（ｂ）では、昇降体３３０が下降位置に配置された状態が図示される。
104 (a) shows a state in which the elevating body 330 is arranged at the raised position, and FIG. 104 (b) shows a state in which the elevating body 330 is arranged at the lowered position.
まず、図１０３を参照して、昇降体３３０の組み付け態様について説明する。図１０３に示す（上述した）ように、昇降体３３０は、正面側（図１０３左側）に円環形状の外枠３６０が配置され、その外枠３６０の膨出部３６２の内側にレンズ部３７０が背面側から挿入される。
First, with reference to FIG. 103, the assembly | attachment aspect of the raising / lowering body 330 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 103 (described above), the elevating body 330 has an annular outer frame 360 disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 103), and a lens portion 370 inside the bulging portion 362 of the outer frame 360. Is inserted from the back side.
レンズ部３７０には、立設部３７１の内側に区画部材３８０が背面側から挿入される。また、区画部材３８０の背面には、貫通孔３９３に区画部材３８０の突出部３８４が挿入された状態で基板部材３９０が配設される。
A partition member 380 is inserted into the lens portion 370 from the back side inside the standing portion 371. In addition, on the back surface of the partition member 380, the substrate member 390 is disposed in a state where the protruding portion 384 of the partition member 380 is inserted into the through hole 393.
基板部材３９０の背面側には、その下側を覆う態様でラック３３２のベース部分３３４が配設される。ラック３３２のベース部分３３４は、外枠３６０の保持部３６１ａと締結されており、ラック３３２のベース部分３３４の正面側と外枠３６０の背面側との対向間にレンズ部３７０、区画部材３８０及び基板部材３９０が挟持される。
A base portion 334 of the rack 332 is disposed on the back side of the substrate member 390 so as to cover the lower side thereof. The base portion 334 of the rack 332 is fastened to the holding portion 361a of the outer frame 360, and the lens portion 370, the partition member 380, and the like are disposed between the front side of the base portion 334 of the rack 332 and the back side of the outer frame 360. A substrate member 390 is sandwiched.
従って、レンズ部３７０、区画部材３８０及び基板部材３９０が外枠３６０及びベース部分３３４から脱落することを防止できる。また、ベース部分３３４の上端部分が切りかかれ、演出部３３１の背面側上端部分が開放された状態とされるので、演出部３３１の背面側のスペースを確保することができる。
Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the lens portion 370, the partition member 380, and the substrate member 390 from dropping from the outer frame 360 and the base portion 334. Moreover, since the upper end part of the base part 334 is cut off and the back side upper end part of the effect part 331 is opened, a space on the back side of the effect part 331 can be secured.
また、上述したように、ベース部分３３４の突起３３４ａは、基板部材３９０の背面に当接する突出長さに設定されており、ベース部分３３４の上端部に位置される（即ち、締結部３３４ｂよりも上方に位置される）。よって、基板部材３９０の下端側を背面側に引き付ける状態とすることができで、基板部材３９０の上端部分に突起３３４ａとの当接位置を中心に前方に傾倒する方向の力を作用させることができる。
Further, as described above, the protrusion 334a of the base portion 334 is set to a protruding length that contacts the back surface of the substrate member 390 and is positioned at the upper end portion of the base portion 334 (that is, more than the fastening portion 334b). Located above). Accordingly, the lower end side of the substrate member 390 can be attracted to the back side, and a force in a direction of tilting forward about the contact position with the protrusion 334a can be applied to the upper end portion of the substrate member 390. it can.
ここで、図１０４に示すように、昇降体３３０が上昇位置に配置される際には、昇降体３３０の上端部分の略半分がベース部材３１０（半円凹設部３１１）の正面側（図１０４（ａ）左側）に配置される。
Here, as shown in FIG. 104, when the elevating body 330 is placed in the raised position, approximately half of the upper end portion of the elevating body 330 is the front side of the base member 310 (semicircular recess 311) (see FIG. 104 (a) on the left side.
上述したように、昇降体３３０は、ベース部分３３４の上端部分が切り欠かれ、演出部３３１の背面側上端部分が開放された状態とされるので、演出部３３１（基板部材３９０）とベース部材３１０（半円凹設部３１１）との対向間を近づけることができる。従って、上部昇降ユニット３００の正面側から背面側（図１０４（ａ）左右方向）の幅寸法が大きくなることを抑制できる。
As described above, the elevating body 330 is in a state in which the upper end portion of the base portion 334 is cut out and the upper end portion on the back side of the effect portion 331 is opened, so that the effect portion 331 (substrate member 390) and the base member 310 (semicircular recess 311) can be brought close to each other. Therefore, it can suppress that the width dimension from the front side of the upper raising / lowering unit 300 to a back side (FIG. 104 (a) left-right direction) becomes large.
一方、図１０４（ｂ）に示すように、昇降体３３０が下降位置に配置される際には、演出部３３１の少なくとも一部がベース部材３１０（半円凹設部３１１）の一部と正面側（図１０４（ｂ）左側）に重なる状態とされる。言い変えると、昇降体３３０の上下方向（図１０４（ａ）上下方向）の変位距離は、半円凹設部３１１の上下方向の長さ寸法よりも小さく設定される。
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the elevating body 330 is arranged at the lowered position, at least a part of the effect part 331 is in front of a part of the base member 310 (semicircular recessed part 311). It is in a state of overlapping with the side (left side in FIG. 104 (b)). In other words, the displacement distance of the elevating body 330 in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 104A) is set to be smaller than the vertical dimension of the semicircular recessed portion 311.
これにより、昇降体３３０が下降位置に変位した際の慣性力や、上述した駆動装置３４０の始動による慣性力で、演出部３３１が前後に揺れ動いた（特に後方に動いた）際に、演出部３３１の背面をベース部材３１０（半円凹設部３１１）に当接させることができる。その結果、演出部３３１が前後に揺れ動くことを抑制して、演出部３３１の演出を遊技者に視認させやすくできる。
As a result, when the rendering unit 331 is swung back and forth (particularly moved backward) by the inertial force when the elevating body 330 is displaced to the lowered position or the inertial force generated by starting the driving device 340 described above, the rendering unit The back surface of 331 can be brought into contact with the base member 310 (semicircular recess 311). As a result, the production unit 331 can be prevented from swinging back and forth, and the production of the production unit 331 can be easily recognized by the player.
また、演出部３３１が、下降位置（図１０４（ｂ）参照）から上昇位置（図１０４（ａ）参照に変位する際に、演出部３３１の上端面が、ベース部材３１０（半円凹設部３１１）よりも背面側に変位して演出部３３１の上端部とベース部材３１０とが衝突して動かなくなることを抑制できる。
Further, when the effect unit 331 is displaced from the lowered position (see FIG. 104B) to the raised position (see FIG. 104A), the upper end surface of the effect unit 331 is the base member 310 (semicircular recess portion). 311), it is possible to prevent the upper end portion of the effect portion 331 and the base member 310 from colliding with each other and moving from the back side.
さらに、上述したように、基板部材３９０には、背面側からソケット３９４への配線が連結される。よって、昇降体３３０が下降位置に変位した際に、その配線が遊技者から視認可能とされる恐れがあるところ、演出部３３１の少なくとも一部がベース部材３１０（半円凹設部３１１）の一部と正面側に重なる状態とされるので、配線をベース部材３１０により遊技者から視認しにくくすることができる。
Further, as described above, the wiring from the back side to the socket 394 is connected to the board member 390. Therefore, when the elevating body 330 is displaced to the lowered position, the wiring may be visible to the player, but at least a part of the effect portion 331 is the base member 310 (semicircular recessed portion 311). Since it overlaps with a part of the front side, the wiring can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize the base member 310.
ここで、ベース部材（ベース部材３１０）と、そのベース部材に変位可能に配設される変位ユニット（昇降体３３０）とを備え、変位ユニットが、第１部材（外枠３６０）と、その第１部材よりも小さな外形に形成され第１部材の一部に重ね合わされる第２部材（ベース部分３３４）と、それら第１部材および第２部材の間に介設されると共に第２部材よりも大きな外形に形成される介設部材（介設部材３３５（レンズ部３７０、区画部材３８０、基板部材３９０））とを備えた遊技機が知られている。かかる遊技機によれば、変位ユニットは、第１部材に第２部材が重ね合わされていない部分が開放されるので、その開放された部分を利用して（開放された部分をベース部材に対面させることで）、変位ユニットをベース部材に近接させることができる。よって、その分、ベース部材および変位ユニットの配置に必要なスペースを抑制できる。
Here, a base member (base member 310) and a displacement unit (elevating body 330) disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable are provided. The displacement unit includes a first member (outer frame 360) and a first member thereof. A second member (base portion 334) formed in an outer shape smaller than one member and superimposed on a part of the first member, and interposed between the first member and the second member and more than the second member A gaming machine including an interposed member (an interposed member 335 (lens portion 370, partition member 380, substrate member 390)) having a large outer shape is known. According to such a gaming machine, since the portion where the second member is not superimposed on the first member is opened, the displacement unit uses the opened portion (the opened portion faces the base member). Thus, the displacement unit can be brought close to the base member. Therefore, the space required for the arrangement of the base member and the displacement unit can be reduced accordingly.
しかしながら、上述した従来の遊技機では、第１部材よりも第２部材が小さな外形に形成されるため、その分、第１部材および第２部材の間に介設部材を挟み込める面積が小さくなり、介設部材ががたつきやすいという問題点があった。第２部材が重ね合わされていない部分（開放された部分）において、第１部材に介設部材を締結ねじにより締結固定した場合には、がたつき難くできるが、開放された部分に締結ねじの頭が突出される。そのため、開放された部分を利用できなくなり（即ち、開放された部分をベース部材に対面させると、締結ねじの頭がベース部材に干渉する）、変位ユニットをベース部材に近接させることが阻害される。その結果、ベース部材および変位ユニットの配置に必要なスペースが嵩む。
However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the second member is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the first member, the area in which the interposed member can be sandwiched between the first member and the second member is reduced accordingly. There was a problem that the interposed member was easily rattled. When the interposed member is fastened and fixed to the first member with a fastening screw in the portion where the second member is not overlapped (opened portion), it can be difficult to rattle. The head is protruded. For this reason, the opened portion cannot be used (that is, when the opened portion faces the base member, the head of the fastening screw interferes with the base member), and the displacement unit is prevented from approaching the base member. . As a result, the space required for the arrangement of the base member and the displacement unit increases.
これに対し、本実施形態では、介設部材３３５が外枠３６０及びベース部分３３４の間に介設されると、介設部材３３５のうちの外枠３６０にベース部分３３４が重ね合わされていない側が外枠３６０側に付勢されるように形成されているので、介設部材３３５を外枠３６０に押し付けることができる。その結果、介設部材３３５のがたつきを抑制できる。
On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the interposition member 335 is interposed between the outer frame 360 and the base portion 334, the side of the interposition member 335 where the base portion 334 is not superimposed on the outer frame 360 is Since it is formed so as to be biased toward the outer frame 360, the interposed member 335 can be pressed against the outer frame 360. As a result, rattling of the interposed member 335 can be suppressed.
また、ベース部分３３４が重ね合わされていない部分（開放された部分）において、外枠３６０に介設部材３３５を締結ねじにより締結固定する必要がなく、締結ねじの頭と外枠３６０との干渉が発生しないので、昇降体３３０を外枠３６０に近接させることができる。よって、その分、外枠３６０及び昇降体３３０の配置に必要なスペースを抑制できる。
Further, it is not necessary to fasten and fix the interposed member 335 to the outer frame 360 with a fastening screw in a portion where the base portion 334 is not overlapped (opened portion), and interference between the head of the fastening screw and the outer frame 360 occurs. Since it does not occur, the elevating body 330 can be brought close to the outer frame 360. Therefore, the space required for the arrangement of the outer frame 360 and the lifting body 330 can be reduced accordingly.
さらに、昇降体３３０は、ベース部分３３４と介設部材３３５とを連結する連結手段（挿通孔３３４ｂ１、締結孔３７３ａ）を備え、ベース部分３３４は、介設部材３３５に当接可能に形成される突起３３４ａを備え、連結手段によってベース部分３３４と介設部材３３５とが連結される位置よりも外枠３６０にベース部分３３４が重ね合わされていない側に突起３３４ａが位置するので、連結手段によるベース部分３３４および介設部材３３５の連結に伴って、突起３３４ａを介設部材３３５に当接させて、介設部材３３５を外枠３６０に押し付けることができる。即ち、介設部材３３５のがたつきを抑制する構造を達成しつつ、組み立て作業を簡素化できる。
Further, the elevating body 330 is provided with connecting means (an insertion hole 334b1 and a fastening hole 373a) for connecting the base portion 334 and the interposed member 335, and the base portion 334 is formed so as to be able to contact the interposed member 335. The protrusion 334a is provided, and the protrusion 334a is located on the side of the outer frame 360 where the base portion 334 is not overlaid with respect to the position where the base portion 334 and the interposed member 335 are connected by the connecting means. In association with the connection of the interposition member 335 and the interposition member 335, the interposition member 335 can be pressed against the outer frame 360 by bringing the protrusion 334 a into contact with the interposition member 335. That is, the assembly work can be simplified while achieving a structure that suppresses rattling of the interposed member 335.
また、介設部材３３５（レンズ部３７０）に螺刻される締結孔３７３ａと、ベース部分３３４に穿設される挿通孔３３４ｂ１と、その挿通孔３３４ｂ１に挿通され締結孔３７３ａに螺合される締結ねじとから連結手段が形成されるので、介設部材３３５を外枠３６０に強固に押し付けることを可能として、介設部材３３５のがたつきをより確実に抑制できる。
In addition, a fastening hole 373a screwed into the interposition member 335 (lens portion 370), an insertion hole 334b1 drilled in the base portion 334, and a fastening threaded through the insertion hole 334b1 and screwed into the fastening hole 373a. Since the connecting means is formed from the screw, it is possible to firmly press the interposed member 335 against the outer frame 360, and the rattling of the interposed member 335 can be more reliably suppressed.
即ち、締結ねじを締結すると、その締結力により介設部材３３５をベース部分３３４へ引き付けることができる。よって、ベース部分３３４の突起３３４ａを支点として、その支点（突起３３４ａ）を挟んで引き付け力が作用される側と反対側をベース部材３１０に押し付けることができる。その結果、介設部材３３５を外枠３６０に強固に押し付けて、介設部材３３５のがたつきを抑制できる。
That is, when the fastening screw is fastened, the interposed member 335 can be attracted to the base portion 334 by the fastening force. Therefore, with the projection 334a of the base portion 334 as a fulcrum, the side opposite to the side on which the attractive force is applied can be pressed against the base member 310 with the fulcrum (projection 334a) interposed therebetween. As a result, the interposed member 335 can be firmly pressed against the outer frame 360, and rattling of the interposed member 335 can be suppressed.
詳しく説明すると、締結部３７３には、正面視円環状に貫通形成される締結孔３７３ａが形成される。一方、締結部３３４ｂには、その締結孔３７３ａと正面側から背面側に向かう方向に対向する位置に貫通する挿通孔３３４ｂ１が貫通形成される。挿通孔３３４ｂ１は、締結孔３７３ａに締結されるネジの外径よりも大きい内径に形成される。
More specifically, the fastening portion 373 is formed with a fastening hole 373a that is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front. On the other hand, the fastening portion 334b is formed with an insertion hole 334b1 penetrating through the fastening hole 373a at a position facing the fastening hole 373a in the direction from the front side toward the back side. The insertion hole 334b1 is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the screw fastened to the fastening hole 373a.
よって、外枠３６０とベース部分３３４との間に、レンズ部３７０、区画部材３８０及び基板部材３９０を配置した状態で、挿通孔３３４ｂ１にネジを挿通させると共に、ネジを締結孔３７３ａに螺合させることができる。
Therefore, with the lens portion 370, the partition member 380, and the substrate member 390 disposed between the outer frame 360 and the base portion 334, the screw is inserted into the insertion hole 334b1 and the screw is screwed into the fastening hole 373a. be able to.
これにより、レンズ部３７０の下端（図１０３下側）部分を後ろに引き付ける状態にできるので、レンズ部３７０の背面側に区画部材３８０を挟んだ状態で配置される基板部材３９０の下端部分を背面側に引き込んだ（引き込んだ）状態にできる。その結果、レンズ部３７０（区画部材３８０、基板部材３９０）を外枠３６０に強固に押し付けて、レンズ部３７０（区画部材３８０、基板部材３９０）のがたつきを抑制できる。
Thus, the lower end (lower side in FIG. 103) of the lens unit 370 can be pulled back, so that the lower end of the substrate member 390 arranged with the partition member 380 sandwiched between the rear side of the lens unit 370 It can be in the state of being pulled in. As a result, the lens portion 370 (the partition member 380 and the substrate member 390) is firmly pressed against the outer frame 360, and the rattling of the lens portion 370 (the partition member 380 and the substrate member 390) can be suppressed.
また、介設部材３３５は、ベース部材３１０側の面にＬＥＤ３９１が搭載される基板部材３９０と、その基板部材３９０のベース部材３１０側の面に配設されるレンズ部３７０とを備え、連結手段がベース部分３３４と介設部材３３５のレンズ部３７０とを連結すると共に、介設部材３３５の基板部材３９０が突起３３４ａに当接されるので、外枠３６０への押し付けをより強固に行うことができ、介設部材３３５のがたつきを抑制できる。
Further, the interposition member 335 includes a substrate member 390 on which the LED 391 is mounted on the surface on the base member 310 side, and a lens portion 370 disposed on the surface on the base member 310 side of the substrate member 390, and a connecting unit. Connects the base portion 334 and the lens portion 370 of the interposed member 335, and the substrate member 390 of the interposed member 335 is brought into contact with the protrusion 334a, so that the outer frame 360 can be more firmly pressed. And the rattling of the interposed member 335 can be suppressed.
即ち、基板部材３９０は部分的な変形の集中に弱いところ、連結部分に負荷が集中しやすい連結手段によるベース部分３３４との連結をレンズ部３７０が担うと共に、ベース部分３３４へ引き付けられた区画部材３８０の全体で基板部材３９０をベース部分３３４へ押し付けることができるので、基板部材３９０への部分的な負荷の集中を抑制できる。その結果、外枠３６０への押し付けをより強固に行うことができ、介設部材３３５のがたつきを抑制できる。
That is, since the substrate member 390 is weak against partial deformation concentration, the lens portion 370 is connected to the base portion 334 by a connecting means in which a load tends to concentrate on the connecting portion, and the partition member is attracted to the base portion 334. Since the substrate member 390 can be pressed against the base portion 334 with the entirety of 380, concentration of a partial load on the substrate member 390 can be suppressed. As a result, pressing to the outer frame 360 can be performed more firmly, and rattling of the interposed member 335 can be suppressed.
さらに、上述したように、基板部材３９０には、その下端部分（図１０３下側部分）にソケット３９４が形成され、そのソケット３９４に配線が上方から連結される。よって、配線の張力によりソケット３９４部分を背面側に引き付けた状態にできる。従って、基板部材３９０の上端部分に突起３３４ａとの当接位置を中心に前方に傾倒する方向の力を作用させることができる。その結果、外枠３６０への押し付けをより強固に行うことができ、介設部材３３５のがたつきを抑制できる。
Further, as described above, the board member 390 has the socket 394 formed at the lower end portion (the lower portion in FIG. 103), and the wiring is connected to the socket 394 from above. Therefore, the socket 394 portion can be attracted to the back side by the tension of the wiring. Accordingly, it is possible to apply a force in a direction of tilting forward around the contact position with the protrusion 334 a to the upper end portion of the substrate member 390. As a result, pressing to the outer frame 360 can be performed more firmly, and rattling of the interposed member 335 can be suppressed.
次いで、図１０５及び図１０６を参照して、演出部３３１の各部材の係合について説明する。図１０５（ａ）は、図１００（ａ）のＣＶａ−ＣＶａ線における昇降体３３０の断面図であり、図１０５（ｂ）は、図１０５（ａ）のＣＶｂ−ＣＶｂ線における昇降体３３０の断面図である。図１０６（ａ）及び図１０６（ｂ）は、昇降体３３０の部分拡大断面図である。
Next, with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106, the engagement of each member of the effect part 331 will be described. 105A is a cross-sectional view of the lifting body 330 taken along the line CVa-CVa in FIG. 100A, and FIG. 105B is a cross-sectional view of the lifting body 330 taken along the line CVb-CVb in FIG. FIG. 106 (a) and 106 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the elevating body 330. FIG.
なお、図１０６（ａ）及び図１０６（ｂ）は、図１０５（ａ）の昇降体３３０を部分的に拡大した断面図と対応する。また、図１０６（ａ）及び図１０６（ｂ）は、昇降体３３０の内側の各部材ががたついた状態がそれぞれ図示される。
106 (a) and 106 (b) correspond to a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the elevating body 330 in FIG. 105 (a). FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b) show a state in which each member inside the elevating body 330 is rattled.
図１０５に示すように、外枠３６０とレンズ部３７０とは、外枠３６０の突起３６３がレンズ部３７０の係合部３７２の一対の突起３７２ａの対向間に挿入される。また、レンズ部３７０と区画部材３８０とは、レンズ部３７０の係合部３７２の一対の突起３７２ａの対向間に区画部材３８０の鉤状部３８２の先端が挿入される。
As shown in FIG. 105, the outer frame 360 and the lens portion 370 are inserted between the projections 363 of the outer frame 360 facing the pair of projections 372 a of the engaging portion 372 of the lens portion 370. Further, in the lens portion 370 and the partition member 380, the tip of the hook-shaped portion 382 of the partition member 380 is inserted between the pair of protrusions 372a of the engaging portion 372 of the lens portion 370.
突起３６３は、外枠３６０の膨出部３６２の内側に位置し外枠３６０の背面側に突出形成される。また、突起３６３は、背面側（図１０５（ａ）右側）に向かって上方（図１０５（ａ）上方）に傾斜して形成されると共に、膨出部３６２の内側から水平方向（図１０５（ｂ）左右方向）に延設される。
The protrusion 363 is located on the inner side of the bulging portion 362 of the outer frame 360 and is formed to protrude from the back side of the outer frame 360. Further, the protrusion 363 is formed so as to be inclined upward (upward in FIG. 105 (a)) toward the back side (right side in FIG. 105 (a)) and horizontally from the inside of the bulging portion 362 (FIG. 105 (in FIG. 105). b) It extends in the left-right direction).
係合部３７２の突起３７２ａは、立設部３７１の外周面から水平方向（図１０５（ｂ）左右方向）に突出して形成され、対向間の上下方向（図１０５（ａ）上下方向）の距離寸法が、突起３６３の上下方向（図１０５（ａ）上下方向）の厚み寸法よりも大きく設定される。また、突起３７２ａは、背面側（図１０５（ａ）右側）に向かって上方（図１０５（ａ）上方）に傾斜して形成されると共に、対向側の側面が水平方向（図１０５（ｂ）左右方向）に延設して形成される。
The protrusion 372a of the engaging portion 372 is formed to project from the outer peripheral surface of the standing portion 371 in the horizontal direction (FIG. 105 (b) left-right direction), and the distance in the up-down direction (FIG. 105 (a) up-down direction) between the facing portions. The dimension is set to be larger than the thickness dimension of the protrusion 363 in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 105 (a)). Further, the protrusion 372a is formed so as to be inclined upward (upward in FIG. 105 (a)) toward the back side (right side in FIG. 105 (a)), and the opposite side surface is in the horizontal direction (FIG. 105 (b)). It is formed extending in the left-right direction.
外枠３６０の背面側へのレンズ部３７０の配置は、外枠３６０に対して、レンズ部３７０を背面側の上方から、係合部３７２の一対の突起３７２ａの対向間に突起３６３を挿入して行われる。
The lens unit 370 is disposed on the back side of the outer frame 360 with respect to the outer frame 360 such that the projection 363 is inserted between the lens unit 370 and the pair of projections 372a of the engagement unit 372 from above the back side. Done.
鉤状部３８２は、規制板３８１の外周面から水平方向（図１０５（ｂ）左右方向）に突出されると共に、正面側（図１０５（ａ）左側）に屈曲するＬ字状に形成される。鉤状部３８２の屈曲側は、背面側（図１０５（ａ）右側）に向かって上方（図１０５（ａ）上方）に傾斜して形成される。また、鉤状部３８２の先端部の上下方向（図１０５（ａ）上下方向）の厚み寸法は、係合部３７２の一対の突起３７２ａの対向間の上下方向の距離寸法よりも小さく設定される。
The hook-shaped portion 382 is formed in an L shape that protrudes in the horizontal direction (FIG. 105 (b) left-right direction) from the outer peripheral surface of the regulating plate 381 and bends to the front side (left side in FIG. 105 (a)). . The bent side of the hook-shaped portion 382 is formed to be inclined upward (upward in FIG. 105 (a)) toward the back side (right side in FIG. 105 (a)). Further, the thickness dimension in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 105 (a)) of the distal end portion of the hook-shaped portion 382 is set to be smaller than the vertical distance between the pair of projections 372a of the engaging portion 372. .
レンズ部３７０の背面側への区画部材３８０の配置は、レンズ部３７０に対して、区画部材３８０を背面側の上方から、係合部３７２の一対の突起３７２ａの対向間に突起３８２の先端側を挿入して行われる。
The partition member 380 is disposed on the back side of the lens unit 370 with respect to the lens unit 370 from the upper side of the back side of the partition member 380 between the pair of projections 372a of the engagement unit 372 on the tip side of the projection 382. Is done.
レンズ部３７０の係合部３７２の一対の突起３７２ａの対向間には、前方側に外枠３６０の突起３６３が挿入され、後方側に区画部材３８０の鉤状部３８２の先端が挿入される。
Between the pair of protrusions 372a of the engaging portion 372 of the lens portion 370, the protrusion 363 of the outer frame 360 is inserted on the front side, and the tip of the hook-shaped portion 382 of the partition member 380 is inserted on the rear side.
正面側（図１０５（ａ）左側）から背面側（図１０５（ａ）右側）に重畳される外枠３６０，レンズ部３７０及び区画部材３８０の係合をレンズ部３７０の係合部３７２により共有することができる。よって、レンズ部３７０及び外枠３６０の係合部分とレンズ部３７０及び区画部材３８０との係合部分をそれぞれレンズ部３７０に形成する必要がないので、レンズ部３７０の形成を簡易にできる。
The engagement of the outer frame 360, the lens unit 370, and the partition member 380 that are superimposed from the front side (left side in FIG. 105A) to the back side (right side in FIG. 105A) is shared by the engagement unit 372 of the lens unit 370. can do. Therefore, since it is not necessary to form the engaging part of the lens part 370 and the outer frame 360 and the engaging part of the lens part 370 and the partition member 380 in the lens part 370, the formation of the lens part 370 can be simplified.
この場合、図１０６（ａ）に示すように、係合部３７２の一対の突起３７２ａ及び鉤状部３８２の先端が背面側に向かって上方に傾斜して形成されるので、外枠３６０及びレンズ部３７０に対して、区画部材３８０及び基板部材３９０の上端部が背面側にがたついた場合に、鉤状部３８２の先端を係合部３７２の内側に当接させることができる。その結果、外枠３６０及びレンズ部３７０に対して、区画部材３８０及び基板部材３９０が背面側に所定量以上がたつくことを抑制できる。
In this case, as shown in FIG. 106 (a), the pair of protrusions 372a of the engaging portion 372 and the tip of the hook-shaped portion 382 are formed to be inclined upward toward the back side, so that the outer frame 360 and the lens When the upper end portions of the partition member 380 and the substrate member 390 are rattled to the back side with respect to the portion 370, the tip of the hook-shaped portion 382 can be brought into contact with the inside of the engaging portion 372. As a result, it is possible to prevent the partition member 380 and the substrate member 390 from shaking on the back side with respect to the outer frame 360 and the lens portion 370 by a predetermined amount or more.
図１０６（ｂ）に示すように、外枠３６０に対して、レンズ部３７０、区画部材３８０及び基板部材３９０の上端部が背面側にがたつく際には、係合部３７２の一対の突起３７２ａ及び外枠３６０の突起３６３が背面側に向かって上方に径方向に傾斜して形成されるので、突起３６３の端部を係合部３７２の内側に当接しやすくできる。その結果、外枠３６０に対して、レンズ部３７０、区画部材３８０及び基板部材３９０の上端部が背面側に所定量以上位置がたつくことを抑制できる。
As shown in FIG. 106 (b), when the upper end portions of the lens portion 370, the partition member 380, and the substrate member 390 are rattled to the back side with respect to the outer frame 360, the pair of protrusions 372 a of the engaging portion 372 and Since the projection 363 of the outer frame 360 is formed to be inclined in the radial direction upward toward the back side, the end portion of the projection 363 can be easily brought into contact with the inside of the engaging portion 372. As a result, it is possible to suppress the upper end portions of the lens portion 370, the partition member 380, and the substrate member 390 from being positioned on the back side by a predetermined amount or more with respect to the outer frame 360.
即ち、突起３６３と係合部３７２とが係合された状態では、外枠３６０にベース部分３３４が重ね合わされる方向視（正面視）において、突起３６３と係合部３７２とが少なくとも一部で重なるので、これら突起３６３と係合部３７２との重なりを利用して、外枠３６０にベース部分３３４が重ね合わされていない領域における介設部材３３５が、外枠３６０から離間する方向へ浮き上がることを抑制できる。その結果、介設部材３３５のがたつきを抑制できる。
That is, in a state in which the protrusion 363 and the engaging portion 372 are engaged, the protrusion 363 and the engaging portion 372 are at least partially in a direction view (front view) in which the base portion 334 is overlaid on the outer frame 360. Therefore, the interposition member 335 in the region where the base portion 334 is not superimposed on the outer frame 360 is lifted in a direction away from the outer frame 360 by utilizing the overlap between the protrusions 363 and the engaging portion 372. Can be suppressed. As a result, rattling of the interposed member 335 can be suppressed.
また、一対の突起３７２ａ及び鉤状部３８２の先端は、水平方向に延設されるので、区画部材３８０及び基板部材３９０の上端部分が背面側にがたついた場合の、係合部３７２と鉤状部３８２の先端との当接面積を大きくすることができる。その結果、外枠３６０及びレンズ部３７０に対して、区画部材３８０及び基板部材３９０が背面側に所定量以上位置がたつくことを抑制しやすくできる。
Further, since the tip ends of the pair of protrusions 372a and the hook-shaped portion 382 are extended in the horizontal direction, the engagement portion 372 when the upper end portions of the partition member 380 and the substrate member 390 rattle on the back side The contact area with the tip of the hook-shaped portion 382 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the partition member 380 and the substrate member 390 from being positioned on the back side by a predetermined amount or more with respect to the outer frame 360 and the lens portion 370.
また、係合状態においてレンズ部３７０は、区画部材３７０及び外枠３６０の保持をするので、基板部材３９０への部分的な負荷の集中を抑制できる。その結果、外枠３６０への押し付けをより強固に行うことができ、介設部材３３５のがたつきを抑制できる。
In addition, since the lens unit 370 holds the partition member 370 and the outer frame 360 in the engaged state, partial load concentration on the substrate member 390 can be suppressed. As a result, pressing to the outer frame 360 can be performed more firmly, and rattling of the interposed member 335 can be suppressed.
即ち、第１１実施形態における介設部材３３５は、一面側にＬＥＤ３９１が搭載される基板部材３９０と、その基板部材３９０の一面側に配設される区画部材３８０とを備え、介設部材３３５を保持する保持手段が介設部材３３５の区画部材３８０を保持すると共に、介設部材３３５の基板部材３９０が突起３３４ａに当接されるので、外枠３６０への押し付けをより強固に行うことができ、介設部材３３５のがたつきを抑制できる。
That is, the interposition member 335 in the eleventh embodiment includes a substrate member 390 on which the LED 391 is mounted on one surface side, and a partition member 380 disposed on the one surface side of the substrate member 390. The holding means for holding holds the partition member 380 of the interposed member 335 and the substrate member 390 of the interposed member 335 is brought into contact with the protrusion 334a, so that the pressing to the outer frame 360 can be performed more firmly. Further, rattling of the interposed member 335 can be suppressed.
さらに、外枠３６０に形成される突起３６３と介設部材３３５に形成される係合部３７２とを備え、突起３６３と係合部３７２との係合により外枠３６０に対する介設部材３３５の相対回転を規制することができるので、相対回転を規制できる分、介設部材３３５のがたつきを抑制できる。
Further, a projection 363 formed on the outer frame 360 and an engaging portion 372 formed on the interposition member 335 are provided, and the interposition member 335 relative to the outer frame 360 is engaged by the engagement between the projection 363 and the engaging portion 372. Since the rotation can be restricted, rattling of the interposed member 335 can be suppressed by the amount that the relative rotation can be restricted.
次いで、図１０７及び図１０８を参照して、第１２実施形態における昇降体３３０について説明する。上記第１１実施形態では、レンズ部３７０の下側とベース部分３３４の下側とを締結する場合を説明したが、第１２実施形態では、レンズ部３７０の下側と外枠３６０の下側との対向間に弾性部材ＤＢ１が配設される場合を説明する。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。
Next, with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108, a lifting body 330 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the lower side of the lens unit 370 and the lower side of the base portion 334 are fastened has been described. However, in the twelfth embodiment, the lower side of the lens unit 370 and the lower side of the outer frame 360 The case where elastic member DB1 is arrange | positioned between these will be demonstrated. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
図１０７は、第１２実施形態における昇降体３３０の分解斜視正面図である。図１０８は、昇降体３３０の断面図である。なお、図１０８は、図１０３の昇降体３３０の断面図と対応する。
FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective front view of the elevating body 330 in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 108 is a sectional view of the elevating body 330. 108 corresponds to a cross-sectional view of the lifting body 330 in FIG.
図１０７に示すように、第１２実施形態における昇降体３３０には、外枠３６０及びレンズ部３７０の間に弾性部材ＤＢ１が配置される。また、レンズ部３７０には、立設部３７１の外縁部下端から下方に突出する突設部１２３７４が形成される。
As shown in FIG. 107, the elevating body 330 in the twelfth embodiment is provided with an elastic member DB1 between the outer frame 360 and the lens portion 370. Further, the lens portion 370 is formed with a protruding portion 12374 that protrudes downward from the lower end of the outer edge portion of the standing portion 371.
弾性部材ＤＢ１は、弾性変形可能な材料から形成されると共に、正面視矩形の直方体に形成される。弾性部材ＤＢ１は、正面側から背面側（図１０８左右方向）における幅寸法が、突設部１２３７４及び外枠３６０の膨出部３６２の対向間よりも大きく設定される。
The elastic member DB1 is formed of an elastically deformable material and is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped having a front view. The elastic member DB1 is set such that the width dimension from the front side to the back side (left-right direction in FIG. 108) is larger than between the protruding portion 12374 and the bulging portion 362 of the outer frame 360.
図１０８に示すように、弾性部材ＤＢ１は、外枠３６０の膨出部３６２及びレンズ部３７０の突設部１２３７４の間に介設される。上述したように、弾性部材ＤＢ１は、その正面側から背面側（図１０８左右方向）における幅寸法が、突設部１２３７４及び外枠３６０の膨出部３６２の対向間よりも所定量大きく設定されるので、突設部１２３７４及び膨出部３６２の対向間に弾性変形された状態で保持される。
As shown in FIG. 108, the elastic member DB1 is interposed between the bulging portion 362 of the outer frame 360 and the protruding portion 12374 of the lens portion 370. As described above, the elastic member DB1 is set such that the width dimension from the front side to the back side (the left-right direction in FIG. 108) is larger by a predetermined amount than between the protruding portion 12374 and the bulging portion 362 of the outer frame 360. Therefore, it is held in an elastically deformed state between the protruding portion 12374 and the bulging portion 362 facing each other.
これにより、レンズ部３７０の下端部分（図１０８下端部分）を背面側（図１０８右側）に引き込んだ（付勢した）状態にできるので、レンズ部３７０の背面側に区画部材３８０を挟んだ状態で配置される基板部材３９０の下端部分を背面側に引き込んだ（付勢した）状態にできる。
Thus, the lower end portion (lower end portion in FIG. 108) of the lens portion 370 can be pulled (biased) to the back side (right side in FIG. 108), so that the partition member 380 is sandwiched on the back side of the lens portion 370. The lower end portion of the substrate member 390 arranged in (1) can be pulled (biased) to the back side.
上述したように、ベース部分３３４の突起３３４ａは、基板部材３９０の背面に当接する突出長さに設定されており、ベース部分３３４の上端部に位置される（即ち、突設部１２３７４よりも上方に配置される）。
As described above, the protrusion 334 a of the base portion 334 is set to a protruding length that contacts the back surface of the substrate member 390 and is positioned at the upper end portion of the base portion 334 (that is, above the protruding portion 12374. To be placed).
よって、基板部材３９０の下端側を背面側に引き込んだ（付勢した）状態とすることで、基板部材３９０の上端部分に突起３３４ａとの当接位置を中心に前方に傾倒する方向の力を作用させることができる。
Therefore, by setting the lower end side of the substrate member 390 to the back side (biased), a force in a direction in which the upper end portion of the substrate member 390 tilts forward around the contact position with the protrusion 334a is applied. Can act.
これにより、レンズ部３７０、区画部材３８０及び基板部材３９０の上端側が、外枠３６０の背面側にがたつくことを抑制できる。その結果、遊技者に外枠３７０及びレンズ部３７０の演出を視認させやすくできる。
Thereby, it can suppress that the upper end side of the lens part 370, the division member 380, and the board | substrate member 390 rattles to the back side of the outer frame 360. As a result, the player can easily view the effects of the outer frame 370 and the lens unit 370.
よって、第１２実施形態における昇降体３３０は、ベース部材３１０と介設部材３３５との間に圧縮変形された状態で介設される弾性部材ＤＢ１により連結部材（第１１実施形態参照）が形成されるので、介設部材３３５をベース部材３１０に強固に押し付けることを可能として、介設部材３３５のがたつきをより確実に抑制できる。
Therefore, in the elevating body 330 in the twelfth embodiment, a connecting member (see the eleventh embodiment) is formed by the elastic member DB1 that is interposed between the base member 310 and the interposed member 335 in a compressed and deformed state. Therefore, the interposition member 335 can be firmly pressed against the base member 310, and rattling of the interposition member 335 can be more reliably suppressed.
即ち、弾性部材ＤＢ１の弾性回復力により介設部材３３５をベース部分３３４へ引き付けることができる。よって、ベース部分３３４の突起３３４ａを支点として、その支点（突起３３４ａ）を挟んで引き付け力が作用される側と反対側をベース部材３１０に押し付けることができる。その結果、介設部材３３５をベース部材３１０に強固に押し付けて、介設部材３３５のがたつきを抑制できる。
That is, the interposed member 335 can be attracted to the base portion 334 by the elastic recovery force of the elastic member DB1. Therefore, with the projection 334a of the base portion 334 as a fulcrum, the side opposite to the side on which the attractive force is applied can be pressed against the base member 310 with the fulcrum (projection 334a) interposed therebetween. As a result, the interposed member 335 can be firmly pressed against the base member 310, and rattling of the interposed member 335 can be suppressed.
また、演出部３３１の上端部分の背面側（図１０８右側）にネジを締結する必要がないので、上部昇降ユニット３００が正面から背面の方向（図１０８左右方向）に大きくなることを抑制できる。
Moreover, since it is not necessary to fasten a screw | thread to the back side (FIG. 108 right side) of the upper end part of the production | presentation part 331, it can suppress that the upper raising / lowering unit 300 becomes large from the front to the back direction (FIG. 108 left-right direction).
なお、第１２実施形態では、弾性部材ＤＢ１を介設部材３３５の下方に配置して弾性部材ＤＢ１の圧縮変形を利用する場合について説明したが、弾性部材ＤＢ１を引っ張り力が作用する状態で、介設部材３３５の上部に配置しても同様の効果を得ることができる。
In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the elastic member DB1 is disposed below the interposed member 335 and the compressive deformation of the elastic member DB1 is used has been described. However, the elastic member DB1 is in a state in which a tensile force is applied. The same effect can be obtained even if it is arranged above the installation member 335.
次いで、図１０９及び図１１０を参照して、第１３実施形態における昇降体３３０について説明する。上記第１１実施形態では、レンズ部３７０の下側とベース部分３３４の下側とを締結する場合を説明したが、第１３実施形態では、レンズ部３７０の下側と外枠３６０の下側とが係合される場合を説明する。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。
Next, an elevating body 330 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the lower side of the lens unit 370 and the lower side of the base portion 334 are fastened has been described. However, in the thirteenth embodiment, the lower side of the lens unit 370 and the lower side of the outer frame 360 Will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
図１０９及び図１１０を参照して、第１３実施形態における昇降体３３０について詳しく説明する。図１０９は、第１３実施形態における昇降体３３０の分解斜視正面図である。図１１０は、昇降体３３０の断面図である。なお、図１１０は、図１０３の昇降体３３０の断面図と対応する。
With reference to FIG. 109 and FIG. 110, the raising / lowering body 330 in 13th Embodiment is demonstrated in detail. FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective front view of the elevating body 330 in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 110 is a cross-sectional view of the lifting body 330. 110 corresponds to a cross-sectional view of the lifting body 330 in FIG.
図１０９に示すように、第１３実施形態における昇降体３３０のレンズ部３７０には、立設部３７１の外縁下端から下方に突出する突設部１３３７４が形成される。また、ベース部分３３４には、背面側（図１１０右側）から正面側（図１１０左側）に鉤状に突出する係合部１３３３４ｄが形成される。係合部１３３３４ｄは、ベース部分３３４の下側から正面側に突出して形成されると共に、先端部分が上方に屈曲する断面Ｌ字状に形成される。
As shown in FIG. 109, the lens portion 370 of the elevating body 330 in the thirteenth embodiment is formed with a protruding portion 13374 that protrudes downward from the lower edge of the outer edge of the standing portion 371. Further, the base portion 334 is formed with an engaging portion 13334d that protrudes in a hook shape from the back side (right side in FIG. 110) to the front side (left side in FIG. 110). The engaging portion 13334d is formed so as to protrude from the lower side of the base portion 334 to the front side, and is formed in an L-shaped cross section with the tip portion bent upward.
図１１０に示すように、係合部１３３３４ｄの屈曲部分は、断面視略三角形状に形成されており、その前後（図１１０左右）の上面が正面側（図１１０左側）と背面側（図１１０右側）に向かって下降傾斜して形成される。
As shown in FIG. 110, the bent portion of the engaging portion 13334d is formed in a substantially triangular shape in cross-section, and the top surfaces of the front and rear (left and right in FIG. 110) are the front side (left side in FIG. 110) and the back side (FIG. 110). (Lower right).
係合部１３３３４ｄと突設部１３３７４とは、昇降体３３０が組み付けられた状態では、係合部１３３３４ｄの屈曲部分の背面側の傾斜面１３３３４ｄ１が突出部１３３７４の先端部分と当接した状態とされる。
The engaging portion 13334d and the projecting portion 13374 are in a state in which the inclined surface 13334d1 on the back side of the bent portion of the engaging portion 13334d is in contact with the tip portion of the protruding portion 13374 in a state in which the elevating body 330 is assembled. The
また、係合部１３３３４ｄは、基端側の上面の上下方向位置が突設部１３３７４の突出先端位置における上下方向位置と略同一に設定されると共に、屈曲部分までの突出距離が、突設部１３３７４とベース部分３３４との対向間よりも所定量小さく設定される。
In addition, the engaging portion 13334d is configured such that the vertical position of the upper surface on the base end side is set substantially the same as the vertical position at the protruding tip position of the protruding portion 13374, and the protruding distance to the bent portion is the protruding portion. 13374 and the base portion 334 are set to be smaller by a predetermined amount than between the opposing portions.
これにより、係合部１３３３４ｄの基端側を弾性変形させつつ、屈曲側の傾斜面１３３３４ｄ１を突設部１３３７４に係合（当接）させることができる。よって、係合部１３３３４ｄを弾性変形させて保持するので、その弾性回復力により作用する力を突設部１３３７４を通じてレンズ部３７０に作用させることができる。
Accordingly, the bent inclined surface 13334d1 can be engaged (contacted) with the protruding portion 13374 while elastically deforming the proximal end side of the engaging portion 13334d. Therefore, since the engaging portion 13334d is elastically deformed and held, a force acting by the elastic recovery force can be applied to the lens portion 370 through the protruding portion 13374.
詳しく説明すると、係合部が１３３３４ｅが弾性変形することで、屈曲部分が下方に変位された状態とされる。よって、傾斜面１３３３４ｄ１と突設部１３３７４とが当接する状態とされるので、傾斜面１３３３４ｄ１が上方に弾性回復しようとする力により、突設部１３３７４の先端部分を背面側に引き込む方向に力を作用させることができる。
More specifically, the bent portion is displaced downward by the elastic deformation of the engaging portion 13334e. Therefore, since the inclined surface 13334d1 and the projecting portion 13374 are brought into contact with each other, a force is exerted in a direction in which the tip portion of the projecting portion 13374 is pulled back by the force with which the inclined surface 13334d1 tries to elastically recover upward. Can act.
これにより、レンズ部３７０の下端部分を後ろに引き込んだ（引き込む）状態にできるので、レンズ部３７０の背面側に区画部材３８０を挟んだ状態で配置される基板部材３９０の下端部分を背面側に引き込んだ（引き込む）状態にできる。
Accordingly, the lower end portion of the lens portion 370 can be pulled back (retracted), so that the lower end portion of the substrate member 390 arranged with the partition member 380 sandwiched between the rear surface side of the lens portion 370 and the rear side. Can be in a retracted state.
上述したように、ベース部分３３４の突起３３４ａは、基板部材３９０の背面に当接する突出長さに設定されており、ベース部分３３４の上端部に位置される（即ち、係合部１３３３４ｅよりも上方に配置される）。
As described above, the protrusion 334a of the base portion 334 is set to a protruding length that contacts the back surface of the substrate member 390, and is positioned at the upper end portion of the base portion 334 (that is, above the engaging portion 13334e). To be placed).
よって、基板部材３９０の下端側を背面側に引き込んだ（引き込む）状態とすることで、基板部材３９０の上端部分に突起３３４ａとの当接位置を中心に前方に傾倒する方向の力を作用させることができる。
Therefore, by setting the lower end side of the substrate member 390 to the back side (withdrawn), a force in a direction tilting forward is applied to the upper end portion of the substrate member 390 around the contact position with the protrusion 334a. be able to.
これにより、レンズ部３７０、区画部材３８０及び基板部材３９０の上端側が、外枠３６０の背面側にがたつくことを抑制できる。その結果、遊技者に外枠３７０及びレンズ部３７０の演出を視認させやすくできる。
Thereby, it can suppress that the upper end side of the lens part 370, the division member 380, and the board | substrate member 390 rattles to the back side of the outer frame 360. As a result, the player can easily view the effects of the outer frame 370 and the lens unit 370.
よって、第１３実施形態における昇降体３３０は、介設部材３３５を係止可能に形成されベース部分３３４に配設される係合部１３３３４ｄから連結手段が形成され、係合部１３３３４ｄは、介設部材３３５を突起３３４ａへ付勢する状態で介設部材３３５を係止するので、介設部材３３５をベース部材３１０に強固に押し付けることを可能として、介設部材３３５のがたつきをより確実に抑制できる。
Therefore, the elevating body 330 according to the thirteenth embodiment has a connecting means formed from an engaging portion 13334d that is formed so as to be able to lock the interposed member 335 and is disposed on the base portion 334, and the engaging portion 13334d Since the interposition member 335 is locked in a state in which the member 335 is biased to the protrusion 334a, the interposition member 335 can be firmly pressed against the base member 310, and rattling of the interposition member 335 is more reliably performed. Can be suppressed.
即ち、係合部１３３３４ｄに係止されると介設部材３３５が突起３３４ａへ付勢されるので、ベース部分３３４の突起３３４ａを支点として、その支点（突起３３４ａ）を挟んで引き付け力が作用される側と反対側をベース部材３１０に押し付けることができる。その結果、介設部材３３５をベース部材３１０に強固に押し付けて、介設部材３３５のがたつきを抑制できる。
That is, when the engaging member 13334d is locked, the interposition member 335 is urged toward the protrusion 334a, so that an attracting force is applied with the protrusion 334a of the base portion 334 as a fulcrum and sandwiching the fulcrum (protrusion 334a). The opposite side can be pressed against the base member 310. As a result, the interposed member 335 can be firmly pressed against the base member 310, and rattling of the interposed member 335 can be suppressed.
また、昇降体３３０の組み立て時には、係合部１３３３４ｄを介設部材３３５に係止させることで、介設部材３３５とベース部分３３４との連結を行うことができ、締結ねじの挿通孔３３４ｂ１への挿通や螺合などの締結作業を行う必要がないので、その分、工数を抑制でき、組み立て作業の作業性を向上できる。
Further, when assembling the elevating body 330, the engaging member 13334d is locked to the interposed member 335, whereby the interposed member 335 and the base portion 334 can be connected, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 334b1. Since it is not necessary to perform fastening work such as insertion and screwing, man-hours can be reduced correspondingly and workability of assembly work can be improved.
さらに、演出部３３１の上端部分の背面側にネジを締結する必要がないので、上部昇降ユニット３００が前後方向に大きくなることを抑制できる。
Furthermore, since it is not necessary to fasten a screw to the back side of the upper end portion of the effect portion 331, it is possible to suppress the upper lift unit 300 from increasing in the front-rear direction.
また、第１３実施形態では、係合部１３３３４ｄは、屈曲部分が、断面略三角形状に形成される。これにより、係合部１３３３４ｄの傾斜面１３３３４ｄ１を突設部１３３７４に係合（当接）させる際に、係合させやすくできる。
In the thirteenth embodiment, the engaging portion 13334d has a bent portion having a substantially triangular cross section. Accordingly, when the inclined surface 13334d1 of the engaging portion 13334d is engaged (contacted) with the projecting portion 13374, it can be easily engaged.
詳しく説明すると、外枠３６０（基板部材３９０）の背面側に、ベース部分３３４を配設する際に、係合部１３３３４ｄの屈曲先端側の傾斜面１３３３４ｄ１に突設部１３３７４の端部を当接させることで、係合部１３３３４ｄの基端側を弾性変形させつつ、係合部１３３３４ｄの屈曲部分を突設部１３３７４の正面側に位置させることができる。
More specifically, when the base portion 334 is disposed on the back side of the outer frame 360 (substrate member 390), the end portion of the projecting portion 13374 is brought into contact with the inclined surface 13334d1 on the bent distal end side of the engaging portion 13334d. By doing so, the bent portion of the engaging portion 13334d can be positioned on the front side of the protruding portion 13374 while elastically deforming the proximal end side of the engaging portion 13334d.
よって、係合部１３３３４ｄと突設部１３３７４との係合を、外枠３６０（基板部材３９０）の背面側に、ベース部分３３４を配設する動作と一緒に行うことができるので、その係合を簡易に行うことができる。
Therefore, the engagement between the engaging portion 13334d and the protruding portion 13374 can be performed together with the operation of disposing the base portion 334 on the back side of the outer frame 360 (substrate member 390). Can be performed easily.
次いで、図１１１を参照して、第１４実施形態の昇降体３３０について説明する。上記第１１実施形態では、外枠３６０とレンズ部３７０とは、突起３６３及び係合部３７２のみで係合される場合を説明したが、第１４実施形態では、外枠３６０の下端部分（図１１１下側部分）とレンズ部３７０の下端部分（図１１１下側部分）とが係合される場合を説明する。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。
Next, an elevating body 330 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the outer frame 360 and the lens portion 370 are engaged only by the protrusion 363 and the engaging portion 372 has been described. However, in the fourteenth embodiment, the lower end portion of the outer frame 360 (see FIG. (111 lower part) and the lower end part (lower part of FIG. 111) of the lens part 370 are engaged. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
図１１１は、第１４実施形態における昇降体３３０の断面図である。なお、図１１１は、図１０３の昇降体３３０の断面図と対応する。
FIG. 111 is a cross-sectional view of the elevating body 330 in the fourteenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 111 corresponds to a cross-sectional view of the lifting body 330 in FIG. 103.
図１０９に示すように、第１４実施形態における昇降体３３０の外枠３６０には、膨出部３６２の下方側（図１１１下側）から背面側（図１１１右側）に突出する係合部１４３６２ａが形成される。係合部１４３６２ａは、背面側に突出して形成され、その先端部に上方（図１１１上方）に屈曲して立設する立設部１４３６２ａ１を備える断面Ｌ字状に形成される。
As shown in FIG. 109, the outer frame 360 of the elevating body 330 in the fourteenth embodiment has an engaging portion 14362a protruding from the lower side (lower side in FIG. 111) of the bulging portion 362 to the rear side (right side in FIG. 111). Is formed. The engaging portion 14362a is formed so as to protrude to the back surface side, and is formed in an L-shaped cross section including a standing portion 14362a1 that is bent upward at the tip portion (upward in FIG. 111).
また、レンズ部３７０の下端部外縁には、径方向外側（下方側）に突出する凸部１４３７５が形成される。凸部１４３７５は、正面側（図１１１左側）から背面側（図１１右側）における幅寸法が膨出部３６２と立設部１４３６２ａ１との対向間の距離寸法よりも小さく設定される。
Further, a convex portion 14375 that protrudes radially outward (downward) is formed on the outer edge of the lower end portion of the lens portion 370. The convex portion 14375 is set such that the width dimension from the front side (left side in FIG. 111) to the rear side (right side in FIG. 11) is smaller than the distance dimension between the opposed portions of the bulging portion 362 and the standing portion 14362a1.
よって、外枠３６０の背面側にレンズ部３７０を配設する際に、膨出部３６２と立設部１４３６２ａ１との対向間にレンズ部３７０の凸部１４３７５を挿入できる。これにより、レンズ部３７０の下端側が背面側にがたつく場合には、凸部１４３７５の背面側を立設部１４３６２ａ１と当接させることができる。その結果、外枠３６０に対して、レンズ部３７０の下端側（図１１１下側部分）が背面側（図１１１右側）に位置ずれすることを抑制できる。
Therefore, when the lens portion 370 is disposed on the back side of the outer frame 360, the convex portion 14375 of the lens portion 370 can be inserted between the bulging portion 362 and the standing portion 14362a1. Thereby, when the lower end side of the lens part 370 rattles to the back side, the back side of the convex part 14375 can be brought into contact with the standing part 14362a1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower end side (lower part in FIG. 111) of the lens unit 370 from being displaced toward the back side (right side in FIG. 111) with respect to the outer frame 360.
ここで、上述した第１１実施形態では、レンズ部３７０の下端側を係合する手段がないので、レンズ部３７０の下端側が背面側に引き込まれて、外枠３６０に対してレンズ部３７０の下端側が背面側にがたつく恐れがあった。
Here, in the eleventh embodiment described above, since there is no means for engaging the lower end side of the lens unit 370, the lower end side of the lens unit 370 is drawn to the back side, and the lower end of the lens unit 370 with respect to the outer frame 360. There was a risk that the side would rattle on the back side.
これに対し、第１４実施形態では、外枠３６０とレンズ部３７０とが下端側（図１１１下側部分）で係合（保持）されるので、外枠３６０に対してレンズ部３７０の下端側が背面側にがたつくことを抑制できる。
On the other hand, in the fourteenth embodiment, the outer frame 360 and the lens portion 370 are engaged (held) on the lower end side (the lower portion in FIG. 111), so that the lower end side of the lens portion 370 with respect to the outer frame 360 is It is possible to suppress rattling on the back side.
昇降体３３０は、外枠３６０に形成されると共に介設部材３３５を保持する保持手段（係合部１４３６２ａ１及び凸部１４３７５）を備え、保持手段は、突起３３４ａに当接される位置よりもベース部分３３４に連結される側の位置で介設部材３３５を保持するので、連結手段の作用により介設部材３３５がベース部分３３４へ引き付けられた際に、外枠３６０にベース部分３３４が重ね合わされていない側と反対側において、外枠３６０と介設部材３３５との間に隙間が形成されることを抑制できる。その結果、昇降体３３０の外観の向上を図ることができる。
The elevating body 330 includes holding means (engagement part 14362a1 and convex part 14375) that are formed on the outer frame 360 and hold the interposition member 335, and the holding means is located at a base rather than a position where it comes into contact with the protrusion 334a. Since the interposition member 335 is held at a position connected to the portion 334, the base portion 334 is overlapped with the outer frame 360 when the interposition member 335 is attracted to the base portion 334 by the action of the coupling means. It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the outer frame 360 and the interposed member 335 on the side opposite to the non-side. As a result, the appearance of the elevating body 330 can be improved.
次いで、図１１２から図１１６を参照して、第１５実施形態における上部昇降ユニット１５３００について説明する。上記第１実施形態では、ベース部材３１０の長手方向（図１３左右方向）に４つ並設される昇降体３３０への駆動力の伝達が、ベース部材３１０の長手方向（図１３左右方向）中央内側から伝達される場合を説明したが、第１５実施形態では、ベース部材３１０の長手方向（図１１２左右方向）に４つ並設される昇降体３３０への駆動力の伝達がベース部材３１０の長手方向（図１１２左右方向）外側から伝達される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。
Next, with reference to FIG. 112 to FIG. 116, an upper lifting / lowering unit 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the transmission of the driving force to the elevating bodies 330 arranged in parallel in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (left and right direction in FIG. 13) is the center of the base member 310 in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 13). In the fifteenth embodiment, the driving force is transmitted to the elevating bodies 330 arranged in parallel in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (the left-right direction in FIG. 112). It is transmitted from the outside in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 112). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
初めに、図１１２及び図１１３を参照して、第１５実施形態における上部昇降ユニット１５３００について説明する。図１１２は、第１５実施形態における上部昇降ユニット１５３００の背面図である。図１１３（ａ）及び図１１３（ｂ）は、図１１２の範囲ＣＸＩＩＩにおける上部昇降ユニット１５３００の背面図である。
First, with reference to FIG. 112 and FIG. 113, the upper lifting / lowering unit 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 112 is a rear view of the upper elevating unit 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment. 113 (a) and 113 (b) are rear views of the upper elevating unit 15300 in the range CXIII in FIG.
なお、図１１２及び図１１３では、背面カバー３２０及び駆動モータ３４１が取り外された状態が図示される。また、図１１２及び図１１３（ａ）では、ベース部材３１０の長手方向（図１１２左右方向）に４つ並設される昇降体３３０が全て下降位置に位置された状態が図示される。さらに、図１１３（ｂ）では、昇降体３３０が下降位置から所定量上方に変位された状態が図示される。
112 and 113 show a state in which the back cover 320 and the drive motor 341 are removed. 112 and 113 (a) show a state in which all four elevating bodies 330 arranged in parallel in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (the left-right direction in FIG. 112) are positioned at the lowered position. Further, FIG. 113B shows a state in which the elevating body 330 is displaced upward by a predetermined amount from the lowered position.
図１１２に示すように、第１５実施形態における昇降体３３０は、各ラック３３２の歯面が、ベース部材３１０の長手方向（図１１２左右方向）中央部を中心に左右外側に形成され、第２ギア１５３５２が歯合される。
As shown in FIG. 112, the lifting body 330 in the fifteenth embodiment has the tooth surfaces of the racks 332 formed on the left and right outer sides around the center in the longitudinal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 112) of the base member 310. The gear 15352 is meshed.
この場合、図１１３に示すように、昇降体３３０を、下降位置（図１１３（ａ）に示す位置）から第２ギア１５３５２を回転駆動させて、所定量上方（図１１３（ｂ）に示す位置）に変位されると、駆動初期の慣性力により昇降体３３０に配置される演出部３３１がベース部材３１０の長手方向（図１１２左右方向）に傾きつつ上方に変位される。
In this case, as shown in FIG. 113, the lifting / lowering body 330 is driven to rotate the second gear 15352 from the lowered position (position shown in FIG. 113 (a)), and the position shown in FIG. 113 (b). ) Is displaced upward while tilting in the longitudinal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 112) of the base member 310 by the inertial force at the initial stage of driving.
詳しく説明すると、昇降体３３０は、ラック３３２（ラック）と第２ギア１５３５２（ピニオン）により変位可能に構成される。そのため、第２ギア１５３５２が回転され、ラック３３２が駆動されると、ラック３３２の変位方向側に第２ギア１５３５２から離間する方向の力が作用する。従って、ラック３３２の変位方向と反対側に配置される演出部３３１がベース部材３１０の長手方向（図１１２左右方向）に傾きつつ上方に変位される。
Specifically, the elevating body 330 is configured to be displaceable by a rack 332 (rack) and a second gear 15352 (pinion). Therefore, when the second gear 15352 is rotated and the rack 332 is driven, a force in a direction away from the second gear 15352 acts on the displacement direction side of the rack 332. Accordingly, the effect portion 331 disposed on the opposite side of the displacement direction of the rack 332 is displaced upward while being inclined in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (the left-right direction in FIG. 112).
ここで、第１５実施形態では、上部昇降ユニット１５３００に配設される昇降体３３０（演出部３３１）の中央２つが、正面側から背面側の方向（図１１３（ａ）紙面奥側から紙面手前側の方向）に同一の位置に配置されると共に、ベース部材３１０の長手方向（図１１３（ａ）左右方向）に並設されるので、駆動初期の慣性力により演出部３３１がベース部材３１０の長手方向（図１１３（ｂ）左右方向）に傾いて一方の演出部３３１が、他方の演出部３３１に衝突する恐れがある。
Here, in the fifteenth embodiment, the center two of the elevating bodies 330 (the rendering unit 331) disposed in the upper elevating unit 15300 are in the direction from the front side to the back side (FIG. 113 (a) from the back side to the front of the page. Are arranged at the same position (in the direction of the side) and are juxtaposed in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (FIG. 113 (a) left and right direction). There is a possibility that one effect part 331 may collide with the other effect part 331 by tilting in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 113 (b)).
これに対し、第１５実施形態では、各ラック３３２の歯面が、ベース部材３１０の長手方向（図１１３（ａ）左右方向）外側の位置に形成され、第２ギア１５３５２の伝達ギア３５２が歯合される。
On the other hand, in the fifteenth embodiment, the tooth surface of each rack 332 is formed at a position outside the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (the left-right direction in FIG. 113 (a)), and the transmission gear 352 of the second gear 15352 is toothed. Combined.
よって、図１１３（ｂ）に示すように、ベース部材３１０の長手方向他側（図１１３（ｂ）右側）にラック３３２の歯面が形成される昇降体３３０は、第２ギア１５３５２が回転されると、ベース部材３１０の短手方向一端（図１１３（ｂ）上端）部分のラック３３２をベース部材３１０の長手方向一側（図１１３（ｂ）左側）に押し出す。これにより、ベース部材３１０の短手方向他端（図１１３（ｂ）下端）のラック３３２をベース部材３１０の長手方向他側（図１１３（ｂ）右側）に傾ける。よって、演出部３３１をベース部材３１０の長手方向他側（図１１３（ｂ）右側）に変位させることができる。
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), the second gear 15352 is rotated in the elevating body 330 in which the tooth surface of the rack 332 is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (right side in FIG. 113 (b)). Then, the rack 332 at one end in the short direction of the base member 310 (upper end in FIG. 113B) is pushed out to one side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (left side in FIG. 113B). Thereby, the rack 332 at the other end in the short side direction of the base member 310 (the lower end in FIG. 113B) is tilted to the other side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (the right side in FIG. 113B). Therefore, the effect part 331 can be displaced to the other side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (right side in FIG. 113 (b)).
一方、ベース部材３１０の長手方向一側（図１１３（ｂ）左側）にラック３３２の歯面が形成される昇降体３３０は、第２ギア１５３４２が回転されると、ベース部材３１０の短手方向一側（図１１３（ｂ）上端）部分のラック３３２をベース部材３１０の長手方向他側（図１１３（ｂ）右側）に押し出す。これにより、ベース部分の短手方向他側（図１１３（ｂ）下端）のラック３３２をベース部材３１０の長手方向一側（図１１３（ｂ）左側）に傾ける。よって、演出部３３１をベース部材３１０の長手方向一側（図１１３（ｂ）左側）に変位させることができる。
On the other hand, the elevating body 330 in which the tooth surface of the rack 332 is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (left side in FIG. 113 (b)) is the short direction of the base member 310 when the second gear 15342 is rotated. The rack 332 at one side (upper end in FIG. 113 (b)) is pushed out to the other side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (right side in FIG. 113 (b)). As a result, the rack 332 on the other side in the short side direction of the base portion (the lower end in FIG. 113 (b)) is tilted to one side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (left side in FIG. 113 (b)). Therefore, the effect part 331 can be displaced to one side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (left side in FIG. 113 (b)).
よって、昇降体３３０が下端位置（図１１３（ａ）に示す位置）に位置する状態から、第２ギア３５２が回転されラック３３２が駆動される（昇降体３３０が上方に変位される）と、左右に並設される昇降体３３０の演出部３３１を互いに離間する方向Ｘ１（図１１３（ｂ）参照）へ変位させることができる。
Therefore, when the second gear 352 is rotated and the rack 332 is driven (the elevator 330 is displaced upward) from the state where the elevator 330 is located at the lower end position (the position shown in FIG. 113A). The effect parts 331 of the lifting body 330 arranged side by side can be displaced in the direction X1 (see FIG. 113B) separating from each other.
その結果、上部昇降ユニット１５３００に配設される昇降体３３０の中央２つの演出部３３１が、下降位置から変位された際に、一方の演出部３３１が他方の演出部３３１に衝突することを抑制できる。
As a result, it is suppressed that one effect part 331 collides with the other effect part 331 when the center two effect parts 331 of the lifting body 330 arranged in the upper lifting unit 15300 are displaced from the lowered position. it can.
次いで、図１１４を参照して、第２ギア１５３５２について説明する。図１１４（ａ）は、第２ギア１５３５２の正面図であり、図１１４（ｂ）は、第２ギア１５３５２の側面図である。
Next, the second gear 15352 will be described with reference to FIG. 114 (a) is a front view of the second gear 15352, and FIG. 114 (b) is a side view of the second gear 15352. FIG.
図１１４に示すように、第２ギア１５３５２は、正面側（図１１４（ｂ）左側）と背面側（図１１４（ｂ）右側）とで歯形の異なる２層のギアから構成され、ドーナツ板形状に構成される中間板１５３５３と、その中間板１５３５３の正面側に形成され歯形が一部異形とされる異形ギア部３５４と、中間板１５３５３の背面側に平歯車形状に形成されるラック３３２（図１５参照）と歯合される伝達ギア部３５５と、を備える。
As shown in FIG. 114, the second gear 15352 is constituted by two layers of gears having different tooth shapes on the front side (left side in FIG. 114 (b)) and the back side (right side in FIG. 114 (b)), and has a donut plate shape. An intermediate plate 15353, a deformed gear portion 354 formed on the front side of the intermediate plate 15353 and having a partially deformed tooth shape, and a rack 332 formed in a spur gear shape on the back side of the intermediate plate 15353 ( 15) and a transmission gear portion 355 that meshes with the transmission gear portion 355.
中間板１５３５３は、異形ギア部３５４及び伝達ギア部３５５のギア歯の先端よりも径方向外側まで張り出して形成される。そのため、第２ギア１５３５２は、異形ギア部３５４及び伝達ギア部３５５と歯合される相手部材（第１ギア３５１又はラック３３２（図１５参照））と歯面に平行な方向で中間板１５３５３に重なることで中間板１５３５３に当接可能とされる（図１７参照）。よって、その相手部材（第１ギア３５１又はラック３３２（図１５参照））が昇降体３３０の昇降動作時に歯面と平行な方向へ移動することを抑制することができる。
The intermediate plate 15353 is formed so as to protrude outward in the radial direction from the tips of the gear teeth of the deformed gear portion 354 and the transmission gear portion 355. Therefore, the second gear 15352 is attached to the intermediate plate 15353 in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the mating member (the first gear 351 or the rack 332 (see FIG. 15)) meshed with the deformed gear portion 354 and the transmission gear portion 355. By overlapping, it is possible to contact the intermediate plate 15353 (see FIG. 17). Therefore, it can suppress that the other party member (the 1st gear 351 or rack 332 (refer to Drawing 15)) moves to the direction parallel to a tooth surface at the time of raising / lowering operation of raising / lowering body 330.
また、中間板１５３５３は、その外縁部の一部から径方向外側に膨出する膨出部１５３５３ａが形成される。膨出部１５３５３ａは、正面視半円弧状に膨出して形成されると共に、中間板１５３５３の中央側と同じ板厚で形成される。なお、膨出部１５３５３ａの第２ギア１５３５２の回転中心からの距離寸法Ｒ１についての詳しい説明は後述する。
Further, the intermediate plate 15353 is formed with a bulging portion 15353a bulging radially outward from a part of the outer edge portion thereof. The bulging portion 15353 a is formed to bulge in a semicircular arc shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with the same thickness as the center side of the intermediate plate 15353. A detailed description of the distance dimension R1 from the rotation center of the second gear 15352 of the bulging portion 15353a will be described later.
膨出部１５３５３ａは、中間板１５３５３の一部から径方向外側に膨出して形成されるので、昇降体３３０が組み立てられた状態で、ラック３３２の側面に当接可能とされる。従って、膨出部１５３５３ａと被当接部３３２ｂとの間の距離が最少となる（膨出先端）部分は、後述する演出部３３１（ラック３３２）が慣性力の影響を受けやすい位置に設定される。そのため、ラック３３２のがたつきが発生しやすい。従って、膨出部１５３５３ａがラック３３２の側面に当接可能に形成されることが特に有効となる。
Since the bulging portion 15353a is formed to bulge radially outward from a part of the intermediate plate 15353, the bulging portion 15353a can be brought into contact with the side surface of the rack 332 in the assembled state. Therefore, the portion where the distance between the bulging portion 15353a and the contacted portion 332b is minimized (the bulging tip) is set at a position where the later-described effect portion 331 (rack 332) is easily affected by the inertial force. The Therefore, rattling of the rack 332 is likely to occur. Accordingly, it is particularly effective that the bulging portion 15353a is formed so as to be able to contact the side surface of the rack 332.
次いで、図１１５及び図１１６を参照して、昇降体３３０が上昇位置から下方に変位される場合の説明をする。図１１５（ａ）及び図１１６（ａ）は、昇降体３３０及び伝達装置３５０の正面図であり、図１１５（ｂ）は、図１１５（ａ）の範囲ＣＸＶｂにおける昇降体３３０及び伝達装置３５０の正面図であり、図１１６（ｂ）は、図１１６（ａ）の範囲ＣＸＶＩｂにおける昇降体３３０及び伝達装置３５０の正面図である。
Next, the case where the elevating body 330 is displaced downward from the raised position will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116. 115 (a) and 116 (a) are front views of the lifting body 330 and the transmission device 350, and FIG. 115 (b) is a front view of the lifting body 330 and the transmission device 350 in the range CXVb of FIG. 115 (a). FIG. 116B is a front view of the elevating body 330 and the transmission device 350 in the range CXVIb of FIG. 116A.
なお、図１１５（ａ）及び図１１５（ｂ）では、昇降体３３０が上昇位置に配置された状態が、図１１６（ａ）及び図１１６（ｂ）では、昇降体３３０が上昇位置（図１１５（ａ）に示す位置）から所定量下方に変位された状態が図示される。また、図１１５（ｂ）及び図１１６（ｂ）には、重力方向に平行な仮想線ＫＪ１とラック３３２の延設方向と平行な仮想線ＫＪ２とが２点鎖線で図示される。
115 (a) and 115 (b) show the state in which the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position, and FIGS. 116 (a) and 116 (b) show that the elevating body 330 is at the raised position (FIG. 115). A state of being displaced downward by a predetermined amount from the position shown in FIG. 115 (b) and 116 (b), a virtual line KJ1 parallel to the gravity direction and a virtual line KJ2 parallel to the extending direction of the rack 332 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines.
ラック３３２には、正面（図１１５（ａ）紙面手前）から膨出する膨出部１５３５３ａが形成される。膨出部１５３５３ａは、正面視において、ラック３３２の外形よりも所定量小さい外形に形成される。また、膨出部１５３５３ａは、昇降体３３０に組み付けられた状体において、第２ギア１５３５２の中間板１５３５３よりも正面側（図１１５（ａ））紙面手前側）に突出する位置に設定される。
The rack 332 is formed with a bulging portion 15353a that bulges from the front (Fig. 115 (a) front). The bulging portion 15353a is formed in an outer shape that is a predetermined amount smaller than the outer shape of the rack 332 in a front view. In addition, the bulging portion 15353a is set at a position protruding in front of the intermediate plate 15353 of the second gear 15352 (FIG. 115 (a), the front side of the drawing) in the state of being assembled to the elevating body 330. .
第２ギア１５３５２は、伝達ギア部３５５（図１１４（ｂ）参照）が中間板１５３５３の背面側（図１１５（ｂ）紙面奥側）でラック３３２と歯合される。第２ギア１５３５２は、異形ギア部３５４が中間板１５３５３の正面側（図１１５（ｂ）紙面手前側）で第１ギア３５１と歯合される。
In the second gear 15352, the transmission gear portion 355 (see FIG. 114B) meshes with the rack 332 on the back side of the intermediate plate 15353 (FIG. 115B). The second gear 15352 is meshed with the first gear 351 on the front side of the intermediate plate 15353 (the front side in FIG. 115 (b)).
また、第２ギア１５３５２は、周方向に半周分回転可能に設定される。第２ギア１５３５２を半周分回転させることで、昇降体３３０を上昇位置（図１１５（ａ）に示す位置）及び下降位置（図１１５（ｂ）に示す位置）に変位可能とされる。
Further, the second gear 15352 is set so as to be rotatable by a half circumference in the circumferential direction. By rotating the second gear 15352 by a half turn, the elevating body 330 can be displaced to the ascending position (position shown in FIG. 115 (a)) and the descending position (position shown in FIG. 115 (b)).
図１１５に示すように、昇降体３３０が上昇位置に配置された状態（図１１５（ａ）に示す状態）では、第２ギア１５３５２の膨出部１５３５３ａの張出先端部分が、第２ギア１５３５２の回転軸よりも重力方向（ａ想線ＫＪ１方向）上側に位置される。また、第２ギア１５３５２の膨出部１５３５３ａの張出先端部分は、水平方向（図１１５（ｂ）左右方向）において、ラック３３２の被当接部３３２ｂ及び第２ギヤ１５３５２の間に位置される。
As shown in FIG. 115, in the state in which the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position (the state shown in FIG. 115A), the projecting tip portion of the bulging portion 15353a of the second gear 15352 is the second gear 15352. It is located above the rotational axis of the direction of gravity (a imaginary line KJ1 direction). Further, the protruding tip portion of the bulging portion 15353a of the second gear 15352 is positioned between the abutted portion 332b of the rack 332 and the second gear 15352 in the horizontal direction (FIG. 115 (b) left-right direction). .
第２ギア１５３５２は、昇降体３３０を下降変位させる際に、正面視において反時計回り（左周り）に回転される。よって、膨出部１５３５３ａの先端部分は、駆動初期において、重力方向（仮想線ＫＪ１方向）下方向に変位されると共に、水平方向（図１１５（ｂ）左右方向）にラック３３２の被当接部３３２ｂ側に近づく方向に変位される。
The second gear 15352 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward. Therefore, the tip portion of the bulging portion 15353a is displaced downward in the gravitational direction (virtual line KJ1 direction) in the initial stage of driving and is also in contact with the rack 332 in the horizontal direction (FIG. 115 (b) left-right direction). It is displaced in a direction approaching the 332b side.
また、第２ギア１５３５２の膨出部１５３５３ａ及びラック３３２の被当接部３３２ｂは、昇降体３３０のスライド方向（図１１５（ａ）上下方向）及び正面から背面に向かう方向（図１１５（ａ）紙面手前側から紙面奥側へ向かう方向）と直交する方向（水平方向（図１１５（ｂ）左右方向））の対向間に所定の隙間Ｒ３を備える。
Further, the bulging portion 15353a of the second gear 15352 and the contacted portion 332b of the rack 332 are in the sliding direction of the elevating body 330 (FIG. 115 (a) vertical direction) and the direction from the front to the back (FIG. 115 (a)). A predetermined gap R <b> 3 is provided between opposing directions (horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 115 (b))) orthogonal to the direction from the front side to the back side of the page.
即ち、昇降体３３０が上昇位置に配置された状態では、膨出部１５３５３ａの第２ギア１５３５２の回転中心から被当接部３３２ｂ側の端部までの距離が、ラック３３２の被当接部３３２ｂの一側側面（図１１５（ａ）右側側面）から第２ギア１５３５２の回転中心までの距離Ｒ２よりも小さく設定される。よって、昇降体３３０を上昇位置から下方（図１１５（ａ）下方）に変位させる場合には、隙間Ｒ３が形成されることで、ラック３３２の始動をスムーズにすることができる。
That is, in the state where the lifting body 330 is disposed at the raised position, the distance from the rotation center of the second gear 15352 of the bulging portion 15353a to the end portion on the contacted portion 332b side is the contacted portion 332b of the rack 332. Is set to be smaller than the distance R2 from the one side surface (the right side surface in FIG. 115A) to the rotation center of the second gear 15352. Therefore, when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward (downward in FIG. 115 (a)) from the raised position, the rack 332 can be started smoothly by forming the gap R3.
ここで、上部昇降ユニット１５３００（図１１２参照）は、各ラック３３２の歯面が、ベース部材３１０の長手方向（図１１２左右方向）外側の位置に形成され、第２ギア１５３５２の伝達ギア３５２が歯合される。よって、昇降体３３０を上昇位置に配置した状態（図１１５（ａ）に示す状態）から、昇降体３３０を下降変位させる場合には、駆動の慣性力により昇降体３３０が、ラック３３２の長手方向（図１１５（ａ）上下方向）を重力方向と平行にした状態から傾倒される。この傾倒により、ベース部材３１０（図１１２参照）の長手方向（図１１２左右方向）に並設される複数の昇降体３３０が隣の昇降体３３０に衝突する恐れがある。
Here, in the upper elevating unit 15300 (see FIG. 112), the tooth surface of each rack 332 is formed at a position outside the longitudinal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 112) of the base member 310, and the transmission gear 352 of the second gear 15352 is provided. Toothed. Therefore, when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward from the state in which the elevating body 330 is arranged at the raised position (the state shown in FIG. 115A), the elevating body 330 is moved in the longitudinal direction of the rack 332 by the driving inertia force. It is tilted from a state in which (FIG. 115 (a) vertical direction) is parallel to the direction of gravity. Due to this tilting, there is a possibility that a plurality of lifting bodies 330 arranged in parallel in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (see FIG. 112) collide with the adjacent lifting body 330.
これに対し、第１５実施形態では、第２ギア１５３５２に膨出部１５３５３ａが形成されるので、昇降体３３０を上昇位置に配置した状態から昇降体３３０を下方に変位させた際の慣性力による演出部３３１の左右方向への変位（ラック３３２の傾き）を抑制できる。
On the other hand, in the fifteenth embodiment, since the bulging portion 15353a is formed in the second gear 15352, the inertial force when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward from the state in which the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position. Displacement in the left-right direction of the effect section 331 (tilt of the rack 332) can be suppressed.
詳しく説明すると、図１１６に示すように、昇降体３３０が上昇位置に位置された状態（図１１５（ａ）に示す状態）から、第２ギア１５３５２が回転され昇降体３３０が下方へ変位されると、第２ギア１５３５２によりラック３３２の変位方向側（図１１６（ａ）下側）の端部が第２ギア１５３５２から離間する方向に押し出される。
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 116, the second gear 15352 is rotated and the elevator 330 is displaced downward from the state where the elevator 330 is positioned at the raised position (the state shown in FIG. 115 (a)). Then, the second gear 15352 pushes the end of the rack 332 on the displacement direction side (the lower side in FIG. 116A) away from the second gear 15352.
これにより、ラック３３２の変位方向側（図１１６（ａ）下側）に配設される演出部３３１が方向Ｘ２（図１１６（ａ）参照）に変位する。上述したように、ラック３３２は、スライド軸３３２ａが背面カバー３２０の案内孔３２３に挿入される（図１５参照）。そのため、演出部３３１が方向Ｘ２に変位した際に、スライド軸３３２ａの側面が案内孔３２３の内壁と当接する。これにより、ラック３３２の上端側が、スライド軸３３２ａと案内孔３２３との当接部分を中心に方向Ｘ２と反対方向の方向Ｘ３（図１１６（ａ）参照）の方向に回転変位される。
Thereby, the effect part 331 arrange | positioned at the displacement direction side (FIG. 116 (a) lower side) of the rack 332 is displaced to the direction X2 (refer FIG. 116 (a)). As described above, in the rack 332, the slide shaft 332a is inserted into the guide hole 323 of the back cover 320 (see FIG. 15). Therefore, when the effect part 331 is displaced in the direction X2, the side surface of the slide shaft 332a comes into contact with the inner wall of the guide hole 323. As a result, the upper end side of the rack 332 is rotationally displaced in the direction X3 (see FIG. 116A) opposite to the direction X2 around the contact portion between the slide shaft 332a and the guide hole 323.
演出部３３１が方向Ｘ２の方向に変位して、ラック３３２が重力方向（仮想線ＫＪ１）に対して仮想線ＫＪ２の方向に傾いた場合には、ラック３３２の被当接部３３２ｂの一側（図１１６（右側））の側面を膨出部１５３５３ａの外縁部に当接させることができる。よって、演出部３３１が方向Ｘ２の方向に変位することを規制することができる。その結果、昇降体３３０を上昇位置に配置した状態から下方に変位させた際に、一方の演出部３３１が他方の演出部３３１に衝突することを抑制することができる。
When the effect section 331 is displaced in the direction X2 and the rack 332 is inclined in the direction of the imaginary line KJ2 with respect to the direction of gravity (the imaginary line KJ1), one side of the contacted part 332b of the rack 332 ( The side surface of FIG. 116 (right side) can be brought into contact with the outer edge portion of the bulging portion 15353a. Therefore, it can restrict | limit that the production | presentation part 331 is displaced to the direction of the direction X2. As a result, when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward from the state in which the elevator body 330 is disposed at the raised position, it is possible to prevent one effect unit 331 from colliding with the other effect unit 331.
従って、第１５実施形態における上部昇降ユニット１５３００は、昇降体３３０が、上昇位置に配置された状態から下方（図１１６（ａ）下方）に変位された場合に、一方の演出部３３１が他方の演出部３３１に衝突することを抑制できる。
Therefore, in the upper elevating unit 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment, when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward (downward in FIG. 116 (a)) from the state where the elevating body 330 is disposed at the ascending position, It is possible to suppress the production unit 331 from colliding.
膨出部１５３５３ａは、中間板１５３５３の外周面から部分的に膨出して形成されるので、昇降体３３０が上昇位置から所定量以上下降に変位された場合には、中間板１５３５３とラック３３２の被当接部３３２ｂの側面との隙間を大きくできるので、ラック３３２の変位をスムーズにできる。
Since the bulging portion 15353a is formed by partially bulging from the outer peripheral surface of the intermediate plate 15353, when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward from the raised position by a predetermined amount or more, the intermediate plate 15353 and the rack 332 are disposed. Since the gap with the side surface of the contacted portion 332b can be increased, the rack 332 can be smoothly displaced.
即ち、ラック３３２の変位の規制を、その始動時の慣性力により変位し易い領域のみに限定することができるので、左右方向への慣性力が作用しない区間では、その規制を解除して、ラック３３２の変位をスムーズにできる。
That is, since the restriction of the displacement of the rack 332 can be limited only to a region that is easily displaced by the inertial force at the time of starting, the restriction is released in the section where the inertial force in the left-right direction does not act. The displacement of 332 can be made smooth.
第２ギア１５３５２は、周方向に半周分回転可能に設定され、膨出部１５３５３ａは、中間板１５３５３の外周面から部分的に膨出して形成されるので、ラック３３２の直線変位の位置（第２ギヤ１５３５２の回転量）に応じて、膨出部１５３５３ａの外周面と被当接部３３２ｂの一側（図１１５（ｂ）右側）との間の距離が異なる状態とできる。よって、例えば、演出部３３１の変位（ピニオンの回転）を開始する位置や演出部３３１の変位速度（ピニオンの回転速度）を変化させる位置（即ち、演出部３３１（ラック３３２）が慣性力の影響を受けやすい位置）では、膨出部１５３５３ａを被当接部３３２ｂに当接させて、演出部３３１が隣接する演出部３３１に衝突することを抑制できる一方、例えば、演出部３３１の変位（ピニオンの回転）が定常状態となる位置では、案内部材（スライド軸３３２ａ及び案内孔３２３）による直線変位の方向と直交する方向へのラック３３２の変位の許容量を確保して、寸法公差や組立公差を許容しやすくすることで、駆動手段の負荷を抑制すると共に、ラック３３２の直線変位を安定化できる。即ち、演出部３３１どうしの衝突の防止と、案内部材（スライド軸３３２ａ及び案内孔３２３）に対するラック３３２のがたつきの確保とを両立できる。
The second gear 15352 is set so as to be rotatable by a half circumference in the circumferential direction, and the bulging portion 15353a is formed by partially bulging from the outer peripheral surface of the intermediate plate 15353, so the position of the linear displacement of the rack 332 (the first displacement) The distance between the outer peripheral surface of the bulging portion 15353a and one side of the contacted portion 332b (the right side in FIG. 115 (b)) can be changed according to the rotation amount of the two gears 15352). Therefore, for example, the position where the displacement of the effect unit 331 (pinion rotation) and the position where the displacement speed of the effect unit 331 (pinion rotation speed) changes (that is, the effect unit 331 (rack 332) is affected by the inertial force. At the position where the bulging portion 15353a is in contact with the abutted portion 332b, it is possible to suppress the effect portion 331 from colliding with the adjacent effect portion 331. On the other hand, for example, the displacement of the effect portion 331 (pinion) In a position where the rotation of the rack 332 is in a steady state, a tolerance of displacement of the rack 332 in a direction perpendicular to the direction of linear displacement by the guide member (slide shaft 332a and guide hole 323) is secured, and dimensional tolerance and assembly tolerance are secured. As a result, the load on the driving means can be suppressed and the linear displacement of the rack 332 can be stabilized. That is, it is possible to achieve both the prevention of the collision between the rendering units 331 and the securing of the rattling of the rack 332 with respect to the guide member (the slide shaft 332a and the guide hole 323).
演出部３３１の水平方向（図１１６（ａ）左右方向）への変位の規制を演出部３３１を変位させる第２ギヤ１５３５２の一部（中間板１５３５３）に形成することができるので、演出部３３１の左右方向への変位を規制する部品を新たに配置する必要がないので、製造コストを抑えることができる。
Since the restriction of the displacement of the effect portion 331 in the horizontal direction (FIG. 116 (a) left and right direction) can be formed on a part of the second gear 15352 (the intermediate plate 15353) that displaces the effect portion 331, the effect portion 331. Since it is not necessary to newly arrange a part that restricts the displacement in the left-right direction, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.
ここで、駆動力を発生する駆動手段（駆動装置３４０）と、その駆動手段の駆動力により変位される変位部材（演出部３３１）とを有する変位ユニット（昇降体３３０）を一対備え、一対の変位ユニットが変位部材の変位軌跡を隣り合わせて配設された遊技機が知られている。かかる遊技機によれば、両変位部材を並設させつつ同方向へ変位させる演出や、一方の変位部材のみを変位させる演出を行うことができる。
Here, a pair of displacement units (elevating bodies 330) having a driving means (driving device 340) for generating a driving force and a displacement member (effect unit 331) displaced by the driving force of the driving means are provided. There is known a gaming machine in which a displacement unit is arranged with the displacement locus of a displacement member adjacent to each other. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to produce an effect of displacing both displacement members side by side in the same direction, or an effect of displacing only one displacement member.
しかしながら、上述した従来の遊技機では、駆動手段から駆動力を受けて変位を開始する際に、慣性力の影響により変位部材が隣接する変位部材に近接する方向へ変位して、変位部材どうしが衝突する恐れがあるという問題点があった。変位部材の衝突を回避するために、変位ユニットどうしの間隔を大きくした場合には、配設スペースが嵩むだけでなく、例えば、両変位部材を並設させつつ同方向へ変位させる際の一体感を形成することができない。
However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the displacement is started by receiving the driving force from the driving means, the displacement member is displaced in the direction close to the adjacent displacement member due to the influence of the inertial force, and the displacement members are separated from each other. There was a problem that there was a risk of collision. When the interval between the displacement units is increased in order to avoid the collision of the displacement members, not only the arrangement space is increased, but, for example, a sense of unity when the displacement members are displaced in the same direction while being arranged in parallel. Can not form.
これに対し、第１５実施形態によれば、駆動手段（駆動装置３４０）の駆動力により変位される際の慣性力により演出部３３１が隣接する演出部３３１に近接することを抑制する抑制手段（第２ギヤ１５３５２の膨出部１５３５３ａ）を備えるので、演出部３３１どうしの衝突を抑制することができる。その結果、昇降体３３０どうしの間隔を小さくできるので、配設スペースを抑制できると共に、例えば、両演出部３３１を並設させつつ同方向へ変位させる際の一体感を形成することができる。
On the other hand, according to the fifteenth embodiment, the suppression means (suppressing the effect portion 331 from approaching the adjacent effect portion 331 due to the inertial force when displaced by the drive force of the drive means (drive device 340) ( Since the bulging portion 15353a) of the second gear 15352 is provided, collision between the rendering portions 331 can be suppressed. As a result, since the interval between the lifting bodies 330 can be reduced, the arrangement space can be suppressed and, for example, a sense of unity can be formed when the two effect parts 331 are arranged in parallel and displaced in the same direction.
また、駆動装置３４０の駆動力により回転される第２ギア１５３５２と、その第２ギア１５３５２が歯合されると共に演出部３３１が配設されるラック３３２とを備えることで、演出部３３１を直線変位させることができる。即ち、演出部３３１の変位軌跡を平行に隣り合わせることができる。よって、隣り合う演出部３３１の変位に一体感を形成しやすくできる。
Further, by providing the second gear 15352 rotated by the driving force of the driving device 340 and the rack 332 in which the second gear 15352 is engaged and the effect portion 331 is disposed, the effect portion 331 is linearly provided. It can be displaced. In other words, the displacement trajectories of the rendering unit 331 can be adjacent to each other in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to easily form a sense of unity in the displacement of the adjacent effect unit 331.
この場合、各部品の寸法公差や組み付け公差を考慮して、案内部材（スライド軸３３２ａ及び案内孔３２３）は、ラック３３２の直線変位を、前記直線変位の方向と直交する方向への変位を許容した状態で案内する必要がある。
In this case, considering the dimensional tolerance and assembly tolerance of each component, the guide member (the slide shaft 332a and the guide hole 323) allows the linear displacement of the rack 332 to be displaced in a direction orthogonal to the linear displacement direction. It is necessary to guide in the state.
しかしながら、直性変位の方向と直交する方向への変位が許容されていると、第２ギア１５３５２が回転され、ラック３３２の直線変位が開始される際に、慣性力の影響によりラック３３２に回転力が発生する結果、直線変位の方向と直交する方向へ演出部３３１が変位される。そのため、演出部３３１が隣接する演出部３３１に近接して衝突する恐れがある。
However, if a displacement in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the straight displacement is allowed, the second gear 15352 is rotated, and when the linear displacement of the rack 332 is started, the rack 332 rotates due to the influence of inertial force. As a result of the generation of force, the effect section 331 is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the direction of linear displacement. Therefore, there is a possibility that the effect unit 331 may collide in the vicinity of the adjacent effect unit 331.
これに対し、第１５実施形態によれば、上述した抑制手段（第２ギヤ１５３５２の膨出部１５３５３ａ）が、直線変位の方向と直交する方向へのラック３３２の変位を規制することで、演出部３３１が隣接する演出部３３１に近接することを抑制するので、演出部３３１が隣接する演出部３３１に衝突することを抑制することができる。
On the other hand, according to the fifteenth embodiment, the suppression means described above (the bulging portion 15353a of the second gear 15352) restricts the displacement of the rack 332 in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement, thereby producing an effect. Since it suppresses that the part 331 adjoins the production | presentation part 331 which adjoins, it can suppress that the production | presentation part 331 collides with the production | presentation part 331 which adjoins.
即ち、抑制手段が、第２ギヤ１５３５２から径方向外方に張り出して形成される膨出部１５３５３ａと、その膨出部１５３５３ａが当接可能にラック３３２に形成される被当接部３３２ｂとを備え、膨出部１５３５３ａが被当接部３３２ｂに当接されることで、直線変位の方向と直交する方向へのラック３３２の変位を規制するので、演出部３３１が隣接する演出部３３１に衝突することを抑制することができる。
That is, the restraining means includes a bulging portion 15353a formed by projecting radially outward from the second gear 15352, and a contacted portion 332b formed on the rack 332 so that the bulging portion 15353a can abut. The bulging portion 15353a is in contact with the contacted portion 332b, so that the displacement of the rack 332 in the direction orthogonal to the linear displacement direction is restricted, so that the effect portion 331 collides with the adjacent effect portion 331. Can be suppressed.
また、上述したように、一対の昇降体３３０が第２ギヤ３５２の伝達ギア部２０３５５及びラック３３２の歯合面を互いに反対側へ向ける姿勢で配設されるので、慣性力の影響によって演出部３３１が直線変位の方向（図１１６（ａ）上下方向）と直交する方向（図１１６（ａ）左右方向）へ変位される方向を、一対の昇降体３３０において互いに逆方向とできる。
In addition, as described above, the pair of elevating bodies 330 are disposed in such a posture that the transmission gear portion 20355 of the second gear 352 and the meshing surfaces of the rack 332 are directed to the opposite sides. The direction in which 331 is displaced in the direction (FIG. 116 (a) left-right direction) orthogonal to the direction of linear displacement (FIG. 116 (a) vertical direction) can be opposite to each other in the pair of lifting bodies 330.
即ち、ラック３３２が一方向（図１１６（ａ）下方向）へ直線変位される場合には演出部３３１どうしが近接される一方、ラック３３２が他方向（図１１６（ｂ）上方向）へ直線変位される場合には演出部３３１どうしが離間される。よって、抑制手段は、ラック３３２が一方向（図１１６（ａ）下方向）へ直線変位される場合のみに対応できれば良く、ラック３３２が一方向（図１１６（ａ）下方向）へ直線変位される場合と他方向（図１１６（ｂ）上方向）へ直線変位される場合との両方に対応することを不要とできるので、その分、抑制手段の構造を簡素化できる。
That is, when the rack 332 is linearly displaced in one direction (downward in FIG. 116 (a)), the effect units 331 are brought close to each other, while the rack 332 is straight in the other direction (upward in FIG. 116 (b)). When displaced, the effect parts 331 are separated from each other. Therefore, the suppression means only needs to be able to cope with the case where the rack 332 is linearly displaced in one direction (downward in FIG. 116 (a)), and the rack 332 is linearly displaced in one direction (downward in FIG. 116 (a)). Therefore, it is unnecessary to cope with both the case where the linear displacement is performed in the other direction (the upward direction in FIG. 116 (b)), and the structure of the suppression means can be simplified accordingly.
次いで、図１１７を参照して、第１６実施形態における第２ギヤ１６３５２について説明する。上記第１５実施形態では、ラック３３２の被当接部３３２ｂに第２ギア１５３５２の膨出部１５３５３ａが当接されて、演出部３３１の水平方向（図１１６（ａ）左右方向）の変位（ラック３３２の傾倒）を抑制する場合を説明したが、第１６実施形態では、ラック３３２の案内溝１６３３２ｂに突起１６３５３ｂが挿入されて、演出部３３１の水平方向（図１１７（ａ）左右方向）の変位（ラック３３２の傾倒）を抑制する。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。
Next, the second gear 16352 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifteenth embodiment, the bulging portion 15353a of the second gear 15352 is brought into contact with the contacted portion 332b of the rack 332, and the displacement (rack of the rendering portion 331 in the horizontal direction (FIG. 116 (a) left-right direction)) In the sixteenth embodiment, the protrusion 16353b is inserted in the guide groove 16332b of the rack 332, and the effect portion 331 is displaced in the horizontal direction (FIG. 117 (a) left-right direction). (Tilt of the rack 332) is suppressed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
図１１７（ａ）及び図１１７（ｂ）は、第１６実施形態における昇降体３３０及び伝達装置３５０の正面図である。なお、図１１７（ａ）は、図１１５（ｂ）の、図１１７（ｂ）は、図１１６（ｂ）の昇降体３３０及び伝達装置３５０の正面図に対応する。また、図１１７（ａ）及び図１１７（ｂ）では、ラック３３２に形成される案内溝１６３３２ｂ及び突起１６３５３ｂが破線で図示される。また、図１１７（ａ）及び図１１７（ｂ）には、重力方向に平行な仮想線ＫＪ１とラック３３２の延設方向と平行な仮想線ＫＪ２とが２点鎖線で図示される。
117 (a) and 117 (b) are front views of the elevating body 330 and the transmission device 350 in the sixteenth embodiment. 117 (a) corresponds to the front view of FIG. 115 (b), and FIG. 117 (b) corresponds to the front view of the elevating body 330 and the transmission device 350 of FIG. 116 (b). 117 (a) and 117 (b), the guide groove 16332b and the protrusion 16353b formed in the rack 332 are illustrated by broken lines. 117A and 117B, a virtual line KJ1 parallel to the gravity direction and a virtual line KJ2 parallel to the extending direction of the rack 332 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines.
図１１７（ａ）に示すように、第１６実施形態における第２ギア１６３５２は、正面側（図１１７（ａ）紙面手前側）と背面側（図１１７（ａ）紙面奥側）とで歯形の異なる２層のギアから構成され、ドーナツ板形状に構成される中間板１６３５３と、その中間板１６３５３の正面側に形成され歯形が一部異形とされる異形ギア部３５４と、中間板１６３５３の背面側に平歯車形状に形成されラック３３２（図１５参照）と歯合される伝達ギア部３５５と、を備える。
As shown in FIG. 117 (a), the second gear 16352 in the sixteenth embodiment has a tooth profile on the front side (FIG. 117 (a) front side of the paper surface) and the back side (FIG. 117 (a) back side of the paper surface). An intermediate plate 16353 composed of two different layers of gears and configured in the shape of a donut plate, a deformed gear portion 354 formed on the front side of the intermediate plate 16353 and having a partially deformed tooth shape, and a back surface of the intermediate plate 16353 And a transmission gear portion 355 that is formed in a spur gear shape on the side and meshed with a rack 332 (see FIG. 15).
中間板１６３５３は、異形ギア部３５４及び伝達ギア部３５５のギア歯の先端よりも径方向外側まで張り出して形成される。そのため、第２ギヤ１６３５３の異形ギア部３５４及び伝達ギア部３５５と歯合される相手部材（第１ギア３５１又はラック３３２（図１５参照））は、歯面に平行な方向で中間板１５３５３に重なることで中間板１５３５３に当接可能とされる（図１７参照）。よって、その相手部材（第１ギア３５１又はラック３３２（図１５参照））が昇降体３３０の昇降動作時に歯面と平行な方向へ移動することを抑制することができる。
The intermediate plate 16353 is formed so as to protrude outward in the radial direction from the tips of the gear teeth of the deformed gear portion 354 and the transmission gear portion 355. Therefore, the mating member (the first gear 351 or the rack 332 (see FIG. 15)) engaged with the deformed gear portion 354 and the transmission gear portion 355 of the second gear 16353 is placed on the intermediate plate 15353 in a direction parallel to the tooth surface. By overlapping, it is possible to contact the intermediate plate 15353 (see FIG. 17). Therefore, it can suppress that the other party member (the 1st gear 351 or rack 332 (refer to Drawing 15)) moves to the direction parallel to a tooth surface at the time of raising / lowering operation of raising / lowering body 330.
また、中間板１６３５３は、その外縁部の一部から径方向外側に膨出する膨出部１６３５３ａが形成される。膨出部１６３５３ａは、正面視半円弧状に膨出して形成されると共に、中間板１６３５３の中央側と同じ厚みで形成される。
Further, the intermediate plate 16353 is formed with a bulging portion 16353a bulging radially outward from a part of the outer edge portion thereof. The bulging portion 16353a is formed to bulge in a semicircular arc shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with the same thickness as the center side of the intermediate plate 16353.
膨出部１６３５３ａには、ラック３３２と対向する側面（図１１７（ａ）紙面奥側）から突出する円柱形状の突起１６３５３ｂが形成される。即ち、突起１６３５３ｂは、ラック３３２側に突出形成される。また、突起１６３５３ｂは、その突出寸法が、後述するラック３３２の案内溝１６３３２ｂの凹設（深さ）寸法よりも小さく設定される。
A columnar protrusion 16353b is formed on the bulging portion 16353a so as to protrude from the side surface facing the rack 332 (FIG. 117 (a), the back side of the paper surface). That is, the protrusion 16353b is formed to protrude toward the rack 332 side. Further, the protrusion 16353b is set such that the protrusion dimension is smaller than the recess (depth) dimension of a guide groove 16332b of the rack 332 described later.
ラック３３２には、第２ギア１６３５２の膨出部１６３５３ａの側面（図１１７（ａ）紙面奥側）と対向する側面（図１１７（ａ）紙面手前側）に凹設される案内溝１６３３２ｂが形成される。
The rack 332 is formed with a guide groove 16332b that is recessed on the side surface (FIG. 117 (a) front side of the paper surface) opposite to the side surface (FIG. 117 (a) back side of the paper surface) of the bulging portion 16353a of the second gear 16352. Is done.
案内溝１６３３２ｂは、ラック３３２の厚み寸法の半分以下の深さ寸法で形成されると共に、正面視円弧状に凹設される。また、案内溝１６３３２ｂは、その内側の壁部の対向寸法が突起１６３５３ｂの外径よりも大きく設定される。
The guide groove 16332b is formed in a depth dimension that is less than half the thickness dimension of the rack 332, and is recessed in a circular arc shape when viewed from the front. Further, the guide groove 16332b is set such that the opposing dimension of the inner wall portion is larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 16353b.
また、案内溝１６３３２ｂは、第２ギア１６３５２の突起１６３５３ｂの変位軌跡上に凹設形成される。これにより、第２ギア１６３５２が回転して突起１６３５３ｂが、ラック３３２と前後方向に重なる位置に変位されると、突起１６３５３ｂを案内溝１６３３２ｂの内部に挿入することができる。
Further, the guide groove 16332b is formed in a recessed manner on the displacement locus of the protrusion 16353b of the second gear 16352. Accordingly, when the second gear 16352 rotates and the protrusion 16353b is displaced to a position overlapping the rack 332 in the front-rear direction, the protrusion 16353b can be inserted into the guide groove 16332b.
従って、昇降体３３０が、上昇位置に配置された状態では、案内溝１６３３２ｂの内側に突起１６３５３ｂを挿入した状態で配設される。
Therefore, when the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position, the elevating body 330 is disposed with the protrusion 16353b inserted inside the guide groove 16332b.
よって、昇降体３３０が上昇位置に配置された状態において、例えばパチンコ機１０が水平方向（図１左右方向）に変位して、演出部３３１が水平方向（図１１７（ｂ）左右方向）に変位した場合に、突起１６３５３ｂの外周面を案内溝１６３３２ｂの内壁と当接させることができる。従って、演出部３３１が水平方向（図１１７（ｂ）水平方向）に変位する（ラック３３２が傾倒する）ことを抑制できる。その結果、演出部３３１が水平方向（図１１７（ｂ）水平方向）に変位して一方の演出部３３１が、他方の演出部３３１に衝突することを抑制できる。
Therefore, in the state where the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position, for example, the pachinko machine 10 is displaced in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1), and the effect section 331 is displaced in the horizontal direction (FIG. 117 (b) left and right direction). In this case, the outer peripheral surface of the protrusion 16353b can be brought into contact with the inner wall of the guide groove 16332b. Therefore, it can suppress that the production | presentation part 331 is displaced to the horizontal direction (FIG. 117 (b) horizontal direction) (the rack 332 tilts). As a result, the production unit 331 can be prevented from being displaced in the horizontal direction (FIG. 117 (b) horizontal direction) and one production unit 331 colliding with the other production unit 331.
次いで、図１１７（ｂ）に示すように、昇降体３３０が上昇位置から下方に変位された際には、演出部３３１が水平方向（図１１７（ｂ）水平方向）に変位することに起因する、ラック３３２の上端部の左右の変位を、突起１６３５３ｂの外周面が案内溝１６３３２ｂの内壁と当接することで抑制できる。その結果、昇降体３３０を変位した際の慣性力により、一方の演出部３３１が、他方の演出部３３１に衝突することを抑制できる。
Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward from the raised position, the effect section 331 is displaced in the horizontal direction (FIG. 117 (b) horizontal direction). The lateral displacement of the upper end portion of the rack 332 can be suppressed by the outer peripheral surface of the protrusion 16353b coming into contact with the inner wall of the guide groove 16332b. As a result, it is possible to prevent one rendering unit 331 from colliding with the other rendering unit 331 due to the inertial force when the lifting body 330 is displaced.
なお、第１６実施形態では、膨出部１６３５３ａの外周面とラック３３２の被当接部３３２ｂの一面（図１１７（ｂ）右側）側との間の所定の隙間Ｒ３が、案内溝１６３３２ｂの内壁と突起１６３５３ｂとの隙間寸法よりも大きい値に設定されることが好ましい。即ち、第１６実施形態における膨出部１６３５３ａは、第１５実施形態における膨出部１５３５３ａよりも小さく設定される。
In the sixteenth embodiment, the predetermined gap R3 between the outer peripheral surface of the bulging portion 16353a and the one surface (the right side in FIG. 117 (b)) of the rack 332 is the inner wall of the guide groove 16332b. It is preferable to set a value larger than the gap dimension between the projection 16353b and the projection 16353b. That is, the bulging part 16353a in the sixteenth embodiment is set smaller than the bulging part 15353a in the fifteenth embodiment.
次いで、図１１８を参照して第１７実施形態について説明する。上記第１５実施形態では、ラック３３２の被当接部３３２ｂに第２ギア１５３５２の膨出部１５３５３ａが当接されて、演出部３３１の水平方向（図１１６（ｂ）左右方向）の変位（ラック３３２の傾倒）を抑制する場合を説明したが、第１７実施形態では、ラック３３２と背面カバー３２０とを当接させて演出部３３１の左右方向の変位（ラック３３２の傾倒）を抑制する。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。
Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifteenth embodiment, the swollen portion 15353a of the second gear 15352 is brought into contact with the contacted portion 332b of the rack 332, and the displacement (rack of the horizontal direction (FIG. 116 (b) left and right direction) of the effect portion 331 is achieved. In the seventeenth embodiment, the rack 332 and the back cover 320 are brought into contact with each other to suppress the horizontal displacement of the effect unit 331 (tilt of the rack 332). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
図１１８（ａ）及び図１１８（ｂ）は、第１７実施形態における昇降体３３０及び伝達装置３５０の正面図である。なお、図１１８（ａ）は、図１１５（ｂ）の、図１１８（ｂ）は、図１１６（ｂ）の昇降体３３０及び伝達装置３５０の正面図に対応する。また、図１１８（ａ）及び図１１８（ｂ）には、重力方向に平行な仮想線ＫＪ１とラック３３２の延設方向と平行な仮想線ＫＪ２とが２点鎖線で図示される。
118 (a) and 118 (b) are front views of the elevating body 330 and the transmission device 350 in the seventeenth embodiment. 118 (a) corresponds to the front view of FIG. 115 (b), and FIG. 118 (b) corresponds to the front view of the lifting body 330 and the transmission device 350 of FIG. 116 (b). 118A and 118B, a virtual line KJ1 parallel to the direction of gravity and a virtual line KJ2 parallel to the extending direction of the rack 332 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines.
図１１８に示すように、第１７実施形態におけるラック３３２には、第２ギア３５２の伝達ギア部３５５に歯合するラック歯面と反対側（図１１８（ａ）左側）の側面から膨出する当接部１７３３２ｃが形成される。
As shown in FIG. 118, the rack 332 in the seventeenth embodiment bulges from the side opposite to the rack tooth surface (left side in FIG. 118 (a)) that meshes with the transmission gear portion 355 of the second gear 352. A contact portion 17332c is formed.
また、箱形状に形成される背面カバー３２０には、昇降体３３０が上昇位置に配置される状態において、当接部１７３３２ｃと対向する位置からラック３３２側（図１１８（ａ）右側）に突出する規制部１７３２５が形成される。
Further, the back cover 320 formed in a box shape protrudes from the position facing the contact portion 17332c to the rack 332 side (right side in FIG. 118 (a)) in a state where the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position. A restricting portion 17325 is formed.
当接部１７３３２ｃと規制部１７３２５とは、昇降体３３０が上昇位置に配置される状態では、対向する方向（図１１８（ａ）左右方向）に所定の隙間Ｒ４（図１１８（ａ）参照）が形成される。また、当接部１７３３２ｃは、規制部１７３２５よりもラック３３２の延設方向（図１１８上下方向）に長く形成される。昇降体３３０が上昇位置に配置される状態では、当接部１７３３２ｃの下端（図１１８（ａ）下端）部分が規制部１７３２５と当接する状態とされる。
The contact portion 17332c and the restricting portion 17325 have a predetermined gap R4 (see FIG. 118 (a)) in the facing direction (FIG. 118 (a) left-right direction) when the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position. It is formed. Further, the abutting portion 17332c is formed longer than the restricting portion 17325 in the extending direction of the rack 332 (the vertical direction in FIG. 118). In the state where the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position, the lower end (lower end in FIG. 118 (a)) of the contact portion 17332c is in contact with the restriction portion 17325.
一方、図１１８（ｂ）に示すように、昇降体３３０が上昇位置から下降に変位されると、昇降体３３０は背面カバー３２０に対して下方（図１１８（ｂ）下方）に変位されるので、当接部１７３３２ｃが下方（図１１８（ｂ）下方）に変位される。
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), when the lifting body 330 is displaced downward from the raised position, the lifting body 330 is displaced downward (downward in FIG. 118 (b)) with respect to the back cover 320. The abutting portion 17332c is displaced downward (downward in FIG. 118 (b)).
上述したように、当接部１７３３２ｃは、規制部１７３２５よりも上下方向に延設される共に、昇降体３３０が上昇位置に配置される状態において、その下端側と規制部１７３２５とが対向する状態とされるので、上昇位置から下方に昇降体３３０を始動し始めにおいて、当接部１７３３２ｃと規制部１７３２５とが水平方向（図１１８（ｂ）左右方向に）対向する状態とすることができる。
As described above, the contact portion 17332c extends in the vertical direction with respect to the restriction portion 17325, and the lower end side of the contact portion 17332c faces the restriction portion 17325 in a state where the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position. Therefore, at the start of starting the elevating body 330 downward from the raised position, the contact portion 17332c and the restricting portion 17325 can be in a state of facing each other in the horizontal direction (FIG. 118 (b) in the left-right direction).
この場合、昇降体３３０が上昇位置から下方に変位される際の慣性力により、演出部３３１が水平方向（図１１８（ｂ）左右方向）に変位（ラック３３２が傾倒）され、ラック３３２の当接部１７３３２ｃが隙間Ｒ４の値以上変位されると、当接部１７３３２ｃを規制部１７３２５に当接させることができる。
In this case, due to the inertial force when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward from the raised position, the effect portion 331 is displaced horizontally (the rack 332 tilts) in the horizontal direction (FIG. When the contact portion 17332c is displaced by the gap R4 or more, the contact portion 17332c can be brought into contact with the restricting portion 17325.
これにより、演出部３３１が始動時に所定の値以上左右に変位することを抑制できる。その結果、昇降体３３０を変位した際の慣性力により、一方の演出部３３１が、他方の演出部３３１に衝突することを抑制できる。
Thereby, it can suppress that the production | presentation part 331 is displaced to the left or right more than predetermined value at the time of starting. As a result, it is possible to prevent one rendering unit 331 from colliding with the other rendering unit 331 due to the inertial force when the lifting body 330 is displaced.
次いで、図１１９を参照して、第１８実施形態について説明する。上記第１５実施形態では、ラック３３２の被当接部３３２ｂに第２ギア１５３５２の膨出部１５３５３ａが当接されて、演出部３３１の水平方向（図１１６（ａ）左右方向）の変位（ラック３３２の傾倒）を抑制する場合を説明したが、第１８実施形態では、ラック３３２と背面カバー３２０に配設される磁石の反発力により演出部３３１の水平方向（図１１９（ａ）左右方向）への変位（ラック３３２の傾倒）を抑制する。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。
Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifteenth embodiment, the bulging portion 15353a of the second gear 15352 is brought into contact with the contacted portion 332b of the rack 332, and the displacement (rack of the rendering portion 331 in the horizontal direction (FIG. 116 (a) left-right direction)) In the eighteenth embodiment, the horizontal direction of the effect portion 331 (FIG. 119 (a) left-right direction) is generated by the repulsive force of the magnets disposed on the rack 332 and the back cover 320. Is suppressed (the tilt of the rack 332). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
図１１９（ａ）及び図１１９（ｂ）は、第１８実施形態における昇降体３３０及び伝達装置３５０の正面図である。なお、図１１９（ａ）は、図１１５（ｂ）の、図１１９（ｂ）は、図１１６（ｂ）の昇降体３３０及び伝達装置３５０の正面図に対応する。また、図１１９（ａ）及び図１１９（ｂ）では、埋設される第１磁石１８３３２ｄ及び第２磁石１８３２６の外径が破線で図示される。また、図１１９（ａ）及び図１１９（ｂ）には、重力方向に平行な仮想線ＫＪ１とラック３３２の延設方向と平行な仮想線ＫＪ２とが２点鎖線で図示される。
119 (a) and 119 (b) are front views of the elevating body 330 and the transmission device 350 in the eighteenth embodiment. 119 (a) corresponds to the front view of FIG. 115 (b), and FIG. 119 (b) corresponds to the front view of the elevating body 330 and the transmission device 350 of FIG. 116 (b). Further, in FIGS. 119 (a) and 119 (b), the outer diameters of the first magnet 18332d and the second magnet 18326 to be embedded are shown by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 119 (a) and FIG. 119 (b), a virtual line KJ1 parallel to the gravity direction and a virtual line KJ2 parallel to the extending direction of the rack 332 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines.
図１１９に示すように、第１８実施形態におけるラック３３２には、第２ギア３５２の伝達ギア部３５５に歯合するラック歯面と反対側（図１１９（ａ）左側）の端部の内部に第１磁石１８３３２ｄが埋設される。
As shown in FIG. 119, the rack 332 according to the eighteenth embodiment is provided inside the end portion on the opposite side (left side in FIG. 119 (a)) of the rack gear surface meshing with the transmission gear portion 355 of the second gear 352. A first magnet 18332d is embedded.
また、箱形状に形成されるケース部材２１０（図１４参照）には、昇降体３３０が上昇位置に配置される状態において、ラック３３２の第１磁石１８３３２ｄが埋設された側面側（図１１９（ａ）左側）と対向する位置に埋設される第２磁石１８３２６を備える。
Further, in the case member 210 (see FIG. 14) formed in a box shape, in a state where the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position, the side surface side where the first magnet 18332d of the rack 332 is embedded (FIG. 119 (a 2) a second magnet 18326 embedded in a position opposite to the left side).
第１磁石１８３３２ｄ及び第２磁石１８３２６は、磁性を備える磁性体であり、両者が離間（反発）する状態で配置される。
The 1st magnet 18332d and the 2nd magnet 18326 are magnetic bodies provided with magnetism, and are arranged in the state where both are separated (repel).
第１磁石１８３３２ｄ及び第２磁石１８３２６は、昇降体３３０が上昇位置に配置された状態において、その一部が水平方向（図１１９（ａ）左右方向）に重なる状態とされると共に、ラック３３２に埋設される第１磁石１８３３２ｄが、第２磁石１８３２６よりも上方に配置された状態とされる。
The first magnet 18332d and the second magnet 18326 are partially overlapped in the horizontal direction (FIG. 119 (a) left-right direction) in a state where the elevating body 330 is arranged at the raised position, and are attached to the rack 332. The embedded first magnet 18332d is placed above the second magnet 18326.
一方、図１１９（ｂ）に示すように、昇降体３３０が上昇位置（図１１９（ａ）に示す位置）から下降に変位されると、昇降体３３０は背面カバー３２０に対して下側に変位されるので、第１磁石１８３３２ｄが下方に変位される。
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward from the raised position (position shown in FIG. 119 (a)), the elevating body 330 is displaced downward with respect to the back cover 320. Thus, the first magnet 18332d is displaced downward.
上述したように、第１磁石１８３３２ｄは、昇降体３３０が上昇位置に配置された状態において第２磁石１８３２６よりも上方に配置されるので、昇降体３３０が、上昇位置から下方に始動し始めた際に、第１磁石１８３３２ｄと第２磁石１８３２６とを水平方向（図１１９（ａ）左右方向）に重なる状態にすることができる。
As described above, since the first magnet 18332d is disposed above the second magnet 18326 in a state where the lifting body 330 is disposed at the raised position, the lifting body 330 starts to start downward from the raised position. At this time, the first magnet 18332d and the second magnet 18326 can be overlapped in the horizontal direction (FIG. 119 (a) left-right direction).
この場合、第１磁石１８３３２ｄと第２磁石１８３２６とが反発することにより、昇降体３３０が上昇位置から下方に変位される際の慣性力で演出部３３１が水平方向左側（図１１９（ｂ）左側）に変位することを抑制できる。即ち、第１磁石１８３３２ｄと第２磁石１８３２６の反発力を昇降体３３０が下方に変位する際に演出部３３１が変位する方向と反対方向に作用させることができる。
In this case, the rendition of the first magnet 18332d and the second magnet 18326 causes the rendering unit 331 to move horizontally on the left side (FIG. 119 (b) left side) due to the inertial force when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward from the raised position. ) Can be suppressed. In other words, the repulsive force of the first magnet 18332d and the second magnet 18326 can be applied in the direction opposite to the direction in which the rendering unit 331 is displaced when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward.
これにより、演出部３３１が始動時に水平方向（図１１９（ｂ）左右方向）に変位することを抑制できる。その結果、昇降体３３０を変位した際の慣性力により、一方の演出部３３１が、他方の演出部３３１に衝突することを抑制できる。
Thereby, it can suppress that the production | presentation part 331 displaces to a horizontal direction (FIG. 119 (b) left-right direction) at the time of starting. As a result, it is possible to prevent one rendering unit 331 from colliding with the other rendering unit 331 due to the inertial force when the lifting body 330 is displaced.
次いで、図１２０を参照して、第１９実施形態について説明する。上記第１５実施形態では、ラック３３２の歯面が直線状に形成される場合を説明したが、第１９実施形態では、ラック３３２の歯面が一部傾斜して形成される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付してその説明を省略する。
Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifteenth embodiment, the case where the tooth surface of the rack 332 is formed in a straight line has been described, but in the nineteenth embodiment, the tooth surface of the rack 332 is formed with a partial inclination. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
図１２０（ａ）及び図１２０（ｂ）は、第１９実施形態における昇降体３３０及び伝達装置３５０の正面図である。なお、図１２０（ａ）及び図１２０（ｂ）では、第２ギヤ３５２の中間板３５３及び異形ギア部３５４が取り外された状態が図示される。また、図１２０（ａ）及び図１２０（ｂ）には、重力方向に平行な仮想線ＫＪ１とラック３３２の延設方向と平行な仮想線ＫＪ２とが２点鎖線で図示される。
120 (a) and 120 (b) are front views of the elevating body 330 and the transmission device 350 according to the nineteenth embodiment. 120 (a) and 120 (b) show a state where the intermediate plate 353 and the deformed gear portion 354 of the second gear 352 are removed. 120 (a) and 120 (b), a virtual line KJ1 parallel to the gravity direction and a virtual line KJ2 parallel to the extending direction of the rack 332 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines.
図１２０に示すように、第１９実施形態におけるラック３３２の第２ギア３５２の伝達ギア部３５５に歯合する歯面は、ラック３３２の延設方向と平行に形成される第１歯面１９３３２ｅとラック３３２の延設方向と傾斜（非平行）して形成される第２歯面１９３３２ｆとを備えて形成される。
As shown in FIG. 120, the tooth surface meshed with the transmission gear portion 355 of the second gear 352 of the rack 332 in the nineteenth embodiment is a first tooth surface 19332e formed in parallel with the extending direction of the rack 332. The extending direction of the rack 332 and the second tooth surface 19332f formed to be inclined (non-parallel) are formed.
第１歯面１９３３２ｅは、ラック３３２の上端部分の第１領域Ｌ１の区間に形成されており、第１歯面１９３３２ｅに伝達ギア部３５５が歯合される状態では、ラック３３２をラック３３２の延設方向（上下方向）に変位させることができる。
The first tooth surface 19332e is formed in a section of the first region L1 at the upper end portion of the rack 332. When the transmission gear portion 355 is engaged with the first tooth surface 19332e, the rack 332 is extended from the rack 332. It can be displaced in the installation direction (vertical direction).
第２歯面１９３３２ｆは、ラック３３２の下端部分の第２領域Ｌ２の区間に形成されており、第１歯面１９３３２ｅから離間するにつれて、第２ギア３５２側に近接する方向に傾斜する態様に形成される。第２歯面１９３３２ｆに伝達ギア部３５５が歯合される際には、ラック３３２を第２歯面１９３３２ｆの延設方向に変位させる。即ち、ラック３３２の上端（図１２０（ａ）上端）部分を水平方向左側（図１２０（ａ）左側）に、ラック３３２の下端（図１２０（ａ）下端）部分を水平方向右側（図１２０（ａ）右側）にそれぞれ偏倚させることができる。
The second tooth surface 19332f is formed in a section of the second region L2 at the lower end portion of the rack 332, and is formed so as to be inclined in a direction closer to the second gear 352 side as it is separated from the first tooth surface 19332e. Is done. When the transmission gear portion 355 is engaged with the second tooth surface 19332f, the rack 332 is displaced in the extending direction of the second tooth surface 19332f. That is, the upper end (upper end in FIG. 120 (a)) of the rack 332 is on the left side in the horizontal direction (left side in FIG. 120 (a)), and the lower end (lower end in FIG. 120 (a)) is on the right side in the horizontal direction (FIG. a) right side) respectively.
図１２０に示すように、昇降体３３０が上昇位置に配置される状態では、第２ギア３５２が第２歯面１９３３２ｆと歯合した状態とされる。よって、第２歯面１９３３２ｆが、第２ギヤ３５３側に傾斜する分、ラック３３２の上端部分を水平方向左側（図１２０（ａ）左側）に押し出して、ラック３３２の延設方向を仮想線ＫＪ１と非平行に傾斜させた状態とすることができる。
As shown in FIG. 120, in a state where the elevating body 330 is arranged at the raised position, the second gear 352 is in mesh with the second tooth surface 19332f. Therefore, the upper end portion of the rack 332 is pushed out to the left in the horizontal direction (left side in FIG. 120 (a)) by the amount of the second tooth surface 19332f inclined toward the second gear 353, and the extending direction of the rack 332 is set to the virtual line KJ1. And in a state of being inclined non-parallel.
この場合、昇降体３３０を上昇位置から下方に変位させると、昇降体３３０を下方に変位させつつ、ラック３３２の上端端部を水平方向右側（図１２０（ｂ）右側）に変位させることができる。
In this case, when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward from the raised position, the upper end of the rack 332 can be displaced to the right in the horizontal direction (right side in FIG. 120 (b)) while displacing the elevating body 330 downward. .
また、第２領域Ｌ２の区間長さは、昇降体３３０を駆動させた際の駆動初期の慣性力により演出部３３１が水平方向（図１２０（ｂ）左右方向）に変位する区間（ラック３３２が第２ギア３５２から水平方向左側（図１２０（ｂ）左右方向）に押し出されるラック３３２の延設方向（図１２０（ｂ）上下方向）の区画）よりも長く設定される。
In addition, the section length of the second region L2 is a section (rack 332 of the rack 332) in which the effect section 331 is displaced in the horizontal direction (FIG. 120 (b) left-right direction) by the initial inertial force when driving the elevating body 330. The length is set to be longer than the extending direction of the rack 332 (partition in the vertical direction in FIG. 120B) pushed out from the second gear 352 in the horizontal direction (FIG. 120B, left-right direction).
上述したように、ラック３３２の背面側には、円柱状に突出するスライド軸３３２ａが突出形成される（図１５参照）。スライド軸３３２ａは、背面カバー３２０に形成される案内孔３２３に挿入される。これにより、ラック３３２の延設方向（仮想線ＫＪ２）を、仮想線ＫＪ１に対して傾倒させることができる。
As described above, on the back side of the rack 332, the slide shaft 332a protruding in a columnar shape is formed to protrude (see FIG. 15). The slide shaft 332a is inserted into a guide hole 323 formed in the back cover 320. Thereby, the extending direction (virtual line KJ2) of the rack 332 can be tilted with respect to the virtual line KJ1.
昇降体３３０を上昇位置に配置した状態では、第２領域Ｌ２が第２ギア３５２の伝達ギア部３５５に水平方向左側（図１２０（ａ）左側）押し出されることで、ラック３３２が、スライド軸３３２ａを中心に回転されて、ラック３３２の上端部（図１２０（ａ）上端部）が第２ギア３５２から離間する方向（図１２０（ａ）左方向）に変位される。
In a state in which the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position, the second region L2 is pushed out to the left side in the horizontal direction (left side in FIG. 120 (a)) by the transmission gear portion 355 of the second gear 352, whereby the rack 332 is moved to the slide shaft 332a. , And the upper end portion of the rack 332 (the upper end portion in FIG. 120 (a)) is displaced in the direction away from the second gear 352 (the left direction in FIG. 120 (a)).
ここで、上述したように昇降体３３０が上昇位置から下方に変位される際には、その慣性力により演出部３３１が水平方向右側（図１２０（ｂ）右側）に変位する。そのため、隣接される昇降体３３０の一方の演出部３３１が他方の演出部３３１に衝突する恐れがある。
Here, as described above, when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward from the raised position, the effect portion 331 is displaced to the right in the horizontal direction (right side in FIG. 120 (b)) due to its inertial force. Therefore, one effect part 331 of the adjacent raising / lowering body 330 may collide with the other effect part 331.
これに対し、第１９実施形態では、第２歯面１９３３２ｆが傾斜して形成されると共に、その第２区間Ｌ２が慣性力により演出部３３１が水平方向右側（図１２０（ｂ）右側）に変位する区間（ラック３３２が第２ギア３５２から水平方向左側（図１２０（ｂ）左右方向）に押し出されるラック３３２の延設方向（図１２０（ｂ）上下方向）の区画）よりも長く設定されるので、昇降体３３０を駆動させた際に、一方の演出部３３１が他方の演出部３３１に衝突することを抑制できる。
On the other hand, in the nineteenth embodiment, the second tooth surface 19332f is formed to be inclined, and the second section L2 is displaced to the right side in the horizontal direction (right side in FIG. 120 (b)) by the inertial force. Section (the section in the extending direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 120 (b)) of the rack 332 in which the rack 332 is pushed out from the second gear 352 in the horizontal direction (left and right in FIG. 120B)). Therefore, when the elevating body 330 is driven, it can be suppressed that one effect part 331 collides with the other effect part 331.
言い変えると、昇降体３３０は、駆動された際の慣性力により変位する方向（図１２０（ａ）右方向）と反対方向（図１２０（ａ）左方向）に偏倚された状態とされるので、昇降体３３０が下降する方向（図１２０（ａ）下方向）に駆動された場合に、演出部３３１が水平方向に変位する範囲を狭めることができる。その結果、昇降体３３０を変位させた場合に、一方の演出部３３１が隣接する他方の演出部３３１に衝突することを抑制できる。
In other words, the elevating body 330 is biased in the opposite direction (FIG. 120 (a) left direction) to the direction displaced by the inertial force when driven (FIG. 120 (a) right direction). When the elevating body 330 is driven in the descending direction (the downward direction in FIG. 120A), the range in which the rendering unit 331 is displaced in the horizontal direction can be narrowed. As a result, when the elevating body 330 is displaced, it can be suppressed that one effect part 331 collides with the other effect part 331 adjacent thereto.
第１９実施形態では、ラック３３２の歯面が傾斜歯面（第２歯面１９３３２ｆ）を備え、傾斜歯面（第２歯面１９３３２ｆ）に第２ギヤ３５２を歯合させることで、案内部材による直線変位の方向と直交する方向であって隣接するラック３３２と離間する方向へラック３３２を偏倚させることができる。
In the nineteenth embodiment, the tooth surface of the rack 332 includes an inclined tooth surface (second tooth surface 19332f), and the second gear 352 is engaged with the inclined tooth surface (second tooth surface 19332f), whereby the guide member is used. The rack 332 can be biased in a direction perpendicular to the direction of linear displacement and away from the adjacent rack 332.
即ち、ラック３３２を隣接するラック３３２から事前に離間させておけるので、慣性力の影響により、ラック３３２が隣接するラック３３２へ近接する場合であっても、演出部３３１が隣接する演出部３３１に衝突することを抑制できる。
That is, since the rack 332 can be separated from the adjacent rack 332 in advance, even if the rack 332 is close to the adjacent rack 332 due to the influence of the inertial force, the effect unit 331 is adjacent to the adjacent effect unit 331. Collision can be suppressed.
また、傾斜歯面（第２歯面１９３３２ｆ）に第２ギヤ３５２が歯合された状態から第２ギア３５２が回転されることで、平行歯面（第１歯面１９３３２ｅ）に第２ギヤ３５２が歯合された場合と比較して、ラック３３２の直線変位が開始される際に、慣性力の影響により発生するラック３３２の慣性力を抑制できる。即ち、ラック３３２が、第２ギア３５２の駆動により、押し出される方向を、ラック３３２の駆動方向（図１２０（ａ）上下方向）と平行な方向にすることができる。よって、ラック３３２が第２ギア３５２の駆動により駆動された場合には、第２ギア３５２の駆動による慣性力が水平方向（図１２０（ａ）水平方向）に作用することを抑制できるので、演出部３３１が隣接する演出部３３１に衝突することを抑制できる。
Further, when the second gear 352 is rotated from the state where the second gear 352 is engaged with the inclined tooth surface (second tooth surface 19332f), the second gear 352 is applied to the parallel tooth surface (first tooth surface 19332e). As compared with the case where the gears are meshed, the inertial force of the rack 332 generated by the influence of the inertial force when the linear displacement of the rack 332 is started can be suppressed. That is, the direction in which the rack 332 is pushed out by the driving of the second gear 352 can be parallel to the driving direction of the rack 332 (vertical direction in FIG. 120A). Therefore, when the rack 332 is driven by the drive of the second gear 352, it is possible to suppress the inertial force due to the drive of the second gear 352 from acting in the horizontal direction (FIG. 120 (a) horizontal direction). It can suppress that the part 331 collides with the production | presentation part 331 which adjoins.
次いで、図１２１を参照して、第２０実施形態について説明する。上記第１５実施形態では、第２ギヤ３５２の伝達ギア部３５５が円形に形成される場合を説明したが、第２０実施形態では、第２ギヤ３５２の伝達ギア部３５５が楕円形状に形成される場合を説明する。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付してその説明を省略する。
Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifteenth embodiment, the case where the transmission gear portion 355 of the second gear 352 is formed in a circular shape has been described. In the twentieth embodiment, the transmission gear portion 355 of the second gear 352 is formed in an elliptical shape. Explain the case. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
図１２１（ａ）及び図１２１（ｂ）は、第２０実施形態における昇降体３３０及び伝達装置３５０の正面図である。なお、図１２１（ａ）及び図１２１（ｂ）では、第２ギヤ３５２の中間板３５３及び異形ギア部３５４が取り外された状態が図示される。また、図１２１（ａ）及び図１２１（ｂ）では、昇降体３３０が模式的に図示されると共に、案内孔３２３及びスライド軸３３２ａの外形が破線で図示される。さらに、図１２１（ａ）及び図１２１（ｂ）には、重力方向に平行な仮想線ＫＪ１とラック３３２の延設方向と平行な仮想線ＫＪ２とが２点鎖線で図示される。
121 (a) and 121 (b) are front views of the elevating body 330 and the transmission device 350 in the twentieth embodiment. 121A and 121B show a state where the intermediate plate 353 and the deformed gear portion 354 of the second gear 352 are removed. 121 (a) and 121 (b), the elevating body 330 is schematically illustrated, and the outer shapes of the guide hole 323 and the slide shaft 332a are illustrated by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 121 (a) and FIG. 121 (b), a virtual line KJ1 parallel to the gravity direction and a virtual line KJ2 parallel to the extending direction of the rack 332 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines.
図１２１に示すように、第２０実施形態における第２ギヤ３５２の伝達ギア部２０３５５は、正面視において楕円形状に形成される。言い変えると、伝達ギア部２０３５５は、回転軸から外縁までの距離が長い第１回転領域２０３５５ａと、回転軸から外縁までの距離が短い第２回転領域２０３５５ｂとを備えて形成される。
As shown in FIG. 121, the transmission gear portion 20355 of the second gear 352 in the twentieth embodiment is formed in an elliptical shape when viewed from the front. In other words, the transmission gear portion 20355 is formed including a first rotation region 20355a having a long distance from the rotation shaft to the outer edge and a second rotation region 20355b having a short distance from the rotation shaft to the outer edge.
第１回転領域２０３５５ａは、伝達ギア部２０３５５（第２ギア３５２）の回転軸からその外縁部までの距離が、ラック３３２の延設方向を垂直方向と平行に配置した状態のラック３３２の端面から伝達ギア部２０３５５（第２ギア３５２）の回転軸までの距離よりも長く設定される。
The first rotation region 20355a has a distance from the rotation axis of the transmission gear portion 20355 (second gear 352) to the outer edge thereof from the end surface of the rack 332 in a state where the extending direction of the rack 332 is arranged in parallel with the vertical direction. It is set longer than the distance to the rotation axis of the transmission gear portion 20355 (second gear 352).
第２回転領域２０３５５ｂは、伝達ギア部２０３５５（第２ギア３５２）の回転軸からその外縁部までの距離が、ラック３３２の延設方向を垂直方向と平行に配置した状態のラック３３２の端面から伝達ギア部２０３５５（第２ギア３５２）の回転軸までの距離と略同一とされる。
The second rotation region 20355b has a distance from the rotation axis of the transmission gear portion 20355 (second gear 352) to the outer edge thereof from the end surface of the rack 332 in a state where the extending direction of the rack 332 is arranged in parallel with the vertical direction. The distance to the rotation axis of the transmission gear portion 20355 (second gear 352) is substantially the same.
上述したように、ラック３３２の背面側には、円柱状に突出するスライド軸３３２ａが突出形成される（図１５参照）。スライド軸３３２ａは、背面カバー３２０に形成される案内孔３２３に挿入される。これにより、ラック３３２の延設方向（仮想線ＫＪ２）を、仮想線ＫＪ１に対して傾倒させることができる。
As described above, on the back side of the rack 332, the slide shaft 332a protruding in a columnar shape is formed to protrude (see FIG. 15). The slide shaft 332a is inserted into a guide hole 323 formed in the back cover 320. Thereby, the extending direction (virtual line KJ2) of the rack 332 can be tilted with respect to the virtual line KJ1.
よって、第１回転領域２０３５５ａの外縁部がラック３３２の歯面と歯合されると、ラック３３２が、第１回転領域２０３５５ａの外縁部により押し出されてスライド軸３３２ａを中心に回転され、ラック３３２が傾倒された状態とされる（図１２１（ａ）に示す昇降体３３０では、ラック３３２の上端部が左側に変位される）。一方、第１回転領域２０３５５ａの外縁部がラック３３２の歯面と歯合されると、ラック３３２の延設方向を重力方向と平行な状態にできる。
Therefore, when the outer edge portion of the first rotation region 20355a is engaged with the tooth surface of the rack 332, the rack 332 is pushed out by the outer edge portion of the first rotation region 20355a and rotated around the slide shaft 332a, and the rack 332 is rotated. Is tilted (in the lifting body 330 shown in FIG. 121 (a), the upper end of the rack 332 is displaced to the left). On the other hand, when the outer edge portion of the first rotation region 20355a is engaged with the tooth surface of the rack 332, the extending direction of the rack 332 can be parallel to the gravity direction.
また、第１回転領域２０３５５ａは、昇降体３３０が上昇位置に配置された状態の際にラック３３２の歯面と歯合される。さらに、第１回転領域２０３５５ａとラック３３２の歯面とが歯合する範囲は、昇降体３３０を駆動させた際の駆動初期の慣性力により演出部３３１が水平方向（図１２１（ｂ）左右方向）に変位する区間（ラック３３２が第２ギア３５２から水平方向左側（図１２１（ｂ）左右方向）に押し出されるラック３３２の延設方向（図１２１（ｂ）上下方向）の区画）よりも長く設定される。
Further, the first rotation region 20355a meshes with the tooth surface of the rack 332 when the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position. Further, the range in which the first rotation region 20355a and the tooth surface of the rack 332 mesh is in the horizontal direction (FIG. 121 (b) left-right direction) due to the inertial force at the initial stage of driving when the elevating body 330 is driven. ) Longer than the section (the rack 332 extends in the extending direction (FIG. 121 (b) vertical direction) of the rack 332) pushed from the second gear 352 to the left in the horizontal direction (FIG. 121 (b) left-right direction). Is set.
ここで、上述したように昇降体３３０が上昇位置から下方に変位される際には、その慣性力により演出部３３１が水平方向右側（図１２１（ｂ）右側）に変位する。そのため、並設される昇降体３３０の一方の演出部３３１が他方の演出部３３１に衝突する恐れがある。
Here, when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward from the raised position as described above, the effect section 331 is displaced to the right side in the horizontal direction (right side in FIG. 121 (b)) due to its inertial force. Therefore, one effect part 331 of the elevating body 330 arranged in parallel may collide with the other effect part 331.
これに対し、第２０実施形態では、伝達ギア部２０３５５が、第２回転領域２０３５５ｂを備えて形成されると共に、その第２回転領域２０３５５ｂとラック３３２が歯合する範囲が、昇降体３３０を駆動させた際の駆動初期の慣性力により演出部３３１が水平方向右側（図１２１（ｂ）右側）に変位する区間よりも長く設定されるので、昇降体３３０を駆動させた際に、一方の演出部３３１が他方の演出部３３１に衝突することを抑制できる。
On the other hand, in the twentieth embodiment, the transmission gear portion 20355 is formed with the second rotation region 20355b, and the range where the second rotation region 20355b and the rack 332 are engaged drives the lifting body 330. Since the stage 331 is set to be longer than the section in which the stage 331 is displaced to the right side in the horizontal direction (right side in FIG. 121 (b)) due to the inertia force at the initial stage of driving, It can suppress that the part 331 collides with the other production | presentation part 331. FIG.
言い変えると、昇降体３３０は、駆動された際の慣性力により変位する方向と反対方向に変位された状態とされるので、昇降体３３０が駆動された際に、水平方向（図１２２（左右方向））へ変位する範囲を狭めることができる。その結果、昇降体３３０を変位させた際に、一方の演出部３３１が他方の演出部３３１に衝突することを抑制できる。
In other words, the elevating body 330 is displaced in a direction opposite to the direction displaced by the inertial force when it is driven, so that when the elevating body 330 is driven, the horizontal direction (FIG. The range of displacement in the direction)) can be narrowed. As a result, when the elevating body 330 is displaced, it is possible to prevent one rendering unit 331 from colliding with the other rendering unit 331.
よって、第２０実施形態では、上述した抑制手段は、案内部材（スライド軸３３２ａ及び案内孔３２３）による直線変位の方向と直交する方向であって隣接するラック３３２と離間する方向へラック３３２を偏倚させることで、演出部３３１が隣接する演出部３３１に近接することを抑制するので、演出部３３１が隣接する演出部３３１に衝突することを抑制することができる。
Therefore, in the twentieth embodiment, the suppression means described above biases the rack 332 in a direction perpendicular to the direction of linear displacement by the guide members (slide shaft 332a and guide hole 323) and away from the adjacent rack 332. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the effect unit 331 from approaching the adjacent effect unit 331, and thus it is possible to suppress the effect unit 331 from colliding with the adjacent effect unit 331.
詳しく説明すると、第２０実施形態では、第２ギヤ３５２の伝達ギア部２０３５５の歯面が大径歯面（第１回転領域２０３５５ａ）を備え、大径歯面（第１回転領域２０３５５ａ）をラック３３２に歯合させることで、案内部材による直線変位の方向と直交する方向であって隣接するラック３３２と離間する方向へラック３３２を偏倚させることができる。
More specifically, in the twentieth embodiment, the tooth surface of the transmission gear portion 20355 of the second gear 352 includes a large diameter tooth surface (first rotation region 20355a), and the large diameter tooth surface (first rotation region 20355a) is racked. By engaging with 332, the rack 332 can be biased in a direction perpendicular to the direction of linear displacement by the guide member and away from the adjacent rack 332.
即ち、ラック３３２を隣接するラック３３２から事前に離間させておけるので、慣性力の影響により、ラック３３２が隣接するラック３３２へ近接する場合であっても、演出部３３１が隣接する演出部３３１に衝突することを抑制できる。
That is, since the rack 332 can be separated from the adjacent rack 332 in advance, even if the rack 332 is close to the adjacent rack 332 due to the influence of the inertial force, the effect unit 331 is adjacent to the adjacent effect unit 331. Collision can be suppressed.
次いで、図１２２を参照して、第２１実施形態について説明する。上記第１５実施形態では、案内孔３２３が重力方向に延設して形成される場合を説明したが、第２１実施形態では、案内孔２１３２３が、湾曲して形成される第１案内部２１３２３ａを備えて形成される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付してその説明を省略する。
Next, a twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifteenth embodiment, the case where the guide hole 323 is formed to extend in the direction of gravity has been described. However, in the twenty-first embodiment, the guide hole 21323 has a curved first guide portion 21323a. Formed in preparation. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
図１２２（ａ）及び図１２２（ｂ）は、第２１実施形態における昇降体３３０及び伝達装置３５０の正面図である。なお、図１２２（ａ）及び図１２２（ｂ）では、第２ギヤ３５２の中間板３５３及び異形ギア部３５４が取り外された状態が図示される。また、図１２２（ａ）及び図１２２（ｂ）では、昇降体３３０が模式的に図示されると共に、案内孔２１３２３及びスライド軸３３２ａの外形が破線で図示される。さらに、図１２２（ａ）及び図１２２（ｂ）には、重力方向に平行な仮想線ＫＪ１とラック３３２の延設方向と平行な仮想線ＫＪ２とが２点鎖線で図示される。
122 (a) and 122 (b) are front views of the elevating body 330 and the transmission device 350 in the twenty-first embodiment. 122A and 122B show a state where the intermediate plate 353 and the deformed gear portion 354 of the second gear 352 are removed. 122 (a) and 122 (b), the elevating body 330 is schematically illustrated, and the outer shapes of the guide hole 21323 and the slide shaft 332a are illustrated by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 122 (a) and FIG. 122 (b), a virtual line KJ1 parallel to the gravity direction and a virtual line KJ2 parallel to the extending direction of the rack 332 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines.
図１２２に示すように、第２１実施形態における背面カバー３２０に形成される案内孔２１３２３は、上端部に湾曲形成される第１案内部２１３２３ａと、その第１案内部２１３２３ａに連なると共に、第１案内部２１３２３ａの下に直線状に形成される第２案内部２１３２３ｂとを備えて形成される。
As shown in FIG. 122, the guide hole 21323 formed in the back cover 320 in the twenty-first embodiment is connected to the first guide portion 21323a that is curved at the upper end portion, the first guide portion 21323a, and the first guide portion 21323a. A second guide portion 21323b formed linearly below the guide portion 21323a is formed.
第１案内部２１３２３ａは、案内孔２１３２３の上端部分に形成され、上方に向かうに従って第２ギア３５２（伝達ギア部３５５）側に湾曲する形状に形成される。第２案内部２１３２３ｂは、案内孔２１３２３の下端部分に形成され、重力方向に平行の直線状に形成される。
The 1st guide part 21323a is formed in the upper end part of the guide hole 21323, and is formed in the shape which curves to the 2nd gear 352 (transmission gear part 355) side as it goes upwards. The 2nd guide part 21323b is formed in the lower end part of guide hole 21323, and is formed in the shape of a straight line parallel to the direction of gravity.
上述したように、ラック３３２の背面側には、円柱状に突出するスライド軸３３２ａが突出形成される（図１５参照）。スライド軸３３２ａは、背面カバー３２０に形成される案内孔３２３に挿入される。これにより、ラック３３２の延設方向（仮想線ＫＪ２）を、仮想線ＫＪ１に対して傾倒させることができる。
As described above, on the back side of the rack 332, the slide shaft 332a protruding in a columnar shape is formed to protrude (see FIG. 15). The slide shaft 332a is inserted into a guide hole 323 formed in the back cover 320. Thereby, the extending direction (virtual line KJ2) of the rack 332 can be tilted with respect to the virtual line KJ1.
よって、ラック３３２のスライド軸３３２ａが第１案内部２１３２３ａの内側に摺動（案内）されると、スライド軸３３２ａが第２ギア３５２（伝達ギア部３５５）側に案内されるので、ラック３３２が全体的に第２ギア３５２側に押し出される。これにより、ラック３３２がスライド軸を中心に回転される。従って、ラック３３２が傾倒された状態とされる（図１２２（ａ）に示す昇降体３３０では、ラック３３２の上端部が水平方向左側（図１２２（ａ）左側）に変位される）。
Therefore, when the slide shaft 332a of the rack 332 is slid (guided) inside the first guide portion 21323a, the slide shaft 332a is guided to the second gear 352 (transmission gear portion 355) side, so that the rack 332 is The whole is pushed out to the second gear 352 side. Thereby, the rack 332 is rotated around the slide shaft. Accordingly, the rack 332 is tilted (in the lift 330 shown in FIG. 122 (a), the upper end of the rack 332 is displaced to the left in the horizontal direction (left side in FIG. 122 (a)).
一方で、スライド軸３３２ａが第２案内部２１３２３ｂの内側に案内されると、ラック３３２の延設方向を重力方向と平行な状態にできる。
On the other hand, when the slide shaft 332a is guided inside the second guide portion 21323b, the extending direction of the rack 332 can be made parallel to the direction of gravity.
また、スライド軸３３２ａは、昇降体３３０が上昇位置に配置された状態の際に、第１案内部２１３２３ａの内側に配置される。さらに、第１案内部２１３２３ａの内側をスライド軸３３２ａが摺動する範囲は、昇降体３３０を駆動させた際の駆動初期の慣性力により演出部３３１が左右方向に変位する区間（ラック３３２が第２ギア３５２から水平方向左側（図１２２（ｂ）左右方向）に押し出されるラック３３２の延設方向（図１２２（ｂ）上下方向）の区画）よりも長く設定される。
Further, the slide shaft 332a is disposed inside the first guide portion 21323a when the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position. Furthermore, the range in which the slide shaft 332a slides inside the first guide portion 21323a is a section in which the effect portion 331 is displaced in the left-right direction by the inertial force at the initial driving time when the elevating body 330 is driven (the rack 332 is the first). The length is set to be longer than the extending direction of the rack 332 (partition in the vertical direction in FIG. 122B) pushed out from the second gear 352 in the horizontal direction (FIG.
ここで、上述したように昇降体３３０が上昇位置から下方に変位される際には、その慣性力により演出部３３１が左右方向に変位する（図１２１に示す昇降体３３０では、演出部３３１が左方向に変位する）。そのため、並設される昇降体３３０の一方の演出部３３１が他方の演出部３３１に衝突する恐れがある。
Here, when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward from the raised position as described above, the effect section 331 is displaced in the left-right direction by the inertia force (the elevating body 330 shown in FIG. To the left). Therefore, one effect part 331 of the elevating body 330 arranged in parallel may collide with the other effect part 331.
これに対し、第２１実施形態では、案内孔２１３２３が、第１案内部２１３２３ａを備えて形成されると共に、その第１案内部２１３２３ａをスライド軸３３２ａが摺動する範囲が、昇降体３３０を駆動させた際の駆動初期の慣性力により演出部３３１が左右方向に変位する区間よりも長く設定されるので、昇降体３３０を駆動させた際に、一方の演出部３３１が他方の演出部３３１に衝突することを抑制できる。
On the other hand, in the twenty-first embodiment, the guide hole 21323 is formed with the first guide portion 21323a, and the range in which the slide shaft 332a slides on the first guide portion 21323a drives the elevator 330. Since the stage 331 is set to be longer than the section in which the stage 331 is displaced in the left-right direction due to the inertial force at the initial stage of driving, one stage 331 is moved to the other stage 331 when the elevating body 330 is driven. Collision can be suppressed.
言い変えると、昇降体３３０は、駆動された際の慣性力により変位する方向と反対方向に変位された状態とされるので、昇降体３３０が駆動された際に、左右の方向へ変位する範囲を狭めることができる。その結果、昇降体３３０を変位させた際に、一方の演出部３３１が他方の演出部３３１に衝突することを抑制できる。
In other words, since the elevating body 330 is displaced in a direction opposite to the direction displaced by the inertial force when it is driven, a range in which the elevating body 330 is displaced in the left and right directions when the elevating body 330 is driven. Can be narrowed. As a result, when the elevating body 330 is displaced, it is possible to prevent one rendering unit 331 from colliding with the other rendering unit 331.
よって、第２１実施形態では、上述した抑制手段は、案内部材（スライド軸３３２ａ及び案内孔２１３２３）による直線変位の方向と直交する方向であって隣接するラック３３２と離間する方向へラック３３２を偏倚させることで、演出部３３１が隣接する演出部３３１に近接することを抑制するので、演出部３３１が隣接する演出部３３１に衝突することを抑制することができる。
Therefore, in the twenty-first embodiment, the suppression means described above biases the rack 332 in a direction perpendicular to the direction of linear displacement by the guide members (slide shaft 332a and guide hole 21323) and away from the adjacent rack 332. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the effect unit 331 from approaching the adjacent effect unit 331, and thus it is possible to suppress the effect unit 331 from colliding with the adjacent effect unit 331.
詳しく説明すると、第２１実施形態では、案内孔２１３２３が傾斜溝（第１案内部２１３２３ａ）を備え、傾斜溝（第１案内部２１３２３ａ）にスライド軸３３２ａを位置させることで、案内部材（スライド軸３３２ａ及び案内孔２１３２３）による直線変位の方向と直交する方向であって隣接するラック３３２と離間する方向へラック３３２を偏倚させることができる。
More specifically, in the twenty-first embodiment, the guide hole 21323 includes an inclined groove (first guide portion 21323a), and the slide shaft 332a is positioned in the inclined groove (first guide portion 21323a), whereby a guide member (slide shaft) is provided. 332a and the guide hole 21323), the rack 332 can be biased in the direction orthogonal to the direction of linear displacement and away from the adjacent rack 332.
即ち、ラック３３２を隣接するラック３３２から事前に離間させておけるので、慣性力の影響により、ラック３３２が隣接するラック３３２へ近接する場合であっても、演出部３３１が隣接する演出部３３１に衝突することを抑制できる。
That is, since the rack 332 can be separated from the adjacent rack 332 in advance, even if the rack 332 is close to the adjacent rack 332 due to the influence of the inertial force, the effect unit 331 is adjacent to the adjacent effect unit 331. Collision can be suppressed.
次いで、図１２３（ａ）を参照して、第２２実施形態における発光ユニット８００について説明する。上記第５実施形態では、同一形状の凹部８４３が複数個形成される場合を説明したが、第２２実施形態では、凹部８４３及びその凹部８４３と形状の異なる凹部２２８４３が形成される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。
Next, a light emitting unit 800 according to the twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifth embodiment, the case where a plurality of concave portions 843 having the same shape is formed has been described. However, in the twenty-second embodiment, the concave portion 843 and the concave portion 22843 having a shape different from that of the concave portion 843 are formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
図１２３（ａ）は、第２２実施形態における発光ユニット８００の断面図である。なお、図１２３（ａ）では、装飾部材８６０が取り外された状態が図示されると共に、基板部材８５０が破線で図示される。また、図１２３（ａ）は、図９６（ａ）の発光ユニット８００の断面と対応する。
FIG. 123A is a cross-sectional view of the light emitting unit 800 in the twenty-second embodiment. In FIG. 123 (a), a state in which the decorative member 860 is removed is illustrated, and the substrate member 850 is illustrated by a broken line. FIG. 123 (a) corresponds to the cross section of the light emitting unit 800 of FIG. 96 (a).
さらに、図１２３（ａ）では、各ＬＥＤ８５２の照射方向に仮想線が延設されており、各仮想線に区画されたそれぞれの領域が左右方向左側（図１２３（ａ）左側）から第１領域ＳＲ１から第５領域ＳＲ５の符号を付与して図示される。
Further, in FIG. 123 (a), imaginary lines are extended in the irradiation direction of the respective LEDs 852, and the respective areas partitioned by the imaginary lines are the first area from the left side in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 123 (a)). SR1 to the fifth region SR5 are given the reference numerals.
図１２３（ａ）に示すように、第２２実施形態における発光ユニット８００は、区画部材８４０の左右方向（図１２３（ａ）左右方向）中央側に、凹部８４３が形成され、区画部材８４０の左右方向両端に第３凹部２２８４３が形成される。
As shown in FIG. 123 (a), in the light emitting unit 800 according to the twenty-second embodiment, a concave portion 843 is formed on the center side of the partition member 840 in the left-right direction (FIG. 123 (a) left-right direction). Third concave portions 22843 are formed at both ends in the direction.
第３凹部２２８４３は、凹部８４３よりも上下方向に延設して形成される。即ち、第３凹部２２８４３は、その内壁（第１側壁２２８４３ａ及び第２側壁２２８４３ｂ）が、凹部８４３の内壁（第１側壁８４３ａ及び第２側壁８４３）よりも上下方向に延設して形成される。
The third concave portion 22843 is formed to extend in the vertical direction from the concave portion 843. That is, the third concave portion 22843 is formed such that the inner walls (first side wall 22843a and second side wall 22843b) extend vertically from the inner walls (first side wall 843a and second side wall 843) of the concave portion 843. .
また、第３凹部２２８４３の凹設底面（図１２３（ａ）における上端面）は、凹部８４３の凹設底面と同一高さに設定される。よって、区画部材８４０から第１導光部材８１０又は第２導光部材８２０に出射される光の出射位置（高さ）は、第３凹部２２８４３と凹部８４３とで同一高さ位置に設定される。
Further, the concave bottom surface (the upper end surface in FIG. 123A) of the third concave portion 22843 is set to the same height as the concave bottom surface of the concave portion 843. Therefore, the emission position (height) of the light emitted from the partition member 840 to the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820 is set to the same height position in the third concave portion 22843 and the concave portion 843. .
これにより、第３凹部２２８４３と凹部８４３とでその凹設距離が異なる場合においても、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の端面８１１，８２１の形状を複雑化する必要がないので、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の形成を簡易にできる。
This eliminates the need for complicating the shapes of the end surfaces 811 and 821 of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 even when the concave distance between the third concave portion 22843 and the concave portion 843 is different. The formation of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be simplified.
また、第２２実施形態における発光ユニット８００に配設される基板部材２０８５０は、第１基板２２８５０ａと第２基板２２８５０ｂとから形成される。
In addition, the substrate member 20850 disposed in the light emitting unit 800 in the twenty-second embodiment is formed of a first substrate 22850a and a second substrate 22850b.
第１基板２２８５０ａは、第１基板２２８５０ａの長手方向（図１２３（ａ）左右方向）寸法が、ベース部材８４７の長手方向（図１２３（ａ）左右方向）両端に２つ形成される第３凹部２２８４３の対向間寸法よりも小さく形成され、区画部材８４０の中央に左右方向に並設される凹部８４３と対向する位置に配設される。
The first substrate 22850a has a third concave portion in which the longitudinal dimension of the first substrate 22850a (FIG. 123 (a) left-right direction) is formed at both ends of the base member 847 in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 123 (a) left-right direction). It is formed to be smaller than the facing dimension of 22843, and is disposed at a position facing the concave portion 843 arranged in parallel in the left-right direction at the center of the partition member 840.
また、第１基板２２８５０ａには、対向する２つの凹部８４３のそれぞれの中央部と対向する位置にＬＥＤ８５２が配設されており、その第１基板２２８５０ａに配設されるＬＥＤ８５２から照射される光により第１導光部材８１０又は第２導光部材８２０の左右方向中央部に光を入射させることができる。
The first substrate 22850a is provided with an LED 852 at a position facing the central portion of each of the two concave portions 843 facing each other, and light emitted from the LED 852 provided on the first substrate 22850a is provided. Light can be incident on the central portion in the left-right direction of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820.
第２基板２２８５０ｂは、区画部材２２８４０の左右方向（図１２３（ａ）左右方向）両端に形成される第３凹部２２８４３と対向する位置にそれぞれ配設される。第２基板２２８５０ｂは、左右方向における寸法が第３凹部２２８４３の第２側壁２２８４３ｂの対向間寸法よりも大きく形成される。これにより、第３凹部２２８４３の開口側（図１２３（ａ）下側）の外縁部に沿って第２基板２２８５０ｂを配設できる。
The second substrate 22850b is disposed at a position facing the third recess 22243 formed on both ends of the partition member 22840 in the left-right direction (FIG. 123 (a) left-right direction). The second substrate 22850b is formed such that the dimension in the left-right direction is larger than the dimension between the opposing sides of the second side wall 22843b of the third concave portion 22843. As a result, the second substrate 22850b can be disposed along the outer edge portion of the third concave portion 22843 on the opening side (the lower side in FIG. 123 (a)).
また、第２基板２２８５０ｂには、対向する第３凹部２２８４３の中央部と対向する位置にＬＥＤ８５２が形成されており、その第２基板２２８５０ｂに配設されるＬＥＤ８５２から照射される光により第１導光部材８１０又は第２導光部材８２０の左右方向両端部を発光させることができる。
In addition, an LED 852 is formed on the second substrate 22850b at a position facing the central portion of the third concave portion 22743 that faces the first substrate 22850b, and the first light is emitted from the LED 852 disposed on the second substrate 22850b. Both ends of the light member 810 or the second light guide member 820 in the left-right direction can emit light.
ここで、第１０実施形態において説明したように、第１導光部材８１０又は第２導光部材８２０の左右方向中央部（第２領域ＳＲ２から第４領域ＳＲ４）は、２のＬＥＤ８５２の光が照射されるため、照射される光の照度の確保が容易である。
Here, as described in the tenth embodiment, the central portion of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820 (the second region SR2 to the fourth region SR4) receives light from the two LEDs 852. Since it is irradiated, it is easy to ensure the illuminance of the irradiated light.
一方、第１導光部材８１０又は第２導光部材８２０の左右方向両端部（第１領域ＳＲ１及び第５領域ＳＲ５）は、第１導光部材８１０又は第２導光部材８２０の左右両端部に配設した１のＬＥＤ８５２の光のみで発光されるため、照射される光の照度の確保が困難となる。
On the other hand, the left and right end portions (first region SR1 and fifth region SR5) of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820 are the left and right end portions of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820. Since light is emitted only from the light of one LED 852 arranged in the above, it is difficult to ensure the illuminance of the irradiated light.
これに対し、第２２実施形態では、列設方向の両端部に位置する第３凹部２２８４３が、中央部に位置する凹部８４３よりもその内壁が凹設方向（図１２３（ａ）上下方向）に長く形成される。よって、その分、第３凹部２２８４３の内壁の面積を大きくできる。
On the other hand, in the twenty-second embodiment, the third recesses 22843 located at both ends in the line-up direction have inner walls in the recessing direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 123 (a)) rather than the recesses 843 located in the center. Long formed. Therefore, the area of the inner wall of the third recess 22843 can be increased accordingly.
よって、第２基板２２８５０ｂに配設されるＬＥＤ８５２から照射される光を、第３凹部２２８４３の内壁（第１側壁２２８４３ａ及び第２側壁２２８４３ｂ）により反射させやすくできる。その結果、第１導光部材８１０又は第２導光部材８２０の左右方向両端部（第１領域ＳＲ１及び第５領域ＳＲ５）の光の照度を確保しやすくできる。
Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 852 provided on the second substrate 22850b can be easily reflected by the inner walls (the first side wall 22843a and the second side wall 22843b) of the third concave portion 22843. As a result, it is possible to easily secure the illuminance of light at the left and right end portions (the first region SR1 and the fifth region SR5) of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820.
詳しく説明すると、第３凹部２２８４３の内壁（第１側壁２２８４３ａ及び第２側壁２２８４３ｂ）は、凹設方向に長く形成されることにより、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射される光を反射させる領域を増やすことができる。従って、第３凹部２２８４３の内壁（第１側壁２２８４３ａ及び第２側壁２２８４３ｂ）にＬＥＤ８５２の光を照射して、第１領域ＳＲ１，ＳＲ５側（第１導光部材８１０又は第２導光部材８２０の左右両端部）に光を集光させやすくできる。
More specifically, the inner wall (the first side wall 22843a and the second side wall 22843b) of the third concave portion 22843 is formed to be long in the concave direction, so that a region for reflecting the light emitted from the LED 852 can be increased. Accordingly, the inner wall (the first side wall 22843a and the second side wall 22843b) of the third concave portion 22843 is irradiated with the light of the LED 852, and the first region SR1, SR5 side (the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820). It is possible to easily collect the light on the left and right ends.
よって、第１導光部材８１０又は第２導光部材８２０の第１領域ＳＲ１及び第２領域ＳＲ２の光の照度を確保しやすくできる。その結果、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の照度を全体に均一にしやすくできる。
Therefore, it is possible to easily secure the illuminance of light in the first region SR1 and the second region SR2 of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820. As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform throughout.
次いで、図１２３（ｂ）を参照して、第２３実施形態における発光ユニット８００について説明する。上記第５実施形態では、同一形状の凹部８４３が形成される場合を説明したが、第２３実施形態では、凹部８４３及びその凹部８４３と形状の異なる凹部２２８４３が形成される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。
Next, with reference to FIG. 123B, a light-emitting unit 800 in the twenty-third embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the concave portion 843 having the same shape is formed has been described. However, in the twenty-third embodiment, the concave portion 843 and the concave portion 22843 having a shape different from that of the concave portion 843 are formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
図１２３（ｂ）は、第２３実施形態における発光ユニット８００の断面図である。なお、図１２３（ｂ）では、装飾部材８６０が取り外された状態が図示されると共に、基板部材８５０が破線で図示される。また、図１２３（ｂ）は、図９６（ａ）の発光ユニット８００の断面と対応する。
FIG. 123B is a cross-sectional view of the light emitting unit 800 in the twenty-third embodiment. In FIG. 123 (b), a state in which the decorative member 860 is removed is illustrated, and the substrate member 850 is illustrated by a broken line. FIG. 123 (b) corresponds to the cross section of the light emitting unit 800 of FIG. 96 (a).
さらに、図１２３（ｂ）では、各ＬＥＤ８５２の照射方向に仮想線が延設されており、各仮想線に区画されたそれぞれの領域が左右方向左側（図１２３（ｂ）左側）から第１領域ＳＲ１から第５領域ＳＲ５の符号を付与して図示される。
Further, in FIG. 123 (b), imaginary lines are extended in the irradiation direction of each LED 852, and the respective areas partitioned by the imaginary lines are the first area from the left side in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 123 (b)). SR1 to the fifth region SR5 are given the reference numerals.
図１２３（ｂ）に示すように、第２３実施形態における発光ユニット８００は、区画部材８４０の左右方向（図１２３（ｂ）左右方向）中央側に、凹部８４３が形成され、区画部材２０８４０の左右方向両端部に第４凹部２３８４３が形成される。
As shown in FIG. 123 (b), in the light emitting unit 800 according to the twenty-third embodiment, a recess 843 is formed in the center side of the partition member 840 in the left-right direction (FIG. 123 (b) left-right direction). Fourth recesses 23843 are formed at both ends in the direction.
第４凹部２３８４３は、前後方向（図１２３（ｂ）紙面奥行方向）に対向して形成される第１側壁２３８４３ａと左右方向（図１２３（ｂ）左右方向）に対向して形成される第２側壁２３８４３ｂとから形成される。
The fourth concave portion 23843 is formed opposite to the first side wall 23843a formed opposite to the front-rear direction (FIG. 123 (b) depth direction of the paper) and the left-right direction (FIG. 123 (b) left-right direction). And a side wall 23843b.
第２側壁２３８４３ｂは、凹設開口側（図１２３（ｂ）下側）から凹設底面側（図１２３（ｂ）上側）に向かって、区画部材２３８４３の左右方向中央部から左右方向外側に離間する方向に傾斜して形成される。
The second side wall 23843b is spaced outward from the center in the left-right direction of the partition member 23843 from the recessed opening side (lower side in FIG. 123 (b)) toward the recessed bottom surface side (upper side in FIG. 123 (b)). Inclined in the direction of
また、第４凹部２３８４３は、凹設底面（図１２３（ｂ）上面）が凹部８４３の凹設底面と同一高さに設定されると共に、その凹設深さ（図１２３（ｂ）上下方向）が、凹部８４３の凹設深さ寸法と略同一に設定される。
The fourth recess 23384 has a recessed bottom surface (upper surface in FIG. 123 (b)) set to the same height as the recessed bottom surface of the recess 843, and the recessed depth (FIG. 123 (b) in the vertical direction). Is set to be substantially the same as the recessed depth dimension of the recess 843.
また、第２３実施形態における発光ユニット８００に配設される基板部材２３８５０は、第１基板２３８５０ａと第２基板２３８５０ｂとから形成される。
Further, the substrate member 23850 disposed in the light emitting unit 800 in the twenty-third embodiment is formed of a first substrate 23850a and a second substrate 23850b.
第１基板２３８５０ａは、その左右方向（図１２３（ｂ）左右方向）長さが、左右方向両端に２つ形成される第４凹部２３８４０の対向間寸法よりも小さく形成され、区画部材２３８４０の中央に左右方向に並んで並設される凹部８４３と対向する位置に配設される。
The first substrate 23850a has a length in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 123 (b)) that is smaller than the dimension between the opposite sides of the fourth recesses 23840 formed at both ends in the left-right direction, and the center of the partition member 23840 Are disposed at positions facing the recesses 843 arranged side by side in the horizontal direction.
また、第１基板２３８５０ａには、対向する２つの凹部８４３のそれぞれの中央部と対向する位置にＬＥＤ８５２が配設されており、その第１基板２３８５０ａに配設されるＬＥＤ８５２から照射される光により第１導光部材８１０又は第２導光部材８２０の左右方向中央部を発光させることができる。
In addition, the LED 852 is disposed on the first substrate 23850a so as to face the center of each of the two concave portions 843 facing each other, and light emitted from the LED 852 disposed on the first substrate 23850a is used. The central portion in the left-right direction of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820 can emit light.
第２基板２３８５０ｂは、区画部材２３８４０の左右方向（図１２３（ａ）左右方向）両端に形成される第４凹部２３８４３と対向する位置にそれぞれ配設される。第２基板２３８５０ｂは、左右方向における寸法が、第４凹部２３８４３の第２側壁２３８４３ｂの対向間寸法よりも大きく形成される。これにより、第４凹部２３８４３の開口側（図１２３（ｂ）下側）の外縁部に沿って第２基板２３８５０ｂを配設できる。
The second substrates 23850b are respectively disposed at positions facing the fourth recesses 23743 formed at both ends in the left-right direction (FIG. 123 (a) left-right direction) of the partition member 23840. The second substrate 23850b is formed such that the dimension in the left-right direction is larger than the dimension between the opposing sides of the second side wall 23843b of the fourth recess 23438b. Thus, the second substrate 23850b can be disposed along the outer edge portion of the fourth recess 234383 on the opening side (lower side in FIG. 123 (b)).
また、第２基板２３８５０ｂは、区画部材２２８４０の長手方向（図１２３（ｂ）左右方向）外側端部が下方に向かって傾斜して配設されており、その傾斜角度が対向する第４凹部２３８４３の第２側壁２３８４３ｂの凹設方向と直交する角度に設定される。
In addition, the second substrate 23850b is disposed such that the outer end portion of the partitioning member 22840 in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 123 (b)) is inclined downward, and the fourth recessed portion 23844 having the inclined angle facing each other. Is set at an angle orthogonal to the recessed direction of the second side wall 23843b.
また、第２基板２３８５０ｂにはＬＥＤ８５２が配設され、そのＬＥＤ８５２が第４凹部２３８４３の対向する第２側壁２３８４３ｂの中央位置からその第２側壁２３８４３ｂの延設方向に延びる直線上に位置される。
In addition, the LED 852 is disposed on the second substrate 23850b, and the LED 852 is positioned on a straight line extending in the extending direction of the second side wall 23843b from the center position of the second side wall 23843b facing the fourth recess 233843.
即ち、第２基板２３８５０ｂに配設されるＬＥＤ８５２から照射される光の照射方向が、第４凹部２３８４３の延設方向と平行とされる。これにより、第２基板２３８５０ｂに配設されるＬＥＤ８５２の光を、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の延設方向（図１２３（ｂ）左右方向）両端部（第１領域ＳＲ１及び第５領域ＳＲ５）に照射できる。
That is, the irradiation direction of the light irradiated from the LED 852 arranged on the second substrate 23850b is made parallel to the extending direction of the fourth recess 234383. Thereby, the light of the LED 852 arranged on the second substrate 23850b is sent to both ends (first region SR1) in the extending direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (FIG. 123 (b) left and right direction). And the fifth region SR5).
ここで、第１０実施形態において説明したように、第１導光部材８１０又は第２導光部材８２０の左右方向中央部（第２領域ＳＲ２から第４領域ＳＲ４）は、２のＬＥＤ８５２の光が照射されるため、照射される光の照度の確保が容易である。
Here, as described in the tenth embodiment, the central portion of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820 (the second region SR2 to the fourth region SR4) receives light from the two LEDs 852. Since it is irradiated, it is easy to ensure the illuminance of the irradiated light.
一方、第１導光部材８１０又は第２導光部材８２０の延設方向（図１２３（ｂ）左右方向）両端部（第１領域ＳＲ１及び第５領域ＳＲ５）は、第１導光部材８１０又は第２導光部材８２０の延設方向（図１２３（ｂ）左右方向）両端部に配設した１のＬＥＤ８５２の光のみで発光されるため、照射される光の照度の確保が困難となる。
On the other hand, both ends (first region SR1 and fifth region SR5) of the extending direction of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820 (the left-right direction in FIG. 123 (b)) are the first light guide member 810 or Since light is emitted only from the light of one LED 852 disposed at both ends of the extending direction of the second light guide member 820 (FIG. 123 (b), left and right direction), it is difficult to ensure the illuminance of the irradiated light.
これに対し、第２３実施形態では、列設方向の両端部に位置する第４凹部２３８４３の第２側壁２２８４３ｂが列説方向の外側に傾斜して形成される。よって、第２基板２３８５０ｂに配設されるＬＥＤ８５２から照射される光を、第４凹部２３８４３の内壁（第１側壁２３８４３ａ及び第２側壁２３８４３ｂ）により反射させて、第１導光部材８１０又は第２導光部材８２０の左右方向両端部（第１領域ＳＲ１及び第５領域ＳＲ５）に光を照射しやすくできる。
On the other hand, in the twenty-third embodiment, the second side walls 22843b of the fourth recesses 23843 located at both end portions in the row direction are formed to be inclined outward in the row direction. Therefore, the light radiated from the LED 852 disposed on the second substrate 23850b is reflected by the inner walls (the first side wall 23843a and the second side wall 23843b) of the fourth recess 23384, and the first light guide member 810 or the second It is possible to easily irradiate light to both end portions in the left-right direction of the light guide member 820 (first region SR1 and fifth region SR5).
また、第２基板２３８５０ｂは、第１導光部材８１０又は第２導光部材８２０の端面８１１，８２１に対して傾斜して配設されるので、その第２基板２３８５０ｂに配設されるＬＥＤ８５２の光を、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の左右方向両端部（第１領域ＳＲ１及び第５領域ＳＲ５）に照射しやすくできる。
Further, since the second substrate 23850b is disposed to be inclined with respect to the end surfaces 811 and 821 of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820, the LED 852 disposed on the second substrate 23850b is disposed. Light can be easily applied to both the left and right end portions (first region SR1 and fifth region SR5) of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820.
即ち、第２３実施形態では、列説方向の両端部に位置する第４凹部２３８４３の第２側壁２２８４３ｂを第１導光部材８１０又は第２導光部材８２０の外側に向けて傾斜すると共に、第２基板２３８５０ｂに配設されるＬＥＤ８５２の光の照射方向を第１導光部材８１０又は第２導光部材８２０の外側に向けるので、第１導光部材８１０又は第２導光部材８２０の左右方向（図１２３（ｂ）左右方向）両端部（第１領域ＳＲ１及び第５領域ＳＲ５）に光を照射しやすくできる。
That is, in the twenty-third embodiment, the second side wall 22843b of the fourth recess 23384 located at both ends in the line direction is inclined toward the outside of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820, and the first Since the light irradiation direction of the LED 852 arranged on the two substrates 23850b is directed to the outside of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820, the left and right direction of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820 (FIG. 123 (b) left-right direction) It is easy to irradiate light to both end portions (first region SR1 and fifth region SR5).
よって、第１導光部材８１０又は第２導光部材８２０の第１領域ＳＲ１及び第２領域ＳＲ２の光の照度を確保しやすくできる。その結果、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の照度を全体に均一にしやすくできる。
Therefore, it is possible to easily secure the illuminance of light in the first region SR1 and the second region SR2 of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820. As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform throughout.
次いで、図１２４を参照して、第２４実施形態における演出部３３１について説明する。上記第１１実施形態では、基板部材３９０と外枠３６０との上端部が連結（締結や係合）されない場合を説明したが、第２４実施形態では、基板部材３９０と外枠３６０との上端部が係合される場合を説明する。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。
Next, the rendering unit 331 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the upper end portions of the substrate member 390 and the outer frame 360 are not coupled (fastened or engaged) has been described. In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the upper end portions of the substrate member 390 and the outer frame 360 are described. Will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
図１２４（ａ）は、第２４実施形態における演出部３３１の断面図であり、図１２４（ｂ）は、図１２４（ａ）のＣＸＸＩＶｂ−ＣＸＸＩＶｂ線における演出部３３１の断面図である。なお、図１２４（ａ）は、図１０８の断面図と対応する。
124A is a cross-sectional view of the rendering unit 331 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 124B is a cross-sectional view of the rendering unit 331 along the CXXIVb-CXXIVb line of FIG. 124A. Note that FIG. 124A corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG.
図１２４に示すように、第１２実施形態における演出部３３１の外枠３６０には、突設部２４３６１ｂが形成される。突設部２４３６１ｂは、外縁部３６１の上端部の内縁から突設して形成されており、基板部材３９０の正面側（図１２４（ａ）左側）に位置される。
As shown in FIG. 124, a projecting portion 24361b is formed on the outer frame 360 of the effect portion 331 in the twelfth embodiment. The protruding portion 24361b is formed to protrude from the inner edge of the upper end portion of the outer edge portion 361, and is located on the front side (left side in FIG. 124 (a)) of the substrate member 390.
また、基板部材３９０には、その上端部にダミーチップ２４３９５が配置される。ダミーチップ２４３９５は、立方体に形成される本体部２４３９５ａと、その本体部２４３９５ａの左右方向（図１２４（ｂ）左右方向）両側面から突出するＬ字状の脚部２４３９５ｂとを備えて形成される。
In addition, a dummy chip 24395 is disposed on the upper end portion of the substrate member 390. The dummy chip 24395 is formed to include a body portion 24395a formed in a cube and L-shaped leg portions 24395b protruding from both side surfaces of the body portion 24395a (left and right direction in FIG. 124 (b)). .
ダミーチップ２４３９５は、基板部材３９０に配設される第１ＬＥＤ３９１又は第２ＬＥＤ３９２の発光を制御する制御チップ（図示しない）とは異なり、基板部材３９０に配設される第１ＬＥＤ３９１や第２ＬＥＤ３９２と導通しない態様に形成される。即ち、ダミーチップ２４３９５に電力が供給されないように構成されている。
Unlike the control chip (not shown) that controls the light emission of the first LED 391 or the second LED 392 disposed on the substrate member 390, the dummy chip 24395 does not conduct with the first LED 391 or the second LED 392 disposed on the substrate member 390. Formed. That is, power is not supplied to the dummy chip 24395.
本体部２４３９５ａは、第１ＬＥＤ３９１及び第２ＬＥＤ３９２を除く基板部材３９０の正面側の側面と距離寸法Ｚ１（図１２４（ｂ）参照）の寸法を隔てて配設される。
The main body 24395a is disposed with a distance dimension Z1 (see FIG. 124B) separated from the front side surface of the substrate member 390 excluding the first LED 391 and the second LED 392.
脚部２４３９５ｂは、金属材料から形成される。脚部２４３９５ｂは、一端が本体部２４３９５ａの側面から突出されると共に、中央部で基板部材３９０側に屈曲されて他端が基板部材３９０に連結される。上述した距離寸法Ｚ１は、一端側の屈曲部分までの寸法により、調整可能とされる。また、脚部２４３９５ｂは、その一端側が、基板部材３９０の正面とはんだにより固着（連結）される。
Leg portion 24395b is formed of a metal material. One end of the leg portion 24395b protrudes from the side surface of the main body portion 24395a, is bent toward the substrate member 390 at the center portion, and the other end is connected to the substrate member 390. The distance dimension Z1 described above can be adjusted by the dimension to the bent portion on one end side. Further, one end side of the leg portion 24395b is fixed (connected) to the front surface of the board member 390 by solder.
上述した、突設部２４３６１ｂの前後方向（図１２４（ｂ）上下方向）における厚みは、距離寸法Ｚ１よりも小さい厚み寸法の寸法Ｚ２（図１２４（ｂ）参照）に設定される（Ｚ１＞Ｚ２）。
The above-described thickness in the front-rear direction (FIG. 124 (b) vertical direction) of the projecting portion 24361b is set to the dimension Z2 (see FIG. 124 (b)) having a thickness dimension smaller than the distance dimension Z1 (Z1> Z2). ).
また、突設部２４３６１ｂの前後方向における突出位置は、組み立て状態の基板部材３９０のダミーチップ２４３９５の内側に設定される。また、突設部２４３６１ｂの左右方向における幅寸法は、本体部２４３９５ａの左右両側に形成される突設部２４３６１ｂの一側部分（基板３９０に連結される側）の対向間寸法よりも小さく設定される。
In addition, the protruding position of the protruding portion 24361b in the front-rear direction is set inside the dummy chip 24395 of the assembled substrate member 390. In addition, the width dimension in the left-right direction of the projecting portion 24361b is set smaller than the facing dimension of one side portion (side connected to the substrate 390) of the projecting portion 24361b formed on the left and right sides of the main body portion 24395a. The
さらに、突設部２４３６１ｂの径方向内側への突設先端位置は、組み立て状態の演出部３３１においてダミーチップ２４３９５よりも外枠３６０の径方向内側に設定される。
Further, the projecting tip position of the projecting portion 24361b inward in the radial direction is set at the radially inner side of the outer frame 360 with respect to the dummy chip 24395 in the effect portion 331 in the assembled state.
よって、突設部２４３６１ｂをダミーチップ２４３９５の本体部２４３９５ａと脚部２４３９５ｂとに囲われた領域に配置することができる。即ち、ダミーチップ２４３９５と突設部２４３６１ｂとを係合させた状態にできる。
Therefore, the projecting portion 24361b can be disposed in a region surrounded by the main body portion 24395a and the leg portion 24395b of the dummy chip 24395. That is, the dummy chip 24395 and the projecting portion 24361b can be engaged with each other.
従って、基板部材３９０の上端側を外枠３６０と係合した状態にできるので、介設部材３３５（基板部材３９０）ががたついた際の、がたつきを抑制することができる。
Therefore, since the upper end side of the board member 390 can be engaged with the outer frame 360, rattling when the interposed member 335 (the board member 390) rattles can be suppressed.
即ち、ベース部分３３４の開放側に介設部材３３５（基板部材３９０）と外枠３６０とを係合させる係合部（ダミーチップ２４３９５及び突設部２４３６１ｂ）を形成することで、介設部材３３５（基板部材３９０）ががたついた際に、係合部によりそのがたつきを抑制するこができる。
That is, by forming an engaging portion (a dummy chip 24395 and a protruding portion 24361b) for engaging the interposition member 335 (substrate member 390) and the outer frame 360 on the open side of the base portion 334, the interposition member 335 is formed. When the (substrate member 390) rattles, the rattling can be suppressed by the engaging portion.
また、第２４実施形態では、基板部材３９０側の係合部（ダミーチップ２４３９５）が、第１ＬＥＤ３９１又は第２ＬＥＤ３９２等の制御をしないチップで形成されるので、その係合により、基板部材３９０の制御が誤動作したり、破損したりすることを抑制できる。
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, since the engaging portion (dummy chip 24395) on the board member 390 side is formed by a chip that does not control the first LED 391 or the second LED 392, the board member 390 is controlled by the engagement. Can be prevented from malfunctioning or being damaged.
また、ダミーチップ２４３９５と基板部材３９０とは、はんだにより固着（連結）されるので、基板部材３９０に、第１ＬＥＤ８９１または第２ＬＥＤ８９２をはんだにより固着する際に、ダミーチップ２４３９５を配設できる。
Further, since the dummy chip 24395 and the board member 390 are fixed (coupled) by solder, the dummy chip 24395 can be disposed when the first LED 891 or the second LED 892 is fixed to the board member 390 by solder.
即ち、第１ＬＥＤ８９１及び第２ＬＥＤ８９２をはんだ付けする工程の際にダミーチップ２４３９５を基板部材３９０に固着できる。よって、介設部材３３５の上端部に係合部分を形成する際の係合部の形成を簡易にできる。その結果、製造コストが高くなることを抑制できる。
That is, the dummy chip 24395 can be fixed to the substrate member 390 during the process of soldering the first LED 891 and the second LED 892. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the formation of the engaging portion when forming the engaging portion at the upper end portion of the interposed member 335. As a result, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
さらに、係合部（ダミーチップ２４３９５及び突設部２４３６１ｂ）を、介設部材３３５（基板部材３９０）の前面および外枠３６０の背面に形成することができるので、係合部分が介設部材３３５（基板部材３９０）の背面側に突出することを抑制できる。
Furthermore, since the engaging portions (the dummy chip 24395 and the projecting portion 24361b) can be formed on the front surface of the interposed member 335 (substrate member 390) and the back surface of the outer frame 360, the engaging portion is the interposed member 335. Protruding to the back side of (substrate member 390) can be suppressed.
従って、ベース部分３３４が重ね合されていない部分（開放された部分）において、演出部３３１が背面側に大きくなることを抑制できる。よって、その分、ベース部材３１０及び昇降体３３０の配置に必要なスペースを抑制できる。
Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the effect portion 331 from becoming larger on the back side in a portion where the base portion 334 is not overlapped (opened portion). Therefore, the space required for the arrangement of the base member 310 and the lifting body 330 can be reduced accordingly.
次いで、図１２５及び図１２６を参照して、第２５実施形態における昇降体３３０について説明する。上記第１１実施形態では、レンズ部３７０の締結部３７３とベース部分３３４の締結部３３４ｂとが下端部のみで締結される場合を説明したが、第２５実施形態では、レンズ部３７０とベース部分３３４とが下端以外の部分でも締結される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。
Next, with reference to FIG. 125 and FIG. 126, a lifting body 330 in the 25th embodiment will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the fastening portion 373 of the lens portion 370 and the fastening portion 334b of the base portion 334 are fastened only by the lower end portion has been described. However, in the 25th embodiment, the lens portion 370 and the base portion 334 are fastened. Are also fastened at portions other than the lower end. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
図１２５は、第２５実施形態における昇降体３３０の分解斜視背面図であり、図１２６（ａ）は、昇降体３３０の背面図であり、図１２６（ｂ）は、昇降体３３０の断面図である。なお、図１２６（ｂ）は、図１０８の断面図と対応する。
125 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lifting body 330 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, FIG. 126 (a) is a rear view of the lifting body 330, and FIG. 126 (b) is a sectional view of the lifting body 330. is there. Note that FIG. 126B corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG.
図１２５及び図１２６に示すように、第２５実施形態における昇降体３３０のレンズ部３７０には、立設部３７１の外縁部から径方向外側に突出する第２締結部２５３７３が形成される。
As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the lens portion 370 of the elevating body 330 in the twenty-fifth embodiment is formed with a second fastening portion 25373 that protrudes radially outward from the outer edge portion of the standing portion 371.
第２締結部２５３７３は、レンズ部３７０の左右方向（図１２６（ａ）左右方向）両側に形成され、その上下方向（図１２６（ｂ）上下方向）の高さ位置がベース部分３３４と前後方向に重なる高さに設定される。即ち、レンズ部３７０の下側とされる。
The second fastening portion 25373 is formed on both sides of the lens portion 370 in the left-right direction (FIG. 126 (a) left-right direction), and the height position in the up-down direction (FIG. 126 (b) up-down direction) is the same as that of the base portion 334. Is set to a height that overlaps That is, the lower side of the lens unit 370 is set.
また、第２締結部２５３７３は、背面視略矩形状の板状体から形成されると共に、前後方向に円形状に貫通する第２締結孔２５３７３ａを備える。
The second fastening portion 25373 includes a second fastening hole 25373a that is formed from a plate-like body that has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the rear and penetrates in a circular shape in the front-rear direction.
ベース部分３３４には、第２締結孔２５３７３ａの軸と対向する位置にレンズ部３７０側に向かって（図１２６（ｂ）左方向に）円柱状に突出する第２突設部２５３３４ｂが形成される。第２突設部２５３３４ｂの軸には円形状に貫通する第２挿通孔２５３３４ｂ１が形成される。
The base portion 334 is formed with a second projecting portion 25334b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the lens portion 370 side (to the left in FIG. 126 (b)) at a position facing the axis of the second fastening hole 25373a. . A second insertion hole 25334b1 penetrating in a circular shape is formed on the shaft of the second projecting portion 25334b.
よって、ベース部分３３４の背面側からねじの先端を、第２挿通孔２５３３４ｂ１を挿通させて、第２締結孔２５３７３ａに螺合させることができる。よって、レンズ部３７０の第２締結部２５３７３とベース部分３３４の第２締結部３３４ｂとを締結することができる。
Therefore, the tip of the screw can be inserted through the second insertion hole 25334b1 from the back side of the base portion 334 and screwed into the second fastening hole 25373a. Therefore, the second fastening portion 25373 of the lens portion 370 and the second fastening portion 334b of the base portion 334 can be fastened.
また、ベース部分３３４には、正面視における水平方向（図）１２６（ａ）左右方向）から正面側（図１２６（ｂ）左側）に突出する第２突起２５３３４ａが突出形成される（図１２６（ｂ）参照）。第２突起２５３３４ａは、その突出先端が基板部材３９０の背面側に当接する長さに設定される。また、第２突起２５３３４ａは、その突出先端面が半球形状に形成される。なお、第２５実施形態では、上記第１１実施形態において説明した突起３３４ａの形成が省略される。
Further, the base portion 334 is formed with a second protrusion 25334a that protrudes from the horizontal direction (FIG. 126 (a) left and right direction) in the front view to the front side (left side in FIG. 126 (b)) (FIG. 126 (FIG. 126). b)). The second protrusion 25334a is set to a length such that the protruding tip is in contact with the back side of the substrate member 390. The second protrusion 25334a has a hemispherical protruding tip surface. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the formation of the protrusion 334a described in the eleventh embodiment is omitted.
第２突起２５３３４ａは、昇降体３３０の組み立て状態において基板部材３９０の上下方向（図１２６（ｂ）上下方向）の略中央位置よりも下方位置に設定されると共に、水平方向（図１２６（ａ）左右方向）における位置がベース部分３３４の水平方向（図１２６（ａ）左右方向）の略中央位置に設定される。
The second protrusion 25334a is set at a position lower than a substantially central position in the vertical direction (FIG. 126 (b) vertical direction) of the substrate member 390 in the assembled state of the lifting body 330, and in the horizontal direction (FIG. 126 (a)). The position in the left-right direction) is set to the approximate center position of the base portion 334 in the horizontal direction (FIG. 126 (a) left-right direction).
第２突設部２５３３４ｂは、第２突起２５３３４ａよりも重力方向上方（図１２６（ｂ）上方）に位置して配置される。さらに、第２突設部２５３３４ｂ及び締結部３３４ｂは、基板部材３９０側（図１２６（ｂ）左側）への突出距離が、第２突起２５３３４ａの基板部材３９０側への突出距離よりも所定量短く形成される。
The second projecting portion 25334b is arranged to be located above the second projection 25334a in the direction of gravity (above FIG. 126 (b)). Further, in the second projecting portion 25334b and the fastening portion 334b, the projecting distance to the substrate member 390 side (left side in FIG. 126 (b)) is shorter than the projecting distance of the second projection 25334a to the substrate member 390 side by a predetermined amount. It is formed.
第２５実施形態では、基板部３９０の背面側が第２突起２５３３４ａの一点で支持されると共に、レンズ部３７０がベース部分３３４と３点で締結された状態とされる。また、正面視（又は背面視）において、第２突起２５３３４ａの基板部材３９０との当接位置が、レンズ部３７０とベース部分３３４を締結する３点に囲われる領域の内側とされる。
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the back side of the substrate portion 390 is supported at one point of the second protrusion 25334a, and the lens portion 370 is fastened to the base portion 334 at three points. In front view (or rear view), the contact position of the second protrusion 25334a with the substrate member 390 is set to the inside of a region surrounded by three points that fasten the lens portion 370 and the base portion 334.
よって、第２突設部２５３３４ｂ及び締結部３３４ｂは、第２突起２５３３４ａよりも突出距離が短くされるので、第２突設部２５３３４ｂの第２挿通孔２５３３４ｂ１及び締結部３３４ｂの挿通孔３３４ｂを挿通するネジの締め付け量を調整することで、レンズ部３７０が外枠３６０に対して傾倒する状態を変更することができる。
Accordingly, the second projecting portion 25334b and the fastening portion 334b have a projecting distance shorter than that of the second protrusion 25334a, and thus the second projecting portion 25334b is inserted through the second insertion hole 25334b1 and the fastening portion 334b. By adjusting the tightening amount of the screw, the state in which the lens unit 370 is tilted with respect to the outer frame 360 can be changed.
例えば、第２突設部２５３３４ｂの第２挿通孔２５３３４ｂ１を挿通するネジを緩く締結して、締結部３３４ｂの挿通孔３３４ｂを挿通するネジを強く締結することで、介設部材３３５（レンズ部３７０、区画部材３８０及び基板部材３９０）の下端部分を引き付けることができる。よって、第２突起２５３３４ａを軸に介設部材３３４の上端側を外枠３６０側に押し付けることができる。その結果、介設部材３３５のがたつきを抑制できる。
For example, by loosely tightening a screw that passes through the second insertion hole 25334b1 of the second projecting portion 25334b and strongly fastening a screw that passes through the insertion hole 334b of the fastening portion 334b, the interposed member 335 (lens portion 370) The lower end portions of the partition member 380 and the substrate member 390) can be attracted. Therefore, the upper end side of the interposed member 334 can be pressed against the outer frame 360 side with the second protrusion 25334a as an axis. As a result, rattling of the interposed member 335 can be suppressed.
また、第２５実施形態では、介設部材３３５の上端部の外枠３６０側への押し付け力をネジの締め付け量で調整することができるので、パチンコ機１０が店舗に設置された後において、介設部材３３５が外枠３６０に対してがたつきが発生した場合に、ネジの締結力を調整するのみで、がたつきを抑えることができる。従って、介設部材３３５ががたついた際に部品交換を必要としないので、コストがかかることを抑制できる。
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, since the pressing force of the upper end portion of the interposition member 335 toward the outer frame 360 can be adjusted by the tightening amount of the screw, the pachinko machine 10 is installed after the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the store. When the mounting member 335 is rattled with respect to the outer frame 360, the rattling can be suppressed only by adjusting the fastening force of the screw. Therefore, when the interposition member 335 is rattled, it is not necessary to replace parts, so that the cost can be suppressed.
以上、上記実施形態に基づき本発明を説明したが、本発明は上記形態に何ら限定されるものではなく、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない範囲内で種々の変形改良が可能であることは容易に推察できるものである。
Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.
上記各実施形態において、１の実施形態の一部または全部を他の１又は複数の実施形態の一部または全部と入れ替えて又は組み合わせて、遊技機を構成しても良い。
In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.
上記各実施形態では、左揺動ユニット５００の第１通路形成部材５２０の上端部（振分凸部５２１ｅの径方向外側部分）が開放される場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、第１通路形成部材５２０の上端部の開放部分に蓋をするカバー部材が、振分凸部５２１ｅの左右の領域において、球が供給される側は開放し、球が供給される側の反対側は蓋をする態様で動作しても良い。この場合、振分凸部５２１ｅの左右の領域に球以外の異物が混入することを防止することができる。
In each of the above embodiments, the case has been described in which the upper end portion (the radially outer portion of the distribution convex portion 521e) of the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is opened, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Absent. For example, the cover member that covers the open portion of the upper end portion of the first passage forming member 520 opens the sphere supply side in the left and right regions of the distribution convex portion 521e, and the sphere supply side The opposite side may operate in a manner that covers it. In this case, it is possible to prevent foreign matters other than spheres from entering the left and right regions of the distribution convex portion 521e.
上記各実施形態では、接続部材４２４が第１通路形成部材５２０と当接し回転される場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、接続部材４２４の配設を省略してもいい。この場合、第１通路形成部材５２０と第２通路形成部材４２２との連結に必要な部材の部品点数を減らすことで、製品コストを低減することができる。また、接続部材４２４の代わりに、内部通路を有するゴム状弾性体を配設しても良い。この場合、第１通路形成部材５２０がゴム状弾性体に当接することによるゴム状弾性体の形状の変形により第１通路形成部材５２０と第２通路形成部材４２２との間の位置ずれを吸収することができる。
In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the connection member 424 is rotated in contact with the first passage forming member 520 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the arrangement of the connection member 424 may be omitted. In this case, the product cost can be reduced by reducing the number of parts required for the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422. Further, instead of the connecting member 424, a rubber-like elastic body having an internal passage may be provided. In this case, the displacement of the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is absorbed by the deformation of the shape of the rubber elastic body caused by the first passage forming member 520 coming into contact with the rubber elastic body. be able to.
上記各実施形態では、駆動側スライド部材４２０が一層のラック４５２で駆動される場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、駆動側スライド部材４２０を駆動するラックが前後２層で構成され、前側のラックで駆動側スライド部材４２０を上下動作させる場合と、後側のラックで駆動側スライド部材４２０を上下動作させる場合とを構成可能としても良い。この場合、２層のラックのいずれかのみが従動側スライド部材４３０と上下で当接する態様とすることで、駆動側スライド部材４２０と従動側スライド部材４３０とが連動して上下動作する場合と、駆動側スライド部材４２０が従動側スライド部材４３０を通過して、単独で上下動作する場合とを切り替えることができる。
In each of the above embodiments, the case where the driving side slide member 420 is driven by one rack 452 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the rack for driving the drive-side slide member 420 is composed of two layers of front and rear, and the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down with the front rack and the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down with the rear rack. And may be configured. In this case, when only one of the two-layer racks is in contact with the driven-side slide member 430 in the vertical direction, the drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430 move up and down in conjunction with each other, It is possible to switch between the case where the drive side slide member 420 passes the driven side slide member 430 and moves up and down independently.
上記各実施形態では、当接部３５１ｂと受け部３５４ｂとが他のギア歯の歯元が形成する円よりも外側に張り出される場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、当接部３５１ｂ又は受け部３５４ｂの一方が他のギア歯の歯元が形成する円よりも中心側へ凹み、他方がその分長く張り出される態様で構成されても良い。
In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b protrude outward from the circle formed by the tooth bases of the other gear teeth is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, one of the contact part 351b and the receiving part 354b may be configured to be recessed toward the center side from the circle formed by the tooth base of the other gear tooth, and the other may be extended longer.
上記各実施形態では、当接部３５１ｂと当接する部分が、ギア歯形状の隣設ギア歯３５４ｃとされたが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、ギア歯形状とは異なる形状の部分が形成され、その部分と当接部３５１ｂとが当接する態様で構成されても良い。
In each of the embodiments described above, the portion that contacts the contact portion 351b is the adjacent gear tooth 354c having a gear tooth shape, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a portion having a shape different from the gear tooth shape may be formed, and the portion and the contact portion 351b may be in contact with each other.
上記各実施形態では、当接部３５１ｂと面当たりする部分が、歯形状が形成されない受け部３５４ｂとされたが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、歯形状で構成される部分のギア歯が部分的に削られることで、当接部３５１ｂと面当たりする面を形成しても良い。
In each of the embodiments described above, the portion that comes into contact with the contact portion 351b is the receiving portion 354b in which the tooth shape is not formed, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a portion of the gear tooth that is formed in a tooth shape may be partially cut to form a surface that contacts the contact portion 351b.
上記各実施形態では、当接部３５１ｂ及び受け部３５４ｂの重なっている部分の全体が面当たりする場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、当接部３５１ｂ又は受け部３５４ｂの中間位置に回転軸へ向けて凹設される凹設部を備えることで、面当たりする面積が低減されても良い。
In each of the above embodiments, the case has been described in which the entire overlapping portion of the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b comes into contact with each other, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the surface contact area may be reduced by providing a recessed portion that is recessed toward the rotating shaft at an intermediate position between the contact portion 351b or the receiving portion 354b.
上記第１実施形態では、左右の上昇規制部材４１７が駆動側スライド部材４２０と同じタイミングで当接する場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、左右の一方の上昇規制部材４１７を駆動側スライド部材４２０と当接させても良い。この場合、駆動側スライド部材４２０に左右非対称の負荷を与えることができ、駆動側スライド部材４２０の重心が左右どちらか（左右の一方）に寄っている場合でも駆動側スライド部材４２０が傾くことを抑制することができる。
In the first embodiment, the case where the left and right ascending restriction members 417 contact with the drive side slide member 420 at the same timing has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, one of the left and right ascending restriction members 417 may be brought into contact with the drive side slide member 420. In this case, a left-right asymmetric load can be applied to the drive-side slide member 420, and the drive-side slide member 420 can be inclined even when the center of gravity of the drive-side slide member 420 is shifted to the left or right (one of the left and right). Can be suppressed.
上記第２実施形態では、第１通路形成部材２５２０の先端に先端壁部材２５６０が配設される場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、第１通路形成部材２５２０の先端から基端側へ向けて風を送る送風装置を配設する態様や、第１通路形成部材２５２０の先端に磁力発生装置を設け磁力で球を吸着する態様や、第１通路形成部材２５２０の先端を回転方向に振動させる態様でも良い。この場合、球が第１通路形成部材２５２０の先端から落下することを抑制することができる。
In the second embodiment, the case where the tip wall member 2560 is disposed at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, an aspect in which a blower that sends air from the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520 toward the proximal end side is disposed, or an aspect in which a magnetic force generating device is provided at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520 to adsorb a sphere by magnetic force Or the aspect which vibrates the front-end | tip of the 1st channel | path formation member 2520 to a rotation direction may be sufficient. In this case, the sphere can be prevented from falling from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.
上記第２実施形態では、解除状態において、第１通路形成部材２５２０が先端側へ向かうほど上昇傾斜する場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、第１通路形成部材２５２０の基端部と先端部との間に沈み込む中間部分を備えても良い（Ｕ字形状に構成されても良い）。この場合、解除状態において第１通路形成部材２５２０の内部に球が残留している場合、中間部分（基端部よりも先端部側の位置）に球を留めることができるので、連通状態に変化した際に、第１通路形成部材２５２０の先端から球が送球されるまでの期間を短縮することができる。
In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the first passage forming member 2520 is inclined upward toward the distal end side in the released state, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, you may provide the intermediate part which sinks between the base end part of the 1st channel | path formation member 2520, and a front-end | tip part (it may be comprised in a U shape). In this case, when the sphere remains in the first passage forming member 2520 in the released state, the sphere can be retained at the intermediate portion (position on the distal end side with respect to the base end portion), so that the communication state is changed. When this is done, it is possible to shorten the period until the ball is sent from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.
上記第３実施形態では、下降規制部材４１５及び上昇規制部材４１７が片側に配設される場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、下降規制部材４１５及び上昇規制部材４１７をベース部材４１０の左右にそれぞれ一対で配設し、下降規制部材４１５及び上昇規制部材４１７を付勢するねじりバネ４１５ｄ，４１７ｇの弾性係数を、左側に配設されるねじりバネ４１５ｄ，４１７ｇと右側に配設されるねじりバネ４１５ｄ，４１７ｇとで差を持たせても良い。このとき、正面視左側（従動側スライド部材３４３０の重心が寄っている側）に配設されるねじりバネ４１５ｄ，４１７ｇに比較して、正面視右側に配設されるねじりバネ４１５ｄ，４１７ｇの弾性係数を小さくすることが好ましい。この場合、右側に配設される下降規制部材４１５及び上昇規制部材４１７により従動側スライド部材３４３０を正面視反時計回り（重心の偏りにより従動側スライド部材３４３０が傾く方向）に姿勢変化させる負荷は抑制しながら、従動側スライド部材３４３０の急激な上下動作により従動側スライド部材３４３０が正面視時計回りに姿勢変化した場合に、その姿勢変化を抑制することができる。
In the third embodiment, the case where the lowering restricting member 415 and the raising restricting member 417 are disposed on one side has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the lowering restricting member 415 and the rising restricting member 417 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the base member 410, and the elastic coefficients of the torsion springs 415d and 417g for biasing the lowering restricting member 415 and the rising restricting member 417 are set to the left side. There may be a difference between the torsion springs 415d and 417g provided and the torsion springs 415d and 417g provided on the right side. At this time, the elasticity of the torsion springs 415d and 417g provided on the right side of the front view is larger than that of the torsion springs 415d and 417g provided on the left side of the front view (the side on which the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 is offset). It is preferable to reduce the coefficient. In this case, a load that changes the posture of the driven slide member 3430 counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the lowering restricting member 415 and the rising restricting member 417 (the direction in which the driven slide member 3430 tilts due to the deviation of the center of gravity) is In the case where the driven side slide member 3430 changes its posture clockwise when viewed from the front due to the sudden vertical movement of the driven side slide member 3430, the change in the posture can be suppressed.
上記第３実施形態では、駆動側スライド部材４２０が下降位置に配置されてから従動側スライド部材４３０が落下する場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、駆動側スライド部材４２０が中間位置に配置される状態で従動側スライド部材４３０を落下させても良い。この状態において、駆動側スライド部材４２０を従動側スライド部材４３０の動作方向と逆方向に動作させる態様で制御（上昇動作と下降動作とを繰り返し切り替える制御）をしても良い。この場合、駆動側スライド部材４２０で従動側スライド部材４３０を跳ね返らせる（繰り返し跳ね返らせる等）演出を行うことができる。
In the third embodiment, the case where the driven-side slide member 430 falls after the drive-side slide member 420 is disposed at the lowered position has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the driven side slide member 430 may be dropped in a state where the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the intermediate position. In this state, control (control to repeatedly switch between the rising operation and the lowering operation) may be performed in a mode in which the driving side slide member 420 is operated in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the driven side slide member 430. In this case, it is possible to produce an effect in which the driven-side slide member 430 is rebounded by the drive-side slide member 420 (such as being repeatedly rebounded).
上記各実施形態では、連結リンク部材６４４の挿通部６４４ａが連結リンク作用溝６２１の接続部６２１ｃに挿通された状態にある分割部材ＤＶを、一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転駆動部材６３８により駆動する場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではなく、連結リンク部材６４４の挿通部６４４ａが連結リンク作用溝６２１の大径部６２１ａに挿通された状態にある分割部材ＤＶを、一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転駆動部材６３８により駆動しても良い。この場合には、駆動力を付与する分割部材ＤＶ及び隣接する分割部材ＤＶとの間の間隔が広くされるので、隣接する分割部材ＤＶと一側回転駆動部材６３７及び他側回転駆動部材６３８との干渉を抑制でき、その分、これら一側回転駆動部材および他側回転駆動部材の直径を大きくすることができる。その結果、一側回転駆動部材および他側回転駆動部材から分割部材ＤＶ（回転部材６４０）へ付与される駆動トルクを大きくできる。
In each of the above embodiments, the divided member DV in a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621 is separated by the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638. Although the case where it drives is demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this, The division member DV in the state by which the insertion part 644a of the connection link member 644 was inserted in the large diameter part 621a of the connection link effect | action groove | channel 621 is used as one side. You may drive by the rotational drive member 637 and the other side rotational drive member 638. FIG. In this case, since the interval between the divided member DV that applies the driving force and the adjacent divided member DV is widened, the adjacent divided member DV, the one side rotational drive member 637, and the other side rotational drive member 638 Thus, the diameters of the one-side rotation driving member and the other-side rotation driving member can be increased accordingly. As a result, it is possible to increase the driving torque applied to the divided member DV (rotating member 640) from the one side rotation driving member and the other side rotation driving member.
上記各実施形態では、一側回転駆動部材６３７の係合部６３７ｂが分割部材ＤＶの被係合部６４１に係合されている期間と、他側回転駆動部材６３８の係合部６３８ｂが分割部材ＤＶの被駆動部６４１に係合されている期間とが重複する場合を説明したが（図７５参照）、必ずしもこれに限られるものではなく、一側回転駆動部材６３７の係合部６３７ｂ又は他側回転駆動部材６３８の係合部６３８ｂの一方が分割部材ＤＶの被係合部６４１に係合されている期間は他方が非係合とされると共に、一側回転駆動部材６３７の係合部６３７ｂ又は他側回転駆動部材６３８の係合部６３８ｂの他方が分割部材ＤＶの被係合部６４１に係合されている期間は一方が非係合とされるようにしても良い。
In each of the embodiments described above, the period during which the engaging portion 637b of the one side rotation driving member 637 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV and the engaging portion 638b of the other side rotation driving member 638 are divided members. Although the case where the period engaged with the driven part 641 of DV overlaps was demonstrated (refer FIG. 75), it is not necessarily restricted to this, The engaging part 637b of the one side rotational drive member 637 or others While one of the engaging portions 638b of the side rotation drive member 638 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV, the other is disengaged and the engagement portion of the one side rotation drive member 637 is engaged. 637b or one of the engaging portions 638b of the other side rotational drive member 638 may be disengaged during the period in which the other is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV.
この場合には、一側回転駆動部材６３７の係合部６３７ｂと他側回転駆動部材６３８の係合部６３８ｂとが同時にそれぞれ分割部材ＤＶの被係合部６４１に係合されることを回避できる。即ち、一側回転駆動部材６３７の係合部６３７ｂ又は他側回転駆動部材６３８の係合部６３８ｂを被係合部６４１に交互に係合させることができる。これにより、回転部材６４０の変位を安定化できる。
In this case, it is possible to avoid the engagement portion 637b of the one side rotation drive member 637 and the engagement portion 638b of the other side rotation drive member 638 from being simultaneously engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. . That is, the engaging portion 637b of the one side rotation driving member 637 or the engaging portion 638b of the other side rotation driving member 638 can be alternately engaged with the engaged portion 641. Thereby, the displacement of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.
即ち、一側回転駆動部材６３７と他側回転駆動部材６３８との間には、寸法公差や組立公差、駆動モータ６３１の駆動公差などに起因して、位相ずれが発生するところ、複数の分割部材ＤＶが無端状に連結されて形成される回転部材６４０では、一側回転駆動部材６３７の係合部６３７ｂと他側回転駆動部材６３８の係合部６３８ｂとが同時にそれぞれ分割部材ＤＶの被係合部６４１に係合された状態で位相ずれが発生すると、回転部材６４０の周方向における一方の区間が圧縮状態になると共に他方の区間が引っ張り状態となるため、かかる回転部材６４０の変位が不安定となる。
That is, between the one side rotational drive member 637 and the other side rotational drive member 638, a phase shift occurs due to dimensional tolerance, assembly tolerance, drive tolerance of the drive motor 631, and the like. In the rotating member 640 formed by connecting the DVs in an endless manner, the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotation driving member 638 are simultaneously engaged with the divided member DV. When a phase shift occurs while engaged with the portion 641, one section in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640 is compressed and the other section is pulled, so that the displacement of the rotating member 640 is unstable. It becomes.
これに対し、上述のように一側回転駆動部材６３７の係合部６３７ｂと他側回転駆動部材６３８の係合部６３８ｂとが交互に分割部材ＤＶの被係合部６４１に係合される構成とすることで、位相ずれが発生したとしても、その影響を回転部材６４０が受けることを回避できる。その結果、複数の分割部材ＤＶが無端状に連結されて形成される回転部材６４０であっても、その変位を安定化できる。
On the other hand, as described above, the engaging portion 637b of the one side rotation driving member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other side rotation driving member 638 are alternately engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. Thus, even if a phase shift occurs, it can be avoided that the rotating member 640 is affected by the influence. As a result, even if the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting a plurality of divided members DV endlessly, the displacement can be stabilized.
上記各実施形態では、回転ユニット６００において、分割部材ＤＶを無端状に連結する場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではなく、分割部材ＤＶを有端状に連結する（一端から他端までの間で分割部材ＤＶを連結し、一端および他端を非連結とする）ことは当然可能である。この場合、例えば、上記各実施形態における無端状の軌道に沿って、有端状に連結された分割部材ＤＶを変位（移動）させても良く、或いは、有端状の軌道に沿って、有端状に連結された分割部材ＤＶを往復変位（往復移動）させても良い。
In each of the above embodiments, the case where the divided member DV is connected endlessly in the rotary unit 600 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the divided member DV is connected endlessly (from one end to the other end). Of course, it is possible to connect the dividing member DV between the first and second ends and to disconnect one end and the other end). In this case, for example, the segmented member DV connected endlessly may be displaced (moved) along the endless track in each of the above-described embodiments, or may be positioned along the endless track. The divided members DV connected in the end shape may be reciprocated (reciprocated).
上記第６実施形態では、仮想線ＫＳ５が、仮想線ＫＳ４と非平行に形成されるの場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない、例えば、仮想線ＫＳ５が、仮想線ＫＳ４と平行に形成されても良い。この場合、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射された光を一方側に集光できると共に、凹部６８４３の前後方向の幅を小さくすることができる。その結果、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射された光を第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０に入射させると共に、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の延設方向（仮想線ＫＳ１方向）に拡散しやすくできる。
In the sixth embodiment, the case where the virtual line KS5 is formed non-parallel to the virtual line KS4 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the virtual line KS5 is parallel to the virtual line KS4. May be formed. In this case, the light emitted from the LED 852 can be condensed on one side, and the width of the recess 6843 in the front-rear direction can be reduced. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 852 enters the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and the extending direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (the direction of the imaginary line KS1). ) Can be easily diffused.
上記第９実施形態では、第２側壁９８４３ｂが凹部９８４３の内側に向かって凸となる湾曲状に形成される場合を説明したが必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、第２側壁９８４３ｂが凹部９８４３の外側に向かって凸となる湾曲状に形成されてもよい。
In the ninth embodiment, the case where the second side wall 9843b is formed in a curved shape that is convex toward the inside of the concave portion 9843 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the second side wall 9843b may be formed in a curved shape that is convex toward the outside of the recess 9843.
この場合、ＬＥＤ８５２から第２側壁９８５２に照射された光を、第２側壁９８５２の湾曲面により反射させると共に、集光しやすくできる。その結果、第２側壁９８５２に照射されるＬＥＤ８５２の光を入射面８１２，８２１と端面８１１，８２１との連結（境界）部分に集めやすくできる。
In this case, the light emitted from the LED 852 to the second side wall 9852 can be reflected by the curved surface of the second side wall 9852 and can be easily collected. As a result, the light of the LED 852 irradiated to the second side wall 9852 can be easily collected at the connection (boundary) portion between the incident surfaces 812 and 821 and the end surfaces 811 and 821.
その結果、ＬＥＤ８５２から照射される光のうち、第２側壁９８４３ｂに照射される光を第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の内部に入射させると共に、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の延設方向（仮想線ＫＳ１方向）に拡散しやすくできる。
As a result, of the light irradiated from the LED 852, the light irradiated to the second side wall 9843b is made incident inside the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and the first light guide member 810 and the first light guide member 810 2 The light guide member 820 can be easily diffused in the extending direction (the imaginary line KS1 direction).
上記第１０実施形態では、区画部材８４０の左右方向外側端部にのみ第２凹部１０８４３を形成する場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、全ての凹部８４３を第２凹部１０８４３にしてもよい。この場合、第２凹部１０８４３の第２側壁８４３ｂは、区画部材８４０の左右方向外側に位置する第２側壁８４３ｂを内側に位置する第２側壁よりも前後方向に長く形成することが好ましい。
In the tenth embodiment, the case where the second recessed portion 10843 is formed only at the outer end in the left-right direction of the partition member 840 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, all the recesses 843 may be the second recesses 10843. In this case, the second side wall 843b of the second recess 10843 is preferably formed so that the second side wall 843b located on the outer side in the left-right direction of the partition member 840 is longer in the front-rear direction than the second side wall located on the inner side.
これによれば、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０に入射したＬＥＤ８５２の光を第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の左右方向中央位置を境にして両外側に向かわせ易くできる。その結果、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０を均一に発光させやすくできる。
According to this, the light of the LED 852 incident on the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 is placed on both outer sides with the center position in the left-right direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 as a boundary. It can be easily made. As a result, the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can easily emit light uniformly.
上記第１５実施形態では、ラック３３２の被当接部３３２ｂと膨出部１５３５３ａとの対向間に所定の隙間Ｒ３が形成される場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、隙間Ｒ３の寸法をなくして、昇降体３３０が上昇位置に配置されている際には、被当接部３３２ｂの側面と膨出部１５３５３ａの側面とが当接する状態としても良い（Ｒ１＝Ｒ２）。
In the fifteenth embodiment, the case where the predetermined gap R3 is formed between the opposed portion 332b of the rack 332 and the bulging portion 15353a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position without the dimension of the gap R3, the side surface of the contacted portion 332b and the side surface of the bulging portion 15353a may be in contact with each other (R1 = R2).
この場合、昇降体３３０が上昇位置に配置された状態において演出部３３１の左右方向の変位を抑制できるので、例えばパチンコ機１０に左右方向の変位が作用した際に、演出部３３１が変位して一方の演出部３３１が、他方の演出部３３１に衝突することを抑制できる。
In this case, since the horizontal displacement of the rendering unit 331 can be suppressed in a state in which the lifting body 330 is disposed at the raised position, for example, when the lateral displacement acts on the pachinko machine 10, the rendering unit 331 is displaced. One production unit 331 can be prevented from colliding with the other production unit 331.
上記第２３実施形態では、第４凹部２３８４３の第２側壁２３８４３ｂ及び第２基板２３８５０ｂが傾斜して配設される場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、第４凹部２３８４３の第２側壁２３８４３ｂに対して、第５実施形態における基板部材８５０を配設してもよい。また、基板部材２３８５０に対して、第５実施形態における凹部８４３を形成してもよい。
In the twenty-third embodiment, the case has been described in which the second side wall 23843b and the second substrate 23850b of the fourth concave portion 23843 are disposed to be inclined, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the substrate member 850 according to the fifth embodiment may be disposed on the second side wall 23843b of the fourth recess 23843. Further, the concave portion 843 in the fifth embodiment may be formed in the substrate member 23850.
この場合、第４凹部２３８４３および基板部材２３８５０のどちらか一方の傾斜により、第１導光部材８１０又は第２導光部材８２０の左右方向両端部（第１領域ＳＲ１及び第２領域ＳＲ２）に光を集光させやすくできる。よって、第１導光部材８１０及び第２導光部材８２０の照度を全体に均一にしやすくできる。
In this case, light is applied to both left and right end portions (the first region SR1 and the second region SR2) of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820 due to the inclination of one of the fourth recess 23438 and the substrate member 23850. Can be easily collected. Therefore, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform throughout.
上記第２４実施形態では、突設部２４３６１ｂをダミーチップ２４３９５の本体部２４３９５ａと脚部２４３９５ｂとに囲われた領域に配置する場合を説明したが、突設部２４３６１ｂの外面がダミーチップ２４３９５の本体部２４３９５ａ又は脚部２４３９５ｂと当接していても良い。
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the case where the protruding portion 24361b is arranged in the region surrounded by the main body portion 24395a and the leg portion 24395b of the dummy chip 24395 has been described. It may be in contact with the portion 24395a or the leg portion 24395b.
上記第２４実施形態では、ダミーチップ２４３９５を配線が接続されない（非導電）状態で基板部材３９０に固着される場合を説明したが必ずしもこれに限られるものではなく、ダミーチップ２４３９５に配線を接続して、例えば第１ＬＥＤ３９１の発光の制御等をさせても良い。この場合、ダミーチップ２４３９５と突設部２４３６１ｂとが係合した状態とされるので、例えば、無理に基板部材３９０を昇降体３３０から取り外して不正をはたらく遊技者がいた場合に、基板部材３９０からダミーチップ２４３９５が外れることで、第１ＬＥＤ３９１が発光できなくなり、不正行為を店舗責任者に気づかせやすくできる。
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the case has been described in which the dummy chip 24395 is fixed to the substrate member 390 in a state where the wiring is not connected (non-conductive), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the wiring is connected to the dummy chip 24395. For example, the light emission of the first LED 391 may be controlled. In this case, since the dummy chip 24395 and the protruding portion 24361b are engaged with each other, for example, when there is a player who forcibly removes the board member 390 from the lifting body 330 and acts illegally, the board member 390 When the dummy chip 24395 is detached, the first LED 391 can no longer emit light, and the store manager can be easily made aware of fraud.
本発明を上記各実施形態とは異なるタイプのパチンコ機等に実施してもよい。例えば、一度大当たりすると、それを含めて複数回（例えば２回、３回）大当たり状態が発生するまで、大当たり期待値が高められるようなパチンコ機（通称、２回権利物、３回権利物と称される）として実施してもよい。また、大当たり図柄が表示された後に、所定の領域に球を入賞させることを必要条件として遊技者に所定の遊技価値を付与する特別遊技を発生させるパチンコ機として実施してもよい。また、Ｖゾーン等の特別領域を有する入賞装置を有し、その特別領域に球を入賞させることを必要条件として特別遊技状態となるパチンコ機に実施してもよい。更に、パチンコ機以外にも、アレパチ、雀球、スロットマシン、いわゆるパチンコ機とスロットマシンとが融合した遊技機などの各種遊技機として実施するようにしても良い。
You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.
なお、スロットマシンは、例えばコインを投入して図柄有効ラインを決定させた状態で操作レバーを操作することにより図柄が変動され、ストップボタンを操作することにより図柄が停止されて確定される周知のものである。従って、スロットマシンの基本概念としては、「複数の識別情報からなる識別情報列を変動表示した後に識別情報を確定表示する表示装置を備え、始動用操作手段（例えば操作レバー）の操作に起因して識別情報の変動表示が開始され、停止用操作手段（例えばストップボタン）の操作に起因して、或いは、所定時間経過することにより、識別情報の変動表示が停止して確定表示され、その停止時の識別情報の組合せが特定のものであることを必要条件として、遊技者に所定の遊技価値を付与する特別遊技を発生させるスロットマシン」となり、この場合、遊技媒体はコイン、メダル等が代表例として挙げられる。
In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.
また、パチンコ機とスロットマシンとが融合した遊技機の具体例としては、複数の図柄からなる図柄列を変動表示した後に図柄を確定表示する表示装置を備えており、球打出用のハンドルを備えていないものが挙げられる。この場合、所定の操作（ボタン操作）に基づく所定量の球の投入の後、例えば操作レバーの操作に起因して図柄の変動が開始され、例えばストップボタンの操作に起因して、或いは、所定時間経過することにより、図柄の変動が停止され、その停止時の確定図柄がいわゆる大当たり図柄であることを必要条件として遊技者に所定の遊技価値を付与する特別遊技が発生させられ、遊技者には、下部の受皿に多量の球が払い出されるものである。かかる遊技機をスロットマシンに代えて使用すれば、遊技ホールでは球のみを遊技価値として取り扱うことができるため、パチンコ機とスロットマシンとが混在している現在の遊技ホールにおいてみられる、遊技価値たるメダルと球との別個の取扱による設備上の負担や遊技機設置個所の制約といった問題を解消し得る。
In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.
以下に、本発明の遊技機に加えて上述した実施形態に含まれる各種発明の概念を示す。
The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.
＜係止円弧部３５１ｃで第２ギア３５２の回転を規制する構造を一例とする発明の概念について＞
駆動手段と、その駆動手段の駆動力を伝達する伝達部材と、その伝達部材により伝達された駆動力により上昇位置および下降位置の間で変位される変位部材とを備えた遊技機において、前記伝達部材は、第１歯車と、その第１歯車に歯合されると共に前記第１歯車よりも前記駆動力の伝達経路における前記変位部材側に配設される第２歯車とを備え、前記第１歯車は、その歯形の一部に形成される当接部を備え、前記変位部材が上昇位置に配設された状態では、前記第１歯車の当接部に前記第２歯車の所定の歯が当接されることで、前記変位部材が下降する方向への前記第２歯車の回転が規制されることを特徴とする遊技機Ａ１。
<About the concept of the invention taking as an example the structure that restricts the rotation of the second gear 352 by the locking arc portion 351c>
A game machine comprising: a driving means; a transmission member that transmits a driving force of the driving means; and a displacement member that is displaced between a rising position and a lowering position by the driving force transmitted by the transmission member. The member includes a first gear and a second gear that is meshed with the first gear and disposed closer to the displacement member in the transmission path of the driving force than the first gear. The gear includes a contact portion formed on a part of its tooth profile, and in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, a predetermined tooth of the second gear is placed on the contact portion of the first gear. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends is restricted by the contact.
ここで、駆動手段と、その駆動手段の駆動力を伝達する伝達部材と、その伝達部材により伝達された駆動力により上昇位置および下降位置の間で変位される変位部材とを備えた遊技機が知られている。例えば、伝達部材をラックアンドピニオン機構で形成し、駆動手段により駆動されるピニオンの回転をラックの直線運動に変換し、そのラックの直線運動より変位部材を下降位置および上昇位置の間で昇降させるものがある（特許文献１：例えば、特開２０１２−８０９４１号公報）。この場合、変位部材が上昇位置に配置された状態で、駆動手段の駆動力が解除されると、変位部材が自重で下降される。そのため、駆動手段の駆動力を付与し続ける必要があり、変位部材を上昇位置に保持する際の消費エネルギーが嵩むという問題点があった。一方、駆動手段の一部にクランク機構を介設し、かかるクランク機構の死点を利用することで、駆動手段の駆動力が解除されても、変位部材が自重で上昇位置から下降されないようにする構造も知られているが（特開２０１４−１４０６０２号公報）、この場合には、クランク機構を介設する分、伝達部材全体が大型化するという問題点があった。
Here, there is a gaming machine comprising a driving means, a transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving means, and a displacement member that is displaced between the raised position and the lowered position by the driving force transmitted by the transmission member. Are known. For example, the transmission member is formed by a rack and pinion mechanism, the rotation of the pinion driven by the driving means is converted into the linear movement of the rack, and the displacement member is moved up and down between the lowered position and the raised position by the linear movement of the rack. There are some (Patent Document 1: JP 2012-80941 A, for example). In this case, when the driving force of the driving unit is released in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the displacement member is lowered by its own weight. For this reason, it is necessary to continuously apply the driving force of the driving means, and there is a problem that energy consumption increases when the displacement member is held at the raised position. On the other hand, a crank mechanism is interposed in a part of the driving means, and the displacement member is not lowered from its raised position by its own weight even when the driving force of the driving means is released by utilizing the dead point of the crank mechanism. There is also a known structure (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-140602). However, in this case, there is a problem that the entire transmission member is increased by the amount of the crank mechanism.
これに対し、遊技機Ａ１によれば、第１歯車は、その歯形の一部に形成される当接部を備え、変位部材が上昇位置に配設された状態では、第１歯車の当接部に第２歯車の所定の歯が当接されることで、変位部材が下降する方向への第２歯車の回転が規制されるので、駆動手段の駆動力を解除しても、変位部材が自重で下降されることを抑制できる。よって、変位部材を上昇位置に保持する際の消費エネルギーを抑制できる。また、変位部材を上昇位置に保持するための構造を、第１歯車および第２歯車により形成することができ、クランク機構を別途介設する必要がないので、伝達部材の小型化を図ることができる。
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the first gear includes a contact portion formed at a part of its tooth profile, and the first gear abuts when the displacement member is disposed at the raised position. Since the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends is restricted by the predetermined teeth of the second gear coming into contact with the portion, the displacement member does not move even if the driving force of the driving means is released. It is possible to suppress descending by its own weight. Therefore, energy consumption when holding the displacement member at the raised position can be suppressed. Further, the structure for holding the displacement member in the raised position can be formed by the first gear and the second gear, and it is not necessary to separately provide a crank mechanism, so that the transmission member can be reduced in size. it can.
遊技機Ａ１において、前記第２歯車は、その歯形の一部に形成される受け部を備え、前記変位部材が上昇位置に配設された状態では、前記第１歯車の当接部に前記第２歯車の受け部が当接されることで、前記変位部材が上昇する方向への前記第２歯車の回転が規制されることを特徴とする遊技機Ａ２。
In the gaming machine A1, the second gear includes a receiving portion formed on a part of its tooth profile, and the first gear is brought into contact with the first gear in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that rotation of the second gear in a direction in which the displacement member ascends is restricted by contacting the receiving portions of the two gears.
遊技機Ａ２によれば、遊技機Ａ１の奏する効果に加え、第１歯車の当接部に第２歯車の受け部が当接されると、変位部材が上昇する方向への第２歯車の回転が規制される、即ち、変位部材が上昇位置に配設された状態では、第２歯車の回転が正逆の両方向で規制されるので、上昇位置に保持された変位部材にがたつきが発生することを抑制できる。
According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, when the receiving portion of the second gear comes into contact with the contact portion of the first gear, the second gear rotates in the direction in which the displacement member rises. In other words, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the rotation of the second gear is restricted in both the forward and reverse directions, and rattling occurs in the displacement member held at the raised position. Can be suppressed.
遊技機Ａ１又はＡ２において、前記変位部材が上昇位置に配設された状態では、前記変位部材を下降させる方向への前記第１歯車の回転が許容されることを特徴とする遊技機Ａ３。
In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the first gear is allowed to rotate in the direction in which the displacement member is lowered in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position.
遊技機Ａ３によれば、遊技機Ａ１又はＡ２の奏する効果に加え、変位部材が上昇位置に配設された状態では、変位部材を下降させる方向への第１歯車の回転が許容されるので、第１歯車の当接部と第２歯車の所定の歯との当接を解除するための動作を別途行う必要がなく、駆動手段の駆動力で第１歯車を回転させることで、上昇位置に保持された変位部材を下降させることができる。即ち、変位部材を下降させる方向への第２歯車の回転は規制される一方、変位部材を下降させる方向への第１歯車の回転は許容される。よって、変位部材が上昇位置から自重で下降しようとすると、第１歯車の当接部に第２歯車の所定の歯が当接されることで、第２歯車の回転を規制して、変位部材を上昇位置に保持できる。一方、第１歯車が回転される場合には、その回転に伴い、第２歯車が回転され、変位部材を下降させることができる。
According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the first gear is allowed to rotate in the direction in which the displacement member is lowered. There is no need to separately perform an operation for releasing the contact between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear, and the first gear is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, so that the lift position is reached. The held displacement member can be lowered. That is, the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member is lowered is restricted, while the rotation of the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member is lowered is allowed. Therefore, when the displacement member tries to descend from its raised position by its own weight, the predetermined tooth of the second gear is brought into contact with the contact portion of the first gear, thereby restricting the rotation of the second gear and the displacement member. Can be held in the raised position. On the other hand, when the first gear is rotated, the second gear is rotated along with the rotation, and the displacement member can be lowered.
遊技機Ａ１からＡ３のいずれかにおいて、前記第１歯車の当接部は、前記変位部材を上昇させる方向への回転時に前記第２歯車の所定の歯と歯合可能に形成されると共に、前記第１歯車の歯よりも歯たけが低くされその歯先面に前記第２歯車の所定の歯が当接可能とされることを特徴とする遊技機Ａ４。
In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear is formed so as to be able to mesh with a predetermined tooth of the second gear when rotating in a direction in which the displacement member is raised. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the tooth depth of the first gear is lower than that of the first gear, and the predetermined tooth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the tip surface of the tooth.
遊技機Ａ４によれば、遊技機Ａ１からＡ３のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、第１歯車の当接部は、変位部材を上昇させる方向への回転時に第２歯車の所定の歯と歯合可能に形成されると共に、第１歯車の歯よりも歯たけが低くされその歯先面に第２歯車の所定の歯が当接可能とされるので、変位部材を上昇させる方向へ第１歯車が回転され、変位部材が上昇位置に配設される際には、当接部および所定の歯の歯合を介して、変位部材を上昇させる方向へ第２歯車を回転させることができ、その結果、第２歯車の所定の歯が第１歯車の当接部に当接可能な状態（第１歯車の当接部（歯先面）が第２歯車の所定の歯に対面する状態）を確実に形成できる。
According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear meshes with a predetermined tooth of the second gear when rotating in the direction of raising the displacement member. Since the tooth depth is lower than the teeth of the first gear and the predetermined teeth of the second gear can come into contact with the tooth tip surface, the first gear is moved in the direction of raising the displacement member. When the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the second gear can be rotated in the direction of raising the displacement member via the contact portion and the engagement of the predetermined teeth. As a result, a state in which the predetermined tooth of the second gear can come into contact with the contact portion of the first gear (the state where the contact portion (tooth tip surface) of the first gear faces the predetermined tooth of the second gear). Can be reliably formed.
遊技機Ａ４において、前記第１歯車の当接部は、前記第１歯車の歯よりも歯厚が大きくされることを特徴とする遊技機Ａ５。
In the gaming machine A4, the abutment portion of the first gear has a tooth thickness larger than that of the teeth of the first gear.
遊技機Ａ５によれば、遊技機Ａ４の奏する効果に加え、第１歯車の当接部は、第１歯車の歯よりも歯厚が大きくされるので、第２歯車の所定の歯が当接可能な領域を確保することができる。よって、変位部材が上昇位置に配設された状態における第１歯車の停止位置の精度を緩やかとする（許容量を大きくする）ことができる。その結果、第２歯車の所定の歯が第１歯車の当接部に当接可能な状態を確実に形成できる。
According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, the contact portion of the first gear has a tooth thickness larger than that of the teeth of the first gear. Possible areas can be secured. Therefore, the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position can be made gentle (the allowable amount is increased). As a result, it is possible to reliably form a state in which the predetermined teeth of the second gear can come into contact with the contact portion of the first gear.
また、第１歯車の当接部は、第２歯車の所定の歯を受け止めて、その第２歯車の回転を規制する（即ち、変位部材の重量を支える）部位であるところ、その歯厚が大きくされるので、強度を確保できる。
The contact portion of the first gear is a part that receives predetermined teeth of the second gear and restricts the rotation of the second gear (that is, supports the weight of the displacement member). Since it is enlarged, the strength can be secured.
遊技機Ａ４又はＡ５において、前記第１歯車の当接部は、前記歯先面が前記第１歯車の回転軸を中心とする円弧状に湾曲して形成されることを特徴とする遊技機Ａ６。
In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the abutment portion of the first gear is formed such that the tooth tip surface is curved in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the first gear. .
遊技機Ａ６によれば、遊技機Ａ４又はＡ５の奏する効果に加え、第１歯車の当接部は、その歯先面が第１歯車の回転中心を中心とする円弧状に湾曲して形成されるので、第２歯車の所定の歯が第１歯車の当接部（歯先面）に当接可能な状態となるまで第１歯車を回転可能としつつ、かかる第１歯車の強度の向上を図ることができる。
According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4 or A5, the contact portion of the first gear is formed such that its tooth tip surface is curved in an arc shape centering on the rotation center of the first gear. Therefore, the strength of the first gear can be improved while allowing the first gear to rotate until the predetermined tooth of the second gear is in contact with the contact portion (tooth surface) of the first gear. Can be planned.
また、変位部材を下降させる方向へ第２歯車が回転されその第２歯車の所定の歯が第１歯車の当接部（歯先面）に当接された際には、第２歯車の所定の歯から第１歯車の当接部へ作用する力の方向を第１歯車の回転軸へ向かう方向として、第１歯車が回転されることを抑制しやすくできる。その結果、変位部材が下降する方向への第２歯車の回転を規制しやすくでき、駆動手段の駆動力を解除しても、変位部材が自重で下降されることを確実に抑制できる。
Further, when the second gear is rotated in the direction in which the displacement member is lowered and the predetermined tooth of the second gear comes into contact with the contact portion (tooth surface) of the first gear, the predetermined value of the second gear is determined. The direction of the force acting from the first tooth to the contact portion of the first gear is set to the direction toward the rotation axis of the first gear, so that it is possible to easily suppress the rotation of the first gear. As a result, the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends can be easily controlled, and even when the driving force of the drive means is released, the displacement member can be reliably prevented from being lowered by its own weight.
遊技機Ａ６において、前記第２歯車は、その歯形の一部に形成される受け部を備え、前記変位部材が上昇位置に配設された状態では、前記第２歯車の受け部に前記第１歯車の当接部が当接されることで、前記変位部材が上昇する方向への前記第１歯車の回転が規制されることを特徴とする遊技機Ａ７。
In the gaming machine A6, the second gear includes a receiving portion formed at a part of its tooth shape, and the first gear is placed on the receiving portion of the second gear in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that rotation of the first gear in a direction in which the displacement member ascends is restricted by contact of a contact portion of the gear.
遊技機Ａ７によれば、遊技機Ａ６の奏する効果に加え、第２歯車が、その歯形の一部に形成される受け部を備え、変位部材が上昇位置に配設された状態では、第１歯車の当接部が第２歯車の受け部に当接されることで、変位部材が上昇する方向への第１歯車の回転が規制されるので、第２歯車の受け部を、変位部材を上昇位置に配置させた後の第１歯車の回転を停止させるストッパとして機能させることができる。
According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A6, the second gear includes the receiving portion formed on a part of its tooth profile, and the first member is disposed in the raised position. The rotation of the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member ascends is restricted by the contact portion of the gear being brought into contact with the receiving portion of the second gear. It can function as a stopper that stops the rotation of the first gear after being placed in the raised position.
遊技機Ａ７において、前記第２歯車の受け部は、前記第１歯車の当接部に対面する側が前記第２歯車の回転軸へ向けて凹となると共に前記第１歯車の当接部の円弧形状と略同等の径の円弧状に湾曲して形成されることを特徴とする遊技機Ａ８。
In the gaming machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear is concave on the side facing the contact portion of the first gear toward the rotation shaft of the second gear, and the arc of the contact portion of the first gear A gaming machine A8 that is curved into an arc shape having a diameter substantially equal to the shape.
遊技機Ａ８によれば、遊技機Ａ７の奏する効果に加え、第２歯車の受け部は、第１歯車の当接部に対面する側が第２歯車の回転軸へ向けて凹となると共に第１歯車の当接部の円弧形状と略同等の径の円弧状に湾曲して形成されるので、第１歯車の当接部が第２歯車の受け部に当接される際に、両者を面当たりで当接させ、第１歯車の当接部を第２歯車の受け部で強固に受け止めることができる。その結果、変位部材を上昇位置に配置させた後の第１歯車の回転を停止させるストッパとして機能を第２歯車の受け部に確実に発揮させることができる。
According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear has a concave side on the side facing the contact portion of the first gear toward the rotation axis of the second gear and the first gear. Since it is curved and formed into an arc shape having a diameter substantially equal to the arc shape of the contact portion of the gear, when the contact portion of the first gear contacts the receiving portion of the second gear, both faces The contact portion of the first gear can be firmly received by the receiving portion of the second gear. As a result, the receiving portion of the second gear can reliably exert its function as a stopper for stopping the rotation of the first gear after the displacement member is disposed at the raised position.
また、第２歯車の受け部は、その第２歯車の回転軸へ向けて凹となる円弧状に湾曲されるので、歯厚方向両側における歯丈を高くすることができ、かかる受け部の強度を高めることができる。これにより、第１歯車の当接部を受け止める際の第２歯車の受け部の破損を抑制できる。
Further, since the receiving portion of the second gear is curved in a concave arc shape toward the rotation shaft of the second gear, the tooth height on both sides in the tooth thickness direction can be increased, and the strength of the receiving portion is increased. Can be increased. Thereby, damage to the receiving part of the second gear when receiving the contact part of the first gear can be suppressed.
遊技機Ａ４からＡ８のいずれかにおいて、前記変位部材が上昇位置に配設された状態では、前記第１歯車の当接部と前記第２歯車の所定の歯との歯合が解除され、かつ、前記変位部材が上昇方向への可動範囲の終端に位置されることを特徴とする遊技機Ａ９。
In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A8, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the engagement between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear is released, and The gaming machine A9 is characterized in that the displacement member is positioned at the end of the movable range in the upward direction.
遊技機Ａ９によれば、遊技機Ａ４からＡ８のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、変位部材が上昇位置に配設された状態では、第１歯車の当接部と第２歯車の所定の歯との歯合が解除され、かつ、変位部材が上昇方向への可動範囲の終端に位置されるので、変位部材を上昇させる方向への第１歯車の回転により変位部材が上昇位置に配設された後に、第２歯車を停止させつつ、第１歯車のみを、変位部材が上昇する方向へ回転させることができる。これにより、第２歯車の所定の歯が第１歯車の当接部に当接可能な状態（第１歯車の当接部（歯先面）が第２歯車の所定の歯に対面する状態）を確実に形成できる。
According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A4 to A8, in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined teeth of the second gear And the displacement member is positioned at the end of the movable range in the ascending direction, so that the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position by the rotation of the first gear in the direction of ascending the displacement member. Later, only the first gear can be rotated in the direction in which the displacement member rises while the second gear is stopped. Thereby, the state in which the predetermined tooth of the second gear can come into contact with the contact portion of the first gear (the state in which the contact portion (tooth tip surface) of the first gear faces the predetermined tooth of the second gear) Can be reliably formed.
＜第１通路形成部材５２０と第２通路形成部材４２２とを連結する構造を一例とする発明の概念について＞
球が通過可能に形成される第１通路部材および第２通路部材を備え、少なくとも前記第１通路部材が変位されることで、前記第１通路部材および第２通路部材の一端どうしが連通され前記第１通路部材から第２通路部材への球の送球が可能とされる連通状態と、前記第１通路部材の一端が前記第２通路部材の一端から離間され第１通路部材および第２通路部材が非連通とされる離間状態とが形成可能とされる遊技機において、前記第１通路部材または第２通路部材の一方の一端に変位可能に配設されると共に、前記第１通路部材または第２通路部材の他方に当接して変位された状態では前記第１通路部材および第２通路部材の一端どうしの間を連通させる接続部材を備えることを特徴とする遊技機Ｂ１。
<About the concept of the invention taking as an example a structure that connects the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422>
A first passage member and a second passage member formed so that a ball can pass therethrough, and at least the first passage member is displaced so that one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member communicate with each other. A communication state in which a ball can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member In a gaming machine that can be formed in a separated state in which the first passage member or the second passage member is disengaged, the first passage member or the second passage member is displaceably disposed at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member. A gaming machine B1 comprising a connecting member that communicates between one end of each of the first passage member and the second passage member in a state of being displaced in contact with the other of the two passage members.
ここで、球が通過可能に形成される第１通路部材および第２通路部材を備え、少なくとも第１通路部材が変位されることで、第１通路部材および第２通路部材の一端どうしが連通され第１通路部材から第２通路部材への球の送球が可能とされる連通状態と、第１通路部材の一端が第２通路部材の一端から離間され第１通路部材および第２通路部材が非連通とされる離間状態とが形成可能とされる遊技機が知られている（特開２０１４−１７１６３６号公報）。この場合、各部品の寸法公差や組み付け公差に起因して、第１通路部材が変位される際の停止位置や第２通路部材の配設位置にばらつきが生じることが避けられない。そのため、連通状態では、第１通路部材および第２通路部材の一端どうしの位置に位置ずれが生じるため、第１通路部材から第２通路部材への安定した球の送球が困難であるという問題点があった。
Here, the first passage member and the second passage member are formed so that the sphere can pass therethrough, and at least the first passage member is displaced so that one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are communicated with each other. A communication state in which a ball can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member are not There is known a gaming machine in which a separated state can be formed (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-171636). In this case, due to dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of each part, it is inevitable that variations occur in the stop position when the first passage member is displaced and the arrangement position of the second passage member. Therefore, in the communication state, the first passage member and the second passage member are displaced from each other at the positions of the one end, so that it is difficult to stably feed the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. was there.
これに対し、遊技機Ｂ１によれば、第１通路部材または第２通路部材の一方の一端に配設されると共に、第１通路部材または第２通路部材の他方に当接して変位された状態では第１通路部材および第２通路部材の一端どうしの間を連通させる接続部材を備えるので、第１通路部材および第２通路部材の一端どうしの位置が位置ずれしている場合でも、それらの一端どうしの間に介在する接続部分の変位により、位置ずれを吸収することができる。これにより、第１通路部材から第２通路部材への球の送球を安定化させることができる。また、第１通路部材の変位に伴い、その第１通路部材が接続部材に当接して接続部材を変位させるので、第１通路部材を変位させる駆動力を兼用することができ、接続部材を変位させる駆動力を別途設けることを不要とできる。
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the state is disposed at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member and is displaced in contact with the other of the first passage member or the second passage member. Then, since the connection member which connects between the one ends of the 1st passage member and the 2nd passage member is provided, even when the position of the ends of the 1st passage member and the 2nd passage member has shifted, those one ends The displacement can be absorbed by the displacement of the connecting portion interposed between the two. As a result, ball feeding from the first passage member to the second passage member can be stabilized. Further, as the first passage member is displaced, the first passage member abuts on the connection member to displace the connection member, so that the driving force for displacing the first passage member can also be used, and the connection member is displaced. It is not necessary to provide a separate driving force.
遊技機Ｂ１において、前記接続部材は、前記第１通路部材または第２通路部材の一方の一端の開口を挟んで対向配置される一側壁部および他側壁部を備えると共に、前記一側壁部が、前記第１通路部材の変位軌跡上に位置し、前記第１通路部材が変位され、前記第１通路部材または第２通路部材の他方の一端が前記接続部材の一側壁部に当接されると、前記接続部材が変位されて、前記接続部材の他側壁部が前記第１通路部材または第２通路部材の他方の一端に近接されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｂ２。
In the gaming machine B1, the connection member includes one side wall portion and another side wall portion that are opposed to each other with an opening at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member, and the one side wall portion is When the first passage member is located on the displacement locus of the first passage member and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall portion of the connection member. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the connecting member is displaced and the other side wall portion of the connecting member is brought close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.
遊技機Ｂ２によれば、遊技機Ｂ１の奏する効果に加え、第１通路部材が変位され、第１通路部材または第２通路部材の他方の一端が接続部材の一側壁部に当接されると、接続部材が変位されて、その接続部材の他側壁部が第１通路部材または第２通路部材の他方の一端に近接されるので、連通状態において、接続部材の一側壁部および他側壁部を、第１通路部材および第２通路部材の一端へより近接させることができ、これら第１通路部材および第２通路部材の一端どうしの位置ずれを吸収しやすくできる。その結果、第１通路部材から第２通路部材への球の送球を安定化させることができる。
According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the first passage member is displaced, and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall portion of the connection member. Since the connecting member is displaced and the other side wall portion of the connecting member is brought close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member, the one side wall portion and the other side wall portion of the connecting member are connected in the communication state. The first passage member and the second passage member can be brought closer to each other, and the positional deviation between the first passage member and the one end of the second passage member can be easily absorbed. As a result, ball feeding from the first passage member to the second passage member can be stabilized.
遊技機Ｂ１又はＢ２において、前記第１通路部材がその一端を回転先端側として回転されることで前記連通状態が形成され、前記接続部材は、前記第１通路部材の回転軸と平行な回転軸を備え、前記第１通路部材が回転され、前記第１通路部材または第２通路部材の他方の一端が前記接続部材の一側壁部に当接されると、前記接続部材が回転されて、前記接続部材の他側壁部が前記第１通路部材または第２通路部材の他方の一端に近接されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｂ３。
In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the communication state is formed by rotating the first passage member with one end thereof as a rotation tip side, and the connection member has a rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the first passage member. When the first passage member is rotated and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall portion of the connection member, the connection member is rotated, The gaming machine B3, wherein the other side wall portion of the connecting member is adjacent to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.
遊技機Ｂ３によれば、遊技機Ｂ１又はＢ２の奏する効果に加え、第１通路部材がその一端を回転先端側として回転されることで連通状態が形成されると共に、接続部材は、第１通路部材の回転軸と平行な回転軸を備えるので、第１通路部材の変位（回転）に伴う接続部材の変位（回転）をスムーズに行わせることができる。また、両者の回転動作を利用することで、第１通路部材または第２通路部材の他方の一端へ接続部材の他側壁部をより近接させることができる。
According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, a communication state is formed by rotating the first passage member with one end thereof as a rotation tip side, and the connection member is connected to the first passage. Since the rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the member is provided, the displacement (rotation) of the connection member accompanying the displacement (rotation) of the first passage member can be smoothly performed. Moreover, the other side wall part of a connection member can be brought closer to the other end of a 1st channel | path member or a 2nd channel | path member by utilizing both rotation operation | movement.
遊技機Ｂ２又はＢ３において、前記接続部材は、前記連通状態において、前記一側壁部および他側壁部の対向面のうちの一方の対向面が、前記第１通路部材から第２通路部材へ球が送球される際の転動面とされ、前記連通状態では、前記一方の対向面が前記第１通路部材から第２通路部材へ向けて下降傾斜されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｂ４。
In the gaming machine B2 or B3, in the communication state, the connection member is configured such that one of the opposing surfaces of the one side wall portion and the other side wall portion has a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. A gaming machine B4, wherein the gaming machine B4 is a rolling surface when the ball is sent, and in the communication state, the one opposing surface is inclined downward from the first passage member toward the second passage member.
遊技機Ｂ４によれば、遊技機Ｂ２又はＢ３の奏する効果に加え、第１通路部材および第２通路部材の一端どうしの連通部分における球の送球を安定化させることができる。即ち、第１通路部材および第２通路部材の一端どうしの連通部分は位置ずれが大きくなる部分であるため、球の送球が不安定となるところ、かかる連通部分における球の転動面を形成する一方の対向面は、第１通路部材から第２通路部材へ向けて下降傾斜されるので、球を転動させて、その送球を安定化させることができる。
According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2 or B3, it is possible to stabilize the ball feeding in the communication portion between the first passage member and one end of the second passage member. That is, since the communication portion between the one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member is a portion where the positional deviation becomes large, the ball feeding surface becomes unstable, so that the ball rolling surface is formed in the communication portion. One opposing surface is inclined downward from the first passage member toward the second passage member, so that the ball can be rolled to stabilize the ball feeding.
遊技機Ｂ１からＢ４のいずれかにおいて、前記連通状態では前記第１通路部材内の球が前記第１通路部材の一端から送球されることを許容すると共に前記解除状態では前記第１通路部材内の球が前記第１通路部材の一端から送球されることを規制する送球規制手段を備えることを特徴とする遊技機Ｂ５。
In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, in the communication state, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be sent from one end of the first passage member, and in the release state, the ball in the first passage member A gaming machine B5, comprising a ball sending restricting means for restricting a ball from being sent from one end of the first passage member.
ここで、解除状態では、第１通路部材の一端が第２通路部材の一端から離間され第１通路部材および第２通路部材が非連通とされるので、かかる状態において、何らかの理由により、第１通路部材に球が供給されると、第１通路部材を通過した球が遊技領域外へ落下する恐れがある。また、連通状態において、第１通路部材に供給された球であっても、その球が何らかの理由により第１通路部材に留まり、その状態のまま解除状態に移行した場合には、第１通路部材に留まっていた球が、遊技領域へ落下する恐れがある。遊技領域外へ球が落下すると、歯車やクランク機構などの可動部材の動きを妨げる恐れや、球が挟み込まれることで、可動部材の破損を招く恐れがある。
Here, in the released state, one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member are not communicated. When a ball is supplied to the passage member, the ball that has passed through the first passage member may fall out of the game area. Further, in the communication state, even when the sphere is supplied to the first passage member, if the sphere stays in the first passage member for some reason and shifts to the release state in that state, the first passage member There is a risk that the ball staying in the ball will fall into the game area. If the sphere falls outside the game area, the movement of the movable member such as a gear or a crank mechanism may be hindered, or the sphere may be sandwiched to cause damage to the movable member.
これに対し、遊技機Ｂ５によれば、遊技機Ｂ１からＢ４のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、連通状態では第１通路部材内の球が第１通路部材の一端から送球されることを許容すると共に解除状態では第１通路部材内の球が第１通路部材の一端から送球されることを規制する送球規制手段を備えるので、例えば、解除状態において第１通路部材に球が供給された場合や、第１通路部材に球が留まったまま連通状態から解除状態へ移行した場合でも、第１通路部材の一端から球が遊技領域外へ落下することを抑制できる。
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be sent from one end of the first passage member in the communication state. At the same time, since it is provided with a ball feeding restricting means for restricting the ball in the first passage member from being fed from one end of the first passage member in the released state, for example, when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, Even when the sphere stays on the first passage member and shifts from the communication state to the release state, the sphere can be prevented from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member.
遊技機Ｂ５において、前記第１通路部材の一端に配設され、前記連通状態では球の通過を許容すると共に前記解除状態では球の通過を規制するカバー体を備え、前記カバー体が前記送球規制手段を形成することを特徴とする遊技機Ｂ６。
In the gaming machine B5, the gaming machine B5 includes a cover body that is disposed at one end of the first passage member and that allows the passage of the sphere in the communication state and restricts the passage of the sphere in the release state. A gaming machine B6 characterized by forming means.
遊技機Ｂ６によれば、遊技機Ｂ５の奏する効果に加え、第１通路部材の一端には、連通状態では球の通過を許容すると共に解除状態では球の通過を規制する送球規制手段としてのカバー体が配設されるので、例えば、解除状態において第１通路部材に球が供給された場合や、第１通路部材に球が留まったまま連通状態から解除状態へ移行した場合でも、第１通路部材の一端から球が遊技領域外へ落下することを抑制できる。
According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, a cover serving as a ball-feeding restricting means that allows passage of the ball in the communication state and restricts the passage of the ball in the released state is provided at one end of the first passage member. Since the body is disposed, for example, even when the sphere is supplied to the first passage member in the release state, or even when the sphere remains in the first passage member and the transition is made from the communication state to the release state, It can suppress that a ball | bowl falls out of a game area | region from the end of a member.
遊技機Ｂ５において、前記カバー体に付勢力を付与して前記カバー体を前記球の通過を規制する位置に維持する付勢部材と、前記第１通路部材の変位に伴い前記カバー体に作用して少なくとも前記連通状態が形成される際に前記球の通過を許容する方向へ前記カバー体を変位させる作用部材と、を備えることを特徴とする遊技機Ｂ７。
In the gaming machine B5, an urging member that applies an urging force to the cover body to maintain the cover body at a position that restricts the passage of the ball, and acts on the cover body in accordance with the displacement of the first passage member. And an action member that displaces the cover body in a direction that allows passage of the ball when at least the communication state is formed.
遊技機Ｂ７によれば、遊技機Ｂ５の奏する効果に加え、カバー体に付勢力を付与してそのカバー体を球の通過を規制する位置に維持する付勢部材を備えるので、解除状態においてカバー体が不用意に変位することを抑制でき、その結果、第１通路部材の一端から球が遊技領域外へ落下することをより確実に抑制できる。一方、連通状態が形成されると、カバー体が球の通過を許容する方向へ変位されるので、第１通路部材から第２通路部材への球の送球を行うことができる。
According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the gaming machine B7 includes a biasing member that applies a biasing force to the cover body and maintains the cover body in a position that restricts the passage of the ball. The body can be prevented from being inadvertently displaced, and as a result, the ball can be more reliably prevented from dropping from the one end of the first passage member to the outside of the game area. On the other hand, when the communication state is formed, the cover body is displaced in a direction allowing passage of the sphere, so that the sphere can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member.
この場合、カバー体の球の通過を許容する方向への変位は、作用部材の作用により第１通路部材の変位に伴い行われるので、第１通路部材を変位させる駆動手段を、カバー体を変位させるための駆動手段として兼用させることができ、その分、製品コストの削減を図ることができる。
In this case, since the displacement of the cover body in the direction allowing the passage of the sphere is performed along with the displacement of the first passage member by the action of the action member, the driving means for displacing the first passage member is displaced by the cover body. It can be used also as a drive means for making it possible to reduce the product cost accordingly.
なお、作用部材としては、第１通路部材の変位に伴うカバー体の変位軌跡上に位置し、その変位軌跡に沿って変位されるカバー体に当接することで、付勢部材の付勢力に抗してカバー体を球の通過を許容する方向へ変位させるもの（例えば、第２通路部材、接続部材、遊技盤に固定される部材など）や、第１通路部材を変位させる駆動手段の駆動力をカバー体へ伝達して、第１通路部材の変位と共にカバー体も変位させるもの（例えば、駆動手段と駆動力を回転運動または直線運動に変換してカバー体へ伝達する歯車やラック・ピニオンなど）が例示される。
The acting member is positioned on the displacement locus of the cover body accompanying the displacement of the first passage member, and abuts against the cover body displaced along the displacement locus, thereby resisting the urging force of the urging member. Then, the driving force of the driving means for displacing the cover body (for example, the second passage member, the connection member, the member fixed to the game board, etc.) or the driving means for displacing the first passage member. Is transmitted to the cover body, and the cover body is displaced together with the displacement of the first passage member (for example, a gear or a rack and pinion that converts the driving means and the driving force into a rotational motion or a linear motion and transmits it to the cover body. ) Is exemplified.
遊技機Ｂ５において、前記送球規制手段は、前記解除状態において前記第１通路部材をその第１通路部材の一端が最上方となる姿勢に配設するものであることを特徴とする遊技機Ｂ８。
In the gaming machine B5, the pitching restricting means arranges the first passage member in a posture in which one end of the first passage member is at the uppermost position in the released state.
遊技機Ｂ８によれば、遊技機Ｂ５の奏する効果に加え、送球規制手段は、解除状態において第１通路部材をその第１通路部材の一端が最上方となる姿勢に配設するので、例えば、解除状態において第１通路部材に球が供給された場合や、第１通路部材に球が留まったまま連通状態から解除状態へ移行した場合でも、第１通路部材の一端から球が遊技領域外へ落下することを抑制できる。
According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the ball-throwing restricting means arranges the first passage member in the released state in a posture in which one end of the first passage member is at the uppermost position. Even when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or even when the ball remains in the first passage member and the transition is made from the communication state to the released state, the ball goes out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. It can suppress falling.
なお、解除状態において第１通路部材の一端が最上方となる姿勢に配設された第１通路部材は、その第１通路部材の全体が上昇傾斜している必要はなく、第１通路部材の一部に水平または下降傾斜となる領域が存在しても良い。
Note that the first passage member disposed in a posture in which one end of the first passage member is in the uppermost position in the released state does not require the whole first passage member to be inclined upward. There may be a region that is horizontal or inclined downward.
遊技機Ｂ５において、前記送球規制手段は、前記解除状態において前記第１通路部材をその第１通路部材の他端から一端へ向けて上昇傾斜する姿勢に配設するものであることを特徴とする遊技機Ｂ９。
In the gaming machine B5, the ball-throwing restricting means is characterized in that in the released state, the first passage member is disposed in a posture in which the first passage member is inclined upward from the other end of the first passage member to one end. Game machine B9.
遊技機Ｂ９によれば、遊技機Ｂ５の奏する効果に加え、送球規制手段は、解除状態において前記第１通路部材をその第１通路部材の他端から一端へ向けて上昇傾斜する姿勢に配設するので、例えば、解除状態において第１通路部材に球が供給された場合や、第１通路部材に球が留まったまま連通状態から解除状態へ移行した場合でも、第１通路部材の一端から球が遊技領域外へ落下することを抑制しやすくできる。
According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B5, the pitching restricting means is disposed in a posture in which the first passage member is inclined upward from the other end of the first passage member to one end in the released state. Therefore, for example, even when the sphere is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or when the sphere remains in the first passage member and the transition is made from the communication state to the released state, the sphere starts from one end of the first passage member. Can be easily prevented from falling outside the gaming area.
また、連通状態を形成する場合には、第１通路部材の全体を他端から一端へ向けて下降傾斜した状態を形成できるので、第１通路部材から第２通路部材へ球を送球しやすくでき、途中に球が留まることを抑制できる。よって、解除状態に移行した場合には、第１通路部材に留まっていた球が遊技領域へ落下することを抑制できる。
Further, when the communication state is formed, a state in which the entire first passage member is inclined downward from the other end to the one end can be formed, so that it is easy to send a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. , It is possible to suppress the ball from staying on the way. Therefore, when it transfers to a cancellation | release state, it can suppress that the ball | bowl which remained on the 1st channel | path member falls to a game area | region.
遊技機Ｂ１からＢ９のいずれかにおいて、球が通過可能に形成される上流通路および下流通路を有するケース体と、前記上流通路から流下される球を前記第１通路へ振り分ける一側位置および前記上流通路から流下される球を前記下流通路へ振り分ける他側位置の間で変位する振分部材とを備え、前記ケース体は、前記振分部材の変位方向の両側が開放して形成されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｂ１０。
In any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, a case body having an upstream passage and a downstream passage formed so that a ball can pass therethrough, a one-side position for distributing the ball flowing down from the upstream passage to the first passage, and A displacing member that displaces a ball that flows down from the upstream passage to the downstream passage, and the case body is formed by opening both sides of the displacing direction of the allocating member. A gaming machine B10.
遊技機Ｂ１０によれば、遊技機Ｂ１からＢ９のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、ケース体は、振分部材の変位方向の両側が開放して形成されるので、一側位置または他側位置へ向けて変位される振分部材とケース体との間へ球が流下した場合でも、その流下した球が振分部材とケース体との間に挟み込まれることを抑制できる。
According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the case body is formed with both sides of the displacing direction of the distributing member open, so that the case body can be moved to one side position or the other side position. Even when a sphere flows down between the sorting member and the case body that are displaced toward each other, the sphere that has flowed down can be prevented from being sandwiched between the sorting member and the case body.
遊技機Ｂ１０において、前記振分部材は、前記第１通路部材に形成され、前記第１通路部材の変位により前記連通状態が形成されると前記振分部材が前記一側位置に配設され、前記第１通路部材の変位により前記解除状態が形成されると前記振分部材が前記他側位置に配設されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｂ１１。
In the gaming machine B10, the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, and when the communication state is formed by the displacement of the first passage member, the distribution member is disposed at the one side position, When the release state is formed by the displacement of the first passage member, the sorting member is disposed at the other side position.
遊技機Ｂ１１によれば、遊技機Ｂ１０の奏する効果に加え、振分部材が第１通路部材に形成され、第１通路部材の変位に伴って変位部材を一側位置および他側位置に配設することができるので、第１通路部材を変位させる駆動手段を、振分部材を変位させるための駆動手段として兼用させることができ、その分、製品コストの削減を図ることができる。
According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B10, the sorting member is formed in the first passage member, and the displacement member is disposed at one side position and the other side position in accordance with the displacement of the first passage member. Therefore, the driving means for displacing the first passage member can also be used as the driving means for displacing the distribution member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.
ここで、振分部材が第１通路部材とは独立して変位される構造では、例えば、制御不良の発生により、振分部材と第１通路部材との変位状態にずれが生じると、解除状態にある第１通路部材に対して球が振り分けられ（即ち、振分部材が一側位置に配設され）、第１通路部材の一端から遊技領域外へ球が落下する恐れがある。これに対し、遊技機Ｂ１０では、振分部材が第１通路部材に形成されるので、振分部材と第１通路部材との変位状態を常に同期させることができる。よって、制御不良が発生したとしても、解除状態にある第１通路部材に対して球が振り分けられることを回避でき（即ち、解除状態が形成されている場合には振分部材は常に他側位置に配設される）、その結果、第１通路部材の一端から遊技領域外へ球が落下することを確実に抑制できる。
Here, in the structure in which the distribution member is displaced independently of the first passage member, for example, when a displacement occurs between the distribution member and the first passage member due to the occurrence of control failure, The balls are distributed to the first passage member at the position (that is, the distribution member is disposed at one side position), and the balls may fall from one end of the first passage member to the outside of the game area. On the other hand, in the gaming machine B10, since the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, the displacement states of the distribution member and the first passage member can always be synchronized. Therefore, even if a control failure occurs, it is possible to avoid the balls from being distributed to the first passage member in the released state (that is, when the released state is formed, the sorting member is always positioned at the other side). As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from dropping from one end of the first passage member to the outside of the game area.
遊技機Ｂ１１において、前記第１通路部材は、球が通過する通路を区画する壁部を備え、前記第１通路部材の壁部が前記振分部材とされることを特徴とする遊技機Ｂ１２。
In the gaming machine B11, the first passage member includes a wall portion defining a passage through which a ball passes, and the wall portion of the first passage member serves as the distribution member.
遊技機Ｂ１２によれば、遊技機Ｂ１１の奏する効果に加え、第１通路部材は、球が通過する通路を区画する壁部を備え、第１通路部材の壁部が振分部材とされるので、部品を共通化して、部品コストの削減を図ることができる。また、球が通過する通路を区画する壁部を振分部材とすることで、振り分けられた球を確実に通路へ流下させることができる。
According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B11, the first passage member includes a wall portion that defines a passage through which a ball passes, and the wall portion of the first passage member is a distribution member. By sharing parts, it is possible to reduce the cost of parts. Moreover, the distributed sphere can be surely flowed down to the passage by using the wall portion defining the passage through which the sphere passes as a sorting member.
＜従動側スライド部材４３０の跳ね返りを規制する構造を一例とする発明の概念について＞
上下方向に延設される案内部材と、その案内部材に案内され上昇位置および下降位置の間を前記案内部材に沿って変位可能とされる変位部材と、その変位部材を前記下降位置に支持する支持部材と、前記案内部材に沿って昇降可能に形成される昇降部材とを備え、前記昇降部材の上昇に伴いその昇降部材に押し上げられることで前記変位部材が前記下降位置から上昇位置まで上昇されると共に、前記昇降部材の下降に伴い前記変位部材が自重により前記上昇位置から下降位置まで下降される遊技機において、前記変位部材が前記下降位置まで下降されると前記変位部材の上昇方向への変位を規制する上昇規制部材を備えることを特徴とする遊技機Ｃ１。
<About the concept of the invention taking as an example a structure that regulates the rebound of the driven-side slide member 430>
A guide member extending in the vertical direction, a displacement member guided by the guide member and displaceable along the guide member between the raised position and the lowered position, and the displacement member supported at the lowered position A support member and an elevating member formed so as to be movable up and down along the guide member, and the displacement member is raised from the lowered position to the raised position by being pushed up by the elevating member as the elevating member is raised. In the gaming machine in which the displacement member is lowered from the raised position to the lowered position by its own weight as the elevating member is lowered, when the displacement member is lowered to the lowered position, A gaming machine C1 including a rise restricting member that restricts displacement.
ここで、上下方向に延設される案内部材と、その案内部材に案内され上昇位置および下降位置の間を案内部材に沿って変位可能とされる変位部材と、その変位部材を下降位置に支持する支持部材と、案内部材に沿って昇降可能に形成される昇降部材とを備え、昇降部材の上昇に伴いその昇降部材に押し上げられることで変位部材が下降位置から上昇位置まで上昇されると共に、昇降部材の下降に伴い変位部材が自重により上昇位置から下降位置まで下降される遊技機が知られている（特開２０１４−２３３４９４号公報）。この場合、案内部材に沿って自重で下降された変位部材は、支持部材上に載置されその支持部材に支持されることで、下降位置に維持される。しかしながら、変位部材は、支持部材に載置された状態であり、案内部材に沿って上昇方向へ変位可能であるため、外乱に起因してがたつきが生じやすく、下降位置における変位部材の姿勢が不安定であるという問題点があった。
Here, a guide member extending in the vertical direction, a displacement member guided by the guide member and displaceable along the guide member between the raised position and the lowered position, and the displaced member supported at the lowered position And a lifting member formed so as to be movable up and down along the guide member, the displacement member is raised from the lowered position to the raised position by being pushed up by the raising and lowering member as the lifting member rises, A gaming machine in which a displacement member is lowered from a raised position to a lowered position by its own weight as the elevating member descends is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-233494). In this case, the displacement member lowered by its own weight along the guide member is placed on the support member and supported by the support member, thereby maintaining the lowered position. However, since the displacement member is mounted on the support member and can be displaced in the upward direction along the guide member, rattling is likely to occur due to disturbance, and the posture of the displacement member in the lowered position There is a problem that is unstable.
これに対し、遊技機Ｃ１によれば、変位部材が下降位置まで下降されると変位部材の上昇方向への変位を規制する上昇規制部材を備えるので、下降位置において変位部材が案内部材に沿って上昇方向へ変位することを規制でき、外乱に起因するがたつきを抑制できる。その結果、下降位置における変位部材の姿勢を安定化できる。
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is provided along the guide member at the lowered position because the elevation member is provided to regulate the displacement of the displacement member in the upward direction when the displacement member is lowered to the lowered position. Displacement in the upward direction can be restricted, and rattling caused by disturbance can be suppressed. As a result, the posture of the displacement member at the lowered position can be stabilized.
遊技機Ｃ１において、前記上昇規制部材を前記変位部材へ近接する方向へ付勢する付勢手段を備え、前記変位部材は、その変位部材が自重で下降される際に前記上昇規制部材に当接してその上昇規制部材を前記変位部材から離間する方向へ変位させる離間作用部と、前記下降位置において前記上昇規制部材が前記変位部材へ近接する方向へ変位することを許容し且つ前記上昇規制部材に係合する係合部とを備えることを特徴とする遊技機Ｃ２。
The gaming machine C1 includes an urging unit that urges the rise restricting member in a direction approaching the displacement member, and the displacement member contacts the rise restricting member when the displacement member is lowered by its own weight. A separating action part for displacing the ascent restricting member in a direction away from the displacement member, and allowing the ascent restricting member to displace in the direction approaching the displaceable member at the lowered position and A gaming machine C2 comprising an engaging portion to be engaged.
遊技機Ｃ２によれば、遊技機Ｃ１の奏する効果に加え、変位部材は、変位部材が自重で下降される際に上昇規制部材を変位部材から離間する方向へ変位させる離間作用部と、下降位置において上昇規制部材と係合する係合部とを備えるので、変位部材を下降位置まで自重で下降させる動作のみで上昇規制部材による規制状態を形成することができ、上昇規制部材による規制状態を形成するための駆動源を別途設ける必要がない。よって、部品点数を削減して、製品コストの削減を図ることができる。
According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the displacement member includes a separation action unit that displaces the rising restricting member in a direction away from the displacement member when the displacement member is lowered by its own weight, and a lowered position. Since the engagement portion that engages with the rise restricting member is provided, the restricted state by the rise restricting member can be formed only by the operation of lowering the displacement member by its own weight to the lowered position, and the restricted state by the rise restricting member is formed. There is no need to provide a separate drive source for this. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.
また、上昇規制部材と係合部との係合は、上昇規制部材が変位部材へ近接する方向へ変位することを許容した上で行われるので、その分、上昇規制部材と係合部との係合を解除するために必要な力および上昇規制部材の変位を大きくできる。その結果、外乱が入力された場合でも、上昇規制部材と係合部との係合を維持しやすくできる。
Further, the engagement between the rise restricting member and the engaging portion is performed after allowing the rise restricting member to be displaced in the direction approaching the displacement member. The force necessary for releasing the engagement and the displacement of the ascending restriction member can be increased. As a result, even when a disturbance is input, it is possible to easily maintain the engagement between the rise restricting member and the engaging portion.
遊技機Ｃ２において、前記上昇規制部材と前記変位部材の係合部との係合の解除は、前記昇降部材が上昇されることで行われることを特徴とする遊技機Ｃ３。
In the gaming machine C2, the gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the disengagement between the rising restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is performed by raising the lifting member.
遊技機Ｃ３によれば、遊技機Ｃ２の奏する効果に加え、上昇規制部材と変位部材の係合部との係合の解除は、昇降部材が上昇されることで行われるので、変位部材に外乱が入力されてがたつこうとした場合であっても、上昇規制部材と変位部材の係合部との係合が不用意に解除されることを抑制できる。
According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2, the disengagement between the rising restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacing member is performed by raising the elevating member. Even if it is a case where it is going to crawl after being inputted, it can suppress that engagement with the engaging part of a raise control member and a displacement member being released carelessly.
また、上昇規制部材と変位部材の係合部との係合の解除が、昇降部材が上昇されることで行われるので、かかる係合を解除するための駆動源を別途設ける必要がなく、昇降部材を昇降させるための駆動源を、上昇規制部材と変位部材の係合部との係合を解除するための駆動源として兼用させることができ、その分、製品コストの削減を図ることができる。
Further, since the engagement between the ascending restriction member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is released by raising the elevating member, there is no need to separately provide a drive source for releasing such engagement, and elevating The drive source for raising and lowering the member can be used as the drive source for releasing the engagement between the ascending restriction member and the engaging portion of the displacement member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. .
更に、上昇規制部材と変位部材の係合部との係合の解除を行うための駆動源を別途設ける場合には、例えば、制御不良の発生により、上昇規制部材と変位部材の係合部との係合が解除されていない状態で、昇降部材が上昇して変位部材を押し上げる恐れがあるところ、遊技機Ｃ３によれば、上昇規制部材と変位部材の係合部との係合の解除を、昇降部材の上昇に伴いその昇降部材で変位部材を押し上げる動作に合せて行うことができるので、昇降部材により変位部材を押し上げる際には、上昇規制部材と変位部材の係合部との係合が確実に解除された状態を形成できる。
Further, when a separate drive source for releasing the engagement between the ascending restriction member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is provided, for example, due to the occurrence of control failure, In the state where the engagement is not released, there is a possibility that the elevating member rises and pushes up the displacement member. According to the gaming machine C3, the engagement between the ascending restriction member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is released. When the displacement member is pushed up by the elevating member, the elevating member is engaged with the engaging portion of the displacement member. Can be surely released.
遊技機Ｃ３において、前記昇降部材は、その昇降部材が上昇される際に前記上昇規制部材に当接して前記上昇規制部材を変位させることで前記上昇規制部材と前記変位部材の係合部との係合を解除させる解除作用部を備えることを特徴とする遊技機Ｃ４。
In the gaming machine C3, the elevating member contacts the elevating restriction member when the elevating member is raised, and displaces the elevating restriction member, whereby the elevating restriction member and the engaging portion of the displacement member A gaming machine C4 comprising a release action portion for releasing the engagement.
ここで、上昇規制部材と変位部材の係合部との係合の解除は、昇降部材の昇降に伴い変位部材を押し上げる際の押し上げ力により行うこともできるが、この場合には、その押し上げ力により解除できる程度の係合状態とする必要があり、強固な係合が困難となる。また、この場合には、係合が解除される際にその反動で振動が発生して、変位部材の姿勢が不安定となる。
Here, the disengagement between the ascending restriction member and the engaging portion of the displacement member can be performed by a push-up force when pushing up the displacement member as the elevating member moves up and down. Therefore, it is necessary to establish an engagement state that can be released by this, and it becomes difficult to perform strong engagement. Further, in this case, when the engagement is released, vibration is generated by the reaction, and the posture of the displacement member becomes unstable.
これに対し、遊技機Ｃ４によれば、遊技機Ｃ３の奏する効果に加え、昇降部材は、その昇降部材が上昇される際に上昇規制部材に当接して上昇規制部材を変位させることで上昇規制部材と変位部材の係合部との係合を解除させる解除作用部を備えるので、上昇規制部材と変位部材の係合部とが強固に係合されている場合でも、その解除を確実に行うことができる。言い換えれば、強固な係合状態を形成しておけるので、外乱に起因する変位部材のがたつきを抑制して、下降位置における変位部材の姿勢を安定化できる。また、係合が解除される際の反動による振動を抑制して、変位部材の姿勢を安定化できる。
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3, the lifting member is brought into contact with the lifting restricting member when the lifting member is lifted to displace the lifting restricting member. Since the release action part for releasing the engagement between the member and the engagement part of the displacement member is provided, even when the ascending restriction member and the engagement part of the displacement member are firmly engaged, the release is surely performed. be able to. In other words, since a strong engagement state can be formed, rattling of the displacement member due to disturbance can be suppressed and the posture of the displacement member at the lowered position can be stabilized. In addition, vibration due to reaction when the engagement is released can be suppressed, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.
遊技機Ｃ３又はＣ４において、前記上昇規制部材は、前記変位部材の係合部との係合が解除された状態では、前記下降位置および上昇位置の間で前記変位部材を昇降させる前記昇降部材に当接されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｃ５。
In the gaming machine C3 or C4, when the engagement with the engaging portion of the displacement member is released, the ascent restricting member is the ascending / descending member that moves the displaceable member between the descending position and the ascending position. A gaming machine C5 that is abutted.
遊技機Ｃ５によれば、遊技機Ｃ３又はＣ４の効果に加え、上昇規制部材は、変位部材の係合部との係合が解除された状態では、下降位置および上昇位置の間で変位部材を昇降させる昇降部材に当接されるので、案内ガイドとして機能して、昇降部材が昇降される際のがたつきを抑制することができる。その結果、その昇降部材に伴って昇降する変位部材の姿勢を安定化できる。
According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3 or C4, when the engagement with the engaging portion of the displacement member is released, the ascending restriction member moves the displacement member between the lowered position and the raised position. Since it abuts on the elevating member that moves up and down, it functions as a guide guide and can suppress rattling when the elevating member is raised and lowered. As a result, the posture of the displacement member that moves up and down with the lifting member can be stabilized.
遊技機Ｃ５において、前記昇降部材に当接される上昇規制部材は、前記昇降部材へ近接する方向へ前記付勢手段により付勢されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｃ６。
In the gaming machine C5, a gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the ascending restriction member that is in contact with the elevating member is urged by the urging means in a direction close to the elevating member.
遊技機Ｃ６によれば、遊技機Ｃ５の奏する効果に加え、昇降部材に当接される上昇規制部材は、昇降部材へ近接する方向へ付勢手段により付勢されるので、昇降部材を一定方向へ付勢して、その姿勢を安定化させることができる。また、昇降部材ががたつくことを、付勢手段の弾性的な緩衝作用により抑制することができる。
According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C5, the lifting restricting member that is in contact with the lifting member is biased by the biasing means in the direction approaching the lifting member, so that the lifting member is moved in a certain direction. The posture can be stabilized. Further, rattling of the elevating member can be suppressed by the elastic buffering action of the urging means.
遊技機Ｃ６において、駆動手段と、その駆動手段により回転駆動されるピニオンと、そのピニオンが歯合されるラックとを備えると共に、前記ラックが前記昇降部材に配設され、前記昇降部材は、前記上昇規制部材を介して、前記ラックが前記ピニオンから離間される方向へ前記付勢手段により付勢されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｃ７。
The gaming machine C6 includes a driving unit, a pinion that is rotationally driven by the driving unit, and a rack that meshes with the pinion. The rack is disposed on the lifting member, and the lifting member A gaming machine C7, wherein the biasing means is biased by the biasing means in a direction away from the pinion via a rise restricting member.
遊技機Ｃ７によれば、遊技機Ｃ６の奏する効果に加え、駆動手段により回転駆動されたピニオンの回転運動がラックの直線運動に変換され、その直線運動により昇降部材が案内部材に沿って昇降される。この場合、昇降部材は、上昇規制部材を介して、ラックがピニオンから離間される方向へ付勢されるので、ラックおよびピニオンの歯面の間隔を安定化させることができる。即ち、ラックおよびピニオンの歯面の間隔が狭まる方向へ昇降部材ががたつく場合には、その間隔を広げる方向へ付勢手段の付勢力が作用する一方、ラックおよびピニオンの歯面の間隔が広がる方向へ昇降部材ががたつく場合には、その間隔が一定以上に広がることを案内部材による案内構造により規制できる。よって、ラックおよびピニオンの歯面の間隔が狭くなり、歯合抵抗が過大となることを抑制できる。
According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, the rotational motion of the pinion that is rotationally driven by the driving means is converted into the linear motion of the rack, and the lifting member is raised and lowered along the guide member by the linear motion. The In this case, since the elevating member is biased in the direction in which the rack is separated from the pinion via the ascending restriction member, the interval between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion can be stabilized. That is, when the elevating member rattles in the direction in which the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion is narrowed, the biasing force of the biasing means acts in the direction to increase the distance, while the direction in which the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion widens In the case where the elevating and lowering member rattles, it can be regulated by the guide structure by the guide member that the interval is widened beyond a certain level. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the interval between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion from being narrowed and the meshing resistance from becoming excessive.
遊技機Ｃ１からＣ７のいずれかにおいて、前記昇降部材が前記変位部材を前記上昇位置まで押し上げると前記昇降部材の下降方向への変位を規制する下降規制部材を備えることを特徴とする遊技機Ｃ８。
In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the gaming machine C8 is provided with a lowering restricting member that restricts a displacement of the elevating member in a descending direction when the elevating member pushes up the displacement member to the raised position.
遊技機Ｃ８によれば、遊技機Ｃ１からＣ７のいずれかにおいて、昇降部材が変位部材を上昇位置まで押し上げると昇降部材の下降方向への変位を規制する下降規制部材を備えるので、上昇位置に配設された変位部材および昇降部材を下降規制部材により支持することができる。その結果、変位部材を上昇位置に保持するための駆動力を不要とできるので、昇降部材を駆動する駆動手段の消費エネルギーを抑制できる。
According to the gaming machine C8, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, when the elevating member pushes the displacement member to the ascending position, the gaming machine C8 includes the descending regulating member that regulates the displacement of the elevating member in the descending direction. The provided displacement member and elevating member can be supported by the lowering restricting member. As a result, the driving force for holding the displacement member in the raised position can be made unnecessary, so that the energy consumption of the driving means for driving the elevating member can be suppressed.
また、下降規制部材による規制が、昇降部材が上昇されることで行われるので、かかる下降規制部材による規制を形成するための駆動源を別途設ける必要がなく、昇降部材を昇降させるための駆動源を、下降規制部材による規制を形成するための駆動源として兼用させることができ、その分、製品コストの削減を図ることができる。
Further, since the restriction by the lowering restriction member is performed by raising the lifting member, there is no need to separately provide a driving source for forming the restriction by the lowering restriction member, and the driving source for raising and lowering the lifting member. Can also be used as a drive source for forming a restriction by the lowering restriction member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.
遊技機Ｃ８において、前記下降規制部材による規制の解除は、前記昇降部材が下降されることで行われることを特徴とする遊技機Ｃ９。
In the gaming machine C8, the release of the restriction by the lowering restriction member is performed by lowering the lifting member.
遊技機Ｃ９によれば、遊技機Ｃ８の奏する効果に加え、下降規制部材による規制の解除は、昇降部材が下降されることで行われるので、かかる規制を解除するための駆動源を別途設ける必要がなく、昇降部材を昇降させるための駆動源を、下降規制部材の規制を解除するための駆動源として兼用させることができ、その分、製品コストの削減を図ることができる。
According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C8, since the release of the restriction by the lowering restriction member is performed by lowering the lifting member, it is necessary to separately provide a drive source for releasing such restriction Therefore, the drive source for raising and lowering the elevating member can also be used as the drive source for releasing the restriction of the lowering restricting member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.
また、下降規制部材による規制の解除を行うための駆動源を別途設ける場合には、例えば、制御不良の発生により、下降規制部材による規制が解除されていない状態で、昇降部材が下降して駆動源に過負荷が作用する或いは下降規制部材などが破損するおそれがあるところ、遊技機Ｃ９によれば、下降規制部材による規制の解除を、昇降部材の下降動作に合せて行うことができるので、昇降部材を下降させる際には、下降規制部材による規制が確実に解除された状態を形成できる。
Further, when a separate drive source for releasing the restriction by the lowering restriction member is provided, for example, the raising and lowering member is lowered and driven in a state where the restriction by the lowering restriction member is not released due to the occurrence of control failure. Where there is a risk of overload acting on the source or damage to the lowering restricting member, etc., according to the gaming machine C9, it is possible to release the restriction by the lowering restricting member in accordance with the lowering operation of the lifting member. When the elevating member is lowered, it is possible to form a state where the restriction by the lowering restricting member is reliably released.
なお、下降規制部材が、昇降部材ではなく、変位部材の下降方向への変位を規制する構造の場合には、かかる下降規制部材による規制の解除を、昇降部材の下降に伴って行う構造が複雑化するところ、遊技機Ｃ８及びＣ９によれば、下降規制部材が、昇降部材の下降方向への変位を規制する構造であるため、かかる下降規制部材による規制の解除を昇降部材の下降に伴って行う構造を簡素化できる。
If the lowering restricting member is not an elevating member but a structure that restricts displacement of the displacing member in the lowering direction, the structure for releasing the restriction by the lowering restricting member as the elevating member descends is complicated. However, according to the gaming machines C8 and C9, since the lowering restricting member has a structure that restricts the displacement of the elevating member in the lowering direction, the release of the restriction by the lowering restricting member is accompanied with the lowering of the elevating member. The structure to be performed can be simplified.
遊技機Ｃ８又はＣ９において、前記下降規制部材により前記昇降部材の下降方向への変位が規制される状態では、前記上昇規制部材が前記昇降部材に当接され、前記下降規制部材が前記昇降部材に当接される方向と前記上昇規制部材が前記昇降部材に当接される方向とが異なる方向とされることを特徴とする遊技機Ｃ１０。
In the gaming machine C8 or C9, in a state where the lowering restriction member restricts the displacement of the elevating member in the lowering direction, the elevating restriction member is brought into contact with the elevating member, and the lowering restriction member acts as the elevating member. A gaming machine C10, wherein the abutting direction is different from the abutting direction of the ascending restriction member against the elevating member.
遊技機Ｃ１０によれば、遊技機Ｃ８又はＣ９において、下降規制部材が昇降部材に当接される方向と上昇規制部材が昇降部材に当接される方向とが異なる方向とされるので、これら下降規制部材および上昇規制部材により昇降部材の異なる方向へのがたつきをそれぞれ抑制させることができる。その結果、昇降部材の姿勢を効果的に安定させることができる。
According to the gaming machine C10, in the gaming machine C8 or C9, the direction in which the lowering restricting member comes into contact with the elevating member is different from the direction in which the raising restricting member comes into contact with the elevating member. The regulating member and the raising regulating member can each suppress the rattling of the lifting member in different directions. As a result, the posture of the elevating member can be effectively stabilized.
遊技機Ｃ１０において、駆動手段と、その駆動手段により回転駆動されるピニオンと、そのピニオンが歯合されるラックとを備えると共に、前記ラックが前記昇降部材に配設され、前記下降規制部材は、前記ラックの歯面に平行な方向から前記昇降部材に当接されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｃ１１。
The gaming machine C10 includes a driving unit, a pinion that is rotationally driven by the driving unit, and a rack that meshes with the pinion, the rack is disposed on the elevating member, and the lowering restricting member includes: A gaming machine C11 which is brought into contact with the elevating member from a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack.
遊技機Ｃ１１によれば、駆動手段により回転駆動されたピニオンの回転運動がラックの直線運動に変換され、その直線運動により昇降部材が案内部材に沿って昇降される。この場合、ラック（昇降部材）はピニオンに対して歯面に平行な方向への変位が可能とされるところ、下降規制部材は、ラックの歯面に平行な方向から昇降部材に当接されるので、ラック（昇降部材）がピニオンに対してラックの歯面に平行な方向へ変位されることを規制できる。
According to the gaming machine C11, the rotational motion of the pinion that is rotationally driven by the driving means is converted into the linear motion of the rack, and the lifting member is lifted and lowered along the guide member by the linear motion. In this case, the rack (elevating member) can be displaced in a direction parallel to the tooth surface with respect to the pinion, and the lowering restricting member is brought into contact with the elevating member from a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack. Therefore, it is possible to restrict the rack (elevating member) from being displaced in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack with respect to the pinion.
遊技機Ｃ１からＣ１１のいずれかにおいて、前記変位部材が下降位置に配置された状態では、前記上昇規制部材および支持部材が前記案内部材を挟んだ一側および他側から前記変位部材に当接可能にそれぞれ配設されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｃ１２。
In any of the gaming machines C1 to C11, in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the ascent regulating member and the support member can contact the displacement member from one side and the other side across the guide member A gaming machine C12, which is disposed respectively.
遊技機Ｃ１２によれば、遊技機Ｃ１からＣ１１のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、変位部材が下降位置に配置された状態では、上昇規制部材および支持部材が案内部材を挟んだ一側および他側から変位部材に当接可能にそれぞれ配設されるので、案内部材に対する変位部材の一側または他側へのいずれの方向へのがたつきも上昇規制部材または支持部材が当接することでそれぞれ規制できる。よって、下降位置に配設された変位部材が外乱に起因してがたつくことを効果的に抑制できる。
According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C1 to C11, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the one side and the other side where the rising restricting member and the supporting member sandwich the guide member Since the guide member is disposed so as to be able to come into contact with the displacement member, rattling in either direction of the displacement member toward the one side or the other side with respect to the guide member is regulated by the rise restricting member or the support member contacting each other. it can. Therefore, it can suppress effectively that the displacement member arrange | positioned by the descent | fall position originates in a disturbance.
遊技機Ｃ１からＣ１２のいずれかにおいて、前記変位部材が下降位置に配置された状態では、前記支持部材および上昇規制部材が案内部材の延設方向に沿って位置を違えつつ前記変位部材に当接可能に配設されると共に、前記支持部材が前記上昇規制部材よりも上方に配設されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｃ１３。
In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C12, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the support member and the rise restricting member are in contact with the displacement member while being different in position along the extending direction of the guide member. A gaming machine C13, wherein the gaming machine C13 is disposed so as to be possible and the support member is disposed above the rise restricting member.
遊技機Ｃ１３によれば、遊技機Ｃ１からＣ１１のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、変位部材が下降位置に配置された状態では、支持部材および上昇規制部材が案内部材の延設方向に沿って位置を違えつつ変位部材に当接可能に配設されるので、変位部材の斜め方向へのがたつきを上昇規制部材および支持部材との当接により規制できる。よって、下降位置に配設された変位部材が外乱に起因してがたつくことを効果的に抑制できる。
According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C1 to C11, the support member and the rising regulating member are positioned along the extending direction of the guide member in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position. Since the displacement member is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the displacement member, the rattling of the displacement member in the oblique direction can be restricted by contact with the ascending restriction member and the support member. Therefore, it can suppress effectively that the displacement member arrange | positioned by the descent | fall position originates in a disturbance.
また、支持部材が上昇規制部材よりも上方に配設されるので、支持部材が昇降部材の昇降を阻害せず、昇降部材が昇降するためのスペースを確保することができる。よって、設計の自由度を確保できる。
In addition, since the support member is disposed above the ascending restriction member, the support member does not hinder the elevation member, and a space for the elevation member to ascend and descend can be secured. Therefore, the degree of freedom in design can be ensured.
＜回転部材６４０の被検出部６４１を検出センサ６８４により検出する構造を一例とする発明の概念について＞
移動可能に形成される移動部材と、その移動部材の移動位置を検出する検出手段とを備えた遊技機において、前記検出手段は、前記移動部材にその移動の方向に沿って不等間隔で配設される複数の被検出部と、その被検出部の移動軌跡上に配設される複数の検出センサとを備えることを特徴とする遊技機Ｄ１。
<About the concept of the invention taking as an example a structure in which the detection part 641 of the rotating member 640 is detected by the detection sensor 684>
In a gaming machine comprising a movable member formed to be movable and a detection means for detecting the movement position of the movable member, the detection means is arranged at unequal intervals along the direction of movement of the movable member. A gaming machine D1 comprising a plurality of detected parts provided, and a plurality of detection sensors arranged on a movement locus of the detected parts.
ここで、回転可能に形成される移動部材と、その移動部材の回転位置を検出する検出手段とを備えた遊技機が知られている（特開２００５−４６４６７号公報）。この遊技機によれば、検出手段が、移動部材の外周に等間隔に形成される複数のスリットと、そのスリットを挟んで対向配置される発光部および受光部とを備え、受光部が受光するパルス状の信号のパルス数を累積加算し、その累積加算したパルス数に基づいて、基準位置からの移動部材の回転量（即ち、回転位置）を検出する。しかしながら、この場合には、受光部の受光不良などによる検出不良が発生すると、移動部材の回転位置と累積加算数とにずれが生じ、移動部材の回転位置を正確に検出することができなくなるという問題点があった。即ち、検出不良が発生すると、その後の検出結果に影響を与えると共に、検出不良が発生する度に、検出結果への影響が累積される。
Here, there is known a gaming machine including a movable member formed to be rotatable and a detecting means for detecting a rotational position of the movable member (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-46467). According to this gaming machine, the detection means includes a plurality of slits formed at equal intervals on the outer periphery of the moving member, and a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit that are arranged to face each other with the slits interposed therebetween, and the light receiving unit receives light. The number of pulses of the pulse-like signal is cumulatively added, and the amount of rotation of the moving member from the reference position (that is, the rotational position) is detected based on the cumulatively added number of pulses. However, in this case, if a detection failure such as a light reception failure of the light receiving unit occurs, a deviation occurs between the rotational position of the moving member and the cumulative addition number, and the rotational position of the moving member cannot be accurately detected. There was a problem. That is, when a detection failure occurs, it affects the subsequent detection results, and every time a detection failure occurs, the influence on the detection results is accumulated.
これに対し、遊技機Ｄ１によれば、検出手段は、移動部材にその移動の方向に沿って不等間隔で配設される複数の被検出部と、その被検出部の移動軌跡上に配設される複数の検出センサとを備えるので、複数の検出センサの検出結果の組み合わせに基づいて、移動部材の移動位置を検出することができる。即ち、複数の検出センサが検出している現在の検出結果のみに基づいて、移動部材の移動位置を検出することができ、かかる移動部材の移動位置の検出に検出センサの過去の検出結果を必要としないので、移動部材の移動位置を正確に検出することができる。
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the detection means is arranged on the moving member on the moving locus of the detected parts arranged at unequal intervals along the direction of movement of the moving member. Since a plurality of detection sensors are provided, the movement position of the moving member can be detected based on a combination of detection results of the plurality of detection sensors. In other words, the moving position of the moving member can be detected based only on the current detection result detected by the plurality of detection sensors, and the past detection result of the detection sensor is required to detect the moving position of the moving member. Therefore, the moving position of the moving member can be accurately detected.
遊技機Ｄ１において、前記移動部材は、複数の分割部材を備えると共に、それら複数の分割部材が移動方向に沿って連結されることで形成され、前記被検出部は、前記複数の分割部材のうちの一部の分割部材に配設されると共に残りの分割部材には配設されず、前記複数の検出センサは、前記分割部材の配設間隔を基準とする間隔で配設されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｄ２。
In the gaming machine D1, the moving member includes a plurality of divided members, and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along a moving direction. The plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on the arrangement interval of the division members. A gaming machine D2.
遊技機Ｄ２によれば、遊技機Ｄ１の奏する効果に加え、移動部材は、複数の分割部材を備えると共に、それら複数の分割部材が移動方向に沿って連結されることで形成され、被検出部は、複数の分割部材のうちの一部の分割部材に配設されると共に残りの分割部材には配設されず、複数の検出センサは、分割部材の配設間隔を基準として配設されるので、分割部材の配設間隔に相当する分だけ移動部材が変位される毎に、複数の検出センサの検出結果の組み合わせを異ならせることができる。即ち、分割部材の配設間隔に相当する移動量を最少単位として、移動部材の移動位置を検出することができる。
According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the moving member includes a plurality of divided members, and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along the moving direction. Are disposed on some of the plurality of divided members and not disposed on the remaining divided members, and the plurality of detection sensors are disposed on the basis of the distance between the divided members. Therefore, each time the moving member is displaced by an amount corresponding to the arrangement interval of the divided members, the combination of detection results of the plurality of detection sensors can be varied. That is, the moving position of the moving member can be detected with the moving amount corresponding to the arrangement interval of the divided members as the minimum unit.
なお、分割部材の配設間隔を基準とする間隔で複数の検出センサが配設されるとは、複数の検出センサがそれぞれ複数の分割部材のうちのいずれかに対応する位置に配設されることを意味する。即ち、複数の検出センサのそれぞれが対応する分割部材の被検出部の有無を検出可能となる位置に配設されることを意味する。
Note that the plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on the arrangement interval of the divided members means that the plurality of detection sensors are respectively arranged at positions corresponding to any of the plurality of divided members. Means that. That is, it means that each of the plurality of detection sensors is disposed at a position where the presence or absence of the detected portion of the corresponding divided member can be detected.
遊技機Ｄ２において、前記移動部材には、前記複数の分割部材が第１の間隔で連結される第１区間と、前記複数の分割部材が前記第１の間隔よりも狭い間隔とされる第２の間隔で連結される第２区間とが形成され、前記複数の検出センサは、前記第１区間における分割部材の配設間隔を基準とする間隔で、前記第１区間における被検出部の移動軌跡上に配設されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｄ３。
In the gaming machine D2, the moving member includes a first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and a second interval in which the plurality of divided members are narrower than the first interval. And a plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on the arrangement interval of the dividing members in the first interval, and the movement locus of the detected part in the first interval A gaming machine D3, which is arranged above.
遊技機Ｄ３によれば、遊技機Ｄ２の奏する効果に加え、移動部材には、複数の分割部材が第１の間隔で連結される第１区間と、複数の分割部材が第１の間隔よりも狭い間隔とされる第２の間隔で連結される第２区間とが形成されるので、全体を第１の間隔で連結させる場合と比較して、移動部材の長さを短くできる。その結果、移動部材の配設に必要なスペースを抑制できる。
According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the moving member includes a first section in which a plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and a plurality of divided members are more than the first interval. Since the second section connected at the second interval which is a narrow interval is formed, the length of the moving member can be shortened as compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval. As a result, a space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed.
この場合、複数の検出センサは、第１区間における分割部材の配設間隔（第１の間隔）を基準とする間隔で、第１区間における被検出部の移動軌跡上に配設されるので、検出センサの配設に必要なスペースを確保しやすくできる。言い換えると、第２区間における分割部材の配設間隔（第２の間隔）を設定する際には、検出センサの配設のためのスペースを考慮する必要がなく、よって、第２の間隔をより狭い間隔に設定できる。その結果、この点からも移動部材の配設に必要なスペースを抑制できる。
In this case, the plurality of detection sensors are arranged on the movement locus of the detected part in the first section at intervals based on the arrangement interval (first interval) of the divided members in the first section. It is possible to easily secure a space necessary for arranging the detection sensors. In other words, when setting the arrangement interval (second interval) of the divided members in the second section, it is not necessary to consider the space for the arrangement of the detection sensor. A narrow interval can be set. As a result, the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed from this point.
遊技機Ｄ３において、前記分割部材は、前記被検出部材が配設される本体部材と、その本体部材および隣接する分割部材の本体部のそれぞれに両端が変位可能に連結されるリンク部材とを備え、前記リンク部材が前記本体部材および隣接する分割部材の本体部に対して変位されることで、前記分割部材および隣接する分割部材の間隔が増減され、前記第１区間では、前記リンク部材が変位終端に達し、前記分割部材が隣接する分割部材との間隔を広くする方向へ変位することが規制されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｄ４。
In the gaming machine D3, the split member includes a main body member on which the detected member is disposed, and a link member that is connected to the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent split member so that both ends are displaceable. The link member is displaced with respect to the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent divided member, whereby the interval between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased, and the link member is displaced in the first section. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that it reaches the end, and the division member is restricted from being displaced in the direction of widening the interval between the adjacent division members.
遊技機Ｄ４によれば、遊技機Ｄ３の奏する効果に加え、分割部材は、被検出部材が配設される本体部材と、その本体部材および隣接する分割部材の本体部のそれぞれに両端が変位可能に連結されるリンク部材とを備え、リンク部材が本体部材および隣接する分割部材の本体部に対して変位されることで、分割部材および隣接する分割部材の間隔が増減されるので、第１区間および第２区間を形成するための構造を簡素化できる。
According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3, the split member can be displaced at both ends of the main body member on which the detected member is disposed and the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent split member. Since the link member is displaced relative to the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent divided member, the interval between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased. And the structure for forming a 2nd area can be simplified.
この場合、第１区間では、リンク部材が変位終端に達し、分割部材が隣接する分割部材との間隔を広くする方向へ変位することが規制されるので、かかる間隔を広くする方向への被検出部の位置ばらつきを抑制することができる。その結果、検出センサによる検出精度の向上を図ることができる。
In this case, in the first section, the link member reaches the end of displacement, and the divided member is restricted from being displaced in the direction of increasing the interval between the adjacent divided members, so that the detected object in the direction of increasing the interval is detected. It is possible to suppress the position variation of the part. As a result, the detection accuracy by the detection sensor can be improved.
遊技機Ｄ４において、前記分割部材が変位可能に配設されるベース部材を備え、前記ベース部材は、前記分割部材が変位される際に前記本体部材を案内する本体案内部と前記リンク部材を案内するリンク案内部とを備え、前記リンク案内部は、前記本体部材が前記ベース部材の本体案内部に案内されて変位される際に、前記リンク部材に作用して、前記本体部材および前記隣接する分割部材の本体部材に対する前記リンク部材の姿勢を変化させることを特徴とする遊技機Ｄ５。
In the gaming machine D4, the split member includes a base member disposed so as to be displaceable, and the base member guides the main body guide portion and the link member that guide the main body member when the split member is displaced. A link guide portion that acts on the link member when the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guide portion of the base member, so that the main body member and the adjacent member are adjacent to each other. A gaming machine D5, wherein a posture of the link member with respect to a main body member of the divided member is changed.
遊技機Ｄ５によれば、遊技機Ｄ４の奏する効果に加え、ベース部材は、分割部材が変位される際に本体部材を案内する本体案内部とリンク部材を案内するリンク案内部とを備え、リンク案内部は、本体部材がベース部材の本体案内部に案内されて変位される際に、リンク部材に作用して、本体部材および隣接する分割部材の本体部材に対するリンク部材の姿勢を変化させるので、かかるリンク部材の姿勢の変化に伴って、分割部材どうしの間隔を増減させることができる。即ち、移動部材を移動させつつ、分割部材どうしの間隔を増減させ、第１区間および第２区間を形成することができる。
According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the base member includes a main body guide portion that guides the main body member and a link guide portion that guides the link member when the divided member is displaced, When the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guide portion of the base member, the guide portion acts on the link member and changes the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent divided member. As the posture of the link member changes, the interval between the divided members can be increased or decreased. That is, the first section and the second section can be formed by increasing or decreasing the interval between the divided members while moving the moving member.
遊技機Ｄ５において、前記リンク部材は、前記ベース部材のリンク案内部に案内される被案内部を備え、前記ベース部材のリンク案内部は、前記リンク部材の被案内部が摺動可能に挿通される溝状に形成されると共に、その溝幅が前記リンク部材の外形に対応する寸法に設定されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｄ６。
In the gaming machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by the link guide portion of the base member, and the guided portion of the link member is slidably inserted into the link guide portion of the base member. The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the groove width is set to a dimension corresponding to the outer shape of the link member.
遊技機Ｄ６によれば、遊技機Ｄ５の奏する効果に加え、リンク部材は、ベース部材のリンク案内部に案内される被案内部を備えると共に、ベース部材のリンク案内部は、リンク部材の被案内部が摺動可能に挿通される溝状に形成されると共に、その溝幅がリンク部材の外形に対応する寸法に設定されるので、第１区間においてリンク部材を変位終端に維持しやすくできる。これにより、分割部材が隣接する分割部材との間隔を広くする方向へ変位することを確実に規制して、かかる間隔を広くする方向への被検出部の位置ばらつきを抑制することができるので、検出センサによる検出精度の向上を図ることができる。
According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by the link guide portion of the base member, and the link guide portion of the base member is guided by the link member. Since the portion is formed in a groove shape that is slidably inserted, and the groove width is set to a dimension corresponding to the outer shape of the link member, the link member can be easily maintained at the displacement end in the first section. Thereby, it is possible to reliably regulate the displacement of the divided member in the direction of increasing the interval between the adjacent divided members, and to suppress the position variation of the detected portion in the direction of increasing the interval. The detection accuracy by the detection sensor can be improved.
遊技機Ｄ４からＤ６のいずれかにおいて、前記分割部材は、前記本体部材に変位可能に配設される変位部材を備え、前記第１区間では、前記隣接する分割部材の本体部材に当接される位置に前記変位部材が変位され、前記分割部材が隣接する分割部材との間隔を狭くする方向へ変位することが規制されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｄ７。
In any of the gaming machines D4 to D6, the split member includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the main body member, and abuts against the main body member of the adjacent split member in the first section. The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced to a position, and the division member is restricted from being displaced in a direction of narrowing an interval between adjacent division members.
遊技機Ｄ７によれば、遊技機Ｄ４からＤ６のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、分割部材は、本体部材に変位可能に配設される変位部材を備え、第１区間では、隣接する分割部材の本体部材に当接される位置に変位部材が変位され、分割部材が隣接する分割部材との間隔を狭くする方向へ変位することが規制されるので、かかる間隔を狭くする方向への被検出部の位置ばらつきを抑制することができる。その結果、検出センサによる検出精度の向上を図ることができる。
According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines D4 to D6, the split member includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the main body member. Since the displacement member is displaced to a position where it comes into contact with the main body member and the division member is restricted from being displaced in the direction of narrowing the interval between the adjacent division members, the detected portion in the direction of narrowing the interval is restricted. Can be suppressed. As a result, the detection accuracy by the detection sensor can be improved.
＜移動部材６４０における分割部材ＤＶどうしの間隔を調整する構造を一例とする発明の概念について＞
移動可能に形成される移動部材を備えた遊技機において、前記移動部材は、複数の分割部材を備える共に、それら複数の分割部材が移動方向に沿って連結されることで形成され、その移動部材には、前記複数の分割部材が第１の間隔で連結される第１区間と、前記複数の分割部材が前記第１の間隔よりも狭い間隔とされる第２の間隔で連結される第２区間とが形成されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｅ１。
<About the concept of the invention taking as an example a structure for adjusting the interval between the divided members DV in the moving member 640>
In a gaming machine including a movable member formed to be movable, the movable member includes a plurality of divided members and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along a moving direction. A second section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval and a second section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a second interval that is narrower than the first interval. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that a section is formed.
ここで、回転可能に形成される移動部材を備えた遊技機が知られている（特開２０１０−１１５４２６号公報）。この場合、例えば、移動部材の正面に複数の識別情報を周方向に沿って表示し、所定位置に配設された識別情報を遊技者に視認させることで、演出を行うことができる。しかしながら、遊技者の視認性を考慮して、識別情報は一定以上の大きさを確保する必要があるため、識別情報の表示数を多くすると、移動部材が大径化して、配設に必要なスペースが嵩む一方、移動部材を小径化すると、識別情報の表示数が減少する。
Here, a gaming machine including a moving member formed to be rotatable is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-115426). In this case, for example, a plurality of pieces of identification information can be displayed along the circumferential direction on the front surface of the moving member, and the player can visually recognize the identification information arranged at a predetermined position. However, in consideration of the player's visibility, the identification information needs to have a certain size or more. Therefore, if the number of identification information displayed is increased, the moving member becomes larger in diameter and necessary for the arrangement. While the space increases, when the diameter of the moving member is reduced, the number of identification information displayed is reduced.
これに対し、遊技機Ｅ１によれば、移動部材には、複数の分割部材が第１の間隔で連結される第１区間と、複数の分割部材が第１の間隔よりも狭い間隔とされる第２の間隔で連結される第２区間とが形成されるので、全体を第１の間隔で連結させる場合と比較して、移動部材の長さを短くできる。その結果、移動部材の配設に必要なスペースを抑制できる。即ち、分割部材の数は確保しつつ、それら複数の分割部材の配設に必要なスペースは抑制できる。よって、例えば、各分割部材に識別情報を表示する場合には、識別情報の表示数を確保しつつ、移動部材の配設に必要なスペースを抑制できる。
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the moving member includes a first section in which a plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and a plurality of divided members that are narrower than the first interval. Since the 2nd section connected with the 2nd interval is formed, compared with the case where the whole is connected with the 1st interval, the length of a moving member can be shortened. As a result, a space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed. That is, the space required for the arrangement of the plurality of divided members can be suppressed while securing the number of divided members. Therefore, for example, when displaying the identification information on each divided member, it is possible to suppress the space necessary for disposing the moving member while securing the number of identification information displayed.
遊技機Ｅ１において、前記分割部材は、本体部材と、その本体部材および隣接する分割部材の本体部のそれぞれに両端が変位可能に連結されるリンク部材とを備え、前記リンク部材が前記本体部材および隣接する分割部材の本体部に対して変位されることで、前記分割部材および隣接する分割部材の間隔が増減されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｅ２。
In the gaming machine E1, the split member includes a main body member, and a link member connected to each of the main body portion and the main body portion of the adjacent split member so that both ends are displaceable. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by being displaced with respect to the main body portion of the adjacent divided member.
遊技機Ｅ２によれば、遊技機Ｅ１の奏する効果に加え、分割部材は、本体部材と、その本体部材および隣接する分割部材の本体部のそれぞれに両端が変位可能に連結されるリンク部材とを備え、リンク部材が本体部材および隣接する分割部材の本体部に対して変位されることで、分割部材および隣接する分割部材の間隔が増減されるので、第１区間および第２区間を形成するための構造を簡素化できる。
According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the split member includes a main body member and a link member that is connected to each of the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent split member so as to be displaceable. In order to form the first section and the second section, the link member is displaced with respect to the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent divided member so that the interval between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased. Can be simplified.
遊技機Ｅ２において、前記分割部材が変位可能に配設されるベース部材を備え、前記ベース部材は、前記分割部材が変位される際に前記本体部材を案内する本体案内部と前記リンク部材を案内するリンク案内部とを備え、前記リンク案内部は、前記本体部材が前記ベース部材の本体案内部に案内されて変位される際に、前記リンク部材に作用して、前記本体部材および前記隣接する分割部材の本体部材に対する前記リンク部材の姿勢を変化させることを特徴とする遊技機Ｅ３。
In the gaming machine E2, the split member includes a base member disposed so as to be displaceable, and the base member guides the main body guide portion and the link member that guide the main body member when the split member is displaced. A link guide portion that acts on the link member when the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guide portion of the base member, so that the main body member and the adjacent member are adjacent to each other. A gaming machine E3, wherein a posture of the link member with respect to a main body member of the split member is changed.
遊技機Ｅ３によれば、遊技機Ｅ２の奏する効果に加え、ベース部材は、分割部材が変位される際に本体部材を案内する本体案内部とリンク部材を案内するリンク案内部とを備え、リンク案内部は、本体部材がベース部材の本体案内部に案内されて変位される際に、リンク部材に作用して、本体部材および隣接する分割部材の本体部材に対するリンク部材の姿勢を変化させるので、かかるリンク部材の姿勢の変化に伴って、分割部材どうしの間隔を増減させることができる。即ち、移動部材を移動させつつ、分割部材どうしの間隔を増減させ、第１区間および第２区間を形成することができる。
According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the base member includes a main body guide portion that guides the main body member and a link guide portion that guides the link member when the divided member is displaced, When the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guide portion of the base member, the guide portion acts on the link member and changes the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent divided member. As the posture of the link member changes, the interval between the divided members can be increased or decreased. That is, the first section and the second section can be formed by increasing or decreasing the interval between the divided members while moving the moving member.
遊技機Ｅ２又はＥ３において、前記分割部材は、前記本体部材に変位可能に配設される変位部材を備え、前記変位部材は、前記第１区間では、隣接する分割部材の側へ傾倒した姿勢とされると共に、前記第２区間では、第１区間における姿勢よりも起立された姿勢とされることを特徴とする遊技機Ｅ４。
In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the dividing member includes a displacing member disposed on the main body member so as to be displaceable, and the displacing member is inclined toward the adjacent dividing member in the first section. In addition, the gaming machine E4 is characterized in that in the second section, the posture is raised more than the posture in the first section.
遊技機Ｅ４によれば、遊技機Ｅ２又はＥ３の奏する効果に加え、変位部材は、第１区間では、隣接する分割部材の側へ傾倒した姿勢とされるので、変位部材を遊技者から視認しやすくすることができる。よって、例えば、変位部材に識別情報を表示する場合には、その識別情報の遊技者への視認性を高めることができる。また、第１区間では、分割部材どうしの間隔が広くされるので、変位部材が傾倒するためのスペースを確保でき、その分、変位部材を大型化できる。よって、この点からも、変位部材の視認性、即ち、識別情報の視認性の向上を図ることができる。
According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2 or E3, the displacement member is inclined to the side of the adjacent divided member in the first section. It can be made easier. Therefore, for example, when the identification information is displayed on the displacement member, the visibility of the identification information to the player can be improved. Moreover, since the space | interval between division members is widened in a 1st area, the space for a displacement member to incline can be ensured, and the displacement member can be enlarged correspondingly. Therefore, also from this point, the visibility of the displacement member, that is, the visibility of the identification information can be improved.
一方、変位部材は、第２区間では、第１区間における姿勢よりも起立された姿勢とされるので、変位部材を隣接する分割部材の本体部材から離間させることができ、その分、本体部材どうしを近づけて、それらの間隔を狭くすることができる。即ち、第２区間における第２の間隔を狭くすることができる。その結果、移動部材の長さを短くして、移動部材の配設に必要なスペースを抑制できる。
On the other hand, in the second section, the displacing member is in a standing posture rather than the posture in the first section, so that the displacing member can be separated from the main body member of the adjacent divided member, and the main body members are correspondingly separated. The distance between them can be reduced. That is, the 2nd space | interval in a 2nd area can be narrowed. As a result, the length of the moving member can be shortened, and the space necessary for disposing the moving member can be suppressed.
遊技機Ｅ４において、前記変位部材は、前記本体部材の上面に変位可能に配設され、前記第２区間では、前記隣接する分割部材の本体部材の上面よりも上方に配設されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｅ５。
In the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is displaceably disposed on an upper surface of the main body member, and is disposed above the upper surface of the main body member of the adjacent divided member in the second section. A gaming machine E5.
遊技機Ｅ５によれば、遊技機Ｅ４の奏する効果に加え、変位部材は、本体部材の上面に変位可能に配設され、第２区間では、隣接する分割部材の本体部材の上面よりも上方に配設されるので、変位部材との干渉を抑制できる。よって、例えば、本体部材どうしを当接するまで近づけることができ、それらの間隔をより狭くすることができる。即ち、第２区間における第２の間隔をより狭くすることができる。その結果、移動部材の長さを短くして、移動部材の配設に必要なスペースを抑制できる。
According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is disposed on the upper surface of the main body member so as to be displaceable, and in the second section, the upper side of the main body member of the adjacent divided member Since it is disposed, interference with the displacement member can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, the main body members can be brought close to each other until they come into contact with each other, and the interval between them can be made narrower. That is, the second interval in the second section can be made narrower. As a result, the length of the moving member can be shortened, and the space necessary for disposing the moving member can be suppressed.
遊技機Ｅ３において、前記ベース部材の本体案内部は、その軌道が円形に形成されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｅ６。
In the gaming machine E3, the main body guide portion of the base member has a circular track formed in the gaming machine E6.
遊技機Ｅ６によれば、遊技機Ｅ３の奏する効果に加え、ベース部材の本体案内部の軌道が円形に形成されるので、ベース部材の本体案内部に案内されて本体部材が変位するための構造を簡素化できる。
According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E3, the track of the main body guide portion of the base member is formed in a circular shape, so that the main body member is displaced by being guided by the main body guide portion of the base member. Can be simplified.
遊技機Ｅ３において、前記第１区間における前記分割部材の軌道が円弧形状に形成されると共に、その円弧形状の半径が、前記複数の分割部材を全て前記第１の間隔で周方向に連結して円形に配設する場合の半径と同等とされることを特徴とする遊技機Ｅ７。
In the gaming machine E3, the track of the divided member in the first section is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape connects all of the plurality of divided members in the circumferential direction at the first interval. A gaming machine E7 characterized by having a radius equivalent to that of a circular arrangement.
ここで、複数の分割部材が第１の間隔で周方向に連結される第１区間と、複数の分割部材が第１の間隔よりも狭い間隔とされる第２の間隔で周方向に連結される第２区間とが移動部材に形成される場合（以下「前者の場合」と称す）は、全体を第１の間隔で連結させる場合（以下「後者」と称す）と比較して、移動部材の周方向の長さを短くできるので、分割部材の数は確保しつつ、それら複数の分割部材の配設に必要なスペースは抑制できる。しかしながら、複数の分割部材の軌道を円形に形成する場合、前者の場合の半径は、後者の場合の半径よりも小さくされる。そのため、前者の場合における第１区間の分割部材を視認する遊技者に対して、その第１区間における分割部材の数と半径とに基づいて、移動部材を形成する分割部材の全数として実際の数よりも少ない数を想起させる。
Here, a first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected in the circumferential direction at a first interval, and a plurality of divided members are connected in the circumferential direction at a second interval that is narrower than the first interval. When the second section is formed on the moving member (hereinafter referred to as “the former case”), the moving member is compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval (hereinafter referred to as “the latter”). Since the length in the circumferential direction can be shortened, the space necessary for disposing the plurality of divided members can be suppressed while securing the number of divided members. However, when the tracks of the plurality of divided members are formed in a circular shape, the radius in the former case is made smaller than the radius in the latter case. Therefore, for the player who visually recognizes the divided member in the first section in the former case, the actual number as the total number of divided members forming the moving member based on the number and radius of the divided members in the first section. Recall fewer numbers.
これに対し、遊技機Ｅ７によれば、遊技機Ｅ３の奏する効果に加え、第１区間における分割部材の軌道が円弧形状に形成されると共に、その円弧形状の半径が、複数の分割部材を全て第１の間隔で周方向に連結して円形に配設する場合の半径と同等とされるので、複数の分割部材の数を確保すると共にそれら複数の分割部材の配設に必要なスペースを抑制しつつ、移動部材を形成する分割部材の全数として実際の数に相当する数を遊技者に想起させることができる。
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E3, the track of the divided member in the first section is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape is such that all of the divided members are all Since the radius is equal to that of the circular connection by connecting in the circumferential direction at the first interval, the number of divided members is ensured and the space necessary for arranging the divided members is suppressed. However, the player can be reminded of the number corresponding to the actual number as the total number of divided members forming the moving member.
＜駆動機構６３０を一例とする発明の概念について＞
案内部が延設されるベース部材と、そのベース部材の案内部に沿って変位される複数の分割部材がそれぞれ連結されることで形成される移動部材と、その移動部材に駆動力を付与する駆動手段とを備え、前記ベース部材の案内部は、前記分割部材に作用することで、前記分割部材どうしの間隔を第１の間隔に設定する第１案内部と、前記第１の間隔よりも狭い第２の間隔に前記分割部材どうしの間隔を設定する第２案内部とを備え、前記駆動手段は、前記分割部材に係合可能な係合部を有する回転駆動部材を備え、その回転駆動部材が前記係合部を前記分割部材に係合させつつ回転されることで、前記複数の分割部材が前記ベース部材の案内部に沿って変位されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｆ１。
<Concept of Invention with Drive Mechanism 630 as an Example>
A base member in which the guide portion is extended, a moving member formed by connecting a plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member, and a driving force is applied to the moving member. Drive means, and the guide portion of the base member acts on the divided member, whereby a first guide portion that sets the interval between the divided members to a first interval, and more than the first interval A second guide portion that sets the interval between the divided members at a narrow second interval, and the driving means includes a rotary drive member having an engaging portion that can be engaged with the divided member, and the rotational drive thereof. The gaming machine F1, wherein the plurality of divided members are displaced along the guide portions of the base member by rotating the members while engaging the engaging portions with the divided members.
ここで、回転可能に形成される移動部材を備えた遊技機が知られている（特開２０１０−１１５４２６号公報）。この場合、例えば、移動部材の正面に複数の識別情報を周方向に沿って表示し、所定位置に配設された識別情報を遊技者に視認させることで、演出を行うことができる。しかしながら、遊技者の視認性を考慮して、識別情報は一定以上の大きさを確保する必要があるため、識別情報の表示数を多くすると、移動部材が大径化して、配設に必要なスペースが嵩む一方、移動部材を小径化すると、識別情報の表示数が減少する。
Here, a gaming machine including a moving member formed to be rotatable is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-115426). In this case, for example, a plurality of pieces of identification information can be displayed along the circumferential direction on the front surface of the moving member, and the player can visually recognize the identification information arranged at a predetermined position. However, in consideration of the player's visibility, the identification information needs to have a certain size or more. Therefore, if the number of identification information displayed is increased, the moving member becomes larger in diameter and necessary for the arrangement. While the space increases, when the diameter of the moving member is reduced, the number of identification information displayed is reduced.
そこで、本願出願人は、複数の分割部材を連結することで移動部材を形成し、その移動部材に、複数の分割部材が第１の間隔で連結される区間と、第１の間隔よりも狭い間隔の第２の間隔で複数の分割部材が連結される区間とを形成することで、全体を第１の間隔で連結させる場合と比較して、分割部材の数は確保しつつ、それら複数の分割部材の配設に必要なスペースは抑制できる、即ち、各分割部材に識別情報を表示する場合には、識別情報の表示数を確保しつつ、移動部材の配設に必要なスペースを抑制できることに想到した。
Therefore, the applicant of the present application forms a moving member by connecting a plurality of divided members, and a section where the divided members are connected to the moving member at a first interval, and is narrower than the first interval. By forming a section in which a plurality of divided members are connected at a second interval, the number of divided members is ensured as compared with the case where the whole is connected at a first interval, while the plurality of divided members are secured. Space required for disposing the divided members can be suppressed, that is, when displaying the identification information on each divided member, the space necessary for disposing the moving member can be suppressed while ensuring the number of identification information displayed. I came up with it.
しかしながら、複数の分割部材が連結された移動部材に、複数の分割部材が第１の間隔で連結される区間と、第１の間隔よりも狭い間隔の第２の間隔で複数の分割部材が連結される区間とを形成しつつ、かかる移動部材をベース部材に対して変位させることが困難であるという問題点があった。
However, a plurality of divided members are connected to a moving member to which a plurality of divided members are connected, at a section where the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and at a second interval that is narrower than the first interval. There is a problem that it is difficult to displace the moving member with respect to the base member while forming the section to be formed.
これに対し、遊技機Ｆ１では、ベース部材の案内部は、分割部材に作用することで、分割部材どうしの間隔を第１の間隔に設定する第１案内部と、第１の間隔よりも狭い第２の間隔に分割部材どうしの間隔を設定する第２案内部とを備え、駆動手段は、分割部材に係合可能な係合部を有する回転駆動部材を備え、その回転駆動部材が係合部を分割部材に係合させつつ回転されることで、複数の分割部材がベース部材の案内部に沿って変位されるので、分割部材どうしの間隔が広い区間および狭い区間（第１の間隔の区間および第２の間隔の区間）を移動部材に形成しつつ、かかる移動部材をベース部材に対して変位させることができる。
On the other hand, in the gaming machine F1, the guide portion of the base member acts on the divided member, and thereby the first guide portion that sets the interval between the divided members to the first interval is narrower than the first interval. A second guide portion that sets the interval between the divided members at the second interval, and the drive means includes a rotation drive member having an engagement portion that can be engaged with the division member, and the rotation drive member is engaged. Since the plurality of divided members are displaced along the guide portion of the base member by rotating while engaging the portion with the divided member, the interval between the divided members is wide and the narrow interval (the first interval) The moving member can be displaced with respect to the base member while forming the section and the second interval section on the moving member.
遊技機Ｆ１において、前記回転駆動部材には、前記係合部が複数形成されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｆ２。
In the gaming machine F1, the gaming machine F2, wherein the rotation drive member is formed with a plurality of the engaging portions.
遊技機Ｆ２によれば、遊技機Ｆ１の奏する効果に加え、回転駆動部材には、係合部が複数形成されるので、回転駆動部材から移動部材への駆動力の伝達効率の向上を図ることができる。
According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F1, a plurality of engaging portions are formed on the rotation driving member, so that the transmission efficiency of the driving force from the rotation driving member to the moving member is improved. Can do.
遊技機Ｆ１又はＦ２において、前記複数の分割体部材が周方向に無端状に連結されることで前記移動部材が形成され、前記駆動手段は、２の前記回転駆動部材を備え、それら２の回転駆動部材が前記移動部材の周方向に沿って異なる位置に配設されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｆ３。
In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the plurality of divided members are connected endlessly in the circumferential direction to form the moving member, and the driving means includes two rotation driving members, and the two rotations The gaming machine F3, wherein the driving member is disposed at different positions along the circumferential direction of the moving member.
遊技機Ｆ３によれば、遊技機Ｆ１又はＦ２の奏する効果に加え、２の回転駆動部材が移動部材の周方向に沿って異なる位置に配設されるので、回転駆動部材から移動部材へ付与される駆動力をその移動部材の周方向の異なる位置に分散させることができる。これにより、複数の分割部材の一部に駆動力の付与が偏ることを抑制して、移動部材の変位を安定化できる。
According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the two rotation driving members are disposed at different positions along the circumferential direction of the moving member, so that the rotation driving member is applied to the moving member. Can be distributed at different positions in the circumferential direction of the moving member. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the moving member by suppressing the application of the driving force to a part of the plurality of divided members.
遊技機Ｆ３において、前記ベース部材の案内部に沿って変位される前記複数の分割部材の軌道が円形とされると共に、前記２の回転駆動部材が、前記円形の軌道において位相を１８０度異ならせた位置に配設されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｆ４。
In the gaming machine F3, the tracks of the plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member have a circular shape, and the second rotary drive member has a phase difference of 180 degrees in the circular track. A gaming machine F4, which is arranged at a different position.
遊技機Ｆ４によれば、遊技機Ｆ３の奏する効果に加え、ベース部材の案内部に沿って変位される複数の分割部材の軌道が円形とされると共に、２の回転駆動部材が、円形の軌道において位相を１８０度異ならせた位置に配設されるので、移動部材（複数の分割部材）のうちの最も離間された２カ所へ回転駆動部材からの駆動力を付与することができ、その結果、移動部材の変位を安定化できる。
According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, the trajectories of the plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member are circular, and the two rotary drive members are circular trajectories. , The driving force from the rotation driving member can be applied to the two most distant positions of the moving member (plurality of divided members). The displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.
遊技機Ｆ３又はＦ４において、前記２の回転駆動部材は、一方の回転駆動部材の前記係合部が前記分割部材に非係合とされている間は、他方の回転駆動部材の前記係合部が前記分割部材に係合されるように、前記係合部の位相を互いに異ならせて配設されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｆ５。
In the gaming machine F3 or F4, the second rotation drive member is configured such that the engagement portion of the other rotation drive member is disengaged from the engagement member of the one rotation drive member. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the engaging portions are arranged so that the phases thereof are different from each other so that the engaging members are engaged with the divided members.
遊技機Ｆ５によれば、遊技機Ｆ３又はＦ４の奏する効果に加え、２の回転駆動部材は、一方の回転駆動部材の係合部が分割部材に非係合とされている間は、他方の回転駆動部材の係合部が分割部材に係合されるように、係合部の位相を互いに異ならせて配設されるので、一方の回転駆動部材の係合部と他方の回転駆動部材の係合部とが同時にそれぞれ分割部材に非係合されることを回避でき、回転駆動部材から移動部材への駆動力の伝達が断続的となることを抑制できる。これにより、移動部材の変位を安定化できる。
According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3 or F4, the two rotary drive members are in contact with the other while the engaging portion of one rotary drive member is not engaged with the split member. Since the engaging portions of the rotation driving member are arranged to be different from each other so that the engaging portion of the rotation driving member is engaged with the split member, the engagement portion of one rotation driving member and the rotation driving member of the other rotation driving member are arranged. It can be avoided that the engaging portions are simultaneously disengaged from the divided members, and the transmission of the driving force from the rotary drive member to the moving member can be suppressed from being intermittent. Thereby, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.
即ち、本発明のように複数の分割部材が無端状に連結される構成では、回転駆動部材から移動部材への駆動力の伝達が断続的となると、駆動力の伝達および解除に伴って、分割部材どうしの間隔が増減されるため、移動部材全体としての姿勢が不安定となる。
That is, in the configuration in which a plurality of divided members are connected endlessly as in the present invention, if the transmission of the driving force from the rotational driving member to the moving member becomes intermittent, the dividing is accompanied by the transmission and release of the driving force. Since the interval between the members is increased or decreased, the posture of the moving member as a whole becomes unstable.
これに対し、遊技機Ｆ５によれば、一方の回転駆動部材の係合部と他方の回転駆動部材の係合部とのいずれか一方が常に分割部材に係合され、移動部材に常に駆動力が伝達された状態を形成できるので、分割部材どうしの間の間隔を一定に保ちやすくできる。その結果、複数の分割部材が無端状に連結されて形成される移動部材であっても、その姿勢を安定化できる。即ち、その変位を安定化できる。
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F5, either one of the engaging portion of the one rotational driving member and the engaging portion of the other rotational driving member is always engaged with the divided member, and the driving force is always applied to the moving member. Can be formed, so that the interval between the divided members can be easily kept constant. As a result, even if the moving member is formed by connecting a plurality of divided members in an endless manner, the posture can be stabilized. That is, the displacement can be stabilized.
遊技機Ｆ１からＦ５のいずれかにおいて、前記複数の分割部材は、前記回転駆動手段の係合部が係合される被係合部を備え、その被係合部が前記複数の分割部材の軌道における外周側に配設されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｆ６。
In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the plurality of divided members include engaged portions with which the engaging portions of the rotation driving unit are engaged, and the engaged portions are tracks of the plurality of divided members. A gaming machine F6, which is disposed on the outer peripheral side.
遊技機Ｆ６によれば、遊技機Ｆ１からＦ５のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、複数の分割部材は、回転駆動手段の係合部が係合される被係合部を備え、その被係合部が複数の分割部材の軌道における外周側に配設されるので、回転駆動部材の回転量に対する移動部材（複数の分割部材）の回転量を小さくできる。即ち、減速比を小さくできるので、その分、回転駆動部材から移動部材へ付与される駆動トルクを大きくできる。
According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the plurality of divided members include an engaged portion to which the engaging portion of the rotation driving means is engaged, Since the portion is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the track of the plurality of divided members, the amount of rotation of the moving member (the plurality of divided members) relative to the amount of rotation of the rotation drive member can be reduced. That is, since the reduction ratio can be reduced, the drive torque applied from the rotary drive member to the moving member can be increased accordingly.
遊技機Ｆ１からＦ６のいずれかにおいて、前記回転駆動部材は、前記案内部のうちの第１案内部に沿って案内される前記分割部材に前記係合部を係合可能な位置に配設されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｆ７。
In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the rotation driving member is disposed at a position where the engagement portion can be engaged with the divided member guided along the first guide portion of the guide portions. A gaming machine F7 characterized by that.
遊技機Ｆ７によれば、遊技機Ｆ３からＦ６のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、回転駆動部材は、案内部のうちの第１案内部に沿って案内される分割部材、即ち、分割部材どうしの間隔が広くされた状態で案内される分割部材に係合部を係合可能な位置に配設されるので、隣接する分割部材と回転駆動部材との干渉を抑制でき、その分、回転駆動部材の直径を大きくすることができる。その結果、回転駆動部材から移動部材へ付与される駆動トルクを大きくできる。
According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the rotation drive member is a divided member guided along the first guide portion of the guide portions, that is, between the divided members. Since the engaging portion is disposed at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged with the divided member guided in a state where the interval is widened, interference between the adjacent divided member and the rotation driving member can be suppressed, and accordingly, the rotation driving member. The diameter of can be increased. As a result, the driving torque applied from the rotary drive member to the moving member can be increased.
遊技機Ｆ３からＦ７のいずれかにおいて、前記ベース部材の案内部は、その案内部に沿って変位される分割部材に作用することで、前記分割部材どうしの間隔を前記第１の間隔または第２の間隔から前記第２の間隔または第１の間隔へ遷移させる第３案内部を備え、前記回転駆動部材は、前記案内部のうちの第３案内部に沿って案内される前記分割部材に前記係合部を係合可能な位置に配設されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｆ８。
In any one of the gaming machines F3 to F7, the guide portion of the base member acts on the split member displaced along the guide portion, thereby changing the interval between the split members to the first interval or the second interval. A third guide portion that transitions from the interval to the second interval or the first interval, and the rotation driving member is guided to the divided member guided along the third guide portion of the guide portions. A gaming machine F8, wherein the engaging portion is disposed at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged.
遊技機Ｆ８によれば、遊技機Ｆ１からＦ７のいずれかに記載の遊技機において、回転駆動部材は、案内部のうちの第３案内部に沿って案内される分割部材、即ち、隣接する分割部材との間隔が第１の間隔または第２の間隔から第２の間隔または第１の間隔へ遷移されている分割部材に係合部を係合可能な位置に配設されるので、案内部（第３案内部）から比較的大きな反力を受ける分割部材を回転駆動部材により直接駆動することができる。その結果、複数の分割部材が連結されることで形成される移動部材が途中で屈曲することを抑制して、その移動部材の変位の安定化を図ることができる。
According to the gaming machine F8, in the gaming machine according to any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the rotation driving member is a divided member guided along the third guide portion of the guide portions, that is, adjacent divided portions. Since the engagement portion is disposed at a position where the engagement portion can be engaged with the divided member whose interval with the member is changed from the first interval or the second interval to the second interval or the first interval, the guide portion The split member that receives a relatively large reaction force from the (third guide portion) can be directly driven by the rotary drive member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the bending of the moving member formed by connecting the plurality of divided members in the middle, and to stabilize the displacement of the moving member.
遊技機Ｆ１からＦ８のいずれかにおいて、前記分割部材は、前記案内部に沿って変位される本体部材と、その本体部材に一端が回転可能に連結されると共に隣接する分割部材の本体部材に他端がスライド可能に連結されるリンク部材とを備え、前記リンク部材の一端および他端が前記本体部材および隣接する分割部材の本体部材に対してそれぞれ回転およびスライドされることで、前記分割部材および隣接する分割部材の間隔が増減され、前記回転駆動部材の係合部は、前記分割部材の本体部材であって、前記隣接する分割部材のリンク部材の他端がスライド可能に連結される部位よりも前記リンク部材の一端が回転可能に連結される部位に近い位置に係合されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｆ９。
In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the split member includes a main body member that is displaced along the guide portion, one end of the main body member that is rotatably connected to the main body member, and another main body member of the adjacent split member. A link member whose ends are slidably coupled, and one end and the other end of the link member are respectively rotated and slid with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent divided member, The interval between the adjacent divided members is increased or decreased, and the engaging portion of the rotation driving member is a main body member of the divided member, and the other end of the link member of the adjacent divided member is slidably connected to the part. The game machine F9 is characterized in that one end of the link member is engaged at a position close to a portion where the one end of the link member is rotatably connected.
遊技機Ｆ９によれば、遊技機Ｆ１からＦ８のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、分割部材が、案内部に沿って変位される本体部材と、その本体部材に一端が回転可能に連結されると共に隣接する分割部材の本体部材に他端がスライド可能に連結されるリンク部材とを備え、リンク部材の一端および他端が本体部材および隣接する分割部材の本体部材に対してそれぞれ回転およびスライドされることで、分割部材および隣接する分割部材の間隔が増減され、回転駆動部材の係合部は、分割部材の本体部材であって、隣接する分割部材のリンク部材の他端がスライド可能に連結される部位よりもリンク部材の一端が回転可能に連結される部位に近い位置に係合されるので、分割部材の本体部材が回転駆動部材によって駆動され、案内部に沿って変位される際に、その本体部材の変位を隣接する分割部材の本体部材へリンク部材を介して伝達しやすくすることができる。その結果、移動部材の変位の安定化を図ることができる。
According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the split member is connected to the main body member displaced along the guide portion, and one end of the main body member is rotatably connected to the main body member. A link member whose other end is slidably connected to the main body member of the adjacent divided member, and one end and the other end of the link member are rotated and slid with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent divided member, respectively. Thus, the interval between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased, and the engaging portion of the rotation drive member is the main body member of the divided member, and the other end of the link member of the adjacent divided member is slidably connected. Since the one end of the link member is engaged at a position closer to the portion where the link member is rotatably connected than the portion to be rotated, the main body member of the split member is driven by the rotation drive member and displaced along the guide portion When that can be easily transmitted through the body member to the link member of divided member adjacent the displacement of the body member. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the displacement of the moving member.
遊技機Ｆ４又はＦ５において、前記複数の分割部材の軌道である円形と同心に配設されると共に前記２の回転駆動部材にそれぞれ歯合される駆動歯車を備えることを特徴とする遊技機Ｆ１０。
In the gaming machine F4 or F5, the gaming machine F10 is provided with driving gears arranged concentrically with a circle that is a track of the plurality of divided members and respectively meshed with the two rotary driving members.
遊技機Ｆ１０によれば、遊技機Ｆ４又はＦ５の奏する効果に加え、２の回転駆動部材にそれぞれ歯合される駆動歯車を備えるので、駆動歯車を回転させることで、２の回転駆動部材を同期された状態で回転させることができる。その結果、移動部材の回転を安定化させることができる。この場合、駆動歯車は、複数の分割部材の軌道である円形と同心に配設されるので、駆動歯車および２の回転駆動部材を、ベース部材の正面視において、移動部材（複数の分割部材）の移動軌跡の外周よりも内方に配設できる。即ち、駆動歯車および２の回転駆動部材が移動部材の外形よりも外方に突出されないので、その分、小型化を図ることができる。
According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F4 or F5, since the driving gears meshed with the two rotational driving members are provided, the two rotational driving members are synchronized by rotating the driving gears. It can be rotated in the state where it is done. As a result, the rotation of the moving member can be stabilized. In this case, since the drive gear is disposed concentrically with the circular shape that is the track of the plurality of divided members, the drive gear and the two rotational drive members are movable members (a plurality of divided members) in the front view of the base member. It can arrange | position inward rather than the outer periphery of this movement locus | trajectory. That is, the drive gear and the rotary drive member 2 are not protruded outward from the outer shape of the moving member, so that the size can be reduced accordingly.
＜発光ユニット８００を一例とする発明の概念について＞
光透過性材料から板状に形成される光透過部材と、その光透過部材の側端面へ光を照射する光照射手段とを備えた遊技機において、前記光照射手段から前記光透過部材の側端面までの空間を区画する区画部材を備え、前記区画部材は、前記空間を区画する内壁の少なくとも一部が、前記光透過部材の正面に対して非平行かつ非直交とされることを特徴とする遊技機Ｇ１。
<Concept of Invention with Light Emitting Unit 800 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising: a light transmissive member formed in a plate shape from a light transmissive material; and a light irradiating means for irradiating light to a side end surface of the light transmissive member. A partition member that partitions a space to an end surface, wherein the partition member is configured such that at least a part of an inner wall partitioning the space is non-parallel and non-orthogonal with respect to a front surface of the light transmission member. A gaming machine G1 to play.
ここで、光透過性材料から板状に形成される光透過部材と、その光透過部材の側端面へ光を照射する光照射手段とを備えた遊技機が知られている（例えば、特開２００６−２１８０９３号公報）。光透過部材には、複数のドットが凹設されており、側端面から入射された光をドットで反射させることで、正面から出射させることができる。
Here, there is known a gaming machine including a light transmissive member formed in a plate shape from a light transmissive material, and a light irradiating means for irradiating light to a side end surface of the light transmissive member (for example, JP, A 2006-218093). A plurality of dots are recessed in the light transmitting member, and the light incident from the side end face can be emitted from the front by reflecting the light with the dots.
しかしながら、上述した従来の遊技機では、光透過部材へ入射される光が光照射手段の光軸に沿う領域に偏りやすいという問題点があり、光透過部材の照度を均一とすることが困難であった。即ち、光照射手段から光透過部材の側端面に入射される光が光照射手段の光軸に沿う方向に集中するため、光透過部材の正面に沿って広がる方向（光透過部材の板厚方向と光照射手段の光軸方向との両者にそれぞれ直交する方向）へ光が進行し難くかった。
However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem that light incident on the light transmitting member is easily biased to a region along the optical axis of the light irradiating means, and it is difficult to make the illuminance of the light transmitting member uniform. there were. That is, since the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmissive member from the light irradiating means is concentrated in the direction along the optical axis of the light irradiating means, the direction spreading along the front of the light transmissive member (the thickness direction of the light transmissive member It was difficult for light to travel in the direction orthogonal to both the optical axis direction of the light irradiation means and the optical axis direction of the light irradiation means.
これに対し、遊技機Ｇ１によれば、前記光照射手段から前記光透過部材の側端面までの空間を区画する区画部材を備え、区画部材は、空間を区画する内壁の少なくとも一部が、光透過部材の正面に対して非平行かつ非直交とされるので、光照射手段から照射され区画部材の内壁で反射した光を、光透過部材の正面に沿って広がる方向（光透過部材の板厚方向と光照射手段の光軸方向との両者にそれぞれ直交する方向）へ進行させやすくできる。よって、光透過部材へ入射される光が光照射手段の光軸に沿う領域に偏ることを抑制できる。その結果、光透過部材の照度を均一にしやすくできる。
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the partition member is provided with a partition member that partitions the space from the light irradiation means to the side end surface of the light transmission member, and at least a part of the inner wall that partitions the space is light Since it is non-parallel and non-orthogonal to the front surface of the transmission member, the light irradiated from the light irradiation means and reflected by the inner wall of the partition member spreads along the front surface of the light transmission member (the thickness of the light transmission member) Direction and directions orthogonal to both the optical axis direction of the light irradiation means). Therefore, it can suppress that the light which injects into a light transmissive member is biased to the area | region in alignment with the optical axis of a light irradiation means. As a result, the illuminance of the light transmission member can be easily made uniform.
遊技機Ｇ１において、前記区画部材は、前記光照射手段と前記光透過部材の側端面との間に介設されると共に前記光照射手段に対応する位置に開口部が開口されるベース部材を備え、そのベース部材の開口部の内壁が前記光照射手段から前記光透過部材の側端面までの空間を区画することを特徴とする遊技機Ｇ２。
In the gaming machine G1, the partition member includes a base member that is interposed between the light irradiation unit and a side end surface of the light transmission member and has an opening at a position corresponding to the light irradiation unit. The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the inner wall of the opening of the base member defines a space from the light irradiation means to the side end surface of the light transmission member.
遊技機Ｇ２によれば、遊技機Ｇ１の奏する効果に加え、区画部材は、光照射手段と光透過部材の側端面との間に介設されると共に光照射手段に対応する位置に開口部が開口されるベース部材を備え、そのベース部材の開口部の内壁が光照射手段から光透過部材の側端面までの空間を区画するので、区画部材（開口部の内壁）で光を反射させて、光透過部材の板厚方向と光照射手段の光軸とに直交する方向へ光を進行させることで、光透過部材へ入射される光の偏りを抑制する構造を簡素化できる。よって、製品コストを削減できる。
According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the partition member is interposed between the light irradiating means and the side end surface of the light transmitting member and has an opening at a position corresponding to the light irradiating means. Since the inner wall of the base member is provided with an opening, and the inner wall of the opening of the base member partitions the space from the light irradiation means to the side end surface of the light transmitting member, the light is reflected by the partition member (the inner wall of the opening), By making the light travel in a direction perpendicular to the plate thickness direction of the light transmitting member and the optical axis of the light irradiating means, the structure for suppressing the bias of the light incident on the light transmitting member can be simplified. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced.
遊技機Ｇ２において、前記光照射手段の光軸方向視において、前記ベース部材および前記開口部がそれぞれ正面視矩形に形成されると共に前記開口部が各辺を前記ベース部材の各辺に対し平行とする姿勢で配設され、前記光透過部材が前記開口部に対して傾斜する姿勢で配設されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｇ３。
In the gaming machine G2, the base member and the opening are each formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the optical axis direction of the light irradiating means, and the opening is parallel to each side of the base member. A gaming machine G3, wherein the gaming machine G3 is disposed in such a posture that the light transmitting member is inclined with respect to the opening.
遊技機Ｇ３によれば、遊技機Ｇ２の奏する効果に加え、光照射手段の光軸方向視において、ベース部材および開口部がそれぞれ正面視矩形に形成されると共に開口部が各辺をベース部材の各辺に対し平行とする姿勢で配設され、光透過部材が開口部に対して傾斜する姿勢で配設されるので、開口部の内壁を光透過部材の正面に対して非平行かつ非直交とすることを可能としつつ、区画部材（ベース部材）の成形性を確保することができる。即ち、ベース部材を樹脂材料から成形する場合には、開口部が各辺をベース部材の各辺に対し平行とする姿勢で配設されることで、ベース部材の肉厚を均等として、その分、ヒケや反り、充填不良などを抑制できる。その結果、成形性を確保できる。
According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, the base member and the opening are each formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the optical axis direction of the light irradiating means, and the opening is formed on each side of the base member. Since the light transmission member is disposed in a posture that is parallel to each side and the light transmission member is inclined with respect to the opening, the inner wall of the opening is non-parallel and non-orthogonal to the front surface of the light transmission member. It is possible to ensure the moldability of the partition member (base member). That is, when the base member is molded from a resin material, the openings are arranged in such a posture that each side is parallel to each side of the base member, so that the thickness of the base member is equalized. In addition, sink marks, warpage, and filling failure can be suppressed. As a result, moldability can be secured.
遊技機Ｇ２において、前記ベース部材は、前記光照射手段の光軸方向視において、前記開口部の内壁の少なくとも一部が凸の湾曲面として形成されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｇ４。
In the gaming machine G2, the gaming machine G4 is characterized in that at least a part of the inner wall of the opening is formed as a convex curved surface when the base member is viewed in the optical axis direction of the light irradiation means.
遊技機Ｇ４によれば、遊技機Ｇ２の奏する効果に加え、ベース部材は、光照射手段の光軸方向視において、開口部の内壁の少なくとも一部が凸の湾曲面として形成されるので、光照射手段から照射され光を凸の湾曲面で反射させて分散させやすくできる。よって、その分、光透過部材の正面に沿って広がる方向（光透過部材の板厚方向と光照射手段の光軸方向との両者にそれぞれ直交する方向）へ光を進行させやすくでき、光透過部材へ入射される光が光照射手段の光軸に沿う領域に偏ることを抑制できる。その結果、光透過部材の照度を均一にしやすくできる。
According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, the base member is formed as a convex curved surface at least part of the inner wall of the opening when viewed in the optical axis direction of the light irradiation means. Light emitted from the irradiation means can be easily reflected and dispersed by a convex curved surface. Therefore, the light can easily travel in the direction extending along the front surface of the light transmitting member (the direction perpendicular to both the plate thickness direction of the light transmitting member and the optical axis direction of the light irradiating means). It can suppress that the light which injects into a member is biased to the area | region which follows the optical axis of a light irradiation means. As a result, the illuminance of the light transmission member can be easily made uniform.
遊技機Ｇ２において、前記ベース部材は、前記光照射手段の光軸方向視において、前記開口部の内壁の少なくとも一部が凹の湾曲面として形成されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｇ５。
In the gaming machine G2, the base member is a gaming machine G5 in which at least a part of the inner wall of the opening is formed as a concave curved surface when viewed in the optical axis direction of the light irradiation means.
遊技機Ｇ５によれば、遊技機Ｇ２の奏する効果に加え、ベース部材は、光照射手段の光軸方向視において、開口部の内壁の少なくとも一部が凹の湾曲面として形成されるので、光照射手段から照射され光を凹の湾曲面で反射させることで、一方向へ集光させることができる。即ち、集光の方向を、光透過部材の正面に沿って広がる方向（光透過部材の板厚方向と光照射手段の光軸方向との両者にそれぞれ直交する方向）に偏倚させることで、光透過部材へ入射される光が光照射手段の光軸に沿う領域に偏ることを抑制できる。その結果、光透過部材の照度を均一にしやすくできる。
According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, the base member is formed as a concave curved surface at least part of the inner wall of the opening when viewed in the optical axis direction of the light irradiation means. By reflecting the light irradiated from the irradiation means with the concave curved surface, it can be condensed in one direction. That is, the light condensing direction is deviated in a direction extending along the front surface of the light transmitting member (a direction orthogonal to both the plate thickness direction of the light transmitting member and the optical axis direction of the light irradiation means), thereby reducing the light. It can suppress that the light which injects into a transmissive member is biased to the area | region in alignment with the optical axis of a light irradiation means. As a result, the illuminance of the light transmission member can be easily made uniform.
遊技機Ｇ５において、前記光照射手段を少なくとも３以上備えると共に、それら光照射手段が所定間隔を隔てつつ列設され、前記ベース部材には、前記複数の光照射手段にそれぞれ対応する位置に前記開口部が開口され、列設方向一側の端部に位置する前記開口部と列設方向他側の端部に位置する前記開口部とが、前記凹の中心を互いに反対側に向けた姿勢で配設されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｇ６。
In the gaming machine G5, at least three or more of the light irradiating means are provided, the light irradiating means are arranged at predetermined intervals, and the base member has the opening at a position corresponding to each of the plurality of light irradiating means. The opening is located at the end on one side in the row direction and the opening located at the end on the other side in the row direction is such that the centers of the recesses face each other. A gaming machine G6 that is arranged.
遊技機Ｇ６によれば、遊技機Ｇ５の奏する効果に加え、光照射手段を少なくとも３以上備えると共に、それら光照射手段が所定間隔を隔てつつ列設され、ベース部材には、複数の光照射手段にそれぞれ対応する位置に開口部が開口され、列設方向一側の端部に位置する開口部と列設方向他側の端部に位置する開口部とが、凹の中心を互いに反対側に向けた姿勢で配設されるので、光透過部材の照度を全体に均一にしやすくできる。
According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G5, at least three light irradiation means are provided, the light irradiation means are arranged with a predetermined interval, and the base member has a plurality of light irradiation means. The opening is located at a position corresponding to each of the openings, and the opening located at one end in the row direction and the opening located at the other end in the row direction are opposite to each other. Since it is arrange | positioned in the attitude | position which faced, it can make it easy to make the illumination intensity of a light transmissive member uniform on the whole.
即ち、開口部どうしの間の領域では、それら隣接する開口部のそれぞれから光が進行される（即ち、２の光照射手段からの光が到達される）ため、光が重なり、照度が確保されやすい。一方、列設方向一側または他側の端部に位置する開口部よりも外の領域では、その開口部からの光のみが進行される（即ち、１の光照射手段からの光のみが到達される）ため、照度の確保が困難となる。
That is, in the region between the openings, light travels from each of the adjacent openings (that is, the light from the two light irradiation means reaches), so that the light overlaps and the illuminance is secured. Cheap. On the other hand, in a region outside the opening located at one end or the other end in the row direction, only light from the opening travels (that is, only light from one light irradiation means reaches). Therefore, it is difficult to ensure the illuminance.
これに対し、遊技機Ｇ６では、列設方向一側の端部に位置する開口部と列設方向他側の端部に位置する開口部とが、凹の中心を互いに反対側に向けた姿勢で配設されるので、集光させた光を、各開口部よりも外の領域へ向けて進行させることができ、照度を確保できる。その結果、光透過部材の照度を全体に均一にしやすくできる。
On the other hand, in the gaming machine G6, the opening located at the end on one side in the row direction and the opening located at the end on the other side in the row direction are oriented such that the centers of the recesses face each other. Therefore, the condensed light can be advanced toward a region outside each opening, and the illuminance can be ensured. As a result, the illuminance of the light transmitting member can be easily made uniform throughout.
＜上部昇降ユニット３００を一例とする発明の概念について＞
駆動力を発生する駆動手段と、その駆動手段の駆動力により変位される変位部材とを有する変位ユニットを一対備え、前記一対の変位ユニットが前記変位部材の変位軌跡を隣り合わせて配設された遊技機において、前記駆動手段の駆動力により変位される際の慣性力により前記変位部材が隣接する変位部材に近接することを抑制する抑制手段を備えることを特徴とする遊技機Ｈ１。
<Concept of the Invention Taking the Upper Lifting Unit 300 as an Example>
A game comprising a pair of displacement units each having a drive means for generating a drive force and a displacement member displaced by the drive force of the drive means, wherein the pair of displacement units are arranged adjacent to each other with a displacement locus of the displacement member. The gaming machine H1 is characterized by comprising suppression means for suppressing the displacement member from approaching an adjacent displacement member by an inertial force when being displaced by a driving force of the driving means.
ここで、駆動力を発生する駆動手段と、その駆動手段の駆動力により変位される変位部材とを有する変位ユニットを一対備え、一対の変位ユニットが変位部材の変位軌跡を隣り合わせて配設された遊技機が知られている（例えば、特開２０１０−１１８９９号公報）。かかる遊技機によれば、両変位部材を並設させつつ同方向へ変位させる演出や、一方の変位部材のみを変位させる演出を行うことができる。
Here, a pair of displacement units each having a driving unit that generates a driving force and a displacement member that is displaced by the driving force of the driving unit is provided, and the pair of displacement units are disposed adjacent to each other with a displacement locus of the displacement member. A gaming machine is known (for example, JP 2010-11899 A). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to produce an effect of displacing both displacement members side by side in the same direction, or an effect of displacing only one displacement member.
しかしながら、上述した従来の遊技機では、駆動手段から駆動力を受けて変位を開始する際に、慣性力の影響により変位部材が隣接する変位部材に近接する方向へ変位して、変位部材どうしが衝突する恐れがあるという問題点があった。変位部材の衝突を回避するために、変位ユニットどうしの間隔を大きくした場合には、配設スペースが嵩むだけでなく、例えば、両変位部材を並設させつつ同方向へ変位させる際の一体感を形成することができない。
However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the displacement is started by receiving the driving force from the driving means, the displacement member is displaced in the direction close to the adjacent displacement member due to the influence of the inertial force, and the displacement members are separated from each other. There was a problem that there was a risk of collision. When the interval between the displacement units is increased in order to avoid the collision of the displacement members, not only the arrangement space is increased, but, for example, a sense of unity when the displacement members are displaced in the same direction while being arranged in parallel. Can not form.
これに対し、遊技機Ｈ１によれば、駆動手段の駆動力により変位される際の慣性力により変位部材が隣接する変位部材に近接することを抑制する抑制手段を備えるので、変位部材どうしの衝突を抑制することができる。その結果、変位ユニットどうしの間隔を小さくできるので、配設スペースを抑制できると共に、例えば、両変位部材を並設させつつ同方向へ変位させる際の一体感を形成することができる。
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, since the displacement member is prevented from coming close to the adjacent displacement member by the inertial force when being displaced by the driving force of the drive unit, the collision between the displacement members is provided. Can be suppressed. As a result, since the interval between the displacement units can be reduced, the arrangement space can be suppressed and, for example, a sense of unity can be formed when the displacement members are displaced in the same direction while being arranged in parallel.
遊技機Ｈ１において、前記変位ユニットは、前記駆動手段の駆動力により回転されるピニオンと、そのピニオンが歯合されると共に前記変位部材が配設されるラックと、そのラックの直線変位を、前記直線変位の方向と直交する方向への変位を許容した状態で案内する案内部材を備え、前記抑制手段は、前記直線変位の方向と直交する方向への前記ラックの変位を規制することで、前記変位部材が隣接する変位部材に近接することを抑制することを特徴とする遊技機Ｈ２。
In the gaming machine H1, the displacement unit includes a pinion rotated by a driving force of the driving means, a rack in which the pinion is engaged and the displacement member is disposed, and a linear displacement of the rack. A guide member that guides in a state in which displacement in a direction orthogonal to the direction of linear displacement is allowed, and the suppression means regulates displacement of the rack in a direction orthogonal to the direction of linear displacement, A gaming machine H2 that suppresses the proximity of a displacement member to an adjacent displacement member.
ここで、駆動手段の駆動力により回転されるピニオンと、そのピニオンが歯合されると共に変位部材が配設されるラックとを備えることで、変位部材を直線変位させることができる。即ち、変位部材の変位軌跡を平行に隣り合わせることができる。よって、隣り合う変位部材の変位に一体感を形成しやすくできる。この場合、各部品の寸法公差や組み付け公差を考慮して、案内部材は、ラックの直線変位を、前記直線変位の方向と直交する方向への変位を許容した状態で案内する必要がある。しかしながら、直性変位の方向と直交する方向への変位が許容されていると、ピニオンが回転され、ラックの直線変位が開始される際に、慣性力の影響によりラックに回転力が発生する結果、直線変位の方向と直交する方向へ変位部材が変位される。そのため、変位部材が隣接する変位部材に近接して衝突する恐れがある。
Here, the displacement member can be linearly displaced by including the pinion rotated by the driving force of the drive means and the rack in which the pinion is engaged and the displacement member is disposed. That is, the displacement trajectories of the displacement member can be adjacent to each other in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to easily form a sense of unity in the displacement of adjacent displacement members. In this case, considering the dimensional tolerance and assembly tolerance of each component, the guide member needs to guide the linear displacement of the rack in a state in which the displacement in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement is allowed. However, if a displacement in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the straight displacement is allowed, the rotation of the pinion is caused by the inertial force when the pinion is rotated and the linear displacement of the rack is started. The displacement member is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the direction of linear displacement. For this reason, the displacement member may collide in the vicinity of the adjacent displacement member.
これに対し、遊技機Ｈ２によれば、遊技機Ｈ１の奏する効果に加え、抑制手段が、直線変位の方向と直交する方向へのラックの変位を規制することで、変位部材が隣接する変位部材に近接することを抑制するので、変位部材が隣接する変位部材に衝突することを抑制することができる。
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, the restraining means regulates the displacement of the rack in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement, so that the displacement member is adjacent to the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from colliding with the adjacent displacement member.
遊技機Ｈ２において、前記抑制手段は、前記ピニオンから径方向外方に張り出して形成される当接部と、その当接部が当接可能に前記ラックに形成される被当接部とを備え、前記当接部が前記被当接部に当接されることで、前記直線変位の方向と直交する方向への前記ラックの変位を規制することを特徴とする遊技機Ｈ３。
In the gaming machine H2, the suppression means includes a contact portion that projects radially outward from the pinion, and a contacted portion that is formed on the rack so that the contact portion can contact. The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that displacement of the rack in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the linear displacement is regulated by the contact portion being in contact with the contacted portion.
ここで、駆動手段の駆動力により回転されるピニオンと、そのピニオンが歯合されると共に変位部材が配設されるラックとを備えることで、変位部材を直線変位させることができる。即ち、変位部材の変位軌跡を平行に隣り合わせることができる。よって、隣り合う変位部材の変位に一体感を形成しやすくできる。この場合、ピニオンが回転され、ラックの直線変位が開始される際には、慣性力の影響により、ラックに回転力が作用される結果、直線変位の方向と直交する方向へ変位部材が変位される。そのため、変位部材が隣接する変位部材に近接する方向へ変位され衝突する恐れがある。
Here, the displacement member can be linearly displaced by including the pinion rotated by the driving force of the drive means and the rack in which the pinion is engaged and the displacement member is disposed. That is, the displacement trajectories of the displacement member can be adjacent to each other in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to easily form a sense of unity in the displacement of adjacent displacement members. In this case, when the pinion is rotated and the linear displacement of the rack is started, the displacement member is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the linear displacement as a result of the rotational force acting on the rack due to the influence of inertial force. The Therefore, the displacement member may be displaced in the direction of approaching the adjacent displacement member and may collide.
これに対し、遊技機Ｈ３によれば、遊技機Ｈ２の奏する効果に加え、抑制手段が、ピニオンから径方向外方に張り出して形成される当接部と、その当接部が当接可能にラックに形成される被当接部とを備え、当接部が被当接部に当接されることで、直線変位の方向と直交する方向へのラックの変位を規制するので、変位部材が隣接する変位部材に衝突することを抑制することができる。
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H2, the restraining means can be brought into contact with the abutting portion formed by projecting radially outward from the pinion. A contact portion formed on the rack, and the contact portion is in contact with the contact portion, thereby restricting the displacement of the rack in a direction orthogonal to the linear displacement direction. It can suppress colliding with the adjacent displacement member.
遊技機Ｈ３において、前記ラックの前記直線変位の位置に応じて、前記当接部と前記被当接部との間の距離が異なることを特徴とする遊技機Ｈ４。
In the gaming machine H3, the gaming machine H4 is characterized in that a distance between the abutting portion and the abutted portion varies depending on the position of the linear displacement of the rack.
遊技機Ｈ４によれば、遊技機Ｈ３の奏する効果に加え、ラックの直線変位の位置に応じて、当接部と被当接部との間の距離が異なるので、例えば、変位部材の変位（ピニオンの回転）を開始する位置や変位部材の変位速度（ピニオンの回転速度）を変化させる位置（即ち、変位部材（ラック）が慣性力の影響を受けやすい位置）では、当接部を被当接部に当接させて、変位部材が隣接する変位部材に衝突することを抑制できる一方、例えば、変位部材の変位（ピニオンの回転）が定常状態となる位置では、案内部材による直線変位の方向と直交する方向へのラックの変位の許容量を確保して、寸法公差や組立公差を許容しやすくすることで、駆動手段の負荷を抑制すると共に、ラックの直線変位を安定化できる。即ち、変位部材どうしの衝突の防止と、案内部材に対するラックのがたつきの確保とを両立できる。
According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H3, the distance between the contact portion and the contacted portion varies depending on the position of the linear displacement of the rack. At the position where the rotation of the pinion is started and the position where the displacement speed of the displacement member (the rotation speed of the pinion) is changed (that is, the position where the displacement member (rack) is easily affected by the inertial force), For example, at a position where the displacement of the displacement member (rotation of the pinion) is in a steady state, it is possible to suppress the collision of the displacement member with the adjacent displacement member by contacting the contact portion. By securing an allowable amount of displacement of the rack in a direction orthogonal to the direction and easily allowing dimensional tolerance and assembly tolerance, it is possible to suppress the load on the driving means and stabilize the linear displacement of the rack. That is, it is possible to achieve both prevention of collision between the displacement members and securing of rattling of the rack with respect to the guide member.
遊技機Ｈ３又はＨ４において、前記当接部は、少なくとも前記被当接部との間の距離が最少となる部分が、前記ピニオンの歯先よりも径方向外方に張り出して形成され、前記ラックの側面に当接可能に形成されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｈ５。
In the gaming machine H3 or H4, the abutment portion is formed such that at least a portion having a minimum distance from the abutted portion is formed to project outward in a radial direction from the tooth tip of the pinion, and the rack A gaming machine H5 that is formed so as to be able to abut on the side surface of the game machine.
遊技機Ｈ５によれば、遊技機Ｈ３又はＨ４の奏する効果に加え、当接部は、少なくとも被当接部との間の距離が最少となる部分が、ピニオンの歯先よりも径方向外方に張り出され、ラックの側面に当接可能に形成されるので、ラックがピニオンの回転軸方向にがたつくことを抑制できる。特に、当接部と被当接部との間の距離が最少となる部分は、変位部材（ラック）が慣性力の影響を受けやすい位置に設定され、ラックのがたつきが発生しやすいため、当接部がラックの側面に当接可能に形成されることが特に有効となる。
According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H3 or H4, at least the portion where the distance between the abutting portion and the abutted portion is minimized is radially outward from the tip of the pinion. Since the rack is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the side surface of the rack, it is possible to suppress the rack from rattling in the direction of the rotation axis of the pinion. In particular, the portion where the distance between the abutting portion and the abutted portion is the minimum is set at a position where the displacement member (rack) is easily affected by the inertial force, and rack rattling is likely to occur. It is particularly effective that the contact portion is formed so as to be able to contact the side surface of the rack.
遊技機Ｈ１において、前記変位ユニットは、前記駆動手段の駆動力により回転されるピニオンと、そのピニオンが歯合されると共に前記変位部材が配設されるラックと、そのラックの直線変位を、前記直線変位の方向と直交する方向への変位を許容した状態で案内する案内部材を備え、前記抑制手段は、前記案内部材による前記直線変位の方向と直交する方向であって隣接するラックと離間する方向へ前記ラックを偏倚させることで、前記変位部材が隣接する変位部材に近接することを抑制することを特徴とする遊技機Ｈ６。
In the gaming machine H1, the displacement unit includes a pinion rotated by a driving force of the driving means, a rack in which the pinion is engaged and the displacement member is disposed, and a linear displacement of the rack. A guide member that guides in a state in which displacement in a direction perpendicular to the direction of linear displacement is allowed, and the restraining means is in a direction perpendicular to the direction of linear displacement by the guide member and is separated from an adjacent rack; The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the displacement member is prevented from approaching an adjacent displacement member by biasing the rack in a direction.
ここで、駆動手段の駆動力により回転されるピニオンと、そのピニオンが歯合されると共に変位部材が配設されるラックとを備えることで、変位部材を直線変位させることができる。即ち、変位部材の変位軌跡を平行に隣り合わせることができる。よって、隣り合う変位部材の変位に一体感を形成しやすくできる。この場合、各部品の寸法公差や組み付け公差を考慮して、案内部材は、ラックの直線変位を、前記直線変位の方向と直交する方向への変位を許容した状態で案内する必要がある。しかしながら、直性変位の方向と直交する方向への変位が許容されていると、ピニオンが回転され、ラックの直線変位が開始される際に、慣性力の影響によりラックに回転力が発生する結果、直線変位の方向と直交する方向へ変位部材が変位される。そのため、変位部材が隣接する変位部材に近接して衝突する恐れがある。
Here, the displacement member can be linearly displaced by including the pinion rotated by the driving force of the drive means and the rack in which the pinion is engaged and the displacement member is disposed. That is, the displacement trajectories of the displacement member can be adjacent to each other in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to easily form a sense of unity in the displacement of adjacent displacement members. In this case, considering the dimensional tolerance and assembly tolerance of each component, the guide member needs to guide the linear displacement of the rack in a state in which the displacement in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement is allowed. However, if a displacement in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the straight displacement is allowed, the rotation of the pinion is caused by the inertial force when the pinion is rotated and the linear displacement of the rack is started. The displacement member is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the direction of linear displacement. For this reason, the displacement member may collide in the vicinity of the adjacent displacement member.
これに対し、遊技機Ｈ６によれば、遊技機Ｈ１の奏する効果に加え、抑制手段は、案内部材による直線変位の方向と直交する方向であって隣接するラックと離間する方向へラックを偏倚させることで、変位部材が隣接する変位部材に近接することを抑制するので、変位部材が隣接する変位部材に衝突することを抑制することができる。
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, the suppression means biases the rack in a direction perpendicular to the direction of linear displacement by the guide member and away from the adjacent rack. Since it suppresses that a displacement member adjoins the adjacent displacement member by this, it can suppress that a displacement member collides with the adjacent displacement member.
遊技機Ｈ６において、前記ラックの歯面が、前記直線変位の方向に対して平行に形成される平行歯面と、前記直線変位の方向に対して傾斜して形成される傾斜歯面とを備え、前記抑制手段は、前記傾斜歯面に前記ピニオンを歯合させることで、前記案内部材による前記直線変位の方向と直交する方向であって隣接するラックと離間する方向へ前記ラックを偏倚させ、前記変位部材が隣接する変位部材に近接することを抑制するものであることを特徴とする遊技機Ｈ７。
In the gaming machine H6, the tooth surface of the rack includes a parallel tooth surface formed parallel to the linear displacement direction and an inclined tooth surface formed inclined with respect to the linear displacement direction. The restraining means biases the rack in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the linear displacement by the guide member and away from an adjacent rack by engaging the pinion with the inclined tooth surface. A gaming machine H7, wherein the displacement member is prevented from approaching an adjacent displacement member.
遊技機Ｈ６において、前記ピニオンの歯面が、一定の歯径で形成される一定歯面と、その一定歯面よりも歯径が大きくされる大径歯面とを備え、前記抑制手段は、前記大径歯面を前記ラックに歯合させることで、前記案内部材による前記直線変位の方向と直交する方向であって隣接するラックと離間する方向へ前記ラックを偏倚させ、前記変位部材が隣接する変位部材に近接することを抑制するものであることを特徴とする遊技機Ｈ８。
In the gaming machine H6, the tooth surface of the pinion includes a constant tooth surface formed with a constant tooth diameter and a large-diameter tooth surface whose tooth diameter is larger than the constant tooth surface, By engaging the large-diameter tooth surface with the rack, the rack is biased in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the linear displacement by the guide member and away from the adjacent rack, and the displacement member is adjacent. A gaming machine H8 characterized by suppressing proximity to a displacement member.
遊技機Ｈ７又は遊技機Ｈ８によれば、遊技機Ｈ６の奏する効果に加え、ラックの歯面が傾斜歯面を備える、又は、ピニオンの歯面が大径歯面を備え、傾斜歯面にピニオンを歯合させる、又は、大径歯面をラックに歯合させることで、案内部材による直線変位の方向と直交する方向であって隣接するラックと離間する方向へラックを偏倚させることができる、即ち、ラックを隣接するラックから事前に離間させておけるので、慣性力の影響により、ラックが隣接するラックへ近接する場合であっても、変位部材が隣接する変位部材に衝突することを抑制できる。
According to the gaming machine H7 or the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H6, the tooth surface of the rack has an inclined tooth surface, or the tooth surface of the pinion has a large diameter tooth surface, and the pinion on the inclined tooth surface Or by meshing the large-diameter tooth surface with the rack, the rack can be biased in a direction perpendicular to the direction of linear displacement by the guide member and away from the adjacent rack. That is, since the rack can be separated from the adjacent rack in advance, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from colliding with the adjacent displacement member even when the rack is close to the adjacent rack due to the influence of the inertia force. .
また、傾斜歯面にピニオンが歯合された状態、又は、大径歯面がラックに歯合された状態からピニオンが回転されることで、平行歯面にピニオンが歯合された、又は、ラックに一定歯面が歯合された状態からピニオンが回転される場合と比較して、ラックの直線変位が開始される際に、慣性力の影響により発生するラックの回転力を抑制できる。よって、この点からも変位部材が隣接する変位部材に衝突することを抑制できる。
Further, the pinion is meshed with the parallel tooth surface by rotating the pinion from the state where the pinion is meshed with the inclined tooth surface, or the state where the large diameter tooth surface is meshed with the rack, or Compared with the case where the pinion is rotated from the state where the constant tooth surface is engaged with the rack, the rotational force of the rack generated by the influence of the inertial force can be suppressed when the linear displacement of the rack is started. Therefore, it can suppress that a displacement member collides with the adjacent displacement member also from this point.
遊技機Ｈ６において、前記案内部材またはラックの一方から突設される突部と、その突部が摺動可能に挿通され前記案内部材またはラックの他方に形成される案内溝とを備え、前記案内溝は、前記直線変位の方向に沿って延設される直線溝と、前記直線変位の方向に対して傾斜して形成される傾斜溝とを備え、前記抑制手段は、前記傾斜溝に前記突部を位置させることで、前記案内部材による前記直線変位の方向と直交する方向であって隣接するラックと離間する方向へ前記ラックを偏倚させ、前記変位部材が隣接する変位部材に近接することを抑制するものであることを特徴とする遊技機Ｈ９。
The gaming machine H6 includes a protrusion protruding from one of the guide member or the rack, and a guide groove formed in the other of the guide member or rack through which the protrusion is slidably inserted. The groove includes a linear groove extending along the direction of the linear displacement, and an inclined groove formed to be inclined with respect to the direction of the linear displacement. By positioning the portion, the rack is biased in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the linear displacement by the guide member and away from the adjacent rack, and the displacement member approaches the adjacent displacement member. A gaming machine H9 characterized by being suppressed.
遊技機Ｈ９によれば、遊技機Ｈ６の奏する効果に加え、案内溝が傾斜溝を備え、傾斜溝に突部を位置させることで、案内部材による直線変位の方向と直交する方向であって隣接するラックと離間する方向へラックを偏倚させることができる、即ち、ラックを隣接するラックから事前に離間させておけるので、慣性力の影響により、ラックが隣接するラックへ近接する場合であっても、変位部材が隣接する変位部材に衝突することを抑制できる。
According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H6, the guide groove has an inclined groove, and the protrusion is positioned in the inclined groove, so that the direction perpendicular to the direction of the linear displacement by the guide member is adjacent. The rack can be biased in a direction away from the adjacent rack, that is, the rack can be separated from the adjacent rack in advance, so even if the rack is close to the adjacent rack due to the influence of inertial force. The displacement member can be prevented from colliding with an adjacent displacement member.
また、傾斜溝に突部が位置する状態からピニオンが回転されることで、直線溝に突部が位置する状態からピニオンが回転される場合と比較して、ラックの直線変位が開始される際に、慣性力の影響により発生するラックの回転力を抑制できる。よって、この点からも変位部材が隣接する変位部材に衝突することを抑制できる。
In addition, when the pinion is rotated from a state where the protrusion is positioned in the inclined groove, the linear displacement of the rack is started compared to the case where the pinion is rotated from the state where the protrusion is positioned in the linear groove. In addition, the rotational force of the rack generated by the influence of inertial force can be suppressed. Therefore, it can suppress that a displacement member collides with the adjacent displacement member also from this point.
遊技機Ｈ２からＨ９のいずれかにおいて、前記一対の変位ユニットが前記ピニオン及びラックの歯合面を互いに反対側へ向ける姿勢で配設されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｈ１０。
In any one of the gaming machines H2 to H9, the pair of displacement units are arranged in a posture in which the toothed surfaces of the pinion and the rack are directed to opposite sides.
遊技機Ｈ１０によれば、遊技機Ｈ２からＨ９のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、一対の変位ユニットがピニオン及びラックの歯合面を互いに向い合せる姿勢または反対側へ向ける姿勢で配設されるので、慣性力の影響によって変位部材が直線変位の方向と直交する方向へ変位される方向を、一対の変位ユニットにおいて互いに逆方向とできる。即ち、ラックが一方向へ直線変位される場合には変位部材どうしが近接される一方、ラックが他方向へ直線変位される場合には変位部材どうしが離間される。よって、抑制手段は、ラックが一方向へ直線変位される場合のみに対応できれば良く、ラックが一方向へ直線変位される場合と他方向へ直線変位される場合との両方に対応することを不要とできるので、その分、抑制手段の構造を簡素化できる。
According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H2 to H9, the pair of displacement units are arranged in a posture in which the toothed surfaces of the pinion and the rack face each other or in a posture facing the opposite side. The direction in which the displacement member is displaced in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement by the influence of the inertial force can be opposite to each other in the pair of displacement units. That is, when the rack is linearly displaced in one direction, the displacement members are brought close to each other, whereas when the rack is linearly displaced in the other direction, the displacement members are separated from each other. Therefore, the suppression means need only be able to cope with the case where the rack is linearly displaced in one direction, and does not need to cope with both the case where the rack is linearly displaced in one direction and the case where the rack is linearly displaced in the other direction. Therefore, the structure of the suppression means can be simplified accordingly.
＜昇降体３３０を一例とする発明の概念について＞
ベース部材と、そのベース部材に変位可能に配設される変位ユニットとを備え、前記変位ユニットが、第１部材と、その第１部材よりも小さな外形に形成され前記第１部材の一部に重ね合わされる第２部材と、それら第１部材および第２部材の間に介設されると共に前記第２部材よりも大きな外形に形成される介設部材とを備えた遊技機において、前記介設部材が前記第１部材および第２部材の間に介設されると、前記介設部材のうちの前記第１部材に前記第２部材が重ね合わされていない側が前記第１部材側に付勢されるように形成されていることを特徴とする遊技機Ｉ１。
<About the concept of the invention taking the lifting body 330 as an example>
A base member and a displacement unit disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable. The displacement unit has a first member and an outer shape smaller than the first member, and is part of the first member. A gaming machine comprising: a second member to be overlapped; and an interposed member interposed between the first member and the second member and having a larger outer shape than the second member. When a member is interposed between the first member and the second member, the side of the interposed member where the second member is not superimposed on the first member is biased toward the first member. The gaming machine I1 is characterized by being formed as described above.
ここで、ベース部材と、そのベース部材に変位可能に配設される変位ユニットとを備え、変位ユニットが、第１部材と、その第１部材よりも小さな外形に形成され第１部材の一部に重ね合わされる第２部材と、それら第１部材および第２部材の間に介設されると共に第２部材よりも大きな外形に形成される介設部材とを備えた遊技機が知られている（例えば、特開２０１０−１１８９９号公報）。かかる遊技機によれば、変位ユニットは、第１部材に第２部材が重ね合わされていない部分が開放されるので、その開放された部分を利用して（開放された部分をベース部材に対面させることで）、変位ユニットをベース部材に近接させることができる。よって、その分、ベース部材および変位ユニットの配置に必要なスペースを抑制できる。
Here, a base member and a displacement unit disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable are provided, and the displacement unit is formed in a first member and an outer shape smaller than the first member, and is a part of the first member. There is known a gaming machine that includes a second member that is superimposed on each other, and an interposed member that is interposed between the first member and the second member and that has an outer shape larger than the second member. (For example, JP 2010-11899 A). According to such a gaming machine, since the portion where the second member is not superimposed on the first member is opened, the displacement unit uses the opened portion (the opened portion faces the base member). Thus, the displacement unit can be brought close to the base member. Therefore, the space required for the arrangement of the base member and the displacement unit can be reduced accordingly.
しかしながら、上述した従来の遊技機では、第１部材よりも第２部材が小さな外形に形成されるため、その分、第１部材および第２部材の間に介設部材を挟み込める面積が小さくなり、介設部材ががたつきやすいという問題点があった。第２部材が重ね合わされていない部分（開放された部分）において、第１部材に介設部材を締結ねじにより締結固定した場合には、がたつき難くできるが、開放された部分に締結ねじの頭が突出される。そのため、開放された部分を利用できなくなり（即ち、開放された部分をベース部材に対面させると、締結ねじの頭がベース部材に干渉する）、変位ユニットをベース部材に近接させることが阻害される。その結果、ベース部材および変位ユニットの配置に必要なスペースが嵩む。
However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the second member is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the first member, the area in which the interposed member can be sandwiched between the first member and the second member is reduced accordingly. There was a problem that the interposed member was easily rattled. When the interposed member is fastened and fixed to the first member with a fastening screw in the portion where the second member is not overlapped (opened portion), it can be difficult to rattle. The head is protruded. For this reason, the opened portion cannot be used (that is, when the opened portion faces the base member, the head of the fastening screw interferes with the base member), and the displacement unit is prevented from approaching the base member. . As a result, the space required for the arrangement of the base member and the displacement unit increases.
これに対し、遊技機Ｉ１によれば、介設部材が第１部材および第２部材の間に介設されると、介設部材のうちの第１部材に第２部材が重ね合わされていない側が第１部材側に付勢されるように形成されているので、介設部材を第１部材に押し付けることができる。その結果、介設部材のがたつきを抑制できる。
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, when the interposed member is interposed between the first member and the second member, the side where the second member is not superimposed on the first member of the interposed members is Since it is formed so as to be biased toward the first member, the interposed member can be pressed against the first member. As a result, rattling of the interposed member can be suppressed.
また、第２部材が重ね合わされていない部分（開放された部分）において、第１部材に介設部材を締結ねじにより締結固定する必要がなく、締結ねじの頭とベース部材との干渉が発生しないので、変位ユニットをベース部材に近接させることができる。よって、その分、ベース部材および変位ユニットの配置に必要なスペースを抑制できる。
Further, it is not necessary to fasten and fix the interposed member to the first member with the fastening screw in the portion where the second member is not superimposed (opened portion), and interference between the head of the fastening screw and the base member does not occur. Therefore, the displacement unit can be brought close to the base member. Therefore, the space required for the arrangement of the base member and the displacement unit can be reduced accordingly.
遊技機Ｉ１において、前記変位ユニットは、前記第２部材と前記介設部材とを連結する連結手段を備え、前記第２部材は、前記介設部材に当接可能に形成される当接部を備え、前記連結手段によって前記第２部材と前記介設部材とが連結される位置よりも前記第１部材に前記第２部材が重ね合わされていない側に前記当接部が位置することを特徴とする遊技機Ｉ２。
In the gaming machine I1, the displacement unit includes connection means for connecting the second member and the interposed member, and the second member has a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the interposed member. And the abutting portion is located on a side where the second member is not superimposed on the first member from a position where the second member and the interposed member are connected by the connecting means. A gaming machine I2.
遊技機Ｉ２によれば、遊技機Ｉ１の奏する効果に加え、第２部材と介設部材とを連結する連結手段を備え、第２部材は、介設部材に当接可能に形成される当接部を備え、連結手段によって第２部材と介設部材とが連結される位置よりも第１部材に第２部材が重ね合わされていない側に当接部が位置するので、連結手段による第２部材および介設部材の連結に伴って、当接部を介設部材に当接させて、介設部材を第１部材に押し付けることができる。即ち、介設部材のがたつきを抑制する構造を達成しつつ、組み立て作業を簡素化できる。
According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, the gaming machine I2 includes a connecting means for connecting the second member and the interposed member, and the second member is formed so as to be able to contact the interposed member. And the contact portion is located on the side where the second member is not superimposed on the first member from the position where the second member and the interposed member are connected by the connecting means. As the interposition member is connected, the interposition member can be pressed against the first member by bringing the abutment portion into contact with the interposition member. That is, the assembly operation can be simplified while achieving a structure that suppresses rattling of the interposed member.
遊技機Ｉ２において、前記介設部材に螺刻されるめねじと、前記第２部材に穿設される挿通孔と、その挿通孔に挿通され前記めねじに螺合される締結ねじとから前記連結手段が形成されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｉ３。
In the gaming machine I2, the female screw threaded into the interposition member, the insertion hole formed in the second member, and the fastening screw that is inserted into the insertion hole and screwed into the female screw are described above. A gaming machine I3, wherein a connecting means is formed.
遊技機Ｉ３によれば、遊技機Ｉ２の奏する効果に加え、介設部材に螺刻されるめねじと、第２部材に穿設される挿通孔と、その挿通孔に挿通されめねじに螺合される締結ねじとから連結手段が形成されるので、介設部材を第１部材に強固に押し付けることを可能として、介設部材のがたつきをより確実に抑制できる。即ち、締結ねじを締結すると、その締結力により介設部材を第２部材へ引き付けることができる。よって、第２部材の当接部を支点として、その支点（当接部）を挟んで引き付け力が作用される側と反対側を第１部材に押し付けることができる。その結果、介設部材を第１部材に強固に押し付けて、介設部材のがたつきを抑制できる。
According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2, in addition to the female screw threaded in the interposing member, the insertion hole drilled in the second member, and the threaded through the insertion hole. Since the connecting means is formed from the combined fastening screw, it is possible to firmly press the interposed member against the first member, and it is possible to more reliably suppress rattling of the interposed member. That is, when the fastening screw is fastened, the interposed member can be attracted to the second member by the fastening force. Therefore, with the contact portion of the second member as a fulcrum, the side opposite to the side on which the attractive force is applied can be pressed against the first member with the fulcrum (contact portion) interposed therebetween. As a result, the interposed member can be firmly pressed against the first member, and rattling of the interposed member can be suppressed.
遊技機Ｉ２において、前記介設部材を係止可能に形成され前記第２部材に配設される係止部から前記連結手段が形成され、前記係止部は、前記介設部材を前記当接部へ付勢する状態で前記介設部材を係止することを特徴とする遊技機Ｉ４。
In the gaming machine I2, the connecting means is formed from a locking portion that is formed so as to be able to lock the interposed member and is disposed on the second member, and the locking portion contacts the interposed member with the contact portion. The gaming machine I4, wherein the interposition member is locked in a state of being biased toward the portion.
遊技機Ｉ４によれば、遊技機Ｉ２の奏する効果に加え、介設部材を係止可能に形成され第２部材に配設される係止部から連結手段が形成され、係止部は、介設部材を当接部へ付勢する状態で介設部材を係止するので、介設部材を第１部材に強固に押し付けることを可能として、介設部材のがたつきをより確実に抑制できる。即ち、係止部に係止されると介設部材が当接部へ付勢されるので、第２部材の当接部を支点として、その支点（当接部）を挟んで引き付け力が作用される側と反対側を第１部材に押し付けることができる。その結果、介設部材を第１部材に強固に押し付けて、介設部材のがたつきを抑制できる。
According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I2, the connecting means is formed from the locking portion formed so as to be able to lock the interposed member and disposed on the second member. Since the intervention member is locked in a state in which the installation member is biased to the contact portion, it is possible to firmly press the intervention member against the first member, and it is possible to more reliably suppress rattling of the intervention member. . That is, since the interposition member is urged toward the contact portion when the contact portion is engaged with the engagement portion, the attraction force acts on the contact portion of the second member with the fulcrum (contact portion) as a fulcrum. The opposite side to the applied side can be pressed against the first member. As a result, the interposed member can be firmly pressed against the first member, and rattling of the interposed member can be suppressed.
また、変位ユニットの組み立て時には、係止部を介設部材に係止させることで、介設部材と第２部材との連結を行うことができ、締結ねじの挿通孔への挿通や螺合などの締結作業を行う必要がないので、その分、工数を抑制でき、組み立て作業の作業性を向上できる。
Further, when the displacement unit is assembled, the interposition member and the second member can be connected by engaging the interposition member with the interposition member, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole or screwed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the man-hours and improve the workability of the assembly work.
遊技機Ｉ２において、前記第１部材と前記介設部材との間に圧縮変形された状態で介設される圧縮弾性手段により前記連結部材が形成されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｉ５。
In the gaming machine I2, the connecting member is formed by compression elastic means interposed between the first member and the interposed member in a compressed and deformed state.
遊技機Ｉ２において、前記介設部材と前記第２部材との間に引張変形された状態で介設される引張弾性手段により前記連結部材が形成されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｉ６。
In the gaming machine I2, the connecting member is formed by a tensile elastic means that is interposed between the interposed member and the second member in a tensile deformed state.
遊技機Ｉ５又はＩ６によれば、遊技機Ｉ２の奏する効果に加え、第１部材と介設部材との間に圧縮変形された状態で介設される圧縮弾性手段、又は、介設部材と第２部材との間に引張変形された状態で介設される引張弾性手段により連結部材が形成されるので、介設部材を第１部材に強固に押し付けることを可能として、介設部材のがたつきをより確実に抑制できる。即ち、圧縮弾性手段または引張弾性力の弾性回復力により介設部材を第２部材へ引き付けることができる。よって、第２部材の当接部を支点として、その支点（当接部）を挟んで引き付け力が作用される側と反対側を第１部材に押し付けることができる。その結果、介設部材を第１部材に強固に押し付けて、介設部材のがたつきを抑制できる。
According to the gaming machine I5 or I6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2, the compression elastic means interposed between the first member and the interposed member in a compressed state, or the interposed member and the second Since the connecting member is formed by the tensile elastic means that is interposed between the two members in a tensile deformation state, it is possible to firmly press the interposed member against the first member, and the back of the interposed member The sticking can be more reliably suppressed. That is, the interposed member can be attracted to the second member by the compression elastic means or the elastic recovery force of the tensile elastic force. Therefore, with the contact portion of the second member as a fulcrum, the side opposite to the side on which the attractive force is applied can be pressed against the first member with the fulcrum (contact portion) interposed therebetween. As a result, the interposed member can be firmly pressed against the first member, and rattling of the interposed member can be suppressed.
遊技機Ｉ２からＩ６のいずれかにおいて、前記介設部材は、前記第１部材側の面に発光手段が搭載される基板と、その基板の前記第１部材側の面に配設される一側部材とを備え、前記連結手段が前記第２部材と前記介設部材の一側部材とを連結すると共に、前記介設部材の基板が前記当接部材に当接されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｉ７。
In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I6, the interposition member includes a substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted on the surface on the first member side, and one side disposed on the surface on the first member side of the substrate. A game characterized in that the connecting means connects the second member and one side member of the interposed member, and the substrate of the interposed member is in contact with the abutting member. Machine I7.
遊技機Ｉ７によれば、遊技機Ｉ２からＩ６のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、介設部材は、第１部材側の面に発光手段が搭載される基板と、その基板の第１部材側の面に配設される一側部材とを備え、連結手段が第２部材と介設部材の一側部材とを連結すると共に、介設部材の基板が当接部材に当接されるので、第１部材への押し付けをより強固に行うことができ、介設部材のがたつきを抑制できる。即ち、基板は部分的な変形の集中に弱いところ、連結部分に負荷が集中しやすい連結手段による第２部材との連結を一側部材が担うと共に、第２部材へ引き付けられた一側部材の全体で基板を第２部材へ押し付けることができるので、基板への部分的な負荷の集中を抑制できる。その結果、第１部材への押し付けをより強固に行うことができ、介設部材のがたつきを抑制できる。
According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines I2 to I6, the interposition member includes a board on which the light emitting means is mounted on the surface on the first member side, and a first member side of the board. And the connecting means connects the second member and the one side member of the interposed member, and the substrate of the interposed member is in contact with the abutting member. The pressing to one member can be performed more firmly, and shakiness of the interposed member can be suppressed. That is, the substrate is weak against partial concentration of deformation, and the one side member is responsible for connection with the second member by the connecting means in which the load tends to concentrate on the connecting portion, and the one side member attracted to the second member Since the substrate can be pressed against the second member as a whole, the concentration of a partial load on the substrate can be suppressed. As a result, pressing to the first member can be performed more firmly, and rattling of the interposed member can be suppressed.
遊技機Ｉ３からＩ７のいずれかにおいて、前記変位ユニットは、前記第１部材に形成されると共に前記介設部材を保持する保持手段を備え、前記保持手段は、前記当接部に当接される位置よりも前記第２部材に連結される側の位置で前記介設部材を保持することを特徴とする遊技機Ｉ８。
In any one of the gaming machines I3 to I7, the displacement unit includes a holding unit that is formed on the first member and holds the interposed member, and the holding unit is in contact with the contact portion. The gaming machine I8 is characterized in that the intervention member is held at a position closer to the second member than the position.
遊技機Ｉ８によれば、遊技機Ｉ３からＩ７のいずれかにおいて、変位ユニットは、第１部材に形成されると共に介設部材を保持する保持手段を備え、保持手段は、当接部に当接される位置よりも第２部材に連結される側の位置で介設部材を保持するので、連結手段の作用により介設部材が第２部材へ引き付けられた際に、第１部材に第２部材が重ね合わされていない側と反対側において、第１部材と介設部材との間に隙間が形成されることを抑制できる。その結果、変位ユニットの外観の向上を図ることができる。
According to the gaming machine I8, in any of the gaming machines I3 to I7, the displacement unit includes a holding unit that is formed on the first member and holds the interposed member, and the holding unit contacts the contact portion. Since the interposed member is held at the position connected to the second member from the position where the inserted member is attracted to the second member by the action of the connecting means, the second member is attached to the first member. It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the first member and the interposed member on the side opposite to the side where the is not overlapped. As a result, the appearance of the displacement unit can be improved.
遊技機Ｉ８において、前記介設部材は、一面側に発光手段が搭載される基板と、その基板の一面側に配設される一面側部材とを備え、前記保持手段が前記介設部材の一面側部材を保持すると共に、前記介設部材の基板が前記当接部材に当接されることを特徴とする遊技機Ｉ９。
In the gaming machine I8, the interposed member includes a substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted on one surface side, and a one surface side member disposed on one surface side of the substrate, and the holding means is on one surface of the interposed member. A gaming machine I9, wherein a side member is held and a substrate of the interposed member is brought into contact with the contact member.
遊技機Ｉ９によれば、遊技機Ｉ８の奏する効果に加え、介設部材は、一面側に発光手段が搭載される基板と、その基板の一面側に配設される一面側部材とを備え、保持手段が介設部材の一面側部材を保持すると共に、介設部材の基板が当接部材に当接されるので、第１部材への押し付けをより強固に行うことができ、介設部材のがたつきを抑制できる。即ち、基板は部分的な変形の集中に弱いところ、保持される部分に負荷が集中しやすい保持手段による保持を一側部材が担うので、基板への部分的な負荷の集中を抑制できる。その結果、第１部材への押し付けをより強固に行うことができ、介設部材のがたつきを抑制できる。
According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I8, the interposition member includes a substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted on one surface side, and a one surface side member disposed on the one surface side of the substrate, Since the holding means holds the one surface side member of the interposed member and the substrate of the interposed member is brought into contact with the abutting member, the pressing to the first member can be performed more firmly. The rattling can be suppressed. That is, since the substrate is weak against partial deformation concentration, the one-side member bears holding by the holding means that tends to concentrate the load on the held portion, so that partial concentration of the load on the substrate can be suppressed. As a result, pressing to the first member can be performed more firmly, and rattling of the interposed member can be suppressed.
遊技機Ｉ２からＩ９のいずれかにおいて、前記変位ユニットは、前記第１部材に形成される係合部と前記介設部材に形成される被係合部とを備え前記係合部と前記被係合部との係合により前記第１部材に対する前記介設部材の相対回転を規制する係合手段を備え、前記第１部材に前記第２部材が重ね合わされていない領域に前記係合手段が配設されると共に、前記係合部と前記被係合部とが係合された状態では、前記第１部材に前記第２部材が重ね合わされる方向視において、前記係合部と前記被係合部とが少なくとも一部で重なることを特徴とする遊技機Ｉ１０。
In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I9, the displacement unit includes an engaging portion formed on the first member and an engaged portion formed on the interposed member, and the engaging portion and the engaged member. Engaging means for restricting relative rotation of the interposition member with respect to the first member by engagement with a joint portion is provided, and the engaging means is arranged in a region where the second member is not superimposed on the first member. In addition, when the engaging portion and the engaged portion are engaged, the engaging portion and the engaged portion are viewed in the direction in which the second member is superimposed on the first member. A gaming machine I10 characterized in that at least a portion thereof overlaps.
遊技機Ｉ１０によれば、遊技機Ｉ２からＩ９のいずれかにおいて、第１部材に形成される係合部と介設部材に形成される被係合部とを備え係合部と被係合部との係合により第１部材に対する介設部材の相対回転を規制する係合手段を備えるので、相対回転を規制できる分、介設部材のがたつきを抑制できる。
According to the gaming machine I10, in any of the gaming machines I2 to I9, the engaging part and the engaged part are provided with an engaging part formed on the first member and an engaged part formed on the interposed member. Since the engagement means for restricting the relative rotation of the interposed member relative to the first member by the engagement with the first member is provided, rattling of the interposed member can be suppressed to the extent that the relative rotation can be restricted.
この場合、第１部材に第２部材が重ね合わされていない領域に係合手段が配設されると共に、係合部と被係合部とが係合された状態では、第１部材に第２部材が重ね合わされる方向視において、係合部と被係合部とが少なくとも一部で重なるので、これら係合部と被係合部との重なりを利用して、第１部材に第２部材が重ね合わされていない領域における介設部材が、第１部材から離間する方向へ浮き上がることを抑制できる。その結果、介設部材のがたつきを抑制できる。
In this case, the engaging means is disposed in a region where the second member is not superimposed on the first member, and the second member is in contact with the first member when the engaging portion and the engaged portion are engaged. Since the engaging portion and the engaged portion overlap at least partially when viewed in the direction in which the members are overlapped, the second member is used as the first member by utilizing the overlap between the engaging portion and the engaged portion. It can suppress that the interposed member in the area | region where the is not overlapped floats in the direction away from the 1st member. As a result, rattling of the interposed member can be suppressed.
遊技機Ａ１からＡ９，Ｂ１からＢ１１，Ｃ１からＣ１３、Ｄ１からＤ７、Ｅ１からＥ７、Ｆ１からＦ１０、Ｇ１からＧ６、Ｈ１からＨ１０及びＩ１からＩ１０のいずれかにおいて、前記遊技機はスロットマシンであることを特徴とする遊技機Ｋ１。中でも、スロットマシンの基本構成としては、「複数の識別情報からなる識別情報列を動的表示した後に識別情報を確定表示する可変表示手段を備え、始動用操作手段（例えば操作レバー）の操作に起因して識別情報の動的表示が開始され、停止用操作手段（ストップボタン）の操作に起因して、或いは、所定時間経過することにより、識別情報の動的表示が停止され、その停止時の確定識別情報が特定識別情報であることを必要条件として、遊技者に有利な特別遊技状態を発生させる特別遊技状態発生手段とを備えた遊技機」となる。この場合、遊技媒体はコイン、メダル等が代表例として挙げられる。
In the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B11, C1 to C13, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F10, G1 to G6, H1 to H10, and I1 to I10, the gaming machine is a slot machine A gaming machine K1 characterized by that. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.
遊技機Ａ１からＡ９，Ｂ１からＢ１１，Ｃ１からＣ１３、Ｄ１からＤ７、Ｅ１からＥ７、Ｆ１からＦ１０、Ｇ１からＧ６、Ｈ１からＨ１０及びＩ１からＩ１０のいずれかにおいて、前記遊技機はパチンコ遊技機であることを特徴とする遊技機Ｋ２。中でも、パチンコ遊技機の基本構成としては操作ハンドルを備え、その操作ハンドルの操作に応じて球を所定の遊技領域へ発射し、球が遊技領域内の所定の位置に配設された作動口に入賞（又は作動口を通過）することを必要条件として、表示手段において動的表示されている識別情報が所定時間後に確定停止されるものが挙げられる。また、特別遊技状態の発生時には、遊技領域内の所定の位置に配設された可変入賞装置（特定入賞口）が所定の態様で開放されて球を入賞可能とし、その入賞個数に応じた有価価値（景品球のみならず、磁気カードへ書き込まれるデータ等も含む）が付与されるものが挙げられる。
In the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B11, C1 to C13, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F10, G1 to G6, H1 to H10, and I1 to I10, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine K2 characterized by being. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.
遊技機Ａ１からＡ９，Ｂ１からＢ１１，Ｃ１からＣ１３、Ｄ１からＤ７、Ｅ１からＥ７、Ｆ１からＦ１０、Ｇ１からＧ６、Ｈ１からＨ１０及びＩ１からＩ１０のいずれかにおいて、前記遊技機はパチンコ遊技機とスロットマシンとを融合させたものであることを特徴とする遊技機Ｋ３。中でも、融合させた遊技機の基本構成としては、「複数の識別情報からなる識別情報列を動的表示した後に識別情報を確定表示する可変表示手段を備え、始動用操作手段（例えば操作レバー）の操作に起因して識別情報の変動が開始され、停止用操作手段（例えばストップボタン）の操作に起因して、或いは、所定時間経過することにより、識別情報の動的表示が停止され、その停止時の確定識別情報が特定識別情報であることを必要条件として、遊技者に有利な特別遊技状態を発生させる特別遊技状態発生手段とを備え、遊技媒体として球を使用すると共に、前記識別情報の動的表示の開始に際しては所定数の球を必要とし、特別遊技状態の発生に際しては多くの球が払い出されるように構成されている遊技機」となる。
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B11, C1 to C13, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F10, G1 to G6, H1 to H10 and I1 to I10, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine K3 that is a fusion of a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
